对论母的注释显示巴利原文
Mātikāvaṇṇanā
1 首先,在“于耳专注之慧,即闻所成智”这一概说中,“sota”一词有多重不同的含义。正如所说:显示巴利原文
1. Tattha uddese tāva sotāvadhāne paññā sutamaye ñāṇanti ettha sotasaddo anekatthappabhedo. Tathā hesa –
此词见于肉耳、耳识、智中,也见于渴爱等法;
在水流、圣道以及心相续中,该词的用法也可得见。
显示巴利原文 Maṃsaviññāṇañāṇesu, taṇhādīsu ca dissati; Dhārāyaṃ ariyamagge, cittasantatiyampi ca.
譬如,在「耳处、耳界、耳根」等(《分别论》157)表述中,此处的“sota”指肉耳。在「以耳闻声」等(《中部》1.295)表述中,指耳识。在「以天耳界」等(《长部》3.356)表述中,指智耳。在「世间诸流——即我所宣说、开示、阐明、教导、建立、开显、分别、令彰显、令明彻的那些流,便是:渴爱流、邪见流、烦恼流、恶行流、无明流」等(《小部·义释·阿耆多学童问义释》4)表述中,则指渴爱等五种法。在「世尊看见一根大木块被恒河的水流冲走」等(《相应部》4.241)表述中,指水流。在「贤友,这八支圣道即称为流」等表述中,指圣道。在「他遍知人的识流,于此世与他世皆不断绝,既安立于此世,又安立于他世」等(《长部》3.149)表述中,指心相续。
而在此处,应将“sota”理解为肉耳。以这肉耳为因,或以它为工具,而使所闻被注意、被确立、被获得,故称“耳专注”。这耳专注是什么?即是“所闻”。而“所闻”,正如「多闻、持法者、闻法积集」等(《中部》1.339)表述中那样,是指通过耳门随闻。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sotāyatanaṃ sotadhātu sotindriya’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 157) hi ayaṃ sotasaddo maṃsasote dissati. ‘‘Sotena saddaṃ sutvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.295) sotaviññāṇe. ‘‘Dibbāya sotadhātuyā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.356) ñāṇasote. ‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasminti yāni etāni sotāni mayā kittitāni pakittitāni ācikkhitāni desitāni paññapitāni paṭṭhapitāni vivaritāni vibhattāni uttānīkatāni pakāsitāni. Seyyathidaṃ – taṇhāsoto diṭṭhisoto kilesasoto duccaritasoto avijjāsoto’’tiādīsu (cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 4) taṇhādīsu pañcasu dhammesu. ‘‘Addasā kho bhagavā mahantaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ gaṅgāya nadiyā sotena vuyhamāna’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.241) udakadhārāyaṃ. ‘‘Ariyassetaṃ, āvuso, aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa adhivacanaṃ, yadidaṃ soto’’tiādīsu ariyamagge. ‘‘Purisassa ca viññāṇasotaṃ pajānāti ubhayato abbocchinnaṃ idha loke patiṭṭhitañca paraloke patiṭṭhitañcā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.149) cittasantatiyaṃ . Idha panāyaṃ maṃsasote daṭṭhabbo. Tena sotena hetubhūtena, karaṇabhūtena vā avadhīyati avatthāpīyati appīyatīti sotāvadhānaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Sutaṃ. Sutañca nāma ‘‘bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.339) viya sotadvārānusārena viññātaṃ avadhāritaṃ dhammajātaṃ, taṃ idha sotāvadhānanti vuttaṃ. Tasmiṃ sotāvadhānasaṅkhāte sute pavattā paññā sotāvadhāne paññā. Paññāti ca tassa tassa atthassa pākaṭakaraṇasaṅkhātena paññāpanaṭṭhena paññā, tena tena vā aniccādinā pakārena dhamme jānātītipi paññā.
在「闻所成智」中,“suta”一词,有带前缀与不带前缀两种形式。显示巴利原文
Sutamayeñāṇanti ettha sutasaddo tāva saupasaggo anupasaggo ca –
在表示“行走”“闻名”“湿润”“努力”“积聚”等意义上亦有用例。
在“声音”与“耳门所了知”这二义上,也均可见到此词。
显示巴利原文 Gamane vissute tintenuyogopacitepi ca; Sadde ca sotadvārānusārañāte ca dissati.
例如,在“以军旅为事”(senāya pasuto)等句中,义为“前往”;在“闻法而见者”(sutadhammassa passato)等(《优陀那》11;《大品》5)句中,义为“广闻之法”;在“沉溺者对沉溺之人”(avassutā avassutassa purisapuggalassa)等(《波逸提》657)句中,义为“被浸湿者对另一被浸湿者”;在“专注禅那之智者”(ye jhānapasutā dhīrā)等(《法句经》181)句中,义为“投入于”;在“你们所积福德甚广”(tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappakaṃ)等(《小诵》7.12;《饿鬼事》25)句中,义为“积累”;在“所见、所闻、所觉、所识”(diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ)等(《中部》1.241)句中,义为“声音”;在“他多闻,持法,积集所闻”(bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo)等(《中部》1.339)句中,义为“经由耳门所了知之事物”。显示巴利原文
Tathā hissa ‘‘senāya pasuto’’tiādīsu gacchantoti attho. ‘‘Sutadhammassa passato’’tiādīsu (udā. 11; mahāva. 5) vissutadhammassāti attho. ‘‘Avassutā avassutassa purisapuggalassā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 657) tintā tintassāti attho. ‘‘Ye jhānapasutā dhīrā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 181) anuyuttāti attho. ‘‘Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappaka’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 7.12; pe. va. 25) upacitanti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññāta’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.241) saddoti attho. ‘‘Bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.339) sotadvārānusāraviññātadharoti attho. Idha panassa sotadvārānusārena viññātaṃ upadhāritanti attho. Sutamaye ñāṇanti yā esā etaṃ sutaṃ viññātaṃ avadhāritaṃ saddhammaṃ ārabbha ārammaṇaṃ katvā sabbapaṭhamañca aparāparañca pavattā paññā, taṃ ‘‘sutamaye ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ hoti, sutamayaṃ ñāṇanti attho. Sutamayeti ca paccattavacanametaṃ, yathā ‘‘na hevaṃ vattabbe’’ (kathā. 1, 15-18). ‘‘Vanappagumbe yathā phussitagge’’ (khu. pā. 6.13; su. ni. 236). ‘‘Natthi attakāre natthi parakāre natthi purisakāre’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.168) paccattavacanaṃ, evamidhāpi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sutamayaṃ ñāṇanti attho’’ti.
又或者,由听闻所集起的以触等为首的法蕴,称为“闻所成”;在那闻所成的法蕴中生起、与之相应的智,便是“闻所成智”。因为依自性或共相了知诸法,所以称为“智”。应知:这同一智,为以同义词表明意趣,先不加限定地说为“慧”,之后为简别其义,便限定说为“智”。此智以通达自性为特相,或者说,犹如善射手所发的箭无碍中靶,以无碍通达为特相;其作用(味)是照亮所缘,犹如灯盏;其现起是不迷乱,犹如森林中的向导。依“得定的比丘能如实了知”这句话,其足处(近因)是定。关于特相等,应知:自性或共相称为“特相”,作用或成就称为“味”,现起之相或果称为“现起”,近因称为“足处”。显示巴利原文
Atha vā sutena pakato phassādiko dhammapuñjo sutamayo, tasmiṃ sutamaye dhammapuñje pavattaṃ taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ sutamaye ñāṇaṃ. Sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇavasena dhamme jānātīti ñāṇaṃ. Taṃyeva ñāṇaṃ pariyāyavacanena adhippāyapakāsanatthaṃ aniyamena ‘‘paññā’’ti vatvā pacchā adhippetaṃ ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti niyametvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ñāṇañca nāma sabhāvapaṭivedhalakkhaṇaṃ, akkhalitapaṭivedhalakkhaṇaṃ vā kusalissāsakhittausupaṭivedho viya, visayobhāsanarasaṃ padīpo viya, asammohapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ araññagatasudesako viya. ‘‘Samāhito, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1071) vacanato samādhipadaṭṭhānaṃ. Lakkhaṇādīsu hi sabhāvo vā sāmaññaṃ vā lakkhaṇaṃ nāma, kiccaṃ vā sampatti vā raso nāma, upaṭṭhānākāro vā phalaṃ vā paccupaṭṭhānaṃ nāma, āsannakāraṇaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ.
2 2. 听闻之后,于律仪中所生的慧——显示巴利原文
2. Sutvāna saṃvare paññāti –
所称“以此巴帝摩卡律仪而成就、完全成就、到达、完全到达、具足、圆满、成就”(《分别论》511),此即巴帝摩卡律仪。
显示巴利原文 Pātimokkho satī ceva, ñāṇaṃ khanti tatheva ca; Vīriyaṃ pañcime dhammā, saṃvarāti pakāsitā.
“他以此巴帝摩卡律仪而成就、完全成就、到达、完全到达、具足、圆满、成就”(《分别论》511),此即巴帝摩卡律仪。诸如“以眼观色后,不取其相,不取随相;若因不守护眼根而住,贪忧、恶不善法便会随流渗入,故为防护而修其道,守护眼根,于眼根成就律仪”(《长部》1.213等),依此方式所说,即是念律仪。显示巴利原文
‘‘Iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto upāgato samupāgato upapanno sampanno samannāgato’’ti (vibha. 511) āgato pātimokkhasaṃvaro. ‘‘Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutaṃ viharantaṃ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṃ, tassa saṃvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.213; ma. ni. 1.295; saṃ. ni. 4.239; a. ni. 3.16) nayena āgato satisaṃvaro.
“世间的一切流”(阿耆多!世尊说),
而“念”即是它们的防护。
我说防护诸流,乃是以智慧将其关闭。’——(《小部·阿耆多学童所问经》60;《经集》1041)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasmiṃ (ajitāti bhagavā), Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ; Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti . (cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 60; su. ni. 1041) –
此处所指为智律仪。依‘诸比丘,哪些漏应由受用而断除?于此,比丘如理省思后,受用袈裟……’(《中部》1.23;《增支部》6.58)等方式所述,即是资具受用律仪,此亦摄于智律仪之中。所谓‘他能忍耐寒冷、炎热、饥饿、口渴,忍耐蚊虻、风吹、日晒以及爬虫所触;对恶口、恶语之辞句,对已生起的身受苦受——猛利、粗硬、剧烈、不可意、不可乐乃至夺命者,皆具足安忍之素质’(《中部》1.24;《增支部》4.114;6.58),此即所谓的安忍律仪。所谓‘对已生起的欲寻,不忍受,予以断除、驱除、灭尽,令归于无’(《中部》1.26;《增支部》4.114;6.58)等,依此方式所述即是精进律仪。所谓‘于此,圣弟子断除邪命,依正命而活’(《相应部》5.8),此即所谓的活命遍净律仪,此亦摄于精进律仪之中。在这七种律仪里,此处所指的是巴帝摩卡律仪、根律仪、活命遍净律仪以及资具受用律仪这四种,而其中又以巴帝摩卡律仪为根本。再者,这一切律仪,皆因各自防护其所应防护的身恶行等,故以防护义而称‘律仪’。对于那听闻而得的闻所成智中显示巴利原文
Āgato ñāṇasaṃvaro. ‘‘Katame ca, bhikkhave, āsavā paṭisevanā pahātabbā? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvaraṃ paṭisevatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58) nayena āgato paccayapaṭisevanāsaṃvaro, sopi ñāṇasaṃvareneva saṅgahito. ‘‘Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassa jighacchāya pipāsāya ḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarisapasamphassānaṃ duruttānaṃ durāgatānaṃ vacanapathānaṃ uppannānaṃ sārīrikānaṃ vedanānaṃ dukkhānaṃ tibbānaṃ kharānaṃ kaṭukānaṃ asātānaṃ amanāpānaṃ pāṇaharānaṃ adhivāsakajātiko hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.24; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) āgato khantisaṃvaro. ‘‘Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti byantīkaroti anabhāvaṃ gametī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) nayena āgato vīriyasaṃvaro. ‘‘Idha ariyasāvako micchāājīvaṃ pahāya sammāājīvena jīvikaṃ kappetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.8) āgato ājīvapārisuddhisaṃvaro, sopi vīriyasaṃvareneva saṅgahito. Tesu sattasu saṃvaresu pātimokkhasaṃvaraindriyasaṃvaraājīvapārisuddhipaccayapaṭisevanasaṅkhātā cattāro saṃvarā idhādhippetā, tesu ca visesena pātimokkhasaṃvaro. Sabbopi cāyaṃ saṃvaro yathāsakaṃ saṃvaritabbānaṃ kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇato saṃvaroti vuccati. Sutamayañāṇe vuttaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā saṃvarantassa saṃvaraṃ karontassa tasmiṃ saṃvare pavattā taṃsampayuttā paññā ‘‘sutvāna saṃvare paññā’’ti vuttā. Atha vā hetuatthe sutvāti vacanassa sambhavato sutahetunā saṃvare paññātipi attho.
就“戒所成智”而言,此处的“戒”,是以“戒行”之义而得名为戒。什么是戒行呢?即安住,也就是由身业等的善巧而不散乱;或为持守,即作为诸善法的依止与支撑。精通字相者认可此处的这两层含义。另外一些论师则解释说:“因增上受持之义、行持之义、此常行之义、头之义、清凉之义、安稳之义,所以称为戒。”显示巴利原文
Sīlamaye ñāṇanti ettha sīlanti sīlanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Kimidaṃ sīlanaṃ nāma? Samādhānaṃ vā, kāyakammādīnaṃ susīlyavasena avippakiṇṇatāti attho. Upadhāraṇaṃ vā, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ patiṭṭhāvasena ādhārabhāvoti attho. Etadeva hi ettha atthadvayaṃ saddalakkhaṇavidū anujānanti. Aññe pana ‘‘adhisevanaṭṭhena ācāraṭṭhena tassīlaṭṭhena siraṭṭhena sītalaṭṭhena sivaṭṭhena sīla’’nti vaṇṇayanti.
戒行是其特征,纵使被多方面分割;
正如色虽被多方面分割,可见性仍是其特征。
显示巴利原文 Sīlanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ tassa, bhinnassāpi anekadhā; Sanidassanattaṃ rūpassa, yathā bhinnassa nekadhā.
如同色处虽依青、黄等差别而有多类施设,却因不超越可见性,可见性即是其相;同样,戒虽依思等差别而有多类施设,但所谓以身业等的摄持与善法的安立而说的“戒行”,正是它的相,因为即使被思等所施设,也不超越摄持与安立的状态。对于具有如此特相者,显示巴利原文
Yathā hi nīlapītādibhedena anekadhā bhinnassāpi rūpāyatanassa sanidassanattaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ nīlādibhedena bhinnassāpi sanidassanabhāvānatikkamanato, tathā sīlassa cetanādibhedena anekadhā bhinnassāpi yadetaṃ kāyakammādīnaṃ samādhānavasena kusalānañca dhammānaṃ patiṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ sīlanaṃ, tadeva lakkhaṇaṃ cetanādibhedena bhinnassāpi samādhānapatiṭṭhānabhāvānatikkamanato. Evaṃlakkhaṇassa panassa –
“具有破坏恶戒的特性,及无过失的功德;以作用的成就为义,即名为‘味’。”
因此,这称为“戒”的,以作用为味,即具有破坏恶戒的味;以成就为味,即具有无过失的味。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dussīlyaviddhaṃsanatā, anavajjaguṇo tathā; Kiccasampatti atthena, raso nāma pavuccati’’.
“清净是它的现起”——智者们如此描述;“惭与愧,是它的足处”。显示巴利原文
Tasmā idaṃ sīlaṃ nāma kiccaṭṭhena rasena dussīlyaviddhaṃsanarasaṃ, sampattiatthena rasena anavajjarasanti veditabbaṃ.
这个戒,如《如是语》66所说“身清净、语清净、意清净”,以清净为现起。因其清净性,它显现而达于被了知的状况。显示巴利原文
Soceyyapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, tayidaṃ tassa viññuhi;
而智者将惭与愧描述为它的“足处”,意即近因。当惭与愧存在时,戒便生起、安住;当它们不存在时,戒既不会生起,也不会安住。如此,与戒一同生起、与戒相应的智慧,即是戒所成智。显示巴利原文
Ottappañca hirī ceva, padaṭṭhānanti vaṇṇitaṃ. –
又或,此戒以‘身清净、语清净、意清净’而如此现起为清净,以此清净性而现前、被领会。而惭与愧,则被智者称为其近因,意即近缘;因为有惭有愧时,戒便生起且持续,若无惭无愧,则戒不生起。显示巴利原文
Tayidaṃ sīlaṃ ‘‘kāyasoceyyaṃ vacīsoceyyaṃ manosoceyya’’nti (itivu. 66) evaṃ vuttasoceyyapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, sucibhāvena paccupaṭṭhāti gahaṇabhāvaṃ gacchati. Hirottappañca pana tassa viññūhi padaṭṭhānanti vaṇṇitaṃ, āsannakāraṇanti attho. Hirottappe hi sati sīlaṃ uppajjati ceva tiṭṭhati ca, asati neva uppajjati na tiṭṭhatīti evaṃvidhena sīlena sahagataṃ taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ sīlamaye ñāṇaṃ. Atha vā sīlameva pakataṃ sīlamayaṃ, tasmiṃ sīlamaye taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Asaṃvare ādīnavapaccavekkhaṇā ca, saṃvare ānisaṃsapaccavekkhaṇā ca, saṃvarapārisuddhipaccavekkhaṇā ca, saṃvarasaṃkilesavodānapaccavekkhaṇā ca sīlamayañāṇeneva saṅgahitā.
3 三、“防护已,于令等持中之慧”:此谓依戒所成智中所说的戒防护而作防护、行防护之后,立于戒中而令等持者,即是以近行定与安止定而作心一境性者,于彼令等持中所生起的、与彼相应的慧。而“平等、正确地安放与坚立”即称为“令等持”,此为“定”的同义语。显示巴利原文
3.Saṃvaritvā samādahane paññāti sīlamayañāṇe vuttasīlasaṃvarena saṃvaritvā saṃvaraṃ katvā sīle patiṭṭhāya samādahantassa upacārappanāvasena cittekaggataṃ karontassa tasmiṃ samādahane pavattā taṃsampayuttā paññā. Samaṃ sammā ca ādahanaṃ ṭhapananti ca samādahanaṃ, samādhissevetaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ.
“定修所成智”:此处,善心之一境性为定。以何义为定?以等持之义为定。是何等持?即心与心所于同一所缘上平等、正确地安立、坚固安住,以此而说。因此,藉由某法之力,心与心所于同一所缘上平等、正确地无散乱、无离散而安住,此便应知为等持。显示巴利原文
Samādhibhāvanāmaye ñāṇanti ettha kusalacittekaggatā samādhi. Kenaṭṭhena samādhi? Samādhānaṭṭhena samādhi. Kimidaṃ samādhānaṃ nāma? Ekārammaṇe cittacetasikānaṃ samaṃ sammā ca ādhānaṃ, ṭhapananti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā yassa dhammassānubhāvena ekārammaṇe cittacetasikā samaṃ sammā ca avikkhipamānā avippakiṇṇā ca hutvā tiṭṭhanti, idaṃ samādhānanti veditabbaṃ. Tassa kho pana samādhissa –
其相为不散乱,其味为摧破散乱;
现起为不动摇,足处则为乐。
显示巴利原文 Lakkhaṇaṃ tu avikkhepo, vikkhepaviddhaṃsanaṃ raso; Akampanamupaṭṭhānaṃ, padaṭṭhānaṃ sukhaṃ pana.
“修习”即令增长、培育。定本身即是修习,故称“定修”;或对定的修习、增长,称为“定修”。以“定修”一语排除其他修习。如前,依近行与安止而有定修所成智。显示巴利原文
Bhāvīyati vaḍḍhīyatīti bhāvanā, samādhi eva bhāvanā samādhibhāvanā, samādhissa vā bhāvanā vaḍḍhanā samādhibhāvanā. Samādhibhāvanāvacanena aññaṃ bhāvanaṃ paṭikkhipati. Pubbe viya upacārappanāvasena samādhibhāvanāmaye ñāṇaṃ.
4 「缘摄受慧」:此处,「缘」意为依之而果生起。「依」即非离彼、不舍彼之义。「生起」即既生且转之义。再者,饶益义即是缘义。由于彼缘的种种差别,故把握、确定诸缘之慧,名为「缘摄受慧」。显示巴利原文
4.Paccayapariggahepaññāti ettha paṭicca phalametīti paccayo. Paṭiccāti na vinā tena, apaccakkhitvāti attho. Etīti uppajjati ceva pavattati cāti attho. Apica upakārakattho paccayattho, tassa paccayassa bahuvidhattā paccayānaṃ pariggahe vavatthāpane ca paññā paccayapariggahe paññā.
「法住智」:此处,「法」一词,先见于自性、慧、福、施设、犯戒、教理、无有情、变异、功德、缘、缘所生等义中。如此,在「善法、不善法、无记法」等表述中,即见于自性义。显示巴利原文
Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti ettha dhammasaddo tāva sabhāvapaññāpuññapaññattiāpattipariyattinissattatāvikāraguṇapaccayapaccayuppannādīsu dissati. Ayañhi ‘‘kusalā dhammā akusalā dhammā abyākatā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. tikamātikā 1) sabhāve dissati.
在家的具信者,有此四种法;
“谛、法、忍、施,逝后亦无忧。”(《经集》190)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yassete caturo dhammā, saddhassa gharamesino; Saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, sa ve pecca na socatī’’ti. (su. ni. 190) –
诸处之中,以慧而见。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu paññāyaṃ.
法与非正法,二者果报非等同;
“非法导至地狱,法令人达至善趣。”(《长老偈》304)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na hi dhammo adhammo ca, ubho samavipākino; Adhammo nirayaṃ neti, dhammo pāpeti suggati’’nti. (theragā. 304) –
于如是等处,意为福。在“施设法、言辞法、增语法”等处,意为施设。在“波罗夷法、桑喀地谢沙法”等处,意为犯戒。在“于此,比丘知法:契经、应颂、记说”等处,意为教理。在“其时,有诸法。于诸法中随观法而住”等处,意为无有情。在“生法、老法、死法”等处,意为变异。在“六种佛法”等处,意为功德。在“于因中有智,是法无碍解”等处,意为缘。在“此界住立,是法住性、是法决定性”等处,意为缘所生。此处,彼亦应视为缘所生。从义理而言,或由保持自性,或由被缘所保持,或由保持自果,或由保持自身圆满而不堕恶趣,或由保持各自特相,或由被心所确定,随宜而称为“法”。此处,由被自缘所保持故为法,缘所生法依此而住立、生起且转起,故为法住,此是缘法之增语。于彼法住之智为法住智。此即:于定修所成智中,依所说定而心得等持后,为如实知见而着手修行,于已确定名色者,为把握他们名色之缘,以缘摄受之方式而生起法住智。若问:“何故不说‘名色确定智’而说‘法住智’?”以缘摄受即成就缘所生之摄受故。若未摄受缘所生,则不能作缘摄受。故应知:由法住智之把握,其显示巴利原文
Ādīsu puññe. ‘‘Paññattidhammā niruttidhammā adhivacanadhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. dukamātikā 106-108) paññattiyaṃ. ‘‘Pārājikā dhammā saṅghādisesā dhammā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 233-234) āpattiyaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ jānāti suttaṃ geyyaṃ veyyākaraṇa’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) pariyattiyaṃ. ‘‘Tasmiṃ kho pana samaye dhammā honti (dha. sa. 121). Dhammesu dhammānupassī viharatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.373; ma. ni. 1.115) nissattatāyaṃ. ‘‘Jātidhammā jarādhammā maraṇadhammā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 10.107) vikāre. ‘‘Channaṃ buddhadhammāna’’ntiādīsu (mahāni. 50) guṇe. ‘‘Hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 720) paccaye. ‘‘Ṭhitāva sā dhātu dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.20; a. ni. 3.137) paccayuppanne. Svāyamidhāpi paccayuppanne daṭṭhabbo. Atthato pana attano sabhāvaṃ dhārentīti vā, paccayehi dhārīyantīti vā, attano phalaṃ dhārentīti vā, attano paripūrakaṃ apāyesu apatamānaṃ dhārentīti vā, sakasakalakkhaṇe dhārentīti vā, cittena avadhārīyantīti vā yathāyogaṃ dhammāti vuccanti. Idha pana attano paccayehi dhārīyantīti dhammā, paccayasamuppannā dhammā tiṭṭhanti uppajjanti ceva pavattanti ca etāyāti dhammaṭṭhiti, paccayadhammānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ . Tassaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiyaṃ ñāṇaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ. Idañhi samādhibhāvanāmayañāṇe vuttasamādhinā samāhitena cittena yathābhūtañāṇadassanatthāya yogamārabhitvā vavatthāpitanāmarūpassa tesaṃ nāmarūpānaṃ paccayapariggahapariyāyaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Nāmarūpavavatthāne ñāṇa’’nti avatvā eva kasmā ‘‘dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti vuttanti ce? Paccayapariggaheneva paccayasamuppannapariggahassa siddhattā. Paccayasamuppanne hi apariggahite paccayapariggaho na sakkā hoti kātuṃ. Tasmā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇagahaṇeneva tassa hetubhūtaṃ pubbe siddhaṃ nāmarūpavavatthānañāṇaṃ vuttameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Kasmā dutiyatatiyañāṇaṃ viya ‘‘samādahitvā paccayapariggahe paññā’’ti na vuttanti ce? Samathavipassanānaṃ yuganaddhattā.
“他如这些持之后,便如是修观;修观之时,又如这些持。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Samādahitvā yathā ce vipassati, vipassamāno tathā ce samādahe; Vipassanā ca samatho tadā ahu, samānabhāgā yuganaddhā vattare’’ti. –
故应知:为阐明“不舍定,令定与智双运,直至圣道,应如是精勤”,故说“于缘摄受有慧,是法住智”。显示巴利原文
Hi vuttaṃ. Tasmā samādhiṃ avissajjetvā samādhiñca ñāṇañca yuganaddhaṃ katvā yāva ariyamaggo, tāva ussukkāpetabbanti ñāpanatthaṃ ‘‘paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’micceva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
5 “对过去、未来、现在的诸法予以简略而确定者,有慧”:此处,已达到自己之自性,或已到达生起等之刹那,已过去、已超越者,为过去;此二者皆未到来、未达到者,为未来;依于彼彼缘故,以生起等为上而显现、已行、转起者,为现在。在长时现在、相续现在、刹那现在中,此处意指相续现在。对于这些过去、未来、现在的五蕴法,就一一蕴相,予以摄略,集为一类,而确定、决断、安立者,有慧。显示巴利原文
5. Atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ saṅkhipitvā vavatthāne paññāti ettha attano sabhāvaṃ, uppādādikkhaṇaṃ vā patvā ati itā atikkantāti atītā, tadubhayampi na āgatā na sampattāti anāgatā, taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca uppādādiuddhaṃ pannā gatā pavattāti paccuppannā. Addhā santatikhaṇapaccuppannesu santatipaccuppannaṃ idhādhippetaṃ. Tesaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ pañcakkhandhadhammānaṃ ekekakkhandhalakkhaṇe saṅkhipitvā kalāpavasena rāsiṃ katvā vavatthāne nicchayane sanniṭṭhāpane paññā.
「等观智」:即正确地遍察、审视、观察的智慧,意指「聚等观智」。因为在名色确定智之后,安住于把握名色之缘的法住智的人,即按所说方式——「凡任何色,过去、未来、现在,内、外,粗、细,劣、胜,远、近,一切色,皆确定其为无常,此为一等观;确定其为苦,此为一等观;确定其为无我,此为一等观」等——于此前所确定的每一蕴上安立三相,观照无常、苦、无我,这样的人便生起聚等观智。显示巴利原文
Sammasaneñāṇanti sammā āmasane anumajjane pekkhaṇe ñāṇaṃ, kalāpasammasanañāṇanti attho. Idañhi nāmarūpavavatthānañāṇānantaraṃ nāmarūpapaccayapariggahe dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇe ṭhitassa ‘‘yaṃkiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṃ vā sukhumaṃ vā hīnaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā yaṃ dūre santike vā, sabbaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ aniccato vavatthapeti, ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, dukkhato vavatthapeti, ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, anattato vavatthapeti, ekaṃ sammasana’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.48) nayena vuttasammasanavasena pubbe vavatthāpite ekekasmiṃ khandhe tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassantassa kalāpasammasanañāṇaṃ uppajjati.
6 「于现在诸法,随观变异者有慧」:这是依相续而说为现在,对于内的五蕴诸法,见到其变异、见到其坏灭的慧。因为「这些法生起后便会坏灭」,即使把握了生起,心也只是住于坏灭,因此,「生」虽未明说,也应视为已被说出。或者,由于见到现在的诸法,见生起便已成就,所以「生」已被说出。如果没有生起,法的「已生」便不能成立,因此虽未直接说「于现在诸法,随观生起与变异者有慧」,也应知已经说了。又因为「生灭观智」是决定之说,所以见生起必定成就。在完成了前面所说的等观智之后,把握其观中已显露的生与灭,为了对诸行划定界限而开始修习生灭观的人,便生起生灭观智。由于此智随观于生与灭,故称为「生灭观」。显示巴利原文
6.Paccuppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ vipariṇāmānupassane paññāti santativasena paccuppannānaṃ ajjhattaṃ pañcakkhandhadhammānaṃ vipariṇāmadassane bhaṅgadassane paññā. Yasmā ‘‘ime dhammā uppajjitvā bhijjantī’’ti udayaṃ gahetvāpi bhedeyeva cittaṃ ṭhapeti, tasmā avuttopi udayo vuttoyeva hotīti veditabbo. Paccuppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ dassanena vā udayadassanassa siddhattā udayo vuttoyeva hoti. Na hi udayaṃ vinā dhammānaṃ uppannattaṃ sijjhati, tasmā ‘‘paccuppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādavipariṇāmānupassane paññā’’ti avuttepi vuttameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Udayabbayānupassane ñāṇa’’nti niyamitattā ca udayadassanaṃ siddhameva hotīti anantaraṃ vuttassa sammasanañāṇassa pāraṃ gantvā taṃsammasaneyeva pākaṭībhūte udayabbaye pariggaṇhitvā saṅkhārānaṃ paricchedakaraṇatthaṃ udayabbayānupassanaṃ ārabhantassa uppajjati udayabbayānupassanāñāṇaṃ. Tañhi udayabbaye anupassanato udayabbayānupassanāti vuccati.
7 「逆观所缘」:即对于色蕴等所缘,由坏灭而逆观、了知并照见。在坏灭随观中具有智慧,这种智慧就称为「观智」——也就是说,对于那个所缘,由坏灭逆观之后所生起的智,在随观坏灭中的智慧,被称为「观智」。而所谓「观」,即是种种观察。也有读作「所缘逆观」的。其意为:对所缘的逆观、了知与照见——依照上述道理,此语成立:「于坏灭随观中具有智慧,即是观智」。然而,正因为只有在坏灭随观时,观才达到顶峰,所以特别只将这一阶段称为「观智」。由于安住于生灭随观的人,会生起道非道智见,所以当其生灭随观成就时,那种智见其实也已成就;因此,此处不特别说道非道智,而只单独说明在坏灭随观中达到观之顶峰的智慧,应如此理解。在生灭随观中已透彻见到诸行生灭的人,当所缘的诸行极其迅速地现前,智慧变得锋利而运转时,他会舍弃对「生」的观察,将念住纯粹安立于「坏灭」。当他如此观察——「诸行是这样生起的,又是这样坏灭的」——在此阶段,便生起了坏灭随观智。显示巴利原文
7.Ārammaṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhāti rūpakkhandhādiārammaṇaṃ bhaṅgato paṭisaṅkhāya jānitvā passitvā. Bhaṅgānupassane paññā vipassane ñāṇanti tassa ārammaṇaṃ bhaṅgato paṭisaṅkhāya uppannassa ñāṇassa bhaṅgaṃ anupassane yā paññā, taṃ ‘‘vipassane ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ hoti. Vipassanāti ca vividhā passanā vipassanā. Ārammaṇapaṭisaṅkhātipi pāṭho. Tassattho – ārammaṇassa paṭisaṅkhā jānanā passanāti vuttanayeneva ārammaṇapaṭisaṅkhā ‘‘bhaṅgānupassane paññā vipassane ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmā pana bhaṅgānupassanāya eva vipassanā sikhaṃ pāpuṇāti, tasmā visesetvā idameva ‘‘vipassane ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Yasmā udayabbayānupassanāya ṭhitassa maggāmaggañāṇadassanaṃ uppajjati, tasmā tassā siddhāya taṃ siddhameva hotīti taṃ avatvāva bhaṅgānupassanāya eva vipassanāsikhaṃ ñāṇaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Udayabbayānupassanāya suparidiṭṭhaudayabbayassa suparicchinnesu saṅkhāresu lahuṃ lahuṃ upaṭṭhahantesu ñāṇe tikkhe vahante udayaṃ pahāya bhaṅge eva sati santiṭṭhati, tassa ‘‘evaṃ uppajjitvā evaṃ nāma saṅkhārā bhijjantī’’ti passato etasmiṃ ṭhāne bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ uppajjati.
8 「怖畏现起上的智慧」:指对于生起、转起、相、造作和结生,从怖畏的角度现起时,由于它们以逼迫为相,而总地被执为有怖畏,在此中所起的智慧,即是其义。因为它以怖畏的方式现前,故名为「怖畏现起」(所缘);而依止此怖畏现起所生的智慧,或智慧本身即以怖畏的方式现起,因此这智慧被称为「怖畏现起智」。显示巴利原文
8.Bhayatupaṭṭhāne paññāti uppādapavattanimittaāyūhanāpaṭisandhīnaṃ bhayato upaṭṭhāne pīḷāyogato sappaṭibhayavasena gahaṇūpagamane paññāti attho. Bhayato upaṭṭhātīti bhayatupaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ , tasmiṃ bhayatupaṭṭhāne. Atha vā bhayato upatiṭṭhatīti bhayatupaṭṭhānaṃ, paññā, taṃ ‘‘bhayatupaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ hoti.
「过患智」:这是一个依处格的表述。如《无碍解道》(Paṭi. Ma. 1.227)中说:「怖畏现起的智慧、过患的智,以及厌离,这三法实质同一,唯名称有别。」虽然看似一体,但依修行阶段的不同,如同欲解脱等一样,实际上分为三种。因此,当怖畏现起随观与过患随观圆满时,厌离随观便随之圆满;所以,即使没有单独说明厌离随观,也应视为已经说了。显示巴利原文
Ādīnave ñāṇanti bhummavacanameva. ‘‘Yā ca bhayatupaṭṭhāne paññā, yañca ādīnave ñāṇaṃ, yā ca nibbidā, ime dhammā ekaṭṭhā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.227) vuttattā ekamiva vuccamānampi avatthābhedena muñcitukamyatādi viya tividhameva hoti. Tasmā bhayatupaṭṭhānaādīnavānupassanāsu siddhāsu nibbidānupassanā siddhā hotīti katvā avuttāpi vuttāva hotīti veditabbā.
以一切诸行的坏灭为所缘,反复修习、培养、广修坏灭随观之后,对于一个希望安稳而住却心怀怖畏的人而言,在三有、四种生、五趣、七识住、九有情居中所有各类的诸行,都会显现为巨大的恐怖,如同遭遇狮子、老虎、豹、熊、鬣狗、夜叉、罗刹、凶猛的公牛、凶恶的狗、发情狂乱的大象、剧毒的蝮蛇、雷电、尸林、战场、燃烧的炭火坑等。当他如此观察——「过去的诸行已灭,现在的诸行正灭,未来的诸行亦必将如此灭去」——在这一阶段,便生起了怖畏现起智。反复修习、培养、广修这种怖畏现起智后,他发现在一切有、生、趣、识住、有情居中,都找不到任何救护、任何庇护、任何归处、任何依怙。对于这一切有、生、趣、识住、有情居所含摄的诸行,他不会对其中任何一个行生起期望或执取。三有如同充满无焰火炭的炭坑,四大种如同剧毒的毒蛇,五蕴如同举着刀的刽子手,六内处如同空无人烟的村落,六外处如同洗劫村落的盗贼,七识住与九有情居如同被十一种火猛烈燃烧、烧得炽烈通明;一切行如同疮痈、如同疾病、显示巴利原文
Sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ bhaṅgārammaṇaṃ bhaṅgānupassanaṃ āsevantassa bhāventassa bahulīkarontassa tibhavacatuyonipañcagatisattaviññāṇaṭṭhitinavasattāvāsesu pabhedakā saṅkhārā sukhena jīvitukāmassa bhīrukapurisassa sīhabyagghadīpiacchataracchayakkharakkhasacaṇḍagoṇacaṇḍakukkurapabhinna- madacaṇḍahatthighoraāsivisaasanivicakkasusānaraṇabhūmijalitaaṅgārakāsuādayo viya mahābhayaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, tassa ‘‘atītā saṅkhārā niruddhā, paccuppannā nirujjhanti, anāgatāpi evameva nirujjhissantī’’ti passato etasmiṃ ṭhāne bhayatupaṭṭhānaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Tassa taṃ bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ āsevantassa bhāventassa bahulīkarontassa sabbabhavayonigatiṭhitisattāvāsesu neva tāṇaṃ na leṇaṃ na gati na paṭisaraṇaṃ paññāyati, sabbabhavayonigatiṭhitinivāsagatesu saṅkhāresu ekasaṅkhārepi patthanā vā parāmāso vā na hoti, tayo bhavā vītaccitaṅgārapuṇṇā aṅgārakāsuyo viya, cattāro mahābhūtā ghoravisā āsivisā viya, pañcakkhandhā ukkhittāsikā vadhakā viya, cha ajjhattikāyatanāni suññagāmo viya, cha bāhirāyatanāni gāmaghātakacorā viya, sattaviññāṇaṭṭhitiyo nava ca sattāvāsā ekādasahi aggīhi ādittā sampajjalitā sajotibhūtā viya ca, sabbe saṅkhārā gaṇḍabhūtā rogabhūtā sallabhūtā aghabhūtā ābādhabhūtā viya ca nirassādā nirasā mahāādīnavarāsibhūtā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, sukhena jīvitukāmassa bhīrukapurisassa ramaṇīyākārasaṇṭhitampi savāḷakamiva vanagahanaṃ, sasaddūlā viya guhā, sagāharakkhasaṃ viya udakaṃ, samussitakhaggā viya paccatthikā, savisaṃ viya bhojanaṃ, sacoro viya maggo, ādittamiva agāraṃ, uyyuttasenā viya raṇabhūmi. Yathā hi so puriso etāni savāḷakavanagahanādīni āgamma bhīto saṃviggo lomahaṭṭhajāto samantato ādīnavameva passati, evameva so yogāvacaro bhaṅgānupassanāvasena sabbasaṅkhāresu bhayato upaṭṭhitesu samantato nirasaṃ nirassādaṃ ādīnavameva passati. Tassevaṃ passato ādīnavānupassanāñāṇaṃ uppajjati.
他如是见到一切行唯是过患之后,对于三有、四生、五趣、七识住、九有情居中所有分类的诸行,便感到厌倦、不适意,不再乐着。如同那只喜好栖息于心峰山脚的黄金王天鹅,对不净旃陀罗村村口的水洼毫无喜爱,只乐在七大湖中;同样,这位瑜伽行者中的王天鹅,对过患全为照见的诸行领域并无喜爱,只因修习之乐与修习之喜,唯安住于七种随观。又如身为百兽之王的狮子,即使被放进金笼,也不会快乐,只喜漫步于幅员三千由旬的雪山中;同样,这位瑜伽行者中的狮子,对三善趣的有情状态亦无贪著,唯喜安住于三种随观。又如那头通体纯白、七肢具足、拥有神通、能飞行虚空、名为六牙的龙王象,对城邑中心毫无喜爱,只乐雪山中的六牙莲池;同样,这位瑜伽行者中的殊胜象王,对一切诸行领域毫无喜爱,唯乐以‘无生才是安稳’等方式所开示的寂静境界,内心倾向、俯入、朝向于它。到此阶段,他的厌离随观智便已生起。显示巴利原文
So evaṃ sabbasaṅkhāre ādīnavato sampassanto sabbabhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsagate sabhedake saṅkhāragate nibbindati ukkaṇṭhati nābhiramati. Seyyathāpi nāma cittakūṭapabbatapādābhirato suvaṇṇarājahaṃso asucimhi caṇḍālagāmadvāraāvāṭe nābhiramati, sattasu mahāsaresuyeva abhiramati, evameva ayaṃ yogīrājahaṃso suparidiṭṭhādīnave sabhedake saṅkhāragate nābhiramati, bhāvanārāmatāya pana bhāvanāratiyā samannāgatattā sattasu anupassanāsuyeva abhiramati. Yathā ca suvaṇṇapañjarepi pakkhitto sīho migarājā nābhiramati, tiyojanasahassavitthate pana himavanteyeva ramati, evamayampi yogīsīho tividhe sugatibhavepi nābhiramati, tīsu anupassanāsuyeva ramati. Yathā ca sabbaseto sattappatiṭṭho iddhimā vehāsaṅgamo chaddanto nāgarājā nagaramajjhe nābhiramati, himavati chaddantarahadeyeva ramati, evamayaṃ yogīvaravāraṇo sabbasmimpi saṅkhāragate nābhiramati, ‘‘anuppādo khema’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.53) nayena niddiṭṭhe santipadeyeva ramati, tanninnatappoṇatappabbhāramānaso hoti. Ettāvatā tassa nibbidānupassanāñāṇaṃ uppannaṃ hotīti.
9 9.「欲解脱、审察、住立的慧,是于诸行舍中的智」:「欲解脱」——想要解脱、想要舍离,即渴望、希求,故称「欲解脱者」,欲解脱者的状态即是「欲解脱性」。「审察」——即审细观照,故称「审察」;审察的行为亦名「审察」。「住立」——即安住、中舍,故称「住立」;住立的行为亦名「住立」。此欲解脱性、此审察及此住立,合称为「欲解脱、审察、住立」。如是,于前分阶段,由厌离智而厌离者,欲舍离诸行之生起等,此为「欲解脱」。于中间,为成就解脱之方便而作审察,此为「审察」。于解脱之后,末尾阶段的中舍,此为「住立」。如是依阶段差别而有三种慧,即于诸行舍上的智;然而,为了随应这些欲解脱、审察、住立的阶段差别而归入「行舍」,虽依文句用了「慧」的复数与「诸行舍中」的复数,但应知,虽依阶段差别而区分,因其体同一,故用单数的「智」。如经中说:「此欲解脱性、此审察随观、此行舍,这些诸法同一义,唯文辞有异。」(《无碍解道》1.227)又有人言:「『诸行舍中』用复数,是因依止、观而有多种行舍。」而应知「诸行显示巴利原文
9.Muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇanti muñcituṃ cajituṃ kāmeti icchatīti muñcitukāmo, muñcitukāmassa bhāvo muñcitukamyatā. Paṭisaṅkhāti upaparikkhatīti paṭisaṅkhā, paṭisaṅkhānaṃ vā paṭisaṅkhā. Santiṭṭhati ajjhupekkhatīti santiṭṭhanā, santiṭṭhanaṃ vā santiṭṭhanā. Muñcitukamyatā ca sā paṭisaṅkhā ca santiṭṭhanā cāti muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanā. Iti pubbabhāge nibbidāñāṇena nibbinnassa uppādādīni pariccajitukāmatā muñcitukamyatā. Muñcanassa upāyakaraṇatthaṃ majjhe paṭisaṅkhānaṃ paṭisaṅkhā. Muñcitvā avasāne ajjhupekkhanaṃ santiṭṭhanā. Evaṃ avatthābhedena tippakārā paññā saṅkhārānaṃ ajjhupekkhanāsu ñāṇaṃ, muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanāsaṅkhātānaṃ avatthābhedena bhinnānaṃ tissannampi paññānaṃ saṅkhārupekkhataṃ icchantena pana ‘‘paññā’’ti ca ‘‘saṅkhārupekkhāsū’’ti ca bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ, avatthābhedena bhinnassāpi ekattā ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti ekavacanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Vuttañca – ‘‘yā ca muñcitukamyatā yā ca paṭisaṅkhānupassanā yā ca saṅkhārupekkhā, ime dhammā ekaṭṭhā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.227). Keci pana ‘‘saṅkhārupekkhāsūti bahuvacanaṃ samathavipassanāvasena saṅkhārupekkhānaṃ bahuttā’’tipi vadanti. Saṅkhārupekkhāsūti ca kiriyāpekkhanti veditabbaṃ. Avatthābhedena pana tena nibbidāñāṇena nibbindantassa ukkaṇṭhantassa sabbabhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsagatesu sabhedakesu saṅkhāresu cittaṃ na sajjati na laggati na bajjhati, sabbasaṅkhāragataṃ muñcitukāmaṃ chaḍḍetukāmaṃ hoti.
或者,又如:落入网中的鱼、入蛇口的青蛙、被关入笼中的野鸡、陷入坚固罗网的鹿、在捕蛇者手中的蛇、陷入大沼泽的象、入金翅鸟口的龙王、入罗睺口的月亮、被敌人包围的人等,皆唯欲从他们中解脱、出离;如是,彼瑜伽行者之心,于一切诸行,唯欲解脱、唯欲出离。若如此说,则「欲解脱者的欲解脱性」之文便得合理。然而,若如此,则于「于生起欲解脱」等文,应改作「从生起欲解脱」等,故前义更为善妙。于是,彼于一切诸行无有爱著、唯欲解脱者,生起欲解脱智。他如是于一切有、生、趣、识住、有情居中,对一切分类的诸行欲解脱,为成就解脱之方便,复以审察随观智,将三法印安立于彼诸行而作观。如是观时,他由无常门而生起取相的审察智,由苦门而生起取转起的审察智,由无我门而生起取相与转起的审察智。他以审察随观智见「一切行皆空」,安立三法印而把握诸行,舍弃怖畏与欢喜,犹如见妻子过失而舍妻的人,于彼妻的诸行,成为漠然、中立,不执为「我」或「我所」。他如此知、如此见时,心于三有中退缩、回缩、回转,而不伸展。譬如,滴于稍倾莲叶上的水显示巴利原文
Atha vā yathā jālabbhantaragato maccho, sappamukhagato maṇḍūko, pañjarapakkhitto vanakukkuṭo, daḷhapāsavasaṃgato migo, ahituṇḍikahatthagato sappo, mahāpaṅkapakkhando kuñjaro, supaṇṇamukhagato nāgarājā, rāhumukhapaviṭṭho cando, sapattaparikkhitto purisotievamādayo tato tato muccitukāmā nissaritukāmāva honti, evaṃ tassa yogino cittaṃ sabbasmā saṅkhāragatā muccitukāmaṃ nissaritukāmaṃ hoti. Evañhi vuccamāne ‘‘muccitukāmassa muccitukamyatā’’ti pāṭho yujjati. Evañca sati ‘‘uppādaṃ muñcitukamyatā’’tiādīsu ‘‘uppādā muccitukamyatā’’tiādi vattabbaṃ hoti, tasmā purimo eva attho sundarataro. Athassa sabbasaṅkhāresu vigatālayassa sabbasaṅkhāragataṃ muñcitukāmassa muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṃ uppajjati. So evaṃ sabbabhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsagate sabhedake saṅkhāre muñcitukāmo muñcanassa upāyasampādanatthaṃ puna te eva saṅkhāre paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassati. Evañhi vipassato cassa aniccavasena nimittaṃ paṭisaṅkhāñāṇaṃ uppajjati, dukkhavasena pavattaṃ paṭisaṅkhāñāṇaṃ uppajjati, anattavasena nimittañca pavattañca paṭisaṅkhāñāṇaṃ uppajjati. So paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇena ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā suññā’’ti disvā tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā saṅkhāre pariggaṇhanto bhayañca nandiñca vippahāya bhariyāya dosaṃ disvā vissaṭṭhabhariyo viya puriso tassā bhariyāya saṅkhāresu udāsīno hoti majjhatto, ‘‘aha’’nti vā ‘‘mama’’nti vā na gaṇhāti. Tassa evaṃ jānato evaṃ passato tīsu bhavesu cittaṃ patilīyati paṭikuṭati paṭivattati na sampasāriyati. Seyyathāpi nāma padumapalāse īsakaṃ poṇe udakaphusitāni patilīyanti paṭikuṭanti paṭivattanti na sampasāriyanti. Seyyathāpi vā pana kukkuṭapattaṃ vā nhārudaddulaṃ vā aggimhi pakkhittaṃ patilīyati paṭikuṭati paṭivattati na sampasāriyati, evaṃ tassa tīsu bhavesu cittaṃ patilīyati paṭikuṭati paṭivattati na sampasāriyati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Evamassa saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ uppannaṃ hoti. Iminā saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇena saddhiṃ upari gotrabhuñāṇassa sādhakaṃ anulomañāṇaṃ pubbāparañāṇehi avuttampi vuttameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhi bhagavatā –
诸比丘,若有比丘观见任何行法为常,而能具足随顺忍,无有是处;不具足随顺忍,而能入正性决定,无有是处;不入正性决定,而能现证入流果、或一来果、或不还果、或阿罗汉果,无有是处。显示巴利原文
‘‘So vata, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato samanupassanto anulomikāya khantiyā samannāgato bhavissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati, anulomikāya khantiyā asamannāgato sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati, sammattaniyāmaṃ anokkamamāno sotāpattiphalaṃ vā sakadāgāmiphalaṃ vā anāgāmiphalaṃ vā arahattaphalaṃ vā sacchikarissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 6.98; paṭi. ma. 3.36).
再者,法将舍利弗尊者也曾说:显示巴利原文
Vuttañca dhammasenāpatinā –
“以几何行相而得随顺忍?以几何行相而入正性决定?以四十行相而得随顺忍,以四十行相而入正性决定。”(《无碍解道》3.37)显示巴利原文
‘‘Katihākārehi anulomikaṃ khantiṃ paṭilabhati? Katihākārehi sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamati? Cattālīsāya ākārehi anulomikaṃ khantiṃ paṭilabhati, cattālīsāya ākārehi sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamatī’’tiādi (paṭi. ma. 3.37).
对此,世尊在《发趣论》中也曾说:显示巴利原文
Paṭṭhāne cetaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavatā –
“随顺智以无间缘而为种姓智的缘。随顺智以无间缘而为清净智的缘。”(《发趣论》1.1.417)显示巴利原文
‘‘Anulomaṃ gotrabhussa anantarapaccayena paccayo. Anulomaṃ vodānassa anantarapaccayena paccayo’’tiādi (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417).
当他数数修习、培育、多作此行舍智时,他的胜解信变得极为有力,精进善加策励,念善安立,心善等持,行舍智也更为锐利地转起。他知道:‘现在圣道即将生起。’行舍智便以‘无常’、或‘苦’、或‘无我’观察诸行后,落入有分。有分之后,依着行舍智同样的方式,意门转向心生起,同样以诸行为所缘,视为‘无常’、或‘苦’、或‘无我’。之后,仍以诸行为所缘,又有两、三或四个速行心生起。与这些速行心相应的智,就是‘随顺智’。它既随顺着之前八种观智的如实作用,也随顺着此后应当证得的三十七菩提分法。正如一位如法合度的国王坐在审判席上,听取八位法官大臣的判决后,舍离偏私,保持中正,认可说‘理当如此’,从而既随顺了大臣们的判决,也随顺了古老的正法。在此比喻中,国王如同随顺智,八位法官大臣如同八种观智,古老的正法如同三十七菩提分法。正如国王以‘理当如此’的认可而随顺大臣的判决和正法,同样,当此智以无常等观察诸行而生起时,它既随顺着先前八种观智的如实作用,也随顺着此后应当证得的三十七菩提分法。显示巴利原文
Tassa hi taṃ saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ āsevantassa bhāventassa bahulīkarontassa adhimokkhasaddhā balavatarā hoti, vīriyaṃ supaggahitaṃ, sati sūpaṭṭhitā, cittaṃ susamāhitaṃ, saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ tikkhataraṃ pavattati. Tassa idāni maggo uppajjissatīti saṅkhārupekkhāya saṅkhāre ‘‘aniccā’’ti vā ‘‘dukkhā’’ti vā ‘‘anattā’’ti vā sammasitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Bhavaṅgānantaraṃ saṅkhārupekkhāya katanayeneva saṅkhāre ‘‘aniccā’’ti vā ‘‘dukkhā’’ti vā ‘‘anattā’’ti vā ārammaṇaṃ kurumānaṃ uppajjati manodvārāvajjanaṃ. Tadanantaraṃ tatheva saṅkhāre ārammaṇaṃ katvā dve tīṇi cattāri vā javanacittāni uppajjanti. Taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ anulomañāṇaṃ. Tañhi purimānañca aṭṭhannaṃ vipassanāñāṇānaṃ tathakiccatāya anulometi, upari ca pattabbānaṃ sattatiṃsāya bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ anulometi. Yathā hi dhammiko rājā vinicchayaṭṭhāne nisinno aṭṭhannaṃ vohārikamahāmattānaṃ vinicchayaṃ sutvā agatigamanaṃ pahāya majjhatto hutvā ‘‘evaṃ hotū’’ti anumodamāno tesañca vinicchayassa anulometi, porāṇassa ca rājadhammassa. Tattha rājā viya anulomañāṇaṃ, aṭṭha vohārikamahāmattā viya aṭṭha vipassanāñāṇāni, porāṇarājadhammo viya sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā, yathā rājā ‘‘evaṃ hotū’’ti anumodamāno vohārikānañca vinicchayassa rājadhammassa ca anulometi, evamidaṃ aniccādivasena saṅkhāre ārabbha uppajjamānānaṃ aṭṭhannañca vipassanāñāṇānaṃ tathakiccatāya anulometi, upari ca pattabbānaṃ sattatiṃsāya bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ. Tasmā anulomañāṇanti vuccati.
10 在“于外出起、离转之慧是种姓智”一句中,“外”指行相。因为此(行相)是依于内在心相续中诸不善蕴而说为“外”的。因此,从外——亦即从行相——之中出起,意为离开它之后向上安住,这称为“出起”;背离、转向、不再面向,则称为“离转”。既是出起又为离转,故称“出起离转”。所以这样说:显示巴利原文
10.Bahiddhāvuṭṭhānavivaṭṭane paññā gotrabhuñāṇanti ettha bahiddhāti saṅkhāranimittaṃ. Tañhi ajjhattacittasantāne akusalakkhandhe upādāya bahiddhāti vuttaṃ. Tasmā bahiddhā saṅkhāranimittamhā vuṭṭhāti vigataṃ hutvā uddhaṃ tiṭṭhatīti vuṭṭhānaṃ, vivaṭṭati parāvaṭṭati parammukhaṃ hotīti vivaṭṭanaṃ, vuṭṭhānañca taṃ vivaṭṭanañcāti vuṭṭhānavivaṭṭanaṃ. Tenevāha –
“种姓智并非以断除集的方式从转起中出起,而以涅槃为所缘从相中出起,因此是单方面的出起。”(《清净道论》2.827)显示巴利原文
‘‘Gotrabhuñāṇaṃ samudayassa asamucchindanato pavattā na vuṭṭhāti, nibbānārammaṇato pana nimittā vuṭṭhātīti ekato vuṭṭhānaṃ hotī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.827).
因其能制伏凡夫种姓、增长圣种姓,故称“种姓”。此智于随顺智之末生起——心如同荷叶上的水珠一般从一切行中退缩,在随顺智修习终止时,它以无相涅槃为所缘,超越凡夫种姓、凡夫之名、凡夫地,趣入圣种姓、圣者之名、圣地。以涅槃为所缘,成为第一转、第一作意、第一现起,并以无间、等无间、修习、亲依止、非有、离去此六种行相,成就道缘,它既是已达到顶点的观之顶点,立于不退转之处,如是生起。显示巴利原文
Puthujjanagottābhibhavanato ariyagottabhāvanato gotrabhu. Idañhi anulomañāṇehi padumapalāsato udakamiva sabbasaṅkhārato patilīyamānacittassa anulomañāṇassa āsevanante animittaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ kurumānaṃ puthujjanagottaṃ puthujjanasaṅkhaṃ puthujjanabhūmiṃ atikkamamānaṃ ariyagottaṃ ariyasaṅkhaṃ ariyabhūmiṃ okkamamānaṃ nibbānārammaṇe paṭhamāvattanapaṭhamābhogapaṭhamasamannāhārabhūtaṃ maggassa anantarasamanantarāsevanaupanissayanatthivigatavasena chahi ākārehi paccayabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ sikhāppattaṃ vipassanāya muddhabhūtaṃ apunarāvattakaṃ uppajjati.
11 在“于两方面出起离转的慧是道中之智”这句中,“于两方面”即是“从两方面”或“从两个角度”的意思。此慧既能断除烦恼,又能从为彼烦恼所随逐的诸蕴中出离;同时,它以涅槃为所缘,从一切外在的诸行相中出离、反转,因此称为“于两方面出起离转的慧”。故而说道:显示巴利原文
11.Dubhato vuṭṭhānavivaṭṭane paññā magge ñāṇanti ettha dubhatoti ubhato, dvayatoti vā vuttaṃ hoti. Kilesānaṃ samucchindanato kilesehi ca tadanuvattakakkhandhehi ca nibbānārammaṇakaraṇato bahiddhā sabbasaṅkhāranimittehi ca vuṭṭhāti vivaṭṭatīti dubhato vuṭṭhānavivaṭṭane paññā. Tenevāha –
「四种道智皆以无相为所缘,故从诸相中出离;又因断除了集,故从转起中出离,如此便成为从两方面出离。」(《清净道论》2.827)显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattāripi maggañāṇāni animittārammaṇattā nimittato vuṭṭhahanti, samudayassa samucchindanato pavattā vuṭṭhahantīti dubhato vuṭṭhānāni hontī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.827).
“道中之智”:这里的“道”,寻求、观察涅槃;或因希求涅槃者所寻求、追寻;或因杀灭烦恼而运行、转起,故名为道。此道上之慧即是道智。因用了“生起”一词,故以单数表述。此道智紧接于种姓智之后,以涅槃为所缘,毫无残余地断除自所应断的烦恼,枯竭无始轮回的苦海,关闭一切恶趣之门,令七圣财现前,舍断八支邪道,止息一切怨仇怖畏,引导成就为诸正自觉者的亲子,并获得其余数百种功德。这样的道智便生起了。显示巴利原文
Magge ñāṇanti nibbānaṃ maggati pekkhati, nibbānatthikehi vā maggīyati anvesīyati, kilese vā mārento gacchati pavattatīti maggo, tasmiṃ magge ñāṇaṃ. Jātiggahaṇena ekavacanaṃ kataṃ. Tañhi gotrabhuñāṇassa anantaraṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ kurumānaṃ sayaṃvajjhe kilese niravasesaṃ samucchindamānaṃ anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭadukkhasamuddaṃ sosayamānaṃ sabbāpāyadvārāni pidahamānaṃ sattaariyadhanasammukhībhāvaṃ kurumānaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ micchāmaggaṃ pajahamānaṃ sabbaverabhayāni vūpasamayamānaṃ sammāsambuddhassa orasaputtabhāvamupanayamānaṃ aññāni ca anekāni ānisaṃsasatāni paṭilābhayamānaṃ maggañāṇaṃ uppajjati.
想站稳的人,越过沟渠到达对岸后;
疾速而至,抓住拴在此岸树上的绳索;
抓着绳或棍,纵身一跃,身体倾向彼岸;
然而,到达彼岸之后,他便放开那摇摆之物,稳稳伫立于彼岸。
同样地,瑜伽行者在此岸——这个由有身见所成之处;
已见怖畏者,期望在安稳的不死彼岸安住。
从观生灭开始,以迅猛之力抓住了绳索;
正确地执取了那称为‘色’的杖,或其他蕴所称的杖。
诚然,依前述方式,以转向心执取之后,
以随顺智超越之后,心倾向寂灭的涅槃,那时便近坐于涅槃所缘。
然而,种姓智释放了彼,却因未得修习而尚存动摇;
落于有为之此岸后,便以道智稳固地安立于涅槃。
「渴望见月」:犹如有人渴望得见明月,而明月却为云翳所蔽;
当粗、细、极细的云翳,依次被风吹散之时,
此人便得睹见明月;同样地,以随顺智亦能依次得见。
当车轮转动时,立于其上者,依于其他所施设的想,
犹如期冀一箭贯穿百块木板。
显示巴利原文 Ṭhātuṃ icchaṃ puriso, laṅghitvā mātikāya paratīre; Vegenāgamma yathā, gaṇhitvā orimatiratarubaddhaṃ. Rajjuṃ vā daṇḍaṃ vā, ullaṅghitvāna pāraninnatanu; Pārāpanno pana taṃ, muñciya vedhaṃ patiṭṭhahati pāre. Evaṃ yogāvacaro, sakkāyamayamhi orime tīre; Diṭṭhabhayo abhaye pana, ṭhātuṃ icchaṃ amatapāre. Udayabbayānupassa , pabhutikavegena āgato rajjuṃ; Rūpāvhaṃ daṇḍaṃ vā, taditarakhandhāvhayaṃ sammā. Gaṇhitvā āvajjana, cittena hi pubbavuttanayatova; Anulomehullaṅghiya, nibbutininno tadāsanopagato. Taṃ muñciya gotrabhunā, aladdhaāsevanena tu pavedhaṃ; Patito saṅkhatapāre, tato patiṭṭhāti maggañāṇena. Passitukāmo candaṃ, cande channamhi abbhapaṭalehi; Thulakasukhumasukhumesu, abbhesu haṭesu vāyunā kamato. Candaṃ passeyya naro, yathā tathevānulomañāṇehi kamā; Saccacchādakamohe, vināsite pekkhate hi gotrabhu amataṃ. Vātā viya te candaṃ, amataṃ na hi pekkharenulomāni; Puriso abbhāni yathā, gotrabhu na tamaṃ vinodeti. Bhamitamhi cakkayante, ṭhito naro aññadinnasaññāya; Usupāte phalakasataṃ, apekkhamāno yathā vijjhe. Evamidha maggañāṇaṃ, gotrabhunā dinnasaññamavihāya; Nibbāne vattantaṃ, lobhakkhandhādike padāleti. Saṃsāradukkhajaladhiṃ , sosayati pidahati duggatidvāraṃ; Kurute ca ariyadhaninaṃ, micchāmaggañca pajahāti. Verabhayāni samayate, karoti nāthassa orasasutattaṃ; Aññe ca anekasate, ānīsaṃse dadāti ñāṇamidanti.
12 “勤行止息智”是于果中的智。这里,“勤行”指极精勤的努力,即为了亲证果而修习道、从两者中出起的努力;这种勤行的止息、完成,便是“勤行止息”。那是什么?即是四道作用的究竟终结。以此勤行止息为因,于果中生起的智,称为“勤行止息智”。phalati意为成熟,故称为“果”;在此果中与果相应的智,即是在果中的智。因为在每一道智之后,紧接著即会生起作为该道智异熟果的果心,它们以涅槃为所缘,有时三个,有时两个,有时一个。正因是即刻异熟,所以出世间善被称为“定,说为无间”(《小诵》6.5;《经集》228),以及“缓慢地证得无间,以达到诸漏的灭尽”(《增支部》4.162)等。若有两种随顺,则第三种为种姓心,第四为道心,便有三个果心。若有三种随顺,则第四为种姓心,第五为道心,便有两个果心。若有四种随顺,则第五为种姓心,第六为道心,便有一个果心。此为道心路过程中的果。至于随后生起的果——通过等至而生起的,以及从灭尽定出起时生起的果——亦皆包含于此中。显示巴利原文
12.Payogappaṭippassaddhipaññā phale ñāṇanti ettha payogoti bhuso yogo, phalasacchikiriyāya maggabhāvanāya ubhato vuṭṭhānapayogo, tassa payogassa paṭippassambhanaṃ niṭṭhānaṃ payogapaṭippassaddhi. Kiṃ taṃ? Catumaggakiccapariyosānaṃ. Tassā payogapaṭippassaddhiyā hetubhūtāya pavattā phale paññā payogappaṭippassaddhipaññā. Phalati vipaccatīti phalaṃ, tasmiṃ phale taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Ekekassa hi maggañāṇassa anantarā tassa tasseva vipākabhūtāni nibbānārammaṇāni tīṇi vā dve vā ekaṃ vā phalacittāni uppajjanti. Anantaravipākattāyeva lokuttarakusalānaṃ ‘‘samādhimānantarikaññamāhū’’ti (khu. pā. 6.5; su. ni. 228) ca, ‘‘dandhaṃ ānantarikaṃ pāpuṇāti āsavānaṃ khayāyā’’ti (a. ni. 4.162) ca ādi vuttaṃ. Yassa dve anulomāni, tassa tatiyaṃ gotrabhu, catutthaṃ maggacittaṃ, tīṇi phalacittāni honti. Yassa tīṇi anulomāni, tassa catutthaṃ gotrabhu, pañcamaṃ maggacittaṃ, dve phalacittāni honti. Yassa cattāri anulomāni, tassa pañcamaṃ gotrabhu, chaṭṭhaṃ maggacittaṃ, ekaṃ phalacittaṃ hoti. Idaṃ maggavīthiyaṃ phalaṃ. Kālantaraphalaṃ pana samāpattivasena uppajjamānaṃ nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa uppajjamānañca eteneva saṅgahitaṃ.
13 「观察断除烦恼的智」:就是用各个圣道断除了相应的那些烦恼之后,对它进行观察的智。显示巴利原文
13.Chinnavaṭumānupassane paññāti tena tena ariyamaggena samucchinnaṃ taṃ taṃ upakkilesaṃ pacchā passane paññā. Vimuttiñāṇanti vimuttiyā ñāṇaṃ. Vimuttīti ca upakkilesehi vimuttaṃ parisuddhaṃ cittaṃ, vimuttabhāvo vā. Tassā vimuttiyā jānanaṃ ñāṇaṃ vimuttiñāṇaṃ. Kilesehi vimuttaṃ cittasantatimpi kilesehi vimuttabhāvampi paccavekkhanto kilesehi na vinā paccavekkhatīti etena pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hotī’’ti (mahāva. 23; dī. ni. 1.248) hi idameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Avasiṭṭhakilesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ pana avuttampi imināva vuttaṃ hotīti gahetabbaṃ. Vuttañca –
当宣说一法时,那些具有同一特相的法也皆因而得以宣说完毕。这便是所谓的「相之撮要」(《导论》4.5 解释品)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vuttamhi ekadhamme, ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā tena;
Vuttā bhavanti sabbe, iti vutto lakkhaṇo hāro’’ti. (netti. 4.5 niddesavāra);
或者,由于阿拉汉没有对残余烦恼的省察,应知此处所说的是四种圣者都能获得的、关于已断烦恼的省察。显示巴利原文
Atha vā arahato avasiṭṭhakilesapaccavekkhaṇābhāvā catunnaṃ ariyānaṃ labbhamānaṃ pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇameva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
14 「于彼时对已生起法的观察之智」:「彼时」指在道刹那和果刹那。由证得和通达的方式而生起、到达、具足的道果法及四圣谛法,对其观察、审察、了知,即是「智」。而「省察智」是指:回转后进行彻底观察、了知的智。由这些智说明了种种省察智。因为入流者在道心路过程中,当入流果结束时,心便沉入有分;随后从有分出来,为了观察道而生起意门转向;此意门转向灭后,次第生起七个观察道的速行心。然后心再沉入有分,并以同样的方式,为观察果等而生起转向等。由于这些心的生起,他观察道、观察果、观察已断的烦恼、观察残余的烦恼、观察涅槃。他这样观察道:‘我确实由此道而来。’观察果:‘我已获得此利。’观察已断烦恼:‘这些烦恼我已断除。’观察残余烦恼:‘这些烦恼仍残留于我,需由更上之道断除。’最后观察涅槃:‘此法是我作为所缘而体证的。’因此,入流圣弟子有此五种省察。正如入流者,一来者、不还者也是如此。然而,阿拉汉没有对残余烦恼的省察。显示巴利原文
14.Tadā samudāgate dhamme passane paññāti tadā maggakkhaṇe phalakkhaṇe ca samudāgate paṭilābhavasena ca paṭivedhavasena ca samāgate sampatte samaṅgibhūte maggaphaladhamme catusaccadhamme ca passanā pekkhaṇā pajānanā paññā. Paccavekkhaṇe ñāṇanti nivattitvā bhusaṃ passanaṃ jānanaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Iminā ca ñāṇadvayena paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni vuttāni honti. Sotāpannassa hi maggavīthiyaṃ sotāpattiphalapariyosāne cittaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, tato bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā maggapaccavekkhaṇatthāya manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjati, tasmiṃ niruddhe paṭipāṭiyā satta maggapaccavekkhaṇajavanānīti. Puna bhavaṅgaṃ otaritvā teneva nayena phalādīnaṃ paccavekkhaṇatthāya āvajjanādīni uppajjanti. Yesaṃ uppattiyā esa maggaṃ paccavekkhati, phalaṃ paccavekkhati, pahīnakilese paccavekkhati, avasiṭṭhakilese paccavekkhati, nibbānaṃ paccavekkhati. So hi ‘‘iminā vatāhaṃ maggena āgato’’ti maggaṃ paccavekkhati, tato ‘‘ayaṃ me ānisaṃso laddho’’ti phalaṃ paccavekkhati, tato ‘‘ime nāma me kilesā pahīnā’’ti pahīnakilese paccavekkhati, tato ‘‘ime nāma me kilesā avasiṭṭhā’’ti uparimaggavajjhe kilese paccavekkhati, avasāne ‘‘ayaṃ me dhammo ārammaṇato paṭiladdho’’ti amataṃ nibbānaṃ paccavekkhati. Iti sotāpannassa ariyasāvakassa pañca paccavekkhaṇāni honti. Yathā ca sotāpannassa, evaṃ sakadāgāmianāgāmīnampi. Arahato pana avasiṭṭhakilesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ nāma natthīti cattāriyeva paccavekkhaṇāni. Evaṃ sabbāni ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni. Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedoyeva ceso. Pahīnāvasiṭṭhakilesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ sekkhānaṃ hoti vā na vā. Tassa hi abhāvatoyeva mahānāmo sakko bhagavantaṃ pucchi ‘‘kosu nāma me dhammo ajjhattaṃ appahīno, yena me ekadā lobhadhammāpi cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhantī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.175).
在此,为了阐明法住智等十一种智,应知如下譬喻:犹如有人心想「我要捕鱼」,便拿起鱼叉,走进适宜的水中,将手从叉口伸入水里,水底下有一条黑蛇,他却误以为是鱼,一把紧紧抓住蛇颈。他高兴地想:「啊,我抓到了一条好大的鱼!」提起来一看,见到卍字纹,认出「这是蛇」,顿时心生恐惧,看到了过患,对抓取生起厌离,想要把它放开。为了找到放开的方法,他从蛇尾尖开始,把手解脱出来,然后举起手臂,在头顶上方旋绕两、三圈,让蛇变得虚弱,说道:「去吧,毒蛇!」就把蛇甩掉了。随后,他飞快地登上旱地,站在那儿,欢喜地回望来路,心想:「哎呀,我真是从大蛇的口中逃出生天了!」显示巴利原文
Ettha dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇādīnaṃ ekādasannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ vibhāvanatthāya ayaṃ upamā veditabbā – yathā puriso ‘‘macche gahessāmī’’ti macchakhippaṃ gahetvā tadanurūpe udake osāretvā khippamukhena hatthaṃ otāretvā antoudake kaṇhasappaṃ macchasaññāya gīvāya daḷhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘mahā vata mayā maccho laddho’’ti tuṭṭho ukkhipitvā passanto sovatthikattayadassanena ‘‘sappo’’ti sañjānitvā bhīto ādīnavaṃ disvā gahaṇe nibbinno muñcitukāmo hutvā muñcanassa upāyaṃ karonto agganaṅguṭṭhato paṭṭhāya hatthaṃ nibbeṭhetvā bāhaṃ ukkhipitvā uparisīse dve tayo vāre paribbhametvā sappaṃ dubbalaṃ katvā ‘‘gaccha re duṭṭhasappā’’ti nissajjitvā vegena thalaṃ āruyha ṭhitova ‘‘mahantassa vata bho sappassa mukhato muttomhī’’ti haṭṭho āgatamaggaṃ olokeyya.
其中,如那个人误把黑蛇当作鱼,紧紧抓住而欢喜;同样地,此修行者在最初为愚痴凡夫时,对以无常等令人怖畏的五蕴,执为常等,以“我”和“我的”等邪见与渴爱紧紧抓住而欢喜。如那人从叉口取出蛇,见到卍字纹而认出是蛇;同样地,即通过把握有因有缘的名色,破除对密集的假想后,依聚思惟等智见五蕴的无常、苦、无我三相,从而断定:“这是无常、是苦、是无我。”如那人害怕起来,这好比修行者的“怖畏现起智”。如看见蛇的过患,这好比“过患随观智”。如对抓蛇产生厌离,这好比“厌离随观智”。如渴望将蛇放掉,这好比“欲解脱智”。如寻找放掉蛇的方法,这好比“审察随观智”。如把蛇甩动旋转,使它虚弱无力,不能再返身咬人;同样地,将无常、苦、无我三相投射到诸行上,以“行舍智”和“随顺智”将诸行旋转、削弱,使它们不能再以常、乐、我的姿态出现。如终于将蛇放掉,这好比“种姓智”。如放掉蛇后登上旱地安稳站住,这好比登上涅槃实地。显示巴利原文
Tattha tassa purisassa macchasaññāya kaṇhasappaṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā tussanaṃ viya imassa yogino ādito bālaputhujjanassa aniccatādivasena bhayānakaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ niccādisaññāya ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti diṭṭhitaṇhāhi daḷhaṃ gahetvā tussanaṃ, tassa khippamukhato sappaṃ nīharitvā sovatthikattayaṃ disvā ‘‘sappo’’ti sañjānanaṃ viya sappaccayanāmarūpapariggahena ghanavinibbhogaṃ katvā kalāpasammasanādīhi ñāṇehi khandhapañcakassa aniccatādilakkhaṇattayaṃ disvā ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā’’ti tassa vavatthāpanaṃ , tassa bhāyanaṃ viya imassa bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ, sappe ādīnavadassanaṃ viya ādīnavānupassanāñāṇaṃ, sappagahaṇe nibbindanaṃ viya nibbidānupassanāñāṇaṃ, sappaṃ muñcitukāmatā viya muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṃ, muñcanassa upāyakaraṇaṃ viya paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇaṃ, sappaṃ paribbhametvā dubbalaṃ katvā nivattitvā ḍaṃsituṃ asamatthabhāvapāpanaṃ viya tilakkhaṇāropanena saṅkhārupekkhānulomañāṇehi saṅkhāre paribbhametvā dubbalaṃ katvā puna niccasukhattākārena upaṭṭhātuṃ asamatthatāpāpanaṃ, sappavissajjanaṃ viya gotrabhuñāṇaṃ, sappaṃ vissajjetvā thalaṃ āruyha ṭhānaṃ viya nibbānathalaṃ āruyha ṭhitaṃ maggaphalañāṇaṃ, haṭṭhassa āgatamaggolokanaṃ viya maggādipaccavekkhaṇañāṇanti.
此外,这十四种智——闻所成智等,由于是按生起次第、修行次第和说法次第说明的,故应知在省察时,首先省察烦恼,其次才是省察道、果、涅槃。显示巴利原文
Imesañca sutamayañāṇādīnaṃ cuddasannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ uppattikkamena paṭipattikkamena ca desanakkamassa katattā paccavekkhaṇesu paṭhamaṃ kilesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ hoti, tato maggaphalanibbānapaccavekkhaṇānīti veditabbaṃ.
“他修习出世间禅那,那是导出的、趋向减损的,为了断除诸恶见;为了减弱欲贪与嗔恚;为了无余地断除欲贪与嗔恚;为了无余地断除色贪、无色贪、慢、掉举与无明。”(《法集论》277, 361-363)由于这些说法是侧重于断烦恼而讲述修道,故依修行次第,将烦恼的省察放在最前是合理的。然而,注疏中所说的次第,即如上文所示。这共有五种次第:生起次第、断除次第、修行次第、地位次第、说法次第。显示巴利原文
‘‘Lokuttaraṃ jhānaṃ bhāveti niyyānikaṃ apacayagāmiṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāya, kāmarāgabyāpādānaṃ tanubhāvāya, kāmarāgabyāpādānaṃ anavasesappahānāya, rūparāgaarūparāgamānauddhaccaavijjānaṃ anavasesappahānāyā’’ti (dha. sa. 277, 361-363) ca kilesappahānaṃyeva adhikaṃ katvā maggapaṭipattiyā vuttattā paṭipattānurūpeneva kilesapaccavekkhaṇassa ādibhāvo yujjati, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttakkamo pana dassitoyeva. So pana kamo pañcavidho uppattikkamo pahānakkamo paṭipattikkamo bhūmikkamo desanakkamoti.
最初是羯罗蓝,由羯罗蓝而生阿浮陀;
从阿浮陀生闭尸,从闭尸生伽那。”——《相应部·有偈品》
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ kalalaṃ hoti, kalalā hoti abbudaṃ; Abbudā jāyate pesi, pesi nibbattatī ghano’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.235) –
例如,“见所断法、修所断法”(《法集论·论母》三法8)等,是断次第的例子。“戒清净、心清净、见清净、度疑清净、道非道如实知见清净、行道如实知见清净、如实知见清净”等,是行道次第的例子。“欲界法、色界法、无色界法”(《法集论·论母》二法93-95)等,是地次第的例子。“四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八支圣道”(《中部》3.43;《大义释》191;《小义释·慈童请问义释》22),或者“他说了次第说法,即:布施论、戒论、生天论、诸欲的过患、卑下、染污,以及出离的功德”(《大品》31;《长部》1.298;2.83)等,是说法次第的例子。而在这里,因为这十四智是按生起次第与行道次第二种先后次序而说,故应知有三种次第:生起次第、行道次第、说法次第。显示巴利原文
Evamādi uppattikkamo. ‘‘Dassanena pahātabbā dhammā, bhāvanāya pahātabbā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. tikamātikā 8) evamādi pahānakkamo. ‘‘Sīlavisuddhi cittavisuddhi diṭṭhivisuddhi kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi ñāṇadassanavisuddhī’’ti evamādi paṭipattikkamo. ‘‘Kāmāvacarā dhammā, rūpāvacarā dhammā, arūpāvacarā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 93-95) evamādi bhūmikkamo. ‘‘Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā cattāro sammappadhānā cattāro iddhipādā pañcindriyāni pañca balāni satta bojjhaṅgā ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti (ma. ni. 3.43; mahāni. 191; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 22) vā, ‘‘anupubbikathaṃ kathesi. Seyyathidaṃ – dānakathaṃ sīlakathaṃ saggakathaṃ kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃ nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsesī’’ti (mahāva. 31; dī. ni. 1.298; 2.83) vā evamādi desanakkamo. Idha pana cuddasannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ uppattikkamo paṭipattikkamo ca tadubhayavasena paṭipāṭiyā desitattā desanakkamo cāti tayo kamā veditabbā.
15 现在,由于前面未具体说明名色确定智,为显示名色的五类区分,故举出“于内住立之慧、于事差别之智”等五种智。的确,当总说名色时,他能够把握那可以把握的,也将把握那应当把握的。因为出世间的名,既不能把握(由于尚未证得),也不应把握(因为不是观的所缘)。其中,“于内住立”:是以“如此转起时,我们将会落入‘我’的执取”这样的意图,以自己为对象而转起,故称为“内”。而“内”一词出现在四种含义中:所行内、自有内、内内、境内。如“阿难,那位比丘应即于先前那个定相中,只让心内住,内喜、等持”(《法句》362等)这类句子中,为“所行内”。在“内净信”(《长部》1.228;《法集论》161)、“或于内诸法中随观法而住”(《长部》2.373等)这类句子中,为“自有内”。在“六内处”、“内法”(《法集论·论母》三法20等)这类句子中,为“内内”。在“然而,阿难,此住乃是如来所现证——即由不作意一切相,具足内空而住”(《中部》3.187等)这类句子中,为“境内”。显示巴利原文
15. Idāni yasmā heṭṭhā sarūpena nāmarūpavavatthānañāṇaṃ na vuttaṃ, tasmā pañcadhā nāmarūpappabhedaṃ dassetuṃ ajjhattavavatthāne paññā vatthunānatte ñāṇantiādīni pañca ñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Sakale hi nāmarūpe vutte yaṃ pariggahetuṃ sakkā, yañca pariggahetabbaṃ, taṃ pariggahessati. Lokuttaranāmañhi pariggahetuñca na sakkā anadhigatattā, na ca pariggahetabbaṃ avipassanūpagattā. Tattha ajjhattavavatthāneti ‘‘evaṃ pavattamānā mayaṃ attāti gahaṇaṃ gamissāmā’’ti iminā viya adhippāyena attānaṃ adhikāraṃ katvā pavattāti ajjhattā. Ajjhattasaddo panāyaṃ gocarajjhatte niyakajjhatte ajjhattajjhatte visayajjhatteti catūsu atthesu dissati . ‘‘Tena, ānanda, bhikkhunā tasmiṃyeva purimasmiṃ samādhinimitte ajjhattameva cittaṃ saṇṭhapetabbaṃ, ajjhattarato samāhito’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 362) hi ayaṃ gocarajjhatte dissati. ‘‘Ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ (dī. ni. 1.228; dha. sa. 161), ajjhattaṃ vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.373) niyakajjhatte. ‘‘Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni, ajjhattikā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. tikamātikā 20) ajjhattajjhatte. ‘‘Ayaṃ kho, panānanda, vihāro tathāgatena abhisambuddho yadidaṃ sabbanimittānaṃ amanasikārā ajjhattaṃ suññataṃ upasampajja viharatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.187) visayajjhatte, issariyaṭṭhāneti attho. Phalasamāpatti hi buddhānaṃ issariyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Idha pana ajjhattajjhatte daṭṭhabbo. Tesaṃ ajjhattānaṃ vavatthāne ajjhattavavatthāne. Vatthunānatteti vatthūnaṃ nānābhāve, nānāvatthūsūti attho. Ettha javanamanoviññāṇassa paccayabhūto bhavaṅgamanopi cakkhādipañcakaṃ viya uppattiṭṭhānattā vatthūti vutto. Āvajjanampi tannissitameva kātabbaṃ.
“外”:指相对于六内处而言的外部,也就是这些内处的境。“于行境差别”:指在行境的差别上。显示巴利原文
Bahiddhāti chahi ajjhattajjhattehi bahibhūtesu tesaṃ visayesu. Gocaranānatteti visayanānatte.
17 “于行安立”:是指依识行、无明行、智行而对诸行进行确定。亦有人取其短音形式读作“于行安立”(cariyavavatthāne)。显示巴利原文
17.Cariyāvavatthāneti viññāṇacariyāaññāṇacariyāñāṇacariyāvasena cariyānaṃ vavatthāne. ‘‘Cariyavavatthāne’’ti rassaṃ katvāpi paṭhanti.
18 “于四法安立”:是指依欲界地等十四种四类,对四法一组一组地加以确定。而“地”(bhūmi)一词,在“在地上与在空中的”(《相应部》1.136等)中,是指大地;在“孩儿,莫亲近非地(不应行处)”(《本生》1.6.34等)中,是指领域;在“于乐地,即欲界”(《法集论》988等)中,是指生起之处。此处则取其分类(品目)之义,也有说是指“分界”。显示巴利原文
18.Catudhammavavatthāneti kāmāvacarabhūmiādīnaṃ cuddasannaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena catunnaṃ catunnaṃ dhammānaṃ vavatthāne. Bhūmīti ca ‘‘bhūmigatañca vehāsaṭṭhañcā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.136) pathaviyaṃ vattati. ‘‘Abhūmiṃ tāta, mā sevā’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.6.34) visaye. ‘‘Sukhabhūmiyaṃ kāmāvacare’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 988) uppajjanaṭṭhāne. Idha pana koṭṭhāse vattati. Paricchedetipi vadanti.
19 “于九法安立”:是指依欲界善等、以欢悦为根本、以如理作意为根本,对九法一组一组地加以确定。于此五种智中,首先应当确定内法,故先阐明“事差别智”;其次应当确定他们之境,故紧接着阐明“行境差别智”;其后三种智,则是依三、四、九之数目次第而说。显示巴利原文
19.Navadhammavavatthāneti kāmāvacarakusalādivasena pāmojjamūlakavasena yoniso manasikāramūlakavasena ca navannaṃ navannaṃ dhammānaṃ vavatthāne. Imesu ca pañcasu ñāṇesu paṭhamaṃ ajjhattadhammā vavatthāpetabbāti vatthunānatte ñāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ, tato tesaṃ visayā vavatthāpetabbāti tadanantaraṃ gocaranānatte ñāṇaṃ vuttaṃ, tato parāni tīṇi ñāṇāni tiṇṇaṃ catunnaṃ navannaṃ vasena gaṇanānulomena vuttāni.
20 对名色从分类上进行确定的智即是知遍知,紧随其后的是度遍知,再后则是断遍知——如此便有三种遍知。修习与作证亦与之相关,因此在法差别智之后,列举了知义智等五种智。其实,三遍知就是知遍知、度遍知与断遍知。其中,如同“色以变坏为相,受以感受为相”这样,通过把握一一法的自相而生起的智慧,称为知遍知。如同“色是无常、苦、无我,受是无常、苦、无我”这样,将共相套用于一一法上而生起的、以共相为所缘的观慧,称为度遍知。而为断除常想等而于这些法上生起的、以共相为所缘的观,则称为断遍知。显示巴利原文
20. Idāni yasmā nāmarūpasseva pabhedato vavatthāpanañāṇaṃ ñātapariññā, tadanantaraṃ tīraṇapariññā, tadanantaraṃ pahānapariññāti tisso pariññā. Taṃsambandhā ca bhāvanāsacchikiriyā honti, tasmā dhammanānattañāṇānantaraṃ ñātaṭṭhe ñāṇādīni pañca ñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tisso hi pariññā ñātapariññā tīraṇapariññā pahānapariññā ca. Tattha ‘‘ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ, vedayitalakkhaṇā vedanā’’ti evaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ paccattalakkhaṇasallakkhaṇavasena pavattā paññā ñātapariññā nāma. ‘‘Rūpaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā, vedanā aniccā dukkhā anattā’’tiādinā nayena tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā pavattā lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāpaññā tīraṇapariññā nāma. Tesuyeva pana dhammesu niccasaññādipajahanavasena pavattā lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāva pahānapariññā nāma.
其中,从行分别开始,直至缘把握,是知遍知的范围。此阶段以通达诸法的自相为主。从蕴聚思择开始,直至生灭随观,是度遍知的范围。此阶段以通达共相为主。从坏灭随观开始及以后,是断遍知的范围。从此,正如《无碍解道》所说:“随观无常者断常想,随观苦者断乐想,随观无我者断我想,厌逆者断欢喜,离贪者断贪,随观灭者断集,舍遣者断执取”——如此,以断除常想等为目的的七种随观便成为主导。显示巴利原文
Tattha saṅkhāraparicchedato paṭṭhāya yāva paccayapariggahā ñātapariññāya bhūmi. Etasmiñhi antare dhammānaṃ paccattalakkhaṇapaṭivedhasseva ādhipaccaṃ hoti. Kalāpasammasanato paṭṭhāya yāva udayabbayānupassanā tīraṇapariññāya bhūmi. Etasmiñhi antare sāmaññalakkhaṇapaṭivedhasseva ādhipaccaṃ hoti. Bhaṅgānupassanaṃ ādiṃ katvā upari pahānapariññāya bhūmi. Tato paṭṭhāya hi ‘‘aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahati, dukkhato anupassanto sukhasaññaṃ pajahati, anattato anupassanto attasaññaṃ pajahati, nibbindanto nandiṃ pajahati, virajjanto rāgaṃ pajahati, nirodhento samudayaṃ pajahati, paṭinissajjanto ādānaṃ pajahatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.52) evaṃ niccasaññādipahānasādhikānaṃ sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ ādhipaccaṃ hoti.
这里,“胜智”(abhiññā)是指通过诸法变坏等自性而了知的智慧。由于前缀“abhi”有“善美”之义,故称“胜智”,意为“透过通达一一法的自性而善美地了知”。“知义智”则是具有了知自性的智慧。显示巴利原文
Tattha abhiññāpaññāti dhammānaṃ ruppanādisabhāvena jānanapaññā. Sā hi sobhanaṭṭhena abhisaddena ‘‘tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvajānanavasena sobhanaṃ jānana’’nti katvā abhiññāti vuccati. Ñātaṭṭhe ñāṇanti jānanasabhāvaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
21 「遍知智」即了知的智慧。它由前缀“pari”有“周遍”之义,故称“遍知”,意指“依无常等共相,或依各自作用的完成而周遍了知”。而「度义智」则是具有审察之性或思惟之性的智慧。显示巴利原文
21.Pariññāpaññāti jānanapaññā. Sā hi byāpanaṭṭhena parisaddena ‘‘aniccādisāmaññalakkhaṇavasena sakiccasamāpanavasena vā byāpitaṃ jānana’’nti katvā pariññāti vuccati. Tīraṇaṭṭhe ñāṇanti upaparikkhaṇasabhāvaṃ, sammasanasabhāvaṃ vā ñāṇaṃ.
22 「断智」即断除常想等颠倒想的智慧;亦可说“它断除”(pajahati),或“依此而断除”(pajahanti etena),故称为“断”。而「舍义智」是具舍离之性的智慧。显示巴利原文
22.Pahānepaññāti niccasaññādīnaṃ pajahanā paññā, pajahatīti vā, pajahanti etenāti vā pahānaṃ. Pariccāgaṭṭheñāṇanti pariccajanasabhāvaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
23 「修习智」即增长的智慧。而「一味义智」是指具有同一作用之性的智慧,或以解脱味而言,具有一味之性的智慧。显示巴利原文
23.Bhāvanāpaññāti vaḍḍhanapaññā. Ekarasaṭṭhe ñāṇanti ekakiccasabhāvaṃ ñāṇaṃ, vimuttirasena vā ekarasasabhāvaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
24 「作证智」是通过通达或获得而现证的智慧。「触义智」则是依此二者而具有感受性质的智慧。显示巴利原文
24.Sacchikiriyāpaññāti paṭivedhavasena paṭilābhavasena vā paccakkhakaraṇapaññā. Phassanaṭṭhe ñāṇanti tadubhayavaseneva vindanasabhāvaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
25-28 25-28. 现在,由于断、修习、作证诸智亦与圣道、圣果相应,故接着列出唯圣者能得的四种无碍解智。其中,作为缘所生的“义”,如苦谛般明显易解,故先举“义无碍解智”;此“义”以因法为所缘,故次举“法无碍解智”;此二者皆以言辞为所缘,故次举“辞无碍解智”;此智于前三种智中运转,故最后举“辩无碍解智”。诵读时,应拉长“pa”音。显示巴利原文
25-28. Idāni yasmā pahānabhāvanāsacchikiriyañāṇāni ariyamaggaphalasampayuttānipi honti, tasmā tadanantaraṃ ariyapuggalānaṃyeva labbhamānāni cattāri paṭisambhidāñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tatthāpi paccayuppanno attho dukkhasaccaṃ viya pākaṭo suviññeyyo cāti paṭhamaṃ atthapaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, tassa atthassa hetudhammavisayattā tadanantaraṃ dhammapaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ, tadubhayassa niruttivisayattā tadanantaraṃ niruttipaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ, tesu tīsupi ñāṇesu pavattanato tadanantaraṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ. Pa-kāraṃ dīghaṃ katvā ca paṭhanti.
29-31 29-31. 此后,“住义智”等三种智唯圣者才有,且从无碍解差别而说,故列于无碍解智之后。实际上,“住义智”即是法无碍解,“等至义智”即是义无碍解。在《无碍解道》(2.30)中说:“于法自性之智”为法无碍解;“于涅槃之智”则为义无碍解。这里的“住之种种”指由无常随观等而有的种种观住。“住义”即观住的自性。“住”则是指与相应心所俱起的观本身。“等至之种种”指由无相等而有的种种果等至。“等至”指出世间果的心与心所法。“住等至之种种”是依“住”与“等至”两方面而说的。显示巴利原文
29-31. Ito parāni vihāraṭṭhe ñāṇādīni tīṇi ñāṇāni ariyānaṃyeva sambhavato paṭisambhidāpabhedato ca paṭisambhidāñāṇānantaraṃ uddiṭṭhāni. Vihāraṭṭhe ñāṇañhi dhammapaṭisambhidā hoti, samāpattaṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā. Dhammasabhāve ñāṇañhi paṭisambhidākathāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 2.30) dhammapaṭisambhidāti vuttaṃ. Nibbāne ñāṇaṃ pana atthapaṭisambhidā eva. Tattha vihāranānatteti aniccānupassanādivasena nānāvipassanāvihāre. Vihāraṭṭheti vipassanāvihārasabhāve. Vihāroti ca sasampayuttā vipassanā eva. Samāpattinānatteti animittādivasena nānāphalasamāpattiyaṃ. Samāpattīti ca lokuttaraphalabhūtā cittacetasikadhammā. Vihārasamāpattinānatteti ubhayavasena vuttaṃ.
32 在此之后,为了将先前已说过的“从两边出起转向的慧”——也就是道智——断尽诸漏的能力与给予无间果的特性,以因的方式加以简别,并以另一种方式予以说明,故以“无间定中的智”来举示此道智。此处,关于“由无散乱的清净性故”:能使心散乱的事物,名为“散乱”,这是掉举的异名。“无散乱”即没有散乱,这是与掉举相对立的定的异名。清净的状态名为“清净性”。无散乱的清净性,即是“无散乱清净性”。因此,“由无散乱的清净性故”,意思就是:由于定的清净状态。这便是用以解释断尽诸漏及给予无间果之原因的说法。在“断尽诸漏”中:因为它们流向,故称为“漏”,意思是它们从眼……乃至从意流出、转起。或者,就法而言,直至种姓智;就处所而言,直至有顶,它们都在流动,故为“漏”,其意为:在上述诸法与诸处所的范围之内,随作之后而转起。此处的“ā”前缀,具有“内在造作”之义。又因长久居住之义,犹如酒等被称为“漏”一般,这些烦恼也被称为“漏”。因为在世间,长久放置的酒等,便被称作“漏”。若因长久居住之义而名为漏,那么唯有这些才最显示巴利原文
32. Tato vihārasamāpattiñāṇasādhakassa ‘‘dubhato vuṭṭhānavivaṭṭane paññā’’ti pubbe vuttassāpi maggañāṇassa āsavasamucchedasamatthataṃ anantaraphaladāyakattañca kāraṇena visesetvā aparenākārena vattukāmena tadeva ‘‘ānantarikasamādhimhi ñāṇa’’nti uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha avikkhepaparisuddhattāti vikkhipati tena cittanti vikkhepo, uddhaccassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Na vikkhepo avikkhepo, uddhaccapaṭipakkhassa samādhissetaṃ nāmaṃ. Parisuddhassa bhāvo parisuddhattaṃ, avikkhepassa parisuddhattaṃ avikkhepaparisuddhattaṃ, tasmā avikkhepaparisuddhattā samādhissa parisuddhabhāvenāti attho. Idañhi āsavasamucchedassa anantaraphaladāyakattassa ca kāraṇavacanaṃ. Āsavasamucchedeti ettha āsavantīti āsavā, cakkhutopi…pe… manatopi sandanti pavattantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammato yāva gotrabhuṃ, okāsato yāva bhavaggaṃ savantīti vā āsavā, etaṃ dhammaṃ etañca okāsaṃ antokaritvā pavattantīti attho. Antokaraṇattho hi ayaṃ ā-kāro. Cirapārivāsikaṭṭhena madirādayo āsavā viyātipi āsavā. Lokasmiñhi cirapārivāsikā madirādayo āsavāti vuccanti. Yadi ca cirapārivāsikaṭṭhena āsavā, eteyeva bhavitumarahanti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“诸比丘,无明的起始点不可知——‘在此之前无明并不存在,之后才产生’。”等等。(Purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, ito pubbe avijjā nāhosi, atha pacchā samabhavī.)显示巴利原文
‘‘Purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, ito pubbe avijjā nāhosi, atha pacchā samabhavī’’tiādi.
或者,它们令漫长的轮回之苦流转、泄出,故也称为漏。而‘断’,即是以此将其彻底断除。‘慧’即是对于断除欲漏等四种漏的智慧。显示巴利原文
Āyataṃ vā saṃsāradukkhaṃ savanti pasavantītipi āsavā, samucchijjati etenāti samucchedo. Paññāti kāmāsavādīnaṃ catunnaṃ āsavānaṃ samucchede paññā.
“无间定中的智”:这是道定,由于它生起之后必定无间地即刻与果,故得名为“无间”。因为当道定生起时,没有任何障碍能阻止其果的生起。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Ānantarikasamādhimhiñāṇanti attano pavattisamanantaraṃ niyameneva phalappadānato ānantarikoti laddhanāmo maggasamādhi. Na hi maggasamādhimhi uppanne tassa phaluppattinisedhako koci antarāyo atthi. Yathāha –
“若有人为证入流果而修行,而世界即将值遇劫火烧燃之时,劫火绝不燃起,直至此人证得入流果。此人即名为‘住劫者’。一切具道之人,皆是住劫者。”(《小部·无碍解道》17)显示巴利原文
‘‘Ayañca puggalo sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno assa, kappassa ca uḍḍayhanavelā assa, neva tāva kappo uḍḍayheyya, yāvāyaṃ puggalo na sotāpattiphalaṃ sacchikaroti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo ṭhitakappī. Sabbepi maggasamaṅgino puggalā ṭhitakappino’’ti (pu. pa. 17).
这就是与彼无间定相应俱起的智慧。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ tena ānantarikasamādhinā sampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
33 33. 此智唯独属于那些依道智而证果的圣者,因此在它之后,接续开示了无害住智等四种智。在此中,无害住智唯独属于阿罗汉,且于阿罗汉恒常现起,故最先开示;其次,灭尽定虽亦能于不还者与阿罗汉中生起,但因阿罗汉更为普遍,且特别因为灭被认同为涅槃,故接着开示灭尽定智;再次,般涅槃智须经历长时,于般涅槃之际方得安住,故为长时,因而开示此般涅槃智;其后,齐首住者于一切烦恼灭尽后,随即触及般涅槃之际而安住,故为短时,因而开示齐首住智。其中,‘而寂静的’一句中的‘而’字,应连贯‘见增上’、‘寂静的住证得’及‘胜妙决意性’三句。此处,‘见’指观智;‘增上’即增上之义,或因由增上而来故称增上;既是见又是增上,故称‘见增上’。‘住’指他安住,或因他依此而住故称住;‘证得’指被证得、被到达;‘住证得’即住本身即是证得。此住证得因无烦恼热恼,如已寂灭,故为‘寂静的’。它即是阿罗汉果等至的智慧。‘胜妙’因最上义、无逼迫恼害义而称胜妙,或因被置于首要地位而称胜妙;于胜妙中决意、心无旁骛、以此为最上者,为‘胜妙决意者’,其状态为显示巴利原文
33. Iminā maggañāṇena phalappattānaṃ ariyānaṃyeva sambhavato imassa ñāṇassa anantaraṃ araṇavihārañāṇādīni cattāri ñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tatrāpi ca arahatoyeva satatameva ca sambhavato araṇavihāre ñāṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, tadanantaraṃ nirodhassa anāgāmiarahantānaṃ sambhavepi bahusambhārattā visesena ca nirodhassa nibbānasammatattā ca nirodhasamāpattiyā ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, tadanantaraṃ parinibbānassa kālantare parinibbānakālaṃ āhacca ṭhitattā dīghakālikanti parinibbāne ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, tadanantaraṃ samasīsaṭṭhassa sabbakilesakhayānantaraṃ parinibbānakālaṃ āhacca ṭhitattā rassakālikanti samasīsaṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha santo cāti ca-kāro dassanādhipateyyañca santo vihārādhigamo ca paṇītādhimuttatā cāti tīhipi padehi sambandhitabbo. Dassananti vipassanāñāṇaṃ, adhipatiyeva ādhipateyyaṃ, adhipatito vā āgatattā ādhipateyyaṃ, dassanañca taṃ ādhipateyyañcāti dassanādhipateyyaṃ. Viharatīti vihāro, viharanti tena vāti vihāro, adhigammati pāpuṇīyatīti adhigamo, vihāro eva adhigamo vihārādhigamo. So ca kilesapariḷāhavirahitattā nibbutoti santo. So ca arahattaphalasamāpattipaññā. Uttamaṭṭhena atappakaṭṭhena ca paṇīto, padhānabhāvaṃ nītoti vā paṇīto, paṇīte adhimutto visaṭṭhacitto tapparamo paṇītādhimutto, tassa bhāvo paṇītādhimuttatā. Sā ca phalasamāpattādhimuttā pubbabhāgapaññā eva.
“无害住”即无烦恼的住。贪等烦恼会伤害、粉碎、折磨有情,故称“害”;或有情因它们而哭泣、悲叹,故称“害”。所说的住有三种。此住无那些害,故为“无害”。因此住能移除种种敌对法,故称“住”。即在此无害住中。在《详说品》(《无碍解道》1.82)中所说的初禅等,正因胜妙决意性而被包含于其中。因为欲入果等至者,先入初禅等,出定后观照与禅那相应的诸法;而世尊于《无害分别经》(中部3.323等)中所教导的无害行道,应知同样被此所包含。世尊在那里如此说:显示巴利原文
Araṇavihāreti nikkilesavihāre. Rāgādayo hi raṇanti satte cuṇṇenti pīḷentīti raṇā, raṇanti etehi sattā kandanti paridevantīti vā raṇā. Vutto tividhopi vihāro. Natthi etassa raṇāti araṇo. Vividhe paccanīkadhamme haranti etenāti vihāro. Tasmiṃ araṇe vihāre. Niddesavāre (paṭi. ma. 1.82) vuttapaṭhamajjhānādīni ca paṇītādhimuttatāya eva saṅgahitāni. Phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitukāmatāya hi paṭhamajjhānādiṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttadhamme vipassati, yā ca araṇavibhaṅgasuttante (ma. ni. 3.323 ādayo) bhagavatā desitā araṇapaṭipadā, sāpi imināva saṅgahitāti veditabbā . Vuttañhi tattha bhagavatā –
“诸比丘,我将为你们开示无诤分别……不应沉溺于欲乐,那是低劣、粗俗、凡夫、非圣、无有利益的;也不应沉溺于自我折磨的苦行,那是苦、非圣、无有利益的。诸比丘,不趋近此二边,由如来所彻底觉悟的中道,它生起眼、生起智,导向寂止、证智、正觉、涅槃。应了知该如何赞叹,应了知该如何贬损;了知赞叹与贬损后,既不赞叹,也不贬损,只应教导法。应了知乐的决定,了知乐的决定后,应致力于内在之乐;不应说背后非议之语,不应当面说损恼之语;应不匆忙而说,不应匆忙;不应执著于地方语言,不应逾越通称。此为无诤分别的总说……诸比丘,于此,凡是这种不沉溺于由欲结生之乐、喜悦随眠者,此是低劣……无有利益。此法无苦、无恼、无愁、无热,是正行道。故此法是‘无诤’……诸比丘,于此,凡是这种不沉溺于自我折磨苦行者,此是苦、非圣、无有利益。此法无苦……故此法是‘无诤’。诸比丘,于此,此中道由如来所彻底觉悟……此法无苦……故此法是‘无诤’……诸比丘,于此,此即是不赞叹、不贬损而教导法者,此法无苦……故此法是‘无诤’……诸比丘,于此,此即是出离乐、远离乐、寂止乐、正觉乐,此法无苦……故此法是‘无诤’。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Araṇavibhaṅgaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi…pe… na kāmasukhaṃ anuyuñjeyya hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, na ca attakilamathānuyogaṃ anuyuñjeyya dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ. Ete kho, bhikkhave, ubho ante anupagamma majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati. Ussādanañca jaññā, apasādanañca jaññā, ussādanañca ñatvā apasādanañca ñatvā nevussādeyya na apasādeyya, dhammameva deseyya. Sukhavinicchayaṃ jaññā, sukhavinicchayaṃ ñatvā ajjhattaṃ sukhamanuyuñjeyya, rahovādaṃ na bhāseyya, sammukhā na khīṇaṃ bhaṇe, ataramānova bhāseyya no taramāno, janapadaniruttiṃ nābhiniveseyya, samaññaṃ nātidhāveyyāti. Ayamuddeso araṇavibhaṅgassa …pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yo kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṃ ananuyogo hīnaṃ…pe… anatthasaṃhitaṃ, adukkho eso dhammo avighāto anupāyāso apariḷāho sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yo attakilamathānuyogaṃ ananuyogo dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ. Adukkho eso dhammo …pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yāyaṃ majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā…pe… adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yāyaṃ nevussādanā na apasādanā dhammadesanā ca, adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yadidaṃ nekkhammasukhaṃ pavivekasukhaṃ upasamasukhaṃ sambodhisukhaṃ, adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ rahovādo bhūto taccho atthasaṃhito, adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo …pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ sammukhā khīṇavādo bhūto taccho atthasaṃhito, adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yadidaṃ ataramānassa bhāsitaṃ, adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇo…pe… tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ janapadaniruttiyā ca anabhiniveso samaññāya ca anatisāro, adukkho eso dhammo…pe… tasmā eso dhammo araṇoti. Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, saraṇañca dhammaṃ jānissāma, araṇañca dhammaṃ jānissāma. Saraṇañca dhammaṃ ñatvā araṇañca dhammaṃ ñatvā araṇaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipajjissāmāti evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṃ. Subhūti ca pana, bhikkhave, kulaputto araṇapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno’’ti.
其中,中道由“以见为增上”与“证得寂静住”所摄。不随逐于欲乐与自我折磨,即是中道。对阿罗汉而言,观的前分是中道,依八支圣道的阿罗汉果等至也是中道。其余诸法则应知唯由殊胜的信解所摄。虽然一切阿罗汉皆为无诤住者,但其他阿罗汉在说法时,也会依人有所赞叹或贬损,如说“对正行者,这是正行”“对邪行者,这是邪行”。而须菩提长老说法时,只依法而说:“这是邪行道,这是正行道”。因此,世尊称赞他为“行无诤行道者”,并将他列为无诤住者中的第一:“诸比丘,在我声闻比丘中,无诤住者之第一,即是须菩提。”由此确立他为无诤住者中最上者。显示巴利原文
Tattha majjhimā paṭipadā dassanādhipateyyena ca santena vihārādhigamena ca saṅgahitā. Kāmasukhaṃ attakilamathaṃ ananuyogo majjhimā paṭipadā eva. Arahato hi vipassanāpubbabhāgamajjhimā paṭipadā hoti, arahattaphalasamāpatti aṭṭhaṅgamaggavasena majjhimā paṭipadā ca. Sesā pana paṇītādhimuttatāya eva saṅgahitāti veditabbā. Kiñcāpi sabbepi arahanto araṇavihārino, aññe arahanto dhammaṃ desentā ‘‘sammāpaṭipanne sammāpaṭipannā’’ti ‘‘micchāpaṭipanne micchāpaṭipannā’’ti puggalavasenāpi ussādanāpasādanāni katvā dhammaṃ desenti. Subhūtitthero pana ‘‘ayaṃ micchāpaṭipadā, ayaṃ sammāpaṭipadā’’ti dhammavaseneva dhammaṃ desesi. Teneva bhagavā taṃyeva araṇapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannoti ca vaṇṇesi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ araṇavihārīnaṃ yadidaṃ subhūtī’’ti (a. ni. 1.198, 201) ca araṇavihārīnaṃ aggaṭṭhāne ṭhapesīti.
34 “以二力”:指以止力与观力。“具足故”:意为相应故,或圆满故。“三”:是格变化,表示“三种的”。“诸行”:指语行、身行、心行。“令寂止”:为了寂止,为了灭尽,即令其不再生起。“十六”:无常随观等八种,以及道果八种,合为十六种。“智行”:即智的转起。“九”:色界、无色界定及其近行定,合为九种。“自在性慧”:轻快即是自在,随其意愿转起之力为自在力,具有此力者为自在者,自在者的状态为自在性,此自在性如同厌逆性一样。这样的慧,或依于自在性的慧。也有读作长音“sī”的。“具足故”“令寂止”“智行”“定行”中的“故”字,应相互连接理解。显示巴利原文
34.Dvīhi balehīti samathabalavipassanābalehi. Samannāgatattāti yuttattā paripuṇṇattā vā. Tayo cāti vibhattivipallāso, tiṇṇañcāti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṅkhārānanti vacīsaṅkhārakāyasaṅkhāracittasaṅkhārānaṃ. Paṭippassaddhiyāti paṭippassaddhatthaṃ nirodhatthaṃ, appavattatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Soḷasahīti aniccānupassanādīni aṭṭha, maggaphalāni aṭṭhāti soḷasahi. Ñāṇacariyāhīti ñāṇappavattīhi. Navahīti rūpārūpāvacarasamādhi tadupacāro cāti navahi. Vasibhāvatā paññāti lahutā, yathāsukhavattanaṃ issariyaṃ vaso, so assa atthīti vasī, vasino bhāvo vasibhāvo, vasibhāvo eva vasibhāvatā, yathā pāṭikulyameva pāṭikulyatā. Evaṃvidhā paññā vasibhāvatāya paññāti vā attho. Si-kāraṃ dīghaṃ katvā ca paṭhanti. Samannāgatattā ca paṭippassaddhiyā ca ñāṇacariyāhi ca samādhicariyāhi cāti ca-kāro sambandhitabbo.
“灭尽定之智”:即不来者与阿罗汉对于灭尽定相的智,如同“豹子因自己的皮而被杀”的譬喻。所谓“灭尽定”,只是非想非非想处的无而已,并非任何实法,唯是假名施设,因为纯粹是无,所以称为“灭”。由于是由入定者所入,所以称为“定”。显示巴利原文
Nirodhasamāpattiyā ñāṇanti anāgāmiarahantānaṃ nirodhasamāpattinimittaṃ ñāṇaṃ, yathā ajinamhi haññate dīpīti. Nirodhasamāpattīti ca nevasaññānāsaññāyatanassa abhāvamattaṃ, na koci dhammo, paññattimattaṃ abhāvamattattā nirodhoti ca. Samāpajjantena samāpajjīyati nāmāti samāpattīti ca vuccati.
35 「正知者」:因以正确的方式了知,故称「正知者」。此处指彼正知者。「于转起的耗尽」:“转起”即现行,指活动之义,既指烦恼的转起,也指五蕴的转起。对于此转起的耗尽、灭尽、不再生起,即是「转起的耗尽」。在此转起的耗尽中。「于般涅槃的智」:即阿罗汉省察自身爱欲等烦恼的般涅槃——不再生起,以及五蕴无余般涅槃的状态时,在对“烦恼般涅槃”与“蕴般涅槃”的省察中所生起的智慧。显示巴利原文
35.Sampajānassāti sammā pakārehi jānātīti sampajāno. Tassa sampajānassa. Pavattapariyādāneti pavattanaṃ pavattaṃ, samudācāroti attho. Kilesapavattaṃ khandhapavattañca. Tassa pavattassa pariyādānaṃ parikkhayo appavatti pavattapariyādānaṃ. Tasmiṃ pavattapariyādāne. Parinibbāne ñāṇanti arahato kāmacchandādīnaṃ parinibbānaṃ appavattaṃ anupādisesaparinibbānañca paccavekkhantassa tasmiṃ kilesaparinibbāne khandhaparinibbāne ca pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
36 「对一切法」:指三界中的一切法。「善巧地断除」:即通过彻底断除其相续的方式,令其完全息灭。「灭去后不再生起」:指已灭去的法不再显现,即不再生起之义。此处的文义应将“由善巧断除”、“由灭去”及“由不再生起”这几个原因连结起来理解。显示巴利原文
36.Sabbadhammānanti sabbesaṃ tebhūmakadhammānaṃ. Sammā samucchedeti santatisamucchedavasena suṭṭhu nirodhe. Nirodhe ca anupaṭṭhānatāti nirodhe gate puna na upaṭṭhānatāya, puna anuppattiyanti attho. Sammāsamucchede ca nirodhe ca anupaṭṭhānatā cāti ca-kāro sambandhitabbo.
「等首义的智」:在此,“出离”等三十七菩提分法称为「等」,因它们平息了敌对烦恼,故称为等;贪爱等十三种烦恼称为「首」,因它们随应情况而为上首、为最胜。又,一位修行者于同一威仪、同一疾病,或在同类相续的命根之中,既具备三十七菩提分这些「等」,也具备信等诸根这些「首」——具足这些与首者,名为「等首者」;等首者的状态即是「等首义」,而在这些首义中、即这些首者的状态中。意思是:于同一威仪,或同一疾病,依于同类相续的命根而发起观禅后,就在那一威仪、那一疾病,或同类相续的寿命之内,证得四道四果,并于彼状态下般涅槃的阿罗汉,即成就这些首者的状态。因此说:‘在于他们首者状态中的智’。这在《人施设论》及其注释中也有提及。显示巴利原文
Samasīsaṭṭhe ñāṇanti nekkhammādīni sattatiṃsa samāni, taṇhādīni terasa sīsāni. Paccanīkadhammānaṃ samitattā samāni, yathāyogaṃ padhānattā ca koṭittā ca sīsāni. Ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe vā ekasmiṃ roge vā sabhāgasantativasena ekasmiṃ jīvitindriye vā nekkhammādīni samāni ca saddhādīni sīsāni ca assa santīti samasīsī, samasīsissa attho samasīsaṭṭho. Tasmiṃ samasīsaṭṭhe, samasīsibhāveti attho. Ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe roge vā sabhāgasantativasena jīvite vā vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā tasmiṃyeva iriyāpathe roge sabhāgajīvite vā cattāri maggaphalāni patvā, tasmiṃyeva parinibbāyantassa arahatoyeva samasīsibhāvo hotīti tasmiṃ samasīsibhāve ñāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañca puggalapaññattiyaṃ (pu. pa. 16), tassā ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pu. pa. aṭṭha. 16) –
何谓“等首者”?若有人诸漏灭尽与寿命灭尽同时发生,无有先后,他便称为“等首者”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo samasīsī? Yassa puggalassa apubbaṃ acarimaṃ āsavapariyādānañca hoti jīvitapariyādānañca. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo samasīsī’’ti (pu. pa. 16).
对“等首者”的解释:“非前非后”即不先不后,以其为相续现在之态,故是一时、同一时刻之义。“尽”即灭尽。“此”指此人,名为“等首者”。此人又分三种:威仪等首者、病等首者、命等首者。其中,有人在经行时即开始修观,证得阿罗汉果后,便于经行中般涅槃;有人在站立时即开始修观,证得阿罗汉果后,便于站立中般涅槃;有人在坐着时即开始修观,证得阿罗汉果后,便于坐中般涅槃;有人在躺卧时即开始修观,证得阿罗汉果后,便于躺卧中般涅槃;此人即称为“威仪等首者”。另有人为某种疾病所触,便于病中开始修观,证得阿罗汉果后,即因病而般涅槃;此人称为“病等首者”。何谓“命等首者”?有十三种首。其中,烦恼首为无明,由阿罗汉道灭尽;转起首为命根,由死心灭尽。能灭尽无明之心不能灭尽命根,能灭尽命根之心不能灭尽无明。能灭尽无明之心是一,能灭尽命根之心是另一。若此二首同时灭尽,这人便叫作“命等首者”。如何能同时?依速行等次的同一性。即在那一道生起的速行次第中。于预流道有五种省察,于一来道有五种,不显示巴利原文
‘‘Samasīsiniddese apubbaṃ acarimanti apure apacchā, santatipaccuppannavasena ekavāraṃyeva, ekakālaṃyevāti attho. Pariyādānanti parikkhayo. Ayanti ayaṃ puggalo samasīsī nāma vuccati. So panesa tividho hoti iriyāpathasamasīsī rogasamasīsī jīvitasamasīsīti. Tattha yo caṅkamantova vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ patvā caṅkamantova parinibbāti, yo ṭhitakova vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ patvā ṭhitakova parinibbāti, yo nisinnova vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ patvā nisinnova parinibbāti, yo nipannova vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ patvā nipannova parinibbāti, ayaṃ iriyāpathasamasīsī nāma. Yo pana ekaṃ rogaṃ patvā antorogeyeva vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ patvā teneva rogena parinibbāti, ayaṃ rogasamasīsī nāma. Kataro jīvitasamasīsī? Terasa sīsāni. Tattha kilesasīsaṃ avijjaṃ arahattamaggo pariyādiyati, pavattasīsaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ cuticittaṃ pariyādiyati, avijjāpariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti, jīvitindriyapariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ avijjaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti. Avijjāpariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ aññaṃ, jīvitindriyapariyādāyakaṃ cittaṃ aññaṃ. Yassa cetaṃ sīsadvayaṃ samaṃ pariyādānaṃ gacchati, so jīvitasamasīsī nāma. Kathamidaṃ samaṃ hotīti? Vārasamatāya. Yasmiñhi vāre maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Sotāpattimagge pañca paccavekkhaṇāni, sakadāgāmimagge pañca, anāgāmimagge pañca, arahattamagge cattārīti ekūnavīsatime paccavekkhaṇañāṇe patiṭṭhāya bhavaṅgaṃ otaritvā parinibbāyati. Imāya vārasamatāya eva ubhayasīsapariyādānampi samaṃ hoti nāma. Tenāyaṃ puggalo ‘jīvitasamasīsī’ti vuccati. Ayameva ca idha adhippeto’’ti.
37 如今,因为闻所成慧、戒所成慧、修所成慧仅是轮回的基础,不名为“削减”;只有出世间基础及这些智与其他智,方可称为“削减”。是故,为了显示那些以削减敌对法之相而起的智,在解释了等首义之智后,继续开示削减义之智。其中,“种种诸火热之尽慧”:因不与世间相杂,“种种”指贪等种种不同自性的烦恼,如爱欲等;“火热”指那些因具烧灼义而得名的恶戒等;“尽”即灭尽、耗尽。这便是出离等三十七种法中的慧。或者,“种种诸火热”即指广大的、种种的火热,这些广大种种的恶戒等五种火热的灭尽,即是慧义。关于火热与种种的包含关系,将在解说节中详细说明。显示巴利原文
37. Idāni yasmā sutamayasīlamayabhāvanāmayañāṇāni vaṭṭapādakāni sallekhā nāma na honti, lokuttarapādakāneva etāni ca aññāni ca ñāṇāni sallekhāti vuccanti, tasmā paccanīkasallekhanākārena pavattāni ñāṇāni dassetuṃ samasīsaṭṭhe ñāṇānantaraṃ sallekhaṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha puthunānattatejapariyādāne paññāti lokuttarehi asammissaṭṭhena puthūnaṃ rāgādīnañca nānattānaṃ nānāsabhāvānaṃ kāmacchandādīnañca santāpanaṭṭhena ‘‘tejā’’ti laddhanāmānaṃ dussīlyādīnañca pariyādāne khepane paññā, nekkhammādimhi sattatiṃsabhede dhamme paññāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā puthubhūtā nānattabhūtā ca tejā eva tesaṃ puthubhūtānaṃ nānattabhūtānaṃ dussīlyādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ tejānaṃ pariyādāne paññāti attho. Tejehiyeva puthūnaṃ nānattānañca saṅgahaṃ niddesavāre pakāsayissāma.
「削减义之智」:「削减」即断除敌对之法,故称削减。此智即于出离等三十七种削减法性中安立的智。在《削减经》中,世尊以“他人将成为行伤害者,我等于此应成为不害者——应如是修习削减”等方式所开示的四十四种削减,亦当知皆摄于此。显示巴利原文
Sallekhaṭṭhe ñāṇanti paccanīkadhamme sallekhati samucchindatīti sallekho, tasmiṃ nekkhammādike sattatiṃsappabhede sallekhasabhāve ñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Pare vihiṃsakā bhavissanti, mayamettha avihiṃsakā bhavissāmāti sallekho karaṇīyo’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.83) nayena bhagavatā sallekhasuttante vutto catucattālīsabhedopi sallekho iminā saṅgahitoyevāti veditabbo.
38 38. 今为显示安住于削减者所应修习的正勤精进,其后遂列出「精进发勤之智」。于此,「不退缩己、已发勤精进、策励义」:以不懈怠故,不退缩、不萎靡,所谓「自己」者即是心,故名「不退缩己」。正如所说:显示巴利原文
38. Idāni sallekhe ṭhitena kattabbaṃ sammappadhānavīriyaṃ dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ vīriyārambhe ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha asallīnattapahitattapaggahaṭṭheti kosajjavasena asallīno asaṅkucito attā assāti asallīnatto. Attāti cittaṃ. Yathāha –
“导水者导引水流,箭工弯曲箭杆;
木匠调直木头,智者调御自身。”等等(《法句经》80-82)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Udakañhi nayanti nettikā, usukārā namayanti tejanaṃ; Dāruṃ namayanti tacchakā, attānaṃ damayanti paṇḍitā’’ti. ādi (dha. pa. 80-82) –
由于对身体和生命无所顾恋,将自己交付、遣出、放下,因此称为「已发勤者」。「自己」指的是有身。正如所说:“若有比丘尼打击自己而哭泣”等。他既是不退缩者,也是已发勤者,所以称为「不退缩已发勤者」。「策励」即提举、支持俱生法;策励本身即是意义,即「策励义」,指具有策励的本性。不退缩已发勤者的策励义,即是「不退缩已发勤者策励义」,也就是住于这种不退缩已发勤者的策励义中。正如所说:“因此,比丘们,你们也应不退缩地精勤。即使只剩下皮、腱、骨,身体的血肉干枯,凡是应以男子力、男子精进、男子奋发而证得的,若未证得,精进决不停息。”(增支部)依据这段话,以“不退缩已发勤者”的说法表明了在勤行中不退缩、不回转;而以“策励义”的说法则说明了脱离懈怠与掉举、持续生起的精进。显示巴利原文
Kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāya pahito pesito vissaṭṭho attā etenāti pahitatto. Attāti attabhāvo. Yathāha – ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī attānaṃ vadhitvā vadhitvā rodeyyā’’tiādi (pāci. 880) . Asallīnatto ca so pahitatto cāti asallīnattapahitatto. Sahajātadhamme paggaṇhāti upatthambhetīti paggaho, paggaho eva attho paggahaṭṭho, paggahasabhāvoti attho. Asallīnattapahitattassa paggahaṭṭho asallīnattapahitattapaggahaṭṭho. Tasmiṃ asallīnattapahitattapaggahaṭṭhe. ‘‘Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, tumhepi appaṭivānaṃ padaheyyātha. Kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu, upasussatu sarīre maṃsalohitaṃ. Yaṃ taṃ purisathāmena purisavīriyena purisaparakkamena pattabbaṃ, na taṃ apāpuṇitvā vīriyassa saṇṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti (a. ni. 2.5) vuttattā asallīnattapahitattavacanena padhānasmiṃ appaṭivānitā anivattanatā vuttā. Paggahaṭṭhavacanena pana kosajjuddhaccavimuttaṃ samappavattaṃ vīriyaṃ vuttaṃ.
「精进发勤之智」:「精进」是英雄的状态,或是英雄的行为;或者依据规律、方法、方便应当被策动、应当被推动而生起,所以称为精进。它以奋发为特相,以支撑俱生诸法为作用,以不沉没为现起;根据“悚惧者如理精勤”这句话,所以以悚惧为近因,或者以精进发勤的事物为近因。应当了知:正确发起的精进是一切成就的根本。以精进所称的发勤,即称为精进发勤。这个定义排除了其余含义的发勤,因为“ārambha”一词出现在业、犯戒、动作、精进、伤害、破坏等许多意义中。显示巴利原文
Vīriyārambhe ñāṇanti vīrabhāvo vīriyaṃ, vīrānaṃ vā kammaṃ, vidhinā vā nayena upāyena īrayitabbaṃ pavattayitabbanti vīriyaṃ. Tadetaṃ ussāhalakkhaṇaṃ, sahajātānaṃ dhammānaṃ upatthambhanarasaṃ, asaṃsīdanabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, ‘‘saṃviggo yoniso padahatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.113) vacanato saṃvegapadaṭṭhānaṃ, vīriyārambhavatthupadaṭṭhānaṃ vā. Sammā āraddhaṃ sabbasampattīnaṃ mūlaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vīriyasaṅkhāto ārambho vīriyārambho. Iminā sesārambhe paṭikkhipati. Ayañhi ārambhasaddo kamme āpattiyaṃ kiriyāyaṃ vīriye hiṃsāyaṃ vikopaneti anekesu atthesu āgato.
凡有苦生起,全部以发勤为缘;
由发勤的息灭,便没有苦的生起。”(《经集》749)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yaṃkiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti, sabbaṃ ārambhapaccayā; Ārambhānaṃ nirodhena, natthi dukkhassa sambhavo’’ti. (su. ni. 749) –
在这里,业被称为发勤。在“他既发勤又追悔”(《增支部》、《人施设论》)这一句中,是指犯戒。在“大祭祀、大发勤,那些非大果报”(《增支部》、《相应部》)这一句中,是指树立柱等动作。在“你们应当发勤、出发、致力于佛陀教法”(《相应部》)这一句中,是指精进。在“他们针对沙门乔达摩而发勤伤生”(《中部》)这一句中,是指伤害。在“远离破坏种子与植物之行的发勤”(《长部》、《中部》)这一句中,是指切割、破坏等加害。但在当前这里,唯独是就精进而言的。因此说“被称为精进的发勤,即是精进发勤”。因为精进从着手、发动的角度而得名发勤。在那个精进发勤中具有智慧。有的读作“由于不懈怠和已发勤的状态”,意思是:以不懈怠的状态、已发勤的状态。前面的读法更好。有人则解释说:“念、择法、精进、喜等觉支的平衡,叫作不懈怠性;念、定、轻安、舍等觉支的平衡,叫作已发勤性;七觉支的平衡,就是策励的意义。”显示巴利原文
Ettha hi kammaṃ ārambhoti āgataṃ. ‘‘Ārambhati ca vippaṭisārī ca hotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.142; pu. pa. 191) ettha āpatti. ‘‘Mahāyaññā mahārambhā, na te honti mahapphalā’’ti (a. ni. 4.39; saṃ. ni. 1.120) ettha yūpussāpanādikiriyā. ‘‘Ārambhatha nikkamatha, yuñjatha buddhasāsane’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.185) ettha vīriyaṃ. ‘‘Samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ uddissa pāṇaṃ ārambhantī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.51-52) ettha hiṃsā. ‘‘Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.10; ma. ni. 1.293) ettha chedanabhañjanādikaṃ vikopanaṃ. Idha pana vīriyameva adhippetaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vīriyasaṅkhāto ārambho vīriyārambho’’ti. Vīriyañhi ārabhanakavasena ārambhoti vuccati. Tasmiṃ vīriyārambhe ñāṇaṃ. Asallīnattā pahitattātipi paṭhanti, asallīnabhāvena pahitabhāvenāti attho. Purimapāṭhoyeva sundaro. Keci pana ‘‘satidhammavicayavīriyapītisambojjhaṅgānaṃ samatā asallīnattatā, satisamādhipassaddhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgānaṃ samatā pahitattatā, sattannaṃ sambojjhaṅgānaṃ samatā paggahaṭṭho’’ti vaṇṇayanti.
39 现在,为了显示那位藉由正精进而证得道果者,应当为世间利益而说法,故紧接着开示了「示义」的智慧。其中,「种种法的显示性」:即依一切有为法与无为法,而显示、阐明、解说种种法。「显示性」即是显示。「示义」是将种种义理开示于他人。于此,法即是义,义即是法。显示巴利原文
39. Idāni sammāvāyāmasiddhaṃ maggaphalaṃ pattena lokahitatthaṃ dhammadesanā kātabbāti dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ atthasandassane ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha nānādhammappakāsanatāti sabbasaṅkhatāsaṅkhatavasena nānādhammānaṃ pakāsanatā dīpanatā desanatā. Pakāsanatāti ca pakāsanā eva. Atthasandassaneti nānāatthānaṃ paresaṃ sandassane. Dhammā ca atthā ca te eva.
40 现在,为了显示那位以如法之语开示他人的圣者,其符合真实说法方式的见清净,紧接着开示了见清净智。其中,“一切法的一摄以及种种性与单一性的通达”:即由一切有为法与无为法的一摄,以及对欲贪等种种性、对出离等单一性的通达,此即现观。此复分为道智与果智。道智在谛现观的刹那,以谛现观而通达,故称通达;果智则因已通达而称为通达。“一摄性”:于此摄有四种——生类摄、同生类摄、作用摄、计数摄。其中:“所有刹帝利前来……所有婆罗门……所有吠舍……所有首陀罗前来”;“毗舍佉贤友,正语、正业、正命,这些法摄于戒蕴”(《中部》),此名生类摄。如同说“同一生类者前来”的场合,此处一切依生类而得统摄。“所有憍萨罗人前来……所有摩揭陀人……所有婆卢羯车人前来”;“毗舍佉贤友,正精进、正念、正定,这些法摄于定蕴”(《中部》),此名同生类摄。如同说“在同一地方出生与成长的人前来”的场合,此处一切依出生地与居住地而得统摄。“所有象兵前来……所有马兵前来……所有车兵前来”;“毗舍佉贤友,正见、显示巴利原文
40. Idāni paresaṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassentassa tassa ariyapuggalassa yathāsabhāvadhammadesanākāraṇaṃ dassanavisuddhiṃ dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ dassanavisuddhiñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha sabbadhammānaṃ ekasaṅgahatā nānattekattapaṭivedheti sabbesaṃ saṅkhatāsaṅkhatadhammānaṃ ekasaṅgahatāya ca kāmacchandādīnaṃ nānattassa ca nekkhammādīnaṃ ekattassa ca paṭivedho, abhisamayoti attho. So pana maggapaññā phalapaññā ca. Maggapaññā saccābhisamayakkhaṇe saccābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhatīti paṭivedho, phalapaññā paṭividdhattā paṭivedho. Ekasaṅgahatāti ettha jātisaṅgaho, sañjātisaṅgaho, kiriyāsaṅgaho, gaṇanasaṅgahoti catubbidho saṅgaho. Tattha ‘‘sabbe khattiyā āgacchantu, sabbe brāhmaṇā, sabbe vessā, sabbe suddā āgacchantu’’, ‘‘yā, cāvuso visākha, sammāvācā, yo ca sammākammanto, yo ca sammāājīvo, ime dhammā sīlakkhandhe saṅgahitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.462) ayaṃ jātisaṅgaho nāma. ‘‘Ekajātikā āgacchantū’’ti vuttaṭṭhāne viya hi idha sabbe jātiyā ekasaṅgahitā. ‘‘Sabbe kosalakā āgacchantu, sabbe māgadhikā, sabbe bhārukacchakā āgacchantu’’, ‘‘yo, cāvuso visākha, sammāvāyāmo, yā ca sammāsati, yo ca sammāsamādhi, ime dhammā samādhikkhandhe saṅgahitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.462) ayaṃ sañjātisaṅgaho nāma. ‘‘Ekaṭṭhāne jātā saṃvaḍḍhā āgacchantū’’ti vuttaṭṭhāne viya hi idha sabbe jātiṭṭhānena nivutthokāsena ekasaṅgahitā. ‘‘Sabbe hatthārohā āgacchantu, sabbe assārohā āgacchantu, sabbe rathikā āgacchantu’’, ‘‘yā, cāvuso visākha, sammādiṭṭhi, yo ca sammāsaṅkappo, ime dhammā paññākkhandhe saṅgahitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.462) ayaṃ kiriyāsaṅgaho nāma. Sabbeva hi te attano kiriyākaraṇena ekasaṅgahitā. ‘‘Cakkhāyatanaṃ katamaṃ khandhagaṇanaṃ gacchati, cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpakkhandhagaṇanaṃ gacchati. Hañci cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpakkhandhagaṇanaṃ gacchati, tena vata re vattabbe cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpakkhandhena saṅgahita’’nti (kathā. 471) ayaṃ gaṇanasaṅgaho nāma. Ayamidha adhippeto. Tathaṭṭhādīsu dvādasasu ākāresu visuṃ visuṃ ekena saṅgaho gaṇanaparicchedo etesanti ekasaṅgahā, ekasaṅgahānaṃ bhāvo ekasaṅgahatā.
“见清净智”:道智与果智即是见。见本身清净,故称见清净;见清净本身即是智,故称见清净智。道智以能清净故,名为见清净;果智以已清净故,名为见清净。显示巴利原文
Dassanavisuddhiñāṇanti maggaphalañāṇaṃ dassanaṃ. Dassanameva visuddhi dassanavisuddhi, dassanavisuddhi eva ñāṇaṃ dassanavisuddhiñāṇaṃ. Maggañāṇaṃ visujjhatīti dassanavisuddhi, phalañāṇaṃ visuddhattā dassanavisuddhi.
41 现在,为了将成就见清净的观智分为两种来显示,接着开示了忍智与摄受智。其中的“已解慧”,即因对色蕴等以无常等角度已了知而生起的慧。“忍智”:对已了知的内容能安忍,故称忍;此忍本身即是智,故名忍智。以此名称,简别了单纯的容受之忍。这是经由“对聚的思惟”等方式而生起的稚观智。显示巴利原文
41. Idāni dassanavisuddhisādhakāni vipassanāñāṇāni dvidhā dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ khantiñāṇapariyogāhaṇañāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tattha viditattā paññāti rūpakkhandhādīnaṃ aniccādito viditattā pavattā paññā. Khantiñāṇanti viditameva khamatīti khanti, khanti eva ñāṇaṃ khantiñāṇaṃ. Etena adhivāsanakhantiṃ paṭikkhipati. Etaṃ kalāpasammasanādivasena pavattaṃ taruṇavipassanāñāṇaṃ.
42 “已触慧”,即因对色蕴等以无常等智触而触而生起的慧。“摄受智”:即已触之后,随即遍入、进入的智;也有将“ga”字读作短音的。这是依坏灭随观等方式而生起的锐利观智。有些人却说:“观智本身,若以信来运持,便是忍智;若以慧来运持,便是摄受智。”若果真如此,则这两种智便不能同时存在于一人之相续中;若二者不共存,为声闻弟子所共通的六十七种声闻智便无由安立,因此这种说法不合理。显示巴利原文
42.Phuṭṭhattā paññāti rūpakkhandhādīnaṃ aniccādivasena ñāṇaphassena phuṭṭhattā pavattā paññā. Pariyogāhaṇe ñāṇanti phuṭṭhameva pariyogāhati pavisatīti pariyogāhaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Gā-kāraṃ rassaṃ katvāpi paṭhanti. Etaṃ bhaṅgānupassanādivasena pavattaṃ tikkhavipassanāñāṇaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘vipassanāñāṇameva saddhāvāhissa khantiñāṇaṃ, paññāvāhissa pariyogāhaṇañāṇa’’nti vadanti. Evaṃ sante etāni dve ñāṇāni ekassa na sambhavanti , tadasambhave ekassa sāvakassa sattasaṭṭhi sāvakasādhāraṇañāṇāni na sambhavanti, tasmā taṃ na yujjati.
43 现在,由于凡夫与有学对于观所摄入的蕴等诸法,是取其全部整体而普遍思惟,并非只取其中一部分,因此他们不能获得分住;唯有阿罗汉能随其所欲而获得分住。在说明了成就见清净的诸智之后,紧接着便开示了阿罗汉于见清净成就后所获得的“分住智”。其中,“统合慧”:即对于蕴等诸法中某一特定部分的受法,进行统合、总集、聚集的慧。亦有人读作“统合慧”,其意义相同。显示巴利原文
43. Idāni yasmā puthujjanā sekkhā ca vipassanūpage khandhādayo dhamme sakale eva sammasanti, na tesaṃ ekadesaṃ, tasmā tesaṃ padesavihāro na labbhati, arahatoyeva yathāruci padesavihāro labbhatīti dassanavisuddhisādhakāni ñāṇāni vatvā tadanantaraṃ arahato dassanavisuddhisiddhaṃ padesavihārañāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha samodahane paññāti khandhādīnaṃ ekadesassa vedanādhammassa samodahanapaññā, sampiṇḍanapaññā rāsikaraṇapaññā. Samodhāne paññātipi pāṭho, soyeva attho.
「部分住智」:依蕴等的一部分、一分、一支而安住,称为「部分住」;对于此部分住的智,即是「部分住智」。其中,所谓「部分」有种种不同:蕴的部分、处的部分、界的部分、谛的部分、根的部分、缘起支的部分、念处的部分、禅那的部分、名色的部分、法的部分。虽有多类,但此处的「部分」实即「受」而已。何以故?于五蕴中,依受蕴即是蕴的部分;于十二处中,依受即是法处的部分;于十八界中,依受即是法界的部分;于四谛中,依受即是苦谛的部分;于二十二根中,依五受根即是根的部分;于十二缘起支中,依「触缘受」即是缘起支的部分;于四念处中,依受随观即是念处的部分;于四禅那中,依乐与舍即是禅那的部分;于名色中,依受即是名色的部分;于善等一切法中,依受即是法的部分。如是,「受」为诸蕴等的部分,针对此受本身的观察,即称为部分住。显示巴利原文
Padesavihāre ñāṇanti khandhādīnaṃ padesena ekadesena avayavena vihāro padesavihāro, tasmiṃ padesavihāre ñāṇaṃ. Tattha padeso nāma khandhapadeso āyatanadhātusaccaindriyapaccayākārasatipaṭṭhānajhānanāmarūpadhammapadesoti nānāvidho. Evaṃ nānāvidho cesa vedanā eva. Kathaṃ? Pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ vedanākkhandhavasena khandhekadeso, dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ vedanāvasena dhammāyatanekadeso, aṭṭhārasannaṃ dhātūnaṃ vedanāvasena dhammadhātekadeso, catunnaṃ saccānaṃ vedanāvasena dukkhasaccekadeso, bāvīsatiyā indriyānaṃ pañcavedanindriyavasena indriyekadeso, dvādasannaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṅgānaṃ phassapaccayā vedanāvasena paccayākārekadeso, catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ vedanānupassanāvasena satipaṭṭhānekadeso, catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sukhaupekkhāvasena jhānekadeso, nāmarūpānaṃ vedanāvasena nāmarūpekadeso, kusalādīnaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ vedanāvasena dhammekadesoti evaṃ vedanā eva khandhādīnaṃ padeso, tassā vedanāya eva paccavekkhaṇavasena padesavihāro.
44 现在,因为凡夫与有学在修习定所生慧等时,是以所应修习的修法为增上、为上首,观察那些与之相违、应被断除、自性各异的诸法之种种过患,依着各各修法而安立其心,从而断除那些各各相反的诸法。于断除时,在观智的阶段观见一切行是空,之后以正断而断除。当他们如此断除时,是以一次的彻底觉悟而通达诸谛。一切圣者皆依如上所述的方式,随其相应而实践。因此,在部分住智之后,便依次举列出「想转智」等六种智。其中,「增上慧」:以出离等为增上,以出离等为更殊胜,依此殊胜而生起的慧,即是其义。「想转智」:想的转起、回转、背离,称为「想转」。以那将各各修法作为增上的想为因、为缘,而从爱欲等处转离的智。这里虽未直接说「从何处转离」,但从何处转离便自然被理解为对于该处的转离,正如「转起随观」。而这「想」,它的特相是认知;作用是对「就是这个」再次产生认知的因相作标记,如同木匠在木料上做记号;现起是依所执取的相而生起执着,如同盲人摸象;显示巴利原文
44. Idāni yasmā samādhibhāvanāmayañāṇādīni bhāventā puthujjanā sekkhā ca te te bhāvetabbabhāvanādhamme adhipatī jeṭṭhake katvā tena tena pahātabbe tappaccanīke nānāsabhāve dhamme anekādīnave ādīnavato paccavekkhitvā tassa tassa bhāvanādhammassa vasena cittaṃ patiṭṭhapetvā te te paccanīkadhamme pajahanti. Pajahantā vipassanākāle sabbasaṅkhāre suññato disvā pacchā samucchedena pajahanti, tathā pajahantā ca ekābhisamayavasena saccāni paṭivijjhantā pajahanti. Yathāvutteheva ākārehi sabbepi ariyā yathāyogaṃ paṭipajjanti, tasmā padesavihārañāṇānantaraṃ saññāvivaṭṭañāṇādīni cha ñāṇāni yathākkamena uddiṭṭhāni. Tattha adhipatattā paññāti nekkhammādīnaṃ adhipatibhāvena nekkhammādīni adhikāni katvā tadadhikabhāvena pavattā paññāti attho. Saññāvivaṭṭe ñāṇanti saññāya vivaṭṭanaṃ parāvaṭṭanaṃ parammukhabhāvoti saññāvivaṭṭo, yāya saññāya te te bhāvanādhamme adhipatiṃ karoti, tāya saññāya hetubhūtāya, karaṇabhūtāya vā tato tato kāmacchandādito vivaṭṭane ñāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etto vivaṭṭoti avuttepi yato vivaṭṭati, tato eva vivaṭṭoti gayhati yathā vivaṭṭanānupassanāya. Sā pana saññā sañjānanalakkhaṇā, tadevetanti puna sañjānanapaccayanimittakaraṇarasā dāruādīsu tacchakādayo viya, yathāgahitanimittavasena abhinivesakaraṇapaccupaṭṭhānā hatthidassakaandhā viya, ārammaṇe anogāḷhavuttitāya aciraṭṭhānapaccupaṭṭhānā vā vijju viya, yathāupaṭṭhitavisayapadaṭṭhānā tiṇapurisakesu migapotakānaṃ purisāti uppannasaññā viya.
45 「异慧」:即于与应修法自性有异的爱欲等,透过见其过患而生起的慧。而「异」字是表相状义的处格。或者,「断除差异」即名为「异」,意谓以断除差异为相、以断除差异为因,而安住于出离等的慧,这是其意趣所在。「心转智」:即心从爱欲等转向出离等的智。此处的「心」特指「思」。这「思」,特相是意志的状态,或策励连结;作用是累积业行;现起是协调结合,如同大工匠等督导最胜弟子完成其本份及余份任务。再者,在忆念紧急业等情况时,这「思」便会以激励相应法的方式变得极为显著。显示巴利原文
45.Nānatte paññāti nānāsabhāve bhāvetabbato aññasabhāve kāmacchandādike ādīnavadassanena pavattā paññā. Nānatteti ca nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ. Nānattappahānaṃ vā nānattaṃ, nānattappahānanimittaṃ nānattappahānahetu nekkhammādīsu paññāti adhippāyo. Cetovivaṭṭe ñāṇanti cetaso kāmacchandādito vivaṭṭanaṃ nekkhammādīsu ñāṇaṃ. Cetoti cettha cetanā adhippetā. Sā cetanābhāvalakkhaṇā, abhisandahanalakkhaṇā vā, āyūhanarasā, saṃvidahanapaccupaṭṭhānā sakiccaparakiccasādhakā jeṭṭhasissamahāvaḍḍhakiādayo viya. Accāyikakammānussaraṇādīsu ca panāyaṃ sampayuttānaṃ ussāhanabhāvena pākaṭā hoti.
46 「安立慧」:即依出离等,将心安立之慧。「心转智」:即由断除欲贪等,而使心转离之智。此处所说之‘心’,以识知为特相,以作前导为作用,以相续连结为现起,以名色为足处。显示巴利原文
46.Adhiṭṭhānepaññāti nekkhammādivasena cittassa patiṭṭhāpane paññā. Cittavivaṭṭe ñāṇanti kāmacchandādipahānavasena cittassa vivaṭṭane ñāṇaṃ . Cittañcettha vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ, pubbaṅgamarasaṃ, sandhānapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, nāmarūpapadaṭṭhānaṃ.
47 「空慧」:即依于我、我所之空性,对无我、无我所而生起的无我随观慧。「智转智」:即智本身从执著中回转,故说为‘转’;此即是智转之智。显示巴利原文
47.Suññate paññāti attattaniyasuññatāya anattānattaniye pavattā anattānupassanā paññā. Ñāṇavivaṭṭe ñāṇanti ñāṇameva abhinivesato vivaṭṭatīti vivaṭṭo, taṃ ñāṇavivaṭṭabhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
48 「舍断慧」:此处,舍断即断舍、弃舍之义;指依出离等,对欲贪等的舍断之慧。「解脱转智」:因从欲贪等中解脱,故名为解脱;解脱本身即是转,故称解脱转;此解脱转即是智。显示巴利原文
48.Vosagge paññāti ettha vosajjatīti vosaggo, kāmacchandādīnaṃ vosaggo nekkhammādimhi paññā. Vimokkhavivaṭṭe ñāṇanti kāmacchandādikehi vimuccatīti vimokkho, vimokkho eva vivaṭṭo vimokkhavivaṭṭo, so eva ñāṇaṃ.
49 「如实义慧」:指对于每一谛的四种、四种无颠倒自性,以作用而不迷惑地生起的智慧,这就是如实义慧。「谛转智」:从四谛双双出起而转起,故称谛转,此本身即是智。同一个智,依增上法而说,称为「想转」;依应断法而说,称为「心转」;依心之安立而说,称为「心转」;依断除敌对法而说,称为「解脱转」,如是说为四种。无我随观从空的样貌而说为「智转智」。而道智在前面被说为「道智」与「无间定智」两种,这里则从转起的样貌而说为「谛转智」。显示巴利原文
49.Tathaṭṭhe paññāti ekekassa saccassa catubbidhe catubbidhe aviparītasabhāve kiccavasena asammohato pavattā paññā. Saccavivaṭṭe ñāṇanti catūsu saccesu dubhato vuṭṭhānavasena vivaṭṭatīti saccavivaṭṭo, so eva ñāṇaṃ. Ekameva ñāṇaṃ adhipatikatadhammavasena saññāvivaṭṭoti, pahātabbadhammavasena cetovivaṭṭoti, cittapatiṭṭhāpanavasena cittavivaṭṭoti, paccanīkapahānavasena vimokkhavivaṭṭoti evaṃ catudhā vuttaṃ. Anattānupassanāva suññatākāravasena ‘‘ñāṇavivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti vuttā. Maggañāṇameva heṭṭhā ‘‘magge ñāṇa’’nti ca, ‘‘ānantarikasamādhimhi ñāṇa’’nti ca dvidhā vuttaṃ, vivaṭṭanākāravasena ‘‘saccavivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
50 现在,依他由谛转智而运作的、依漏尽智而运作的六神通智,被依次列出。其中,由于神变智的威力为世间所共知且极令人惊叹,故最先列出神变智;由于他心智的所缘微细,而天耳智的所缘粗显,故第二列出天耳智;由于所缘微细,故第三列出他心智。在三明中,由于能破除覆盖宿世的过去之暗,故最先列出宿住随念智;由于能破除现在与未来之暗,故第二列出天眼智;由于能彻底断除一切暗,故第三列出漏尽智。其中,「身亦」指色身。「心亦」指作为基础的禅那心。「单一决定状态」指:以预备心令身心处于单一状态,以及在想去时,无论以可见之身或不可见之身,都相应地使身与心融合的状态,这是这里所说的。此处,「身」指身体。身体因是不净的积聚,是头发等可厌物以及眼病等数百种疾病的生起之处,故称为身。「乐想与轻想」:此处,与第四禅相应的想虽只是一个,但依行相差别而分为两种,并用「与」字表合集义。在第四禅中,舍因寂静而被说为「乐」,与之相应的想是「乐想」。正是此想,因脱离诸盖及寻等敌对法而成为「轻想」。「以决意为先导」:即依增强而住立的方式,也就是依进入的方式,这显示巴利原文
50. Idāni tassa saccavivaṭṭañāṇavasena pavattassa āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇassa vasena pavattāni kamato cha abhiññāñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tatthāpi lokapākaṭānubhāvattā ativimhāpananti paṭhamaṃ iddhividhañāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, cetopariyañāṇassa visayato dibbasotañāṇaṃ oḷārikavisayanti dutiyaṃ dibbasotañāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, sukhumavisayattā tatiyaṃ cetopariyañāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tīsu vijjāsu pubbenivāsacchādakātītatamavinodakattā paṭhamaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, paccuppannānāgatatamavinodakattā dutiyaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, sabbatamasamucchedakattā tatiyaṃ āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha kāyampīti rūpakāyampi. Cittampīti pādakajjhānacittampi. Ekavavatthānatāti parikammacittena ekato ṭhapanatāya ca dissamānakāyena, adissamānakāyena vā gantukāmakāle yathāyogaṃ kāyassapi cittassapi missīkaraṇatāya cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāyoti cettha sarīraṃ. Sarīrañhi asucisañcayato kucchitānaṃ kesādīnañceva cakkhurogādīnaṃ rogasatānañca āyabhūtato kāyoti vuccati. Sukhasaññañca lahusaññañcāti ettha catutthajjhānasampayuttaṃ ekaṃyeva saññaṃ ākāranānattato dvidhā katvā samuccayattho ca-saddo payutto. Catutthajjhānasmiñhi upekkhā santattā sukhanti vuttā, taṃsampayuttā saññā sukhasaññā. Sāyeva nīvaraṇehi ceva vitakkādipaccanīkehi ca vimuttattā lahusaññā. Adhiṭṭhānavasenāti adhikaṃ katvā ṭhānavasena, pavisanavasenāti adhippāyo. Adhiṭṭhānavasena cāti ca-saddo sambandhitabbo. Ettāvatā sabbappakārassa iddhividhassa yathāyogaṃ kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ.
「成就义之慧」:即具有成就本质的慧。「于神变之智」:以成就义为神变,即以产生义及获得义为神变,这是所说的。凡是能产生、能获得者,即被称为「成就」。如所说:「对于渴望欲乐者,他的此愿得以成就。」(《经集》772)。同样地,「出离成就故为神变,能示现故为神变;阿罗汉道成就故为神变,能示现故为神变。」(《无碍解道》3.32)。另一种方法:以成就义为神变,这是方便成就的别名。因为方便成就通过产生所期望的果报而成就。如所说:「这位居士质多,具戒、有善法,若他发愿:『愿我未来成为转轮王』,因戒清净,此心的誓愿将会成就。」(《相应部》4.352)。另一种方法:依此,众生得成就故为神变;成就即增长、达到殊胜状态,这是所说的。神变本身即是种种,故为「神变种种」,意为神变的部分、神变的区分。对此神变种种的智,即称为于神变之智。显示巴利原文
Ijjhanaṭṭhe paññāti ijjhanasabhāve paññā. Iddhividhe ñāṇanti ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhi, nipphattiatthena paṭilābhaṭṭhena cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yañhi nipphajjati paṭilabbhati ca, taṃ ijjhatīti vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘kāmaṃ kāmayamānassa, tassa cetaṃ samijjhatī’’ti (su. ni. 772). Tathā ‘‘nekkhammaṃ ijjhatīti iddhi, paṭiharatīti pāṭihāriyaṃ, arahattamaggo ijjhatīti iddhi, paṭiharatīti pāṭihāriya’’nti (paṭi. ma. 3.32). Aparo nayo – ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhi, upāyasampadāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Upāyasampadā hi ijjhati adhippetaphalappasavanato. Yathāha – ‘‘ayaṃ kho citto gahapati sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo, sace paṇidahissati, anāgatamaddhānaṃ rājā assaṃ cakkavattīti. Ijjhissati hi sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.352). Aparo nayo – etāya sattā ijjhantīti iddhi, ijjhantīti iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti vuttaṃ hoti. Iddhi eva vidhaṃ iddhividhaṃ, iddhikoṭṭhāso iddhivikappoti attho. Taṃ iddhividhaṃ ñāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
51 “依寻之扩散力”:在为了生起天耳界而作遍行准备时,依自身之寻在声相上的扩散力,即依寻的冲劲力。此处,“寻”指:它能寻思,故为寻;或寻思本身即是寻,即审虑,这就是所说的含义。此寻以将心安置于所缘为相,以撞击、周遍撞击为用。正如所说,修行者通过它令所缘成为被寻撞击、被寻周遍撞击的状态。它以引导心趋向所缘为现起;然而,因为它在被同类作意所摄、且由根所取的境中无碍生起,故说以“进入视野之境”为足处。“种种与单一之声相”:即具有多种自性与单一自性的声音之相。在此,声音本身即是相,因为它是寻生起之因,且为行相。依大鼓声等总体而成的一种或多体声音,或不同方向的声音,或不同众生的声音,是种种声;一个方向的声音,或一个众生的声音,或依大鼓声等逐一而取的每一个声音,是单一声。此中,“声”者:以发出故为声,即被言说之义。“通达慧”:即趋入的慧、了知的慧,这是它的含义。“天耳界清净智”:以听闻义及无我义为天耳界;又因它执行天耳界的作用,如同天耳界,故亦称为天耳界;因清净、无烦恼,故为清净;天耳界本身即是清净,所以是天耳界清净;彼天耳界清净即是智,故为天耳界清净智。显示巴利原文
51.Vitakkavipphāravasenāti dibbasotadhātuuppādanatthaṃ parikammakaraṇakāle saddanimittesu attano vitakkavipphāravasena vitakkavegavasena. Vitakkoti cettha vitakketīti vitakko, vitakkanaṃ vā vitakko, ūhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Svāyaṃ ārammaṇe cittassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇo, āhananapariyāhananaraso . Tathā hi tena yogāvacaro ārammaṇaṃ vitakkāhataṃ vitakkapariyāhataṃ karotīti vuccati. Ārammaṇe cittassa ānayanapaccupaṭṭhāno, tajjāsamannāhārena pana indriyena ca parikkhitte visaye anantarāyena uppajjanato āpāthagatavisayapadaṭṭhānoti vuccati. Nānattekattasaddanimittānanti nānāsabhāvānaṃ ekasabhāvānañca saddanimittānaṃ. Saddā eva cettha vitakkuppattikāraṇattā saṅkhāranimittattā ca nimittāni. Bherisaddādivasena ekagghanībhūtā, anekā vā saddā, nānādisāsu vā saddā, nānāsattānaṃ vā saddā nānattasaddā, ekadisāya saddā, ekasattassa vā saddā, bherisaddādivasena ekekasaddā vā ekattasaddā. Saddoti cettha sappatīti saddo, kathīyatīti attho. Pariyogāhaṇe paññāti pavisanapaññā, pajānanapaññāti attho. Sotadhātuvisuddhiñāṇanti savanaṭṭhena ca nijjīvaṭṭhena ca sotadhātu, sotadhātukiccakaraṇavasena ca sotadhātu viyātipi sotadhātu, parisuddhattā nirupakkilesattā visuddhi, sotadhātu eva visuddhi sotadhātuvisuddhi, sotadhātuvisuddhi eva ñāṇaṃ sotadhātuvisuddhiñāṇaṃ.
52 “三种心”:即与喜俱行的心、与忧俱行的心、与舍俱行的心,此三种。“由于扩散”:其义为以扩散的状态、以冲劲的方式。此处为从格表原因,即在为了生起他心智而作遍行准备时,以他人此三种心的扩散为因。“以净色根的明净为途径”:指以眼等六根的明净为途径。在此,诸根所依之处,通过以果称因的譬喻方式,被称为“根”。正如经中说:“贤友,你的诸根极为明净,肤色清净、皎洁。”(《大品》60)。在诸根所依处中,此处特指心所依处。“以明净为途径”即以无浑浊的状态为途径。应知在“应以明净与不明净为途径”这句话中,省略了“不明净”一词。或者,因为“察觉此为不明净”这一认知唯有依靠明净才可能产生,所以仅说“以明净为途径”,即已包含“不明净”之义。“于种种与单一心识运作之通达慧”:即随其所应,了知具有多种自体与单一体性的八十九心之运作的智慧。在此,未得定者的心识运作为“种种”,得定者的心识运作为“单一”。或者说,有贪等心为“种种”,离贪等心为“单一”。显示巴利原文
52.Tiṇṇannaṃ cittānanti somanassasahagatadomanassasahagataupekkhāsahagatavasena tiṇṇannaṃ cittānaṃ. Vipphārattāti vipphārabhāvena vegenāti attho. Hetuatthe nissakkavacanaṃ, cetopariyañāṇuppādanatthaṃ parikammakaraṇakāle paresaṃ tiṇṇannaṃ cittānaṃ vipphārahetunā. Indriyānaṃ pasādavasenāti cakkhādīnaṃ channaṃ indriyānaṃ pasādavasena, indriyānaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsā cettha phalūpacārena indriyānanti vuttā yathā ‘‘vippasannāni kho te, āvuso, indriyāni parisuddho chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto’’ti (mahāva. 60). Indriyapatiṭṭhitokāsesupi hadayavatthu eva idhādhippetaṃ. Pasādavasenāti ca anāvilabhāvavasena. ‘‘Pasādappasādavasenā’’ti vattabbe appasādasaddassa lopo katoti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā idamappasannanti gahaṇassa pasādamapekkhitvā eva sambhavato ‘‘pasādavasenā’’ti vacaneneva appasādopi vuttova hotīti veditabbaṃ. Nānattekattaviññāṇacariyā pariyogāhaṇe paññāti yathāsambhavaṃ nānāsabhāvaekasabhāvaekūnanavutiviññāṇapavattivijānanapaññā. Ettha asamāhitassa viññāṇacariyā nānattā, samāhitassa viññāṇacariyā ekattā. Sarāgādicittaṃ vā nānattaṃ, vītarāgādicittaṃ ekattaṃ. Cetopariyañāṇanti ettha pariyātīti pariyaṃ, paricchindatīti attho. Cetaso pariyaṃ cetopariyaṃ, cetopariyañca taṃ ñāṇañcāti cetopariyañāṇaṃ. Vipphāratātipi pāṭho, vipphāratāyāti attho.
53 “依缘而转起之法”:指依缘起法则,从缘而生起的缘所生法。“依种种与单一业扩散之力”:此处,不善业为“种种”,善业为“单一”。或欲界业为“种种”,色界、无色界业为“单一”。其语法关系为:依种种与单一业之扩散力,对依缘而转起之法具有通达慧。“宿住随念智”:过去往昔诸生中所住过的诸蕴,称为“宿住”。“住过”即曾经居住、经历过,在自己的相续中生起后又灭去。或者说,过去往昔诸生中所住过的法,为“宿住”。“住过”指以所缘境而安住,被自心所知、所限,或被他人之心所知。对于已断除轮回根源者,如回忆过去般那样的事,唯有佛陀等能够做到。“宿住随念”即能随念宿住之念,这就是“宿住随念”。而“智”是指与该念相应之智。显示巴利原文
53.Paccayappavattānaṃ dhammānanti paṭiccasamuppādavasena paccayato pavattānaṃ paccayuppannadhammānaṃ. Nānattekattakammavipphāravasenāti ettha akusalaṃ kammaṃ nānattaṃ, kusalaṃ kammaṃ ekattaṃ. Kāmāvacaraṃ vā kammaṃ nānattaṃ, rūpāvacarārūpāvacaraṃ kammaṃ ekattaṃ. Nānattekattakammavipphāravasena paccayapavattānaṃ dhammānaṃ pariyogāhaṇe paññāti sambandho. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇanti pubbe atītajātīsu nivutthakhandhā pubbenivāso. Nivutthāti ajjhāvutthā anubhūtā attano santāne uppajjitvā niruddhā. Pubbe atītajātīsu nivutthadhammā vā pubbenivāso. Nivutthāti gocaranivāsena nivutthā attano viññāṇena viññātā paricchinnā, paraviññāṇena viññātāpi vā. Chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsu te buddhānaṃyeva labbhanti . Pubbenivāsānussatīti yāya satiyā pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati, sā pubbenivāsānussati, ñāṇanti tāya satiyā sampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
54 “以光明为途径”:为了以天眼看见色法,而使火遍、白遍、光明遍中任意一种以第四禅为所缘的遍处光明扩展开来,藉此遍处光明之力为途径。“种种与单一之色相”:指不同众生的色身,或生于不同身类的众生的色身,或不同方向的色身,或不混杂的色身,这些都是“种种色”;而一位众生的色身,或生于同一身类的众生的色身,或同一方向的色身,或从不同方向等混杂在一起的色身,这些都是“单一色”。此处,“色”仅指颜色处。因颜色能显现,当它呈现色彩变化时,可以显示令心明了通达的状态,故称“色”。这些色本身即是“色相”。此即就种种与单一之色相而言。“于见义之慧”:指具有观见、照见本质的智慧。显示巴利原文
54.Obhāsavasenāti dibbena cakkhunā rūpadassanatthaṃ pasāritassa tejokasiṇaodātakasiṇaālokakasiṇānaṃ aññatarassa catutthajjhānārammaṇassa kasiṇobhāsassa vasena. Nānattekattarūpanimittānanti nānāsattānaṃ rūpāni, nānattakāyaṃ upapannānaṃ vā sattānaṃ rūpāni, nānādisāsu vā rūpāni, asammissāni vā rūpāni nānattarūpāni, ekasattassa rūpāni, ekattakāyaṃ upapannassa vā rūpāni, ekadisāya vā rūpāni, nānādisādīnaṃ sammissībhūtāni vā rūpāni ekattarūpāni. Rūpanti cettha vaṇṇāyatanameva. Tañhi rūpayatīti rūpaṃ, vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānaṃ hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsetīti attho. Rūpameva rūpanimittaṃ. Tesaṃ nānattekattarūpanimittānaṃ. Dassanaṭṭhe paññāti dassanasabhāve paññā.
“天眼智”:因其与天眼相似,故为“天”。天人们由善业所生的净色眼,不为胆汁、痰、脓、血等所障碍,远离随烦恼,有能力领受远处所缘,这即是“天”眼。而此智眼亦是由精进修习之力所生,与彼天眼相同。故因与天眼相似而称“天”;由住于天住而得,或以天住为依止,亦称“天”;以光明遍而具大光辉,亦称“天”;能见穿壁等外之色法,有大通达,亦称“天”。这一切应依声论来理解。以“见”义为眼,能执行眼的作用,如同眼一般,故亦称“眼”。既是天,又是眼,因此是“天眼”。此天眼本身就是智,所以是“天眼智”。显示巴利原文
Dibbacakkhuñāṇanti dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ. Devānañhi sucaritakammanibbattaṃ pittasemharuhirādīhi apalibuddhaṃ upakkilesavimuttatāya dūrepi ārammaṇasampaṭicchanasamatthaṃ dibbaṃ pasādacakkhu hoti. Idañcāpi vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattaṃ ñāṇacakkhu tādisamevāti dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ, dibbavihāravasena paṭiladdhattā attanā dibbavihārasannissitattāpi dibbaṃ, ālokapariggahena mahājutikattāpi dibbaṃ, tirokuṭṭādigatarūpadassanena mahāgatikattāpi dibbaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabbaṃ. Dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu, cakkhukiccakaraṇena cakkhumivātipi cakkhu, dibbañca taṃ cakkhu cāti dibbacakkhu, dibbacakkhu ca taṃ ñāṇañcāti dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ.
55 “以六十四种行相”:于八种道果中,每一种道果各具八根,以此方式而成六十四种行相。“于三根”:指未知当知根、已知根、具知根这三根。“自在转之慧”:即于此三根达到自在状态而转起的智慧。应知,这实际是指于阿拉汉果位,以八根之力、八种行相,唯独对具知根获得自在转的状态而言。即使在阿拉汉道的刹那,这些根尚未完全成就,但因为是依阿拉汉道为因而得成就,故说,道慧乃是为了成就彼义而作用,因此称为自在转之慧。“漏尽智”:即能够摧坏应被道智所断诸烦恼的阿拉汉道智。显示巴利原文
55.Catusaṭṭhiyā ākārehīti aṭṭhasu maggaphalesu ekekasmiṃ aṭṭhannaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ indriyānaṃ vasena catusaṭṭhiyā ākārehi. Tiṇṇannaṃ indriyānanti anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ aññindriyaṃ aññātāvindriyanti, imesaṃ tiṇṇannaṃ indriyānaṃ. Vasibhāvatā paññāti vasibhāvatāya pavattā paññā, arahattaphale aṭṭhannaṃ indriyānaṃ vasena aṭṭhahi ākārehi aññātāvindriyasseva vasibhāvatāya arahattamaggakkhaṇe abhāvepi kāraṇasiddhivasena tadatthasādhanatāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇanti attanā vajjhānaṃ āsavānaṃ khayakaraṃ arahattamaggañāṇaṃ.
56-59 现在,为显明与称为“漏尽智”的阿拉汉道智相关的四种道智,各以单一方式通达四谛,故列出“遍知义之慧”等四种智。其中,苦圣谛因其相状粗显,又为一切众生所共有,易于了知,故最先说;为显示其因,紧接着说集圣谛;为令人了知“因灭则果灭”,故接着说灭圣谛;为显示证得灭谛的方法,最后说道圣谛。或者,为使贪著于有乐的众生生起悚惧,先说苦;为让人了知“此苦并非无因生、非自在天等所造,而是从此因而生”,故接着宣说集圣谛;之后,为显示苦的出离,给那些被有因之苦所征服、心生悚惧、寻求出离者带来安慰,故说灭谛;再后,为证得灭,而说能达至灭的道谛。今依此顺序,列举以四谛为境的诸智。其中,“遍知义”指苦的应遍知自性,其特征为逼迫等四种相;“断除义”指集的应断除自性,其特征为招感等四种相;“作证义”指灭的应作证自性,其特征为出离等四种相;“修习义”指道的应修习自性,其特征为导向出离等四种相。显示巴利原文
56-59. Idāni āsavānaṃ khayañāṇasaṅkhātaarahattamaggañāṇasambandhe catunnampi maggañāṇānaṃ ekekassa maggañāṇassa ekābhisamayataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pariññaṭṭhe paññā’’tiādīni cattāri ñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tatthāpi oḷārikattā sabbasattasādhāraṇattā ca suviññeyyanti dukkhasaccaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ, tasseva hetudassanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ samudayasaccaṃ, hetunirodhā phalanirodhoti ñāpanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, tadadhigamūpāyadassanatthaṃ ante maggasaccaṃ. Bhavasukhassādagadhitānaṃ vā sattānaṃ saṃvegajananatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ dukkhamāha, taṃ neva akataṃ āgacchati, na issaranimmānādito hoti, ito pana hotīti ñāpanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ samudayasaccaṃ, tato sahetukena dukkhena abhibhūtattā saṃviggamānasānaṃ dukkhanissaraṇagavesīnaṃ nissaraṇadassanena assāsajananatthaṃ nirodhaṃ, tato nirodhādhigamatthaṃ nirodhasampāpakaṃ magganti. Idāni tabbisayāni ñāṇāni teneva kamena uddiṭṭhāni. Tattha pariññaṭṭheti dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭhādike catubbidhe parijānitabbasabhāve. Pahānaṭṭheti samudayassa āyūhanaṭṭhādike catubbidhe pahātabbasabhāve. Sacchikiriyaṭṭheti nirodhassa nissaraṇaṭṭhādike catubbidhe sacchikātabbasabhāve. Bhāvanaṭṭheti maggassa niyyānaṭṭhādike catubbidhe bhāvetabbasabhāve.
60-63 现在,为说明已修习道者以省察的方式,或未修习道者以随闻的方式,于各别谛所生的谛智,故列出“于苦之智”等四种智。其中,在“dukkhe(于苦)”一词中,“du”此音表示“可厌的”。因为人们称可厌的儿子为“duputta(劣子)”。而“kha”音则表示“空的”。因为空的虚空被称为“kha”。而这第一圣谛,因是诸多灾祸的依处而是可厌的,因远离凡夫所执取的恒常、清净、安乐、自我之性而是空的。因此,由于可厌及空,故称为“dukkha(苦)”。显示巴利原文
60-63. Idāni bhāvitamaggassa paccavekkhaṇavasena vā abhāvitamaggassa anussavavasena vā visuṃ visuṃ saccañāṇāni dassetuṃ dukkhe ñāṇādīni cattāri ñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tattha dukkheti ettha du-iti ayaṃ saddo kucchite dissati. Kucchitañhi puttaṃ duputtoti vadanti. Khaṃ-saddo pana tucche. Tucchañhi ākāsaṃ ‘kha’nti vuccati. Idañca paṭhamasaccaṃ kucchitaṃ anekupaddavādhiṭṭhānato, tucchaṃ bālajanaparikappitadhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahitato. Tasmā kucchitattā tucchattā ca ‘‘dukkha’’nti vuccati.
于“dukkhasamudaye(于苦集)”中,“saṃ”音表示结合,如“samāgamo(集合)、sametaṃ(会合)”等词所示。“u”音表示生起,如“uppannaṃ(已生)、uditaṃ(已起)”等词所示。而“aya”音则表示原因。这第二圣谛,即是当其余诸缘和合时,苦的生起之因。如此,由于是苦的结合与生起之因,故称为“dukkhasamudaya(苦集)”。显示巴利原文
Dukkhasamudayeti ettha saṃ-iti ayaṃ saddo ‘‘samāgamo sameta’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 199; dī. ni. 2.396) viya saṃyogaṃ dīpeti. U-iti ayaṃ saddo ‘‘uppannaṃ udita’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 172; cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 141) viya uppattiṃ. Aya-saddo pana kāraṇaṃ dīpeti. Idañcāpi dutiyasaccaṃ avasesapaccayasamāyoge sati dukkhassa uppattikāraṇaṃ. Iti dukkhassa saṃyoge uppattikāraṇattā ‘‘dukkhasamudaya’’nti vuccati.
在“苦灭”一词中,“ni”之音显示无有,“rodha”之音则显示牢狱。因此,由于在此灭谛中,名为轮回牢狱的苦牢于一切趣中皆空无所有,故为“无有”;或者,由于证得灭谛时,灭谛即是轮回牢狱的对立面,故有轮回牢狱之苦牢的无有,因此称为“苦灭”。又,因为是苦的不生起与灭尽的缘,故称为苦灭。显示巴利原文
Dukkhanirodheti ettha ni-saddo abhāvaṃ, rodha-saddo ca cārakaṃ dīpeti. Tasmā abhāvo ettha saṃsāracārakasaṅkhātassa dukkharodhassa sabbagatisuññattā, samadhigate vā tasmiṃ saṃsāracārakassa dukkharodhassa abhāvo hoti tappaṭipakkhattātipi ‘‘dukkhanirodha’’nti vuccati. Dukkhassa vā anuppattinirodhapaccayattā dukkhanirodhanti vuccati.
在“趣向苦灭之道”中,因为此道以作所缘的方式趣向苦灭、面向于彼,且是证得苦灭的修行,故称为“趣向苦灭之道”。前面为显示从诸行出起之相,将四种道智说为“于道之智”;为显示给予无间果的因相,说为“于无间定之智”;为显示从诸行转离之相,说为“于谛转离之智”;为显示阿拉汉道智依道次第而生起,以及彼智是证知的状态,故唯独将阿拉汉道智说为“漏尽智”。又,为显示四种道智的单一通达,说了“遍知义之慧是于苦之智”等四种智。又,为显示于每一谛各别各别生起,列举了“于苦之智”等四种智。应如此了知前后之差别。显示巴利原文
Dukkhanirodhagāminiyāpaṭipadāyāti ettha yasmā ayaṃ etaṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchati ārammaṇakaraṇavasena tadabhimukhībhūtattā, paṭipadā ca hoti dukkhanirodhappattiyā, tasmā dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāti vuccati. Cattāri maggañāṇāneva heṭṭhā vuṭṭhānākāradīpanavasena ‘‘magge ñāṇa’’nti vuttāni, anantaraphaladāyakattassa kāraṇaparidīpanavasena ‘‘ānantarikasamādhimhi ñāṇa’’nti vuttāni, vivaṭṭanākāradīpanavasena ‘‘saccavivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti vuttāni, maggapaṭipāṭikkameneva arahattamaggañāṇuppattiṃ, tassa ca ñāṇassa abhiññābhāvaṃ dīpetuṃ arahattamaggañāṇameva ‘‘āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Puna catunnampi maggañāṇānaṃ ekābhisamayataṃ dīpetuṃ ‘‘pariññaṭṭhe paññā dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādīni cattāri ñāṇāni vuttāni. Puna ekekasmiṃ sacce visuṃ visuṃ uppattidīpanavasena ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādīni cattāri ñāṇāni uddiṭṭhānīti evaṃ pubbāparaviseso veditabboti.
64-67 现在,为了显示一切圣者的无碍解智唯依圣道之力而成就,又列举了义无碍解智等四种无碍解智。应知,这些是在无碍解未作细分的情况下,一切圣者共通的纯粹无碍解智;而前面所列的,则是无碍解已细分者所达到的、有差别的无碍解智。这是二者在前后所说中的差别。或者,因为紧接前面所列举的、以苦为所缘和以灭为所缘的智是义无碍解,以集为所缘和以道为所缘的智是法无碍解,于彼义与法之宣说中的智是词无碍解,于他们智中的智是辩无碍解,故为了显示义理上的差别,应知此处列举了纯粹的无碍解智。正因如此,前面以种种言辞加以区别而说,此处则不如此区别而说。显示巴利原文
64-67. Idāni sabbesaṃ ariyapuggalānaṃ ariyamaggānubhāveneva paṭisambhidāñāṇāni siddhānīti dassetuṃ atthapaṭisambhide ñāṇantiādīni puna cattāri paṭisambhidāñāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Imāni hi paṭisambhidāpabhedābhāvepi sabbaariyapuggalasādhāraṇāni suddhikapaṭisambhidāñāṇāni, heṭṭhā uddiṭṭhāni pana pabhinnapaṭisambhidānaṃ pabhedappattāni paṭisambhidāñāṇānīti veditabbānīti ayametesaṃ ubhayatthavacane viseso. Yasmā vā anantaraṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ dukkhārammaṇaṃ nirodhārammaṇañca ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā hoti, samudayārammaṇaṃ maggārammaṇañca ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā, tadabhilāpe ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā, tesu ñāṇesu ñāṇaṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidā, tasmā tampi atthavisesaṃ dassetuṃ suddhikapaṭisambhidāñāṇāni uddiṭṭhānīti veditabbāni. Tasmāyeva ca heṭṭhā nānattasaddena visesetvā vuttāni. Idha tathā avisesetvā vuttānīti.
68 如此次第列举了六十七种与声闻弟子共通的智慧之后,现在为开示声闻弟子所不共通、唯如来独有的不共智,便举出“根上下智”等六种不共智。这其中,如来在观察众生堪受教法与否时,是以佛眼来观察的。所谓佛眼,即指“根上下智”与“心性随眠智”这两种智慧。如经中所说:显示巴利原文
68. Evaṃ paṭipāṭiyā sattasaṭṭhi sāvakasādhāraṇañāṇāni uddisitvā idāni sāvakehi asādhāraṇāni tathāgatānaṃyeva āveṇikāni ñāṇāni dassetuṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇādīni cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni uddiṭṭhāni. Tatthapi yasmā tathāgatā sattānaṃ dhammadesanāya bhājanābhājanattaṃ olokentā buddhacakkhunā olokenti. Buddhacakkhu nāma indriyaparopariyattāsayānusayañāṇadvayameva. Yathāha –
世尊以佛眼观察世间,见有众生尘垢薄少,有众生尘垢深厚,有众生根器猛利,有众生根器迟钝……等等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Addasā kho bhagavā buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento satte apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe tikkhindriye mudindriye’’tiādi (mahāva. 9; ma. ni. 1.283; 2.339).
观察众生心相续时,首先观察其根器成熟与否;了知根器成熟之后,为随顺其意乐等而说法,才进一步观察意乐、随眠与行迹。因此,先列出“根上下智”,紧接是“心性随眠智”。又因为在说法时,对于那些应以神变调伏者,便示现神变,因此于心性随眠智之后列出“双神变智”。为了说明这三种智之因,随后列出“大悲智”。为了显示大悲智的清净状态,随后列出“一切知智”。为了显示一切知智必定关联着对一切法的转向,以及一切知智本身无障碍的性质,随后列出“无障智”。应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Sattasantāne ca olokentā paṭhamaṃ indriyaparipākāparipākaṃ olokenti, indriyaparipākañca ñatvā āsayādīnaṃ anurūpena dhammadesanatthaṃ tato āsayānusayacaritāni olokenti, tasmāpi paṭhamaṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, tadanantaraṃ āsayānusayañāṇaṃ. Dhammaṃ desentā ca yasmā pāṭihāriyena vinetabbānaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ karonti, tasmā āsayānusayañāṇānantaraṃ yamakapāṭihāriye ñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ñāṇānaṃ hetuparidīpanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ mahākaruṇāñāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Mahākaruṇāñāṇassa parisuddhabhāvaparidīpanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Sabbaññussāpi sabbadhammānaṃ āvajjanapaṭibaddhabhāvaparidīpanatthaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇassa anāvariyabhāvaparidīpanatthañca tadanantaraṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ uddiṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ.
「根上下智」者:此处应将“众生”一词取来,连作“众生的根上下智”。所谓“parāni”与“aparāni”,即殊胜与低劣,合为“parāparāni”(胜劣);依连声规则加“ro”音,便说为“paroparāni”。“paroparānaṃ bhāvo”(胜劣性)即是“paropariyaṃ”,“paropariyameva paropariyattaṃ”(胜劣性本身即是胜劣的状态)。对于可受教的众生,他们信等五根的胜劣状态,便是“indriyaparopariyattaṃ”(根的胜劣状态),了知这种根器胜劣状态的智慧,就称为“根上下智”,即了知诸根殊胜或低劣的智慧。又,有读作“indriyavarovariyattañāṇa”者;其中“varāni”与“avariyāni”(殊胜与不殊胜)合成显示巴利原文
Indriyaparopariyattañāṇanti ettha upari ‘‘sattāna’’nti padaṃ idheva āharitvā ‘‘sattānaṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇa’’nti yojetabbaṃ. Parāni ca aparāni ca parāparānīti vattabbe sandhivasena ro-kāraṃ katvā paroparānīti vuccati. Paroparānaṃ bhāvo paropariyaṃ, paropariyameva paropariyattaṃ, veneyyasattānaṃ saddhādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ paropariyattaṃ indriyaparopariyattaṃ, indriyaparopariyattassa ñāṇaṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇaṃ, indriyānaṃ uttamānuttamabhāvañāṇanti attho. ‘‘Indriyavarovariyattañāṇa’’ntipi pāṭho. Varāni ca avariyāni ca varovariyāni, varovariyānaṃ bhāvo varovariyattanti yojetabbaṃ. Avariyānīti ca na uttamānīti attho. Atha vā parāni ca oparāni ca paroparāni, tesaṃ bhāvo paropariyattanti yojetabbaṃ. Oparānīti ca orānīti vuttaṃ hoti, lāmakānīti attho, ‘‘paroparā yassa samecca dhammā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 479) viya. ‘‘Indriyaparopariyatte ñāṇa’’nti bhummavacanenāpi pāṭho.
69 「众生心意随眠智」者:此处,于色等诸蕴,因有欲贪而执著,故称为“众生”。正如世尊所说:显示巴利原文
69.Sattānaṃ āsayānusaye ñāṇanti ettha rūpādīsu khandhesu chandarāgena sattā visattāti sattā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“罗陀,若于色有欲、有贪、有欢喜、有渴爱,即于彼处执著,故名为‘众生’。若于受、想、行、识有欲、有贪、有欢喜、有渴爱,即于彼处执著,故名为‘众生’。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Rūpe kho, rādha, yo chando yo rāgo yā nandī yā taṇhā, tatra satto tatra visatto, tasmā ‘satto’ti vuccati. Vedanāya saññāya saṅkhāresu viññāṇe yo chando yo rāgo yā nandī yā taṇhā, tatra satto tatra visatto, tasmā ‘satto’ti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.161).
那些只推敲字面的人,却不加思量其中的义理,主张“这只不过是个名称罢了”。那些考量义理的人,则以“有情”的含义,视之为有情,即这些有情。所谓“意乐”,是“依止于此”的意思。这是对为邪见或正见、为欲贪等或出离等所熏修的心相续的称谓。在有情的心相续中随眠、随之而转起的,即称为“随眠”,这是对已生起力量的欲贪等烦恼的称谓。意乐与随眠合称“意乐随眠”。由于总摄其类,又依相违释的规则,应知此处为单数形式。因为行与胜解都含摄在意乐随眠之中,故于总标时,便以“意乐随眠智”统摄行与胜解的智慧,而说为“意乐随眠智”。正是依于这一意趣而作总标,也依同一意趣而作详解。显示巴利原文
Akkharacintakā pana atthaṃ avicāretvā ‘‘nāmamattameta’’nti icchanti. Yepi atthaṃ vicārenti, te satvayogena sattāti icchanti, tesaṃ sattānaṃ. Āsayanti nissayanti etaṃ iti āsayo, micchādiṭṭhiyā, sammādiṭṭhiyā vā kāmādīhi, nekkhammādīhi vā paribhāvitassa santānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sattasantāne anusenti anupavattantīti anusayā, thāmagatānaṃ kāmarāgādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Āsayo ca anusayo ca āsayānusayo. Jātiggahaṇena ca dvandasamāsavasena ca ekavacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yasmā caritādhimuttiyo āsayānusayasaṅgahitā, tasmā uddese caritādhimuttīsu ñāṇāni āsayānusayañāṇeneva saṅgahetvā ‘‘āsayānusaye ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Yeneva hi adhippāyena uddeso kato, teneva adhippāyena niddeso katoti.
70 关于“双神变智”:此处,火堆、水流等不先不后,于同一刹那同时生起,故称为“双”;因能除遣不信等对立之法,故称为“神变”;它既是双,又是神变,因此称为“双神变”。显示巴利原文
70.Yamakapāṭihīre ñāṇanti ettha aggikkhandhaudakadhārādīnaṃ apubbaṃ acarimaṃ sakiṃyeva pavattito yamakaṃ, assaddhiyādīnaṃ paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ haraṇato pāṭihīraṃ, yamakañca taṃ pāṭihīrañcāti yamakapāṭihīraṃ.
71 关于“大悲等至智”:此处,当他人之苦存在时,能令善人之心震动,故称为“悲”;或谓,它“削减”、灭除他人之苦,故称为“悲”;或谓,它以遍满的方式,在受苦者中扩散,故称为“悲”。由遍满的业用与殊胜的功德,它成为广大,这广大的悲便是大悲。大悲心者证入此定,故称为“等至”;大悲本身即是等至,故称为“大悲等至”。于彼大悲等至中,与之相应的智慧,即是“大悲等至智”。显示巴利原文
71.Mahākaruṇāsamāpattiyā ñāṇanti ettha paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ hadayakampanaṃ karotīti karuṇā, kināti vā paradukkhaṃ hiṃsati vināsetīti karuṇā, kirīyati vā dukkhitesu pharaṇavasena pasārīyatīti karuṇā, pharaṇakammavasena kammaguṇavasena ca mahatī karuṇā mahākaruṇā, samāpajjanti etaṃ mahākāruṇikāti samāpatti, mahākaruṇā ca sā samāpatti cāti mahākaruṇāsamāpatti. Tassaṃ mahākaruṇāsamāpattiyaṃ, taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ.
72-73 “一切知智、无障智”:此处,因遍知五种所导之相的一切,故为“一切知”;一切知的体性为“一切知性”,彼智即可说为“一切知性智”,而云“一切知智”。实则,一切法依有为、无为等差别——即行、变化、相、涅槃、施设,恰为五种所导。而“一切知”可有五种:次第一切知、一时一切知、常一切知、能一切知、已知一切知。其中,因不可能逐次遍知一切之时,故“次第一切知”不成;因不能于一刹那执取一切所缘,故“一时一切知”不成;若眼识等各于所缘生起之心恒转,则与有分心相违,无有是处,故“常一切知”不成。余者中,因具足遍知一切之能,则“能一切知”可成;因已遍知诸法,则“已知一切知”可成。若谓能一切知者尚无遍知一切之体性,此亦不然。显示巴利原文
72-73.Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇanti ettha pañcaneyyapathappabhedaṃ sabbaṃ aññāsīti sabbaññū, sabbaññussa bhāvo sabbaññutā, sā eva ñāṇaṃ ‘‘sabbaññutāñāṇa’’nti vattabbe ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Saṅkhatāsaṅkhatādibhedā sabbadhammā hi saṅkhāro vikāro lakkhaṇaṃ nibbānaṃ paññattīti pañceva neyyapathā honti. Sabbaññūti ca kamasabbaññū, sakiṃsabbaññū, satatasabbaññū, sattisabbaññū, ñātasabbaññūti pañcavidhā sabbaññuno siyuṃ. Kamena sabbajānanakālāsambhavato kamasabbaññutā na hoti, sakiṃ sabbārammaṇagahaṇābhāvato sakiṃsabbaññutā na hoti, cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārammaṇacittasambhavato bhavaṅgacittavirodhato yuttiabhāvato ca satatasabbaññutā na hoti, parisesato sabbajānanasamatthattā sattisabbaññutā vā siyā, viditasabbadhammattā ñātasabbaññutā vā siyā. Sattisabbaññuno sabbajānanattaṃ natthīti tampi na yujjati.
“于此世间,无有任何他所未见者,亦无有未曾了知、所应了知者;
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na tassa addiṭṭhamidhatthi kiñci, atho aviññātamajānitabbaṃ;
一切所应引导的对象,如来皆以胜智通达,因此如来是‘普眼’。”——依《大义释》156;《小义释·摩伽罗阇童子问义释》85;《无碍解道》1.208 等处所说。显示巴利原文
Sabbaṃ abhiññāsi yadatthi neyyaṃ, tathāgato tena samantacakkhū’’ti. (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. ma. 1.208) –
由于前已解说,故唯有“知一切智”方为合理。如此,从作用、从不迷乱、从理趣成就、从与转向相系属等诸方面,确实就是一切知智。正因为它与转向相系属,所以对此没有障碍,是为“无障碍”;而这无障碍本身,即称为“无障碍智”。显示巴利原文
Vuttattā ñātasabbaññuttameva yujjati. Evañhi sati kiccato asammohato kāraṇasiddhito āvajjanapaṭibaddhato sabbaññuttameva hotīti. Āvajjanapaṭibaddhattā eva hi natthi etassa āvaraṇanti anāvaraṇaṃ, tadeva anāvaraṇañāṇanti vuccatīti.
这七十三智,即依与声闻共及与声闻不共的方式所总说的这些七十三智。所谓“这七十三智的”,是指从最初开始所说的这些七十三智。此处的属格表示总括之义。也有读作“七十三”的。当应说“七十三”时,应知是以一复数形式来表示。六十七智,即从最初开始所说的六十七智。“与声闻共”:因于听闻之末生于圣种姓,故称为“声闻”;此智于他们有共同的执持,故为“共”;对如来而言,与声闻弟子们所共通的智,即是“声闻共”的智。六智,即最后所总说的六智。“声闻不共”:即不与声闻们所共同,唯属如来的智。显示巴利原文
Imāni tesattati ñāṇānīti sāvakehi sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇavasena uddiṭṭhāni imāni tesattati ñāṇāni. Imesaṃ tesattatiyā ñāṇānanti ādito paṭṭhāya vuttānaṃ imesaṃ tesattatiñāṇānaṃ. Ubbāhanatthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Tesattatīnantipi pāṭho. ‘‘Tesattatiyā’’ti vattabbe ekasmiṃ bahuvacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sattasaṭṭhi ñāṇānītiādito paṭṭhāya sattasaṭṭhi ñāṇāni. Sāvakasādhāraṇānīti savanante ariyāya jātiyā jātattā sāvakā, samānaṃ dhāraṇametesanti sādhāraṇāni, tathāgatānaṃ sāvakehi sādhāraṇāni sāvakasādhāraṇāni. Cha ñāṇānīti ante uddiṭṭhāni cha ñāṇāni. Asādhāraṇāni sāvakehīti sāvakehi asādhāraṇāni tathāgatānaṃyeva ñāṇānīti.
闻所成智解说之注释显示巴利原文
1. Sutamayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
解答总说之注释显示巴利原文
Vissajjanuddesavaṇṇanā
1 现在,为了依照所安立的概要,对所摄的法加以分类显示,而开始“如何于倾听中,慧是闻所成智”等的解说分。其中,所谓“于倾听中,慧是闻所成智”,是如何呢?这是想要说明的提问。因为问有五种:未见解明问、已见合和问、断疑问、同意问、想说问。其差别如下:显示巴利原文
1. Idāni yathānikkhittena uddesena saṅgahite dhamme pabhedato dassetuṃ kathaṃ sotāvadhāne paññā sutamaye ñāṇantiādi niddesavāro āraddho. Tattha yaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘sotāvadhāne paññā sutamaye ñāṇa’’nti , taṃ kathaṃ hotīti? Ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā. Pañcavidhā hi pucchā – adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā, diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā, vimaticchedanāpucchā, anumatipucchā, kathetukamyatāpucchāti. Tāsaṃ idaṃ nānattaṃ –
什么是未见解明问?自性上,其相未知、未见、未衡量、未判定、不明显、未显了,为了对它了知、观见、衡量、判定、令明显、令显了而发问,这就是未见解明问。显示巴利原文
Katamā adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā? (Mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12) pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ aññātaṃ hoti adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ, tassa ñāṇāya dassanāya tulanāya tīraṇāya vibhūtāya vibhāvanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā.
什么是已见合和问?自性上,其相已知、已见、已衡量、已判定、明显、显了,他为了与其他智者相合印证而发问,这就是已见合和问。显示巴利原文
Katamā diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā? (Mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12) pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ ñātaṃ hoti diṭṭhaṃ tulitaṃ tīritaṃ vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ, so aññehi paṇḍitehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā.
什么是断疑之问?若有人本性上便陷于疑惑、陷于犹豫,心存两端:‘是这样吗?不是这样吗?是什么?怎么样?’他为了断除疑惑而发问,这就是断疑之问。显示巴利原文
Katamā vimaticchedanāpucchā? (Mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12) pakatiyā saṃsayapakkhando hoti vimatipakkhando dveḷhakajāto ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, nanu kho, kiṃ nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti? So vimaticchedanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ vimaticchedanāpucchā.
什么是征询同意之问?世尊为征得比丘们的同意而发问:‘诸比丘,你们认为如何?色是常还是无常?’‘无常,尊者。’‘而无常者是苦还是乐?’‘苦,尊者。’‘既是无常、苦、变易之法,是否适合如此观察:“这是我的,我是这个,这是我的我”?’‘尊者,这并不适合。’这就是征询同意之问。显示巴利原文
Katamā anumatipucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ anumatiyā pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti? ‘‘Aniccaṃ, bhante’’. ‘‘Yaṃ panāniccaṃ, dukkhaṃ vā taṃ sukhaṃ vā’’ti? ‘‘Dukkhaṃ, bhante’’. ‘‘Yaṃ panāniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ, kallaṃ nu taṃ samanupassituṃ ‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti? ‘‘No hetaṃ, bhante’’ti (mahāva. 21), ayaṃ anumatipucchā.
什么是欲说法之问?世尊因欲为比丘们说法而发问:‘诸比丘,有四念处。哪四种呢?’这就是欲说法之问。在这些诸问之中,应知这是长老的欲说法之问。显示巴利原文
Katamā kathetukamyatāpucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ kathetukamyatāya pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘cattārome , bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.390)? Ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchāti. Tāsu ayaṃ therassa kathetukamyatāpucchāti veditabbā.
现在,为了想要宣说总纲而提问,有十六种解答概要,即:“这些法应证知——倾听,那了知之慧是闻所成智”等。其中,“这些法应证知”中,省略了“正在说法者”。当世尊,或某位可尊敬的同梵行者正在说法时,依照前面所述的方法,去倾听、去听闻,就称为“倾听”。那了知之慧,即对所听闻的内容加以抉择、分辨的慧,称为“闻所成智”,这便是它的含义。“它的了知”,即“那了知”,是一个属格复合词;或者,“那了知”是由于格变化而成为对格。而“应证知”,是指通过明了自性相,以善巧的方式了知。“应遍知”,是指通过明了共相,以及通过圆满成就所应作,而全面地了知。“应修习”,指应增长。“应证得”,指应现前。因为证得有两种:获得证得和所缘证得。由于依与善法相反的现行,而归于名为“退”的退失,故称为“退分”;由于依随顺彼法的念而安住,归于名为“住”的住立,故称为“住分”;由于依获得更上的殊胜,归于殊胜,故称为“殊胜分”。圣道能穿透、能打破从前未被穿透、打破的贪蕴、嗔蕴、痴蕴,所以称为“刺破”;由于依伴随厌离显示巴利原文
Idāni samātikuddesāya kathetukamyatāpucchāya ‘‘ime dhammā abhiññeyyāti sotāvadhānaṃ, taṃpajānanā paññā sutamaye ñāṇa’’ntiādayo soḷasa vissajjanuddesā. Tattha ime dhammā abhiññeyyāti ‘‘desayantassā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Ime dhammā abhijānitabbāti satthuno, aññatarassa vā garuṭṭhāniyassa sabrahmacārissa dhammaṃ desayantassa pubbe vuttanayena sotāvadhānaṃ sutaṃ sotāvadhānaṃ nāma. Taṃpajānanā paññā tassa sutassa pajānanā pariyāyaparicchindakapaññā sutamaye ñāṇaṃ nāmāti attho. Tassa pajānanā taṃpajānanāti sāmivacanasamāso. Taṃ pajānanāti vibhattivipallāsavasena upayogavacanaṃ vā. Abhiññeyyāti ca sabhāvalakkhaṇāvabodhavasena sobhanenākārena jānitabbā. Pariññeyyāti sāmaññalakkhaṇāvabodhavasena kiccasamāpanavasena ca byāpitvā jānitabbā. Bhāvetabbāti vaḍḍhetabbā. Sacchikātabbāti paccakkhaṃ kātabbā. Duvidhā hi sacchikiriyā paṭilābhasacchikiriyā ārammaṇasacchikiriyā ca. Paccanīkasamudācāravasena parihāniyasaṅkhātaṃ hānaṃ bhajantīti hānabhāgiyā. Tadanudhammatāya satiyā saṇṭhānavasena ṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ ṭhitiṃ bhajantīti ṭhitibhāgiyā. Uparivisesādhigamavasena visesaṃ bhajantīti visesabhāgiyā. Anibbiddhapubbaṃ appadālitapubbaṃ lobhakkhandhaṃ dosakkhandhaṃ mohakkhandhaṃ nibbijjhati padāletīti ariyamaggo nibbedho nāma, nibbidāsahagatānaṃ saññāmanasikārānaṃ samudācāravasena taṃ nibbedhaṃ bhajantīti nibbedhabhāgiyā.
“一切诸行”指一切有缘的法。因为它们被称为“有为行”。由诸缘和合而被造作,所以称为“行”;它们正是由于由诸缘和合而成,所以才特别称为“有为”。在注释书中,把业所生的三地色法、无色法称为“已造作之行”,它们也属于“诸行无常”等中的有为行。在“比丘们,这位具足无明的人,造作福行……”等经文中,以无明为缘而生起的行,也就是三地的善与不善之思,称为“能造作之行”。在“只要造作所能到达之处,就去到那里,如同撞到车轴而停住”等处,所提到的身、心精进,称为“方便造作”。而在“贤友毗舍佉,进入想受灭定的比丘,首先语行灭,然后身行灭,再后心行灭”等中,提到的寻与伺是“语行”——因为它们造作语言;出入息是“身行”——因为它由身体造作;想与受是“心行”——因为它们由心造作。然而,此处指的是“有为行”。显示巴利原文
Sabbe saṅkhārāti sabbe sappaccayā dhammā. Te hi saṅkhatasaṅkhārā nāma. Paccayehi saṅgamma karīyantīti saṅkhārā, te eva paccayehi saṅgamma katattā saṅkhatāti visesetvā vuttā. Kammanibbattā tebhūmakarūpārūpadhammā abhisaṅkhatasaṅkhārāti aṭṭhakathāsu (visuddhi. 2.587; vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa) vuttā. Tepi ‘‘aniccā va saṅkhārā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.186; 2.143; dī. ni. 2.221, 272) saṅkhatasaṅkhāresu saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. ‘‘Avijjāgato ayaṃ, bhikkhave, purisapuggalo puññañceva saṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharotī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.51) avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāva āgatā tebhūmikakusalākusalacetanā abhisaṅkharaṇakasaṅkhārā nāma. ‘‘Yāvatikā abhisaṅkhārassa gati, tāvatikaṃ gantvā akkhāhataṃ maññe aṭṭhāsī’’tiādīsu āgataṃ kāyikaṃ cetasikaṃ vīriyaṃ payogābhisaṅkhāro nāma. ‘‘Saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ samāpannassa kho, āvuso visākha, bhikkhuno paṭhamaṃ nirujjhati vacīsaṅkhāro, tato kāyasaṅkhāro, tato cittasaṅkhāro’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.464) āgatā vitakkavicārā. Vācaṃ saṅkharontīti vacīsaṅkhārā. Assāsapassāsā kāyena saṅkharīyantīti kāyasaṅkhārā. Saññā ca vedanā ca cittena saṅkharīyantīti cittasaṅkhārā. Idha pana saṅkhatasaṅkhārā adhippetā.
“无常”:以生起后即不存在为义。“苦”:以逼迫为义。“一切法”:这是把涅槃也算进去而说的。“无我”:以无自主性为义。在“此是苦圣谛”等表述中,本应说“苦之集”“苦之灭”,却说成“苦集”“苦灭”,这是一种语法上的性数格颠倒。然而,由于佛陀等圣者们证悟了它们,所以才称为“圣谛”。正如经中所说:“比丘们,有此四圣谛……这些四圣谛,圣者们证悟,因此叫作圣谛。”也可以理解为“圣者的真谛”,所以叫作圣谛。如说:“在包含天人的世间……如来是圣者,因此叫作圣谛。”又因为如实彻底证悟这些谛而成就了圣者的身份,所以也叫作圣谛。如说:“比丘们,因为如实彻底证悟这四圣谛,如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者就被称为圣者。”还可以理解为“圣性的真谛”,因此称为圣谛。这里的“圣”就是指不虚妄、不欺诳的意思。如说:“比丘们,这四圣谛是那样,不虚妄、不变化的,因此叫作圣谛。”那么什么是“谛”的真实含义呢?当以智慧眼观察时,它不像幻术那样颠倒,不像阳焰那样欺诳,也不像外道构想的那样找不到真实存在;相反,它以逼迫、生起、寂静、出离等方式显示巴利原文
Aniccāti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena. Dukkhāti pīḷanaṭṭhena. Sabbe dhammāti nibbānampi antokatvā vuttā. Anattāti avasavattanaṭṭhena. Idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccantiādīsu ‘‘dukkhasamudayo dukkhanirodho’’ti vattabbe ‘‘dukkhasamudayaṃ dukkhanirodha’’nti liṅgavipallāso kato. Yasmā pana buddhādayo ariyā paṭivijjhanti, tasmā ariyasaccānīti vuccanti. Yathāha ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, ariyasaccāni…pe… imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri ariyasaccāni. Ariyā imāni paṭivijjhanti, tasmā ariyasaccānīti vuccantī’’ti. Ariyassa saccānītipi ariyasaccāni. Yathāha ‘‘sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya tathāgato ariyo, tasmā ariyasaccānīti vuccantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1098). Etesaṃ abhisambuddhattā ariyabhāvasiddhitopi ariyasaccāni. Yathāha ‘‘imesaṃ kho, bhikkhave, catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho ariyoti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1093). Ariyāni saccānītipi ariyasaccāni. Ariyānīti avitathāni, avisaṃvādakānīti attho. Yathāha ‘‘imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri ariyasaccāni tathāni avitathāni anaññathāni, tasmā ariyasaccānīti vuccantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1097). Saccānīti ko saccaṭṭhoti ce? Yo paññācakkhunā upaparikkhamānānaṃ māyāva viparīto, marīcīva visaṃvādako, titthiyānaṃ parikappitaattāva anupalabbhasabhāvo ca na hoti, atha kho bādhanapabhavasantiniyyānappakārena tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvena ariyañāṇassa gocaro hotiyeva. Esa aggilakkhaṇaṃ viya lokapakati viya ca tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvo saccaṭṭhoti veditabbo. Yathāha ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti, bhikkhave, tathametaṃ avitathametaṃ anaññathameta’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1090) vitthāro. Apica –
因为除了苦,没有别的能逼迫;除了苦,再没有别的能逼迫。
若无此逼迫,苦便不会从他处生起;而此逼迫,也不可能离苦而独存。
除了涅槃,再没有别的寂静;寂静真实存在,并非不存在。
由于具有真实的出离作用,因此,这道被公认是“谛”。
如此,在四种谛中,这便是真实、不颠倒的实性;
由于苦等四谛各有不共的差别,因此诸智者说,这就是‘谛’的意义。
显示巴利原文 Nābādhakaṃ yato dukkhaṃ, dukkhā aññaṃ na bādhakaṃ; Bādhakattaniyāmena, tato saccamidaṃ mataṃ. Taṃ vinā nāññato dukkhaṃ, na hoti na ca taṃ tato; Dukkhahetu niyāmena, iti saccaṃ visattikā. Nāññā nibbānato santi, santaṃ na ca na taṃ yato; Santabhāvaniyāmena, tato saccamidaṃ mataṃ. Maggā aññaṃ na niyyānaṃ, aniyyāno na cāpi so; Tacchaniyyānabhāvena, iti so saccasammato. Iti tacchāvipallāsa-bhūtabhāvaṃ catūsvapi; Dukkhādīsvavisesena, saccaṭṭhaṃ āhu paṇḍitāti.
然而,这个“谛”(sacca)字在多种意义中出现。例如:“应当说真实语,不应发怒”(《法句经》224)等处,是指言语上的真实;“安住于谛的沙门、婆罗门”(《本生经》2.21.433)等处,是指离(妄)的真实;“为何诸人说种种谛,诸贤者善说所论”(《经集》891)等处,是指见的真实;“真实只有一个,没有第二个,对此,了知的人不会与众生争论”(《经集》890;《大义释》119)等处,是指以涅槃与道为体的究竟谛;“四谛之中,哪些是善,哪些是不善”(《分别论》216)等处,则是指圣谛。而在此处,这个字亦是用于圣谛之义。显示巴利原文
So panāyaṃ saccasaddo anekesu atthesu dissati. Seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘saccaṃ bhaṇe na kujjheyyā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 224) vācāsacce. ‘‘Sacce ṭhitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā cā’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.21.433) viratisacce. ‘‘Kasmā nu saccāni vadanti nānā, pavādiyāse kusalāvadānā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 891) diṭṭhisacce. ‘‘Ekañhi saccaṃ na dutīyamatthi, yasmiṃ pajā no vivade pajāna’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 890; mahāni. 119) paramatthasacce nibbāne ceva magge ca. ‘‘Catunnaṃ saccānaṃ kati kusalā kati akusalā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 216) ariyasacce. Svāyamidhāpi ariyasacce pavattatīti.
关于应遍知解说的义释显示巴利原文
Abhiññeyyaniddesavaṇṇanā
2 现在,为了按类别显示总摄于提问中的诸法,开始了“这些法应如何遍知”等的解说部分。其中,在应遍知解说等五种解说里,从第一个以单法开始,每一种都配合《十上经》的方式,总括为十种回答而宣说。在这些解说中,首先,于应遍知解说,“一切众生”是指在欲有、想有、一蕴有等一切有中的一切众生。“由食而存续”:依靠食物而得以延续,故称为“由食而存续”。这里的“存续”,是指在自刹那中存在。因此,遍知一法——作为一切众生存续之因的“食”,应当以增上的智慧来了知。因为如果缘被遍知,则缘所生的法也会被遍知,这两者是互相观待的。以此,便宣说了知遍知。若如此,岂非与“无想有情天无因、无食、无触”(《分别论》1017)等说法相矛盾吗?并不矛盾。何以故?因为他们的禅那即是其食。即使如此,又岂非与“比丘们!有四种食,能滋养已生众生的存续,或资益寻求再生者。哪四种?即段食,或粗或细;第二是触食;第三是意思食;第四是识食”(《相应部》2.11)的说法相矛盾呢?这也不矛盾。因为在那个经中,是以无余的方式,将具有食的特相的显示巴利原文
2. Idāni vissajjanuddesasaṅgahite dhamme pabhedato dassetuṃ kathaṃ ime dhammā abhiññeyyātiādi niddesavāro āraddho. Tattha abhiññeyyaniddesādīsu pañcasu ādito ekakādivasena dasa dasa vissajjanāni dasuttarapariyāyena saṃsandetvā uddiṭṭhāni. Tesu abhiññeyyaniddese tāva sabbe sattāti kāmabhavādīsu saññābhavādīsu ekavokārabhavādīsu ca sabbabhavesu sabbe sattā. Āhāraṭṭhitikāti āhārato ṭhiti etesanti āhāraṭṭhitikā. Ṭhitīti cettha sakakkhaṇe atthitā adhippetā. Iti sabbasattānaṃ ṭhitihetu āhāro nā eko dhammo adhikena ñāṇena jānitabbo. Paccaye hi abhiññāte paccayuppannāpi abhiññātā honti ubhinnampi aññamaññāpekkhattā. Etena ñātapariññā vuttā hoti. Nanu ca evaṃ sante yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘asaññasattā devā ahetukā anāhārā aphassakā’’tiādi (vibha. 1017), taṃ virujjhatīti. Tañca na virujjhati. Tesañhi jhānaṃ āhāroti. Evaṃ santepi ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārā bhūtānaṃ vā sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā, sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāya. Katame cattāro? Kabaḷīkāro āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā, phasso dutiyo, manosañcetanā tatiyā, viññāṇaṃ catuttha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.11) idaṃ virujjhatīti. Idampi na virujjhati. Etasmiñhi sutte nippariyāyena āhāralakkhaṇāva dhammā āhārāti vuttā. Idha pana pariyāyena paccayo āhāroti vutto. Sabbasaṅkhatadhammānañhi paccayo laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, so ca yaṃ yaṃ phalaṃ janeti, taṃ taṃ āharati nāma. Tasmā āhāroti vuccati. Tenevāha –
“诸比丘,我说无明有食,并非无食。诸比丘,什么是无明的食呢?应回答:‘五盖’。诸比丘,我说五盖有食,并非无食。诸比丘,什么是五盖的食呢?应回答:‘非理作意’。”(《增支部》10.61)这便是此处所指的含义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Avijjampāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sāhāraṃ vadāmi, no anāhāraṃ. Ko ca, bhikkhave, avijjāya āhāro? ‘Pañca nīvaraṇā’tissa vacanīyaṃ. Pañca nīvaraṇepāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sāhāre vadāmi, no anāhāre. Ko ca, bhikkhave, pañcannaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ āhāro. ‘Ayoniso manasikāro’tissa vacanīya’’ntiādi (a. ni. 10.61). Ayaṃ idha adhippeto.
在此,当掌握缘食时,有余食与无余食,一切也就都掌握了。显示巴利原文
Etasmiñhi paccayāhāre gahite pariyāyāhāropi nippariyāyāhāropi sabbo gahitova hoti.
其中,在无想有里,是可以得到缘食的。在没有佛陀出世的时期,有人在外道道场出家,以风遍为所缘作预备行,证得第四禅;从彼定出来,生起这样的认可与意乐:“呸,心!呸,心!内心不存在才是好的。因为依于内心,才会有杀、缚等缘引发的苦;若没有心,这苦就没有了。”禅那不退失而命终,便投生到无想有。他在人间所习惯的威仪,就以那种威仪投生,并安住五百劫。在这么长的时间里,就像躺着、像坐着、像站着。像这类众生,可以得到缘食。因为他们是由修习禅那而投生的,那个禅那就是他们的缘。譬如由弓力射出的箭,只要弓力还存在,箭就继续飞行;同样,当禅那的缘存在时,他们就持续存在。当这个缘灭尽时,就像箭的力量耗尽而坠落。显示巴利原文
Tattha asaññabhave paccayāhāro labbhati. Anuppanne hi buddhe titthāyatane pabbajitvā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘dhī cittaṃ, dhī cittaṃ, cittassa nāma abhāvoyeva sādhu. Cittañhi nissāya vadhabandhanādipaccayaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, citte asati nattheta’’nti khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā aparihīnajjhānā kālaṃkatvā asaññabhave nibbattanti. Yo yassa iriyāpatho manussaloke paṇihito ahosi, so tena iriyāpathena nibbattitvā pañca kappasatāni tiṭṭhati. Ettakaṃ addhānaṃ nipanno viya nisinno viya ṭhito viya hoti. Evarūpānañca sattānaṃ paccayāhāro labbhati. Te hi yaṃ jhānaṃ bhāvetvā nibbattā , tade nesaṃ paccayo hoti. Yathā jiyāvegena khittasaro yāva jiyāvego atthi, tāva gacchati, evaṃ yāva jhānapaccayo atthi, tāva tiṭṭhanti. Tasmiṃ niṭṭhite khīṇavego saro viya patanti.
那些被称为“非出离果活命、非福果活命”的地狱众生,以何为食?答:他们的业即是食。何以故?不可说“有五食,不是五食”这样的话。因为已经说过“缘是食”,所以令他们投生地狱的业,正是他们存续的缘,因此就是食。正如所说:“只要恶业未穷尽,他们便不会死。”(《增支部》3.36;《中部》3.250)因此,“食存续者”的意思就是“缘存续者”。在这里,不宜对段食进行争论。因为地狱众生口中的唾液也能完成食的作用:唾液在地狱中成为苦受之缘,在天界则成为乐受之缘。如此,在欲有中,无余地具有四种食;在色有与无色有中,除了无想有之外,其余有情具有三种食;对于无想有情及其余者,则以缘为食。依于此食,一切众生皆是食存续者。显示巴利原文
Ye pana te nerayikā ‘‘nevuṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino na puññaphalūpajīvino’’ti vuttā, tesaṃ ko āhāroti? Tesaṃ kammameva āhāroti. Kiṃ pañca āhārā atthīti? ‘‘Pañca, na pañcā’’ti idaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Nanu ‘‘paccayo āhāro’’ti vutto, tasmā yena kammena te niraye nibbattā, tadeva tesaṃ ṭhitipaccayattā āhāro. Yaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘na tāva kālaṃ karoti, yāva na taṃ pāpakammaṃ byantī hotī’’ti (a. ni. 3.36; ma. ni. 3.250). Tasmā āhāraṭṭhitikāti paccayaṭṭhitikāti attho. Kabaḷīkāraṃ āhāraṃ ārabbhāti cettha vivādo na kātabbo. Mukhe uppannakheḷopi hi tesaṃ āhārakiccaṃ sādheti. Kheḷo hi niraye dukkhavedanīyo hutvā paccayo hoti, sagge sukhavedanīyo. Iti kāmabhave nippariyāyena cattāro āhārā, rūpārūpabhavesu ṭhapetvā asaññabhavaṃ sesānaṃ tayo , asaññānañceva avasesānañca paccayāhāroti iminā āhārena sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā.
“一切众生”是依补特伽罗而立的法说,其真实用意是指“一切行”。对于世尊,依于法与补特伽罗而有四种说法:以法为立足点的法说,以法为立足点的补特伽罗说,以补特伽罗为立足点的补特伽罗说,以补特伽罗为立足点的法说。……在诸说之中,此处正是以补特伽罗为立足点的法说。应知,由于乃至十法都只摄取了法,而此处却说取众生,便是以取众生来摄取法;或者,应知是以殊胜的智慧,对于系属众生相续中的诸法,从自性上加以审察,所以才说取众生;又或者,依于诸行而安立的“众生”只是假名施设,由此以果为代称,便将诸行称为“众生”。因为除了诸行之外,并不存在任何基于缘的众生,只是随顺世俗语如此说而已。如此,便以此说明了遍知。显示巴利原文
Sabbe sattāti ca puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā, sabbe saṅkhārāti adhippāyo. Bhagavatopi hi dhammapuggalānaṃ vasena catubbidhā desanā – dhammādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā, dhammādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā, puggalādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā, puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanāti. ‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ bhāvitaṃ kammaniyaṃ hoti, yathayidaṃ cittaṃ. Cittaṃ, bhikkhave, bhāvitaṃ kammaniyaṃ hotī’’ti (a. ni. 1.22) evarūpī dhammādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā. ‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (a. ni. 1.268) evarūpī dhammādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā. ‘‘Ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussāna’’nti (a. ni. 1.170, 309), evarūpī puggalādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā. ‘‘Ekapuggalassa bhikkhave, pātubhāvā mahato cakkhussa pātubhāvo hotī’’ti (a. ni. 1.175-186) evarūpī puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā. Tāsu idha puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā . Upari yāva dasakā dhammānaṃyeva gahitattā sattaggahaṇena dhammaggahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ, visesena vā sattasantānapariyāpannadhammānaṃyeva adhikena ñāṇena sabhāvato upaparikkhitabbattā sattaggahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ, saṅkhāre upādāya sattoti paññattimattasambhavato vā phalopacārena saṅkhārā ‘‘sattā’’ti vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Na hi koci satto paccayaṭṭhitiko atthi aññatra saṅkhārehi, vohāravasena pana evaṃ vuccati. Evametena ñātapariññā vuttā hoti.
“二界”:即有为界与无为界。其中,由种种缘和合所造作的五蕴,是有为界;不藉任何缘造作的涅槃,是无为界。显示巴利原文
Dve dhātuyoti saṅkhatā ca dhātu asaṅkhatā ca dhātu. Tattha anekehi paccayehi saṅgamma katā pañcakkhandhā saṅkhatā dhātu, kehici paccayehi akataṃ nibbānaṃ asaṅkhatā dhātu.
「三界」:欲界、色界、无色界(《分别论》181-182)。其中,什么是欲界?下至阿鼻地狱为边际,上至他化自在天为顶,在此范围内,有情所行、所摄的蕴、界、处——色、受、想、行、识,这称为欲界。什么是色界?下至梵天世界为边际,上至阿迦腻吒天为顶,在此范围内,有情所行、所摄的,或是入定者、或是受生者、或是现法乐住者的心与心所法,这称为色界。什么是无色界?下至空无边处天为边际,上至非想非非想处天为顶,在此范围内,有情所行、所摄的,或是入定者、或是受生者、或是现法乐住者的心与心所法,这称为无色界。而在注释书中说:「欲界即是欲有,可获得五蕴;色界即是色有,可获得五蕴;无色界即是无色有,可获得四蕴。」这是依《十上经》的方式而连接的。显示巴利原文
Tisso dhātuyoti kāmadhātu rūpadhātu arūpadhātu (vibha. 181-182). Tattha katamā kāmadhātu? Heṭṭhato avīcinirayaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito paranimmitavasavattī deve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā khandhā dhātū āyatanā rūpā vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati kāmadhātu (vibha. 182; dha. sa. 1287). Tattha katamā rūpadhātu? Heṭṭhato brahmalokaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito akaniṭṭhe deve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa vā cittacetasikā dhammā. Ayaṃ vuccati rūpadhātu. Tattha katamā arūpadhātu? Heṭṭhato ākāsānañcāyatanūpage deve pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpage deve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa vā cittacetasikā dhammā. Ayaṃ vuccati arūpadhātu. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘kāmadhātūti kāmabhavo pañcakkhandhā labbhanti, rūpadhātūti rūpabhavo pañcakkhandhā labbhanti. Arūpadhātūti arūpabhavo cattāro khandhā labbhantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ dasuttarapariyāyena yojanā.
而依《等诵经》的方法,则开示了另外三种界:「出离界」「无嗔界」「无害界」;又有另外三种界:「色界」「无色界」「灭界」;还有另外三种界:「劣界」「中界」「胜界」(《长部·等诵品》)。这些界也适用于此处。与出离相应的寻……乃至正思惟,即称为出离界;一切善法都属于出离界。与无嗔相应的寻……乃至正思惟,即称为无嗔界;凡是对众生所起的慈、慈爱、慈的状态、慈心解脱,便称为无嗔界。与无害相应的寻……乃至正思惟,即称为无害界;凡是对众生所起的悲、悲悯、悲的状态、悲心解脱,便称为无害界(《分别论》182)。「色界」与「无色界」如前文所述。「灭界」即指涅槃。「劣界」指十二种不善心的生起;「中界」指其余属于三界轮回的诸法;「胜界」指九种出世间法。而这一切,皆因无命、无我的实体,故称为「界」。显示巴利原文
Saṅgītipariyāyena pana ‘‘tisso kusaladhātuyo – nekkhammadhātu abyāpādadhātu avihiṃsādhātu. Aparāpi tisso dhātuyo – rūpadhātu arūpadhātu nirodhadhātu. Aparāpi tisso dhātuyo – hīnā dhātu majjhimā dhātu paṇītā dhātū’’ti (dī. ni. 1.3.305) vuttā dhātuyopi ettha yujjanti (vibha. 181-182). Nekkhammapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… sammāsaṅkappo. Ayaṃ vuccati nekkhammadhātu. Sabbepi kusalā dhammā nekkhammadhātu. Abyāpādapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… sammāsaṅkappo abyāpādadhātu. Yā sattesu metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṃ mettācetovimutti. Ayaṃ vuccati abyāpādadhātu. Avihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… sammāsaṅkappo avihiṃsādhātu. Yā sattesu karuṇā karuṇāyanā karuṇāyitattaṃ karuṇācetovimutti. Ayaṃ vuccati avihiṃsādhātu (vibha. 182). Rūpārūpadhātuyo vuttāyeva. Nirodhadhātu nibbānaṃ. Hīnā dhātu dvādasākusalacittuppādā, majjhimā dhātu avasesā tebhūmakadhammā. Paṇītā dhātu nava lokuttaradhammā. Sabbāpi ca nijjīvaṭṭhena dhātu.
「四圣谛」:苦圣谛、苦集圣谛、苦灭圣谛、导向苦灭的道圣谛。这些的详细解释,将于解说圣谛时开演。显示巴利原文
Cattāri ariyasaccānīti dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, dukkhasamudayaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṃ. Imesaṃ vaṇṇanā saccavissajjanesuyeva bhavissati.
“五解脱处”是指:为自利而听闻他人说法;为利他而依所闻法为他人宣说;对所闻法进行读诵;心中对所闻法随思维;以及合适的所缘(如遍、不净等)。这五种即是解脱之因。如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Pañca vimuttāyatanānīti attano hitatthāya parehi pavattitadhammadesanāsavanaṃ, paresaṃ hitatthāya attano yathāsutadhammadesanā, yathāsutassa dhammassa sajjhāyakaraṇaṃ, yathāsutassa dhammassa cetasā anuvitakkanaṃ, kasiṇāsubhādīsu anukūlaṃ ārammaṇanti, imāni pañca vimuccanakāraṇāni. Yathāha –
比丘们,在此,比丘的导师或某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他宣说法要。比丘们,正如导师或那位值得尊敬的同梵行者为比丘说法一般,他便于彼法中成为义与法的亲证者。当他成为亲证者时,便生起欢悦;欢悦者生喜悦;心喜悦者身得轻安;身轻安者感受乐;受乐者心得定。这是第一种解脱处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, tathā tathā so tasmiṃ dhamme atthapaṭisaṃvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṃvedī ca, tassa atthapaṭisaṃvedino dhammapaṭisaṃvedino pāmojjaṃ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedeti, sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati, idaṃ paṭhamaṃ vimuttāyatanaṃ.
复次,比丘们,比丘并没有从导师或某位值得尊敬的同梵行者那里听闻说法,而是将自己所闻、所学的法详细地为他人宣说。比丘们,正如他如此说法,他便于此法中成为义与法的亲证者。当他成为亲证者时,便生起欢悦;欢悦者生喜悦;心喜悦者身得轻安;身轻安者感受乐;受乐者心得定。这是第二种解脱处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno na heva kho satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, api ca kho yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti. Yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno…pe… sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati. Idaṃ dutiyaṃ vimuttāyatanaṃ.
再者,比丘们,有比丘既非由导师或某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他说法,他自己也不将所听闻、所学得的法详细为他人宣说,但他将所听闻、所学得的法详细读诵。比丘们,当比丘这样详细读诵时,……乐者心得定。这是第三种解脱处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno naheva kho satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti, api ca kho yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena sajjhāyaṃ karoti. Yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno…pe… sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati. Idaṃ tatiyaṃ vimuttāyatanaṃ.
再者,比丘们,有比丘既非由导师或某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他说法,他自己也不将所听闻、所学得的法详细为他人宣说,也不详细读诵,但他将所听闻、所学得的法以心随寻思、随伺察,以意遍察。比丘们,当比丘这样以心遍察法时,……乐者心得定。这是第四种解脱处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno naheva kho satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena sajjhāyaṃ karoti, api ca kho yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ cetasā anuvitakketi anuvicāreti manasānupekkhati. Yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno…pe… sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati. Idaṃ catutthaṃ vimuttāyatanaṃ.
再者,比丘们,有比丘既非由导师或某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他说法,他自己也不将所听闻、所学得的法详细为他人宣说,也不详细读诵,也不以心随寻思、随伺察、以意遍察,但他有某一善巧把握、善巧作意、善巧持守、以慧善巧通达的定相。比丘们,正如比丘有某一善巧把握、善巧作意、善巧持守、以慧善巧通达的定相一样,他即于彼法中成为义理感受者与法感受者。当他成为义理感受者与法感受者时,便生起欢悦;欢悦者生起喜悦;意悦者身得轻安;身轻安者感受乐;乐者心得定。这是第五种解脱处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno naheva kho satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena sajjhāyaṃ karoti, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ cetasā anuvitakketi anuvicāreti manasānupekkhati, api ca khvassa aññataraṃ samādhinimittaṃ suggahitaṃ hoti sumanasikataṃ sūpadhāritaṃ suppaṭividdhaṃ paññāya, yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno aññataraṃ samādhinimittaṃ suggahitaṃ hoti sumanasikataṃ sūpadhāritaṃ suppaṭividdhaṃ paññāya tathā tathā so tasmiṃ dhamme atthapaṭisaṃvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṃvedī ca. Tassa atthapaṭisaṃvedino dhammapaṭisaṃvedino pāmojjaṃ jāyati , pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedeti, sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati. Idaṃ pañcamaṃ vimuttāyatana’’nti (a. ni. 5.26; dī. ni. 3.322).
六无上:此处,“无上”即没有更上于这些者;无上本身即是“无上事”,也就是最上之义。此为世尊所说——显示巴利原文
Cha anuttariyānīti ettha natthi etesaṃ uttaranti anuttarāni, anuttarāni eva anuttariyāni, jeṭṭhakānīti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“比丘们,有六种无上。哪六种?见无上、闻无上、得无上、学无上、侍奉无上、随念无上。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Chayimāni (a. ni. 6.8, 30), bhikkhave, anuttariyāni. Katamāni cha? Dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ, lābhānuttariyaṃ, sikkhānuttariyaṃ, pāricariyānuttariyaṃ, anussatānuttariyanti.
“比丘们,什么是见无上?比丘们,于此,有人为见象宝而前往,为见马宝而前往,为见珠宝而前往,或为见种种高低之物而前往,或为见持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门而前往。比丘们,此亦是见,我不说此非见。然而,比丘们,这种见是低劣的、世俗的、凡夫的、非圣的,不带来利益,不导向厌离,不导向离欲,不导向灭尽,不导向寂止,不导向证智,不导向正觉,不导向涅槃。比丘们,若有人以深植的信、深植的爱、一向归趣、极清净之心,为见如来或如来弟子而前往,比丘们,此即诸见中之无上,为令有情清净,为超越愁叹,为止息苦忧,为证得正理,为作证涅槃——即为这些而见如来或如来弟子,以深植的信、深植的爱、一向归趣、极清净之心而前往。比丘们,这称为见无上。如是,此即见无上。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamañca, bhikkhave, dassanānuttariyaṃ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco hatthiratanampi dassanāya gacchati, assaratanampi dassanāya gacchati, maṇiratanampi dassanāya gacchati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana dassanāya gacchati, samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā micchādiṭṭhikaṃ micchāpaṭipannaṃ dassanāya gacchati. Atthetaṃ, bhikkhave, dassanaṃ, netaṃ natthīti vadāmi. Tañca kho etaṃ, bhikkhave, dassanaṃ hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā dassanāya gacchati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, dassanānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāya dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāya ñāyassa adhigamāya nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā dassanāya gacchati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, dassanānuttariyaṃ. Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ.
诸比丘,何谓闻无上?于此,有人为听鼓声而前往,为听琴声而前往,为听歌声而前往,或为听种种高低之音而前往;又或为听闻法而前往持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门。诸比丘,这确实是一种听闻,我并非说没有这种听闻。然而,诸比丘,这种听闻是低劣的……乃至……不导向涅槃。诸比丘,若有人以深植的净信、深植的敬爱、全然归向、极其明净的信心,为听闻法而前往如来或如来弟子——诸比丘,这在诸听闻中是无上的,能令有情清净……乃至……作证涅槃,即是以深植的净信、深植的敬爱、全然归向、极其明净的信心,为听闻法而前往如来或如来弟子。诸比丘,这称为闻无上。如是,有见无上、闻无上。显示巴利原文
‘‘Savanānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco bherisaddampi savanāya gacchati, vīṇāsaddampi savanāya gacchati, gītasaddampi savanāya gacchati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana savanāya gacchati, samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā micchādiṭṭhikassa micchāpaṭipannassa dhammassavanāya gacchati. Atthetaṃ, bhikkhave, savanaṃ, netaṃ natthīti vadāmi . Tañca kho etaṃ, bhikkhave, savanaṃ hīnaṃ…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakassa vā dhammassavanāya gacchati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, savanānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakassa vā dhammassavanāya gacchati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, savanānuttariyaṃ. Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ.
诸比丘,何谓得无上?于此,有人获得儿子,获得妻子,获得财富,或得到种种高低之物;又或对持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门生起信心。诸比丘,这也是一种获得,我并非说没有这种获得。然而,诸比丘,这种获得是低劣的……乃至……不导向涅槃。诸比丘,若有人以深植的净信、深植的敬爱、全然归向、极其明净的信心,对如来或如来弟子生起信心——诸比丘,这在诸获得中是无上的,能令有情清净……乃至……作证涅槃,即是以深植的净信、深植的敬爱、全然归向、极其明净的信心,对如来或如来弟子生起信心。诸比丘,这称为得无上。如是,有见无上、闻无上、得无上。显示巴利原文
‘‘Lābhānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puttalābhampi labhati, dāralābhampi labhati, dhanalābhampi labhati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana lābhampi labhati. Samaṇe vā brāhmaṇe vā micchādiṭṭhike micchāpaṭipanne saddhaṃ paṭilabhati. Attheso, bhikkhave, lābho, neso natthīti vadāmi. So ca kho eso, bhikkhave, lābho hīno…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgate vā tathāgatasāvake vā saddhaṃ paṭilabhati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, lābhānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgate vā tathāgatasāvake vā saddhaṃ paṭilabhati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, lābhānuttariyaṃ . Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ, lābhānuttariyaṃ.
诸比丘,何谓学无上?于此,有人学习象术,学习马术,学习车术,学习弓术,学习刀术,或学习种种高低之术;又或向持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门学习。诸比丘,这也是一种修学,我并非说没有这种修学。然而,诸比丘,这种修学是低劣的……乃至……不导向涅槃。诸比丘,若有人以深植的净信、深植的敬爱、全然归向、极其明净的信心,于如来所宣说的法与律中,学习增上戒、学习增上心、学习增上慧——诸比丘,这在诸修学中是无上的,能令有情清净……乃至……作证涅槃,即是以深植的净信、深植的敬爱、全然归向、极其明净的信心,于如来所宣说的法与律中,学习增上戒、学习增上心、学习增上慧。诸比丘,这称为学无上。如是,有见无上、闻无上、得无上、学无上。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sikkhānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco hatthismimpi sikkhati, assasmimpi sikkhati, rathasmimpi sikkhati, dhanusmimpi sikkhati, tharusmimpi sikkhati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana sikkhati, samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā micchādiṭṭhikassa micchāpaṭipannassa sikkhati. Atthesā, bhikkhave, sikkhā, nesā natthīti vadāmi. Sā ca kho esā, bhikkhave, sikkhā hīnā…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgatappavedite dhammavinaye adhisīlampi sikkhati, adhicittampi sikkhati, adhipaññampi sikkhati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave , sikkhānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgatappavedite dhammavinaye adhisīlampi sikkhati, adhicittampi sikkhati, adhipaññampi sikkhati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sikkhānuttariyaṃ. Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ, lābhānuttariyaṃ, sikkhānuttariyaṃ.
什么是侍奉无上呢?比丘们,世间有人侍奉刹帝利,也侍奉婆罗门,也侍奉居士,或者侍奉种种或高或低的人物;乃至侍奉持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门。比丘们,这确实是一种侍奉,我不说它不存在。然而,比丘们,这种侍奉是低劣的……乃至……不导向涅槃。而比丘们,如果有人以深植的净信、深植的敬爱、全然归向、极明净的信心,侍奉如来或如来弟子。比丘们,这在一切侍奉中是无上的,为了有情的清净……乃至……作证涅槃。这便是以深植的净信、深植的敬爱、全然归向、极明净的信心,侍奉如来或如来弟子。比丘们,这便称为侍奉无上。如此,有见无上、闻无上、得无上、学无上、侍奉无上。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pāricariyānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco khattiyampi paricarati, brāhmaṇampi paricarati, gahapatimpi paricarati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana paricarati, samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā micchādiṭṭhikaṃ micchāpaṭipannaṃ paricarati. Atthesā, bhikkhave, pāricariyā, nesā natthīti vadāmi. Sā ca kho esā, bhikkhave, pāricariyā hīnā…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā paricarati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, pāricariyānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā paricarati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, pāricariyānuttariyaṃ. Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ, lābhānuttariyaṃ, sikkhānuttariyaṃ, pāricariyānuttariyaṃ.
什么是随念无上呢?比丘们,世间有人随念得子,随念得妻,随念得财,或者随念种种或高或低之物;乃至随念持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门。比丘们,这确实是一种随念,我不说它不存在。然而,比丘们,这种随念是低劣的……乃至……不导向涅槃。而比丘们,如果有人以深植的净信、深植的敬爱、全然归向、极明净的信心,随念如来或如来弟子。比丘们,这在一切随念中是无上的,为了有情的清净……乃至……作证涅槃。这便是以深植的净信、深植的敬爱、全然归向、极明净的信心,随念如来或如来弟子。比丘们,这便称为随念无上。比丘们,这些就是六无上。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anussatānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puttalābhampi anussarati, dāralābhampi anussarati, dhanalābhampi anussarati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana anussarati, samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā micchādiṭṭhikaṃ micchāpaṭipannaṃ anussarati. Atthesā, bhikkhave, anussati, nesā natthīti vadāmi. Sā ca kho esā, bhikkhave, anussati hīnā…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā anussarati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, anussatīnaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā anussarati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, anussatānuttariyaṃ. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, cha anuttariyānī’’ti (a. ni. 6.30).
「七种无十之事」(satta niddasavatthūni):此处,「无十」(niddaso)即「他没有十」(natthi etassa dasā)。无十者的状态、造成无十的原因,便是无十之事。因为漏尽者若在十岁时般涅槃,由于不再有结生,此后便不再有十岁,故称为「无十者」。而且不仅不再有十岁,九岁……乃至连一刹那也不再有了。不仅在十岁时般涅槃者如此,即使在七岁时般涅槃者,也是无众生、无十、无刹那的。然而,世尊将外道时期所使用的这个名称,转而用于教法中的漏尽者,为显示外道中没有那样的人,而此处(佛教中)却有,于是开示了那状态的原因,称为「七种无十之事」。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Satta niddasavatthūnīti ettha natthi etassa dasāti niddaso. Niddasassa niddasabhāvassa vatthūni kāraṇāni niddasavatthūni. Khīṇāsavo hi dasavassakāle parinibbuto puna paṭisandhiyā abhāvā puna dasavasso na hotīti niddasoti vuccati. Na kevalañca dasavassova na hoti, navavassopi…pe… ekamuhuttikopi na hotiyeva. Na kevalañca dasavassakāle parinibbuto, sattavassikakāle parinibbutopi nissatto niddaso nimuhutto hotiyeva. Titthiyasamaye uppannavohāraṃ pana sāsane khīṇāsavassa āropetvā tattha tādisassa abhāvaṃ, idha ca sabbhāvaṃ dassento bhagavā tādisasabhāvassa kāraṇāni ‘‘satta niddasavatthūnī’’ti āha. Yathāha –
诸比丘,有七不衰退事。哪七种呢?在此,比丘于受持学处有强烈的意愿,未来对受持学处亦有不退的爱乐;于听闻法有强烈的意愿,未来对听闻法亦有不退的爱乐;于调伏欲望有强烈的意愿,未来对调伏欲望亦有不退的爱乐;于独处有强烈的意愿,未来对独处亦有不退的爱乐;于精进策励有强烈的意愿,未来对精进策励亦有不退的爱乐;于正念善巧有强烈的意愿,未来对正念善巧亦有不退的爱乐;于见的通达有强烈的意愿,未来对见的通达亦有不退的爱乐。诸比丘,这就是七不衰退事。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sattimāni, bhikkhave, niddasavatthūni. Katamāni satta? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sikkhāsamādāne tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca sikkhāsamādāne avigatapemo. Dhammanisantiyā tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca dhammanisantiyā avigatapemo. Icchāvinaye tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca icchāvinaye avigatapemo. Paṭisallāne tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca paṭisallāne avigatapemo. Vīriyārambhe tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca vīriyārambhe avigatapemo . Satinepakke tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca satinepakke avigatapemo. Diṭṭhipaṭivedhe tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca diṭṭhipaṭivedhe avigatapemo. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, satta niddasavatthūnī’’ti (a. ni. 7.20).
长老也同样引述了这个教导,说:“七不衰退事。”显示巴利原文
Theropi tatheva desanaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘satta niddasavatthūnī’’ti āha.
“八胜处”:在此,被胜伏的(所缘)处属于这些禅那,故名“胜处”,即诸禅那。“处”:以依止处的意义,称为“处”的诸遍业处。有殊胜智慧、具清净智的人,胜伏这些所缘而如此思惟:“应于此所缘入定,令心一境性并非难事。”在取相生起的同时,他便于此处引发安止定。如此引发的诸禅那,即称为“胜处”。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭha abhibhāyatanānīti ettha abhibhuyyamānāni āyatanāni etesaṃ jhānānanti abhibhāyatanāni, jhānāni. Āyatanānīti adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanasaṅkhātāni kasiṇārammaṇāni. Ñāṇuttariko hi puggalo visadañāṇo ‘‘kiṃ ettha ārammaṇe samāpajjitabbaṃ. Na mayhaṃ cittekaggatākaraṇe bhāro atthī’’ti, tāni ārammaṇāni abhibhavitvā samāpajjati, saha nimittuppādenevettha appanaṃ nibbattetīti attho. Evaṃ uppāditāni jhānāni ‘‘abhibhāyatanānī’’ti vuccanti.
内有色想者,唯外观诸色,色有限量,有好有丑;胜伏彼色已,便生起“我知、我见”之想。这是第一胜处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamāni (a. ni. 8.65) aṭṭha? Ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ paṭhamaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内有色想者,唯外观诸色,色无有限量,有好有丑;胜伏彼色已,便生起“我知、我见”之想。这是第二胜处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ dutiyaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内无色想者,唯外观诸色,色有限量,有好有丑;胜伏彼色已,便生起“我知、我见”之想。这是第三胜处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ tatiyaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内无色想者,唯外观见诸色,这些色无量无边,或美或丑,胜伏这些色后,他生起“我知、我见”之想。这是第四胜处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ catutthaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内无色想者,唯外观见青色诸色,具青色泽,显为青色,放青色光。譬如乌麻花,青色,具青色泽,显为青色,放青色光;又譬如波罗奈所产布料,两面精磨,青色,具青色泽,显为青色,放青色光。同样地,内无色想者,唯外观见如是青色诸色,胜伏这些色后,生起“我知、我见”之想。这是第五胜处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma umāpupphaṃ nīlaṃ nīlavaṇṇaṃ nīlanidassanaṃ nīlanibhāsaṃ, seyyathāpi vā pana taṃ vatthaṃ bārāṇaseyyakaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ nīlaṃ nīlavaṇṇaṃ nīlanidassanaṃ nīlanibhāsaṃ, evameva ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ pañcamaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内无色想者,唯外观见黄色诸色,具黄色泽,显为黄色,放黄色光。譬如迦尼迦罗花,黄色,具黄色泽,显为黄色,放黄色光;又譬如波罗奈所产布料,两面精磨,黄色,具黄色泽,显为黄色,放黄色光。同样地,内无色想者,唯外观见如是黄色诸色,胜伏这些色后,生起“我知、我见”之想。这是第六胜处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma kaṇikārapupphaṃ pītaṃ pītavaṇṇaṃ pītanidassanaṃ pītanibhāsaṃ, seyyathāpi vā pana taṃ vatthaṃ bārāṇaseyyakaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ pītaṃ pītavaṇṇaṃ pītanidassanaṃ pītanibhāsaṃ, evameva ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内无色想者,唯向外观见诸色,这些色是红色的,具红色之色泽,显为红色,放出红色光泽。譬如般度耆瓦伽花,红色,具红色色泽,显为红色,放出红色光泽;又如波罗奈所产的布料,两面精细平滑,红色,具红色色泽,显为红色,放出红色光泽。同样地,内无色想者,唯向外观见诸色,这些色是红色的,具红色之色泽,显为红色,放出红色光泽。胜伏这些色后,他生起‘我知、我见’之想。这是第七胜处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma bandhujīvakapupphaṃ lohitakaṃ lohitakavaṇṇaṃ lohitakanidassanaṃ lohitakanibhāsaṃ, seyyathāpi vā pana taṃ vatthaṃ bārāṇaseyyakaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ lohitakaṃ lohitakavaṇṇaṃ lohitakanidassanaṃ lohitakanibhāsaṃ, evameva ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ sattamaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内无色想者,唯向外观见诸色,这些色是白色的,具白色之色泽,显为白色,放出白色光泽。正如晨星是白色的,具白色色泽,显为白色,放出白色光泽;又如波罗奈所产的布料,两面精细平滑,白色,具白色色泽,显为白色,放出白色光泽。同样地,内无色想者,唯向外观见诸色,这些色是白色的,具白色之色泽,显为白色,放出白色光泽。胜伏这些色后,他生起‘我知、我见’之想。这是第八胜处。以上便是八胜处。(增支部8.65;长部3.358)显示巴利原文
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma osadhitārakā odātā odātavaṇṇā odātanidassanā odātanibhāsā, seyyathāpi vā pana taṃ vatthaṃ bārāṇaseyyakaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ odātaṃ odātavaṇṇaṃ odātanidassanaṃ odātanibhāsaṃ, evameva ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ. Imāni aṭṭha abhibhāyatanāni (a. ni. 8.65; dī. ni. 3.358).
九次第住:因须次第安住、次第证入,故称‘次第住’,即依顺次第而得证入之住。显示巴利原文
Nava anupubbavihārāti pubbaṃ pubbaṃ anu anupubbaṃ, anupubbaṃ viharitabbato samāpajjitabbato vihārā anupubbavihārā, anupaṭipāṭiyā samāpajjitabbavihārāti attho.
哪九种呢?比丘们,在此,比丘远离欲乐、远离不善法,有寻有伺,由远离而生起的喜与乐,进入并安住于初禅。寻伺止息,内心清净,心成统一,无寻无伺,由定而生起的喜与乐,进入并安住于第二禅。接着,他远离喜,安住于舍,具念正知,以身受乐,如圣者们所说:‘舍、具念、住于乐’,进入并安住于第三禅。然后,他舍断乐、舍断苦,以及先已灭没的喜与忧,进入并安住于不苦不乐、舍念清净的第四禅。再进一步,他完全超越一切色想,灭除有对想,不作意种种想,作意‘虚空无边际’,进入并安住于空无边处。完全超越空无边处,作意‘识无边际’,进入并安住于识无边处。完全超越识无边处,作意‘无所有’,进入并安住于无所有处。完全超越无所有处,进入并安住于非想非非想处。最后,完全超越非想非非想处,进入并安住于想受灭定。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame nava? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti, tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’ti (a. ni. 9.33; dī. ni. 3.343, 359) vuttā nava anupubbavihārāva.
十种尽除事:邪见等能将其尽除、摧毁,故称‘尽除’;‘事’即原因。既是尽除,又是原因,故名‘尽除事’。这是正见等善法的异名。显示巴利原文
Dasa nijjaravatthūnīti micchādiṭṭhādīni nijjarayanti nāsayantīti nijjarāni. Vatthūnīti kāraṇāni. Nijjarāni ca tāni vatthūni cāti nijjaravatthūni. Sammādiṭṭhādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
哪十种呢?比丘们,成就正见的人,他的邪见已断除。以邪见为缘而生起的种种恶、不善法,在他身上也已断除;以正见为缘而生起的种种善法,则通过修习而到达圆满。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamāni (a. ni. 10.106; dī. ni. 3.360) dasa? Sammādiṭṭhikassa, bhikkhave, micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchādiṭṭhipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammādiṭṭhipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,具足正思惟者,其邪思惟已彻底消除;凡以邪思惟为缘而生的种种恶、不善法,于彼亦皆消除;而以正思惟为缘的种种善法,则修习圆满。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammāsaṅkappassa, bhikkhave, micchāsaṅkappo nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchāsaṅkappapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti , te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāsaṅkappapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,具足正语者,其邪语已彻底消除;凡以邪语为缘而生的种种恶、不善法,于彼亦皆消除;而以正语为缘的种种善法,则修习圆满。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammāvācassa, bhikkhave, micchāvācā nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchāvācāpaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāvācāpaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,具足正业者,其邪业已彻底消除;凡以邪业为缘而生的种种恶、不善法,于彼亦皆消除;而以正业为缘的种种善法,则修习圆满。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammākammantassa, bhikkhave, micchākammanto nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchākammantapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammākammantapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正命者,邪命已断;以邪命为缘而生的种种恶、不善法,于彼亦已断除;以正命为缘的种种善法,则修习圆满。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammāājīvassa, bhikkhave, micchāājīvo nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchāājīvapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāājīvapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正精进者,邪精进已断;以邪精进为缘而生的种种恶、不善法,于彼亦已断除;以正精进为缘的种种善法,则修习圆满。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammāvāyāmassa, bhikkhave, micchāvāyāmo nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchāvāyāmapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāvāyāmapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正念者,邪念已断;以邪念为缘而生的种种恶、不善法,于彼亦已断除;以正念为缘的种种善法,则修习圆满。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammāsatissa, bhikkhave, micchāsati nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchāsatipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāsatipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,于具足正定者,邪定已被消尽。以邪定为缘而生起的种种恶、不善法,于彼亦被消尽;而以正定为缘的种种善法,则达至修习圆满。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammāsamādhissa, bhikkhave, micchāsamādhi nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchāsamādhipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāsamādhipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,于具足正智者,邪智已被消尽。以邪智为缘而生起的种种恶、不善法,于彼亦被消尽;而以正智为缘的种种善法,则达至修习圆满。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammāñāṇissa, bhikkhave, micchāñāṇaṃ nijjiṇṇaṃ hoti. Ye ca micchāñāṇapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāñāṇapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
世尊于《增支部》(10.106)、《长部》(3.360)所说之十种消尽事:“比丘们,于正解脱者,邪解脱被消尽。以邪解脱为缘而生起的种种恶、不善法,于彼亦被消尽;而以正解脱为缘的种种善法,则达至修习圆满。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammāvimuttissa , bhikkhave, micchāvimutti nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchāvimuttipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāvimuttipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantī’’ti (a. ni. 10.106; dī. ni. 3.360) vuttāni dasa nijjaravatthūni.
3 当知「比丘们,一切应遍知」等,是世尊所说,在此引用予以说明。其中的「且」(ca) 字,仅是一个凑足音节的小品词。眼等三十种解说,是在六门中每一门各列五项,依门与所缘的生起次第而加以说明的。其中,眼有两种:肉眼与慧眼。慧眼中,有佛眼、遍眼、智眼、天眼、法眼五种。所谓佛眼,即「诸比丘,我以佛眼观察世间时,见……」(《中部》1.283; 2.339; 《大品》9)。所谓遍眼,即「遍眼即是一切知智」(《小义释·陀多迦青年问经释》32; 《摩伽罗阇青年问经释》85)。所谓智眼,即「眼生起,智生起」(《相应部》5.1081; 《大品》15)。所谓天眼,即「诸比丘,我以清净、超人的天眼,见……」(《中部》1.285)。所谓法眼,即「远离尘垢、远离污秽的法眼生起」(《中部》2.395),以上是下三道所摄的智慧。显示巴利原文
3.Sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, abhiññeyyantiādi bhagavatā vuttaṃ idha āharitvā dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Kiñca-iti ca-kāro padapūraṇamatte nipāto. Cakkhādīni tiṃsa vissajjanāni chasu dvāresu ekekasmiṃ pañca pañca katvā dvārārammaṇapavattikkamena niddiṭṭhāni. Tattha duvidhaṃ cakkhu – maṃsacakkhu paññācakkhu ca. Tesu buddhacakkhu samantacakkhu ñāṇacakkhu dibbacakkhu dhammacakkhūti pañcavidhaṃ paññācakkhu. ‘‘Addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento’’ti (ma. ni. 1.283; 2.339; mahāva. 9) idaṃ buddhacakkhu nāma. ‘‘Samantacakkhu vuccati sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. dhotakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 32; mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85) idaṃ samantacakkhu nāma. ‘‘Cakkhuṃ udapādi ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15) idaṃ ñāṇacakkhu nāma. ‘‘Addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.285) idaṃ dibbacakkhu nāma. ‘‘Virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.395) idaṃ heṭṭhimamaggattayasaṅkhātaṃ ñāṇaṃ dhammacakkhu nāma.
肉眼又分两种:扶根尘眼与净色眼。扶根尘眼,即那位于眼眶内,下以眼眶骨、上以眉骨、两侧以眼角、外以睫毛为界,从眼窝中央伸出一缕筋丝系于脑髓,由白、黑、极黑圆环交织而成的肉团。而依止于此、附着于此,由四大种所造之净色,即名净色眼。此处所说的眼,即指此净色眼。此净色眼,位于扶根尘眼白环所围绕的黑环中央,正对面前身体形态所现之处,在视野范围内,如油浸润七层棉布般遍满七层眼膜,量如绿豆粒,作为眼识等的依处与门,各随其宜而住立。它能视,故为眼,即品味色、显了色之义。能显现者,故为色,即当颜色变化时,能令所缘入于心中而显现之义。从眼生起之识,或眼之识,为眼识。能触者,为触。加前缀「等」(sam) 以庄严词语,故称为等触。从眼生起的等触,即眼触。眼触为缘,即以与眼识相应之触为缘。感受,即领纳,为受之义。彼能令乐,故为乐,即令生起者得安乐之义。或极能吞噬、挖掘身心之病,故为乐。能令苦,故为苦,即令生起者受苦之义。不苦不乐,为不苦不乐受。其中「不」(a) 字为连音而说。而此眼触,对于与自己相应之受,以俱生、相互、依止、异熟、显示巴利原文
Maṃsacakkhupi sasambhāracakkhu , pasādacakkhūti duvidhaṃ hoti. Yvāyaṃ akkhikūpake patiṭṭhito heṭṭhā akkhikūpakaṭṭhikena upari bhamukaṭṭhikena ubhato akkhikūṭehi bahiddhā akkhipakhumehi paricchinno akkhikūpakamajjhā nikkhantena nhārusuttakena matthaluṅge ābaddho setakaṇhātikaṇhamaṇḍalavicitto maṃsapiṇḍo, idaṃ sasambhāracakkhu nāma. Yo pana ettha sito ettha paṭibaddho catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya pasādo, idaṃ pasādacakkhu nāma. Idamidhādhippetaṃ. Tadetaṃ tassa sasambhāracakkhuno setamaṇḍalaparikkhittassa kaṇhamaṇḍalassa majjhe abhimukhe ṭhitānaṃ sarīrasaṇṭhānuppattidese diṭṭhimaṇḍale sattasu picupaṭalesu āsittatelaṃ picupaṭalāni viya satta akkhipaṭalāni byāpetvā pamāṇato muggavidalamattaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Taṃ cakkhatīti cakkhu, rūpaṃ assādeti vibhāveti cāti attho. Rūpayantīti rūpā, vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānā hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsentīti attho. Cakkhuto pavattaṃ viññāṇaṃ, cakkhussa vā viññāṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Phusatīti phasso. Upasaggena padaṃ maṇḍetvā samphassoti vuttaṃ. Cakkhuto pavatto samphasso cakkhusamphasso. Cakkhusamphassapaccayāti cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttaphassapaccayā. Vedayitanti vindanaṃ, vedanāti attho. Tadeva sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Suṭṭhu vā khādati, khanati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ. Dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ dukkhitaṃ karotīti attho. Na dukkhaṃ na sukhanti adukkhamasukhaṃ. Ma-kāro padasandhivasena vutto. So pana cakkhusamphasso attanā sampayuttāya vedanāya sahajāta aññamaññanissaya vipākaāhārasampayuttaatthiavigatavasena aṭṭhadhā paccayo hoti, sampaṭicchanasampayuttāya anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatavasenapañcadhā, santīraṇādisampayuttānaṃ upanissayavaseneva paccayo hoti.
能听闻,故为耳。它位于带有扶根尘的耳孔内部,在一处覆有细软褐色毛发、形状如指套的区域,作为耳识等的依处与门,随宜而住。能被发出者,即声;意谓能被言说。能嗅闻,故为鼻。它位于带有扶根尘的鼻腔内部,在形如山羊蹄的区域,作为鼻识等的依处与门,随宜而住。能散发气味者,即香;意思是能显示自己的来源。能唤取生命者,即舌;或以品尝义,亦为舌。它位于带有扶根尘的舌上,避开舌尖、舌根及两侧,在上表面正中央,那形如破睡莲花瓣尖的区域,作为舌识等的依处与门,随宜而住。有情品尝它们,故为味;意思是令满足。诸秽漏法之集起处,故为身。集起处即生起之地。在大部分有执受的此身中,凡有生命的转起,身净色便作为身识等的依处与门,随宜而住。能被触者,即触。能了知,故为意;即能识别。能持自相者,即法。意,指与转向俱的有分心。法,指十二类法所缘。意识,指速行心。意触,指与彼相应之触。彼触对相应之受,除异熟缘外,以其余七缘为缘;对无间之受,亦以彼七缘为缘;对其余之受,唯以亲依止缘为缘。显示巴利原文
Suṇātīti sotaṃ. Taṃ sasambhārasotabilassa anto tanutambalomācite aṅgulivedhakasaṇṭhāne padese sotaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Sappantīti saddā, udāharīyantīti attho. Ghāyatīti ghānaṃ. Taṃ sasambhāraghānabilassa anto ajapadasaṇṭhāne padese ghānaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Gandhayantīti gandhā, attano vatthuṃ sūcentīti attho. Jīvitamavhāyatīti jivhā, sāyanaṭṭhena vā jivhā. Sā sasambhārajivhāya atiaggamūlapassāni vajjetvā uparimatalamajjhe bhinnauppaladalaggasaṇṭhāne padese jivhāviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānā tiṭṭhati. Rasanti te sattāti rasā, assādentīti attho. Kucchitānaṃ sāsavadhammānaṃ āyoti kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. So yāvatā imasmiṃ kāye upādiṇṇappavatti nāma atthi, tattha yebhuyyena kāyapasādo kāyaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamāno tiṭṭhati. Phusīyantīti phoṭṭhabbā. Munātīti mano, vijānātīti attho. Attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentīti dhammā. Manoti sahāvajjanaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ. Dhammāti dvādasapabhedā dhammārammaṇā dhammā. Manoviññāṇanti javanamanoviññāṇaṃ. Manosamphassoti taṃsampayutto phasso. So sampayuttāya vedanāya vipākapaccayavajjehi sesehi sattahi paccayo hoti, anantarāya teheva, sesānaṃ upanissayavaseneva paccayo hoti.
色等五种解说,是依蕴而说。因为被冷等所恼害、逼迫,所以称为色。能感受,所以称为受。能了别,所以称为想。能造作,所以称为行。能识别,所以称为识。眼等乃至法伺的十种解说,是依六六而说;六十种解说,是依可爱、可悦而说。眼触所生之受等,即是与各各相应之受。对于色的想,就是色想。能思虑,所以称为思;意思是能连结。能渴求,所以称为爱;意思是能饮。能寻思,所以称为寻;或者说,寻就是寻思,即粗的推度。心依寻而对于所缘游移,所以称为伺;或者说,游移就是伺,即细的随行。显示巴利原文
Rūpādīni pañca vissajjanāni khandhavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sītādīhi ruppati pīḷīyatīti rūpaṃ. Vedayatīti vedanā. Sañjānātīti saññā. Saṅkharontīti saṅkhārā. Vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ. Cakkhādīni dhammavicārapariyantāni dasa chakkavasena, saṭṭhi vissajjanāni piyarūpasātarūpavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Cakkhusamphassajādikā vedanā taṃtaṃsampayuttāva. Rūpesu saññā rūpasaññā. Sañcetayatīti sañcetanā, abhisandahatīti attho. Tasatīti taṇhā, pipāsatīti attho. Vitakketīti vitakko, vitakkanaṃ vā vitakko, ūhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Ārammaṇe tena cittaṃ vicaratīti vicāro, vicaraṇaṃ vā vicāro, anusañcaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
4 4. 地界等六种解说,是依略说名色分别而说。因为广布,所以称为地。能黏着、被吸收或增长,所以称为水。能热,所以称为火。能吹,所以称为风。不能被耕犁、不能拖曳,不能被切割或破坏,所以称为虚空。以无有情之义,所以称为界。显示巴利原文
4.Pathavīdhātādīni cha vissajjanāni saṃkhittena nāmarūpavavatthānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Patthaṭattā pathavī. Appeti, āpīyati, appāyatīti vā āpo. Tejayatīti tejo. Vāyatīti vāyo. Na kassati na nikassati, kasituṃ chindituṃ bhindituṃ vā na sakkāti ākāso. Nissattaṭṭhena dhātu.
地遍等十种解说,是依遍禅修习而说。所谓遍,因为遍满的缘故,遍的圆盘、于其上现起的相、以彼为所缘的禅那,都称为遍。但在此处,是指禅那。最初四种是以四大遍为所缘的禅那,随后四种是以颜色遍为所缘的禅那。空遍,是指限定虚空,以及以彼为所缘的禅那;除去遍相的虚空,以及以彼为所缘的空无边处。识遍,是指空无边处识,以及以彼为所缘的识无边处。显示巴利原文
Pathavīkasiṇādīni dasa vissajjanāni kasiṇabhāvanāvasena niddiṭṭhāni. Kasiṇanti sakalapharaṇavasena kasiṇamaṇḍalampi tasmiṃ upaṭṭhitanimittampi tadārammaṇaṃ jhānampi vuccati. Idha pana jhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Ādimhi cattāri mahābhūtakasiṇārammaṇāni jhānāni, tato parāni cattāri vaṇṇakasiṇārammaṇāni. Ākāsakasiṇanti paricchedākāso, tadārammaṇañca jhānaṃ, kasiṇugghāṭimākāso, tadārammaṇañca ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ. Viññāṇakasiṇanti ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇaṃ, tadārammaṇañca viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ.
发等三十二种解说,是依三十二行相业处而说的。在彼发等之中,若以厌恶相现前,则依身至念修不净业处;若以色相现前,则为遍业处;若以界相现前,则为四界差别业处。又应知:发等若以厌恶或色相现前而作所缘,可得禅那;若以界相现前,则以其部分及所缘,为界修习。显示巴利原文
Kesādīni dvattiṃsa vissajjanāni dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Tesu pana kesādīsu paṭikūlato upaṭṭhitesu kāyagatāsativasena asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, vaṇṇato upaṭṭhitesu kasiṇakammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, dhātuto upaṭṭhitesu catudhātuvavatthānakammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, kesātiādīni ca paṭikūlato vaṇṇato vā upaṭṭhitānaṃ tadārammaṇāni jhānāni, dhātuto upaṭṭhitassa te ca koṭṭhāsā tadārammaṇā ca dhātubhāvanā veditabbā.
「头发」:以两边的耳尖、前方的额际,以及后方的咽喉处为界,安住于头盖骨所覆的肉膜中,深约一粒米,其数有数十万。显示巴利原文
Kesā ubhosu passesu kaṇṇacūḷikāhi purato nalāṭantena, pacchato ca galavāṭakena paricchinnā sīsakaṭāhaveṭhanacamme vīhaggamattaṃ pavisitvā ṭhitā anekasatasahassasaṅkhā.
身毛:除了发等所住之处,以及手掌、足底之外,大体在身体皮肤上的九万九千毛孔中,没入约一粒虱卵而住。显示巴利原文
Lomā ṭhapetvā kesādīnaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsaṃ hatthatalapādatalāni ca yebhuyyena sarīracamme navanavutiyā lomakūpasahassesu likkhāmattaṃ pavisitvā ṭhitā.
指甲:位于手指尖端,共有二十片。显示巴利原文
Nakhā aṅgulīnaṃ aggapiṭṭhesu ṭhitā vīsati.
牙齿:位于两颚骨上,通常有三十二颗。显示巴利原文
Dantā dvīsu haṇukaṭṭhikesu ṭhitā yebhuyyena dvattiṃsa.
皮肤:遍覆全身,位于可见粗毛之上、表皮之下的那层皮。显示巴利原文
Taco sakalasarīraṃ pariyonandhitvā pākaṭakilomakassa upari chaviyā heṭṭhā ṭhitaṃ cammaṃ.
肉:九百片肉,附着于三百余骨之上而住。显示巴利原文
Maṃsaṃ sādhikāni tīṇi aṭṭhisatāni anulimpitvā ṭhitāni navamaṃsapesisatāni.
筋:九百条筋,连结诸骨、遍布全身而住。显示巴利原文
Nhārū sakalasarīre aṭṭhīni ābandhitvā ṭhitāni nava nhārusatāni.
骨:三百余骨,遍布全身,住于筋之上。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhī sakalasarīre heṭṭhā aṭṭhīnaṃ upari ṭhitāni sādhikāni tīṇi aṭṭhisatāni.
「骨髓」是指存在于每块骨头内部的髓。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhimiñjā tesaṃ tesaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantare ṭhitā miñjā.
「肾脏」是由一根从颈窝发出、稍行一段后分为两股的粗腱所系缚,并环绕心脏肌肉而安住的两块肉团。显示巴利原文
Vakkaṃ galavāṭakā nikkhantena ekamūlena thokaṃ gantvā dvidhā bhinnena thūlanhārunā vinibaddhā hutvā hadayamaṃsaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitā dve maṃsapiṇḍikā.
「心脏」是位于身体内部、两乳之间的心脏肉,内为心的依处,充满约半掌之量的血液,并有一处大如棠梨籽的凹陷。显示巴利原文
Hadayaṃ sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ majjhe ṭhitaṃ anto cittasannissayaṃ aḍḍhapasatamattalohitapuṇṇaṃ punnāgaṭṭhipatiṭṭhānamattāvāṭakaṃ hadayamaṃsaṃ.
「肝脏」:位于两乳内侧之间,贴近右侧而住立的一对肉膜。显示巴利原文
Yakanaṃ dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ abbhantare dakkhiṇapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ yamakamaṃsapaṭalaṃ.
「膈膜」:指包覆肉,有两种:覆膜,覆盖心脏与肾脏而住立;不覆膜,遍全身皮下,包裹肌肉而住立。显示巴利原文
Kilomakaṃ hadayavakkāni paṭicchādetvā ṭhitaṃ paṭicchannakilomakasaṅkhātañca sakalasarīre cammassa heṭṭhato maṃsaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ appaṭicchannakilomakasaṅkhātañcāti duvidhaṃ pariyonahanamaṃsaṃ.
「脾脏」:即胃舌肉,位于心脏左侧,贴近腹腔膜上方而住立。显示巴利原文
Pihakaṃ hadayassa vāmapasse udarapaṭalassa matthakapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ udarajivhāmaṃsaṃ.
「肺」:位于体内两乳之间,覆盖心脏与肝脏,悬垂而住,由三十二块肉片构成。显示巴利原文
Papphāsaṃ sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ antare hadayayakanānaṃ upari chādetvā olambantaṃ ṭhitaṃ dvattiṃsamaṃsakhaṇḍappabhedaṃ papphāsamaṃsaṃ.
「肠」:位于体内,上端系于颈窝,下端系于粪道,以颈窝与粪道为界的盘曲肠管。男子之肠长三十二肘,女子则为二十八肘,于二十一处盘曲。显示巴利原文
Antaṃ upari galavāṭake heṭṭhā karīsamagge vinibandhattā galavāṭakakarīsamaggapariyante sarīrabbhantare ṭhitā purisassa dvattiṃsahatthā itthiyā aṭṭhavīsatihatthā ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu obhaggā antavaṭṭi.
「肠间膜」:系于二十一个肠环之间,将诸肠环捆束一处,令不散解的系缚。显示巴利原文
Antaguṇaṃ antabhoge ekato agalante ābandhitvā ekavīsatiyā antabhogānaṃ antarā ṭhitaṃ bandhanaṃ.
「胃中物」:指被牙齿嚼碎、经舌头和手翻搅、混杂着唾液与痰的食物,落入胃中那一瞬便失去了色泽、香气、味道等品质,如同织布机的污水、狗的呕吐物一般;它被胆汁、痰、风所缠裹,在胃火的灼烧与鼓动中沸腾,里面布满虫子,上方不断冒出泡沫和气泡,成为极度腐烂恶臭的鄙秽状态,安住在脐上方名为‘生熟胃’的内膜里——也就是种种嚼食、饮用、吞食、尝食之物。显示巴利原文
Udariyaṃ dantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ jivhāhatthaparivattitaṃ kheḷalālāpalibuddhaṃ taṃkhaṇavigatavaṇṇagandharasādisampadaṃ tantavāyakhalisuvānavamathusadisaṃ nipatitvā pittasemhavātapaliveṭhitaṃ hutvā udaraggisantāpavegakuthitaṃ kimikulākulaṃ uparūpari pheṇabubbuḷakāni muñcantaṃ paramakasambukaduggandhajegucchabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā āmāsayasaṅkhāte uparinābhiantapaṭale ṭhitaṃ nānappakārakaṃ asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ.
「粪」:即大便,安住在称为‘熟藏’的部位,位于肚脐与脊骨根之间、高度约八指宽的肠道末端。显示巴利原文
Karīsaṃ pakkāsayasaṅkhāte heṭṭhā nābhipiṭṭhikaṇṭakamūlānaṃ antare ubbedhena aṭṭhaṅgulamatte antāvasāne ṭhitaṃ vaccaṃ.
「胆」:有两种:一种称为‘有缚胆’,它依附于肝脏,处在心脏、肌肉与肺之间,位于如同大苦瓜囊一样的胆囊中;另一种称为‘无缚胆’,遍满全身其余各处,唯除头发、体毛、指甲、牙齿这些无肉之处,以及硬而干燥的皮肤。显示巴利原文
Pittaṃ hadayamaṃsapapphāsānaṃ antare yakanamaṃsaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ mahākosātakīkosakasadise pittakosake ṭhitaṃ baddhapittasaṅkhātañca, kesalomanakhadantānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ sarīraṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ abaddhapittasaṅkhātañcāti duvidhaṃ pittaṃ.
「痰」:位于胃膜中的痰,量满一钵他。显示巴利原文
Semhaṃ udarapaṭale ṭhitaṃ ekapatthapūrappamāṇaṃ semhaṃ.
「脓」:当身体部位被木桩、荆棘刺伤,或因打击、火烧等伤害,或因内部界扰动而生起疮疖时,其中之脓乃是腐熟的血液所成。「血」有两种:一为积聚血,充满肝脏下方,点点滴滴流布于心脏、肾、肺的上方,滋润着肾、心脏、肝、肺,量满一钵他;一为循环血,除了无肉可依的头发、体毛、指甲、牙齿以及坚硬干燥的皮肤以外,沿着脉管网遍满整个执受身。显示巴利原文
Pubbo khāṇukaṇṭakapaharaṇaggijālādīhi abhihate vā sarīrappadese abbhantaradhātukkhobhavasena vā uppannesu gaṇḍapīḷakādīsu paripakkalohitapariṇāmo. Lohitaṃ yakanassa heṭṭhābhāgaṃ pūretvā hadayavakkapapphāsānaṃ upari thokaṃ thokaṃ paggharantaṃ vakkahadayayakanapapphāse temayamānaṃ ṭhitaṃ ekapatthapūramattaṃ sannicitalohitasaṅkhātañca, kesalomanakhadantānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca ṭhapetvā dhamanijālānusārena sabbaṃ upādiṇṇasarīraṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ saṃsaraṇalohitasaṅkhātañcāti duvidhaṃ lohitaṃ.
「汗」:当身体被火之热、太阳之热或季节等变化所加热时,从一切毛发与毛孔中流出的水界。显示巴利原文
Sedo aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvikārādīhi santatte sarīre sabbakesalomakūpavivarehi paggharaṇakaāpodhātu.
「脂肪」:厚实之人,遍于全身皮肉之间;瘦削之人,则依附于小腿肉等处,是一种稠厚的油脂。显示巴利原文
Medo thūlassa sakalasarīre cammamaṃsantare kisassa jaṅghamaṃsādīni nissāya ṭhito thinasineho.
「泪」:因喜、忧、不合宜的饮食、时节等而生起,充满眼眶,或停留其中,或流溢而出的水界。显示巴利原文
Assu somanassadomanassavisabhāgāhārautūhi samuṭṭhahitvā akkhikūpake pūretvā tiṭṭhantī vā paggharantī vā āpodhātu.
「膏」:由火之热、日之热、时节不宜等所生体温,多住于手掌、手背、脚掌、脚背、鼻翼、额、肩峰等处,为融化之油脂。显示巴利原文
Vasā aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvisabhāgehi usmājātesu yebhuyyena hatthatalahatthapiṭṭhipādatalapādapiṭṭhināsāpuṭanalāṭaaṃsakūṭesu ṭhito vilīnasineho.
当看见或回忆起那样的食物,将食物放入口中,或因心中烦闷、对某物生起厌恶时,唾液便更多地生起,从两颊流下,停于舌上,是混有泡沫的水界。显示巴利原文
Kheḷo tathārūpaṃ āhāraṃ passantassa vā sarantassa vā mukhe vā ṭhapentassa hadayaṃ vā ākilāyantassa kismiñcideva vā jigucchaṃ uppādentassa bhiyyo uppajjitvā ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya tiṭṭhamānā pheṇamissā āpodhātu.
因不适宜的饮食、时节等致使界扰动,或因哭泣,从脑流下,经上颚孔道向下,充满鼻腔,或停留或流出,是腐臭、不净、黏滑的。显示巴利原文
Siṅghāṇikā visabhāgāhārautuvasena sañjātadhātukkhobhassa vā rodantassa vā antosīse matthaluṅgato galitvā tālumatthakavivarena otaritvā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā tiṭṭhantaṃ vā paggharantaṃ vā pūti asuci picchilaṃ.
它履行关节润滑的作用,住于一百八十关节之内,是黏滑的腐肉。显示巴利原文
Lasikā aṭṭhisandhīnaṃ abbhañjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ asītisatasandhīnaṃ abbhantare ṭhitaṃ picchilakuṇapaṃ.
「尿」:依食物与时节的缘故,住于膀胱内的水界。显示巴利原文
Muttaṃ āhārautuvasena vatthipuṭabbhantare ṭhitā āpodhātu.
「脑」:住于头盖骨内,依止于四条缝合线,为四个团块聚合而成的髓堆。显示巴利原文
Matthaluṅgaṃ sīsakaṭāhabbhantare cattāro sibbinimagge nissāya ṭhito catupiṇḍasamodhāno miñjarāsi.
眼处等十二种解答,是依十二处而宣说的。从处的含义来说,之所以称为「处」,是因为它是诸法来的途径(āyāna)、是扩展(tanana)、是引导(nayana)那广大(āyata)的轮回。确实,在眼、色等之中,那些各依自门与所缘的心、心所法,以各自的领受等作用而「来」(āyatanti),也就是生起、努力、精勤,这便是「来」的含义。再者,这些处使那些已来的法扩展(tanonti),令其广大,这便是「扩展」的含义。还有,在无始轮回中流转的极为广大的轮回之苦,只要它还未回转,这些处便引导(nayanti)、令其持续流转(pavattayanti),这便是「引导」的含义。显示巴利原文
Cakkhāyatanādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni dvādasāyatanavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Āyatanato, āyānaṃ tananato, āyatassa ca nayanato āyatanaṃ. Cakkhurūpādīsu hi taṃtaṃdvārārammaṇā cittacetasikā dhammā sena sena anubhavanādinā kiccena āyatanti uṭṭhahanti ghaṭanti, vāyamantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Te ca pana āyabhūte dhamme etāni tanonti, vitthārentīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idañca anamatagge saṃsāre pavattaṃ atīva āyataṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ yāva na nivattati, tāva nayanti, pavattayantīti vuttaṃ hoti.
再者,“处”(āyatana)一词含有住处、矿藏、集会处、出生地及原因等意义。如世间所说的“自在天处”“瓦苏德瓦处”等,是就住处而称为“处”;“金处”“银处”等,是就矿藏而称为“处”。在教法中,如“于可意处,群鸟依止”等,是就集会处而称为“处”;“南牛道是牛的出生处”等,是就出生地而称为“处”;又如“当念处等存在时,他于任何处皆能作证”等,是就原因而称为“处”。在眼等感官中,种种心、心所法安住于其中,因为它们依凭这些感官而活动,所以眼等是它们的住处;它们又在眼等中广泛散布,以眼等为依止和所缘,所以眼等是它们的矿藏;又因依各自的依处、门及所缘而在各处汇集,所以眼等是它们的集会处;以这些为依止和所缘,便在那里生起,所以眼等是它们的出生地;由于若无眼等则无它们,所以眼等是它们的原因。因此,依如上所说之义,眼即是处,故称“眼处”。其余的处也是如此。显示巴利原文
Apica nivāsaṭṭhānaṭṭhena ākaraṭṭhena samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṭṭhena sañjātidesaṭṭhena kāraṇaṭṭhena ca āyatanaṃ . Tathā hi loke ‘‘issarāyatanaṃ vāsudevāyatana’’ntiādīsu nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘āyatana’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Suvaṇṇāyatanaṃ rajatāyatana’’ntiādīsu ākaro. Sāsane pana ‘‘manorame āyatane, sevanti naṃ vihaṅgamā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.38) samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Dakkhiṇāpatho gunnaṃ āyatana’’ntiādīsu sañjātideso. ‘‘Tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṃ pāpuṇāti sati satiāyatane’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.102; 5.23) kāraṇaṃ. Cakkhuādīsu cāpi te te cittacetasikā dhammā nivasanti tadāyattavuttitāyāti cakkhādayo nesaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ , cakkhādīsu ca te ākiṇṇā tannissayattā tadārammaṇattā cāti cakkhādayo ca nesaṃ ākaro, tattha tattha vatthudvārārammaṇavasena samosaraṇato cakkhādayo ca nesaṃ samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, taṃnissayārammaṇabhāvena tattheva uppattito cakkhādayo ca nesaṃ sañjātideso, cakkhādīnaṃ abhāve abhāvato cakkhādayo ca nesaṃ kāraṇanti yathāvuttenatthena cakkhu ca taṃ āyatanañcāti cakkhāyatanaṃ. Evaṃ sesānipi.
眼界等十八种解答,是依十八界而宣说的。眼等当中的每一种法,随各自的可能,或者‘安立’,或者‘被保持’,或者同时有‘安立’和‘被保持’,或者由这些、在这些当中而‘被保持’,所以称为‘界’。世间的界,确实是以因为特相而确定地存在着,如同金界、银界等产生金、银那样,产生种种轮回之苦。又如同挑担者将担子扛在身上一样,众生被这些界保持、被维持着,这是它的意义。而且,由于不能自在,它们仅仅是苦的安立者。以这些界作为原因,轮回之苦被众生随顺地安立。那种被安立的状态也保持在这些界之中,也就是被安置,这是它的意义。再者,就像外道所执的‘我’那样,自性上并不真实存在,但这些界并非如此。这些界保持着自性,所以称为‘界’。又像世间中各种色彩的雌黄、雄黄等岩石部分被称为‘界’,同样,这些也类似界,所以称为‘界’。因为它们各部分是被智慧所引导的对象。或者,如同在名为‘身体’的集合体的组成部分——如味、血等——它们相互有着不同特相、彼此区隔,而得到‘界’的指示;同样,在这些名为五蕴的有身的组成部分中,也应当知道有‘界’的指示。因为这些眼等是相互有着不同特相而彼此区隔的。再者,‘界’是非命者的同义语。事实上,世尊在《中部》等经中说‘此比丘,人是六界所成’,就是为了破除命想而教导界。依照如上所说的意义,眼即是界,所以称为‘眼界’。其余的界也是如此。意界是指三种意界。法界是指受蕴、想蕴、行蕴、十六种微细色以及涅槃。意识界是指七十六种意识界。显示巴利原文
Cakkhudhātādīni aṭṭhārasa vissajjanāni aṭṭhārasadhātuvasena niddiṭṭhāni. Cakkhādīsu ekeko dhammo yathāsambhavaṃ vidahati, dhīyate, vidhānaṃ vidhīyate, etāya, ettha vā dhīyatīti dhātu. Lokiyā hi dhātuyo kāraṇabhāvena vavatthitā hutvā suvaṇṇarajatādidhātuyo viya suvaṇṇarajatādiṃ, anekappakāraṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ vidahanti. Bhārahārehi ca bhāro viya sattehi dhīyante, dhārīyantīti attho. Dukkhavidhānamattameva cetā avasavattanato. Etāhi ca karaṇabhūtāhi saṃsāradukkhaṃ sattehi anuvidhīyati. Tathāvihitañcetaṃ etāsveva dhīyati, ṭhapīyatīti attho. Apica yathā titthiyānaṃ attā nāma sabhāvato natthi, na evametā. Etā pana attano sabhāvaṃ dhārentīti dhātuyo. Yathā ca loke vicittā haritālamanosilādayo selāvayavā dhātuyoti vuccanti, evametāpi dhātuyo viyāti dhātuyo. Vicittā hetā ñāṇaneyyāvayavāti. Yathā vā sarīrasaṅkhātassa samudāyassa avayavabhūtesu rasasoṇitādīsu aññamaññavisabhāgalakkhaṇaparicchinnesu dhātusamaññā, evamevetesupi pañcakkhandhasaṅkhātassa attabhāvassa avayavesu dhātusamaññā veditabbā. Aññamaññavisabhāgalakkhaṇaparicchinnā hete cakkhādayoti. Apica dhātūti nijjīvamattassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tathā hi bhagavā ‘‘chadhāturo ayaṃ bhikkhu puriso’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.343-344) jīvasaññāsamūhananatthaṃ dhātudesanaṃ akāsīti. Yathāvuttenatthena cakkhu ca taṃ dhātu cāti cakkhudhātu. Evaṃ sesāpi. Manodhātūti ca tisso manodhātuyo. Dhammadhātūti vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhā soḷasa sukhumarūpāni nibbānañca. Manoviññāṇadhātūti chasattati manoviññāṇadhātuyo.
眼根等二十二种解答,是依二十二根而宣说的。眼于“见”的特相上行使根的作用,故称“眼根”。耳于“闻”的特相上行使根的作用,故称“耳根”。鼻于“嗅”的特相上行使根的作用,故称“鼻根”。舌于“尝”的特相上行使根的作用,故称“舌根”。身于“触”的特相上行使根的作用,故称“身根”。能“意知”,故称为“意”,即了知的意思。义注师们则说:犹如用细管仔细测量,或用大秤仔细称量,意能于所缘作意知、了知,故称为“意”;意于“了知”的特相上行使根的作用,故称“意根”。显示巴利原文
Cakkhundriyādīni bāvīsati vissajjanāni bāvīsatindriyavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Cakkhumeva dassanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti cakkhundriyaṃ. Sotameva savanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti sotindriyaṃ. Ghānameva ghāyanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti ghānindriyaṃ. Jivhā eva sāyanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti jivhindriyaṃ. Kāyo eva phusanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti kāyindriyaṃ. Manate iti mano, vijānātīti attho. Aṭṭhakathācariyā panāhu – nāliyā minamāno viya mahātulāya dhārayamāno viya ca ārammaṇaṃ manati jānātīti mano, tadeva mananalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti manindriyaṃ.
与它一同生起的诸法,依它而存活,故称为“命”。此命在守护的特相上行使根的作用,故称“命根”。命根有两种:色命根与非色命根。守护一切业生色及俱生色的,是色命根;守护一切与心俱生的非色法的,是非色命根。显示巴利原文
Jīvanti tena taṃsahajātā dhammāti jīvitaṃ, tadeva anupālanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti jīvitindriyaṃ. Taṃ rūpajīvitindriyaṃ arūpajīvitindriyanti duvidhaṃ. Sabbakammajarūpasahajaṃ sahajarūpānupālanaṃ rūpajīvitindriyaṃ, sabbacittasahajaṃ sahajaarūpānupālanaṃ arūpajīvitindriyaṃ.
因其胎凝结成团,故名为“女子”;在女性特征等上行使根的作用,故名为“根”;必定是女子的根,故名为“女根”。显示巴利原文
Thīyati saṅghātaṃ gacchati etissā gabbhoti itthī, itthiliṅgādīsu indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, niyamato itthiyā eva indriyaṃ itthindriyaṃ.
“Puṃ”意为地狱;在地狱中遭受伤害,故称“男子”。在男性特征等上行使根的作用,故名为“根”;必定是男子的根,故名为“男根”。此二根中,每一种皆依具有相应自性的众生,与各自的业生色一同生起。显示巴利原文
Puṃ-vuccati nirayo, puṃ saṅkhāte niraye risīyati hiṃsīyatīti puriso, purisaliṅgādīsu indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, niyamato purisasseva indriyaṃ purisindriyaṃ. Dvīsupetesu ekekaṃ sabhāvakassa ekekassa kammajarūpasahajaṃ hoti.
与善果报身识相应的乐,在身体舒适的特相上行使根的作用,故称为‘根’;此乐即是根,故称‘乐根’。显示巴利原文
Kusalavipākakāyaviññāṇasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, kāyikasātalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, sukhameva indriyaṃ sukhindriyaṃ.
与不善果报身识相应的苦,在身体不适的特相上行使根的作用,故称为‘根’;此苦即是根,故称‘苦根’。显示巴利原文
Akusalavipākakāyaviññāṇasampayuttaṃ dukkhaṃ, kāyikaasātalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, dukkhameva indriyaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ.
由于与喜和悦相应,心变得美妙,故名为‘善意’;善意的状态即是‘悦’。在内心的愉悦特相上行使根的作用,故称为‘根’;此悦即是根,故称‘悦根’。显示巴利原文
Pītisomanassayogato sobhanaṃ mano assāti sumano, sumanassa bhāvo somanassaṃ, cetasikasātalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, somanassameva indriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ.
「忧根」:因为与忧相应,心变得恶劣;或者因为是低劣的感受,心变得可鄙,所以称为‘恶意’(dummano);恶意的状态就是忧。「根」是指在心所的不适特相上,它行使根的支配作用;因此忧本身就是根,即忧根。
「舍根」:「舍」指它舍弃了苦与乐的运作方式,安住于中舍的行相,并依此行相而转起,故称为舍(upekkhā)。「根」是指在它的中舍特相上,它行使根的支配作用;因此舍本身就是根,即舍根。显示巴利原文
Domanassayogato duṭṭhu mano assāti, hīnavedanattā vā kucchitaṃ mano assāti dummano, dummanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ, cetasikaasātalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, domanassameva indriyaṃ domanassindriyaṃ. Sukhadukkhākārapavattiṃ upekkhati majjhattākārasaṇṭhitattā tenākārena pavattatīti upekkhā, majjhattalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, upekkhā eva indriyaṃ upekkhindriyaṃ.
「信根」:「信」指依此而信,或它自身就是信,或它仅是信的行为,故称为信。「根」指因为它能克服不信,具增上义,故称为根;或者是在决断的特相上,它行使根的支配作用,故称为根;因此信本身就是根,即信根。显示巴利原文
Saddahanti etāya, sayaṃ vā saddahati, saddahanamattameva vā esāti saddhā, assaddhiyassa abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, adhimokkhalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, saddhāyeva indriyaṃ saddhindriyaṃ.
「精进根」:「精进」指英雄的本性即是精进,或是英雄的行为,或是应依方法、理则而被激励、被推动,故称为精进。「根」指因为它能克服懈怠,具增上义,故称为根;或者是在策励的特相上,它行使根的支配作用,故称为根;因此精进本身就是根,即精进根。显示巴利原文
Vīrabhāvo vīriyaṃ, vīrānaṃ vā kammaṃ, vidhinā vā nayena īrayitabbaṃ pavattayitabbanti vīriyaṃ, kosajjassa abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, paggahaṇalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, vīriyameva indriyaṃ vīriyindriyaṃ.
念根:‘念’是指依之而忆念,或自身即忆念,或仅是忆念的作用,故名为念。‘根’是因为能克服失念,以增上之义而为根;或在现起的特相上行使根的作用,故为根。因此,念本身就是根,称为念根。显示巴利原文
Saranti tāya, sayaṃ vā sarati, saraṇamattameva vā esāti sati, muṭṭhasaccassa abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, sati eva indriyaṃ satindriyaṃ.
定根:‘定’是心善安置、安住于所缘,故名为定。‘根’是因为能克服散乱,以增上之义而为根;或在不散乱的特相上行使根的作用,故为根。因此,定本身就是根,称为定根。显示巴利原文
Ārammaṇe cittaṃ sammā ādhiyati ṭhapetīti samādhi, vikkhepassa abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, avikkhepalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, samādhi eva indriyaṃ samādhindriyaṃ.
慧根:‘慧’是以‘这是苦’等方式了知圣谛,故名为慧。而注疏中说:‘通过令了知无常、苦、无我,故名为慧。’‘根’是因为能克服无明,以增上之义而为根;或在见的特相上行使根的作用,故为根。因此,慧本身就是根,称为慧根。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā nayena ariyasaccāni pajānātīti paññā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattāti paññāpanavasena paññā’’ti vuttaṃ. Avijjāya abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, dassanalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, paññā eva indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ.
「未知当知根」:在无始轮回中,修行者为了了知未曾了知的不死(涅槃)之境,或为了了知四圣谛法,而发起“我将了知”之行,由此生起;又因具备根的意义,故称“未知当知根”。这是入流道智的名称。显示巴利原文
Anamatagge saṃsāravaṭṭe anaññātaṃ amataṃ padaṃ catusaccadhammameva vā jānissāmīti paṭipannassa uppajjanato indriyaṭṭhasambhavato ca anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ. Sotāpattimaggañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ.
「已知根」:不超越初道所了知的界限,只了知由该道所了知的四圣谛法,并且由于成就了根的意义,故称“已知根”。这是须陀洹果等六种阶段的智的名称。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamamaggena ñātaṃ mariyādaṃ anatikkamitvā tesaṃyeva tena maggena ñātānaṃ catusaccadhammānameva jānanato indriyaṭṭhasambhavato ca ājānanakaṃ indriyaṃ aññindriyaṃ. Sotāpattiphalādīsu chasu ṭhānesu ñāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ.
「具知根」:对于那些已遍知四圣谛、完成了智的作用的漏尽者,因其生起及根的意义成就,称为“具知根”;或于四圣谛上作用已完成、证悟四圣谛而住立的诸法中,由内在成就了主宰的意义,亦称为“具知根”。这是阿拉汉果智的名称。所有这些根,随其所应,以印相义、印说义、印见义、印教义、印行义而称为根。因为世尊、正自觉者由最上自在而称为“印”,但善与不善业在诸业中并无任何自在。因此,由业所生的根能标示善与不善业,并由彼所教导,故依印相义和印教义而称根。再者,所有这些根都由世尊、牟尼主如实开显并正觉,故依印说义和印见义而称根。又由世尊、牟尼主,某些根通过活动范围的修习,某些根通过修习的修习而被受用,故亦依印行义而称根。更进一步,以增上义即自在义,这些也是根。因为在眼识等的转起中,眼等根的增上作用是确定的:当它锐利时作用锐利,当它迟钝时作用迟钝。显示巴利原文
Aññātāvino catusaccesu niṭṭhitañāṇakiccassa khīṇāsavassa uppajjanato indriyaṭṭhasambhavato ca aññātāvindriyaṃ, aññātāvīnaṃ vā catūsu saccesu niṭṭhitakiccānaṃ cattāri saccāni paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitānaṃ dhammānaṃ abbhantare indaṭṭhasādhanena aññātāvindriyaṃ. Arahattaphalañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sabbānipetāni yathāyogaṃ indaliṅgaṭṭhena indadesitaṭṭhena indadiṭṭhaṭṭhena indasiṭṭhaṭṭhena indajuṭṭhaṭṭhena ca indriyāni. Bhagavā hi sammāsambuddho paramissariyabhāvato indo, kusalākusalañca kammaṃ kammesu kassaci issariyābhāvato. Tenevettha kammajanitāni indriyāni kusalākusalakammaṃ ulliṅgenti , tena ca siṭṭhānīti indaliṅgaṭṭhena indasiṭṭhaṭṭhena ca indriyāni. Sabbāneva panetāni bhagavatā munindena yathābhūtato pakāsitāni abhisambuddhāni cāti indadesitaṭṭhena indadiṭṭhaṭṭhena ca indriyāni. Teneva ca bhagavatā munindena kānici gocarāsevanāya, kānici bhāvanāsevanāya sevitānīti indajuṭṭhaṭṭhenapi indriyāni. Api ca ādhipaccasaṅkhātena issariyaṭṭhenapi etāni indriyāni. Cakkhuviññāṇādipavattiyañhi cakkhādīnaṃ siddhamādhipaccaṃ tasmiṃ tikkhe tikkhattā mande ca mandattāti.
与名为欲贪的欲相结合之界,称为欲界;或者说,名为欲的界,称为欲界。显示巴利原文
Kāmadhātuādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni bhavappabhedavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena yuttā dhātu kāmadhātu, kāmasaṅkhātā vā dhātu kāmadhātu.
舍离欲后,与色结合之界,称为色界;或者说,名为色的界,称为色界。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ pahāya rūpena yuttā dhātu rūpadhātu, rūpasaṅkhātā vā dhātu rūpadhātu.
舍弃了欲与色之后,与无色相应的界,称为“无色界”;或者说,以无色而得名的界,称为“无色界”。显示巴利原文
Kāmañca rūpañca pahāya arūpena yuttā dhātu arūpadhātu, arūpasaṅkhātā vā dhātu arūpadhātu.
那些界又以“有”这一同义语来说明。因为“存在”,故称为“有”。与想相应的有,名为“有想有”;与想相伴的有,名为“有想有”;或者,于此有中有想存在,故名为“有想有”。这便是欲有、除无想有之外的色有,以及除非想非非想有之外的无色有。显示巴利原文
Tā eva dhātuyo puna bhavapariyāyena vuttā. Bhavatīti hi bhavoti vuccati. Saññāya yutto bhavo saññābhavo, saññāsahagato vā bhavo saññābhavo, saññā vā ettha bhave atthīti saññābhavo. So kāmabhavo ca asaññābhavamutto rūpabhavo ca nevasaññānāsaññābhavamutto arūpabhavo ca hoti.
“无想有”即非“有想有”,它是色有的一部分。显示巴利原文
Na saññābhavo asaññābhavo, so rūpabhavekadeso.
由于没有粗想,故说“非想”;由于有微细想可得,故说“非非想”,合为“非想非非想”。与此状态相应的有,即是“非想非非想有”。或者,因为粗想不存在、细想存在,此有中的众生便名为“非想非非想”,所以称为“非想非非想有”。这是无色有的一部分。显示巴利原文
Oḷārikattābhāvato nevasaññā, sukhumattena sambhavato nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññā, tāya yutto bhavo nevasaññānāsaññābhavo. Atha vā oḷārikāya saññāya abhāvā, sukhumāya ca bhāvā nevasaññānāsaññā asmiṃ bhaveti nevasaññānāsaññābhavo, so arūpabhavekadeso.
与一种色蕴相杂的有,具有一种组分,故称“一蕴有”。这也就是无想有。显示巴利原文
Ekena rūpakkhandhena vokiṇṇo bhavo ekena vokāro assa bhavassāti ekavokārabhavo, so asaññabhavova.
与四种无色蕴相杂的有,具有四种组分,故称“四蕴有”。这也就是无色有。显示巴利原文
Catūhi arūpakkhandhehi vokiṇṇo bhavo catūhi vokāro assa bhavassāti catuvokārabhavo, so arūpabhavo eva.
与五蕴混杂的有,也就是以五蕴为其构成部分的有,称为“五蕴有”。这包括了欲有与色有的一部分。显示巴利原文
Pañcahi khandhehi vokiṇṇo bhavo pañcahi vokāro assa bhavassāti pañcavokārabhavo, so kāmabhavo ca rūpabhavekadeso ca hoti.
6 初禅等十二种解答,是从禅那等至的状态来阐述的。这里的“禅那”仅指梵住而言:有寻有伺、有喜有乐、心一境性俱行的,是初禅;有喜有乐、心一境性俱行的,是第二禅;有乐、心一境性俱行的,是第三禅;有舍、心一境性俱行的,是第四禅。显示巴利原文
6.Paṭhamajjhānādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni jhānasamāpattivasena niddiṭṭhāni. Jhānanti idha brahmavihāramattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Vitakkavicārapītisukhacittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ. Pītisukhacittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ. Sukhacittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ. Upekkhācittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ.
“慈”:意为滋润、润泽,也就是柔和的含义。又或者说,它是从友善中产生的,或是友善之人所具的德行,因此称为“慈”。由于脱离了敌对法,且对所缘有决意的倾向,故称为“解脱”;心的解脱即是“心解脱”;慈本身就是心解脱,因此说为“慈心解脱”。显示巴利原文
Medati mejjatīti mettā, siniyhatīti attho. Mitte vā bhavā, mittassa vā esā pavattīti mettā, paccanīkadhammehi muttattā ārammaṇe cādhimuttattā vimutti, cetaso vimutti cetovimutti, mettā eva cetovimutti mettācetovimutti.
“悲”的含义如前所述。显示巴利原文
Karuṇā vuttatthā eva.
具有它的人依此而喜悦,或者它自身就是喜悦,又或者只是喜悦的状态,所以称为“喜”。通过舍弃“愿他们没有怨敌”等的造作,以及达到中舍的状态,所以称为“舍”。慈等三种梵住与初禅、第二禅、第三禅相应。舍梵住则与第四禅相应。显示巴利原文
Modanti tāya taṃsamaṅgino, sayaṃ vā modati, modanamattameva vā tanti muditā. ‘‘Averā hontū’’tiādibyāpārappahānena majjhattabhāvūpagamanena ca upekkhatīti upekkhā. Mettādayo tayo brahmavihārā paṭhamādīhi tīhi jhānehi yuttā. Upekkhābrahmavihāro catutthajjhānena yutto.
由于遍满,它没有边际,因此称为“无边”。虚空是无边的,故称“空无边”,也就是遍满的虚空。此“空无边”作为依处,对于具有相应法的禅那而言,即是它的处所,如同“诸天的天处”一般,故称“空无边处”。空无边处的等至,即是空无边处等至。同样地,由于遍满而没有边际,故称“无边”;以空无边为所缘的识,即是无边的。无边的即是“无边”(ānañca),而此处识的无边并非直接称为“识无边”,而是依惯用语称为“识无边”。此乃惯用说法。此“识无边”作为依处,对于具有相应法的禅那而言,即是它的处所,如同“诸天的天处”一般,故称“识无边处”。没有任何东西(akiñcana),即连丝毫残余都没有,因此称为“无所”。无所的状态(ākiñcañña),是指空无边处识的不存在。此“无所”作为依处,对于具有相应法的禅那而言,即是它的处所,如同“诸天的天处”一般,故称“无所有处”。由于粗的想不存在,而细的想存在,所以这具有相应法的禅那之想,既非想亦非非想,因此称为“非想非非想”。此“非想非非想”属于意处与法处。显示巴利原文
Pharaṇavasena natthi etassa antoti ananto. Ākāso ananto ākāsānanto, kasiṇugghāṭimākāso . Ākāsānantoyeva ākāsānañcaṃ, taṃ ākāsānañcaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa ‘‘devānaṃ devāyatanamivā’’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ. Ākāsānañcāyatanameva samāpatti ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpatti. Pharaṇavasena ca natthi etassa antoti anantaṃ, taṃ ākāsārammaṇaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Anantameva ānañcaṃ, viññāṇaṃ ānañcaṃ ‘‘viññāṇānañca’’nti avatvā ‘‘viññāṇañca’’nti vuttaṃ. Ayañhettha ruḷhisaddo. Taṃ viññāṇañcaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa ‘‘devānaṃ devāyatanamivā’’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ. Natthi etassa kiñcananti akiñcanaṃ, antamaso bhaṅgamattampi assa avasiṭṭhaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Akiñcanassa bhāvo ākiñcaññaṃ. Ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇābhāvassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ ākiñcaññaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa ‘‘devānaṃ devāyatanamivā’’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ. Oḷārikāya saññāya abhāvato, sukhumāya ca bhāvato nevassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa saññā nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññaṃ. Nevasaññānāsaññañca taṃ manāyatanadhammāyatanapariyāpannattā āyatanañcāti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ. Atha vā yāyamettha saññā sā paṭusaññākiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthatāya nevasaññā, saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvena vijjamānattā nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññā, nevasaññānāsaññā ca sā sesadhammānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanañcāti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ. Ākiñcaññāyatanārammaṇāya samāpattiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Na kevalaṃ ettha saññā edisī, atha kho vedanāpi nevavedanā nāvedanā. Cittampi nevacittaṃ nācittaṃ. Phassopi nevaphasso nāphasso. Esa nayo sesasampayuttadhammesu. Saññāsīsena panāyaṃ desanā katāti.
无明等十二种解答,是依缘起支而宣说的。身恶行等是“不应得”(avindiya),因其不正当,意为不可获得。它却获取了那不应得之物,故称为“无明”。反之,身善行等是“应得”(vindiya),它不去获得那应得之物,故也称为“无明”。它令人无法了知蕴的积聚义、处的处义、界的空义、根的主宰义、谛的真实义,故称为“无明”。对于苦等,基于压迫等四方面而说的四重含义,它令人无法了知,故称为“无明”。在无始的轮回中,它驱使有情奔走于一切生、趣、有、识住、有情居,故称为“无明”。它奔走于究竟意义上并不存在的男女等事物中,而对于真实存在的蕴等事物却不奔走,故称为“无明”。再者,它覆蔽眼识等的依处与所缘,以及缘起与缘生法,故称为“无明”。因为造作有为,故称为“行”。因为了知,故称为“识”。因为倾向,或者说因为导向,故称为“名”。因为会变坏,故称为“色”。因为扩展并导向扩展,故称为“处”。因为能接触,故称为“触”。因为能感受,故称为“受”。因为令人颤栗,显示巴利原文
Avijjādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni paṭiccasamuppādaṅgavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Pūretuṃ ayuttaṭṭhena kāyaduccaritādi avindiyaṃ nāma, aladdhabbanti attho. Taṃ avindiyaṃ vindatīti avijjā. Tabbiparītato kāyasucaritādi vindiyaṃ nāma, taṃ vindiyaṃ na vindatīti avijjā. Khandhānaṃ rāsaṭṭhaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanaṭṭhaṃ, dhātūnaṃ suññaṭṭhaṃ, indriyānaṃ adhipatiyaṭṭhaṃ, saccānaṃ tathaṭṭhaṃ aviditaṃ karotīti avijjā. Dukkhādīnaṃ pīḷanādivasena vuttaṃ catubbidhaṃ catubbidhaṃ atthaṃ aviditaṃ karotītipi avijjā, antavirahite saṃsāre sabbayonigatibhavaviññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsesu satte javāpetīti avijjā, paramatthato avijjamānesu itthipurisādīsu javati, vijjamānesupi khandhādīsu na javatīti avijjā, api ca cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ vatthārammaṇānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannānañca dhammānaṃ chādanatopi avijjā. Saṅkhatamabhisaṅkharontīti saṅkhārā. Vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ. Namatīti nāmaṃ, nāmayatīti vā nāmaṃ. Ruppatīti rūpaṃ. Āye tanoti , āyatañca nayatīti āyatanaṃ. Phusatīti phasso. Vedayatīti vedanā. Paritassatīti taṇhā. Upādiyati bhusaṃ gaṇhātīti upādānaṃ. Bhavati, bhāvayatīti vā bhavo. Jananaṃ jāti. Jīraṇaṃ jarā. Maranti etenāti maraṇaṃ.
7 7. 以老死为边际的苦等八百零八种解答,是依四谛系属而宣说的。在“苦应遍知”等之中,依六种四支而有二十四解答;在“眼、老死”的列举中,以“眼应遍知、耳应遍知”等起始,至“生应遍知”结束,配合一百九十五个解答而说。如此便有一百九十五个四支组,依这些四支,有七百八十个解答。加上“老死应遍知”等四支中的“四个解答”,总计为八百零八种解答。其中,以该法为主要因的缘,应知为“集”。一切行灭尽的涅槃,应知为“灭”。在此,由于意指未已知欲知根等三种出世间根的不存在,故“未已知欲知根之灭”等说法也是合理的。而“趣灭之道”在一切处唯是圣道。如此说时,果上也获得了道的称谓,故也适用于已知根与具知根。复次,依苦等的遍知义等,宣说了八百零八种解答;复次,依苦等的遍知通达义等,宣说了八百零八种解答。遍知即依应通达义而为通达,故是遍知通达。遍知通达之义即是遍知通达义。显示巴利原文
7.Dukkhādīni aṭṭhasatāni aṭṭha ca vissajjanāni catusaccayojanāvasena niddiṭṭhāni. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ abhiññeyya’’ntiādīsu hi channaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena catuvīsati vissajjanāni ‘‘cakkhu jarāmaraṇa’’nti peyyāle ‘‘cakkhu abhiññeyyaṃ sotaṃ abhiññeyya’’ntiādinā ‘‘jāti abhiññeyyā’’ti pariyosānena pañcanavutādhikena vissajjanasatena yojetvā vuttāni. Pañcanavutādhikaṃ catukkasataṃ hoti, tesaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena asītiadhikāni satta vissajjanasatāni. ‘‘Jarāmaraṇaṃ abhiññeyya’’ntiādike catukke ‘‘cattāri vissajjanānī’’ti evaṃ sabbāni aṭṭha ca satāni aṭṭha ca vissajjanāni honti. Ettha ca tassa tassa dhammassa padhānabhūto paccayo samudayoti veditabbo. Sabbasaṅkhārehi suññaṃ nibbānaṃ nirodhoti veditabbaṃ. Anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīnaṃ tiṇṇampi hi lokuttarindriyānaṃ ettha abhāvaṃ sandhāya anaññātaññassāmītindriyanirodhotiādi yujjati . Nirodhagāminipaṭipadāti ca sabbattha ariyamaggo eva. Evañhi vuccamāne phalepi maggavohārasambhavato aññindriyaaññātāvindriyānampi yujjati. Puna dukkhādīnaṃ pariññaṭṭhādivasena aṭṭhasatāni aṭṭha ca vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni, puna dukkhādīnaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhaṭṭhādivasena aṭṭhasatāni aṭṭha ca vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Pariññā ca sā paṭivijjhitabbaṭṭhena paṭivedho cāti pariññāpaṭivedho. Pariññāpaṭivedhova attho pariññāpaṭivedhaṭṭho.
8 8. 复次,将那些以老死为边际的苦等二百零二句,与集等七句一一配合,依二百零二组八句之说,宣说了一千六百一十六种解答。其中,作为主要的缘为“集”,其灭为“集灭”。欲即是贪,名为“欲贪”;由于对苦作乐想,而对苦产生欲贪,其灭为“欲贪灭”。以苦为缘而生起的乐与喜悦,是苦的“味”。苦的无常与苦性是变易法,此为苦的“过患”。对苦的欲贪的调伏、欲贪的舍断,是苦的“出离”。根据“凡任何存在物、有为、缘生者,其灭为出离”的教示,涅槃正是苦的出离。“苦灭、集灭、欲贪灭、苦的出离”——在四处,以不同的有为对立的表述,用不同的异门语,皆在说示涅槃,此义应知。然而,有些人说:“由食之集而有苦之集,由食之灭而有苦之灭,此是以自性而言的集灭;或者,由见生灭而得的集灭,随观之圣道为欲贪灭。”若如此说,因出世间根不参与观照,便非普遍共许,故应以前述之理趣为定准。在出世间根中,无有欲贪,故说“欲贪灭”是合理的。于身体有欲贪,于身体部分的头发等也有欲贪;于具有老死者有欲贪,于老死本身也有欲贪。同样地,味与过患也显示巴利原文
8. Puna tāneva dukkhādīni jarāmaraṇapariyantāni dviadhikāni dve padasatāni samudayādīhi sattahi sattahi padehi yojetvā dviadhikānaṃ dvinnaṃ aṭṭhakasatānaṃ vasena sahassañca cha ca satāni soḷasa ca vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Tattha padhānabhūto paccayo samudayo, tassa nirodho samudayanirodho. Chando eva rāgo chandarāgo, dukkhe sukhasaññāya dukkhassa chandarāgo, tassa nirodho chandarāganirodho. Dukkhaṃ paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ sukhaṃ somanassaṃ dukkhassa assādo. Dukkhassa aniccatā dukkhassa vipariṇāmadhammatā dukkhassa ādīnavo. Dukkhe chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānaṃ dukkhassa nissaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ kho pana kiñci bhūtaṃ saṅkhataṃ paṭiccasamuppannaṃ nirodho tassa nissaraṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.24) vacanato nibbānameva dukkhassa nissaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhanirodho samudayanirodho chandarāganirodho dukkhassa nissaraṇa’’nti nānāsaṅkhatapaṭipakkhavasena nānāpariyāyavacanehi catūsu ṭhānesu nibbānameva vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘āhārasamudayā dukkhasamudayo āhāranirodhā dukkhanirodho sarasavasena samudayanirodho, atha vā udayabbayadassanena samudayanirodho saha vipassanāya maggo chandarāganirodho’’ti vadanti. Evañca vuccamāne lokuttarindriyānaṃ avipassanūpagattā na sabbasādhāraṇaṃ hotīti paṭhamaṃ vuttanayova gahetabbo. Lokuttarindriyesu hi chandarāgābhāvatoyeva chandarāganirodhoti yujjati. Sarīre chandarāgeneva sarīrekadesesu kesādīsupi chandarāgo katova hoti, jarāmaraṇavantesu chandarāgeneva jarāmaraṇesupi chandarāgo katova hoti. Evaṃ assādādīnavāpi yojetabbā. Puna dukkhādīni jarāmaraṇapariyantāni dviadhikāni dve padasatāni samudayādīhi chahi chahi padehi yojetvā dviadhikānaṃ dvinnaṃ sattakasatānaṃ vasena nayasahassañca cattāri ca satāni cuddasa ca vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni.
9 现在,为了将色等乃至老死为边际的二百零一句,与七种随观相配合来说明,先举出无常随观等七种随观。所有这些,连同七种纯净随观解答,总计有一千四百一十四种解答。以无常为所缘的随观,称为无常随观,能对治常想。以苦为所缘的随观,称为苦随观,能对治乐想。以无我为所缘的随观,称为无我随观,能对治我想。由前三种随观圆满而起的厌离,此厌离本身即是随观,故称厌离随观,能对治喜。由前四种随观圆满而起的离染,此离染本身即是随观,故称离染随观,能对治贪。由前五种随观圆满而起的灭,此灭本身即是随观,故称灭尽随观,能对治集。由前六种随观圆满而起的舍遣,此舍遣本身即是随观,故称舍遣随观,能对治执取。即使没有出世间根,依‘一切行无常,一切行苦,一切法无我’(法句277-279;无碍解道1.31)的教说,它们也具有无常、苦、无我性;在那里没有常想、乐想、我想、喜与贪,因此成为具足灭的诸法,依此可作随观;又因为存在遍舍舍遣与趣入舍遣的可能,所以它们也被配以七种随观,应当如此了知。对具有老死的诸法,以无常等而修观时,老死也显示巴利原文
9. Idāni rūpādīni jarāmaraṇapariyantāni ekādhikāni dve padasatāni sattahi anupassanāhi yojetvā niddisituṃ paṭhamaṃ tāva aniccānupassanādayo satta anupassanā niddiṭṭhā. Tāni sabbāni sattahi suddhikaanupassanāvissajjanehi saddhiṃ sahassañca cattāri ca satāni cuddasa ca vissajjanāni honti. Aniccanti anupassanā aniccānupassanā. Sā niccasaññāpaṭipakkhā. Dukkhanti anupassanā dukkhānupassanā. Sā sukhasaññāpaṭipakkhā. Anattāti anupassanā anattānupassanā. Sā attasaññāpaṭipakkhā. Tissannaṃ anupassanānaṃ paripūrattā nibbindatīti nibbidā, nibbidā ca sā anupassanā cāti nibbidānupassanā. Sā nandipaṭipakkhā. Catassannaṃ anupassanānaṃ paripūrattā virajjatīti virāgo, virāgo ca so anupassanā cāti virāgānupassanā. Sā rāgapaṭipakkhā. Pañcannaṃ anupassanānaṃ paripūrattā rāgaṃ nirodhetīti nirodho, nirodho ca so anupassanā cāti nirodhānupassanā. Sā samudayapaṭipakkhā. Channaṃ anupassanānaṃ paripūrattā paṭinissajjatīti paṭinissaggo, paṭinissaggo ca so anupassanā cāti paṭinissaggānupassanā. Sā ādānapaṭipakkhā. Lokuttarindriyānaṃ asatipi vipassanūpagatte ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā, sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhā, sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti (dha. pa. 277-279; paṭi. ma. 1.31) vacanato tesampi aniccadukkhānattattā tattha niccasukhattasaññānaṃ nandiyā rāgassa ca abhāvā nirodhavantānīti anupassanato pariccāgapaṭinissaggapakkhandanapaṭinissaggasambhavato ca tehipi satta anupassanā yojitāti veditabbā. Jarāmaraṇavantesu aniccādito diṭṭhesu jarāmaraṇampi aniccādito diṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti, jarāmaraṇavantesu nibbindanto virajjanto jarāmaraṇe nibbinno ca viratto ca hoti, jarāmaraṇavantesu nirodhato diṭṭhesu jarāmaraṇampi nirodhato diṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti, jarāmaraṇavantesu paṭinissajjanto jarāmaraṇaṃ paṭinissajjantova hotīti jarāmaraṇehi satta anupassanā yojitāti veditabbā.
10 现在,依于过患智所依的五种所缘——即生等,宣说生等及其同义词,计有十五种解答;依于寂静智的对治所缘,宣说无生等,亦十五种解答;再将那些生与无生等词配为对句,宣说三十种解答。如此,在此理趣中,共为六十种解答。其中,‘生’:由先前之业为缘,于此处生起。‘转起’:即如是生起之后的延续。‘相’:指一切行的行相;对于修观者,诸行呈现为有造作的样子,故称为相。‘积累’:指成为未来结生之因的业;因具造作之义,故说为积累。显示巴利原文
10. Idāni ādīnavañāṇassa vatthubhūtānaṃ uppādādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ ārammaṇānaṃ vasena uppādādīni tesaṃ vevacanāni pañcadasa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni, santipadañāṇassa tappaṭipakkhārammaṇavasena anuppādādīni pañcadasa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni, puna tāneva uppādānuppādādīni padāni yugaḷakavasena yojetvā tiṃsa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Evaṃ imasmiṃ nayeva saṭṭhi vissajjanāni honti. Tattha uppādoti purimakammapaccayā idha uppatti. Pavattanti tathāuppannassa pavatti. Nimittanti sabbampi saṅkhāranimittaṃ. Yogāvacarassa hi saṅkhārā sasaṇṭhānā viya upaṭṭhahanti, tasmā nimittanti vuccanti. Āyūhanāti āyatiṃ paṭisandhihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ. Tañhi abhisaṅkharaṇaṭṭhena āyūhanāti vuccati.
‘结生’:指未来的再生。因它连接前后世,故称为结生。‘趣’:指结生所依的趣向。因是应往之处,故称为趣。‘再生(Nibbatti)’:指诸蕴的产生。‘再生(Upapatti)’:即《无碍解道》中所说的‘入定者或再生者……’那样的异熟现起。‘生’:指诞生。当有情在此处彼处再生时,诸蕴首次显现,亦即诸蕴的最初显现。‘老’:指衰老。它有两种:即属住灭相的有为行相,以及在一期生命中、相续里诸蕴的旧性——如公认的齿豁等相貌。此处所指的正是这种老。‘病’:以界扰动为缘而生起的八种疾病,即由胆汁、痰、风、集合、时节变化、不平等养护、突然打击、业异熟所引发的疾病。因它能给予种种苦痛,故称为病;或因它能折磨、烧恼、动摇,故称为病。‘死’:指他们以此而死去,故称为死。它有两种:即属灭坏相的有为行相,以及在一期生命中,生命根相续的断绝。此处所指的正是这种死。显示巴利原文
Paṭisandhīti āyatiṃ uppatti. Sā hi bhavantarapaṭisandhānato paṭisandhīti vuccati. Gatīti yāya gatiyā sā paṭisandhi hoti. Sā hi gantabbato gatīti vuccati. Nibbattīti khandhānaṃ nibbattanaṃ. Upapattīti ‘‘samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.72) evaṃ vuttā vipākapavatti. Jātīti jananaṃ. Tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ tesaṃ paṭhamaṃ pātubhāvo. Jarāti jīraṇaṃ. Sā duvidhā ṭhitaññathattalakkhaṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca khaṇḍiccādisammato santatiyaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannakhandhānaṃ purāṇabhāvo ca. Sā idha adhippetā. Byādhīti dhātukkhobhapaccayasamuṭṭhito pittasemhavātasannipātautuvipariṇāmavisamaparihāraupakkamakammavipākavasena aṭṭhavidho ābādho. Vividhaṃ dukkhaṃ ādahati vidahatīti byādhi, byādhayati tāpeti, kampayatīti vā byādhi. Maraṇanti maranti etenāti maraṇaṃ. Taṃ duvidhaṃ vayalakkhaṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyappabandhavicchedo ca. Taṃ idha adhippetaṃ.
“愁”,即忧伤:遭逢亲友、财富、疾病、戒行、见解的损毁时,内心生起的热恼。“悲叹”,即悲泣:遭逢亲友等损毁时,口中发出的哀叹。“绝望”,即极度的恼忧:遭逢亲友等损毁时,由极重意苦所产生的嗔恚。其中,生等五者是以过患智的基本对象而说的,其余则是它们的同义词。即“再生”是“生起”的同义词,“生”是“结生”的同义词,“趣、再生”这一对词是指转起,“老”等是指相。而“不生起”等语,则直接开示了涅槃。显示巴利原文
Sokoti socanaṃ. Ñātibhogarogasīladiṭṭhibyasanehi phuṭṭhassa cittasantāpo. Paridevoti paridevanaṃ. Ñātibyasanādīhiyeva phuṭṭhassa vacīpalāpo. Upāyāsoti bhuso āyāso. Ñātibyasanādīhiyeva phuṭṭhassa adhimattacetodukkhappabhāvito dosoyeva. Ettha ca uppādādayo pañceva ādīnavañāṇassa vatthuvasena vuttā, sesā tesaṃ vevacanavasena. ‘‘Nibbattī’’ti hi uppādassa, ‘‘jātī’’ti paṭisandhiyā vevacanaṃ, ‘‘gati upapattī’’ti idaṃ dvayaṃ pavattassa, jarādayo nimittassāti. Anuppādādivacanehi pana nibbānameva vuttaṃ.
进一步地,再将那些生起、不生起等六十个词,配合苦与乐之句,阐述了六十种释答;配合怖畏与安稳之句,阐述了六十种释答;配合有染着与无染着之句,阐述了六十种释答;配合行与涅槃之句,阐述了六十种释答。在这里,「苦」:因为无常,所以是苦。「乐」:因为它是苦的对立面,所以是乐。凡是苦的,那就是「怖畏」。「安稳」:因为它是怖畏的对立面,所以是安稳。凡是怖畏的,由于它还未脱离轮回的染着和世间的染着,所以是「有染着」。「无染着」:因为它是有的对立面,所以是无染着。凡是有染着的,那只不过就是「行」而已。「涅槃」:因为它是行的对立面,是寂静的,所以是涅槃。因为行是炽燃的,而涅槃是寂静的。应当这样理解:以苦的相状、怖畏的相状、有染着的相状、行的相状,像这样针对每一种相状的流转,而被相应地分别述说。显示巴利原文
Puna tāneva uppādānuppādādīni saṭṭhi padāni dukkhasukhapadehi yojetvā saṭṭhi vissajjanāni, bhayakhemapadehi yojetvā saṭṭhi vissajjanāni, sāmisanirāmisapadehi yojetvā saṭṭhi vissajjanāni, saṅkhāranibbānapadehi yojetvā saṭṭhi vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Tattha dukkhanti aniccattā dukkhaṃ. Dukkhapaṭipakkhato sukhaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ bhayaṃ. Bhayapaṭipakkhato khemaṃ. Yaṃ bhayaṃ, taṃ vaṭṭāmisalokāmisehi avippamuttattā sāmisaṃ. Sāmisapaṭipakkhato nirāmisaṃ. Yaṃ sāmisaṃ, taṃ saṅkhāramattameva. Saṅkhārapaṭipakkhato santattā nibbānaṃ. Saṅkhārā hi ādittā, nibbānaṃ santanti. Dukkhākārena bhayākārena sāmisākārena saṅkhārākārenāti evaṃ tena tena ākārena pavattiṃ sandhāya tathā tathā vuttanti veditabbanti.
11 11.「摄持义」等三十一个释答,是依据圣道生起的刹那而阐述的。与圣道相应的那些法,从一开始就为了生起而被摄持,所以称为「摄持」,它们自身的特性就是摄持义。正是这些法,以相互眷属的状态而存在,所以是「眷属义」。以修习达到圆满的状态,所以是「圆满义」。也正是这些法,由正定的力量而专注于同一个所缘,所以是「一境义」。从它们不分散到种种不同所缘这一面来看,所以叫「不散乱义」。依于正精进的作用,所以是「策励义」。由正定的力量,好比沐浴香粉不会被水冲散一样,这些法也不会离散,所以是「不流散义」。因为与正定结合而不混乱,所以是「无浊义」。因为不被摇动,所以是「不动义」。依于安住在一个所缘的状态,以及依于正定的结合而稳固地住立在一个所缘上的状态,所以是「住立义」。当它以涅槃为所缘的时候,由于成为所缘的状态,所以是「所缘义」。对于那个所缘,能自在活动的状态,所以是「行境义」。以出离和断除的方式,所以是涅槃的「断义」。依于彻底舍弃烦恼的方式,所以是圣道的「遍舍义」。依于从两端一同出起的状态,所以是「出起义」。依于从相续的转起中返还回来的状态,所以是「退还义」。因为已经寂灭,所以是「寂静义」。因为没有热恼,并且最为殊胜,所以是「美妙义」。因为已经从种种烦恼中解脱,并且一心倾向所缘,所以是「解脱义」。由于它不是诸漏活动的范围,是极为清净的,所以是「无漏义」。因为超越了烦恼荒漠和轮回荒漠,所以是「渡越义」。因为没有行的相状,所以是「无相义」。因为没有渴爱的愿望期求,所以是「无愿义」。因为没有可以作为我的坚实之物,所以是「空义」。以解脱的滋味而成为同一滋味,或者以止和观的滋味同一,所以是「一味义」。止与观彼此不互相超越,所以是「不超越义」。正是它们二者如同双驾马车并行的状态,所以是「双运义」。圣道从诸行中脱离开来,所以是「出离义」。因为能证得涅槃,所以是「因义」。因为能现前知见涅槃,所以是「见义」。以作为主导和上首的状态,所以是「增上主义」。显示巴利原文
11.Pariggahaṭṭhādīni ekatiṃsa vissajjanāni ariyamaggakkhaṇavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Ariyamaggasampayuttā hi dhammā ādito pabhuti uppādanatthaṃ pariggayhante iti pariggahā, tesaṃ sabhāvo pariggahaṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva aññamaññaparivārabhāvena parivāraṭṭho. Bhāvanāpāripūrivasena paripūraṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva samādhivasena ekārammaṇapariggahamapekkhitvā ekaggaṭṭho. Nānārammaṇavikkhepābhāvamapekkhitvā avikkhepaṭṭho. Vīriyavasena paggahaṭṭho. Samādhivasena udakena nhānīyacuṇṇānaṃ viya avippakiṇṇatā avisāraṭṭho. Samādhiyogena alulitattā anāvilaṭṭho. Avikampitattā aniñjanaṭṭho. Ekattupaṭṭhānavasenāti samādhiyogena ca ekārammaṇe bhusaṃ patiṭṭhānavasena ca. Ṭhitaṭṭhoti ārammaṇe niccalabhāvena patiṭṭhitaṭṭho. Tassa nibbānārammaṇassa ālambanabhāvena ārammaṇaṭṭho. Tattheva nikāmacārabhāvena gocaraṭṭho. Nissaraṇapahānabhāvena nibbānassa pahānaṭṭho. Kilesapariccāgavasena ariyamaggassa pariccāgaṭṭho. Dubhato vuṭṭhānavasena vuṭṭhānaṭṭho. Nimittapavattehi nivattanavasena nivattanaṭṭho. Nibbutattā santaṭṭho. Atappakattā uttamattā ca paṇītaṭṭho. Kilesehi vimuttattā, ārammaṇe ca adhimuttattā vimuttaṭṭho. Āsavānaṃ avisayabhāvena parisuddhattā anāsavaṭṭho. Kilesakantārasaṃsārakantārātikkamanena taraṇaṭṭho. Saṅkhāranimittābhāvena animittaṭṭho. Taṇhāpaṇidhiabhāvena appaṇihitaṭṭho. Attasārābhāvena suññataṭṭho. Vimuttirasena ekarasatāya, samathavipassanānaṃ ekarasatāya vā ekarasaṭṭho. Samathavipassanānaṃ aññamaññaṃ anativattanaṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva yuganaddhaṭṭho. Ariyamaggassa saṅkhārato niggamane niyyānaṭṭho. Nibbānasampāpanena hetuṭṭho. Nibbānapaccakkhakaraṇena dassanaṭṭho. Adhipatibhāvena ādhipateyyaṭṭhoti.
12 “止”等四个解答,是依止与观而说明的。因随顺无常等相而一再观察,故为“随观义”。对于如同双驾马车并行的止与观二者,由于其味一味,互不超越,故为“不超越义”。“学”等九个解答,是依圣道的初、中、后阶段而说明的。应学故为“学”,应受持故为“受持义”。依戒确立之后,依业处执取的所缘,由于修习于此持续生起,且是心活动之行境,故为“行境义”。在修止或修观时,对于懈怠所导致的沉滞心,以修习择法觉支、正精进觉支、喜觉支而令其振奋,是为“策励义”。对于掉举所导致的浮躁心,以修习轻安觉支、正定觉支、舍觉支而令其平静,是为“抑制义”。“俱得清净”一语,意谓心得双方清净,即排除沉滞与浮躁二边而得清净之心。当知这是针对那些住于中道、以平等状态持续运作的心,而说为复数。在策励与抑制的过程中,并无造作之者,此即“旁观之义”。依于此平等显示巴利原文
12.Samathādīni cattāri vissajjanāni samathavipassanāvasena niddiṭṭhāni. Aniccādivasena anu anu passanato anupassanaṭṭho. Yuganaddhassa samathavipassanādvayassa ekarasabhāvena anativattanaṭṭho. Sikkhādīni nava vissajjanāni ariyamaggassa ādimajjhapariyosānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sikkhitabbattā sikkhā. Tassā samādātabbato samādānaṭṭho. Sīle patiṭṭhāya kammaṭṭhānavasena gahitassa ārammaṇassa bhāvanāpavattiṭṭhānattā gocaraṭṭhānattā ca gocaraṭṭho. Samathakāle vipassanākāle vā kosajjavasena līnassa cittassa dhammavicayavīriyapītisambojjhaṅgabhāvanāvasena ussāhanaṭṭho paggahaṭṭho. Uddhaccavasena uddhatassa cittassa passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgabhāvanāvasena sannisīdāpanaṭṭho niggahaṭṭho. Ubho visuddhānanti ubhato visuddhānaṃ, līnuddhatapakkhato nivāretvā visuddhānaṃ cittānanti attho. Majjhimabhāve ṭhitānaṃ santativasena pavattamānānaṃ cittānaṃ vasena bahuvacanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Ussāhanasannisīdāpanesu sabyāpārābhāvo ajjhupekkhanaṭṭho. Samappavattassa cittassa vasena bhāvanā visesādhigamaṭṭho. Ariyamaggapātubhāvavasena uttaripaṭivedhaṭṭho. Ariyamaggasiddhacatusaccapaṭivedhavasena saccābhisamayaṭṭho. Phalasamāpattivasena nirodhe patiṭṭhāpakaṭṭho. Sā hi taṃsamaṅgipuggalaṃ nirodhasaṅkhāte nibbāne patiṭṭhāpeti.
信根等五个释答,是依据根的义理而说的。「胜解义」,即决意的意思。「近住义」,即靠近所缘而安住的意思。「见义」,即观察自性的意思。信力等五个释答,是依据力的义理而说的。以不可动摇的义理,信即是力,故为「信力」。「以不信」,即由于不信。所谓不信,是指与信对立的心生起。不可动摇义,即不可被摇动的意思,即无法动摇的意思。「以懈怠」,即由称为懒惰状态的昏沉睡眠。「以放逸」,即由与念对立的心生起。「以掉举」,即由称为不寂静的掉举。「以无明」,即由愚痴。念觉支等七个释答,是依据觉支的义理而说的。觉者的支分,为「觉支」。殊胜且善妙的觉支,为「善觉支」;念即是善觉支,故为「念觉支」。能简择诸法,故为「择法」。这是慧的名称。「简择义」,即审察的意思。能令喜悦,故为「喜」。「遍满义」,即散布的意思。令止息,为「轻安」。「寂止义」,即无恼害的意思。依转起而观,故为「舍」,即平等而观,不偏袒而观的意思。此处的舍,是那中舍,亦名为觉支舍。因具有平衡的特相,故为「审视义」。显示巴利原文
Saddhindriyādīni pañca vissajjanāni indriyaṭṭhavasena vuttāni. Adhimokkhaṭṭhoti adhimuccanaṭṭho. Upaṭṭhānaṭṭhoti ārammaṇaṃ upecca patiṭṭhānaṭṭho. Dassanaṭṭhoti sabhāvapekkhanaṭṭho. Saddhābalādīni pañca vissajjanāni balaṭṭhavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Akampiyaṭṭhena saddhāva balanti saddhābalaṃ. Assaddhiyeti assaddhiyena. Assaddhiyanti ca saddhāpaṭipakkhabhūto cittuppādo. Akampiyaṭṭhoti akampetabbaṭṭho, kampetuṃ na sakkāti attho. Kosajjeti kusītabhāvasaṅkhātena thinamiddhena. Pamādeti satipaṭipakkhena cittuppādena. Uddhacceti avūpasamasaṅkhātena uddhaccena. Avijjāyāti mohena. Satisambojjhaṅgādīni satta vissajjanāni bojjhaṅgaṭṭhavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Bujjhanakassa aṅgo bojjhaṅgo. Pasattho sundaro ca bojjhaṅgo sambojjhaṅgo, satiyeva sambojjhaṅgo satisambojjhaṅgo. Dhamme vicinātīti dhammavicayo. Paññāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Pavicayaṭṭhoti vicāraṭṭho. Pīnayatīti pīti. Pharaṇaṭṭhoti visaraṇaṭṭho. Passambhanaṃ passaddhi. Upasamaṭṭhoti niddarathaṭṭho. Upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā, samaṃ pekkhati apakkhapatitāva hutvā pekkhatīti attho. Sā idha tatramajjhattupekkhā, bojjhaṅgupekkhātipi tassā nāmaṃ. Samavāhitalakkhaṇattā paṭisaṅkhānaṭṭho.
正见等八个释答,是依据道的义理而说的。正确地见,或依彼而正确地见,或殊胜、善妙的见,为「正见」。那属于正见。正确地思惟,或依彼而正确地思惟,或殊胜、善妙的思惟,为「正思惟」。「安立义」,即令心安立于所缘的意思。亦有「安立所缘义」的异读。正确地语,或依彼而正确地语,或殊胜、善妙的语,为「正语」。这是远离邪语的名称。「摄持义」,即摄持四种语律仪的意思。正确地作,或依彼而正确地作,或殊胜、善妙的业,为「正业」,正业即是正行。这是远离邪业的名称。「等起义」,即等起三种身律仪的意思。正确地活命,或依彼而正确地活命,或殊胜、善妙的活命,为「正命」。这是远离邪命的名称。「清净义」,即清净的意思。正确地精勤,或依彼而正确地精勤,或殊胜、善妙的精勤,为「正精进」。正确地念,或依彼而正确地念,或殊胜、善妙的念,为「正念」。正确地定,或依彼而正确地定,或殊胜、善妙的定,为「正定」。显示巴利原文
Sammādiṭṭhādīni aṭṭha vissajjanāni maggavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sammā passati, sammā vā tāya passanti, pasatthā sundarā vā diṭṭhīti sammādiṭṭhi. Tassā sammādiṭṭhiyā. Sammā saṅkappeti, sammā vā tena saṅkappenti, pasattho sundaro vā saṅkappoti sammāsaṅkappo. Abhiropanaṭṭhoti cittassa ārammaṇāropanaṭṭho. Ārammaṇābhiniropanaṭṭhotipi pāṭho. Sammā vadati , sammā vā tāya vadanti, pasatthā sundarā vā vācāti sammāvācā. Micchāvācāviratiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Pariggahaṭṭhoti catubbidhavacīsaṃvarapariggahaṭṭho. Sammā karoti, sammā vā tena karonti, pasatthaṃ sundaraṃ vā kammanti sammākammaṃ, sammākammameva sammākammanto. Micchākammantaviratiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Samuṭṭhānaṭṭhoti tividhakāyasaṃvarasamuṭṭhānaṭṭho. Sammā ājīvati, sammā vā tena ājīvanti, pasattho sundaro vā ājīvoti sammāājīvo. Micchājīvaviratiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Vodānaṭṭhoti parisuddhaṭṭho. Sammā vāyamati, sammā vā tena vāyamanti, pasattho sundaro vā vāyāmoti sammāvāyāmo. Sammā sarati, sammā vā tāya saranti, pasatthā sundarā vā satīti sammāsati. Sammā samādhiyati, sammā vā tena samādhiyanti, pasattho sundaro vā samādhīti sammāsamādhi.
13 「根」等十个释答,是汇集之后,依渐次顺序而宣说的。「增上义」,即如因陀罗的作用,是增上的意思。「不可动摇义」,即不能被敌对者所动摇的意思。「出离义」,即从世间与出世间的对立中出离的意思。「因义」,即正见等为断除邪见等之因,或一切正见等为证得涅槃之因,故为因义。在念处中,跃入所缘、投入而安住,故为「安住」;念即是安住,故为「念处」。然而,于身、受、心、法中,依执取不净、苦、无常、无我之行相,及成就舍弃净、乐、常、我想之作用而转起,故有四种分类。这些在前分阶段,可得于不同心中;然于道刹那,唯有一念,得四种名称。显示巴利原文
13.Indriyādīni dasa vissajjanāni rāsikatvā anupubbapaṭipāṭivasena niddiṭṭhāni. Ādhipateyyaṭṭhoti indaṭṭhakaraṇavasena adhipatiattho. Akampiyaṭṭhoti paṭipakkhehi kampetuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṭṭho. Niyyānaṭṭhoti lokiyalokuttarānampi paṭipakkhato niggamanaṭṭho. Hetuṭṭhoti micchādiṭṭhādīnaṃ pahānāya sammādiṭṭhādayo hetūti vā sabbepi sammādiṭṭhādayo nibbānasampāpakahetūti vā hetuṭṭho. Satipaṭṭhānesu ārammaṇesu okkhanditvā pakkhanditvā upaṭṭhānato upaṭṭhānaṃ, satiyeva upaṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Kāyavedanācittadhammesu panassā asubhadukkhāniccānattākāragahaṇavase subhasukhaniccattasaññāpahānakiccasādhanavasena ca pavattito catudhā bhedo hoti. Etāni pubbabhāge nānācittesu labbhanti, maggakkhaṇe pana ekāyeva sati cattāri nāmāni labhati.
于正勤中,依彼而勤,故为「勤」;善妙之勤,为「正勤」。或者说,正确地依彼而勤,故为「正勤」;或者说,彼是善妙的,因为远离烦恼之丑恶,并且是勤,因为能成就利益安乐,故为最上,由于能造作勤的状态,故为「正勤」。这是精进的同义词。然而,依已生、未生之不善法,及未生、已生之善法,以断除、不令生、令生、安住等作用而转起,故有四种分类。这些在前分阶段,亦可得于不同心中;然于道刹那,唯有一精进,得四种名称。「勤励义」,即策励的意思。另有「勤义」的异读,其义相同。显示巴利原文
Sammappadhānesu padahanti etenāti padhānaṃ, sobhanaṃ padhānaṃ sammappadhānaṃ. Sammā vā padahanti etenāti sammappadhānaṃ, sobhanaṃ vā taṃ kilesavirūpattavirahato padhānañca hitasukhanipphādakattena seṭṭhabhāvāvahanato padhānabhāvakaraṇato vā sammappadhānaṃ. Vīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Uppannānuppannānaṃ anuppannuppannānañca akusalakusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānānuppattiuppādaṭṭhitikiccasādhanavasena pavattito panassa catudhā bhedo hoti. Etānipi pubbabhāge nānācittesu labbhanti, maggakkhaṇe pana ekameva vīriyaṃ cattāri nāmāni labhati. Padahanaṭṭhoti ussāhanaṭṭho. Padhānaṭṭhotipi pāṭho, soyevattho.
在「神足」一词中,此处的欲、精进、心、慧,每一者皆能成就,故称为「神」,意思是能圆满成就、能生起。或者,众生依此而成就、增长、达到最殊胜的状态,故这些法称为「神」。依第一种含义,神本身就是足,故为「神足」,意思是神的部分。依第二种含义,为神的足,故为「神足」。「足」是安立处,意思是证得的方法。因为依此而进入、到达更上更上的殊胜——即所谓的神,故称为「足」。这些欲等,在修行的前分阶段,以增上主导之力,存在于不同心中;但在圣道刹那,它们则同时存在。「成就义」即产生义或安立处义。「诸谛」指四圣谛。「真实义」即如其自性之义。这八个释答是世间与出世间相交杂的。「诸精勤」指四种圣道精勤。「止息义」即四种圣果的止息义。因为圣道精勤于果刹那已止息,以其所作已办故;或者说,圣道精勤因圣果的生起而止息。「证得义」即通过省察而对圣果作现证之义;这是指所缘现证,或者说是在果刹那的获得现证。寻等五个释答是依禅支而说的。思索为「寻」,义为思量。伺察为「伺」,义为随行审察。「细伺义」即反复审察之义。「润湿义」即依定力而令心专一。显示巴利原文
Iddhipādānanti ettha chandavīriyacittavīmaṃsāsu ekeko ijjhatīti iddhi, samijjhati nipphajjatīti attho. Ijjhanti vā etāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iddhi, paṭhamenatthena iddhi eva pādo iddhipādo, iddhikoṭṭhāsoti attho. Dutiyenatthena iddhiyā pādoti iddhipādo. Pādoti patiṭṭhā, adhigamūpāyoti attho. Tena hi yasmā uparūpari visesasaṅkhātaṃ iddhiṃ pajjanti pāpuṇanti, tasmā pādoti vuccati. Ete chandādayo pubbabhāge adhipativasena nānācittesu labbhanti, maggakkhaṇe pana saheva labbhanti. Ijjhanaṭṭhoti nipphajjanaṭṭho patiṭṭhānaṭṭho vā. Saccānanti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ. Tathaṭṭhoti yathāsabhāvaṭṭho. Imāni aṭṭha vissajjanāni lokiyalokuttaramissakāni. Payogānanti catunnaṃ ariyamaggapayogānaṃ. Paṭippassaddhaṭṭhoti catunnaṃ ariyaphalānaṃ paṭippassaddhaṭṭho. Maggapayogo hi phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddho hoti niṭṭhitakiccattā. Maggapayogānaṃ phalodayena paṭippassaddhabhāvo vā. Phalānaṃ sacchikiriyaṭṭhoti ariyaphalānaṃ paccavekkhaṇavasena paccakkhakaraṇaṭṭho. Ārammaṇasacchikiriyā vuttā hoti, phalakkhaṇe paṭilābhasacchikiriyā vā. Vitakkādīni pañca vissajjanāni jhānaṅgavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Vitakkanaṃ vitakko, ūhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Vicaraṇaṃ vicāro, anusañcaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Upavicāraṭṭhoti anumajjanaṭṭho. Abhisandanaṭṭhoti temanaṭṭho samādhivasena cittassa ekaggaṭṭho.
转向义等十五种释答,是依杂论而说的。在五门和意门中,有两种心将心相续转向与有分所缘不同的所缘,它们的作用即是“转向义”。识的作用是“了别义”。慧的作用是“了知义”。想的作用是“认知义”。定的作用是“专一义”。在第二禅中,定独自生起,故称“专一”,意谓它不为寻与伺所凌驾,作为最上、最殊胜的状态而生起。于世间中,最上者亦被称为“一”。或者,由于它远离寻与伺,作为单独的、无伴侣的状态生起,亦无不可。又或者,一切善定是诸盖或掉举的对立面,不为它们所凌驾,故作为最上状态而生起;或者,由于远离它们而作为无伴侣的状态生起;这两种情况下,都可将之合理称为“专一”。以证智了知的状态,是“已知义”,即依知遍知而了知自性之义。以遍知进行审察,是“审度义”,即依审度遍知,从无常等角度进行观察之义。以断除而遍舍,是“遍舍义”,即依断遍知而断除对立面之义。修习圆满地进行,是“一味义”。触的作用是“触义”,即接触义、感受义。以压迫、荷负重担等义,为“蕴义”。以空无等义,为“界义”。以各自界限等义,为“处义”。依诸缘和合而造作,故为“有为义”。与此相反,则为“无为义”。显示巴利原文
Āvajjanādīni pañcadasa vissajjanāni pakiṇṇakavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Pañcadvāramanodvāresu bhavaṅgārammaṇato aññārammaṇe cittasantānaṃ namentānaṃ dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ āvajjanaṭṭho. Viññāṇassa vijānanaṭṭho. Paññāya pajānanaṭṭho. Saññāya sañjānanaṭṭho. Samādhissa ekodaṭṭho. Dutiyajjhānasmiñhi samādhi eko udetīti ekodīti vuccati, vitakkavicārehi anajjhāruḷhattā aggo seṭṭho hutvā uppajjatīti attho. Seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccati. Vitakkavicāravirahito vā eko asahāyo hutvā udetītipi vaṭṭati. Sabbopi vā kusalasamādhi nīvaraṇādīnaṃ uddhaccasseva vā paṭipakkhattā tehi anajjhāruḷhoti aggo hutvā udetīti vā tehi virahitoti asahāyo hutvā udetīti vā ekodīti yujjati. Abhiññāya ñātaṭṭhoti ñātapariññāya sabhāvajānanaṭṭho. Pariññāya tīraṇaṭṭhoti tīraṇapariññāya aniccādito upaparikkhaṇaṭṭho. Pahānassa pariccāgaṭṭhoti pahānapariññāya paṭipakkhapajahanaṭṭho. Samappavattāya bhāvanāya ekarasaṭṭho. Phassanaṭṭhoti phusanaṭṭho vindanaṭṭho. Pīḷābhāravahanādinā khandhaṭṭho. Suññādinā dhātuṭṭho. Sakasakamariyādāyatanādinā āyatanaṭṭho. Paccayehi saṅgamma katavasena saṅkhataṭṭho. Tabbiparītena asaṅkhataṭṭho.
14 心义等十五种释词,是从与心的关联角度来解说的。关于“心义”:在此处,能思维所缘者称为心,也就是“识别”的意思。不过,其中若为速行心,它依速行路线的方式累积自身的相续,故也名为心;若为果报心,它是由业与烦恼共同造作而感得的,故也名为心。所有的心,都随各自的情形,因具备认知的状态而称为心,因有造作活动的状态而称为心。再者,凡是成为轮回之缘、能累积轮回之苦的,也名为心。如此,由于对所缘有认知活动等状态,这就是“心义”。“无间”:在它之后,下一个心或果心生起,这之间没有任何间隔,所以名为“无间”。这种无间的特性,即是“无间性”。心的这一无间特性,即是“心无间性”,这也就是心无间性这一作用的意思。具体而言,除了阿拉汉的死亡心之外,任何一颗刚刚灭去的无间心,都有能力让下一个心生起;同样地,道心灭后,无间地有能力令果心生起,这是它的主要意涵。“心的出起”:种姓心从相(有为相)出起,道心从相续(有为相续)出起,这就是出起的作用。“心的回转”:指的就是这两种心,依循显示巴利原文
14.Cittaṭṭhādīni pañcadasa vissajjanāni cittasambandhena niddiṭṭhāni. Cittaṭṭhoti ettha ārammaṇaṃ cintetīti cittaṃ, vijānātīti attho. Yaṃ panettha javanaṃ hoti, taṃ javanavīthivasena attano santānaṃ cinotītipi cittaṃ, yaṃ vipākaṃ hoti, taṃ kammakilesehi citantipi cittaṃ, sabbampi yathānurūpaṃ cittatāya cittaṃ, cittakaraṇatāya cittaṃ, yaṃ vaṭṭassa paccayo hoti, taṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ cinotītipi cittaṃ. Evaṃ ārammaṇe cittatādito cittaṭṭho. Cittuppādane phaluppādane vā nāssa antaramatthīti anantaraṃ, anantarassa bhāvo ānantariyaṃ, cittassa ānantariyaṃ cittānantariyaṃ, so cittānantariyaṭṭho. Arahato cuticittaṃ vajjetvā yassa kassaci samanantaraniruddhassa cittassa anantaracittuppādane samatthabhāvo maggacittassa anantaraṃ phaluppādane samatthabhāvoti adhippāyo. Cittassa vuṭṭhānaṭṭhoti gotrabhucittassa nimittato, maggacittassa nimittapavattato vuṭṭhānaṭṭho. Cittassa vivaṭṭanaṭṭhoti tasseva cittadvayassa yathāvuttato vuṭṭhitassa nibbāne vivaṭṭanaṭṭho. Cittassa hetuṭṭhoti cittassa hetupaccayabhūtānaṃ navannaṃ hetūnaṃ hetuṭṭho. Cittassa paccayaṭṭhoti cittassa vatthārammaṇādīnaṃ anekesaṃ paccayānaṃ paccayaṭṭho. Cittassa vatthuṭṭhoti cittassa vatthubhūtānaṃ cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyahadayavatthūnaṃ vatthuṭṭho. Cittassa bhūmaṭṭhoti cittassa uppattidesavasena kāmāvacarādibhūmiattho. Cittassa ārammaṇaṭṭhoti rūpādiārammaṇaṭṭho. Paricitassārammaṇassa sañcaraṇaṭṭhānaṭṭhena gocaraṭṭho. Upari vuttaviññāṇacariyāvasena cariyaṭṭho. Atha vā payogasamudācāraṭṭho cariyaṭṭho. Cittassa gamanābhāvepi dūrasantikārammaṇagahaṇavasena gataṭṭho. Abhinīhāraṭṭhoti gahitārammaṇato aññārammaṇamanasikāratthaṃ cittassa abhinīharaṇaṭṭho. Cittassa niyyānaṭṭhoti maggacittassa vaṭṭato niyyānaṭṭho. ‘‘Nekkhammaṃ paṭiladdhassa kāmacchandato cittaṃ nissaṭaṃ hotī’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.24, 191 thokaṃ visadisaṃ) nayena cittassa nissaraṇaṭṭho.
15 一性义等四十二种释词,是与“一性”相关联来解说的。“一性”,指所缘的单一性,也就是心专注于同一所缘的意思。依初禅而进入所缘,这是“进入(投入)的作用”。依第二禅而获得净信,这是“净信的作用”。依第三禅而安住,这是“安住的作用”。依第四禅而从对立中解脱,这是“解脱的作用”。依观察而洞见“这是寂静的”,这是“观见的作用”。“已修习状态”等五种词,是显示定自在力差别的。“已修习状态”的作用是:变得像已调伏、随时可用的车乘一般。“已为所依状态”的作用是:在作为稳固基础的意义上,变得如同地基。“已常作状态”的作用是:成为现前的、已掌握的状态。“已熟习状态”的作用是:从各方面完全熟悉、反复修习的状态。“善精勤状态”的作用是:善于精勤,即善加完成的状态。或者,可按转向自在、入定自在、决意自在、出定自在、观察自在的顺序,来对应这五种词。当依遍处等所缘进行修习达到顶峰时,心与心所法被完全掌握、随顺和圆满,这是“摄持、随从、圆满的作用”。由于它们正确地安止于同一所缘,汇集一处,显示巴利原文
15.Ekattādīni dvācattālīsa vissajjanāni ekattasambandhena niddiṭṭhāni. Ekatteti ārammaṇekatte, ekārammaṇeti attho. Paṭhamajjhānavasena pakkhandanaṭṭho. Dutiyajjhānavasena pasīdanaṭṭho. Tatiyajjhānavasena santiṭṭhanaṭṭho. Catutthajjhānavasena muccanaṭṭho. Paccavekkhaṇavasena etaṃ santanti passanaṭṭho. Yānīkataṭṭhādayo pañca samādhissa vasībhāvavisesā. Yānīkataṭṭhoti yuttayānasadisakataṭṭho. Vatthukataṭṭhoti patiṭṭhaṭṭhena vatthu viya kataṭṭho. Anuṭṭhitaṭṭhoti paccupaṭṭhitaṭṭho. Paricitaṭṭhoti samantato citaṭṭho. Susamāraddhaṭṭhoti suṭṭhu samāraddhaṭṭho , sukataṭṭhoti attho. Āvajjanasamāpajjanaadhiṭṭhānavuṭṭhānapaccavekkhaṇavasitāvasena vā paṭipāṭiyā pañca padāni yojetabbāni. Kasiṇādiārammaṇabhāvanāya sikhāppattakāle cittacetasikānaṃ pariggahaparivāraparipūraṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva sammā samāhitattā ekārammaṇe samosaraṇena samodhānaṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva balappattiyā ārammaṇaṃ abhibhavitvā patiṭṭhānavasena adhiṭṭhānaṭṭho. Samathassa vipassanāya vā ādito, ādarena vā sevanavasena āsevanaṭṭho. Vaḍḍhanavasena bhāvanaṭṭho. Punappunaṃ karaṇavasena bahulīkammaṭṭho. Bahulīkatassa suṭṭhu samuṭṭhitavasena susamuggataṭṭho. Susamuggatassa paccanīkehi suṭṭhu vimuttivasena ārammaṇe ca suṭṭhu adhimuttivasena suvimuttaṭṭho.
觉悟之义等四词,是依觉支而说。入流道觉支的作用,即是“觉悟”;斯陀含道觉支的作用,即是“随觉”;阿那含道觉支的作用,即是“对觉”;阿拉汉道觉支的作用,即是“正等觉”。或者,亦可这样理解:观智阶段觉支的作用为“觉悟”;见道(初道)觉支的作用为“随觉”;修道(后三道)觉支的作用为“对觉”;果位觉支的作用为“正等觉”。应当知道,正是依循此理,诸觉支对于不同阶段的修行者,各以令其觉悟等方式而发挥作用,故而有了觉悟之义等这四种作用。也正因前文所说的这些觉支,以“觉悟”这一意义,成为那位被称作“觉者”的修行者的组成部分,因此它们被称为“菩提分法”。应当知道,前面所说的那些觉支,其“菩提分法之义”等四种意义也是如此。依观智之慧照明所缘,此为“照明的作用”。依次依四种道智,则有照明、辉照、对耀、遍耀的作用。或者,也可理解为:依次四种道智有照明等作用,而果智则有“遍耀的作用”。显示巴利原文
Bujjhanaṭṭhādīni cattāri padāni bojjhaṅgavasena vuttāni. Sotāpattimaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ bujjhanaṭṭho. Sakadāgāmimaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ anubujjhanaṭṭho. Anāgāmimaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ paṭibujjhanaṭṭho. Arahattamaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ sambujjhanaṭṭho. Vipassanābojjhaṅgānaṃ vā bujjhanaṭṭho. Dassanamaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ anubujjhanaṭṭho. Bhāvanāmaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ paṭibujjhanaṭṭho. Phalabojjhaṅgānaṃ sambujjhanaṭṭho. Yathāvuttanayeneva bojjhaṅgānaṃ tassa tassa puggalassa bodhanādikaraṇena bodhanaṭṭhādayo cattāro atthā veditabbā. Yathāvuttānaṃyeva bojjhaṅgānaṃ bujjhanaṭṭhena ‘‘bodho’’ti laddhanāmassa puggalassa pakkhe bhavattā bodhipakkhiyā nāma. Tesaṃ yathāvuttānaṃyeva bodhipakkhiyaṭṭhādayo cattāro atthā veditabbā. Vipassanāpaññāvasena jotanaṭṭho. Kamato catumaggapaññāvasena ujjotanānujjotanapaṭijjotanasañjotanaṭṭho. Kamato catumaggapaññāvasena vā jotanaṭṭhādayo, phalapaññāvasena sañjotanaṭṭho veditabbo.
16 令光辉等十八个释词,是依圣道而解说。圣道在谁的心中现起,即令此人光辉、照耀、闪耀,因此圣道名为“令光辉者”,这便是“令光辉的作用”。由于圣道自身具有极度的光辉状态,这是“自照耀的作用”。因圣道能使烦恼干涸,这是“令热恼的作用”。因圣道以无垢的涅槃为所缘,故自身亦是“无垢的作用”。因与圣道相应的心所法中,无有污垢存在,这是“离垢的作用”。又因“以涅槃为所缘”这件事上,亦无任何污垢,这是“无垢秽的作用”。或可理解为:入流道是“无垢的作用”;斯陀含道与阿那含道是“离垢的作用”;阿拉汉道是“无垢秽的作用”。或者,声闻道是“无垢的作用”;独觉佛道是“离垢的作用”;正自觉者之道是“无垢秽的作用”。因圣道中无有烦恼所导致的不平等、不和谐状态,故是“平等的作用”。如经文中“正确地以慢现观”等用法所示,以断除烦恼为意义,此即“等持(samaya,会合、消泯烦恼会)的作用”。在镇伏断、彼分断、正断、止息断、出离断这五种远离中,圣道属于正断远离,故具有“远离的作用”。显示巴利原文
16.Patāpanaṭṭhādīni aṭṭhārasa vissajjanāni ariyamaggavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Ariyamaggo hi yassuppajjati, taṃ patāpeti pabhāseti virocāpetīti patāpano, tassa patāpanaṭṭho. Tasseva atipabhassarabhāvena sayaṃ virocanaṭṭho. Kilesānaṃ visosanena santāpanaṭṭho. Amalanibbānārammaṇattā amalaṭṭho. Sampayuttamalābhāvena vimalaṭṭho. Ārammaṇakaraṇamalābhāve nimmalaṭṭho. Atha vā sotāpattimaggassa amalaṭṭho. Sakadāgāmianāgāmimaggānaṃ vimalaṭṭho. Arahattamaggassa nimmalaṭṭho. Atha vā sāvakamaggassa amalaṭṭho. Paccekabuddhamaggassa vimalaṭṭho. Sammāsambuddhamaggassa nimmalaṭṭho. Kilesavisamābhāvena samaṭṭho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.28; a. ni. 3.33; 5.200) viya kilesappahānaṭṭhena samayaṭṭho. Vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇasaṅkhātesu pañcasu vivekesu samucchedavivekattā vivekaṭṭho, vinābhāvaṭṭho. Nissaraṇaviveke nibbāne caraṇato vivekacariyaṭṭho. Pañcasu virāgesu samucchedavirāgattā virāgaṭṭho, virajjanaṭṭho. Nissaraṇavirāge nibbāne caraṇato virāgacariyaṭṭho. Pañcasu nirodhesu samucchedanirodhattā nirodhaṭṭho. Dukkhanirodhe nibbāne caraṇato nirodhacariyaṭṭho. Pariccāgapakkhandanavosaggattā vosaggaṭṭho. Ariyamaggo hi samucchedavasena kilesappahānato pariccāgavosaggo, ārammaṇakaraṇena nibbānapakkhandanato pakkhandanavosaggo ca. Vipassanā pana tadaṅgavasena kilesappahānato pariccāgavosaggo, tanninnabhāvena nibbānapakkhandanato pakkhandanavosaggo. Na so idha adhippeto. Vosaggabhāvena caraṇato vosaggacariyaṭṭho. Pañcasu vimuttīsu samucchedavimuttittā vimuttaṭṭho. Nissaraṇavimuttiyaṃ caraṇato vimutticariyaṭṭho.
在欲、精进、心、观这四种神足中,依每一种神足各说十种释义,合计四十个释词,以解说“欲之义”等。“欲之义”:即想要造作的心理状态的作用。以欲为首而开始修习时,它是(修习成就的)“根本(基础)的作用”。因欲能作为俱生诸法的立足处,故是“足(根基)的作用”,或亦可读作“足之义”。因欲是神足,能以主导地位策励修行,故是“精勤的作用”。精勤修行时,能成就所愿,此是“成就的作用”。与信相应时,能坚定认可,此是“胜解的作用”。与精进相应时,能策励心,此是“策励的作用”。与念相应时,能稳固地现起于所缘,此是“现起(安住)的作用”。与定相应时,能令心不散乱,此是“无散乱的作用”。与慧相应时,能观见所缘,此是“见的作用”。“策励之义”即是“精进之义”。以精进为首而开始修习时,精进是根本的作用。由精进自身特性故,是策励的作用。思维之义等,即是“心之义”。以心为首而开始修习时,它是根本的作用。“审察之义”即是“观之义”。以观为首而开始修习时,它是根本的作用。显示巴利原文
Chandavīriyacittavīmaṃsāsaṅkhātesu catūsu iddhipādesu ekekaiddhipādavasena dasa dasa katvā caturiddhipādavasena chandaṭṭhādīni cattālīsa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Kattukamyataṭṭho chandaṭṭho. Chandaṃ sīsaṃ katvā bhāvanārambhakāle mūlaṭṭho. Sahajātānaṃ patiṭṭhābhāvena pādaṭṭho. Padaṭṭhoti vā pāṭho. Iddhipādattā adhipatibhāvena padhānaṭṭho. Payogakāle ijjhanaṭṭho. Saddhāsampayogena adhimokkhaṭṭho. Vīriyasampayogena paggahaṭṭho. Satisampayogena upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Samādhisampayogena avikkhepaṭṭho. Paññāsampayogena dassanaṭṭho. Paggahaṭṭho vīriyaṭṭho. Vīriyaṃ sīsaṃ katvā bhāvanārambhakāle mūlaṭṭho. Sayaṃ vīriyattā paggahaṭṭho. Cintanaṭṭhādiko cittaṭṭho. Cittaṃ sīsaṃ katvā bhāvanārambhakāle mūlaṭṭho. Upaparikkhanaṭṭho vīmaṃsaṭṭho. Vīmaṃsaṃ sīsaṃ katvā bhāvanārambhakāle mūlaṭṭho. Sayaṃ vīmaṃsattā dassanaṭṭho.
17 “苦的逼迫义”等十六个释词,是依四圣谛的真实特征而说的。见到苦,即见到逼迫义;见到苦之积聚的集,即见到有为义;见到能带走一切烦恼热恼的清凉道,即见到热恼义;见到不变易法之灭,即见到变易义;见到集,即见到积聚义;见到由集所集之苦,即见到缘义;见到脱离联结的灭,即见到联结义;见到作为出离的道,即见到障碍义;见到灭,即见到出离义;见到不离烦恼的集,即见到远离义;见到有为的道,即见到无为义;见到如毒的苦,即见到甘露义;见到道,即见到出离义;见到障碍证灭之因的集,即见到因义;见到显示巴利原文
17.Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭhotiādīni soḷasa vissajjanāni saccānaṃ tathalakkhaṇavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Dukkhadassaneneva pīḷanaṭṭho. Dukkhāyūhanasamudayadassanena saṅkhataṭṭho. Sabbakilesasantāpaharasusītalamaggadassanena santāpaṭṭho. Avipariṇāmadhammanirodhadassanena vipariṇāmaṭṭho. Samudayadassaneneva āyūhanaṭṭho. Samudayāyūhitadukkhadassanena nidānaṭṭho. Visaññogabhūtanirodhadassanena saññogaṭṭho. Niyyānabhūtamaggadassanena palibodhaṭṭho. Nirodhadassaneneva nissaraṇaṭṭho. Avivekabhūtasamudayadassanena vivekaṭṭho. Saṅkhatabhūtamaggadassanena asaṅkhataṭṭho. Visabhūtadukkhadassanena amataṭṭho. Maggadassaneneva niyyānaṭṭho. Nibbānasampattiyā ahetubhūtasamudayadassanena hetuṭṭho. Sududdasanirodhadassanena dassanaṭṭho. Kapaṇajanasadisadukkhadassanena uḷārakulasadiso ādhipateyyaṭṭho pātubhavatīti. Evaṃ taṃtaṃsaccadassanena tadaññasaccadassanena ca ekekassa saccassa cattāro cattāro lakkhaṇaṭṭhā vuttā.
“真实义”等十二个释词,是依摄一切法的十二句而说的。“真实义”,即如自性之义;“无我义”,即无我之义;“谛义”,即不虚诳之义;“通达义”,即所应通达之义;“证知义”,即所应证知之义;“遍知义”,即以知遍知、度遍知所遍知之义(或:应被遍知之义);“法义”,即持自性等之义;“界义”,即空等之义;“已知义”,即可了知之义;“作证义”,即所应作证之义;“触达义”,即应以智触达之义;“现观义”,即以观察智正现观之义,或以智获得之义。因为“贤者以义现观”等处,获得亦名为现观。显示巴利原文
Tathaṭṭhādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni sabbadhammasaṅgāhakadvādasapadavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Tathaṭṭhoti yathāsabhāvaṭṭho. Anattaṭṭhoti attavirahitaṭṭho. Saccaṭṭhoti avisaṃvādanaṭṭho. Paṭivedhaṭṭhoti paṭivijjhitabbaṭṭho. Abhijānanaṭṭhoti abhijānitabbaṭṭho. Parijānanaṭṭhoti ñātatīraṇapariññāya parijānitabbaṭṭho. Dhammaṭṭhoti sabhāvadhāraṇādiattho. Dhātuṭṭhoti suññādiattho. Ñātaṭṭhoti jānituṃ sakkuṇeyyaṭṭho. Sacchikiriyaṭṭhoti sacchikātabbaṭṭho. Phassanaṭṭhoti ñāṇena phusitabbaṭṭho. Abhisamayaṭṭhoti paccavekkhaṇañāṇena abhisammāgantabbaṭṭho, ñāṇena paṭilabhitabbaṭṭho vā. Paṭilābhopi hi ‘‘atthābhisamayā dhīro’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.130) viya abhisamayoti vuccati.
18 18. “出离”等七项解答,是依近行定而说的。“出离”,即与欲贪相违的无贪;“光明想”,即与昏沉睡眠相违的、于光明相所起的想;“不散乱”,即与掉举相违的定;“法决定”,即与疑相违的智;“智”,即与无明相违的智;“喜悦”,即与不喜相违的喜。“初禅”等八项解答,则是依色界及无色界等至而说的。下文于色界等至之后,紧接着依与色界禅那的关联,讲述了四梵住。显示巴利原文
18. Nekkhammādīni satta vissajjanāni upacārajjhānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Nekkhammanti kāmacchandassa paṭipakkho alobho. Ālokasaññāti thinamiddhassa paṭipakkhe ālokanimitte saññā. Avikkhepoti uddhaccassa paṭipakkho samādhi. Dhammavavatthānanti vicikicchāya paṭipakkhaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Ñāṇanti avijjāya paṭipakkhaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Pāmojjanti aratipaṭipakkhā pīti. Paṭhamajjhānādīni aṭṭha vissajjanāni rūpārūpasamāpattivasena niddiṭṭhāni. Heṭṭhā pana rūpasamāpattianantaraṃ rūpajjhānasambandhena cattāro brahmavihārā niddiṭṭhā.
“无常随观”等,是依出世间道的前行分——十八种大观而宣说的。然而,前文中仅说明了可与色等七法配合的七种观;但在此处,则解说了全部。若问:为何不宣说“聚思惟”和“生灭观”呢?答:依靠这两种观,“无常随观”等才得以成就,所以当这些被宣说时,那两种也就相当于被宣说了;或者,离开了“无常随观”等,那两种观便无法生起,因此当这些被宣说时,那两种也相当于被宣说了。“坏灭观”:观察现在色蕴等坏灭的智,以及在见到每一蕴坏灭之后,紧接观察以该蕴为所缘的心、心所坏灭的智。“衰灭观”:在见到现在诸蕴坏灭之后,随即类推观察过去、未来诸蕴坏灭的智。“变异观”:由于心已倾向于称为坏灭的灭尽,故而见到一切过去、未来、现在诸蕴皆是变异,这是对一切诸蕴变异相的观察智。“无相观”:如此,见一切行都是变异,进而以无常来观照时,那个无常随观由于断除常相、无有常相,便称为“无相观”。“无愿观”:在无常随观之后生起的苦观,由于断除对乐的希求、无有愿求,便称为“无愿观”。显示巴利原文
Aniccānupassanādīni lokuttaramaggassa pubbabhāge aṭṭhārasamahāvipassanāvasena niddiṭṭhāni. Heṭṭhā pana rūpādīhi yojanūpagā satta anupassanā eva vuttā, idha pana sabbāpi vuttā. Kalāpasammasanaudayabbayānupassanā kasmā na vuttāti ce? Tāsaṃ dvinnaṃ vasena aniccānupassanādīnaṃ sijjhanato imāsu vuttāsu tā dvepi vuttāva honti, aniccānupassanādīhi vā vinā tāsaṃ dvinnaṃ appavattito imāsu vuttāsu tā dvepi vuttāva honti. Khayānupassanāti paccuppannānaṃ rūpakkhandhādīnaṃ bhaṅgadassanañāṇañca taṃtaṃkhandhabhaṅgadassanānantaraṃ tadārammaṇacittacetasikabhaṅgadassanañāṇañca. Vayānupassanāti paccuppannānaṃ khandhānaṃ bhaṅgadassanānantaraṃ tadanvayeneva atītānāgatakhandhānaṃ bhaṅgadassanañāṇaṃ. Vipariṇāmānupassanāti tasmiṃ bhaṅgasaṅkhāte nirodhe adhimuttattā, atha sabbepi atītānāgatapaccuppannā khandhā vipariṇāmavantoti sabbesaṃ vipariṇāmadassanañāṇaṃ. Animittānupassanāti evaṃ sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ vipariṇāmaṃ disvā aniccato vipassantassa aniccānupassanāva niccanimittapajahanavasena niccanimittābhāvā animittānupassanā nāma hoti. Appaṇihitānupassanāti aniccānupassanānantaraṃ pavattā dukkhānupassanāva sukhapatthanāpajahanavasena paṇidhiabhāvā appaṇihitānupassanā nāma hoti.
“空随观”:紧接在苦随观之后生起的无我随观,由于通过舍弃我执而见到空无有我,故称为“空随观”。“增上慧法观”:如此反复见到诸行坏灭之后,以无常等角度作观的禅修者,只见到诸行坏灭,诸行的死亡再没有其他——依坏灭而把握空之后所生起的观。此观既是增上慧,又是对诸法的观察,故合称“增上慧法观”。“如实知见”:在反复见到坏灭之后,生起的“诸行可怖”的怖畏现起智。“过患随观”:依怖畏现起而生起的、照见一切有等之中过患的智。依据《无碍解道》所说:“怖畏现起之慧、过患之智以及厌离,这些法意义同一,唯名称不同。”因此,说到怖畏现起和过患随观时,厌离随观于此也已被说到,只是它列为第四项而未在此宣说。“审察随观”:由欲解脱智所生起的、称为审察随观的无常、苦、无我随观智,它是解脱的方便。依据《无碍解道》所说:“欲解脱、审察随观以及行舍,这些法意义同一,唯名称不同。”因此,审察随观被说出时,欲解脱智与行舍智也同时被说到了。“转向随观”:依随顺智而生起的种姓智。显示巴利原文
Suññatānupassanāti dukkhānupassanānantaraṃ pavattā anattānupassanāva attābhinivesapajahanavasena attasuññatādassanato suññatānupassanā nāma hoti. Adhipaññādhammavipassanāti evaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ bhaṅgaṃ passitvā passitvā aniccādito vipassantassa saṅkhārāva bhijjanti, saṅkhārānaṃ maraṇaṃ na añño koci atthīti bhaṅgavasena suññataṃ gahetvā pavattā vipassanā. Sā hi adhipaññā ca dhammesu ca vipassanāti katvā adhipaññādhammavipassanāti vuccati. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti bhaṅgaṃ disvā disvā ‘‘sabhayā saṅkhārā’’ti pavattaṃ bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ. Ādīnavānupassanāti bhayatupaṭṭhānavasena uppannaṃ sabbabhavādīsu ādīnavadassanañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Yā ca bhayatupaṭṭhāne paññā yañca ādīnave ñāṇaṃ yā ca nibbidā, ime dhammā ekatthā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.227) vacanato bhayatupaṭṭhānādīnavānupassanāsu vuttāsu nibbidānupassanā idhāpi vuttāva hoti. Ādito catutthaṃ katvā vuttattā panidha na vuttā. Paṭisaṅkhānupassanāti muñcitukamyatāñāṇavasena uppannaṃ muñcanassa upāyakaraṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanāsaññitaṃ aniccadukkhānattānupassanāñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Yā ca muñcitukamyatā yā ca paṭisaṅkhānupassanā yā ca saṅkhārupekkhā, ime dhammā ekatthā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.227) vacanato paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya vuttāya muñcitukamyatāsaṅkhārupekkhāñāṇāni vuttāneva honti. Vivaṭṭanānupassanāti anulomañāṇavasena uppannaṃ gotrabhuñāṇaṃ. Anulomañāṇena gotrabhuñāṇassa sijjhanato gotrabhuñāṇe vutte anulomañāṇaṃ vuttameva hoti. Evañhi aṭṭhārasannaṃ mahāvipassanānaṃ paṭipāṭi vuccamānā pāḷiyā sameti. Vuttañhi indriyakathāyaṃ –
“在前行部分,依初禅之力,五根从五根出离;在初禅中,依第二禅之力,五根从五根出离……”依此方式,以次第向上的顺序,直至阿拉汉果,阐述了诸根。因此,上述次第的十八种大观,是与经藏相符的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pubbabhāge pañcahindriyehi paṭhamajjhānavasena pañcindriyāni nissaṭāni honti, paṭhame jhāne pañcahindriyehi dutiyajjhānavasena pañcindriyāni nissaṭāni hontī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.192) –
然而在《清净道论》中则这样说:显示巴利原文
Ādinā nayena yāva arahattaphalā uttaruttaripaṭipāṭiyā indriyāni vuttāni. Tasmā aṭṭhārasa mahāvipassanā yathāvuttakkamena pāḷiyā yujjanti. Visuddhimagge pana –
“以坏灭随观”:即通过分解密集,以“无常即坏灭”之义,如此观见坏灭的智慧。“以变易随观”:即依色七法、非色七法等,超越各个分界而见其以其他方式转起;或见已生起者以老与死两种方式变易。“如实智见”:即把握有缘的名色。显示巴利原文
‘‘Khayānupassanāti ghanavinibbhogaṃ katvā aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenāti evaṃ khayaṃ passato ñāṇaṃ. Vipariṇāmānupassanāti rūpasattakaarūpasattakādivasena taṃ taṃ paricchedaṃ atikkamma aññathā pavattidassanaṃ. Uppannassa vā jarāya ceva maraṇena ca dvīhākārehi vipariṇāmadassanaṃ. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti sapaccayanāmarūpapariggaho’’ti (visuddhi. 2.850) –
前面已说过,那看似与那段圣典相违。又说:“转向随观即是行舍与随顺(智)。”那也看似与圣典相违。因为《行论》中说:显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Taṃ tāya pāḷiyā viruddhaṃ viya dissati. Vivaṭṭanānupassanāti saṅkhārupekkhā ceva anulomañcāti vuttaṃ. Tañca pāḷiyā viruddhaṃ viya dissati. Cariyākathāyañhi –
导向无常随观的转向,是唯作无记的识行;无常随观本身是智行。……乃至导向审察随观的转向,是唯作无记的识行;审察随观是智行。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aniccānupassanatthāya āvajjanakiriyābyākatā viññāṇacariyā. Aniccānupassanā ñāṇacariyā…pe… paṭisaṅkhānupassanatthāya āvajjanakiriyābyākatā viññāṇacariyā. Paṭisaṅkhānupassanā ñāṇacariyā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.71) –
对于每一种智,若有各自对应的转向,便会分别予以说明。然而,对于‘转向随观’,并未说明其转向,而只说‘转向随观是智行’。若行舍与随顺智可称为转向随观,则由于此类转向可能发生,本应为此目的说明转向,但并未如此说明。种姓智则无单独的转向,它只生起于随顺转向的路心中。因此,既然未说明以转向随观为目的的转向,唯有种姓智可恰当地称为‘转向随观’。显示巴利原文
Yassa yassa ñāṇassa visuṃ visuṃ āvajjanaṃ labbhati, tassa tassa visuṃ visuṃ āvajjanaṃ vuttaṃ. Vivaṭṭanānupassanāya pana āvajjanaṃ avatvāva ‘‘vivaṭṭanānupassanā ñāṇacariyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadi saṅkhārupekkhānulomañāṇāni vivaṭṭanānupassanā nāma siyuṃ, tadāvajjanasambhavā tadatthāya ca āvajjanaṃ vadeyya, na ca tadatthāya āvajjanaṃ vuttaṃ. Gotrabhuñāṇassa pana visuṃ āvajjanaṃ natthi anulomāvajjanavīthiyaṃyeva uppattito. Tasmā vivaṭṭanānupassanatthāya āvajjanassa avuttattā gotrabhuñāṇameva ‘‘vivaṭṭanānupassanā’’ti yujjati.
19 19.‘入流道’等八种解答,是依出世间道与果而阐明。入流,即进入圣流;此入流即是道,故称入流道。入流的果为入流果;等至意为完全达到,入流果本身即是等至,故称入流果等至。依结生仅一次来此世间者,名为一来者,其道为一来道。一来者的果为一来果。依结生不再来欲有者,名为不来者,其道为不来道。不来者的果为不来果。由于远离烦恼、已杀烦恼敌、已断轮回轮辐、无恶行之隐匿、应受资具供养等,故称为阿拉汉;阿拉汉的状态即是阿拉汉性。什么是阿拉汉性?即是阿拉汉果。阿拉汉之道为阿拉汉道,阿拉汉的果即阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
19.Sotāpattimaggādīni aṭṭha vissajjanāni lokuttaramaggaphalavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sotassa āpajjanaṃ sotāpatti, sotāpatti eva maggo sotāpattimaggo. Sotāpattiyā phalaṃ sotāpattiphalaṃ, samāpajjīyatīti samāpatti, sotāpattiphalameva samāpatti sotāpattiphalasamāpatti. Paṭisandhivasena sakiṃyeva imaṃ lokaṃ āgacchatīti sakadāgāmī, tassa maggo sakadāgāmimaggo. Sakadāgāmissa phalaṃ sakadāgāmiphalaṃ. Paṭisandhivaseneva kāmabhavaṃ na āgacchatīti anāgāmī, tassa maggo anāgāmimaggo. Anāgāmissa phalaṃ anāgāmiphalaṃ. Kilesehi ārakattā, kilesārīnaṃ hatattā, saṃsāracakkassa arānaṃ hatattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā arahaṃ, arahato bhāvo arahattaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Arahattaphalaṃ. Arahattassa maggo arahattamaggo. Arahattameva phalaṃ arahattaphalaṃ.
从“以决定解义而称为信根”等,乃至“以如实义而称为谛”,共开示了三十三种解答。这与前文中以“信根具有决定解的意义”等开始的三十三种解答内容相同。唯一差别在于:彼处是依诸法阐明其义,此处是依诸义理阐明所对应的法。至于“以无散乱义而称为止”等四种解答,与前文“止具有无散乱的意义”等四种解答之间的差别,亦当依同理理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Adhimokkhaṭṭhena saddhindriya’’ntiādīni ‘‘tathaṭṭhena saccā’’tipariyantāni tettiṃsa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Heṭṭhā ‘‘saddhindriyassa adhimokkhaṭṭho’’tiādīhi tettiṃsāya vissajjanehi samānāni. Kevalañhi tattha dhammehi atthā niddiṭṭhā, idha atthehi dhammā niddiṭṭhāti ayaṃ viseso. ‘‘Avikkhepaṭṭhena samatho’’tiādīnañca catunnaṃ vissajjanānaṃ heṭṭhā ‘‘samathassa avikkhepaṭṭho’’tiādīnañca catunnaṃ vissajjanānaṃ viseso vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
“以律仪义”等八种解答,是依戒、力等究竟法而阐明的。戒清净:即极清净的巴帝摩卡律仪等四种戒,因能洗净破戒之垢故。心清净:即近行定与八等至,此处以心为首而说定,因能净除心之垢故,为心清净。见清净:即如实见名色,因能净除有身见之垢故,为见清净。“以解脱义”:即依彼分而解脱诸随烦恼之义,及于所缘决定之义。此即彼分解脱。“以通达义”而称为明:宿住随念智,以通达过去生之义而称为明;天眼智,以通达众生生死之义而称为明;漏尽智,以通达诸谛之义而称为明。“以通达义”,即了知义。“以遍舍义”而称为解脱:于所应遍舍之处,即从彼处解脱,故此为果解脱。“以正断义”而称为尽智:以断除烦恼之义,即于能断尽烦恼的圣道中所有之智。“以寂止义”而称为无生智:因名为道作用的加行已寂止,依结生而无再生,于各各道所断烦恼之无生究竟中所生起的圣果智。显示巴利原文
Saṃvaraṭṭhenātiādīni aṭṭha vissajjanāni sīlādibalapariyosānadhammavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sīlavisuddhīti suparisuddhapātimokkhasaṃvarādicatubbidhaṃ sīlaṃ dussīlyamalavisodhanato. Cittavisuddhīti saupacārā aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Cittasīsena hettha samādhi vutto. So cittamalavisodhanato cittavisuddhi. Diṭṭhivisuddhīti nāmarūpānaṃ yathāsabhāvadassanaṃ sattadiṭṭhimalavisodhanato diṭṭhivisuddhi. Muttaṭṭhenāti tadaṅgavasena upakkilesato vimuttaṭṭhena ārammaṇe ca adhimuttaṭṭhena. Vimokkhoti tadaṅgavimokkho. Paṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjāti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ purimabhavapaṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjā, dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ sattānaṃ cutūpapātapaṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjā, āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ saccapaṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjā. Paṭivedhaṭṭhenāti jānanaṭṭhena. Pariccāgaṭṭhena vimuttīti yaṃ yaṃ pariccattaṃ, tato tato vimuttattā phalavimutti. Samucchedaṭṭhena khaye ñāṇanti kilesasamucchindanatthena kilesakkhayakare ariyamagge ñāṇaṃ. Paṭippassaddhaṭṭhena anuppāde ñāṇanti maggakiccasaṅkhātapayogapaṭippassaddhattā paṭisandhivasena anuppādabhūte taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesānaṃ anuppādapariyosāne uppanne ariyaphale ñāṇaṃ.
20 “欲以根义”等这九种解答,是依圣道的初、中、后阶段而说明的。“欲以根义”:即对善法生起想要去做的欲,因它为修行与成就的根本,故以根的意义而称为欲。“作意以等起义”:如理作意能等起一切善法,故以等起的意义而称为作意。“触以和合义”:因为在渴爱中,受是特别主要的原因;而渴爱的断除,特由遍知受而被断除;对于受,触又是主要的原因;当触被遍知时,受也就被遍知了。因此,在七种应遍知事中,触被首先说出。而且,触由自身之因——即所谓三事和合——而被说明,并被称为“以三事和合为现起”,故以和合的意义而应遍知。然而,有些人说:“智触才是触。”显示巴利原文
20.Chando mūlaṭṭhenātiādīni nava vissajjanāni ariyamaggassa ādimajjhapariyosānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Chando mūlaṭṭhenāti kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ kattukamyatāchando paṭipattiyā ca nipphattiyā ca mūlattā mūlaṭṭhena. Manasikāro samuṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti yonisomanasikāro sabbakusaladhamme samuṭṭhāpetīti samuṭṭhānaṭṭhena. Phasso samodhānaṭṭhenāti yasmā taṇhāya visesena vedanā padhānakāraṇaṃ, taṇhā ca pahīyamānā visesena vedanāya pariññātāya pahīyati, tassā ca vedanāya phassova padhānakāraṇaṃ, tasmiṃ pariññāte vedanā pariññātā hoti, tasmā sattasu abhiññeyyavatthūsu phasso paṭhamaṃ vutto. So ca tikasannipātasaṅkhātassa attano kāraṇassa vasena paveditattā ‘‘tikasannipātapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti vuttattā samodhānaṭṭhena abhiññeyyo. Keci pana ‘‘ñāṇaphasso phasso’’ti vadanti.
然而,因为受能令心与心所法随顺于自己而运作,使其会集、进入其中;或者说,受能进入心相续本身,所以说受以“会集”的含义而应遍知。但有些人认为:“一切应遍知的法都汇集于受中;当受被遍知时,一切渴爱的依处便都被遍知了。原因何在?因为一切渴爱都以受为缘。因此,受以会集之义而应遍知。”又,如同尖顶屋的屋脊梁能统摄所有椽子,由于定能总集心与心所法,在诸善法中最为殊胜、最为尊上,故说定以“最上”之义。在修习止观的行者那里,念是令所缘现起的主宰;当念稳固地安住于所缘时,一切善法便能各自成就其作用,故说念以“增上”之义。“慧以更上义”:圣道慧相对于那些善法,以更上——即最胜——的意义而应遍知。或者,因为能从那些烦恼中、从轮回之轮中向上超越,故称为“彼更上”;其义即为“更上义”,由此说为“以更上义”。“解脱以坚实义”:果位的解脱因不退失故成坚固,所以是坚实;此外,更无其他法能超越它。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana vedanā cittacetasike attano vase vattāpayamānā tattha samosarati pavisati, cittasantānameva vā pavisati, tasmā samosaraṇaṭṭhena abhiññeyyāti vuttā. Keci pana ‘‘sabbānipi pariññeyyāni vedanāsu samosaranti, vedanāsu pariññātāsu sabbaṃ taṇhāvatthu pariññātaṃ hoti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Vedanāpaccayā hi sabbāpi taṇhā. Tasmā vedanā samosaraṇaṭṭhena abhiññeyyā’’ti vadanti. Yasmā sabbagopānasīnaṃ ābandhanato kūṭāgārakaṇṇikā viya cittacetasikānaṃ sampiṇḍanato samādhi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pamukho hoti jeṭṭhako, tasmā samādhi pamukhaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ. Pāmukhaṭṭhenātipi pāṭho. Yasmā samathavipassanaṃ bhāventassa ārammaṇūpaṭṭhānādhipati hoti sati, satiyā upaṭṭhite ārammaṇe sabbepi kusalā dhammā sakaṃ sakaṃ kiccaṃ sādhenti, tasmā sati ādhipateyyaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ. Paññā taduttaraṭṭhenāti ariyamaggapaññā tesaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uttaraṭṭhena seṭṭhaṭṭhena abhiññeyyā. Atha vā tato kilesehi, saṃsāravaṭṭato vā uttarati samatikkamatīti taduttarā, tassā attho taduttaraṭṭho. Tena taduttaraṭṭhena. Tatuttaraṭṭhenātipi pāṭho, tato uttaraṭṭhenāti attho. Vimutti sāraṭṭhenāti phalavimutti aparihānivasena thirattā sāro, taṃ atikkamitvā aññassa pariyesitabbassa abhāvatopi sāro. Sā vimutti tena sāraṭṭhena abhiññeyyā. Amatogadhaṃ nibbānanti natthi etassa maraṇasaṅkhātaṃ matanti amataṃ, kilesavisapaṭipakkhattā agadantipi amataṃ , sacchikiriyāya sattānaṃ patiṭṭhābhūtanti ogadhaṃ, saṃsāradukkhasantibhūtattā nibbutanti nibbānaṃ, natthettha taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ vānantipi nibbānaṃ. Taṃ sāsanassa niṭṭhābhūtattā pariyosānaṭṭhena abhiññeyyaṃ. Evaṃ imasmiṃ abhiññeyyaniddese sattasahassāni sattasatāni cattālīsañca vissajjanāni honti.
现在,为这些已被如此说明的法作结,即“凡是被遍知的法,都成为已知的法”;其意趣是:令心面向它们,使之成为已知。“以彼已知之义为智”:对于前面所说的那类法,以了知的作用而称为智。“以了知种种的含义为慧”:即从种种方面了知的意义,便是慧。从(经文中)“什么法应遍知?”开始,将所问的各个问题归结之后显示出来。因此,基于这个原因而说:“这些法应当遍知,如此专注听闻,彼了知即是慧,是闻所成智。”这就是它的意思。显示巴利原文
Idāni tesaṃ evaṃ niddiṭṭhānaṃ dhammānaṃ ‘‘ye ye dhammā abhiññātā, te te dhammā ñātā hontī’’ti nigamanaṃ karoti, tassa abhimukhaṃ katvā ñātā hontīti adhippāyo. Taṃñātaṭṭhena ñāṇanti tesaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ dhammānaṃ jānanaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ. Pajānanaṭṭhena paññāti pakārato jānanaṭṭhena paññā. Tena vuccatītiādito pucchitapucchā nigametvā dassitā. Tena kāraṇena ‘‘ime dhammā abhiññeyyāti sotāvadhānaṃ, taṃpajānanā paññā sutamaye ñāṇa’’nti vuccatīti atthoti.
《正法显扬》(Saddhammappakāsinī)之《无碍解道》(Paṭisambhidāmagga)注疏。显示巴利原文
Saddhammappakāsiniyā paṭisambhidāmaggaṭṭhakathāya
“应遍知”的解说注释。显示巴利原文
Pariññeyyaniddesavaṇṇanā
21 在“应遍知”的解说中,虽然“遍知”一词包含了知遍知、度遍知、断遍知这三种遍知,但由于前面“应遍知”的部分已说明了知遍知,后面“应断”的部分将说明断遍知,所以这里唯指度遍知。“有漏、有取的触”:指作为漏与取的缘,属于三地的触。因为它以自己为所缘而生起,与那些漏共俱,故为“有漏”;成为所缘之后,凭借与取的联结而助成诸取,故为“有取”。当触被度遍知所遍知时,通过触这个门径,其余非色法也随其而行,色法亦随之得以遍知,因此仅举触作为代表。同样,其余诸法也应根据各自的情形来相应理解。显示巴利原文
21. Pariññeyyaniddese kiñcāpi pariññāsaddena ñātapariññā, tīraṇapariññā, pahānapariññāti tisso pariññā saṅgahitā. Heṭṭhā ‘‘abhiññeyyā’’ti ñātapariññāya vuttattā upari ‘‘pahātabbā’’ti pahānapariññāya vuttattā tīraṇapariññāva idha adhippetā. Phasso sāsavo upādāniyoti āsavānañceva upādānānañca paccayabhūto tebhūmakaphasso. Sopi hi attānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānehi saha āsavehīti sāsavo, ārammaṇabhāvaṃ upagantvā upādānasambandhanena upādānānaṃ hitoti upādāniyo. Yasmā phasse tīraṇapariññāya pariññāte phassamukhena sesāpi arūpadhammā tadanusārena ca rūpadhammā pariññāyanti, tasmā ekova phasso vutto. Evaṃ sesesupi yathāyogaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
「名」:指四个无色蕴与涅槃。「色」:指四大种,以及四大种所造的二十四种所造色。四个蕴因“导向”之义而称为名,因为它们朝向所缘而转。一切也以“导向”为义而称为名:因为四个蕴相互引向所缘,涅槃则作为所缘增上缘,将无过失的法引向自身。色以相续的方式被冷热等所毁坏,故名为色。毁坏即是被变坏的意思;因为色是以相续变异的方式,能被冷热等所毁坏的法聚。不过在此,「名」仅指世间的;而「色」则完全是世间的。显示巴利原文
Nāmanti cattāro khandhā arūpino nibbānañca. Rūpanti cattāri ca mahābhūtāni catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpāni catuvīsati. Cattāro khandhā namanaṭṭhena nāmaṃ. Te hi ārammaṇābhimukhā namanti. Sabbampi nāmanaṭṭhena nāmaṃ. Cattāro hi khandhā ārammaṇe aññamaññaṃ nāmenti, nibbānaṃ ārammaṇādhipatipaccayatāya attani anavajjadhamme nāmeti. Santativasena sītādīhi ruppanaṭṭhena rūpaṃ. Ruppanaṭṭhenāti kuppanaṭṭhena. Santativipariṇāmavasena hi sītādīhi ghaṭṭanīyaṃ dhammajātaṃ rūpanti vuccati. Idha pana nāmanti lokikameva adhippetaṃ, rūpaṃ pana ekantena lokikameva.
「三种受」:乐受、苦受、不苦不乐受,它们唯是世间的。「食」即是缘。缘能带来自己的果,故称为食。食有四种:段食、触食、意思食、识食。段食:因需捏成团吞咽,故名段食。这是指以粥饭等为基本物质的食素(营养要素)。它能产生以食素为第八法的色身,故称为食。触食:眼触等六种触能带来三种受,故称为食。意思食:是意的思,不是有情的思,故称意思,如同说「心一境性」;或者指与意相应的思,如同说「骏马车」。这是指三地所摄的善与不善的思。它能带来三有,故称为食。识食:指十九种结生识。它能带来结生的名色,故称为食。「取蕴」:取所行境的蕴,应理解为省略了中间词,即「取之行境蕴」。或者,由取所生的蕴,称为取蕴,如草火、糠火;或者,被取所执持的蕴,称为取蕴,如国王的人;或者,以取为因而生的蕴,称为取蕴,如花树、果树。「取」有四种:欲取、见取、戒禁取、我语取。从义理上说,强烈的执取即是取。五取蕴是:色取蕴、受取蕴、想取蕴、行取蕴、识取蕴。显示巴利原文
Tisso vedanāti sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Tā lokikā eva. Āhārāti paccayā. Paccayā hi attano phalaṃ āharantīti āhārā. Kabaḷīkāro āhāro phassāhāro manosañcetanāhāro viññāṇāhāroti cattāro. Vatthuvasena kabaḷīkātabbattā kabaḷīkāro , ajjhoharitabbattā āhāro. Odanakummāsādivatthukāya ojāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sā hi ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharatīti āhāro. Cakkhusamphassādiko chabbidho phasso tisso vedanā āharatīti āhāro. Manaso sañcetanā, na sattassāti manosañcetanā yathā cittekaggatā. Manasā vā sampayuttā sañcetanā manosañcetanā yathā ājaññaratho. Tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā. Sā hi tayo bhave āharatīti āhāro. Viññāṇanti ekūnavīsatibhedaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Tañhi paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ āharatīti āhāro. Upādānakkhandhāti upādānagocarā khandhā, majjhapadalopo daṭṭhabbo. Upādānasambhūtā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā yathā tiṇaggi thusaggi. Upādānavidheyyā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā yathā rājapuriso. Upādānappabhavā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā yathā puppharukkho phalarukkho. Upādānāni pana kāmupādānaṃ diṭṭhupādānaṃ sīlabbatupādānaṃ attavādupādānanti cattāri. Atthato pana bhusaṃ ādānanti upādānaṃ. Rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandhoti pañca.
「六内处」:眼处、耳处、鼻处、舌处、身处、意处。显示巴利原文
Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanānīti cakkhāyatanaṃ, sotāyatanaṃ, ghānāyatanaṃ, jivhāyatanaṃ, kāyāyatanaṃ, manāyatanaṃ.
“七识住”是指哪七种?对此,世尊曾开示说:显示巴利原文
Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti katamā satta? Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“诸比丘,有一类有情,身异、想异。例如人类,以及一部分天人和一部分堕落者。这是第一种识住。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave (a. ni. 7.44; dī. ni. 3.332), sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino. Seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā. Ayaṃ paṭhamā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
“诸比丘,有一类有情,身异而想一,例如由初禅出生的梵身天。这是第二种识住。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino. Seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā. Ayaṃ dutiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有一类有情,身相同,想却各不相同,例如光音天。这就是第三识住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino. Seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā. Ayaṃ tatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有一类有情,身相同,想也相同,例如遍净天。这就是第四识住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino. Seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Ayaṃ catutthā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有一类有情,超越一切色想,灭除有对想,不作意种种想,以「无边的虚空」入于空无边处。这就是第五识住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ pañcamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有一类有情完全超越空无边处,以‘识无边’成就识无边处。这是第六识住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ chaṭṭhā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有一类有情完全超越识无边处,以‘无所有’成就无所有处。这是第七识住。比丘们,这些便是七识住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi , bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ sattamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti. Imā kho, bhikkhave, satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo’’ti (a. ni. 7.44; dī. ni. 3.332).
「识住」:指结生识的安住处,也就是具有识的蕴。其中,「譬如」是表示举例的助词。
「人类」:在无量的轮围世界中,无量的人类在肤色、相貌等方面,没有两个完全相同。即使有些在肤色或相貌上相似,在瞻视、顾视等行为上也各异,因此称为「身异」。而他们的结生想,有的是三因,有的是二因,也有无因的,所以称为「想异」。
「一部分天人」:指六欲界天人。其中有些身体是青色,有些是黄色等;他们的想,有的由三因而生,有的由二因而生,没有无因的。
「一部分堕恶趣者」:指已脱离四恶趣的有情,例如富那婆薮之母女夜叉、毕央伽罗之母、普萨弥多、达摩瞿多等,以及其他在宫殿中受报的饿鬼。由于他们的身体在肤色上有白、黑、黄褐、黑褐、金色等区别,在体型上有瘦、胖、粗、长等差异,所以身各不同;与人类相似,他们的想也有三因、二因、无因的差别。然而,他们不像天人那样有大威德,而是如同可怜的人类,威德微小,难以获得食物与衣服,备受痛苦煎熬。其中一些在黑半月受苦,在白半月享乐,正因为他们从安乐聚集之处堕落,所以称为「堕恶趣者」。其中,那些……显示巴利原文
Viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti paṭisandhiviññāṇassa ṭhānāni saviññāṇakā khandhā eva. Tattha seyyathāpīti nidassanatthe nipāto. Manussāti aparimāṇesupi cakkavāḷesu aparimāṇānaṃ manussānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena dvepi ekasadisā natthi. Yepi vaṇṇena vā saṇṭhānena vā sadisā honti, tepi ālokitavilokitādīhi visadisāva honti, tasmā nānattakāyāti vuttā. Paṭisandhisaññā pana nesaṃ tihetukāpi duhetukāpi ahetukāpi hoti, tasmā nānattasaññinoti vuttā. Ekacce ca devāti cha kāmāvacaradevā. Tesu hi kesañci kāyo nīlo hoti, kesañci pītakādivaṇṇo, saññā pana nesaṃ tihetukāpi duhetukāpi hoti, ahetukā na hoti. Ekacce ca vinipātikāti catuapāyavinimuttā punabbasumātā yakkhinī, piyaṅkaramātā, phussamittā, dhammaguttāti evamādayo aññe ca vemānikā petā. Etesañhi odātakāḷamaṅguracchavisāmavaṇṇādivasena ceva kisathūlarassadīghavasena ca kāyo nānā hoti, manussānaṃ viya tihetukadvihetukāhetukavasena saññāpi. Te pana devā viya na mahesakkhā, kapaṇamanussā viya appesakkhā dullabhaghāsacchādanā dukkhapīḷitā viharanti. Ekacce kāḷapakkhe dukkhitā juṇhapakkhe sukhitā honti, tasmā sukhasamussayato vinipatitattā vinipātikāti vuttā. Ye panettha tihetukā, tesaṃ dhammābhisamayopi hoti piyaṅkaramātādīnaṃ viya.
「梵身天」:即梵众天、梵辅天与大梵天。「初禅所生」指他们皆依初禅而往生。梵众天由下品初禅所生,梵辅天由中品初禅所生,其身更为广博;大梵天由上品初禅所生,其身则更为广博。如此,这些天众身体各各不同,而想却同属初禅所摄,故称‘身异想一’。四恶趣的有情也是如此:地狱中,有些有情的身量为一俱卢舍,有些为半由旬,有些为三俱卢舍,而提婆达多的身体则有一百由旬;畜生中,或小或大;鬼界中,有些身高六十肘,有些八十肘,有些肤色金黄,有些容貌丑陋;同样还有黑耳阿修罗。此外,更有一种名为‘长背’的饿鬼,其身量乃至六十由旬。然而,所有这些有情的想,都是不善异熟无因的。因此,恶趣有情亦摄属‘身异想一’一类。显示巴利原文
Brahmakāyikāti brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmāno. Paṭhamābhinibbattāti te sabbepi paṭhamajjhānena nibbattā. Brahmapārisajjā pana parittena, brahmapurohitā majjhimena, kāyo ca tesaṃ vipphārikataro hoti. Mahābrahmāno paṇītena, kāyo pana nesaṃ ativipphārikataro hoti. Iti te kāyassa nānattā, paṭhamajjhānavasena saññāya ekattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññinoti vuttā. Yathā ca te, evaṃ catūsu apāyesu sattā. Nirayesu hi kesañci gāvutaṃ, kesañci aḍḍhayojanaṃ , kesañci tigāvutaṃ attabhāvo hoti, devadattassa pana yojanasatiko jāto. Tiracchānesupi keci khuddakā honti, keci mahantā. Pettivisayesupi keci saṭṭhihatthā keci asītihatthā honti keci suvaṇṇā keci dubbaṇṇā. Tathā kālakañcikā asurā. Apicettha dīghapiṭṭhikā petā nāma saṭṭhiyojanikāpi honti, saññā pana sabbesampi akusalavipākāhetukāva hoti. Iti apāyikāpi ‘‘nānattakāyā ekattasaññino’’ti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti.
「光音天」:如执火炬时,火焰的光明从中断续散射、流布一般,他们身上的光明也如是断续散射流布,故称光音天。在五禅支的方法中,修习下品的第二与第三禅那而往生者,名为「少光天」;修习中品而往生者,名为「无量光天」;修习上品而往生者,名为「光音天」。此处乃是依最胜的范围总括,将所有这些天众尽摄无遗。因为所有这些天众的身光皆同,而其想则存在有寻有伺与无寻无伺等种种差别。显示巴利原文
Ābhassarāti daṇḍaukkāya acci viya etesaṃ sarīrato ābhā chijjitvā chijjitvā patantī viya sarati visaratīti ābhassarā. Tesu pañcakanaye dutiyatatiyajjhānadvayaṃ parittaṃ bhāvetvā uppannā parittābhā nāma honti, majjhimaṃ bhāvetvā uppannā appamāṇābhā nāma honti, paṇītaṃ bhāvetvā uppannā ābhassarā nāma honti. Idha pana ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sabbeva te gahitā. Sabbesañhi tesaṃ kāyo ekavipphārova hoti, saññā pana avitakkavicāramattā ca avitakkaavicārā cāti nānā.
「遍净天」:意为被净妙所遍满、遍洒,即其身光的颜色清澈一体。因为他们的光明并非如光音天那样断续发出。在四禅那的分类中,属第三禅那;在五禅那的分类中,属第四禅那。依修习下品、中品、上品此禅那之力,往生而成「少净天」「无量净天」「遍净天」。如此,应知这些天众皆属同类身,且因第四禅那之想而成为一想者。「广果天」亦属第四识住。「无想有情天」由于无识,故此处不摄为识住,而摄归众生居。显示巴利原文
Subhakiṇhāti subhena vokiṇṇā vikiṇṇā, subhena sarīrappabhāvaṇṇena ekagghanāti attho. Etesañhi na ābhassarānaṃ viya chijjitvā chijjitvā pabhā gacchatīti. Catukkanaye tatiyassa, pañcakanaye catutthassa parittamajjhimapaṇītassa jhānassavasena parittasubhaappamāṇasubhasubhakiṇhā nāma hutvā nibbattanti. Iti sabbepi te ekattakāyā ceva catutthajjhānasaññāya ekattasaññino cāti veditabbā. Vehapphalāpi catutthaviññāṇaṭṭhitimeva bhajanti. Asaññasattā viññāṇābhāvā ettha saṅgahaṃ na gacchanti, sattāvāsesu gacchanti.
「净居天」:他们属于还灭的一方,并非任何时候都存在。纵使百劫、无数劫中无佛出世,他们亦不出现;唯有在十六千劫内有佛出世时,他们才会出现,犹如转法轮世尊的蕴聚之处。因此,他们既不列入识住,也不列入众生居。然而大寺长老引述《中部》1.160:‘舍利弗,此众生居实难获得,我在这漫长的时间里从未住过此处,唯除净居诸天。’依据此经,净居天也属于第四识住和第四众生居。这是依不可抗辩的经典而得到认可的。显示巴利原文
Suddhāvāsā vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhitā na sabbakālikā, kappasatasahassampi asaṅkhyeyampi buddhasuññe loke na uppajjanti, soḷasakappasahassabbhantare buddhesu uppannesuyeva uppajjanti, dhammacakkappavattassa bhagavato khandhāvārasadisā honti, tasmā neva viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ, na ca sattāvāsaṃ bhajanti. Mahāsīvatthero pana – ‘‘na kho pana so, sāriputta, sattāvāso sulabharūpo, yo mayā anāvutthapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā aññatra suddhāvāsehi devehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.160) iminā suttena suddhāvāsāpi catutthaṃ viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ catutthaṃ sattāvāsañca bhajantīti vadati, taṃ appaṭibāhitattā suttassa anuññātaṃ.
「非想非非想处」:正如想那样,识也同样极为微细,因此非有识亦非无识,故于识住中未予说明。显示巴利原文
Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ yatheva saññāya, evaṃ viññāṇassāpi sukhumattā nevaviññāṇaṃ nāviññāṇaṃ, tasmā viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu na vuttaṃ.
「八世间法」:即利、衰、誉、毁、讥、赞、乐、苦。这八法在世间流转而无有止息,是世间之法,故名世间法。无有任何有情能脱于彼,诸佛亦然。如说:显示巴利原文
Aṭṭha lokadhammāti lābho, alābho, yaso, ayaso, nindā, pasaṃsā, sukhaṃ, dukkhanti ime aṭṭha lokappavattiyā sati anuparamadhammakattā lokassa dhammāti lokadhammā. Etehi mutto satto nāma natthi, buddhānampi hontiyeva. Yathāha –
诸比丘,这八种世间法随世间流转,世间亦随这八种世间法而转。哪八种?利与衰、誉与毁、讥与赞、乐与苦。诸比丘,这八种世间法随世间流转,世间亦随这八种世间法而转。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, lokadhammā lokaṃ anuparivattanti, loko ca aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattati. Katame aṭṭha? Lābho ca alābho ca yaso ca ayaso ca nindā ca pasaṃsā ca sukhañca dukkhañca. Ime kho, bhikkhave, aṭṭha lokadhammā lokaṃ anuparivattanti, loko ca ime aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattatī’’ti (a. ni. 8.6).
此处,“随转”意为追随、不舍离,即不从世间退转之意。“利”:于出家者,指衣钵等;于在家者,指财谷等利得。当此利不可得时,利即名为“衰”。若仅说“无利是衰”,则因义不成就,恐无法被正确遍知。“誉”:指眷属。当誉不可得时,誉即成为“毁”。“讥”:指责之语。“赞”:称扬之语。“乐”:于欲界众生,指身与心所生的乐受。“苦”:于凡夫、入流者、一来者,指身与心所生的苦受;于不来者、阿拉汉,则唯有身苦受。显示巴利原文
Tattha anuparivattantīti anubandhanti nappajahanti, lokato na nivattantīti attho. Lābhoti pabbajitassa cīvarādi, gahaṭṭhassa dhanadhaññādi lābho. Soyeva alabbhamāno lābho alābho. Na lābho alābhoti vuccamāne atthābhāvāpattito pariññeyyo na siyā. Yasoti parivāro. Soyeva alabbhamānā yaso ayaso. Nindāti avaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ. Pasaṃsāti vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ. Sukhanti kāmāvacarānaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ. Dukkhanti puthujjanasotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ, anāgāmiarahantānaṃ kāyikameva.
“九众生居”:众生居意为有情的居处,即居住之处。实则此九种即是蕴。哪九种?世尊曾这样开示:显示巴利原文
Navasattāvāsāti sattānaṃ āvāsā, vasanaṭṭhānānīti attho. Tāni pana tathāpakāsitā khandhā eva. Katame nava? Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“比丘们,有九种众生居(增支部9.24;长部3.341)。是哪九种呢?比丘们,有一类众生,身异、想异,如人类、一部分天人与一部分堕恶趣者。这是第一种众生居。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Navayime, bhikkhave (a. ni. 9.24; dī. ni. 3.341), sattāvāsā. Katame nava? Santi, bhikkhave, sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā. Ayaṃ paṭhamo sattāvāso.
“比丘们,有一类众生,身异而想一,譬如初生于梵身天的梵天。这是第二种众生居。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā. Ayaṃ dutiyo sattāvāso.
“比丘们,有一类众生,身一而想异,诸如光音天。这是第三种众生居。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā. Ayaṃ tatiyo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有一类众生,身一种、想一种,如遍净天。这是第四种众生居所。显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Ayaṃ catuttho sattāvāso.
比丘们,有一类众生,无想、无感受,如无想有情天。这是第五种众生居所。显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā asaññino appaṭisaṃvedino, seyyathāpi devā asaññasattā. Ayaṃ pañcamo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有一类众生,完全超越一切色想,灭除有对想,不作意种种想,以‘虚空无边’而成就空无边处。这是第六种众生居所。显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ chaṭṭho sattāvāso.
“比丘们,有众生完全超越空无边处,达到‘识是无边’的识无边处而安住。这是第七种众生居所。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ sattamo sattāvāso.
“比丘们,有众生完全超越识无边处,达到‘无所有’的无所有处而安住。这是第八种众生居所。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ aṭṭhamo sattāvāso.
“比丘们,有众生完全超越无所有处,达到非想非非想处而安住。这是第九种众生居所。比丘们,这些就是九种众生居所。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpagā . Ayaṃ navamo sattāvāso. Ime kho, bhikkhave, nava sattāvāsā’’ti (a. ni. 9.24; dī. ni. 3.341).
十处即是眼处、色处、耳处、声处、鼻处、香处、舌处、味处、身处、触处,这十种。而意处与法处因与出世间法相杂,此处未予纳入。对这十处的解释,是依观力而说审察遍知。在“诸比丘,应遍知一切”等教导中,则是依证得之力解说审察遍知——即通过证得未知当知根等三根、作为证悟涅槃修习处的灭尽行道、它们的通达处、对苦等四谛的出离及不转起等十五种法、摄益等三十一种、更上通达等三种、八支圣道、“加行止息之义”等二种、无为处的出起处等二种、出离处的随觉处等三种、随觉资粮等三种、照耀处等四种、光耀处等十八种、转向随观等九种,以及尽智与无生智中的慧解脱与涅槃。其余部分,应知是随宜依观力或证得之力而说。显示巴利原文
Dasāyatanānīti cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ sotāyatanaṃ saddāyatanaṃ ghānāyatanaṃ gandhāyatanaṃ jivhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ kāyāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatananti evaṃ dasa. Manāyatanadhammāyatanāni pana lokuttaramissakattā na gahitāni. Imesu dasasu vissajjanesu vipassanāvasena tīraṇapariññā vuttā, ‘‘sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, pariññeyya’’ntiādīsu pana anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, nirodhapaṭipadānaṃ sacchikiriyābhāvanaṭṭhānaṃ tesaṃyeva paṭivedhaṭṭhānaṃ dukkhādīnaṃ nissaraṇassa anuppādādīnaṃ pañcadasannaṃ, pariggahaṭṭhādīnaṃ ekatiṃsāya, uttaripaṭivedhaṭṭhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, maggaṅgānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ, ‘‘payogānaṃ paṭippassaddhaṭṭho’’tiādīnaṃ dvinnaṃ, asaṅkhataṭṭhassa vuṭṭhānaṭṭhādīnaṃ dvinnaṃ, niyyānaṭṭhassa anubujjhanaṭṭhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, anubodhanaṭṭhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, anubodhapakkhiyādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, ujjotanaṭṭhādīnaṃ catunnaṃ, patāpanaṭṭhādīnaṃ aṭṭhārasannaṃ, vivaṭṭanānupassanādīnaṃ navannaṃ, khayeñāṇaanuppādeñāṇānaṃ paññāvimuttinibbānānanti imesaṃ dhammānaṃ paṭilābhavasena tīraṇapariññā vuttā, sesānaṃ yathāyogaṃ vipassanāvasena ca paṭilābhavasena ca tīraṇapariññā vuttāti veditabbā.
若有人为证得某些法而精进努力,当那些法被证得时,它们便已被遍知,也已被审察。因此,这是以作用完成之义来说明审察遍知。因为作用既已完成,诸法便已证得。然而有些人说:“不适用于观的诸法是知遍知。”由于之前已用“应证知”来解说知遍知,此种说法并不妥当。所谓“既已被遍知,也已被审察”,意即:已被证得的法,才称为被遍知、被审察。这就是其含义。如此,以作用完成之义解释了遍知。显示巴利原文
Yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ paṭilābhatthāya vāyamantassa, te te dhammā paṭiladdhā honti. Evaṃ te dhammā pariññātā ceva honti tīritā cāti hi kiccasamāpanaṭṭhena tīraṇapariññā vuttā. Kicce hi samāpite te dhammā paṭiladdhā hontīti. Keci pana ‘‘avipassanūpagānaṃ ñātapariññā’’ti vadanti. Abhiññeyyena ñātapariññāya vuttattā taṃ na sundaraṃ. Pariññātā ceva honti tīritā cāti te paṭiladdhā eva dhammā pariññātā ca nāma honti, tīritā ca nāmāti attho. Evaṃ kiccasamāpanatthavasena pariññātattho vutto hoti.
22 现在,为了将同一意义结合到一一法上,从“证得”的角度予以说明,并于最后作总结,故开始说“出离”等内容。这一切内容,皆应依前文所述而了知。显示巴利原文
22. Idāni tamevatthaṃ ekekadhamme paṭilābhavasena yojetvā ante ca nigametvā dassetuṃ nekkhammantiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ pubbe vuttānusāreneva veditabbanti.
应断解的注释显示巴利原文
Pahātabbaniddesavaṇṇanā
23 在“应断”的解释中,“我慢”是指于色等五种取蕴而生起的“我是”之慢。当此我慢被断除时,即证得阿罗汉果。虽在色贪等烦恼尚存时,也不提及其余烦恼,唯独说“我慢”,应知这是因为它与见相似,且其相粗重。“无明”,依经教的方式,是指于苦等四事无知;依阿毗达摩的方式,则再加前际等,共为八事。对此,曾有如下所说——显示巴利原文
23. Pahātabbaniddese asmimānoti rūpādīsu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu asmīti māno. Tasmiñhi pahīne arahattaṃ pattaṃ hoti. Rūparāgādīsu vijjamānesupi sesāni avatvā asmimānasseva vacanaṃ diṭṭhipatirūpakattena tassa oḷārikattāti veditabbaṃ. Avijjāti suttantapariyāyena dukkhādīsu catūsu ṭhānesu aññāṇaṃ, abhidhammapariyāyena pubbantādīhi saddhiṃ aṭṭhasu. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“其中,何等为无明?于苦无知,于苦集无知,于苦灭无知,于苦灭之道无知;于前际无知,于后际无知,于前后际无知;于此缘性及缘生诸法无知。”(《法集论》1106;《分别论》226)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamā avijjā? Dukkhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya aññāṇaṃ, pubbante aññāṇaṃ, aparante aññāṇaṃ, pubbantāparante aññāṇaṃ, idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu aññāṇa’’nti (dha. sa. 1106; vibha. 226).
“有爱”,是对欲有等诸有的希求。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Bhavataṇhāti kāmabhavādīsu bhavesu patthanā. Yathāha –
其中,什么是有爱?即于诸有中,生起的有欲、有贪、有喜、有爱、有情、有热恼、有迷恋、有执取。(《分别论》895)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Yo bhavesu bhavacchando bhavarāgo bhavanandī bhavataṇhā bhavasineho bhavapariḷāho bhavamucchā bhavajjhosāna’’nti (vibha. 895).
三种爱:即欲爱、有爱、无有爱。在阿毗达摩中,对它们的解释如下:其中,什么是有爱?与有见相应的贪染……乃至……心的染着,这称为有爱。其中,什么是无有爱?与断见相应的贪染……乃至……心的染着,这称为无有爱。所余的爱便是欲爱。其中,什么是欲爱?与欲界相应的贪染……乃至……心的染着,这称为欲爱。其中,什么是有爱?与色界、无色界相应的贪染……乃至……这称为有爱。其中,什么是无有爱?与断见相应的贪染……乃至……这称为无有爱。(《分别论》916)显示巴利原文
Tisso taṇhāti kāmataṇhā, bhavataṇhā, vibhavataṇhā. Tāsaṃ abhidhamme evaṃ niddeso kato – tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Bhavadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo…pe… cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati bhavataṇhā. Tattha katamā vibhavataṇhā? Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo…pe… cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati vibhavataṇhā. Avasesā taṇhā kāmataṇhā. Tattha katamā kāmataṇhā? Kāmadhātupaṭisaṃyutto rāgo…pe… cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati kāmataṇhā. Tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Rūpadhātuarūpadhātupaṭisaṃyutto rāgo…pe… tattha katamā vibhavataṇhā? Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo…pe… (vibha. 916).
然而,在注释书中这样说:“对五种欲乐的染着,是欲爱;对色界、无色界存在的染着、对禅那的喜好以及与常见相应的染着,以有的方式生起的希求,这是有爱;与断见相应的染着,这是无有爱。”这是依据《十上经》的教导方式来组织的。而依据《合诵》的教导方式和阿毗达摩的教导方式,另有三种爱:“欲爱、色爱、无色爱”,以及再另外三种爱:“色爱、无色爱、灭爱”(《长部》3.305;《分别论》917-918),这些爱的分类在此处也都适用。其中,前五种是与欲界、色界、无色界相应的,最后一种是与断见相应的。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmataṇhā, rūpārūpabhavesu rāgo jhānanikantisassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo bhavavasena patthanā bhavataṇhā, ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo vibhavataṇhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ dasuttarasuttapariyāyena yojanā. Saṅgītipariyāyena pana abhidhammapariyāyena ca ‘‘aparāpi tisso taṇhā kāmataṇhā rūpataṇhā arūpataṇhā. Aparāpi tisso taṇhā rūpataṇhā arūpataṇhā nirodhataṇhā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.305; vibha. 917-918) vuttā taṇhāpi ettha yujjanti. Tāsu pañca kāmadhāturūpadhātuarūpadhātupaṭisaṃyuttā, antimā ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatā.
四种瀑流:欲瀑流、有瀑流、见瀑流、无明瀑流。对于拥有它们的人,它们会淹没他、使他沉溺于轮回,故称“瀑流”。这些是力量强大的烦恼。于名为五欲的欲乐对象中,那瀑流便是“欲瀑流”,这是欲爱的别名。于依业与再生二门所说的色界、无色界之有中,那瀑流便是“有瀑流”,这是有爱的别名。见本身就是瀑流,即“见瀑流”,这是“世间是常”等见的别名。无明本身就是瀑流,即“无明瀑流”,这是对苦等事无知的别名。显示巴利原文
Cattāro oghāti kāmogho, bhavogho, diṭṭhogho, avijjogho. Yassa saṃvijjanti, taṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ ohananti osīdāpentīti oghā. Balavakilesā ete. Kāmaguṇasaṅkhāte kāme ogho kāmogho. Kāmataṇhāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Rūpārūpasaṅkhāte kammato ca upapattito ca duvidhepi bhave ogho bhavogho. Bhavataṇhāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Diṭṭhi eva ogho diṭṭhogho. ‘‘Sassato loko’’tiādikāya diṭṭhiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Avijjā eva ogho avijjogho, dukkhādīsu aññāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ.
五种盖:欲贪盖、嗔恚盖、昏沉睡眠盖、掉举恶作盖、疑盖。它们遮覆、缠绕于心,故称“盖”。所谓“欲”,是指五种欲乐。对这些欲乐生起的欲望,即是“欲贪”。或者,乐于欲求本身称为“欲”,这个欲本身就是贪,既非想做什么的动机之欲,也非对佛法的善法欲,故特名“欲贪”。这是欲爱的别名。因它而使心生起嗔恚并受毁坏,或破坏威仪、正行、端正外貌的成就,以及破坏利益与安乐,故称“嗔恚”。这是瞋的别名。以僵硬不灵活为相者,是“昏沉”;以昏昏欲睡为相者,是“睡眠”;二者义指缺乏精进、身心呆滞、无力障碍。心不精进是昏沉,相应心所的不灵活、不适业是睡眠,二者合称“昏沉睡眠”。心念高扬动荡的状态,即是“掉举”,意为不寂静、不安息,这是散乱的别名。做了不善的恶行,称为“恶作”;恶作之后追悔不安的心态,即是“恶作”,意为做了应受咎责的事后之心,这是追悔的别名。舍离了决择,便是“疑”。显示巴利原文
Pañca nīvaraṇānīti kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ byāpādanīvaraṇaṃ thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ uddhaccakukkuccanīvaraṇaṃ vicikicchānīvaraṇaṃ. Cittaṃ nīvaranti pariyonandhantīti nīvaraṇāni. Kāmīyantīti kāmā. Pañca kāmaguṇā. Kāmesu chando kāmacchando. Kāmayatīti vā kāmo, kāmo eva chando, na kattukamyatāchando na dhammacchandoti kāmacchando. Kāmataṇhāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Byāpajjati tena cittaṃ pūtibhāvaṃ gacchati, byāpādayati vā vinayācārarūpasampattihitasukhānīti byāpādo. Dosassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Thinanatā thinaṃ, middhanatā middhaṃ, anussāhasaṃhananatā asattivighāto cāti attho. Cittassa anussāho thinaṃ, cetasikānaṃ akammaññatā middhaṃ, thinañca middhañca thinamiddhaṃ. Uddhatassa bhāvo uddhaccaṃ, avūpasamoti attho. Vikkhepassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Kucchitaṃ kataṃ kukataṃ, kukatassa bhāvo kukkuccaṃ, garahitakiriyabhāvoti attho. Pacchānutāpassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vigatā cikicchāti vicikicchā, vigatapaññāti attho. Sabhāvaṃ vā vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamatīti vicikicchā. Buddhādīsu saṃsayassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Kāmacchando eva nīvaraṇaṃ kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi.
“六法”,或读作“六法”。六爱身:色爱、声爱、香爱、味爱、触爱、法爱。对色的爱即色爱。此爱本身又分为欲爱等多种,以“积集”之义而称“身”。其余爱身亦然。显示巴利原文
Cha dhammā, chaddhammāti vā pāṭho. Cha taṇhākāyāti rūpataṇhā saddataṇhā gandhataṇhā rasataṇhā phoṭṭhabbataṇhā dhammataṇhā. Rūpe taṇhā rūpataṇhā. Sā eva kāmataṇhādibhedena anekabhedattā rāsaṭṭhena kāyoti vuttā. Evaṃ sesesupi.
「七随眠」:即欲贪随眠、嗔随眠、慢随眠、见随眠、疑随眠、有贪随眠、无明随眠。因尚未被断除而潜伏(anusentī),故称随眠。对诸欲的贪著(kāmesu rāgo)即是欲贪,或欲本身就是贪著,亦称为欲贪。对所缘生起违逆(paṭihaññatī),故称为嗔。以不如实见为义,故称为见。因‘我优越’等想(maññatī)而自负,故称为慢。对有的贪著,即是有贪。强力的欲贪,便是欲贪随眠。嗔随眠等其余诸随眠,也应以同样的方法理解。显示巴利原文
Sattānusayāti kāmarāgānusayo paṭighānusayo mānānusayo diṭṭhānusayo vicikicchānusayo bhavarāgānusayo avijjānusayo. Appahīnaṭṭhena anusentīti anusayā. Kāmesu rāgo kāmarāgo, kāmo eva vā rāgoti kāmarāgo. Ārammaṇasmiṃ paṭihaññatīti paṭighaṃ. Ayāthāvadassanaṭṭhena diṭṭhi. Seyyādivasena maññatīti māno. Bhavesu rāgo bhavarāgo. Thāmagato kāmarāgo kāmarāgānusayo. Evaṃ sesesupi.
「八邪道」:即邪见、邪思惟、邪语、邪业、邪命、邪精进、邪念、邪定。即便有人期望‘这些将为我带来利益与安乐’,但事实上并非如此;而且,于不净等处反而生起清净等颠倒想,因此其本质是邪的,故称邪道。邪见,即错误地看,或依之而错误地看。再者,颠倒的见解是邪见,不真实的见解是邪见,偏离真实而执取的见解是邪见,以及未能带来利益而受智者诃责的见解,亦是邪见。对于邪思惟等,也适用同样的道理。邪见即是执著常见或断见者;邪思惟即是欲思惟等三种思惟;邪语即是妄语等四种语行;邪业即是杀生等三种业行;邪命即是发起邪命谋生方式的思惟;邪精进即是与不善心相应的精进;邪念即是与正念相对立的不善念生起;邪定即是不善定。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭha micchattāti micchādiṭṭhi micchāsaṅkappo micchāvācā micchākammanto micchāājīvo micchāvāyāmo micchāsati micchāsamādhi. ‘‘Hitasukhāvahā me bhavissantī’’ti evaṃ āsīsitāpi tathāabhāvato asubhādīsuyeva subhantiādiviparītappavattito ca micchāsabhāvāti micchattā. Micchā passati, micchā vā etāya passantīti micchādiṭṭhi. Atha vā viparītā diṭṭhīti micchādiṭṭhi, ayāthāvadiṭṭhīti vā micchādiṭṭhi, virajjhitvā gahaṇato vā vitathā diṭṭhīti micchādiṭṭhi, anattāvahattā paṇḍitehi kucchitā diṭṭhīti vāmicchādiṭṭhi. Micchāsaṅkappādīsupi eseva nayo. Micchādiṭṭhīti sassatucchedābhiniveso. Micchāsaṅkappoti kāmavitakkāditividho vitakko. Micchāvācāti musāvādādicatubbidhā cetanā. Micchākammantoti pāṇātipātāditividhā cetanā. Micchāājīvoti micchājīvapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā. Micchāvāyāmoti akusalacittasampayuttaṃ vīriyaṃ. Micchāsatīti satipaṭipakkhabhūto akusalacittuppādo. Micchāsamādhīti akusalasamādhi.
「九种以爱为根之法」(出自《长部》):缘于爱而有寻求,缘于寻求而有获得,缘于获得而有裁决,缘于裁决而有欲贪,缘于欲贪而有执取,缘于执取而有摄受,缘于摄受而有悭吝,缘于悭吝而有守护,以守护为因缘,便生起执杖、执刀、斗诤、口角、争论、恶口、两舌、妄语等种种恶不善法。这便是九种以爱为根的法。因为爱是它们的根,所以称为爱根法。寻求等这些都属于不善。「缘于爱」是指依止于爱而有。「寻求」是指对色等所缘的寻求,因为有爱才有寻求。「获得」是指得到色等所缘,因为有寻求才有获得。而「裁决」有四种:依智而起的裁决、依爱而起的裁决、依见而起的裁决、依思惟而起的裁决。其中,‘应善知乐之裁决,善知乐之裁决已,应于内修习乐者’(《中部》),这是智裁决。又,‘裁决有两种:爱裁决与见裁决’(《大义释》),其中,一百零八种爱行属于爱裁决,六十二种见属于见裁决。但是,在‘帝释,欲为思惟之因’(《长部》)这部经中,此处所说的裁决则是指思惟裁决。获得之后,对于可爱或不可爱、美好或不美好之物,通过思惟来决定:‘这些将用于色所缘,这些用于声等所缘;这些是我的,那些是别人的;这些应该如此,那些应该如彼’,这便是思惟裁决。显示巴利原文
Nava taṇhāmūlakāti (dī. ni. 2.103; 3.359) taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho, lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo, vinicchayaṃ paṭicca chandarāgo, chandarāgaṃ paṭicca ajjhosānaṃ, ajjhosānaṃ paṭicca pariggaho, pariggahaṃ paṭicca macchariyaṃ, macchariyaṃ paṭicca ārakkho, ārakkhādhikaraṇaṃ daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṃtuvaṃpesuññamusāvādā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti (dī. ni. 2.104; 3.359). Ime nava taṇhāmūlakā dhammā. Taṇhā mūlaṃ etesanti taṇhāmūlakā. Pariyesanādayo akusalā eva. Taṇhaṃ, paṭiccāti taṇhaṃ nissāya. Pariyesanāti rūpādiārammaṇapariyesanā. Sā hi taṇhāya sati hoti. Lābhoti rūpādiārammaṇapaṭilābho, so hi pariyesanāya sati hoti. Vinicchayo pana ñāṇataṇhādiṭṭhivitakkavasena catubbidho. Tattha ‘‘sukhavinicchayaṃ jaññā, sukhavinicchayaṃ ñatvā ajjhattaṃ sukhamanuyuñjeyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.323) ayaṃ ñāṇavinicchayo. ‘‘Vinicchayoti dve vinicchayā taṇhāvinicchayo ca diṭṭhivinicchayo cā’’ti (mahāni. 102) evaṃ āgatāni aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni taṇhāvinicchayo. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo diṭṭhivinicchayo. ‘‘Chando kho, devānaminda, vitakkanidāno’’ti (dī. ni. 2.358) imasmiṃ pana sutte idha vinicchayoti vutto vitakkoyeva āgato. Lābhaṃ labhitvā hi iṭṭhāniṭṭhaṃ sundarāsundarañca vitakkeneva vinicchināti ‘‘ettakaṃ me rūpārammaṇatthāya bhavissati, ettakaṃ saddādiārammaṇatthāya, ettakaṃ mayhaṃ bhavissati, ettakaṃ parassa, ettakaṃ paribhuñjissāmi, ettakaṃ nidahissāmī’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo’’ti. Chandarāgoti evaṃ akusalavitakkena vitakkite vatthusmiṃ dubbalarāgo ca balavarāgo ca uppajjati. Chandoti ettha dubbalarāgassādhivacanaṃ, rāgoti balavarāgassa. Ajjhosānanti ahaṃ mamāti balavasanniṭṭhānaṃ. Pariggahoti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena pariggahakaraṇaṃ. Macchariyanti parehi sādhāraṇabhāvassa asahanatā. Tenevassa porāṇā evaṃ vacanatthaṃ vadanti ‘‘idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayhameva hotu, mā aññassa acchariyaṃ hotūti pavattattā macchariyanti vuccatī’’ti. Ārakkhoti dvārapidahanamañjūsagopanādivasena suṭṭhu rakkhaṇaṃ. Adhikarotīti adhikaraṇaṃ. Kāraṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ārakkhādhikaraṇanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, ārakkhahetūti attho. Daṇḍādānādīsu paranisedhanatthaṃ daṇḍassa ādānaṃ daṇḍādānaṃ. Ekatodhārādinā satthassa ādānaṃ satthādānaṃ. Kāyakalahopi vācākalahopi kalaho. Purimo purimo virodho viggaho. Pacchimo pacchimo vivādo. Tuvaṃtuvanti agāravavasena tuvaṃtuvaṃvacanaṃ.
所谓“十邪道”,即邪见……乃至……邪定、邪智、邪解脱。其中,“邪智”是指在造恶时,心里思量造恶的方便,造恶之后又以“我做得很好”等心态反省而生起的愚痴。“邪解脱”是指明明没有解脱,却自以为已经解脱。显示巴利原文
Dasa micchattāti micchādiṭṭhi…pe… micchāsamādhi micchāñāṇaṃ micchāvimutti. Tattha micchāñāṇanti pāpakiriyāsu upāyacintāvasena pāpaṃ katvā sukataṃ mayāti paccavekkhaṇākārena ca uppanno moho. Micchāvimuttīti avimuttasseva sato vimuttisaññitā.
现在,为了说明应当以种种断来舍断的诸法,故开始阐述“二断”等。因为一旦明了断的种类,那些应当一一断除的诸法便容易了知。在五种断中,除去两种世间断和不费力的出离断,首先说两种不费力的出世间断。能正确地断除烦恼,故名为“正断”;由于它能断除,故名为“断”。以正断为断,而非以其他为断,故称“正断断”。烦恼止息,故是“止息”;已断,故是“断”;以止息为断,称为“止息断”。超越世间,故是“出世间”。趋向名为寂灭的灭尽,故是“趣灭”;此趣向灭尽之道,即是“趣灭道”。修习此道者,其道即为正断断,这是它的含义。同样,在果位的刹那,唯有出世间果是止息断。显示巴利原文
Idāni anekabhedena pahānena pahātabbe dassetuṃ dve pahānānītiādi āraddhaṃ. Pahānesu hi viññātesu tena tena pahātabbā dhammā suviññeyyā honti. Pañcasu pahānesu lokikāni ca dve pahānāni appayogaṃ nissaraṇappahānañca ṭhapetvā appayogāneva dve lokuttarapahānāni paṭhamaṃ vuttāni. Sammā ucchijjanti etena kilesāti samucchedo, pahīyanti etena kilesāti pahānaṃ. Samucchedasaṅkhātaṃ pahānaṃ, na sesappahānanti samucchedappahānaṃ. Kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhattā paṭippassaddhi, pahīnattā pahānaṃ, paṭippassaddhisaṅkhātaṃ pahānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ. Lokaṃ uttaratīti lokuttaro. Nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ khayaṃ gacchatīti khayagāmī, khayagāmī ca so maggo cāti khayagāmimaggo, taṃ bhāvayato so maggo samucchedappahānanti attho. Tathā phalakkhaṇe lokuttaraphalameva paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ.
于“这是诸欲的出离”等句中,依此而从欲、色、有为出离,故名为“出离”;或由已从这些出离,故名为“出离”。此指不净禅那。由于从诸欲出离,故名为“出离”。或指不来道。因为不净禅那以镇伏而成为诸欲的出离;然而,以该禅那为近行基础而生起的不来道,则以正断而成为诸欲的究竟出离。“色”指可破坏(可变坏)之物;非色即是“无色”,如同以怨敌为对治而有“非怨敌”,以贪等为对治而有“无贪”等,意为“色的对治”。或者,从果上说,此处无色,故为“无色”;无色本身即是“无色界”。此指四无色禅那,它们被称为色的出离。再者,由无色而生起的阿拉汉道,因能阻止再生,故成为色的究竟出离。“有”指已生起。“有为”指由诸缘和合所造作。“缘生”指依于彼彼诸缘而正确地一同生起。以第一个词“已生”说明无常性;以第二个词说明虽无常,却由缘的力量而具有依他性;以第三个词……显示巴利原文
Kāmānametaṃnissaraṇantiādīsu kāmato rūpato saṅkhatato nissaranti etenāti nissaraṇaṃ, tehi vā nissaṭattā nissaraṇaṃ. Asubhajjhānaṃ. Kāmehi nikkhantattā nekkhammaṃ. Anāgāmimaggo vā. Asubhajjhānañhi vikkhambhanato kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppāditaanāgāmimaggo pana samucchedato sabbaso kāmānaṃ accantanissaraṇaṃ. Ruppatīti rūpaṃ, na rūpaṃ arūpaṃ mittapaṭipakkhā amittā viya, lobhādipaṭipakkhā alobhādayo viya ca rūpapaṭipakkhoti attho. Phalavasena vā natthettha rūpanti arūpaṃ, arūpameva āruppaṃ. Arūpajjhānāni. Tāni rūpānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma. Arūpehipi arahattamaggo puna uppattinivāraṇato sabbaso rūpānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma. Bhūtanti jātaṃ. Saṅkhatanti paccayehi saṅgamma kataṃ. Paṭiccasamuppannanti te te paccaye paṭicca sammā saha ca uppannaṃ. Paṭhamena sañjātattadīpanena aniccatā, dutiyena aniccassāpi sato paccayānubhāvadīpanena parāyattatā, tatiyena parāyattassāpi sato paccayānaṃ abyāpārattadīpanena evaṃdhammatā dīpitā hoti. Nirodhoti nibbānaṃ. Nibbānañhi āgamma dukkhaṃ nirujjhatīti nirodhoti vuccati. So eva ca sabbasaṅkhatato nissaṭattā tassa saṅkhatassa nissaraṇaṃ nāma. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
“灭是它的出离”:此处,阿拉汉果被理解为“灭”。因为透过阿拉汉果见涅槃之后,未来一切诸行不复生起,故说为“灭”——这是因为它作为名为阿拉汉的灭的缘。显示巴利原文
‘‘Nirodho tassa nissaraṇanti idha arahattaphalaṃ nirodhoti adhippetaṃ. Arahattaphalena hi nibbāne diṭṭhe puna āyatiṃ sabbasaṅkhārā na hontīti arahattasaṅkhātassa nirodhassa paccayattā nirodhoti vutta’’nti vuttaṃ.
于“已获得出离者”等句中:由于不净禅那的出离性,以镇伏断而令诸欲被断除且被舍离;由于不来道的出离性,以正断断而令诸欲被断除且被舍离。对于四无色禅那的出离性与阿拉汉道的出离性,也应以同样方式配合于“色”。因为通过断除对色的欲贪,色得以正断。此处“色”一词是作了性别的转换。由于涅槃的出离性,以出离断;由于阿拉汉果的出离性,以止息断——诸行既被断除又被舍离。而涅槃的出离性,应理解为以作为所缘的方式获得。显示巴利原文
Nekkhammaṃ paṭiladdhassātiādīsu asubhajjhānassa nissaraṇatte vikkhambhanappahānena, anāgāmimaggassa nissaraṇatte samucchedappahānena kāmā pahīnā ceva honti pariccattā ca. Arūpajjhānānaṃ nissaraṇatte ca arahattamaggassa nissaraṇatte ca evameva rūpā yojetabbā. Rūpesu hi chandarāgappahānena rūpānaṃ samucchedo hoti. Rūpāti cettha liṅgavipallāso kato. Nibbānassa nissaraṇatte nissaraṇappahānena, arahattaphalassa nissaraṇatte paṭippassaddhippahānena saṅkhārā pahīnā ceva honti pariccattā ca. Nibbānassa ca nissaraṇatte ārammaṇakaraṇavasena paṭilābho veditabbo.
在“苦谛”等句中,“遍知通达”等是抽象名词的中性用法。以遍知而通达,称为遍知通达,这便是遍知通达,其余诸处也可同理了知。“断”:当这样通达时,便断除应断的烦恼——应取此义。无论是在世间还是出世间,也都是通过断除欲贪而断除它们,这是其含义。此中也有“断”一词的异读。犹如一艘船在同一刹那无有先后地完成四事:舍离此岸、截断水流、运载货物、抵达彼岸;同样,道智在同一刹那无有先后地现观四谛,即:以遍知现观而现观苦,以断现观而现观集,以修现观而现观道,以作证现观而现观灭。这是什么意思呢?即是:以灭为所缘,而到达、看见、通达四谛(《清净道论》)。因此应知,即使在一个刹那之中,也如同分别宣说一般,说为有断等。显示巴利原文
Dukkhasaccantiādīsu pariññāpaṭivedhantiādi bhāvanapuṃsakavacanaṃ. Pariññāya paṭivedho pariññāpaṭivedho. Taṃ pariññāpaṭivedhaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Pajahātīti tathā tathā paṭivijjhanto pahātabbe kilese pajahatīti attho gahetabbo. Lokiyalokuttaresupi chandarāgappahānena vā tāni pajahatīti attho. Pajahatītipi pāṭho. Yathā nāvā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ ekakkhaṇe cattāri kiccāni karoti, orimaṃ tīraṃ pajahati, sotaṃ chindati, bhaṇḍaṃ vahati, pārimaṃ tīraṃ appeti, evamevaṃ maggañāṇaṃ apubbaṃ acarimaṃ ekakkhaṇe cattāri saccāni abhisameti, dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena abhisameti, samudayaṃ pahānābhisamayena abhisameti, maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayena abhisameti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cattāri saccāni pāpuṇāti passati paṭivijjhatī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.839) vuttattā ekakkhaṇepi visuṃ visuṃ viya pahānāni vuttānīti veditabbāni.
在五种断中:如同将水罐投入长满水藻的水中,水藻便被排开一样,通过种种世间定,镇伏盖等敌对法并将其遣除,这称为“镇伏断”。应知,镇伏断是就“修习初禅者断除诸盖”而说的,因为诸盖的断除显而易见。在禅那的前分与后分,盖都不曾压伏心;若心被盖压伏,禅那便会退失。而寻等则在第二禅等的前后,作为非敌对者而现起。因此,盖的镇伏是明显的。其次,如同在夜间点燃灯火去除黑暗,通过作为观之组成部分的种种禅支,以敌对的方式断除种种应断之法,这称为“彼分断”。应知,彼分断是就“修习能摧破恶见的抉择分定者断除恶见”而说的,这是从粗重法的角度而言。因为恶见是粗重的,常想等则是微细的。其中,“恶见”(diṭṭhigata):恶见本身即是“恶见”,如同“粪所行处”、“尿所行处”等词。又因为没有可去之处,恶见仅是所到之处,故也称为“恶见”;由于包含在六十二见中,故也称为“入于诸见中者”。此处以复数形式,指那些恶见。“抉择分定”即与观相应的定。其次,如同被雷击中的树无法再生,通过圣道智,使结缚之法永不再生,这样的断除称为“正断”。显示巴利原文
Pañcasu pahānesu yaṃ sasevāle udake pakkhittena ghaṭena sevālassa viya tena tena lokiyasamādhinā nīvaraṇādīnaṃ paccanīkadhammānaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ dūrīkaraṇaṃ, idaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ nāma. Vikkhambhanappahānañca nīvaraṇānaṃ paṭhamaṃjhānaṃ bhāvayatoti nīvaraṇānaṃyeva pahānaṃ pākaṭattā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Nīvaraṇāni hi jhānassa pubbabhāgepi pacchābhāgepi na sahasā cittaṃ ajjhottharanti, ajjhotthaṭesu ca tesu jhānaṃ parihāyati, vitakkādayo pana dutiyajjhānādito pubbe pacchā ca appaṭipakkhā hutvā pavattanti. Tasmā nīvaraṇānaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ pākaṭaṃ. Yaṃ pana rattibhāge samujjalitena padīpena andhakārassa viya tena tena vipassanāya avayavabhūtena jhānaṅgena paṭipakkhavaseneva tassa tassa ca pahātabbadhammassa pahānaṃ, idaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ nāma. Tadaṅgappahānañca diṭṭhigatānaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ samādhiṃ bhāvayatoti diṭṭhigatānaṃyeva pahānaṃ oḷārikavasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Diṭṭhigatañhi oḷārikaṃ, niccasaññādayo sukhumā. Tattha diṭṭhigatānanti diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigataṃ ‘‘gūthagataṃ muttagata’’ntiādīni (a. ni. 9.11) viya. Gantabbābhāvato cadiṭṭhiyā gatamattamevetantipi diṭṭhigataṃ, dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhīsu antogadhattā diṭṭhīsu gatantipi diṭṭhigataṃ. Bahuvacanena tesaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ. Nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ samādhinti vipassanāsampayuttaṃ samādhiṃ. Yaṃ pana asanivicakkābhihatassa (visuddhi. 2.851) rukkhassa viya ariyamaggañāṇena saṃyojanānaṃ dhammānaṃ yathā na puna pavattati, evaṃ pahānaṃ, idaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ nāma. Nirodhonibbānanti nirodhasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ.
这样,从断除的角度说明了应断的诸法之后,现在为了就这些法的本身再作说明,而说:“诸比丘,一切皆应断”等。其中,眼等是通过断除欲贪而应断的。在“见色时,即断除”等语句中,是指从无常等角度观察色时,便断除了应断的烦恼。关于“眼……乃至……老死……乃至……深入不死之处的涅槃”等文,有两处省略与重复,应当根据各法的特性来理解。例如,在“观察未知当知根时,即断除”等语句中,是指当观察、注视、期望、希求那些出世间法中的未知当知根时,在观的刹那便断除了应断的烦恼。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pahānavasena pahātabbe dhamme dassetvā idāni sarūpeneva puna pahātabbe dhamme dassetuṃ sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, pahātabbantiādimāha. Tattha cakkhādīni chandarāgappahānena pahātabbāni. Rūpaṃ passanto pajahātītiādīsu rūpaṃ aniccādito passanto pahātabbe kilese pajahāti. Cakkhuṃ…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ…pe… amatogadhaṃ nibbānanti peyyāladvaye anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ ‘‘passanto pajahātī’’tiādīsu tesu lokuttaresu anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ passanto udikkhanto apekkhamāno icchamāno vipassanākkhaṇesu pahātabbe kilese pajahātīti taṃtaṃdhammānurūpena yojetabbaṃ.
「应修」的解说显示巴利原文
Bhāvetabbaniddesavaṇṇanā
25 在应修说的部分,「身至念」:指《身至念经》等中所说的,与入出息念、四威仪、小威仪、三十二身分、四界差别、九种冢墓不净、拣择作意相应的念,以及随其所宜与色界禅那相应的念。因为这种念已进入、已转起于这些‘身’的所缘中,故称「身至」。「乐俱行」:指与名为甘美感受的‘乐’达到同生等关系的念。在佛陀的教法中,‘俱行’一词用在五种意义上:同体、混杂、所缘、所依、相杂。例如‘那种导致再有、伴随喜贪的渴爱’中,是指同体,即喜贪本身。‘那种与懈怠俱行的考察’是指混杂,即被偶尔生起的懈怠所混杂。‘获得与色俱或无色俱的等至’是指所缘,即以色界或无色界为所缘。‘修习与骨想俱行的念觉支’是指所依,即以骨想为依止,由修习骨想而获得。‘此乐与此喜俱行、俱生、相应’是指相杂,即相互混合。在这里,「乐俱行」也是‘相杂’的意思。因为与乐相杂,故说为「乐俱行」。实际上,除第四禅外,其他禅那中它皆是‘乐俱行’的。虽在第四禅中是舍俱行,但依据多数情形而说‘乐俱行’;或又因第四禅以之前的诸禅为根本,故说乐俱行时,舍俱行的第四禅亦被包括在内;或又因显示巴利原文
25. Bhāvetabbaniddese kāyagatāsatīti kāyagatāsatisuttante (ma. ni. 3.153 ādayo) vuttā ānāpānacatuiriyāpathakhuddakairiyāpathadvattiṃsākāracatudhātunavasivathikāpaṭikūla- vavatthāpakamanasikārasampayuttā yathānurūpaṃ rūpajjhānasampayuttā ca sati. Sā hi tesu kāyesu gatā pavattāti kāyagatāti vuccati. Sātasahagatāti madhurasukhavedayitasaṅkhātena sātena saha ekuppādādibhāvaṃ gatā. Tabbhāve vokiṇṇe ārammaṇe nissaye saṃsaṭṭhe dissati sahagatasaddo pañcasu atthesu jinavacane. ‘‘Yāyaṃ taṇhā ponobbhavikā nandirāgasahagatā’’ti (vibha. 203) ettha tabbhāve, nandirāgabhūtāti attho. ‘‘Yā, bhikkhave, vīmaṃsā kosajjasahagatā kosajjasampayuttā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.832) ettha vokiṇṇe, antarantarā uppajjamānena kosajjena vokiṇṇāti attho. ‘‘Lābhī hoti rūpasahagatānaṃ vā samāpattīnaṃ arūpasahagatānaṃ vā samāpattīna’’nti (pu. pa. 3-8) ettha ārammaṇe, rūpārūpārammaṇānanti attho. ‘‘Aṭṭhikasaññāsahagataṃ satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.238) ettha nissaye, aṭṭhikasaññānissayaṃ aṭṭhikasaññaṃ bhāvetvā paṭiladdhanti attho. ‘‘Idaṃ sukhaṃ imāya pītiyā sahagataṃ hoti sahajātaṃ sampayutta’’nti (vibha. 578) ettha saṃsaṭṭhe, sammissanti attho. Imasmimpi pade saṃsaṭṭho adhippeto. Sātasaṃsaṭṭhā hi sātasahagatāti vuttā. Sā hi ṭhapetvā catutthaṃ jhānaṃ sesesu sātasahagatā hoti, satipi ca upekkhāsahagatatte yebhuyyavasena sātasahagatāti vuttā, purimajjhānamūlakattā vā catutthajjhānassa sātasahagatāya upekkhāsahagatāpi vuttāva hoti , upekkhāya pana sante sukhe vuttattā bhagavatā sātasahagatāti catutthajjhānasampayuttāpi vuttāva hoti.
「止」与「观」:「止」能令欲贪等敌对法止息、灭尽,这是定的名称。「观」是依无常等,以种种行相观察诸法,这是慧的名称。此二者,在《十上经》的教示中,被说为前分;在《集异门经》的教示中,则是世间与出世间混合的。「三种定」:有寻有伺定、无寻唯伺定、无寻无伺定。与已现起的寻俱行,为‘有寻’;与已现起的伺俱行,为‘有伺’。此有寻有伺定是刹那定、观定、近行定、初禅定。寻已不存,故为‘无寻’。在寻与伺二者中,以伺为‘唯’、为最上、为极限,故称「唯伺」,即不再有寻相伴,唯与伺相应。此无寻唯伺定,在五法论中是第二禅定。脱离了二者,就是「无寻无伺定」,在四法论中是第二禅等,在五法论中是第三禅等,即色界定。这三种定都是世间的。在《集异门经》的教法中,还宣说了另外三种定:空定、无相定、无愿定,这些定在此未被意许。显示巴利原文
Samatho ca vipassanā cāti kāmacchandādayo paccanīkadhamme sameti vināsetīti samatho. Samādhissetaṃ nāmaṃ. Aniccatādivasena vividhehi ākārehi dhamme passatīti vipassanā. Paññāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ime pana dve dasuttarapariyāye pubbabhāgāti vuttā, saṅgītipariyāye ca lokiyalokuttaramissakāti. Tayo samādhīti savitakko savicāro samādhi , avitakko vicāramatto samādhi, avitakko avicāro samādhi. Sampayogavasena vattamānena saha vitakkena savitakko, saha vicārena savicāro. So khaṇikasamādhi, vipassanāsamādhi, upacārasamādhi, paṭhamajjhānasamādhi. Natthi etassa vitakkoti avitakko. Vitakkavicāresu vicāro mattā paramā pamāṇaṃ etassāti vicāramatto, vicārato uttari vitakkena sampayogaṃ na gacchatīti attho. So pañcakanaye dutiyajjhānasamādhi, tadubhayavirahito avitakko avicāro samādhi. So catukkanaye dutiyajjhānādi, pañcakanaye tatiyajjhānādi rūpāvacarasamādhi. Ime tayopi lokiyā eva. Saṅgītipariyāye aparepi tayo samādhī vuttā – ‘‘suññato samādhi, animitto samādhi, appaṇihito samādhī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.305). Na te idha adhippetā.
「四念处」:即身随观念处、受随观念处、心随观念处、法随观念处。应知,于前分以十四种方式把握身,是身随观念处;以九种方式把握受,是受随观念处;以十六种方式把握心,是心随观念处;以五种方式把握法,是法随观念处。此处所说的并非出世间的念处。「五支定」:因具备五支,故称「五支」,此指第四禅定。五支为:喜遍满、乐遍满、心遍满、光明遍满、观察相。‘喜遍满生起’指两种禅那中的慧,称为喜遍满。‘乐遍满生起’指三种禅那中的慧,称为乐遍满。‘遍满他人之心而生起’指他心智,称为心遍满。‘遍满光明而生起’指天眼智,称为光明遍满。观察智则称为‘观察相’。此也曾被说:显示巴利原文
Cattāro satipaṭṭhānāti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Pubbabhāge cuddasavidhena kāyaṃ pariggaṇhato kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, navavidhena vedanaṃ pariggaṇhato vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, soḷasavidhena cittaṃ pariggaṇhato cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, pañcavidhena dhamme pariggaṇhato dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Lokuttaraṃ pana idha na adhippetaṃ. Pañcaṅgiko samādhīti pañca aṅgāni assa santīti pañcaṅgiko, catutthajjhānasamādhi. Pītipharaṇatā, sukhapharaṇatā, cetopharaṇatā, ālokapharaṇatā, paccavekkhaṇanimittanti pañca aṅgāni. Pītiṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti dvīsu jhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā nāma. Sukhaṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti tīsu jhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā nāma. Paresaṃ ceto pharamānā uppajjatīti cetopariyapaññā cetopharaṇatā nāma. Ālokaṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti dibbacakkhupaññā ālokapharaṇatā nāma. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇanimittaṃ nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
于二种禅那中,慧为「喜遍满」;于三种禅那中,慧为「乐遍满」;他心智为「心遍满」;天眼智为「光明遍满」;从每一种定出起后,观察智则为「观察相」。(《分别论》804)显示巴利原文
‘‘Dvīsu jhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā, tīsu jhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā, paracittapaññā cetopharaṇatā, dibbacakkhupaññā ālokapharaṇatā, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhitassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇanimitta’’nti (vibha. 804).
因为那相能把握出定者转起的行相,故称为「相」。其中,喜遍满与乐遍满如同双足,心遍满与光明遍满如同双手,作为神通基础的第四禅犹如躯干,观察相则如头部。如是,具寿法将舍利弗长老将五支正定开示为犹如四肢五体具全之人。显示巴利原文
Tañhi vuṭṭhitasamādhissa pavattākāragahaṇato nimittanti vuttaṃ. Tattha ca pītipharaṇatā sukhapharaṇatā dve pādā viya, cetopharaṇatā ālokapharaṇatā dve hatthā viya, abhiññāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ majjhimakāyo viya, paccavekkhaṇanimittaṃ sīsaṃ viya. Iti āyasmā dhammasenāpati sāriputtatthero pañcaṅgikaṃ sammāsamādhiṃ aṅgapaccaṅgasampannaṃ purisaṃ viya katvā dassesi.
「六随念处」:因屡屡生起,念本身便称为「随念」;又因只在所应转起之处转起,契合于依信出家的善男子,故念亦是「随念」;而这些随念又是喜等生起之处,故称「随念处」。哪六种呢?佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、舍随念、天随念。
「觉支」:即觉悟的支分,或是觉悟者的支分。意思是:圣弟子依凭在出世间道刹那中生起的一组合法——也就是名为念、择法、精进、喜、轻安、定、舍,且能对治昏沉、掉举、停滞、精进、欲乐、苦行、执断、执常等众多灾患的法之等合性——而觉悟,因此,那法之等合性便叫作「觉悟」。所谓「觉悟」,即是从烦恼连续形成的睡眠中醒来,或指通达四圣谛,或指亲证涅槃。如同禅支、道支等一样,属于那名为「法之等合性」的觉悟的分支,故可说其具「觉支」;或者,依上述方式,圣弟子由于依那种法之等合性而觉悟,故称「觉悟者」,属于这位觉悟者的支分,亦可说具「觉支」,就如军队的支分、战车的部件一样。因此,注释师们说:「或者,(觉支」显示巴利原文
Cha anussatiṭṭhānānīti punappunaṃ uppajjanato satiyo eva anussatiyo, pavattitabbaṭṭhānasmiṃyeva pavattattā saddhāpabbajitassa kulaputtassa anurūpā satiyotipi anussatiyo, anussatiyo eva pītiādīnaṃ ṭhānattā anussatiṭṭhānāni. Katamāni cha? Buddhānussati dhammānussati saṅghānussati sīlānussati cāgānussati devatānussati (dī. ni. 3.327). Bojjhaṅgāti bodhiyā, bodhissa vā aṅgā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā esā dhammasāmaggī yāya lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe uppajjamānāya līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanakāmasukhattakilamathānuyogaucchedasassatābhinivesādīnaṃ anekesaṃ upaddavānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāya satidhammavicayavīriyapītipassaddhisamādhiupekkhāsaṅkhātāya dhammasāmaggiyā ariyasāvako bujjhatīti katvā bodhīti vuccati. Bujjhatīti kilesasantānaniddāya vuṭṭhahati, cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati, nibbānameva vā sacchikaroti, tassā dhammasāmaggisaṅkhātāya bodhiyā aṅgātipi bojjhaṅgā jhānaṅgamaggaṅgādayo viya. Yo panesa yathāvuttappakārāya etāya dhammasāmaggiyā bujjhatīti katvā ariyasāvako bodhīti vuccati, tassa bodhissa aṅgātipi bojjhaṅgā senaṅgarathaṅgādayo viya. Tenāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā ‘‘bujjhanakassa puggalassa aṅgāti vā bojjhaṅgā’’ti. Apica ‘‘bojjhaṅgāti kenaṭṭhena bojjhaṅgā, bodhāya saṃvattantīti bojjhaṅgā’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 2.17) nayena bojjhaṅgaṭṭho veditabbo. Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi ārakattā ariyabhāvakarattā ariyaphalapaṭilābhakarattā ca ariyo. Aṭṭha aṅgāni assāti aṭṭhaṅgiko. Soyaṃ caturaṅgikā viya senā, pañcaṅgikaṃ viya ca tūriyaṃ aṅgamattameva hoti, aṅgavinimutto natthi. Bojjhaṅgamaggaṅgā lokuttarā, dasuttarapariyāyena pubbabhāgāpi labbhanti.
九种清净精勤支,即:戒清净是清净精勤支,心清净是清净精勤支,见清净是清净精勤支,度疑清净是清净精勤支,道非道如实知见清净是清净精勤支,行道如实知见清净是清净精勤支,如实知见清净是清净精勤支,慧清净是清净精勤支,解脱清净是清净精勤支。
其中,“戒清净”指能令达到清净的四遍净戒,以此戒能清除犯戒的垢秽。“清净精勤支”的意思是:作为遍净之状态、最殊胜的精勤支分。“心清净”指作为观立足处的、已娴熟的八等至,因为这些等至能净化欲贪等心的垢秽。“见清净”指有因有缘地照见名色,因为这能净化众生的邪见垢秽。“度疑清净”指了知缘起相状的智慧。依此智慧,见到诸行依缘而于三世流转,从而超越对三世众生的疑惑而获得清净。“道非道如实知见清净”:在生灭随观的刹那,会生起光明、喜、轻安、乐、胜解、策励、现起、舍、欲求这十种观随染,这些并非道;而在道迹上现起的生灭智才是道。如此能分辨道与非道的智慧,即称为道非道智,因为它能净化非道的垢秽。“行道如实知见清净”:指在道迹上现起的九种观智:生灭随观……显示巴利原文
Navapārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgānīti sīlavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, cittavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, diṭṭhivisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, ñāṇadassanavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, paññā pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, vimutti pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ (dī. ni. 3.359). Sīlavisuddhīti visuddhiṃ pāpetuṃ samatthaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Tañhi dussīlyamalaṃ visodheti. Pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅganti parisuddhabhāvassa padhānaṃ uttamaṃ aṅgaṃ. Cittavisuddhīti vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtā paguṇā aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Tā hi kāmacchandādicittamalaṃ visodhenti. Diṭṭhivisuddhīti sappaccayanāmarūpadassanaṃ. Tañhi sattadiṭṭhimalaṃ visodheti. Kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhīti paccayākārañāṇaṃ. Tena hi tīsu addhāsu paccayavasena dhammā pavattantīti passanto tīsupi addhāsu sattakaṅkhāmalaṃ vitaranto visujjhati. Maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhīti udayabbayānupassanakkhaṇe uppannā obhāsañāṇapītipassaddhisukhaadhimokkhapaggahaupaṭṭhānaupekkhānikantīti dasa vipassanupakkilesā, na maggo, vīthipaṭipannaṃ udayabbayañāṇaṃ maggoti evaṃ maggāmagge ñāṇaṃ nāma. Tena hi amaggamalaṃ visodheti. Paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhīti vīthipaṭipannaṃ udayabbayānupassanāñāṇaṃ bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ bhayatupaṭṭhānānupassanāñāṇaṃ ādīnavānupassanāñāṇaṃ nibbidānupassanāñāṇaṃ muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ anulomañāṇanti imāni nava vipassanāñāṇāni. Tāni hi niccasaññādimalaṃ visodhenti. Ñāṇadassanavisuddhīti catuariyamaggapaññā. Sā hi samucchedato sakasakamaggavajjhakilesamalaṃ visodheti. Paññāti arahattaphalapaññā. Vimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti.
「十遍处」即如《增支部》及《长部》所说:“有一类人想地遍,向上、向下、向四方,无二、无量;有一类人想水遍……乃至……火遍……乃至……风遍……乃至……青遍……乃至……黄遍……乃至……红遍……乃至……白遍……乃至……虚空遍……乃至……识遍,向上、向下、向四方,无二、无量。”这十者,以遍满一切的意义称为「遍」;以作为这些所缘诸法的田地,或作为依止处的意义称为「处」。「向上」指朝着上方虚空处。「向下」指朝着下方地面处。「向四方」指如同田地的圆形范围,在一切方位上划定界限。因为有人只向上扩大遍相,有人只向下,有人则遍满一切方位。还有人以种种原因这样扩展,就像希望看到色的人扩大光明一样。因此这样说:“有一类人想地遍,向上、向下、向四方。”「无二」是为了说明在一者之中不会变成其他状态的意思。就像进入水中的人,在一切方向都只是水,没有别的;同样,地遍就只是地遍,其中并没有混杂其他遍。这个道理适用于一切遍处。「无量」是依各个遍相的遍满没有限量而说的。因为用心遍满时,就遍满一切,并不取“这是它的开始,这是中间”这样的限量。「虚空遍」指将遍除去后的虚空,以及作为分划虚空的遍。「识遍」指在除去遍后的虚空中转起的识。在这里,可以依遍而知在除去遍的虚空中有上、下、四方;依除去遍的虚空,而知在那里转起的识中有上、下、四方;而作为分划虚空的遍,因为也可以扩大,所以也依于此而有上、下、四方等道理。显示巴利原文
Dasa kasiṇāyatanānīti ‘‘pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṃ adho tiriyaṃ advayaṃ appamāṇaṃ, āpokasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… tejokasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… vāyokasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… nīlakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… pītakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… lohitakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… odātakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… ākāsakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… viññāṇakasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṃ adho tiriyaṃ advayaṃ appamāṇa’’nti (a. ni. 10.25; dī. ni. 3.360) evaṃ vuttāni dasa. Etāni hi sakalapharaṇaṭṭhena kasiṇāni, tadārammaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ khettaṭṭhena adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vā āyatanāni. Uddhanti uparigaganatalābhimukhaṃ. Adhoti heṭṭhābhūmitalābhimukhaṃ. Tiriyanti khettamaṇḍalamiva samantā paricchinnaṃ. Ekacco hi uddhameva kasiṇaṃ vaḍḍheti ekacco adho, ekacco samantato. Ekopi tena tena vā kāraṇena evaṃ pasāreti ālokamiva rūpadassanakāmo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṃ adho tiriya’’nti (a. ni. 10.25; dī. ni. 3.360). Advayanti idaṃ pana ekassa aññabhāvānupagamanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā hi udakaṃ paviṭṭhassa sabbadisāsu udakameva hoti na aññaṃ, evameva pathavīkasiṇaṃ pathavīkasiṇameva hoti, natthi tassa aññakasiṇasambhedoti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Appamāṇanti idaṃ tassa tassa pharaṇaappamāṇavasena vuttaṃ. Tañhi manasā pharanto sakalameva pharati, na ‘‘ayamassa ādi idaṃ majjha’’nti pamāṇaṃ gaṇhātīti. Ākāsakasiṇanti kasiṇugghāṭimākāso paricchedākāsakasiṇañca. Viññāṇakasiṇanti kasiṇugghāṭimākāse pavattaviññāṇaṃ. Tattha kasiṇavasena kasiṇugghāṭimākāse, kasiṇugghāṭimākāsavasena tattha pavattaviññāṇe uddhaṃadhotiriyatā veditabbā, paricchedākāsakasiṇassapi vaḍḍhanīyattā tassa vasenapīti.
26 26. 现在为了显示修习的差别,开始说「二种修习」等。其中,关于「世间」等词:「世间」是以破坏、崩坏的意义来指称轮回(流转)。凡是依属于这种状态、系着在世间里的,就叫作「世间」;世间法的修习,就是「世间修」。虽然按习惯说法称为“法的修习”,但实际上离开那些法,并没有另外独立的修习;正是那些法在被修习的时候,才称为修习。「出世间」的“出”,指超出其上、更高。以不系属于世间的状态,超越了世间,所以叫做「出世间」。显示巴利原文
26. Idāni bhāvanāpabhedaṃ dassento dve bhāvanātiādimāha. Tattha lokiyātiādīsu loko vuccati lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena vaṭṭaṃ, tasmiṃ pariyāpannabhāvena loke niyuttāti lokiyā, lokiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanā lokiyā. Kiñcāpi dhammānaṃ bhāvanāti vohāravasena vuccati, tehi pana visuṃ bhāvanā natthi. Te eva hi dhammā bhāviyamānā bhāvanāti vuccanti. Uttiṇṇāti uttarā, loke apariyāpannabhāvena lokato uttarāti lokuttarā.
「色界住者」:指住于名为色界的色法中的众生。此处的「善」字,于无病、无过失、善巧、乐果等义中皆可见到。如“尊师是否安康?尊师是否无病?”等句中(《本生经》1.15.146; 2.20.129),是指无病。在“那么,尊者,什么样的身行是善呢?大王,凡无过失的身行就是善”(《中部》2.361)以及“再者,尊者,世尊于善法中所说的法,此是无上的”(《长部》3.145)等句中,是指无过失。在“王子,你认为怎样?你善巧于车的各部零件吗?”(《中部》2.87)以及“那些善巧歌舞的才艺女子”(《本生经》2.22.94)等句中,是指善巧。在“因为受持善法,这样这福德就会增长”(《长部》3.80)以及“由于已作、已积集的善业”(《法集论》431)等句中,是指乐果。在这里,无病、无过失、乐果这些意思都适用。再释其词义:能令可憎恶、邪恶的法动摇、晃动、被破坏、被摧毁的,即是「善」。显示巴利原文
Rūpabhavasaṅkhāte rūpe avacarantīti rūpāvacarā. Kusalasaddo panettha ārogyaanavajjachekasukhavipākesu dissati. ‘‘Kacci nu bhoto kusalaṃ? Kacci bhoto anāmaya’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.15.146; 2.20.129) ārogye. ‘‘Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro kusalo? Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro anavajjo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.361) ca ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhante, etadānuttariyaṃ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti kusalesu dhammesū’’ti (dī. ni. 3.145) ca evamādīsu anavajje. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññasi, rājakumāra, kusalo tvaṃ rathassa aṅgapaccaṅgāna’’nti? (Ma. ni. 2.87) ‘‘kusalā naccagītassa sikkhitā cāturitthiyo’’ti (jā. 2.22.94) ca ādīsu cheke. ‘‘Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samādānahetu evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.80) ‘‘kusalassa kammassa katattā upacitattā’’ti (dha. sa. 431) ca ādīsu sukhavipāke. Svāyamidha ārogyepi anavajjepi sukhavipākepi vaṭṭati. Vacanattho panettha kucchite pāpake dhamme salayanti calayanti kampenti viddhaṃsentīti kusalā, kucchitena vā ākārena sayanti pavattantīti kusā, te akusalasaṅkhāte kuse lunanti chindantīti kusalā, kucchitānaṃ vā sānato tanukaraṇato kusaṃ, ñāṇaṃ. Tena kusena lātabbā gahetabbā pavattetabbāti kusalā, yathā vā kusā ubhayabhāgagataṃ hatthappadesaṃ lunanti, evamimepi uppannānuppannabhāvena ubhayabhāgagataṃ saṃkilesapakkhaṃ lunanti, tasmā kusā viya lunantīti kusalā. Tesaṃ rūpāvacarakusalānaṃ bhāvanā. Arūpabhavasaṅkhāte arūpe avacarantīti arūpāvacarā. Tebhūmakavaṭṭe pariyāpannā antogadhāti pariyāpannā, tasmiṃ na pariyāpannāti apariyāpannā, lokuttarā.
若问:为何不将欲界善法的修习称为修习?因为在阿毗达摩中,修习是指已达安止的修习。正如其中所说:显示巴利原文
Kāmāvacarakusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanā kasmā na vuttāti ce? Appanāppattāya eva bhāvanāya abhidhamme bhāvanāti adhippetattā. Vuttañhi tattha –
在那些与瑜伽相应的业处、工巧处或明处中,关于“业自性”或“随顺谛理”——即“色无常”、“受无常”、“想无常”、“行无常”或“识无常”——像这一类的随顺堪忍、见、喜好、柔软、观察、依法审察的堪忍心,如果不是从他人那里听来而自己获得的,这就称为「思所成慧」。在那些与瑜伽相应的业处……乃至……依法审察的堪忍心,从他人那里听来而获得的,这就称为「闻所成慧」。凡是已经证入等至者的所有智慧,都是「修所成慧」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yogavihitesu vā kammāyatanesu yogavihitesu vā sippāyatanesu yogavihitesu vā vijjāṭṭhānesu kammassakataṃ vā saccānulomikaṃ vā rūpaṃ aniccanti vā, vedanā aniccāti vā, saññā aniccāti vā, saṅkhārā aniccāti vā, viññāṇaṃ aniccanti vā yaṃ evarūpaṃ anulomikaṃ khantiṃ diṭṭhiṃ ruciṃ mudiṃ pekkhaṃ dhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ parato asutvā paṭilabhati, ayaṃ vuccati cintāmayā paññā. Yogavihitesu vā kammāyatanesu…pe… dhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ parato sutvā paṭilabhati, ayaṃ vuccati sutamayā paññā. Sabbāpi samāpannassa paññā bhāvanāmayā paññā’’ti (vibha. 768).
然而应知,对于欲界的修习,由于被转向心与有分心的生起所间隔,故不称为“修习”。但一切福皆摄于三类福行事之中,因而近行定与观定即成立为修所成福。不过,在此仅将它们归属于世间修习。对于色界、无色界的修习,有下劣、中等、胜妙三种状态:低劣者称为“下劣”;处于下劣与胜妙之间者称为“中等”——亦有读作“中等的”;被导入精勤努力的状态,则称为“胜妙”,也就是殊胜的意思。应依据策励用功的状态来理解此处的下劣、中等、胜妙:若在策励的那个刹那,其欲求、精进、心或审察(慧)中,任一为下劣,这种修习便称为“下劣”;若这些法为中等,则称为“中等”;若这些法为胜妙,则称为“胜妙”。或者说,与软弱的根相应的称为“下劣”,与中等的根相应的称为“中等”,与强力的根相应的称为“胜妙”。至于不系属三界的出世间修习,因无下劣与中等之状态,故唯说为“胜妙”。显示巴利原文
Sā pana kāmāvacarabhāvanā āvajjanabhavaṅgapātehi antaritattā bhāvanāti na vuttāti veditabbā. Sabbesaṃ pana puññānaṃ tividhapuññakiriyavatthūnaṃ antogadhattā upacārasamādhivipassanāsamādhīnaṃ bhāvanāmayapuññatā siddhā. Idha pana lokiyabhāvanāya eva saṅgahitā. Rūpārūpāvacarānaṃ tividhabhāve hīnāti lāmakā. Hīnuttamānaṃ majjhe bhavā majjhā, majjhimātipi pāṭho. Padhānabhāvaṃ nītāti paṇītā, uttamāti attho. Āyūhanavasena ayaṃ hīnamajjhimapaṇītatā veditabbā. Yassā hi āyūhanakkhaṇe chando vā hīno hoti vīriyaṃ vā cittaṃ vā vīmaṃsā vā, sā hīnā nāma. Yassā te dhammā majjhimā, sā majjhimā nāma. Yassā te dhammā paṇītā, sā paṇītā nāma. Mudukehi vā indriyehi sampayuttā hīnā nāma, majjhimehi indriyehi sampayuttā majjhimā, adhimattehi indriyehi sampayuttā paṇītā nāma. Apariyāpannāya hīnamajjhimattābhāvā paṇītatā eva vuttā. Sā hi uttamaṭṭhena atappakaṭṭhena ca paṇītā.
27 27. 于第一种四类修习中,“修习”是指在同一个刹那,以种种方式通达而修习圣道。于第二种四类修习中,“寻求修习”指在安止前的阶段所作的修习,由于它是以此寻求安止的,故称“寻求”。“获得修习”指安止本身的修习,由于它是通过那个寻求而获得的,故称“获得”。“一味修习”指在获得安止之后,为达到自在而作加行时的修习:它透过一次次地舍断,从种种烦恼中解脱出来,以解脱之味而成为一味,故称“一味”。“习行修习”指在获得安止并达到自在之后,随己意受用彼定时的修习:由于它被反复不断地修习,故称“习行”。不过,有一些人解释说:“‘习行修习’是令得自在的修行,‘一味修习’是遍满一切处的修行。”在四类分别中,“入定者们”一词是就当前状态而使用现在时语词。“在此生起”是指在那个前分阶段生起。“成为一味”是指在安止产生时,它们都起到了相同的作用。“已入定者们”是指安止已经现前的人。“在此生起”是指在那个安止中生起。“互不超胜”是指它们在共同运行的过程中,显示巴利原文
27. Paṭhamabhāvanācatukke bhāvetīti ekasmiṃyeva khaṇe tathā tathā paṭivijjhanto ariyamaggaṃ bhāveti. Dutiyabhāvanācatukke esanābhāvanāti appanāpubbabhāge bhāvanā. Sā hi appanaṃ esanti etāyāti esanāti vuttā. Paṭilābhabhāvanāti appanābhāvanā. Sā hi tāya esanāya paṭilabbhatīti paṭilābhoti vuttā. Ekarasābhāvanāti paṭilābhe vasībhāvaṃ pattukāmassa payogakāle bhāvanā. Sā hi tena tena pahānena tehi tehi kilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasāti katvā ekarasāti vuttā. Āsevanābhāvanāti paṭilābhe vasippattassa yathāruci paribhogakāle bhāvanā. Sā hi bhusaṃ sevīyatīti āsevanāti vuttā. Keci pana ‘‘āsevanābhāvanā vasīkammaṃ, ekarasābhāvanā sabbatthikā’’ti vaṇṇayanti. Catukkavibhāge samādhiṃ samāpajjantānanti vattamānasamīpe vattamānavacanaṃ. Tattha jātāti tasmiṃ pubbabhāge jātā. Ekarasā hontīti appanuppādane samānakiccā honti. Samādhiṃ samāpannānanti appitappanānaṃ. Tattha jātāti tassā appanāya jātā. Aññamaññaṃ nātivattantīti samappavattiyā aññamaññaṃ nātikkamanti. Adhimokkhaṭṭhenasaddhindriyaṃbhāvayatotiādīsu ekakkhaṇepi ekekassa indriyassa sakasakakiccakaraṇe taṃtaṃnissayavasena sakasakakiccakārakāni sesānipi indriyāni vimuttirasena ekarasā hontīti vimuttiraseneva ekarasaṭṭhena bhāvanā. Balabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgesupi eseva nayo. Ekarasāti ca liṅgavipallāso kato.
「此处,比丘」:指在这个教法中的比丘;或者说,因为在生死流转中观察怖畏,所以称为「比丘」。「在上午时分」等,是表示极相关联的意思,所以用了对格;从义理上来说,实际是指处格,也就是“在一天的前段时间”。“习行”是指反反复复地运用已经达到自在的定。「在正午时分」:指在一天的正中间。「在傍晚时分」:指在一天的傍晚时段。「於食前」:指在日中的那顿饭之前。「於食後」:指在日中的那顿饭之后。「也在初夜分」:指在夜间的第一个时段。「在黑分」:指在黑半月的日子。「在白分」:指在白半月的日子。「也在早期的寿份」:指在早期年龄的范围内,也就是“初期之年龄”。在三个年龄期中,对于寿命一百岁的人来说,每一个年龄期各有三十三年零四个多月。显示巴利原文
Idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhatīti bhikkhu. Pubbaṇhasamayantiādīsu accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ, atthato pana bhummameva , divasassa pubbakāleti attho. Āsevatīti vasippattaṃ samādhiṃ bhusaṃ sevati. Majjhanhikasamayanti divasassa majjhakāle. Sāyanhasamayanti divasassa sāyanhakāle. Purebhattanti divābhattato purekāle. Pacchābhattanti divābhattato pacchākāle. Purimepi yāmeti rattiyā paṭhame koṭṭhāse. Kāḷeti kāḷapakkhe. Juṇheti sukkapakkhe. Purimepi vayokhandheti paṭhame vayokoṭṭhāse, paṭhamavayeti attho. Tīsu ca vayesu vassasatāyukassa purisassa ekekasmiṃ vaye catumāsādhikāni tettiṃsa vassāni honti.
28 关于第三种四类修习:「在那里生起的诸法互不超越」:指在出离等特定修习中所生起的、称为定与慧的双运法,彼此不相超越的平衡状态。「诸根一味」:指于此修习中,信等诸根因解脱种种烦恼,以解脱为味,呈现一味的状态。「随顺于彼的精进承载」:指随顺于彼互不超越及一味之精进,起到承载、运载的作用。「习行」:指于彼时转起的习行,依其自性而作用。显示巴利原文
28. Tatiyabhāvanācatukke tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhenāti tattha nekkhammādīsu bhāvanāvisesesu jātānaṃ samādhipaññāsaṅkhātānaṃ yuganaddhadhammānaṃ aññamaññaṃ anatikkamanabhāvena. Indriyānaṃ ekarasaṭṭhenāti tattheva saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ nānākilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasabhāvena. Tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhenāti tesaṃ anativattanaekarasabhāvānaṃ anucchavikassa vīriyassa vāhanabhāvena. Āsevanaṭṭhenāti yā tassa tasmiṃ samaye pavattā āsevanā. Tassā āsevanāya āsevanabhāvena.
「色想」:依善异熟与唯作而有的十五种色界禅那所摄之想。色界禅那于“有色者见色”等经中亦称为色,其禅那所缘亦于“于外见色,有妙色、恶色”等经中称为色;实则以想为首,于色而作想,故名色想。「有对想」:善异熟五种、不善异熟五种,如此十种有对想。与双五识相应之想,依眼等依处、对色等所缘的撞击而生起,故名有对想。色想、声想、香想、味想、触想亦为其名。「种种想」:八种欲界善想、十二种不善想、十一种欲界善异熟想、二种不善异熟想、十一种欲界唯作想,如此四十四种,为种种想。因彼于种种不同自性——即色、声等各异之境——上转起,故名种种想;或由四十四种分类而彼此不同、自性相异、互不相似,故名种种想。想虽多种,然依总类而统摄,故作单数。显示巴利原文
Rūpasaññanti kusalavipākakiriyavasena pañcadasavidhaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānasaṅkhātaṃ rūpasaññaṃ. Rūpāvacarajjhānampi hi rūpanti vuccati ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.174; a. ni. 8.66; dha. sa. 248), tassa jhānassa ārammaṇampi ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passati suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.173; a. ni. 8.65-66; dha. sa. 247, 249). Rūpāvacarajjhānañhi saññāsīsena rūpe saññāti katvā rūpasaññāti vuccati. Paṭighasaññanti kusalavipākā pañca, akusalavipākā pañcāti evaṃ dasavidhaṃ paṭighasaññaṃ. Dvipañcaviññāṇasampayuttā hi saññā cakkhādīnaṃ vatthūnaṃ rūpādīnaṃ ārammaṇānañca paṭighātena uppannattā paṭighasaññāti vuccati. Rūpasaññā saddasaññā gandhasaññā rasasaññā phoṭṭhabbasaññātipi etissā eva nāmaṃ. Nānattasaññanti aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalasaññā, dvādasa akusalasaññā , ekādasa kāmāvacarakusalavipākasaññā, dve akusalavipākasaññā, ekādasa kāmāvacarakiriyasaññāti evaṃ catucattālīsavidhaṃ nānattasaññaṃ. Sā hi nānatte nānāsabhāve rūpasaddādibhede gocare pavattā saññāti nānattasaññā, catucattālīsabhedato nānattā nānāsabhāvā aññamaññaṃ asadisā saññāti vā nānattasaññāti vuccati. Saññābahukattepi jātiggahaṇena ekavacanaṃ kataṃ.
「常想」:即“常”的想,为常想。同样地,乐想、我想。「欢喜」:指有喜的渴爱。「贪」:指无喜的渴爱。「集」:指贪的集。或者,由于在坏灭观中只见到坏灭,故(不见集),此处的集即诸行的集。「执取」:指依转起而对烦恼的执取,或者由于不见过患而对有为所缘的执取。「密集想」:指依相续而作“密集”的想。「造作」:指为诸行而作努力。「恒常想」:指“坚固”的想。「相」:指常相。「希求」:指对乐的希求。「执著」:指“有我”的执著。「执实执取执著」:指执取常、坚实、执取实体的执著。「痴迷执著」:指以“我于过去世曾存在吗”等方式,以及以“世间由自在主所生”等方式的痴迷执著。「依着执著」:指虽见过患,仍执著“此应依附”的执著。「不正思惟」:指执取非方便。「结缚执著」:指欲缚等烦恼的转起。显示巴利原文
Niccasaññanti niccanti saññaṃ niccasaññaṃ. Evaṃ sukhasaññaṃ attasaññaṃ. Nandinti sappītikaṃ taṇhaṃ. Rāganti nippītikaṃ taṇhaṃ. Samudayanti rāgassa samudayaṃ. Atha vā bhaṅgānupassanāya bhaṅgasseva dassanato saṅkhārānaṃ udayaṃ. Ādānanti nibbattanavasena kilesānaṃ, adosadassāvitāya saṅkhatārammaṇassa vā ādānaṃ. Ghanasaññanti santativasena ghananti saññaṃ. Āyūhananti saṅkhārānaṃ atthāya payogakaraṇaṃ. Dhuvasaññanti thiranti saññaṃ. Nimittanti niccanimittaṃ. Paṇidhinti sukhapatthanaṃ. Abhinivesanti atthi attāti abhinivesaṃ. Sārādānābhinivesanti niccasārattasāragahaṇābhinivesaṃ. Sammohābhinivesanti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’ntiādivasena (saṃ. ni. 2.20) ‘‘issarato loko sambhotī’’tiādivasena ca sammohābhinivesaṃ. Ālayābhinivesanti ādīnavādassanena allīyitabbamidanti abhinivesaṃ. Appaṭisaṅkhanti anupāyagahaṇaṃ. Saññogābhinivesanti kāmayogādikaṃ kilesappavattiṃ.
「与见共处者」:即与诸见共处于一处者,称为与见共处。那些是与见共处者。能令热恼、能逼迫者,称为「烦恼」;那些是烦恼。共处有两种:断除共处和俱生共处。「断除共处」的意思是:以身见为首的六十二见,连同与之俱在的烦恼,直至被入流道断除为止,共处于一个补特伽罗中。这是此处所指的含义。因为在十种烦恼中,此处只提到了见烦恼。而其余九种能堕恶趣的烦恼——贪、嗔、痴、慢、疑、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧——与见一起成为断除共处,被入流道所断除;或者,在以贪嗔痴为首的一千五百种烦恼中,当见被入流道断除时,与见一起能堕恶趣的一切烦恼,以断除共处的方式被断除。「俱生共处」的意思是:与见共处于一个心中。当入流道断除两种与见相应的无行心时,与它们俱生的贪、痴、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,以俱生共处的方式被断除;当断除两种与见相应的有行心时,与它们俱生的贪、痴、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,以俱生共处的方式被断除。「于粗烦恼」:指已为粗大的欲贪和嗔恚。「于随眠烦恼」:指已为微细的欲贪和嗔恚。「于一切烦恼」:指被三道断除后的烦恼。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhekaṭṭheti diṭṭhīhi saha ekasmiṃ ṭhitāti diṭṭhekaṭṭhā. Te diṭṭhekaṭṭhe. Kilesenti upatāpenti, vibādhenti vāti kilesā. Te kilese. Duvidhañhi ekaṭṭhaṃ pahānekaṭṭhaṃ sahajekaṭṭhañca. Pahānekaṭṭhaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhipamukhāhi tesaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīhi saha (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.118) yāva sotāpattimaggena pahānā, tāva ekasmiṃ puggale ṭhitāti attho. Idamidhādhippetaṃ. Dasasu hi kilesesu idha diṭṭhikilesoyeva āgato. Sesesu pana apāyagamanīyo lobho doso moho māno vicikicchā thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti nava kilesā diṭṭhiyā saha pahānekaṭṭhā hutvā sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti, rāgadosamohapamukhesu vā diyaḍḍhesu kilesasahassesu sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhiyā pahīyamānāya diṭṭhiyā saha apāyagamanīyā sabbakilesā pahānekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti, sahajekaṭṭhe diṭṭhiyā saha ekasmiṃ citte ṭhitāti attho. Sotāpattimaggena hi dvīsu diṭṭhisampayuttaasaṅkhārikacittesu pahīyamānesu tehi sahajāto lobho moho uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti, dvīsu diṭṭhisampayuttasasaṅkhārikacittesu pahīyamānesu tehi sahajāto lobho moho thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Oḷārike kileseti oḷārikabhūte kāmarāgabyāpāde. Anusahagate kileseti sukhumabhūte kāmarāgabyāpāde. Sabbakileseti maggattayena pahīnāvasese.
「策励精进」:即瑜伽行者令精进转起。前文所说的“证得”“一味”“习行”等词,是为了显示诸修习的差别而说“如是所成的修习”。而此处所说的“以不超越彼处所生诸法之义为根之一味义,以随顺彼之精进策励之义,以习行义”等词,是为了显示修习之因而说“由此因及彼因而为修习”。前文是从不同刹那的角度说“习行修习”,此处是从同一刹那的角度说“以习行之义为修习”,这是差别所在。“见色而修习”等处,意思是:以应被见的方式见色等,而修习应被修习的修习。「成为一味」:即以解脱味,或以作用味而成为一味。解脱味即成就味。因为据说“由作用成就之义而称为味”。显示巴利原文
Vīriyaṃ vāhetīti yogāvacaro vīriyaṃ pavatteti. Heṭṭhā esanāpaṭilābhaekarasaāsevanavacanāni bhāvanānaṃ visesadassanatthaṃ vuttāni ‘‘evaṃbhūtā ca bhāvanā’’ti. Idha ‘‘tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena indriyānaṃ ekarasaṭṭhena tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena āsevanaṭṭhenā’’ti vacanāni bhāvanāhetudassanatthaṃ vuttāni ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca hetunā bhāvanā’’ti. Heṭṭhā āsevanābhāvanāti nānākkhaṇavasena vuttā, idha āsevanaṭṭhena bhāvanāti ekakkhaṇavasenāti viseso. Rūpaṃ passanto bhāvetītiādīsu rūpādīni passitabbākārena passanto bhāvetabbaṃ bhāvanaṃ bhāvetīti attho. Ekarasā hontīti vimuttirasena, kiccarasena vā ekarasā honti. Vimuttirasoti sampattiraso. Kiccasampattiatthena raso nāma pavuccatīti hi vuttanti.
应证得部分的解说注释显示巴利原文
Sacchikātabbaniddesavaṇṇanā
29 在应证得的解说中,以证得并亲证的方式阐述了十种增一法的解答。其中,「不动心解脱」:指阿拉汉果的解脱。这种解脱不会被动摇、不会消散、不会退失,所以称为「不动」;又因为心已从一切烦恼中解脱出来,所以称为「心解脱」。「明」:指三种明。「解脱」:依照《增十经》的方式是指阿拉汉果,但依照《等诵经》的方式则说“解脱有两种:心的胜解与涅槃”。在此,八种等至因为完全从五盖等烦恼中解脱而称为解脱;涅槃因为从一切有为造作中解脱而称为解脱。「三明」:能回忆起过去宿世住处的智慧是明,能了知有情死亡与再生(死生)的智慧是明,能了知烦恼灭尽的智慧是明。以照破无明障碍之义称为明,以令事物被清楚认知之义也称为明。也就是说,回忆宿住的智慧生起时,能照破遮蔽过去宿世住处的黑暗,并清楚地了知宿世住处,所以是明。了知死生的智慧能照破遮蔽死亡与结生奥秘的黑暗,并清楚地了知死与生,所以是明。了知漏尽的智慧能照破遮蔽四圣谛的黑暗,并清楚地了知四圣谛法,所以是明。「四沙门果」:即入流果、一来果、不来果、阿拉汉果。能够平息并消灭恶不善法。显示巴利原文
29. Sacchikātabbaniddese dasa ekuttaravissajjanāni paṭilābhasacchikiriyāvasena vuttāni. Tattha akuppā cetovimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti. Sā hi na kuppati na calati na parihāyatīti akuppā, sabbakilesehi cittassa vimuttattā cetovimuttīti vuccati. Vijjāti tisso vijjā. Vimuttīti dasuttarapariyāyena arahattaphalaṃ vuttaṃ, saṅgītipariyāyena pana ‘‘vimuttīti dve vimuttiyo cittassa ca adhimutti nibbānañcā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.304) vuttaṃ. Ettha ca aṭṭha samāpattiyo nīvaraṇādīhi suṭṭhu vimuttattā vimutti nāma, nibbānaṃ sabbasaṅkhatato vimuttattā vimutti nāma. Tisso vijjāti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ vijjā sattānaṃ cutūpapāte ñāṇaṃ vijjā āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ vijjā. Tamavijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā, viditakaraṇaṭṭhenāpi vijjā. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇañhi uppajjamānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ chādetvā ṭhitaṃ tamaṃ vijjhati, pubbenivāsañca viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Cutūpapāte ñāṇaṃ cutipaṭisandhicchādakaṃ tamaṃ vijjhati, cutūpapātañca viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ catusaccacchādakaṃ tamaṃ vijjhati, catusaccadhamme ca viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Cattāri sāmaññaphalānīti sotāpattiphalaṃ, sakadāgāmiphalaṃ, anāgāmiphalaṃ, arahattaphalaṃ. Pāpadhamme sameti vināsetīti samaṇo, samaṇassa bhāvo sāmaññaṃ. Catunnaṃ ariyamaggānametaṃ nāmaṃ. Sāmaññassa phalāni sāmaññaphalāni.
「五法蕴」:即戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴、解脱蕴、解脱知见蕴。「法蕴」意为法的分类、法的组成部分。戒蕴等也依同样的方式来理解。世间的戒、定、慧与出世间的戒、定、慧,其本身即是戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴。断除解脱、止息解脱、出离解脱,其本身即是解脱蕴。对解脱的三种省察,其本身即是解脱知见蕴,而此解脱知见蕴唯是世间的。以了知义而称为「知」,以照见义而称为「见」,因而合称「知见」;对解脱的知见,即名「解脱知见」。至于镇伏性解脱与彼分性解脱,则已摄于定蕴与慧蕴之中。这五种法蕴,若就尚有余分的修学者而言,称为「有学」;若就完全无余、更无所学的漏尽者而言,则称为「无学」。于这些法蕴中,世间的法蕴与出离解脱蕴,并非可简单地定论为有学或无学。然而,处于有学阶段者所具的这些法蕴,即称为「有学者之蕴」;处于无学阶段者所具的这些法蕴,即称为「无学者之蕴」。至于“有学者具足解脱蕴”这一经文,应理解为是以出离解脱为所缘境的方式而具足。「六通」:即六种殊胜的智慧。是哪六种呢?即神变智、天耳界智、宿住随念智。显示巴利原文
Pañca dhammakkhandhāti sīlakkhandho, samādhikkhandho, paññākkhandho, vimuttikkhandho, vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandho. Dhammakkhandhāti dhammavibhāgā dhammakoṭṭhāsā. Sīlakkhandhādīsupi eseva nayo. Lokiyalokuttarā sīlasamādhipaññā eva sīlasamādhipaññākkhandhā . Samucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttiyo eva vimuttikkhandho. Tividhā vimuttipaccavekkhaṇā eva vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandho. So lokiyo eva. Jānanaṭṭhena ñāṇameva dassanaṭṭhena dassananti ñāṇadassanaṃ, vimuttīnaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ vimuttiñāṇadassananti vuccati. Vikkhambhanatadaṅgavimuttiyo pana samādhipaññākkhandheheva saṅgahitā. Ime pañca dhammakkhandhā sekkhānaṃ sekkhā, asekkhānaṃ asekkhāti vuttā. Etesu hi lokiyā ca nissaraṇavimutti ca nevasekkhānāsekkhā. Sekkhā hontāpi sekkhānaṃ ime iti sekkhā, asekkhānaṃ ime iti asekkhāti vuccanti. ‘‘Sekkhena vimuttikkhandhena samannāgato hotī’’ti ettha pana nissaraṇavimuttiyā ārammaṇakaraṇavasena samannāgatoti veditabbo. Cha abhiññāti cha adhikāni ñāṇāni. Katamā cha? Iddhividhañāṇaṃ , dibbasotadhātuñāṇaṃ, pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ, cetopariyañāṇaṃ, dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ, āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇanti imā cha.
「七漏尽者力」:一切烦恼(漏)皆已灭尽的人,称为「漏尽者」;漏尽者所拥有的力量,即称为「漏尽者力」。是哪七种呢?世尊曾这样说过——显示巴利原文
Satta khīṇāsavabalānīti khīṇā āsavā assāti khīṇāsavo, khīṇāsavassa balāni khīṇāsavabalāni. Katamāni satta? Vuttāni bhagavatā –
“比丘们,于此,一位漏尽比丘以正慧如实地彻见一切行皆为无常。比丘们,漏尽比丘以正慧如实地彻见一切行皆为无常,这本身便是漏尽比丘的一种力。凭借此力,漏尽比丘能自信地宣称烦恼已尽:‘我的烦恼已灭尽。’”显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno aniccato sabbe saṅkhārā yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti. Yampi, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno aniccato sabbe saṅkhārā yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti, idampi, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma khīṇāsavo bhikkhu āsavānaṃ khayaṃ paṭijānāti ‘khīṇā me āsavā’ti.
再者,比丘们,漏尽比丘以如实正慧善见‘诸欲如炽燃的炭火坑’。比丘们……(中略)……这也是漏尽比丘所具足的一种力。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno aṅgārakāsūpamā kāmāti yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti. Yampi, bhikkhave…pe… idampi khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṃ hoti…pe….
再者,比丘们,漏尽比丘的心倾向于远离、趣向远离、倾斜于远离、安住于远离,乐于出离,完全远离一切能生烦恼之法。比丘们……(中略)……这也是漏尽比丘所具足的一种力。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno vivekaninnaṃ cittaṃ hoti vivekapoṇaṃ vivekapabbhāraṃ vivekaṭṭhaṃ nekkhammābhirataṃ byantībhūtaṃ sabbaso āsavaṭṭhāniyehi dhammehi. Yampi, bhikkhave…pe… idampi khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṃ hoti…pe….
再者,比丘们,漏尽比丘已修习、善修习四念处;已修习、善修习五根;已修习、善修习七觉支;已修习、善修习圣八支道。比丘们,漏尽比丘如此修习、善修习圣八支道,这也是漏尽比丘所具足的一种力。正是凭此力,漏尽比丘才如此宣称:‘我诸漏已尽。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā honti subhāvitā. Pañcindriyāni bhāvitāni honti subhāvitāni. Satta bojjhaṅgā bhāvitā honti subhāvitā. Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvito hoti subhāvito. Yampi, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvito hoti subhāvito, idampi khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma khīṇāsavo bhikkhu āsavānaṃ khayaṃ paṭijānāti ‘khīṇā me āsavā’’’ti (a. ni. 10.90; dī. ni. 3.357; paṭi. ma. 2.44).
其中,以第一种力显示了苦圣谛的通达,以第二种力显示了集圣谛的通达,以第三种力显示了灭圣谛的通达,以四种力显示了道圣谛的通达。显示巴利原文
Tattha paṭhamena balena dukkhasaccapaṭivedho, dutiyena samudayasaccapaṭivedho, tatiyena nirodhasaccapaṭivedho, catūhi maggasaccapaṭivedho pakāsito hoti.
「八解脱」:从对所缘的胜解,以及善巧地从敌对法中解脱,故名为「解脱」。「哪八种?内有色想者观看外色,此为第一解脱。内无色想者观看外色,此为第二解脱。于『清净』已生胜解,此为第三解脱。遍超一切色想,灭除有对想,不忆念种种想,入于『虚空无边』的空无边处并安住其中,此为第四解脱。遍超一切空无边处,入于『识无边』的识无边处并安住其中,此为第五解脱。遍超一切识无边处,入于『无所有』的无所有处并安住其中,此为第六解脱。遍超一切无所有处,入于非想非非想处并安住其中,此为第七解脱。遍超一切非想非非想处,入于想受灭定并安住其中,此为第八解脱。」显示巴利原文
Aṭṭha vimokkhāti ārammaṇe adhimuccanaṭṭhena paccanīkadhammehi ca suṭṭhu muccanaṭṭhena vimokkhā. ‘‘Katame aṭṭha? Rūpī rūpāni passati, ayaṃ paṭhamo vimokkho. Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati, ayaṃ dutiyo vimokkho. ‘Subha’nteva adhimutto hoti, ayaṃ tatiyo vimokkho. Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ catuttho vimokkho. Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ pañcamo vimokkho. Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ chaṭṭho vimokkho. Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ sattamo vimokkho. Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ aṭṭhamo vimokkho’’ti (dī. ni. 2.174; 3.358; a. ni. 8.66).
「九次第灭」:即依顺序渐次止灭的九种状态。「哪九种?入初禅者,欲想止灭;入第二禅者,寻与伺止灭;入第三禅者,喜止灭;入第四禅者,出息与入息止灭;入空无边处者,色想止灭;入识无边处者,空无边处想止灭;入无所有处者,识无边处想止灭;入非想非非想处者,无所有处想止灭;入想受灭定者,想与受止灭。」显示巴利原文
Nava anupubbanirodhāti nava anupaṭipāṭiyā nirodhā. ‘‘Katame nava? Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa kāmasaññā niruddhā hoti, dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa vitakkavicārā niruddhā honti, tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa pīti niruddhā hoti, catutthaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa assāsapassāsā niruddhā honti, ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samāpannassa rūpasaññā niruddhā hoti, viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samāpannassa ākāsānañcāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti, ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpannassa viññāṇañcāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samāpannassa ākiñcaññāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti, saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ samāpannassa saññā ca vedanā ca niruddhā hontī’’ti (a. ni. 9.31; dī. ni. 3.344, 359).
「十无学法」:由于再无需要修学之处,故不再修学,因此称为「无学」。又或者,于三学中修习者名为「有学」,已达修学圆满者即为「无学」,也就是阿拉汉。这些乃是无学者所具足的法,故称「无学法」。「哪十种呢?即:无学正见、无学正思惟、无学正语、无学正业、无学正命、无学正精进、无学正念、无学正定、无学正智、无学正解脱。」其中,「无学正智」是指除阿拉汉果智之外,其余的一切世间智慧。「正解脱」是指阿拉汉果的解脱。而在义注中又这样说:显示巴利原文
Dasa asekkhā dhammāti upari sikkhitabbābhāvato na sikkhantīti asekkhā. Atha vā tīsu sikkhāsu sikkhantīti sekkhā, vuddhippattā sekkhāti asekkhā, arahanto. Asekkhānaṃ ime iti asekkhā. ‘‘Katame dasa? Asekkhā sammādiṭṭhi, asekkho sammāsaṅkappo, asekkhā sammāvācā, asekkho sammākammanto, asekkho sammāājīvo, asekkho sammāvāyāmo, asekkhā sammāsati, asekkho sammāsamādhi, asekkhaṃ sammāñāṇaṃ, asekkhā sammāvimuttī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348, 360). Asekkhaṃ sammāñāṇanti arahattaphalapaññaṃ ṭhapetvā sesalokiyapaññā. Sammāvimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.348) pana vuttaṃ –
「无学正见等所有这些法,也都是与果心相应俱起的法。在此,正见与正智两处所说的皆是智慧。而『正解脱』一词,则收摄了其余所说的、属于果定的那些法。」显示巴利原文
‘‘Asekkhā sammādiṭṭhītiādayo sabbepi phalasampayuttadhammā eva. Ettha ca sammādiṭṭhi sammāñāṇanti dvīsu ṭhānesu paññāva kathitā. Sammāvimuttīti iminā pana padena vuttāvasesā phalasamāpattidhammā saṅgahitā’’ti.
「比丘们,当证得一切法」等经文中,应理解为「以所缘作证」。在「正在观色者,即是在作证」等经文中,是指:以可被观察的方式观色等世间法时,即是以所缘作证的方式证得那些色等法;或者,以可观的方式观色等法时,藉由此因,他也证得了那应被证得的涅槃。因为文字论师们认为,「观者」一词也可表示因的意思。至于「未知当知根」等出世间法,则是在省察它们时,通过以它们为所缘而作证。「证得不死之深处、涅槃,这是从究竟义上说的」,此说是直接的,因为涅槃属于遍知、应断、应证、应修四法中的应证法类。「凡是已被证得的法,即已被触达」,这是说:以所缘作证而证得的法,由所缘之触而触达;以证悟获得作证而证得的法,由证得之触而触达。显示巴利原文
Sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, sacchikātabbantiādīsu ārammaṇasacchikiriyā veditabbā. Rūpaṃ passanto sacchikarotītiādīsu rūpādīni lokiyāni passitabbākārena passanto tāneva rūpādīni ārammaṇasacchikiriyāya sacchikaroti, rūpādīni vā passitabbākārena passanto tena hetunā sacchikātabbaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti. Passantoti hi padaṃ hetuatthepi akkharacintakā icchanti. Anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīni pana lokuttarāni paccavekkhaṇavasena passanto tāneva ārammaṇasacchikiriyāya sacchikaroti. ‘‘Amatogadhaṃ nibbānaṃ pariyosānaṭṭhena sacchikarotī’’ti idaṃ pariññeyyapahātabbasacchikātabbabhāvetabbesu sacchikātabbattā ujukameva. Ye ye dhammā sacchikatā honti, te te dhammā phassitā hontīti ārammaṇasacchikiriyāya sacchikatā ārammaṇaphassena phuṭṭhā honti, paṭilābhasacchikiriyāya sacchikatā paṭilābhaphassena phuṭṭhā hontīti.
关于退分四法的解说释义显示巴利原文
Hānabhāgiyacatukkaniddesavaṇṇanā
30 30. 现在,由于退分等只是每一种定(samādhi)依状态差别而有,因此退分四法作为一类加以解说。其中,“初禅的获得者”(paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhiṃ)即初禅的证得者。此处是属格意义上用作宾格。具有证得、即体证的人,称为“获得者”。在“与欲俱行”(kāmasahagatā)中,这里的“俱行”(sahagata)一词是指所缘的意义,即所缘为事欲与烦恼欲。“想与作意”(saññāmanasikārā)指速行想与彼时的转向作意,亦可理解为与想相应的作意。“现行”(samudācaranti)的意思是转起。“法”(dhammo)指初禅法。退失禅那(jhāna)者,由三种原因退失:烦恼现行、不适当的行为、或不勤加行。由烦恼现行而退失者,退失迅速;由乐著于工作、乐著于谈话、乐著于睡眠、乐著于聚会等不适当的行为而退失者,退失缓慢;由于疾病等资具不具足等障碍,不能屡屡证入,由不勤加行而退失者,亦退失缓慢。但在此处,为了显示强力的原因,只说了烦恼现行。然而,从二禅等退失者,也会由生起对更低禅那的欣求现行而退失。怎样才算已退失?当不能证入时,即算已退失。“彼随法性”(tadanudhammatā):随顺的法称为随法,这是对以禅那为增上而生起的欣求法之异名。随法本身即是随法性,对彼禅那的随法性,即是彼随法性。“念”(sati)指欣求。“安住”(santiṭṭhati)指确立。意思是:随顺彼初禅的欣求在转起。“与无寻俱行”(avitakkasahagatā)指以二禅为所缘。因为彼处无寻,故称为无寻。“与厌离俱行”(nibbidāsahagatā)指以观(vipassanā)为所缘。因为彼对诸行厌患,故称为厌离。经中云:“厌患者离贪。”“与离贪相连”(virāgūpasaṃhitā)指与圣道相连接的观。因为观达到顶点时,会导向道的出起。因此,以观为所缘的想与作意,称为“与离贪相连”。经中云:“由离贪而解脱。”显示巴利原文
30. Idāni yasmā hānabhāgiyāditā ekekasseva samādhissa avatthābhedena hoti, tasmā hānabhāgiyacatukkaṃ ekatoyeva niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhinti paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhino . Sāmiatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Lābho sacchikiriyā assa atthīti lābhīti vuccati. Kāmasahagatāti ettha sahagatasaddassa ārammaṇattho adhippeto, vatthukāmakilesakāmārammaṇāti attho. Saññāmanasikārāti javanasaññā ca tadāvajjanamanasikāro ca, saññāsampayuttamanasikāropi vaṭṭati. Samudācarantīti pavattanti. Dhammoti paṭhamajjhānadhammo. Jhānā parihāyanto tīhi kāraṇehi parihāyati kilesasamudācārena vā asappāyakiriyāya vā ananuyogena vā. Kilesasamudācārena parihāyanto sīghaṃ parihāyati, kammārāmatābhassārāmatāniddārāmatāsaṅgaṇikārāmatānuyogavasena asappāyakiriyāya parihāyanto dandhaṃ parihāyati, gelaññapaccayavekallādinā palibodhena abhikkhaṇaṃ asamāpajjanto ananuyogena parihāyantopi dandhaṃ parihāyati. Idha pana balavakāraṇameva dassento kilesasamudācāramevāha. Dutiyajjhānādīhi pana parihāyanto heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānanikantisamudācārenapi parihāyati. Kittāvatā parihīno hotīti? Yadā na sakkoti samāpajjituṃ, ettāvatā parihīno hotīti. Tadanudhammatāti anupavatto dhammo anudhammo, jhānaṃ adhikaṃ katvā pavattassa nikantidhammassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Anudhammo eva anudhammatā, tassa jhānassa anudhammatā tadanudhammatā. Satīti nikanti. Santiṭṭhatīti patiṭṭhāti . Taṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ anuvattamānā nikanti pavattatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Avitakkasahagatāti dutiyajjhānārammaṇā. Tañhi natthettha vitakkoti avitakkanti vuccati. Nibbidāsahagatāti vipassanārammaṇā. Sā hi saṅkhāresu nibbindanato nibbidāti vuccati. ‘‘Nibbindaṃ virajjatī’’ti (mahāva. 23; saṃ. ni. 3.61) hi vuttaṃ. Virāgūpasaṃhitāti ariyamaggapaṭisaññuttā vipassanā. Vipassanā hi sikhāppattā maggavuṭṭhānaṃ pāpeti. Tasmā vipassanārammaṇā saññāmanasikārā ‘‘virāgūpasaṃhitā’’ti vuccanti, ‘‘virāgā vimuccatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ.
“与寻俱行”指依于寻,以初禅为所缘。“与舍乐俱行”指依于中舍性与乐受,以三禅为所缘。“与喜乐俱行”指依于喜与乐受,以二禅为所缘。“与不苦不乐俱行”指依于舍受,以四禅为所缘。因为彼受非苦非乐,故称为不苦不乐。此处“不”字是依连声规则而说。“与色俱行”指以色界禅那为所缘。对于住于非想非非想处者,虽存在退分、住分、胜分、抉择分,但因无胜分,故未解说非想非非想处。而且,这一切世间定,对于放逸而住、根钝者,是退分;对于不放逸而住、根钝者,是住分;对于渴爱行者、利根者,是胜分;对于见行者、利根者,是抉择分。显示巴利原文
Vitakkasahagatāti vitakkavasena paṭhamajjhānārammaṇā. Upekkhāsukhasahagatāti tatramajjhattupekkhāya ca sukhavedanāya ca vasena tatiyajjhānārammaṇā. Pītisukhasahagatāti pītiyā ca sukhavedanāya ca vasena dutiyajjhānārammaṇā. Adukkhamasukhasahagatāti upekkhāvedanāvasena catutthajjhānārammaṇā. Sā hi vedanā na dukkhā na sukhāti adukkhamasukhāti vuccati , ma-kāro panettha padasandhivasena vutto. Rūpasahagatāti rūpajjhānārammaṇā. Nevasaññānāsaññāyatane ṭhitassa hānabhāgiyaṭhitibhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyattesu vijjamānesupi visesabhāgiyattābhāvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ na niddiṭṭhaṃ. Sabbopi cesa lokiyo samādhi pamādavihārissa mudindriyassa hānabhāgiyo hoti, appamādavihārissa mudindriyassa ṭhitibhāgiyo hoti, taṇhācaritassa tikkhindriyassa visesabhāgiyo hoti, diṭṭhicaritassa tikkhindriyassa nibbedhabhāgiyo hotīti vuccati.
关于相论的解说释义显示巴利原文
Lakkhaṇattikaniddesavaṇṇanā
31 31. 现在,由于每一个世间法都被三法印所渗透,因此相论(lakkhaṇattika)作为一类统一解说。其中,无常(anicca)以灭尽义(khayaṭṭha)说明:即在各处,由于坏灭的性质,故为无常。有些人说:“以灭法性、衰法性、离贪法性、灭法性为无常”。苦(dukkha)以怖畏义(bhayaṭṭha)说明:由于有怖畏性,故为苦。凡是无常者,即带来怖畏,如《师子譬喻经》(saṃ. ni. 3.78)中对诸天所说。有些人说:“以生、老、病、死的怖畏义为苦”。无我(anattā)以无坚实义(asārakaṭṭha)说明:即对于所计执为“我是住者、作者、受者、自在者”的那种自我之坚实,因不存在,故为无我。凡是无常、苦者,连自身的无常性或生灭逼迫都不能维持,何况有作者等角色?而且经中云:“诸比丘!若此色是我,则此色不应导致疾病”等。有些人说:“以无我坚实、无常坚实之缺失为无我”。显示巴利原文
31. Idāni yasmā ekekopi lokiyadhammo tilakkhaṇabbhāhato, tasmā lakkhaṇattikaṃ ekato niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenāti tattha tattheva khīyanabhāvena aniccaṃ. ‘‘Khayadhammattā, vayadhammattā, virāgadhammattā, nirodhadhammattā anicca’’nti eke. Dukkhaṃ bhayaṭṭhenāti sappaṭibhayatāya dukkhaṃ. Yañhi aniccaṃ, taṃ bhayāvahaṃ hoti sīhopamasutte (saṃ. ni. 3.78) devānaṃ viya. ‘‘Jātijarābyādhimaraṇabhayaṭṭhena dukkha’’nti eke. Anattā asārakaṭṭhenāti ‘‘attā nivāsī kārako vedako sayaṃvasī’’ti evaṃ parikappitassa attasārassa abhāvena anattā. Yañhi aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ attanopi aniccataṃ vā udayabbayapīḷanaṃ vā dhāretuṃ na sakkoti, kuto tassa kārakādibhāvo. Vuttañca ‘‘rūpañca hidaṃ, bhikkhave, attā abhavissa, nayidaṃ rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvatteyyā’’tiādi (mahāva. 20). ‘‘Attasāraniccasāravirahitattā anattā’’ti eke.
苦圣谛的解说注释显示巴利原文
Dukkhasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
四圣谛亦因诸谛在真实义上彼此关联,故合为一类解说。其中,“彼彼”(tattha)是指在这四圣谛之中。“如何”(katamaṃ)是想要解说的提问。“苦圣谛”(dukkhaṃ ariyasacca)即指出所问之法。在“生亦是苦”等句中,“生”(jātisadda)一词有多种含义被阐述。如云:显示巴利原文
Ariyasaccacatukkampi tathaṭṭhena saccānaṃ ekasambandhattā ekato eva niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu catūsu ariyasaccesu. Katamanti kathetukamyatāpucchā . Dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti pucchitadhammanidassanaṃ. Tattha jātipi dukkhātiādīsu jātisaddassa tāva aneke atthā paveditā. Yathāha –
“有、族、类,戒、施设、相;”
「生产」与「连接」这两种意义,被宣说为「生」。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhavo kulaṃ nikāyo ca, sīlaṃ paññatti lakkhaṇaṃ; Pasūti sandhi cevāti, jātiatthā paveditā’’.
同样,于「乃至一生、二生」等句中,此「生」指「有」(bhava)。于「因出身(jātivādena)而被指责、被诽谤」中,指家族(kula)。于「毗舍佉,有称为尼乾陀的一类沙门(samaṇajātī)」中,指部类(nikāya)。于「姐妹,我从圣生(ariyāya jātiyā)诞生以来,便不再了知」中,指圣戒(ariyasīla)。于「有一种名为横向的草类(tiṇajāti),从脐而生,触天而立」中,指施设(paññatti)。于「生由二蕴所摄」中,指有为相(saṅkhata lakkhaṇa)。于「阿难,菩萨刚刚诞生(sampatijāto)」中,指诞生(vijāyana)。于「缘有而有生(bhavapaccayā jāti)」与「生亦是苦(jātipi dukkhā)」中,间接指结生蕴(paṭisandhikkhandha);直接而言,则指于各处正在诞生的众生,他们各自诸蕴的初次显现。显示巴利原文
Tathā hissa ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’tiādīsu (pārā. 12) bhavo attho. ‘‘Akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.331) ettha kulaṃ. ‘‘Atthi, visākhe, nigaṇṭhā nāma samaṇajātī’’ti (a. ni. 3.71) ettha nikāyo. ‘‘Yatohaṃ, bhagini, ariyāya jātiyā jāto nābhijānāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.351) ettha ariyasīlaṃ. ‘‘Tiriyā nāma tiṇajāti nābhiyā uggantvā nabhaṃ āhacca ṭhitā ahosī’’ti (a. ni. 5.196) ettha paññatti. ‘‘Jāti dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahitā’’ti (dhātu. 71) ettha saṅkhatalakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto’’ti (ma. ni. 3.207) ettha pasūti. ‘‘Bhavapaccayā jātī’’ti (vibha. 354) ca ‘‘jātipi dukkhā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.33; vibha. 190) ca ettha pariyāyato paṭisandhikhandhā. Nippariyāyato pana tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ tesaṃ paṭhamaṃ pātubhāvo.
那么,为何此「生」是苦?因为它是众多苦的所依之处。众多的苦即是:苦苦、变易苦、行苦、隐蔽苦、非隐蔽苦、间接苦、直接苦。其中,身心的苦受,由于其自性及名称俱为苦,故称苦苦。乐受因变易而成为产生苦之因,故称变易苦。舍受以及其余三地诸行,被生灭所逼迫,故称行苦。像耳痛、牙痛、因贪而生的热恼、因嗔而生的热恼等身心的疾病,需询问方能了知,且病因不明显,故称隐蔽苦。由三十二种业等所引起的疾病,不用询问即能了知,且病因明显,故称非隐蔽苦。除苦苦之外,其余在《苦谛分别》中所说的「生」等一切,因为都是种种苦的所依,故称间接苦。而苦苦,则称为直接苦。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panesā jāti dukkhāti ce? Anekesaṃ dukkhānaṃ vatthubhāvato. Anekāni hi dukkhāni. Seyyathidaṃ – dukkhadukkhaṃ, vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ, saṅkhāradukkhaṃ, paṭicchannadukkhaṃ, appaṭicchannadukkhaṃ , pariyāyadukkhaṃ, nippariyāyadukkhanti. Ettha kāyikacetasikā dukkhā vedanāsabhāvato ca nāmato ca dukkhattā dukkhadukkhanti vuccati. Sukhā vedanā vipariṇāmena dukkhuppattihetuto vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ. Upekkhāvedanā ceva avasesā ca tebhūmakasaṅkhārā udayabbayapaṭipīḷitattā saṅkhāradukkhaṃ. Kaṇṇasūladantasūlarāgajapariḷāhadosajapariḷāhādi kāyikacetasiko ābādho pucchitvā jānitabbato upakkamassa ca apākaṭabhāvato paṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Dvattiṃsakammakāraṇādisamuṭṭhāno ābādho apucchitvāva jānitabbato upakkamassa ca pākaṭabhāvato appaṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Ṭhapetvā dukkhadukkhaṃ sesaṃ dukkhasaccavibhaṅge (vibha. 190 ādayo) āgataṃ jātiādi sabbampi tassa tassa dukkhassa vatthubhāvato pariyāyadukkhaṃ. Dukkhadukkhaṃ pana nippariyāyadukkhanti vuccati.
这里的“生”,即是世尊在《愚人智者经》等经中以譬喻开示的恶趣之苦,以及于善趣人界中以入胎等为根本而生起的苦;正因为它是这些苦的依处,故说为苦。此处,以入胎等为根本的苦是指:这个有情在母胎中结生时,并非生于青莲、红莲、白莲等处,而是生于胃的下方、结肠的上方,腹膜与脊椎之间,那个极其狭窄、极其暗昧的地方;那里弥漫着种种腐尸般的臭气,极其难闻的气流在流动;在这极其可厌的子宫区域,他就像生于腐鱼、腐乳粥、粪坑等处的蛆虫一样。他生于该处后,整十个月,被母胎所生的热力犹如窑中烧陶般烤着,犹如蒸面团般蒸着,不能蜷缩,不能伸展,极度地遭受着苦楚。这就是以入胎为根本的苦。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ jāti yaṃ taṃ bālapaṇḍitasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.246 ādayo) bhagavatāpi upamāvasena pakāsitaṃ āpāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yañca sugatiyampi manussaloke gabbhokkantimūlakādibhedaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, tassa vatthubhāvato dukkhā. Tatridaṃ gabbhokkantimūlakādibhedaṃ dukkhaṃ – ayañhi satto mātukucchimhi nibbattamāno na uppalapadumapuṇḍarīkādīsu nibbattati, atha kho heṭṭhā āmāsayassa upari pakkāsayassa udarapaṭalapiṭṭhikaṇṭakānaṃ vemajjhe paramasambādhe tibbandhakāre nānākuṇapagandhaparibhāvitaparamaduggandhapavanavicarite adhimattajegucche kucchippadese pūtimacchapūtikummāsacandanikādīsu kimi viya nibbattati. So tattha nibbatto dasa māse mātukucchisambhavena usmanā puṭapākaṃ viya paccamāno piṭṭhapiṇḍi viya sediyamāno samiñjanapasāraṇādivirahito adhimattaṃ dukkhaṃ paccanubhotīti. Idaṃ tāva gabbhokkantimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
当母亲忽然踉跄、行走、坐下、起立、翻身等时,胎儿犹如落在醉汉手中的山羊,又如落在捕蛇人手中的幼蛇,被拖拽、拉扯、摇晃、抖动等种种方式,极度感受着苦。当母亲饮冷水时,他如同堕入寒地狱一般;当母亲吞下热粥、饭食等时,他如同被炭火雨遍洒全身;当母亲咽下咸、酸等食物时,他如同遭受碱水、刀割等刑罚,极度感受着苦。这就是以护胎为根本的苦。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana so mātu sahasā upakkhalanagamananisīdanauṭṭhānaparivattanādīsu surādhuttahatthagato eḷako viya ahituṇḍikahatthagato sappapotako viya ca ākaḍḍhanaparikaḍḍhanaodhunananiddhunanādinā upakkamena adhimattaṃ dukkhamanubhoti, yañca mātu sītudakapānakāle sītanarakūpapanno viya uṇhayāgubhattādiajjhoharaṇakāle aṅgāravuṭṭhisamparikiṇṇo viya loṇambilādiajjhoharaṇakāle khārāpatacchikādikammakāraṇappatto viya adhimattaṃ dukkhamanubhoti. Idaṃ gabbhapariharaṇamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
如果母亲胎位错乱,在连朋友、僚属、亲戚等也不应见到的苦痛部位,胎儿以切割、剖开等方式感受着苦。这就是以胎难为根本的苦。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ panassa mūḷhagabbhāya mātuyā mittāmaccasuhajjādīhipi adassanārahe dukkhuppattiṭṭhāne chedanaphālanādīhi dukkhamanubhavati. Idaṃ gabbhavipattimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
母亲分娩时,胎儿被业所生的风吹转,送入那犹如地狱悬崖般极为恐怖的产道,遭受极度挤压;随后又从产门被拉出,如同从钥匙孔中拽出一般,又像大龙象或地狱众生被众合山碾碎一般。这样的苦便由此生起。这就是以分娩为根本的苦。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ vijāyamānāya mātuyā kammajehi vātehi parivattetvā narakappapātaṃ viya atibhayānakaṃ yonimaggaṃ paṭipādiyamānassa paramasambādhena ca yonimukhena tāḷacchiggaḷena viya nikaḍḍhiyamānassa mahānāgassa narakasattassa viya ca saṅghātapabbatehi vicuṇṇiyamānassa dukkhamuppajjati. Idaṃ vijāyanamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
出生之后,他那嫩芽般娇嫩的身体,在被人抓握、沐浴、洗涤、以布擦拭等时,便生起如同针尖刀锋穿刺割裂般的痛苦。这就是以出胎为根本的苦。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana jātassa taruṇavaṇasadisassa sukumārasarīrassa hatthagahaṇanhāpanadhovanacoḷaparimajjanādikāle sūcimukhakhuradhārāvijjhanaphālanasadisaṃ dukkhamuppajjati. Idaṃ mātukucchito bahi nikkhamanamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
此后,在生命的延续中,自己折磨自己:诸如通过裸形者的禁戒等方式,投身于自我炙烤与折磨的修行;或因愤怒而绝食;或上吊自缢。这时所生起的苦,就是自作为根本的苦。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ tato paraṃ pavattiyaṃ attanāva attānaṃ vadhentassa acelakavatādivasena ātāpanaparitāpanānuyogamanuyuttassa kodhavasena abhuñjantassa ubbandhantassa ca dukkhaṃ hoti. Idaṃ attupakkamamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
然而,当有情从他人处遭受杀害、束缚等时,所生起的苦,便是以他人加害为根源的苦。如此,这所有一切的苦,此‘生’仅仅是它的依处。因此这样说:显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana parato vadhabandhanādīni anubhavantassa uppajjati. Idaṃ parūpakkamamūlakaṃdukkhanti. Iti imassa sabbassāpi dukkhassa ayaṃ jāti vatthumeva hoti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
若众生不生于诸地狱中,那里难以忍受的火焰灼烧等苦便不会发生;
这苦又能在何处找到它的安立处呢?正因如此,牟尼在此说:‘生就是苦’。
在畜生中,鞭打、刺棒、
棍棒击打等所带来的种种苦,
若在那里受生,便会有那样的遭遇。
而在饿鬼中,则有饥渴之苦
由风、日晒等所引生的种种苦;
由于那里没有生,便没有那些苦;
因此,牟尼宣说:生即是苦。
在浓厚的黑暗与难忍的严寒中,
在世间间隙中、阿修罗处的那种苦
那里没有那种苦,他也没有那样的生
因为这种生,比那里更苦
而且,犹如在粪秽地狱中,众生在母胎内,
久住其中之后,再从那里出胎;
遭受极其可怖之苦,而这尚且不算什么,
若离于生,这些便都不存在;是故,此‘生’本身就是苦。
多说何益?难道不是无论在何处,
这些诸苦,总有时存在;
大仙并非在远离生之后才说苦,
而是首先指出:‘生即是苦’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Jāyetha no ce narakesu satto, tatthaggidāhādikamappasayhaṃ; Labhetha dukkhaṃ nu kuhiṃ patiṭṭhaṃ, iccāha dukkhāti munīdha jātiṃ. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ tiracchesu kasāpatoda- Daṇḍābhighātādibhavaṃ anekaṃ; Yaṃ taṃ kathaṃ tattha bhaveyya jātiṃ, Vinā tahiṃ jāti tatopi dukkhā. ‘‘Petesu dukkhaṃ pana khuppipāsā- Vātātapādippabhavaṃ vicittaṃ; Yasmā ajātassa na tattha atthi, Tasmāpi dukkhaṃ muni jātimāha. ‘‘Tibbandhakāre ca asayhasīte, Lokantare yaṃ asuresu dukkhaṃ; Na taṃ bhave tattha na cassa jāti, Yato ayaṃ jāti tatopi dukkhā. ‘‘Yañcāpi gūthanarake viya mātugabbhe, Satto vasaṃ ciramato bahi nikkhamañca; Pappoti dukkhamatighoramidampi natthi, Jātiṃ vinā itipi jāti ayañhi dukkhā. ‘‘Kiṃ bhāsitena bahunā nanu yaṃ kuhiñci, Atthīdha kiñcidapi dukkhamidaṃ kadāci; Nevatthi jātivirahe yadato mahesī, Dukkhāti sabbapaṭhamaṃ imamāha jāti’’nti.
“老”也是苦。这里,老有两种:一种是有为相,另一种是在相续中、为一个“有”所含摄的诸蕴之旧衰状态,即常说的牙齿脱落等。这里所指的正是后者。这种老之所以是苦,既因为它是行苦,也因为它是苦的依处。正如以下所说:显示巴利原文
Jarāpi dukkhāti ettha duvidhā jarā saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca, khaṇḍiccādisammato santatiyaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannakhandhapurāṇabhāvo ca. Sā idha adhippetā. Sā panesā dukkhā saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato ceva dukkhavatthuto ca. Yaṃ hidaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgasithilībhāvaindriyavikāravirūpatā yobbanavināsabalūpaghātasatimativippavāsaparaparibhavādianekappaccayaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ dukkhamuppajjati, jarā tassa vatthu. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
由于四肢松弛、诸根衰败,
由于青春消逝、体力损减,
由于与子女妻子的别离,以及与念等心法的分离。
既因变得不可爱,又因更增愚痴,
凡人所受之苦,无论是身苦还是心苦,
这一切皆以老为因,正因如此,老即是苦。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Aṅgānaṃ sithilībhāvā, indriyānaṃ vikārato; Yobbanassa vināsena, balassa upaghātato. ‘‘Vippavāsā satādīnaṃ, puttadārehi attano; Appasādanīyato ceva, bhiyyo bālattapattiyā. ‘‘Pappoti dukkhaṃ yaṃ macco, kāyikaṃ mānasaṃ tathā; Sabbametaṃ jarāhetu, yasmā tasmā jarā dukhā’’ti.
在说完老苦之后,按理应接着讲病苦;但由于在说明身苦时已将病苦涵盖在内,所以此处未再单独提出,这一点应当了知。显示巴利原文
Jarādukkhānantaraṃ byādhidukkhe vattabbepi kāyikadukkhagahaṇeneva byādhidukkhaṃ gahitaṃ hotīti na vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“死也是苦”这句话中的“死”有两种:一种是“有为相”,就这种意义而言,经中说“老死由两种蕴所含摄”(《界论》71)。另一种是指“在一期生命内所含摄的生命根相续的断灭”,就这种意义而言,经中说“因恒常有死的威胁,故有怖畏”(《经集》581)。此处所指的正是后一种。“生起的因缘即是死”等句,也可称为“横死”“自性死”“寿尽死”或“福尽死”。再者,于此还应了知另一种分类,即“刹那死”“概念死”与“断灭死”。其中,“刹那死”是指在生命流转过程中,色法与名法的坏灭。而像“帝须死了”“弗沙佛死了”这种说法,从究竟义上说,因并无真实的有情存在,故是“概念死”;至于“庄稼死了”“树死了”之类的说法,则因其中没有命根,也称为“概念死”。“断灭死”是指诸漏尽者不再有结生的寿尽。除了全然外在的概念死之外,其余的概念死及断灭死,皆可含摄于前述的“相续断灭”之中。又由于死是苦生起的所依,故其本身即是苦,因此如是说:显示巴利原文
Maraṇampi dukkhanti etthāpi duvidhaṃ maraṇaṃ – saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahita’’nti (dhātu. 71). Ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyappabandhavicchedo ca, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘niccaṃ maraṇato bhaya’’nti (su. ni. 581). Taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Jātipaccayamaraṇaṃ upakkamamaraṇaṃ sarasamaraṇaṃ āyukkhayamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayamaraṇantipi tasseva nāmaṃ. Puna khaṇikamaraṇaṃ sammutimaraṇaṃ samucchedamaraṇanti ayampettha bhedo veditabbo. Pavatte rūpārūpadhammānaṃ bhedo khaṇikamaraṇaṃ nāma. ‘‘Tisso mato, phusso mato’’ti idaṃ paramatthato sattassa abhāvā, ‘‘sassaṃ mataṃ, rukkho mato’’ti idaṃ jīvitindriyassa abhāvā sammutimaraṇaṃ nāma. Khīṇāsavassa appaṭisandhikā kālakiriyā samucchedamaraṇaṃ nāma. Bāhirakaṃ sammutimaraṇaṃ ṭhapetvā itaraṃ sammutimaraṇañca samucchedamaraṇañca yathāvuttapabandhavicchedeneva saṅgahitaṃ. Dukkhassa pana vatthubhāvato dukkhaṃ. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
他对观察恶的相,即恶业等的相;
无法忍受妙乐者,便会经历与可爱事物分离之苦;
临命终时,无论何人,内心无差别地感受到的痛苦;
对于一切众生,关节被砍断、束缚被割截等痛苦。
因为这种死不可忍受,也无法对治,它正是苦的所依处;
因此,死这件事即是苦的所依,故说死就是苦。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pāpassa pāpakammādinimittamanupassato; Bhaddassāpasahantassa, viyogaṃ piyavatthukaṃ; Mīyamānassa yaṃ dukkhaṃ, mānasaṃ avisesato. ‘‘Sabbesañcāpi yaṃ sandhibandhanacchedanādikaṃ; Vitujjamānamammānaṃ , hoti dukkhaṃ sarīrajaṃ. ‘‘Asayhamappaṭikāraṃ, dukkhassetassidaṃ yato; Maraṇaṃ vatthu tenetaṃ, dukkhamicceva bhāsita’’nti.
在愁等诸苦中,「愁」是指遭受亲友衰败等事所触恼时,内心以内在灼烧为相的热恼;而「苦」则是从苦苦的角度,以及作为苦的依处之事来说的。因此说:显示巴利原文
Sokādīsu soko nāma ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa antonijjhānalakkhaṇo cittasantāpo. Dukkho pana dukkhadukkhato dukkhavatthuto ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
众生的心被愁刺穿,犹如被毒箭刺中;
如同烧红的铁箭,又像炽烈燃烧的火。
它带来疾病,以及老与死的坏灭;
也因其带来种种之苦,故得名为‘苦’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sattānaṃ hadayaṃ soko, visasallaṃva tujjati; Aggitattova nārāco, bhusaṃva dahate puna. ‘‘Samāvahati byādhiñca, jarāmaraṇabhedanaṃ; Dukkhampi vividhaṃ yasmā, tasmā dukkhoti vuccatī’’ti.
‘悲泣’是指遭遇亲属衰败等不幸时,口中发出的悲叹之语。而‘苦’,则因其为行苦之性,亦为苦之所依。因此,这样说:显示巴利原文
Paridevo nāma ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa vacīpalāpo. Dukkho pana saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato dukkhavatthuto ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
为忧箭所伤而悲叹的人,其喉咙、嘴唇、上颚与舌头因干涩所生的苦,实难忍受;
他更遭受倍加增盛的痛苦,因此世尊将悲叹称为「苦」。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yaṃ sokasallavihato paridevamāno, kaṇṭhoṭṭhatālutalasosajamappasayhaṃ; Bhiyyodhimattamadhigacchatiyeva dukkhaṃ, dukkhoti tena bhagavā paridevamāhā’’ti.
「苦」是指具有身体受逼迫之相的身苦。然而,「苦」又因为是苦苦,以及能带来意苦的缘故。因此说:显示巴利原文
Dukkhaṃ nāma kāyapīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ kāyikadukkhaṃ. Dukkhaṃ pana dukkhadukkhato mānasadukkhāvahanato ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
身苦逼迫此身,又更产生意苦;
因为它产生意苦,因此特称为“苦”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pīḷeti kāyikamidaṃ, dukkhaṃ dukkhañca mānasaṃ bhiyyo; Janayati yasmā tasmā, dukkhanti visesato vutta’’nti.
所谓“忧”,是指具有逼迫心特征的内心之苦。而“苦”(身苦)则因为是苦苦,又能带来身苦的缘故。被心苦所逼迫的人,确实会揪发哭泣、捶胸、翻滚、仰卧、双脚朝天扑倒、持刀、服毒、悬绳自缢、投身火中,遭受种种痛苦。因此说:显示巴利原文
Domanassaṃ nāma cittapīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ mānasaṃ dukkhaṃ. Dukkhaṃ pana dukkhadukkhato kāyikadukkhāvahanato ca. Cetodukkhasamappitā hi kese pakiriya kandanti, urāni paṭipisanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti, uddhaṃpādaṃ papatanti, satthaṃ āharanti, visaṃ khādanti, rajjuyā ubbandhanti, aggiṃ pavisantīti nānappakārakaṃ dukkhamanubhavanti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
由于它压迫心,并带来身体的压迫;
‘苦’即忧,由此他们称之为‘毁坏意乐’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pīḷeti yato cittaṃ, kāyassa ca pīḷanaṃ samāvahati; Dukkhanti domanassaṃ, vidomanassā tato āhū’’ti.
所谓‘愁忧’,即因遭遇亲属离散等不幸所触恼者,由极重意苦所引发的忿怒。有部分人说:‘这是行蕴所含的一个法。’而‘苦’则依于行苦的状态、心的灼恼及身的沮丧而说。因此这样说——显示巴利原文
Upāyāso nāma ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa adhimattacetodukkhappabhāvito dosoyeva. ‘‘Saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpanno eko dhammo’’ti eke. Dukkho pana saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato cittaparidahanato kāyavisādanato ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
由于内心极度焦灼,身体极度萎靡;
那由愁所生的苦,便称为‘恼’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cittassa ca paridahanā, kāyassa visādanā ca adhimattaṃ; Yaṃ dukkhamupāyāso, janeti dukkho tato vutto’’ti.
在此,愁如同以小火在器内烹煮;悲如同以烈火烹煮时从器中溢出;恼则如同溢出后剩余的部分,无法再溢出,只能于器内不断烹煮,直至耗尽。应当这样看待。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca mandagginā antobhājane pāko viya soko, tikkhagginā paccamānassa bhājanato bahinikkhamanaṃ viya paridevo, bahinikkhantāvasesassa nikkhamitumpi appahontassa antobhājaneyeva yāva parikkhayā pāko viya upāyāso daṭṭhabbo.
所谓“怨憎会”,即与不可爱的众生、诸行相聚。而“苦”则是以苦事为缘。因此有言:显示巴利原文
Appiyasampayogo nāma appiyehi sattasaṅkhārehi samodhānaṃ. Dukkho pana dukkhavatthuto. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“见到不可爱者时,苦先于心内生起;
随后,由彼所生之苦,即生于此身之中。”
因此,这两种苦,就事相而言,那位大仙……
所说之‘苦’,即应知是与不爱者相聚。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Disvāva appiye dukkhaṃ, paṭhamaṃ hoti cetasi; Tadupakkamasambhūtamatha kāye yato idha. ‘‘Tato dukkhadvayassāpi, vatthuto so mahesinā; Dukkho vuttoti viññeyyo, appiyehi samāgamo’’ti.
与亲爱者别离,即与所爱的众生、诸行分离。苦则依苦之事而成立。因此这样说:显示巴利原文
Piyavippayogo nāma piyehi sattasaṅkhārehi vinābhāvo. Dukkho pana dukkhavatthuto. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
与亲人、财富等分离时,他们被忧愁之箭射中,备受折磨;
因此,愚者们将这种与所爱者的别离视为苦。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ñātidhanādiviyogā , sokasarasamappitā vitujjanti; Bālā yato tatoyaṃ, dukkhoti mato piyaviyogo’’ti.
于不可得之事物的欲求,即‘求而不得,此亦为苦’。对不可得的事物有所欲求,却无法获得,这种对不可得事物的欲求本身即是苦,这便是其含义。而苦则是就其苦之事相而言。故说:显示巴利原文
Icchitālābhe alabbhaneyyavatthūsu icchāva yampicchaṃ na labhati, tampi dukkhanti vuttā. Yenapi dhammena alabbhaneyyaṃ vatthuṃ icchanto na labhati, tampi alabbhaneyyavatthumhi icchanaṃ dukkhanti attho. Dukkhaṃ pana dukkhavatthuto. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
那些追求种种事物的人,因得不到这样那样的事物;
这种由求不得而生的忧恼之苦,便在此世间的众生中生起。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Taṃ taṃ patthayamānānaṃ, tassa tassa alābhato; Yaṃ vighātamayaṃ dukkhaṃ, sattānaṃ idha jāyati. ‘‘Alabbhaneyyavatthūnaṃ, patthanā tassa kāraṇaṃ; Yasmā tasmā jino dukkhaṃ, icchitālābhamabravī’’ti.
在“简而言之,五取蕴”这句话中,“简而言之”是就说法而言。因为苦无法被概括为“有这许多百种苦”或“有这许多千种苦”,但说法却可以加以概括。因此,为了将说法收摄起来,他便这样说道:“所谓的苦,并非其他任何东西,简而言之,五取蕴就是苦。”“五”是数量的简别。“取蕴”即是以取为行境的蕴。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhāti ettha pana saṅkhittenāti desanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dukkhañhi ettakāni dukkhasatānīti vā ettakāni dukkhasahassānīti vā saṅkhipituṃ na sakkā, desanā pana sakkā. Tasmā ‘‘dukkhaṃ nāma na aññaṃ kiñci, saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti desanaṃ saṅkhipanto evamāha. Pañcāti gaṇanaparicchedo. Upādānakkhandhāti upādānagocarā khandhā.
从生等起的苦,及此间如来所说之苦;
那些未曾宣说的所有苦,离开了此取蕴,也同样不会存在。
因此,简而言之,这些取蕴,便是开示苦之边际的大仙所说之“苦”。
显示巴利原文 Jātippabhutikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ vuttamidha tādinā; Avuttaṃ yañca taṃ sabbaṃ, vinā etena vijjati. Yasmā tasmā upādānakkhandhā saṅkhepato ime;
正如火之有燃料,靶之与击打,牛之与牛虻等,田地之与收割者,村庄之与屠村者——生等以种种方式逼迫恼害的,正是这五取蕴;又如大地上的草藤之类,树上的花、果、嫩叶,皆从取蕴而生。而取蕴最初的苦即是生,中间的苦即是老,最后的苦即是死;为临死之苦所逼迫而生起的烧燃之苦,是“愁”;因不能忍受而哭泣之苦,是“悲”;由名为“界扰动”的不可意触和合所生的身上病痛之苦,是“苦”;随顺此病痛,凡夫心生瞋恚,这种恼害内心之苦,是“忧”;从愁等增长而来的悲伤叹息之苦,是“恼”;愿望不得满足之人,所求落空之苦,是“求不得苦”。像这样以种种方式审察,取蕴本身即是苦。若要一一分别解说,即使用尽多劫也无法完全说尽,而世尊正是为了将这一切苦,犹如一滴水含容大海全部水的味道那般,总摄于此五取蕴之中而作开示,所以长老说:“略说五取蕴是苦”。显示巴利原文
Dukkhāti vuttā dukkhanta-desakena mahesinā.
在此(tattha),是指苦谛解说中所说的“生”等。“彼彼有情的”(yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ),是对众多有情的总括说明。如果只说“提婆达多的生、索马达达的生”,即使整天宣说,既不能穷尽一切有情,也不能完备地显明其余的含义;但以此两句,便没有一位有情不被含摄,没有一种义理不被显明。“于彼彼”(tamhi tamhī),是依趣生与生类,对各类有情群体的总括说明。“有情众”(sattanikāya),指有情的群体、有情的聚合、有情的集合。“生”(jāti),即出生的意思,这是标示事物自体的词。“生起”(sañjāti),是完全出生的意思,这是加上前缀扩展而成的词。“入胎”(okkanti),是进入的意思。或者,以出生的义理称为“生”,这是就诸处尚未完满而说的;以完全出生的义理称为“生起”,这是就诸处已经圆足而说的;以进入的义理称为“入胎”,这是就卵生和胎生而说的。因为卵生和胎生要进入卵壳和子宫,如同进入一般执取结生。以再生的义理称为“再生”(abhinibbatti),这是就湿生和化显示巴利原文
Tathā hi indhanamiva pāvako, lakkhamiva paharaṇāni, gorūpaṃ viya ḍaṃsamakasādayo, khettamiva lāyakā, gāmaṃ viya gāmaghātakā, upādānakkhandhapañcakameva jātiādayo nānappakārehi vibādhentā tiṇalatādīni viya bhūmiyaṃ, pupphaphalapallavāni viya rukkhesu upādānakkhandhesuyeva nibbattanti. Upādānakkhandhānañca ādidukkhaṃ jāti, majjhedukkhaṃ jarā, pariyosānadukkhaṃ maraṇaṃ, māraṇantikadukkhābhighātena pariḍayhanadukkhaṃ soko , tadasahanato lālappanadukkhaṃ paridevo, tato dhātukkhobhasaṅkhātaaniṭṭhaphoṭṭhabbasamāyogato kāyassa ābādhanadukkhaṃ dukkhaṃ, tena ābādhiyamānānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ tattha paṭighuppattito cetobādhanadukkhaṃ domanassaṃ, sokādivuddhiyā janitavisādānaṃ anutthunanadukkhaṃ upāyāso, manorathavighātappattānaṃ icchāvighātadukkhaṃ icchitālābhoti evaṃ nānappakārato upaparikkhiyamānā upādānakkhandhāva dukkhāti yadetaṃ ekamekaṃ dassetvā vuccamānaṃ anekehipi kappehi na sakkā anavasesato vattuṃ, taṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ ekajalabindumhi sakalasamuddajalarasaṃ viya yesu kesuci pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu saṅkhipitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti bhagavatā vuttameva thero avocāti.
其次,“诸蕴的显现,诸处的获得”,是胜义之说。因为,从胜义上讲,唯有诸蕴显现,并非有情显现。这里,“诸蕴”(khandhānaṃ),应当了知:在只有一蕴的生存地中,取一个蕴;在四蕴的生存地中,取四个蕴;在五蕴的生存地中,取五个蕴。“显现”(pātubhāva),即生起。“诸处”(āyatanānaṃ),应理解为依于各处生起而作的归类。“获得”(paṭilābha),指在相续中的显现本身。因为那些正在显现的,便名为“获得”。“此名为生”(ayaṃ vuccati jāti),就是这个被称为生。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamā jātītiādīsu padabhājanīyesu tatthāti dukkhasaccaniddese vuttesu jātiādīsu. Yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānanti saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso. Yā devadattassa jāti, yā somadattassa jātīti evañhi divasampi kathiyamāne neva sattā pariyādānaṃ gacchanti, na sabbaṃ aparatthadīpanaṃ sijjhati, imehi pana dvīhi padehi na koci satto apariyādinno hoti, na kiñci aparatthadīpanaṃ na sijjhati. Tamhi tamhīti ayaṃ gatijātivasena anekesaṃ sattanikāyānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso. Sattanikāyeti sattānaṃ nikāye, sattaghaṭāyaṃ sattasamūheti attho. Jātīti jāyanavasena. Idamettha sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Sañjātīti sañjāyanavasena. Upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Okkantīti okkamanavasena. Jāyanaṭṭhena vā jāti, sā aparipuṇṇāyatanavasena vuttā. Sañjāyanaṭṭhena sañjāti, sā paripuṇṇāyatanavasena vuttā. Okkamanaṭṭhena okkanti, sā aṇḍajajalābujavasena vuttā. Te hi aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca okkamanti, okkamantā pavisantā viya paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanti. Abhinibbattanaṭṭhena abhinibbatti, sā saṃsedajaopapātikavasena vuttā. Te hi pākaṭā eva hutvā nibbattanti, ayaṃ tāva sammutikathā.
现在,这是关于“诸蕴的显现、诸处的获得”的胜义解说。因为在胜义上,唯有诸蕴显现,而非有情。在此,“诸蕴”应当了知:在一蕴有中取一个蕴,在四蕴有中取四个蕴,在五蕴有中取五个蕴。“显现”,即生起。“诸处”,应理解为依于各处生起而作的归类。“获得”,即在相续中的显现本身。因为那些正在显现的,才名为获得。这就是所谓的“生”——这被称为生。显示巴利原文
Idāni khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo, āyatanānaṃ paṭilābhoti paramatthakathā hoti. Khandhā eva hi paramatthato pātubhavanti, na sattā. Ettha ca khandhānanti ekavokārabhave ekassa, catuvokārabhave catunnaṃ, pañcavokārabhave pañcannampi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pātubhāvoti uppatti. Āyatanānanti tatra tatra uppajjamānāyatanavasena saṅgaho veditabbo. Paṭilābhoti santatiyaṃ pātubhāvoyeva. Pātubhavantāneva hi tāni paṭiladdhāni nāma honti. Ayaṃ vuccati jātīti ayaṃ jāti nāma kathīyati.
关于老的解说:‘老’表自性,‘老性’表相状。‘齿落’等三者,是说明时间推移过程中作用的解说;后二者,是说明本性的解说。‘此老’一词从自性方面显明,故为自性词;‘老性’从相状方面显明,故为相状解说。‘齿落’是通过时间推移使牙齿、指甲成缺损的作用而显示;‘发白’是通过使头发、体毛变白的作用而显示;‘皮皱’是通过使肌肉萎缩、皮肤起皱的作用而显示。因此这三者是时间推移中作用的解说。通过这些变化显现出来,使得显露的老昭然可见。犹如水、风、火或草木等,以冲毁或烧毁的方式使古道显现,但古道并非就是那些水等。同样地,老借助牙齿等的齿落等方式,显示出它的行迹,即使睁大眼睛也能了知,然而齿落等并非就是老,因为老并非眼识所能认知。显示巴利原文
Jarāniddese jarāti sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Jīraṇatāti ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccantiādayo tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā, pacchimā dve pakatiniddesā. Ayañhi jarāti iminā padena sabhāvato dīpitā, tenassā idaṃ sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Jīraṇatāti iminā ākārato, tenassāyaṃ ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccanti iminā kālātikkame dantanakhānaṃ khaṇḍitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Pāliccanti iminā kesalomānaṃ palitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Valittacatāti iminā maṃsaṃ milāpetvā tace valibhāvakaraṇakiccato dīpitā. Tenassā ime tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā. Tehi imesaṃ vikārānaṃ dassanavasena pākaṭībhūtā pākaṭajarā dassitā. Yatheva hi udakassa vā vātassa vā aggino vā tiṇarukkhādīnaṃ sambhaggapalibhaggatāya vā jhāmatāya vā gatamaggo pākaṭo hoti, na ca so gatamaggo tāneva udakādīni, evameva jarāya dantādīsu khaṇḍiccādivasena gatamaggo pākaṭo cakkhuṃ ummīletvāpi gayhati, na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarā. Na hi jarā cakkhuviññeyyā hoti.
而‘寿衰减’、‘根损减’这两句,是说明由时间推移而显现的寿尽及眼等诸根损减这一本性,因此可知这是两种本性解说。其中,由于衰老之人其寿衰减,故以果代因,称老为‘寿的衰减’;又因年轻时眼等诸根极为澄净,能轻易执取微细所缘,及至老时则损减、混乱、不清明,乃至不能执取粗大所缘,所以同样以果代因,称老为‘诸根的损减’。显示巴利原文
Āyuno saṃhāni indriyānaṃ paripākoti imehi pana padehi kālātikkameyeva abhibyattāya āyukkhayacakkhādiindriyaparipākasaṅkhātāya pakatiyā dīpitā, tenassime dve pakatiniddesāti veditabbā. Tattha yasmā jaraṃ pattassa āyu hāyati, tasmā jarā ‘‘āyuno saṃhānī’’ti phalūpacārena vuttā. Yasmā ca daharakāle suppasannāni sukhumampi attano visayaṃ sukheneva gaṇhanasamatthāni cakkhādīni indriyāni jaraṃ pattassa paripakkāni āluḷitāni avisadāni oḷārikampi attano visayaṃ gahetuṃ asamatthāni honti, tasmā ‘‘indriyānaṃ paripāko’’ti phalūpacāreneva vuttā.
然而,如上所说的一切老,分为显露老与隐藏老两种。其中,在牙齿等色法中可观察到缺损的状态,这种色法中的老称为‘显露老’。而在无色法中,因看不到如此变异,称为‘隐藏老’。在那当中,所见的缺损状态,其实只是那些牙齿等的色相罢了。以眼看到后,通过意门思惟:‘这些牙齿被老所损害’,便如此了知老。就如同看到水中系缚的牛角等物,而知水下有水牛等存在一样。再者,这种老又可分为有间老与无间老。其中,在摩尼宝珠、黄金、白银、珊瑚、月亮、太阳等中,以及在仅有十岁等短寿的有情身上,和在花、果、嫩叶等非有情中,由于色相殊妙等难以了知,老称为‘无间老’,意为无间断的老。而在除此之外的前述其他情况下,由于色相殊妙等容易了知,老称为‘有间老’。显示巴利原文
Sā panesā evaṃ niddiṭṭhā sabbāpi jarā pākaṭā paṭicchannāti duvidhā hoti. Tattha dantādīsu khaṇḍādibhāvadassanato rūpadhammesu jarā pākaṭajarā nāma. Arūpadhammesu pana jarā tādisassa vikārassa adassanato paṭicchannajarā nāma. Tatra yvāyaṃ khaṇḍādibhāvo dissati, so tādisānaṃ dantādīnaṃ vaṇṇoyeva. Taṃ cakkhunā disvā manodvārena cintetvā ‘‘ime dantā jarāya pahaṭā’’ti jaraṃ jānāti, udakaṭṭhāne baddhāni gosiṅgādīni oloketvā heṭṭhā udakassa atthibhāvajānanaṃ viya. Puna ayaṃ jarā savīci avīcīti evampi duvidhā hoti. Tattha maṇikanakarajatapavāḷacandasūriyādīnaṃ mandadasakādīsu pāṇīnaṃ viya, pupphaphalapallavādīsu apāṇīnaṃ viya ca antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ dubbiññeyyattā jarā avīcijarā nāma, nirantarajarāti attho. Tato aññesu pana yathāvuttesu antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā jarā savīcijarā nāma.
其中,“有间老”应依执取与非执取这样理解:幼童最初长出所谓的乳齿,那些并不坚固。乳齿脱落后,又长出恒齿。这些恒齿最初是白色的,当被老风吹拂时便转为黑色。头发最初是褐色的,后来变黑,再变为白色。皮肤则带有血色。随着不断生长,白色者显出白色之相,黑色者显出黑色之相。然而一旦被老风吹拂,就会起皱纹。一切谷物播下时也是白的,后来变绿。被老风吹拂时则变黄。用芒果嫩芽的例子也能说明这一点。显示巴利原文
Tattha savīcijarā upādiṇṇakaanupādiṇṇakavasena evaṃ veditabbā – daharakumārakānañhi paṭhamameva khīradantā nāma uṭṭhahanti, na te thirā. Tesu pana patitesu puna dantā uṭṭhahanti. Te paṭhamameva setā honti, jarāvātena pahaṭakāle kāḷakā honti. Kesā paṭhamameva tambā honti, tato kāḷakā, tato setā. Chavi pana salohitikā hoti. Vaḍḍhantānaṃ vaḍḍhantānaṃ odātānaṃ odātabhāvo, kāḷakānaṃ kāḷakabhāvo paññāyati. Jarāvātena pana pahaṭakāle valiṃ gaṇhāti. Sabbampi sassaṃ vapitakāle setaṃ hoti, pacchā nīlaṃ. Jarāvātena pana pahaṭakāle paṇḍukaṃ hoti. Ambaṅkurenāpi dīpetuṃ vaṭṭati.
在对死的解说中,“死没”是就死没的方式而说的。这是一蕴、四蕴、五蕴的共称。“死没性”是以状态词显示其相。“坏灭”是表明死没诸蕴的破损生起。“消失”是表明死没诸蕴犹如破瓶,无论如何都不再有其位置。“死神”指称为死神的死,并非刹那死。“时”称为终结者,它的作用就是“寿尽”。至此,说明了世俗意义上的死。显示巴利原文
Maraṇaniddese cutīti cavanavasena vuttaṃ. Ekacatupañcakkhandhānaṃ sāmaññavacanametaṃ. Cavanatāti bhāvavacanena lakkhaṇanidassanaṃ. Bhedoti cutikhandhānaṃ bhaṅguppattiparidīpanaṃ. Antaradhānanti ghaṭassa viya bhinnassa bhinnānaṃ cutikhandhānaṃ yena kenaci pariyāyena ṭhānābhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Maccu maraṇanti maccusaṅkhātaṃ maraṇaṃ, na khaṇikamaraṇaṃ. Kālo nāma antako, tassa kiriyāti kālakiriyā. Ettāvatā ca sammutiyā maraṇaṃ dīpitaṃ.
现在,为了用胜义来说明,而说“诸蕴的坏灭”等。因为从胜义来看,只有诸蕴在坏灭,并没有任何称为“有情”的东西在死去。然而,当诸蕴正在坏灭时,人们便说“有情死了”;已经坏灭之后,就有“已死”的称呼。在此处,依四蕴有和五蕴有而说“诸蕴的坏灭”;依一蕴有而说“弃舍尸身”;或者依四蕴有说“诸蕴的坏灭”,依其余二有说“弃舍尸身”,应当这样理解。为什么?因为在这两种“有”中,都有名为色身的尸身存在。又因为,在四大王天等天界中,诸蕴也在坏灭,但并没有弃舍任何东西,所以依他们而说“诸蕴的坏灭”;而在人界等处,则有尸身的弃舍。而在这里,由于有弃舍尸身这回事,所以死被称为“弃舍尸身”。显示巴利原文
Idāni paramatthena dīpetuṃ khandhānaṃ bhedotiādimāha. Paramatthena hi khandhāyeva bhijjanti, na satto nāma koci marati. Khandhesu pana bhijjamānesu satto marati, bhinnesu matoti vohāro hoti. Ettha ca catuvokārapañcavokāravasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, ekavokāravasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo, catuvokāravasena vā khandhānaṃ bhedo, sesadvayavasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo veditabbo. Kasmā? Bhavadvayepi rūpakāyasaṅkhātassa kaḷevarassa sambhavato. Yasmā vā cātumahārājikādīsupi khandhā bhijjanteva, na kiñci nikkhipati, tasmā tesaṃ vasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, manussādīsu kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Ettha ca kaḷevarassa nikkhepakaraṇato maraṇaṃ ‘‘kaḷevarassa nikkhepo’’ti vuttaṃ.
“命根的断除”这一表述,是在说明:唯有与根相系属者,才有所谓的死;不与根相系属者,则没有所谓的死。至于“谷物死了”“树死了”这类说法,仅是世俗的假名而已;依于义理,这些话语唯是显示谷物等的耗尽与衰灭。显示巴利原文
Jīvitindriyassupacchedoti iminā indriyabaddhasseva maraṇaṃ nāma hoti, anindriyabaddhassa maraṇaṃ nāma natthīti dasseti. ‘‘Sassaṃ mataṃ, rukkho mato’’ti idaṃ pana vohāramattameva, atthato pana evarūpāni vacanāni sassādīnaṃ khayavayabhāvameva dīpenti.
再者,这些生、老、死,对于有情而言,犹如正在伺机的杀手、仇敌一般游荡徘徊。譬如有一个人有三个仇敌,都在伺机下手。第一个说:“我称赞某处森林的优胜,引此人前往那里,此事于我毫不为难。”第二个说:“待你将他带到那里,我令他被打至虚弱,此事于我毫不为难。”第三个说:“待你将他打至虚弱后,我以利剑斩取其头,便是我的职责。”他们这样说后,便会那样做。其中,第一个仇敌称赞森林并引人前往那里,恰如将人从亲友圈中牵出,令其在某处受生——这便是“生”的作用;第二个仇敌将其击打至虚弱,恰如落在已生的诸蕴之上,令其成为依赖他人、只能卧床的状态——这便是“老”的作用;第三个仇敌以利剑斩首,恰如令寿命断尽——这便是“死”的作用。应当如此了知。显示巴利原文
Apica imāni jātijarāmaraṇāni nāma imesaṃ sattānaṃ vadhakapaccāmittā viya otāraṃ gavesantāni vicaranti. Yathā hi purisassa tīsu paccāmittesu otārāpekkhesu vicarantesu eko vadeyya ‘‘ahaṃ asukaaraññassa nāma vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā etaṃ ādāya tattha gamissāmi, ettha mayhaṃ dukkaraṃ natthī’’ti. Dutiyo vadeyya ‘‘ahaṃ tava etaṃ gahetvā gatakāle pothetvā dubbalaṃ karissāmi, ettha mayhaṃ dukkaraṃ natthī’’ti. Tatiyo vadeyya ‘‘tayā etasmiṃ pothetvā dubbale kate tiṇhena asinā sīsacchedanaṃ nāma mayhaṃ bhāro hotū’’ti te evaṃ vatvā tathā kareyyuṃ. Tattha paṭhamapaccāmittassa araññavaṇṇaṃ kathetvā taṃ ādāya tattha gatakālo viya suhajjañātimaṇḍalato nikkaḍḍhitvā yattha katthaci nibbattāpanaṃ nāma jātiyā kiccaṃ, dutiyassa pothetvā dubbalakaraṇaṃ viya nibbattakkhandhesu nipatitvā parādhīnamañcaparāyaṇabhāvakaraṇaṃ jarāya kiccaṃ, tatiyassa tiṇhena asinā sīsacchedanaṃ viya jīvitakkhayapāpanaṃ maraṇassa kiccanti veditabbaṃ.
此外,于此,生苦应视如进入充满险患的大旷野;老苦应视如彼旷野中无饮食者的虚弱无力;死苦则应视如当那虚弱者行持威仪时,努力已尽、被猛兽等加害而遭不幸与灾祸。显示巴利原文
Apicettha jātidukkhaṃ sādīnavamahākantārappaveso viya daṭṭhabbaṃ, jarādukkhaṃ tattha annapānarahitassa dubbalaṃ viya, maraṇadukkhaṃ dubbalassa iriyāpathapavattane vihataparakkamassa vāḷādīhi anayabyasanāpādanaṃ viya daṭṭhabbanti.
在“忧”的解说中,“viyasatī”意为灾祸,即抛弃、破坏利益与安乐。亲族的灾祸名为“亲族灾祸”,指由贼、病、怖畏等所导致的亲族耗尽与消亡。被这种亲族灾祸所“触”,即被覆盖、被征服、被具足。其余各项也以此类推。不过此处有一差别:财富的灾祸即“财富灾祸”,指由国王、盗贼等所引生的财富耗尽与丧失。病本身就是灾祸,故称“病灾祸”,因为病破坏健康,所以是灾祸。戒的灾祸即“戒灾祸”,这是无道德的名称。正在破坏正见而生起的见,本身就是灾祸,名“见灾祸”。在此,前两种(亲族灾祸、财富灾祸)是未完成的,后三种(病灾祸、戒灾祸、见灾祸)是已完成的,为三相所逼恼。前三种(亲族灾祸、财富灾祸、病灾祸)非善非不善,而戒灾祸与见灾祸则是不善。显示巴利原文
Sokaniddese viyasatīti byasanaṃ, hitasukhaṃ khipati viddhaṃsetīti attho. Ñātīnaṃ byasanaṃ ñātibyasanaṃ, corarogabhayādīhi ñātikkhayo ñātivināsoti attho. Tena ñātibyasanena. Phuṭṭhassāti ajjhotthaṭassa abhibhūtassa, samannāgatassāti attho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – bhogānaṃ byasanaṃ bhogabyasanaṃ, rājacorādivasena bhogakkhayo bhogavināsoti attho. Rogoyeva byasanaṃ rogabyasanaṃ. Rogo hi ārogyaṃ viyasati vināsetīti byasanaṃ. Sīlassa byasanaṃ sīlabyasanaṃ. Dussīlyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhiṃ vināsayamānā uppannā diṭṭhi eva byasanaṃ diṭṭhibyasanaṃ. Ettha ca purimāni dve anipphannāni, pacchimāni tīṇi nipphannāni tilakkhaṇabbhāhatāni. Purimāni ca tīṇi neva kusalāni na akusalāni, sīladiṭṭhibyasanadvayaṃ akusalaṃ.
“以某一种”指已把握的或尚未把握的某一种灾难,如朋友、大臣等的灾祸。“具足”指被跟随、不得脱离。“以某一种苦法”是指能引生忧的任何一种苦因。“忧”,即由担忧而成为忧,这是由那些原因所生之忧的自性自体。“忧虑”是忧虑的行相。“忧虑状态”是忧虑的存在状态。“内忧”即内在的忧。第二词因为加上接头词而词义增强。当它生起时,犹如使内在干涸、枯槁,故称为“内忧、内枯槁”。“心的憔悴”是心憔悴的行相。因为忧生起时,如同火一般烧灼、燃烧心,令人说出“我的心被烧了,我什么也想不起来”。“忧心”指苦的心,它的状态就是忧。由于随入之义,忧本身即是箭,所以称“忧箭”。显示巴利原文
Aññataraññatarenāti gahitesu vā yena kenaci aggahitesu vā mittāmaccabyasanādīsu yena kenaci. Samannāgatassāti samanubandhassa aparimuccamānassa. Aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammenāti yena kenaci sokadukkhassa uppattihetunā. Sokoti socanakavasena soko. Idaṃ tehi kāraṇehi uppajjanakasokassa sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Socanāti socanākāro. Socitattanti socitabhāvo. Antosokoti abbhantarasoko. Dutiyapadaṃ upasaggena vaḍḍhitaṃ. So hi abbhantaraṃ sukkhāpento viya parisukkhāpento viya uppajjatīti ‘‘antosoko antoparisoko’’ti vuccati. Cetaso parijjhāyanāti cittassa parijjhāyanākāro. Soko hi uppajjamāno aggi viya cittaṃ jhāpeti dahati, ‘‘cittaṃ me jhāmaṃ, na me kiñci paṭibhātī’’ti vadāpeti. Dukkhito mano dummano, tassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Anupaviṭṭhaṭṭhena sokova sallanti sokasallaṃ.
在“悲叹”的解说中,像“我的女儿,我的儿子”这样,一再地呼唤而哭泣,因此是“哀号”。一再地称述种种特征而哭泣,因此是“悲叹”。此后各有两个词,都是对前两种行相与状态的解说。“语”即言语。“虚语”即空洞、无意义的话语。由于话说一半、说错等而成为丑陋的虚语,便是“绮语”。“悲啼”即一再地言语。“悲啼行相”就是悲啼性。“已悲啼的状态”就是悲啼状态。显示巴利原文
Paridevaniddese ‘‘mayhaṃ dhītā, mayhaṃ putto’’ti evaṃ ādissa ādissa devanti rodanti etenāti ādevo. Taṃ taṃ vaṇṇaṃ parikittetvā parikittetvā devanti etenāti paridevo. Tato parāni dve dve padāni purimadvayasseva ākārabhāvaniddesavasena vuttāni. Vācāti vacanaṃ. Palāpoti tucchaṃ niratthakavacanaṃ. Upaḍḍhabhaṇitaaññabhaṇitādivasena virūpo palāpoti vippalāpo. Lālappoti punappunaṃ lapanaṃ. Lālappanākāro lālappanā. Lālappitassa bhāvo lālappitattaṃ.
在“苦”的解说中:因依止于身,故为“身性”。以不可意为义,名为“不可意”。以“身性”一词排遣心之不可意,以“不可意”一词排遣身之可意。其本身即是折磨,故称为“苦”,意思是:令它生起者处于苦。或者,仅就其为苦本身,故为苦。“身触所生”,即从身触而生。不可意、苦的感受——此即是:不可意的受,而非可意;苦的受,而非乐。此后三词以阴性词性宣说。不可意之受,非可意之受;苦之受,非乐之受——此即其义。那身性的、不可意的、苦的感受,那以身触为缘而生的不可意、苦之受——这便被称为“苦”。应如此连结而了知。显示巴利原文
Dukkhaniddese kāyanissitattā kāyikaṃ. Amadhuraṭṭhena asātaṃ. Kāyikapadena cetasikaasātaṃ paṭikkhipati, asātapadena kāyikasātaṃ. Tadeva dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ dukkhitaṃ karotīti attho. Dukkhamattā vā dukkhaṃ. Kāyasamphassajanti kāyasamphasse jātaṃ. Asātaṃ dukkhaṃ vedayitanti asātaṃ vedayitaṃ na sātaṃ, dukkhaṃ vedayitaṃ na sukhaṃ. Parato tīṇi padāni itthiliṅgavasena vuttāni. Asātā vedanā na sātā, dukkhā vedanā na sukhāti ayameva panettha attho. Yaṃ kāyikaṃ asātaṃ dukkhaṃ vedayitaṃ, yā kāyasamphassajā asātā dukkhā vedanā, idaṃ vuccati dukkhanti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
在“忧”的解说中:意为恶者,是为“意恶”;或因属低劣感受,心识鄙劣,故名为“意恶”。“意恶”的状态即是“忧”。因依止于心,故为“心性”。“心触所生”,即从心触而生。显示巴利原文
Domanassaniddese duṭṭhu manoti dummano, hīnavedanattā vā kucchitaṃ manoti dummano, dummanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Cittanissitattā cetasikaṃ. Cetosamphassajanti cittasamphasse jātaṃ.
在“恼”的解说中:以疲惫为义,名为“恼”。这是对陷入消沉、沮丧状态之心的疲惫的指称。更强的恼,名为“大恼”。被恼的状态,是为“恼性”。被大恼的状态,是为“大恼性”。显示巴利原文
Upāyāsaniddese āyāsanaṭṭhena āyāso. Saṃsīdanavisīdanākārappavattassa cittakilamathassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Balavaāyāso upāyāso. Āyāsitabhāvo āyāsitattaṃ. Upāyāsitabhāvo upāyāsitattaṃ.
在“怨憎会”的解释中:“于此(idha)”指此世间。“彼所有(yassa)”即他所有之物。“非其所寻(aniṭṭhā)”,即非他主动寻求的。无论被寻求与否,这都只是对不可意境(amanāpa-所缘)的称谓。于心中不喜(na kamanti)、不入(na pavisanti),故称“不可喜(akantā)”。于心中不爱(na appiyanti),或不增长其心(na manaṃ vaḍḍhenti),故称“不可意(amanāpā)”。“色等(rūpā)”等语,是显示它们各自的本性。欲求无义者,为“无义欲者(anatthakāmā)”。欲求无益者,为“无益欲者(ahitakāmā)”。欲求不安乐、欲求苦住者,为“不安乐欲者(aphāsukāmā)”。不希望他们获得由四轭而得的安稳、无畏之离系(涅槃),却希望他们处于有怖畏的轮回,即为“非离轭安稳欲者(ayogakkhemakāmā)”。再说,因为不希望他们获得信等增长的义……显示巴利原文
Appiyasampayoganiddese idhāti imasmiṃ loke. Yassāti ye assa. Aniṭṭhāti apariyesitā. Pariyesitā vā hontu apariyesitā vā, nāmamevetaṃ amanāpārammaṇānaṃ. Manasmiṃ na kamanti na pavisantīti akantā. Manasmiṃ na appiyanti, na vā manaṃ vaḍḍhentīti amanāpā. Rūpātiādi tesaṃ sabhāvanidassanaṃ. Anatthaṃ kāmenti icchantīti anatthakāmā. Ahitaṃ kāmenti icchantīti ahitakāmā. Aphāsuṃ dukkhavihāraṃ kāmenti icchantīti aphāsukāmā. Catūhi yogehi khemaṃ nibbhayaṃ vivaṭṭaṃ na kāmenti, sabhayaṃ vaṭṭameva nesaṃ kāmenti icchantīti ayogakkhemakāmā. Apica saddhādīnaṃ vuddhisaṅkhātassa atthassa akāmanato, tesaṃyeva hānisaṅkhātassa anatthassa ca kāmanato anatthakāmā. Saddhādīnaṃyeva upāyabhūtassa hitassa akāmanato, saddhāhāniādīnaṃ upāyabhūtassa ahitassa ca kāmanato ahitakāmā. Phāsuvihārassa akāmanato, aphāsuvihārassa ca kāmanato aphāsukāmā. Yassa kassaci nibbhayassa akāmanato, bhayassa ca kāmanato ayogakkhemakāmāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“会合(saṅgatī)”,是前往后而聚合。“来会(samāgamo)”,是因来者而聚合。“共处(samodhānaṃ)”,是在行住坐卧等中同在一起。“和合(missībhāvo)”,是一切事务的共同运作。这是依有情(satta)而作的解说。如果依诸行(saṅkhāra)来解说,则应取其所能得到的解释。然而,那个“怨憎会(appiyasampayoga)”,从胜义上讲并非单一的法,只因为它成为与怨憎会合者两种苦的所依处,才被称为“苦”。显示巴利原文
Saṅgatīti gantvā saṃyogo. Samāgamoti āgatehi saṃyogo. Samodhānanti ṭhānanisajjādīsu sahabhāvo. Missībhāvoti sabbakiccānaṃ sahakaraṇaṃ. Ayaṃ sattavasena yojanā. Saṅkhāravasena pana yaṃ labbhati, taṃ gahetabbaṃ. So pana appiyasampayogo atthato eko dhammo nāma natthi, kevalaṃ appiyasampayuttānaṃ duvidhassāpi dukkhassa vatthubhāvato dukkhoti vutto.
“爱别离”的解释,可依照前面所述的对反方式来理解。此处所说“母或”等,是为了具体显示那些是“欲求利益者(atthakāme)”。此中,珍爱(mamāyati)故为母(mātā),喜爱(piyāyati)故为父(pitā)。亲近(bhajati)故为兄弟(bhātā),姊妹(bhaginī)同理。慈爱(mettāyanti)故为友(mittā),或因推心置腹(minanti)于一切秘密之中,故为友。在应尽义务之事上同处共事,故为“同僚(amaccā)”。因知晓“此是我等之内亲”,或被知晓(ñāyanti),故为“亲戚(ñātī)”。因有共同的血缘,故为“血亲(sālohitā)”。父方的亲戚是 ñātī,母方的亲戚是 sālohitā。或者,父亲与母亲两方的亲戚是 ñātī,岳父母与公婆方的亲戚是 sālohitā。这个爱别离,从胜义上讲也并非单一的法,只因为它是爱别离者的两种苦的所依处,才被称为“苦”。以上是所有注释。显示巴利原文
Piyavippayoganiddeso vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo. Mātā vātiādi panettha atthakāme sarūpena dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha mamāyatīti mātā, piyāyatīti pitā. Bhajatīti bhātā, tathā bhaginī. Mettāyantīti mittā, minanti vā sabbaguyhesu anto pakkhipantīti mittā. Kiccakaraṇīyesu sahabhāvaṭṭhena amā hontīti amaccā. ‘‘Ayaṃ amhākaṃ ajjhattiko’’ti evaṃ jānanti, ñāyantīti vā ñātī. Lohitena sambandhāti sālohitā. Pitupakkhikā ñātī, mātupakkhikā sālohitā. Mātāpitupakkhikā vā ñātī, sassusasurapakkhikā sālohitā. Ayampi piyavippayogo atthato eko dhammo nāma natthi, kevalaṃ piyavippayuttānaṃ duvidhassāpi dukkhassa vatthubhāvato dukkhoti vutto. Idamettha sabbaaṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ. Saccānaṃ pana tathalakkhaṇattā sampayogavippayogavacanehi appiyapiyavatthūniyeva visesitānīti vattuṃ yujjatīti.
在解释“求不得”时:“有生法者”指具有生的性质、以生为本性的众生。“愿望”生起即是“渴爱”生起。“啊,愿我们”是希求之词。“成为”意思是“我们将会成为”。然而,这种事并非仅凭愿望就能获得的——也就是那种心愿:“啊,愿我们不成为有生法者,愿生不再降临于我们。”这种无生的状态,存在于已断除集的贤善者中,也存在于已般涅槃的圣者中——生已不再来。而这种所愿,对于希望者来说,若不修道则无法获得;对于不希求者,只要修道同样可以获得。因此,它被称为“非由愿望所能获得”。“此亦”中的“亦”字,是连带前面所述其余诸苦一起说的。显示巴利原文
Icchitālābhaniddese jātidhammānanti jātisabhāvānaṃ jātipakatikānaṃ. Icchā uppajjatīti taṇhā uppajjati. Aho vatāti patthanā. Assāmāti bhaveyyāma. Na kho panetaṃ icchāya pattabbanti yaṃ etaṃ ‘‘aho vata mayaṃ na jātidhammā assāma, na ca vata no jāti āgaccheyyā’’ti evaṃ pahīnasamudayesu sādhūsu vijjamānaṃ ajātidhammattaṃ parinibbutesu ca vijjamānaṃ jātiyā anāgamanaṃ icchitaṃ, taṃ icchantassāpi maggabhāvanāya vinā appattabbato, anicchantassāpi ca bhāvanāya pattabbato na icchāya pattabbaṃ nāma hoti. Idampīti etampi. Upari sesāni upādāya apisaddo.
在解释“取蕴”时:“seyyathidaṃ”是不变词,意为“哪些是那些呢?”色本身就是取蕴,故称“色取蕴”。对其余诸蕴,也依此类推。显示巴利原文
Upādānakkhandhaniddese seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa te katame iti ceti attho. Rūpameva upādānakkhandhoti rūpupādānakkhandho. Eseva nayo sesesupi.
集谛的解释显示巴利原文
Samudayasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
34 34. 在解释集谛时:所谓“那种爱”——指的就是那种爱。“后有性”:“后有”(punobhavo)即令再生的行为;因为具有后有的习性,故称“后有性”。又,这种爱能给予后有、导向后有,并在一次次的生存中令结生现起,所以称为“后有性”。不过,这种爱有时是后有的给予者,有时不是;有时导向后有,有时也不导向;又或者仅因已给予了结生,在生命所依方面而有微细的异熟,因此即便有这样三种情况,它都获得“后有性”这一名称。亦可读作“ponabbhavikā”,意义相同。“喜贪俱行”:是指这种爱与名为“喜”的贪俱行,换句话说,它于爱染中与喜贪合为一体。“处处欢喜者”:是什么意思呢?无论它在哪一处结生,就在那处遍生欢喜。或者,在色、声、香、味、触、法等所缘中,处处生起欢喜,也就是指喜欢色、喜欢声、喜欢香、喜欢味、喜欢触、喜欢法的人。也有读作“tatra tatrābhinandī”,意为处处欢喜。显示巴利原文
34. Samudayasaccaniddese yāyaṃ taṇhāti yā ayaṃ taṇhā. Ponobhavikāti punabbhavakaraṇaṃ punobhavo, punobhavo sīlamassāti ponobhavikā. Apica punabbhavaṃ deti, punabbhavāya saṃvattati, punappunaṃ bhave nibbattetīti ponobhavikā. Sā panesā punabbhavassa dāyikāpi atthi adāyikāpi, punabbhavāya saṃvattanikāpi atthi asaṃvattanikāpi, dinnāya paṭisandhiyā upadhivepakkamattāpi. Sā tippakārāpi ponobhavikāti nāmaṃ labhati. Ponabbhavikātipi pāṭho, soyevattho. Abhinandanasaṅkhātena nandirāgena saha gatāti nandirāgasahagatā. Nandirāgena saddhiṃ atthato ekattameva gatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatra tatrābhinandinīti yatra yatra attabhāvo nibbattati, tatra tatra abhinandinī. Rūpādīsu vā ārammaṇesu tatra tatrābhinandinī, rūpābhinandinī saddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbadhammābhinandinīti attho. Tatra tatrābhinandītipi pāṭho, tatra tatra abhinandayatīti attho. Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa sā katamā iti ceti attho. Kāmataṇhāti kāme taṇhā, pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bhavataṇhāti bhave taṇhā. Bhavapatthanāvasena uppannassa sassatadiṭṭhisahagatassa rāgassa rūpārūpabhavarāgassa ca jhānanikantiyā ca etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vibhavataṇhāti vibhave taṇhā. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
现在,为了详细显示那渴爱的所依处,而说“而那个……”等。其中,“生起”即产生。“安住”是指因持续转起而确立。当它生起时,于何处生起?安住时,又于何处安住?这便是其中的关联。所谓“世间中令人喜爱、令人愉悦的事物”,即是在世间中,其性质令人喜爱、令人甘甜之物。在“眼在世间”等经文中,由于对眼等执取为“我所”而深入执着的众生,安住于成就之中,他们随顺着取相:他们将眼净色想象得如同黄金天宫中敞开的宝石狮座一般清净;将耳想象得如同银制导水管或装饰的腰带绳;将获得“高鼻”之称的鼻,想象得如同旋转放置的雌黄圆环;将舌想象得如同红毛毯片,柔软、润滑、具足甘甜之味;将身想象得如同沙罗树干或黄金拱门;将意想象得与他人之心不同,极为广大;将色想象得如同金色翅子树花等的颜色;将声想象得如同陶醉的杜鹃、乌鸦的鸣叫,或柔和吹响的宝石笛声;对于自己所得的四种生起之香等所缘,他们也想着:“别人谁有这样的?”当他们这样想时,这些眼等便成为令人喜爱、令人愉悦的。于是,对此尚未生起的渴爱便生起,已生起的显示巴利原文
Idāni tassā taṇhāya vatthuṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ sā kho panesātiādimāha. Tattha uppajjatīti jāyati. Nivisatīti punappunaṃ pavattivasena patiṭṭhāti. Uppajjamānā kattha uppajjati, nivisamānā kattha nivisatīti sambandho. Yaṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpanti yaṃ lokasmiṃ piyasabhāvañceva madhurasabhāvañca. Cakkhu loketiādīsu lokasmiñhi cakkhuādīsu mamattena abhiniviṭṭhā sattā sampattiyaṃ patiṭṭhitā attano cakkhuṃ ādāsādīsu nimittaggahaṇānusārena vippasannaṃ pañcapasādaṃ suvaṇṇavimāne ugghāṭitamaṇisīhapañjaraṃ viya maññanti, sotaṃ rajatapanāḷikaṃ viya pāmaṅgasuttakaṃ viya ca maññanti, tuṅganāsāti laddhavohāraṃ ghānaṃ vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitaharitālavaṭṭiṃ viya maññanti, jivhaṃ rattakambalapaṭalaṃ viya mudusiniddhamadhurarasadaṃ maññanti, kāyaṃ sālalaṭṭhiṃ viya suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya ca maññanti, manaṃ aññesaṃ manena asadisaṃ uḷāraṃ maññanti, rūpaṃ suvaṇṇakaṇikārapupphādivaṇṇaṃ viya, saddaṃ mattakaravīkakokilamandadhamitamaṇivaṃsanigghosaṃ viya, attanā paṭiladdhāni catusamuṭṭhānikagandhārammaṇādīni ‘‘kassaññassa evarūpāni atthī’’ti maññanti, tesaṃ evaṃ maññamānānaṃ tāni cakkhādīni piyarūpāni ceva sātarūpāni ca honti. Atha nesaṃ tattha anuppannā ceva taṇhā uppajjati , uppannā ca punappunaṃ pavattivasena nivisati. Tasmā thero ‘‘cakkhu loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjatī’’tiādimāha. Tattha uppajjamānāti yadā uppajjati, tadā ettha uppajjatīti attho.
「灭谛」的说明注释显示巴利原文
Nirodhasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
在灭谛的说明中,对于“那即是此渴爱的”这句话,本应说作“那即是此苦的”,但由于苦唯有依集的灭而灭,并非依其他方式而灭。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Nirodhasaccaniddese yo tassāyeva taṇhāyāti ettha ‘‘yo tasseva dukkhassā’’ti vattabbe yasmā samudayanirodheneva dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, no aññathā. Yathāha –
犹如根基无损而坚牢,树虽被砍,仍可再生;
同样地,若随眠渴爱未根除,此苦便一再生起。”(《法句经》第338颂)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yathāpi mūle anupaddave daḷhe, chinnopi rukkho punareva rūhati; Evampi taṇhānusaye anūhate, nibbattatī dukkhamidaṃ punappuna’’nti. (dha. pa. 338);
因此,为了显示苦的灭,便通过显示集的灭来说明,故如此说。如来的行持犹如狮子,他们在灭苦与显示苦灭时,从因上下手,而不从果。外道的行持则如狗,他们在灭苦与显示苦灭时,以自我折磨的苦行等方式,从果上下手,而不从因。正因导师具备狮子般的说法风格,才直接从因入手,故说了“yo tassāyeva”等这段话。法将舍利弗也依随导师所说的次第而作解释。显示巴利原文
Tasmā taṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ dassento samudayanirodhena dassetuṃ evamāha. Sīhasamānavuttino hi tathāgatā, te dukkhaṃ nirodhentā dukkhanirodhañca dassentā hetumhi paṭipajjanti, na phale. Suvānavuttino pana aññatitthiyā , te dukkhaṃ nirodhentā dukkhanirodhañca dassentā attakilamathānuyogena ceva tasseva ca desanāya phale paṭipajjanti, na hetumhīti. Sīhasamānavuttitāya satthā hetumhi paṭipajjanto ‘‘yo tassāyevā’’tiādimāha. Dhammasenāpatipi satthārā vuttakkamenevāha.
其中,“tassāyeva taṇhāya”(即是那渴爱的)指的是:先前被说为“ponobhavikā”(能再生),并依欲爱等分类、依生起与安住方式在前文阐明的那一渴爱。“asesavirāganirodho”(无余离贪灭尽):“离贪”指圣道,因为经中说“由离贪而解脱”。由离贪所达成的灭,称为“离贪灭”;从彻底拔除随眠烦恼的意义上说,便是无余的离贪灭,即“无余离贪灭尽”。或者,“离贪”也可解释为断除,因此又可理解为:无余的离贪、无余的灭。然而,从义理上看,这些如“无余离贪灭尽”等的词语,皆是涅槃的同义词,因为究竟上苦灭圣谛就是涅槃。而由于依止涅槃,渴爱才无余地离贪、止息,所以被称为“tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho”(即是那渴爱的无余离贪灭尽)。依止涅槃,渴爱被舍离、彻底舍断、解脱而不执著;在诸欲乐的栖止处中,竟无丝毫栖止可得,因此涅槃得名“舍离”、“彻底舍断”、“解脱”、“[未完]显示巴利原文
Tattha tassāyeva taṇhāyāti yā sā taṇhā ‘‘ponobhavikā’’ti vatvā kāmataṇhādivasena vibhattā uppattinivesanavasena ca heṭṭhā pakāsitā, tassāyeva taṇhāya. Asesavirāganirodhoti virāgo vuccati maggo, ‘‘virāgā vimuccatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.245; saṃ. ni. 3.12; mahāva. 23) hi vuttaṃ. Virāgena nirodho virāganirodho, anusayasamugghātato aseso virāganirodho asesavirāganirodho. Atha vā virāgoti hi pahānaṃ vuccati, tasmā aseso virāgo aseso nirodhoti evampettha yojanā daṭṭhabbā. Atthato pana sabbāneva panetāni asesavirāganirodhotiādīni nibbānasseva vevacanāni. Paramatthato hi dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccanti nibbānaṃ vuccati. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma taṇhā asesā virajjati nirujjhati, tasmā taṃ ‘‘tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho’’ti vuccati. Nibbānañca āgamma taṇhā cajīyati paṭinissajjīyati muccati na allīyati, kāmaguṇālayesu cettha ekopi ālayo natthi, tasmā nibbānaṃ cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayoti vuccati. Ekameva hi nibbānaṃ, nāmāni panassa sabbasaṅkhatānaṃ nāmapaṭipakkhavasena anekāni honti. Seyyathidaṃ – asesavirāgo asesanirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo mohakkhayo taṇhākkhayo anuppādo appavattaṃ animittaṃ appaṇihitaṃ anāyūhanaṃ appaṭisandhi anupapatti agati ajātaṃ ajaraṃ abyādhi amataṃ asokaṃ aparidevaṃ anupāyāsaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhantiādīni.
为显示那已由圣道断除、依涅槃而不复转起的渴爱,在先前指出其生起的所依处中确已不存在,经文遂说“sā kho panesā”(而那个……)等。其中,譬如有人见田间生出苦瓜藤,便从顶端循根寻去,将它砍断。那藤蔓渐次枯萎,最终完全不可辨识。此时即可说,此田中的苦瓜已灭、已断。同样,田中的苦瓜好比存在于眼等处的渴爱。此渴爱被圣道彻底断根后,依涅槃而不复转起;住于此状态时,它在那些所依处中便如田中的苦瓜一般,不复显现。又如从林中捕得一群盗贼,在城南门处将他们处死,便可以说“林中的盗贼已死、已被杀”。同样,林中的盗贼喻如眼等处的渴爱;这些渴爱依涅槃,恰如盗贼在南门被处决,因其已于涅槃中灭尽,故说在涅槃中灭尽。如是灭尽后,它在那些所依处中便如林中的盗贼一般,不再显现。因此,为了表明它正是在这些处灭去的,便说:“cakkhu loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ [未完]显示巴利原文
Idāni maggena chinnāya nibbānaṃ āgamma appavattippattāyapi ca taṇhāya yesu vatthūsu tassā uppatti dassitā, tattheva abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ sā kho panesātiādimāha. Tattha yathā puriso khette jātaṃ tittakālābuvalliṃ disvā aggato paṭṭhāya mūlaṃ pariyesitvā chindeyya, sā anupubbena milāyitvā appaññattiṃ gaccheyya, tato tasmiṃ khette tittakālābu niruddhā pahīnāti vucceyya, evameva khette tittakālābu viya cakkhādīsu taṇhā. Sā ariyamaggena mūlacchinnā nibbānaṃ āgamma appavattiṃ gacchati. Evaṃ gatā pana tesu vatthūsu khette tittakālābu viya na paññāyati. Yathā ca aṭavito core ānetvā nagarassa dakkhiṇadvāre ghāteyyuṃ, tato aṭaviyaṃ corā matāti vā māritāti vā vucceyyuṃ, evameva aṭaviyaṃ corā viya yā cakkhādīsu taṇhā, sā dakkhiṇadvāre corā viya nibbānaṃ āgamma niruddhattā nibbāne niruddhā. Evaṃ niruddhā pana tesu vatthūsu aṭaviyaṃ corā viya na paññāyati. Tenassā tattheva nirodhaṃ dassento ‘‘cakkhu loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyatī’’tiādimāha. Atha vā taṇhuppādavatthussa pariññātattā pariññātavatthusmiṃ puna na uppajjanato anuppādanirodhavasena taṇhuppādavatthusmiṃyeva nirujjhatīti vuccati. Ettha ca uppajjanapaṭipakkhavasena pahīyatīti vuttaṃ, nivisanapaṭipakkhavasena nirujjhatīti.
道圣谛(道谛)解释的注释。显示巴利原文
Maggasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
在解释道谛时,「就是这个」是遮止其他道而作的定论(《分别论注》205)。「圣」:由于它远离各圣道所要断除的烦恼,能成就圣者的状态,也能得获圣果,故称为圣。具足八支,所以称「八支」。这个八支圣道,犹如四支的军队或五支的乐器,仅仅是诸支分的集合体;离此诸支,便别无所谓的「道」。显示巴利原文
Maggasaccaniddese ayamevāti aññamaggapaṭikkhepanatthaṃ niyamanaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 205). Ariyoti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi ārakattā, ariyabhāvakarattā, ariyaphalapaṭilābhakarattā ca ariyo. Aṭṭha aṅgāni assāti aṭṭhaṅgiko. Svāyaṃ caturaṅgikā viya senā, pañcaṅgikaṃ viya tūriyaṃ aṅgamattameva hoti, aṅgavinimutto natthi.
现在,为了表明“道唯是诸支分,离此诸支并无所谓之道”,便解说“正见……正定”等。其中,正见以正确观见为相;正思惟以正确安立为相;正语以正确摄持为相;正业以正确策起为相;正命以正确净化善为相;正精进以正确策励为相;正念以正确安住为相;正定以正确专注为相。每一支都有三种作用。例如:正见首先断除邪见及与它相违的其他烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,并如实遍观相应法而无有迷惑——这是通过消除覆盖这些相应法的愚痴而达成的。正思惟等其余支分,也以同样的方式断除邪思惟等,并以涅槃为所缘。不过,这里特别指出:正思惟将俱生法正确安立,正语正确摄持,正业正确策起,正命正确净化,正精进正确策励,正念正确安住,正定正确专注。显示巴利原文
Idāni aṅgamattameva maggo aṅgavinimutto natthīti dassento sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhītiādimāha. Tattha sammā dassanalakkhaṇā sammādiṭṭhi. Sammā abhiniropanalakkhaṇo sammāsaṅkappo. Sammā pariggahalakkhaṇā sammāvācā. Sammā samuṭṭhāpanalakkhaṇo sammākammanto. Sammā vodāpanalakkhaṇo sammāājīvo. Sammā paggahalakkhaṇo sammāvāyāmo. Sammā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇā sammāsati. Sammā samādhānalakkhaṇo sammāsamādhi. Tesu ekekassa tīṇi tīṇi kiccāni honti. Seyyathidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi tāva aññehipi attano paccanīkakilesehi saddhiṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ pajahati, nirodhañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca passati tappaṭicchādakamohavidhamanavasena asammohato. Sammāsaṅkappādayopi tatheva micchāsaṅkappādīni ca pajahanti, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karonti. Visesato panettha sammāsaṅkappo sahajātadhamme sammā abhiniropeti, sammāvācā sammā pariggaṇhāti, sammākammanto sammā samuṭṭhāpeti, sammāājīvo sammā vodāpeti, sammāvāyāmo sammā paggaṇhāti, sammāsati sammā upaṭṭhāpeti, sammāsamādhi sammā samādahati.
再者,这正见于道前分位时,有不同刹那、不同所缘;在道刹那则唯一刹那、同一所缘。从作用上来说,它获得“苦智”等四种名称。正思惟等,于道前分位同样有不同刹那、不同所缘,在道刹那则唯一刹那、同一所缘。其中,正思惟从作用上获得“出离思惟”等三种名称。正语等三支,在道前分位兼有远离与思,在道刹那则唯是远离。正精进与正念这两者,从作用上依四正勤与四念处而获得四种名称。至于正定,无论在道前分位还是道刹那,始终都是正定。显示巴利原文
Apicesā sammādiṭṭhi nāma pubbabhāge nānākkhaṇā nānārammaṇā hoti, maggakāle ekakkhaṇā ekārammaṇā. Kiccato pana ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādīni cattāri nāmāni labhati . Sammāsaṅkappādayopi pubbabhāge nānākkhaṇā nānārammaṇā honti, maggakāle ekakkhaṇā ekārammaṇā. Tesu sammāsaṅkappo kiccato nekkhammasaṅkappotiādīni tīṇi nāmāni labhati. Sammāvācādayo tayo pubbabhāge viratiyopi honti cetanāyopi, maggakkhaṇe pana viratiyoyeva. Sammāvāyāmo sammāsatīti idampi dvayaṃ kiccato sammappadhānasatipaṭṭhānavasena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Sammāsamādhi pana pubbabhāgepi maggakkhaṇepi sammāsamādhiyeva.
因此,在这八法中,世尊首先宣说正见,因为它对于为证得涅槃而修行的瑜伽行者帮助极大。正如经中所说,这正见被称为“慧灯、慧剑”(《法集论》16, 20, 29)。所以,在道前分位,以这称为观智的正见,破除无明黑暗,诛杀烦恼贼,瑜伽行者便能安稳地到达涅槃。故此,首先宣说正见。显示巴利原文
Iti imesu aṭṭhasu dhammesu bhagavatā nibbānādhigamāya paṭipannassa yogino bahūpakārattā paṭhamaṃ sammādiṭṭhi desitā. Ayañhi ‘‘paññāpajjoto paññāsattha’’nti (dha. sa. 16, 20, 29) ca vuttā. Tasmā etāya pubbabhāge vipassanāñāṇasaṅkhātāya sammādiṭṭhiyā avijjandhakāraṃ vidhamitvā kilesacore ghātento khemena yogāvacaro nibbānaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā paṭhamaṃ sammādiṭṭhi desitā.
正思惟对正见有大帮助,因此在正见之后随即宣说。如同金匠用手反复拨转钱币(kahāpaṇa)后,以眼观察,即能了知“这是假的,这是真的”;同样,瑜伽行者在道前分位,以思惟反复思惟后,用观慧来观察,便了知“这些法是欲界,这些是色界等”。又如木工接过他人抓住一端反复翻转后交给他的大树,用斧子砍削后用于制作;同样,瑜伽行者将经过思惟反复思惟后所交付的诸法,以智慧加以简别——“这些法是欲界,这些是色界等”,然后应用于修习。因此,正思惟在正见之后宣说。显示巴利原文
Sammāsaṅkappo pana tassā bahūpakāro. Tasmā tadanantaraṃ vutto. Yathā hi heraññiko hatthena parivattetvā parivattetvā cakkhunā kahāpaṇaṃ olokento ‘‘ayaṃ kūṭo ayaṃ cheko’’ti jānāti, evaṃ yogāvacaropi pubbabhāge vitakkena vitakketvā vitakketvā vipassanāpaññāya olokayamāno ‘‘ime dhammā kāmāvacarā, ime rūpāvacarādayo’’ti jānāti. Yathā vā pana purisena koṭiyaṃ gahetvā parivattetvā parivattetvā dinnaṃ mahārukkhaṃ tacchako vāsiyā tacchetvā kamme upaneti, evaṃ vitakkena vitakketvā vitakketvā dinnadhamme yogāvacaro paññāya ‘‘ime dhammā kāmāvacarā, ime rūpāvacarā’’tiādinā nayena paricchinditvā kamme upaneti. Tasmā sammāsaṅkappo sammādiṭṭhānantaraṃ vutto.
这个正思惟,正如它对正见有帮助一样,对正语也同样有帮助。正如世尊所说:“居士,先思惟、推度之后,才说出言语”(《中部尼迦耶》1.463)。所以,在正思惟之后宣说正语。显示巴利原文
Svāyaṃ yathā sammādiṭṭhiyā, evaṃ sammāvācāyapi upakārako. Yathāha – ‘‘pubbe kho, gahapati, vitakketvā vicāretvā pacchā vācaṃ bhindatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.463). Tasmā tadanantaraṃ sammāvācā vuttā.
又因为世人通常是先用言语说“我要做这个、做那个”,先用语言安排妥当,再付诸身行,所以语言是身业的助缘。因此,在正语之后宣说正业。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana ‘‘idañcidañca karissāmā’’ti paṭhamaṃ vācāya saṃvidahitvā loke kammante payojenti, tasmā vācā kāyakammassa upakārikāti sammāvācāya anantaraṃ sammākammanto vutto.
再者,只有断除了四种语恶行与三种身恶行,并圆满此二善行的人,才能成就命第八戒(ājīvaṭṭhamakasīla),否则便不能成就。因此,在正语与正业之后宣说正命。显示巴利原文
Catubbidhaṃ pana vacīduccaritaṃ, tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ pahāya ubhayaṃ sucaritaṃ pūrentasseva yasmā ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ pūrati, na itarassa , tasmā tadubhayānantaraṃ sammāājīvo vutto.
然而,获得了如此清净活命的人,不应以“我的活命已清净”为满足,便放逸懈怠度日;而应在一切行住坐卧的威仪中策励精进。为显示此义,在那之后宣说正精进。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ visuddhājīvena pana ‘‘parisuddho me ājīvo’’ti ettāvatā paritosaṃ katvā suttappamattena viharituṃ na yuttaṃ, atha kho sabbairiyāpathesu idaṃ vīriyamārabhitabbanti dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ sammāvāyāmo vutto.
为了表明:即便已激发精进,也应在身等四种所依处善巧安立念,因此在正精进之后紧接着便说了「正念」。显示巴利原文
Tato āraddhavīriyenāpi kāyādīsu catūsu vatthūsu sati sūpaṭṭhitā kātabbāti dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ sammāsati vuttā.
然而,由于如此善巧安立的念,在探明哪些法有助于定、哪些法无助于定的趋向之后,便能令心专注于一所缘,因此应当了知:在正念之后随即说了「正定」。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana evaṃ sūpaṭṭhitāya satiyā samādhissa upakārānupakārānaṃ dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesitvā pahoti ekattārammaṇe cittaṃ samādhātuṃ, tasmā sammāsatianantaraṃ sammāsamādhi vuttoti veditabboti.
在正见的解说中,以「苦智」等语显示了四谛业处。其中,前二谛是流转,后二谛是还灭。对此,比丘在流转二谛上有业处的倾向,于还灭二谛则无倾向。因为前二谛——以「五蕴是苦,爱是集」这样简要的方式,以及以「何等为五蕴?色蕴……」等详细方式,瑜伽行者从师长处学习后,反复以言语念诵,依此修习业处。然而对于后二谛——「灭谛是可爱、可喜、可意的,道谛是可爱、可喜、可意的」——则仅由听闻而修习业处。他如此修习,便以一次证悟证得四谛,以一次现观而现观。他以遍知证悟证悟苦,以断证悟证悟集,以作证证悟证悟灭,以修证证悟证悟道。他以遍知现观现观苦……以修现观现观道。显示巴利原文
Sammādiṭṭhiniddese ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādinā catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ dassitaṃ. Tattha purimāni dve saccāni vaṭṭaṃ, pacchimāni dve vivaṭṭaṃ. Tesu bhikkhuno vaṭṭe kammaṭṭhānābhiniveso hoti, vivaṭṭe natthi abhiniveso. Purimāni hi dve saccāni ‘‘pañcakkhandhā dukkhaṃ, taṇhā samudayo’’ti evaṃ saṅkhepena ca, ‘‘katame pañcakkhandhā? Rūpakkhandho’’tiādinā nayena vitthārena ca ācariyasantike uggaṇhitvā vācāya punappunaṃ parivattento yogāvacaro kammaṃ karoti. Itaresu pana dvīsu saccesu ‘‘nirodhasaccaṃ iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ manāpaṃ, maggasaccaṃ iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ manāpa’’nti evaṃ savaneneva kammaṃ karoti. So evaṃ kammaṃ karonto cattāri saccāni ekapaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, ekābhisamayena abhisameti. Dukkhaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, samudayaṃ pahānapaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati. Nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, maggaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati. Dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena…pe… maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti.
如此,在前行阶段,他对前二谛通过学习、遍问、听闻、忆持、遍察而证悟;对后二谛则仅有听闻的证悟。在后期阶段,对苦、集、道实现作用的证悟,对灭则实现所缘的证悟。其中,一切证悟智都是出世间的,而听闻、忆持、遍察的智则属于世间欲界。省察智虽属于已证得真理者,然此人仍是初学者,故在此未提。这位比丘在通达之前,并没有“我遍知苦,我断集,我证灭,我修道”的转向、等引、作意与省察;通达之后方有。在后期阶段,苦谛确已被遍知……道谛确已被修习。显示巴利原文
Evamassa pubbabhāge dvīsu saccesu uggahaparipucchāsavanadhāraṇasammasanapaṭivedho hoti, dvīsu savanapaṭivedhoyeva. Aparabhāge tīsu kiccato paṭivedho hoti nirodhe ārammaṇapaṭivedho. Tattha sabbampi paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ, savanadhāraṇasammasanañāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ kāmāvacaraṃ. Paccavekkhaṇā pana pattasaccassa hoti, ayañca ādikammiko. Tasmā sā idha na vuttā. Imassa ca bhikkhuno pubbe pariggahato ‘‘dukkhaṃ parijānāmi, samudayaṃ pajahāmi, nirodhaṃ sacchikaromi, maggaṃ bhāvemī’’ti ābhogasamannāhāramanasikārapaccavekkhaṇā natthi, pariggahato paṭṭhāya hoti. Aparabhāge pana dukkhaṃ pariññātameva hoti…pe… maggo bhāvitova hoti.
其中,二谛因难见而甚深,二谛因甚深而难见。苦谛依生起而言极其明显,比如被树桩、荆棘刺伤时,也会说“啊,真苦”。集谛依想吃、想喝等生起而言也是明显的。然而,从相的证悟来观察,二者皆甚深。因此,这二谛是因难见而甚深。要见到后二谛,为此所付出的努力,就如同为触及有顶天而伸手、为触及无间地狱而伸脚,又如同将一根分成百份的毛发尖端与另一根毛发尖端对接一般。因此,后二谛是因甚深而难见。如此,对于这些因难见而甚深、因甚深而难见的四谛,通过学得等方式生起的前行智,在此被说为“苦智”等。然而,在证悟的刹那,唯有一种智。显示巴利原文
Tattha dve saccāni duddasattā gambhīrāni, dve gambhīrattā duddasāni. Dukkhasaccañhi uppattito pākaṭaṃ, khāṇukaṇṭakappahārādīsu ‘‘aho dukkha’’nti vattabbatampi āpajjati. Samudayasaccaṃ khāditukāmatābhuñjitukāmatādivasena uppattito pākaṭaṃ. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhato pana ubhayampi gambhīraṃ. Iti tāni duddasattā gambhīrāni. Itaresaṃ pana dvinnaṃ dassanatthāya payogo bhavaggaggahaṇatthaṃ hatthapasāraṇaṃ viya, avīciphusanatthaṃ pādapasāraṇaṃ viya, satadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭipaṭipādanaṃ viya ca hoti. Iti tāni gambhīrattā duddasāni. Evaṃ duddasattā gambhīresu gambhīrattā ca duddasesu catūsu saccesu uggahādivasena pubbabhāgañāṇuppattiṃ sandhāya idaṃ ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭivedhakkhaṇe pana ekameva taṃ ñāṇaṃ hoti.
另有人说:四谛有四种智——闻所成智、确定智、遍察智、现观智。什么是闻所成智?或简或详地听闻四谛后,了知“此是苦,此是集,此是灭,此是道”。这即是闻所成智。什么是确定智?他审察所听闻的意义,从法与相的角度,确定“这些法属于此谛,此谛具有此相”。这即是确定智。什么是遍察智?他如此次第确定四谛后,便唯独取苦,在种姓智之前,以无常、苦、无我而遍察。这即是遍察智。什么是现观智?在出世间道的刹那,以一种智无前无后地现观四谛,即“以遍知现观现观苦,以断现观现观集,以作证现观现观灭,以修现观现观道”。这即是现观智。显示巴利原文
Apare panāhu – catubbidhaṃ saccesu ñāṇaṃ sutamayañāṇaṃ vavatthānañāṇaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ abhisamayañāṇanti. Tattha katamaṃ sutamayañāṇaṃ? Saṃkhittena vā vitthārena vā cattāri saccāni sutvā jānāti ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ayaṃ samudayo, ayaṃ nirodho, ayaṃ maggo’’ti. Idaṃ sutamayañāṇaṃ. Katamaṃ vavatthānañāṇaṃ? So sutānaṃ atthaṃ upaparikkhati dhammato ca lakkhaṇato ca, ‘‘ime dhammā imasmiṃ sacce pariyāpannā, imassa saccassa idaṃ lakkhaṇa’’nti sanniṭṭhānaṃ karoti. Idaṃ vavatthānañāṇaṃ. Katamaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ? So evaṃ yathānupubbaṃ cattāri saccāni vavatthapetvā atha dukkhameva gahetvā yāva gotrabhuñāṇaṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato sammasati. Idaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ. Katamaṃ abhisamayañāṇaṃ? Lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe ekena ñāṇena cattāri saccāni apubbaṃ acarimaṃ abhisameti ‘‘dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena, samudayaṃ pahānābhisamayena, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayena maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisametī’’ti. Idaṃ abhisamayañāṇanti.
在正思惟的解说中:‘出离思惟’即是从欲出离的思惟;‘无嗔思惟’即是从嗔恨出离的思惟;‘无害思惟’即是从害出离的思惟。其中,出离寻生起时,能摧毁、截断欲寻;无嗔寻生起时,能摧毁、截断嗔恚寻;无害寻生起时,能摧毁、截断害寻。同样地,出离寻、无嗔寻、无害寻,皆是作为欲寻、嗔恚寻、害寻的对立面而生起的。显示巴利原文
Sammāsaṅkappaniddese kāmato nissaṭoti nekkhammasaṅkappo. Byāpādato nissaṭoti abyāpādasaṅkappo. Vihiṃsāya nissaṭoti avihiṃsāsaṅkappo. Tattha nekkhammavitakko kāmavitakkassa padaghātaṃ padacchedaṃ karonto uppajjati, abyāpādavitakko byāpādavitakkassa, avihiṃsāvitakko vihiṃsāvitakkassa. Tathā nekkhammaabyāpādaavihiṃsāvitakkā kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāvitakkānaṃ paccanīkā hutvā uppajjanti.
其中,瑜伽行者为了摧毁欲寻,或遍察欲寻,或遍察其他某一行。当他的观刹那生起时,与观相应的思惟,便以彼分断的方式,摧毁、截断欲寻而生起;策励观之后,便导入圣道。随后,在他的道刹那,与道相应的思惟,便以正断的方式,摧毁、截断欲寻而生起。为了摧毁嗔恚寻,他也遍察嗔恚寻或其他某一行;为了摧毁害寻,遍察害寻或其他某一行。如是,于其观刹那等,一切皆应如前所述之理贯通。显示巴利原文
Tattha yogāvacaro kāmavitakkassa padaghātanatthaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ vā sammasati aññaṃ vā pana kiñci saṅkhāraṃ. Athassa vipassanākkhaṇe vipassanāsampayutto saṅkappo tadaṅgavasena kāmavitakkassa padaghātaṃ padacchedaṃ karonto uppajjati, vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā maggaṃ pāpeti. Athassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayutto saṅkappo samucchedavasena kāmavitakkassa padaghātaṃ padacchedaṃ karonto uppajjati. Byāpādavitakkassapi padaghātanatthaṃ byāpādavitakkaṃ vā aññaṃ vā saṅkhāraṃ, vihiṃsāvitakkassa padaghātanatthaṃ vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vā aññaṃ vā saṅkhāraṃ sammasati. Athassa vipassanākkhaṇeti sabbaṃ purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.
不过,对于欲寻等这三种寻思,在经中所示的三八所缘中,确实没有任何一种业处不是它们的对立面。然而,就决定性而言:对于欲寻,在不净所缘中,唯有初禅是它的直接对立面;对于嗔恚寻,在修习慈心时,三禅或四禅是它的对立面;对于害寻,在修习悲心时,三禅或四禅是它的对立面。因此,一位修习不净业处并证入禅那的人,在安止定的那个刹那,与禅那相应的寻,是以镇伏的方式,作为欲寻的对立面而生起的;以禅那为近因,进而修习观禅的人,在观的刹那,与观相应的思惟,是以彼分断的方式,作为欲寻的对立面而生起的;策励观禅、导向道果的人,在道的刹那,与道相应的思惟,是以正断的方式,作为欲寻的对立面而生起的。当知,如此生起者,即名为‘出离思惟’。显示巴利原文
Kāmavitakkādīnaṃ pana tiṇṇampi pāḷiyaṃ vibhattesu aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesu ekakammaṭṭhānampi apaccanīkaṃ nāma natthi. Ekantato pana kāmavitakkassa tāva asubhesu paṭhamajjhānameva paccanīkaṃ, byāpādavitakkassa mettāya tikacatukkajjhānāni, vihiṃsaāvitakkassa karuṇāya tikacatukkajjhānāni. Tasmā asubhaparikammaṃ katvā jhānaṃ samāpannassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānasampayutto vitakko vikkhambhanavasena kāmavitakkassa paccanīko hutvā uppajjati, jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapentassa vipassanākkhaṇe vipassanāsampayutto saṅkappo tadaṅgavasena kāmavitakkassa paccanīko hutvā uppajjati, vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā maggaṃ pāpentassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayutto saṅkappo samucchedavasena kāmavitakkassa paccanīko hutvā uppajjati. Evaṃ uppanno nekkhammasaṅkappoti vuccatīti veditabbo.
同样地,修习慈心业处之后进入禅那,以及修习悲心业处之后进入禅那的情形,皆应依前面所述的方式类推。应知,如此生起的心,即名为‘无嗔思惟’,亦称‘无害思惟’。如是,这些出离思惟等,因依观与禅那而生起的方式有别,故于预备阶段各自不同;然而在道刹那,对于前此三种情形所生起的不善思惟,圣道以正断之、令不复起的方式圆满道支,彼时唯有一善思惟生起,此即名为‘正思惟’。显示巴利原文
Mettāya pana parikammaṃ katvā, karuṇāya parikammaṃ katvā jhānaṃ samāpannassāti sabbaṃ purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ uppanno abyāpādasaṅkappoti vuccati, avihiṃsāsaṅkappoti vuccatīti veditabbo. Evamete nekkhammasaṅkappādayo vipassanājhānavasena uppattīnaṃ nānattā pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana imesu tīsu ṭhānesu uppannassa akusalasaṅkappassa padacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamāno ekova kusalasaṅkappo uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāsaṅkappo nāma.
在‘正语’的解说中,由于以不同的心远离妄语,又以不同的心远离离间语等,因此这四种远离在预备阶段是各异的;然而在道刹那,对于被称为‘邪语’的四种不善坏戒之思,圣道以截断之、令不复起的方式圆满道支,那时唯有一种善的远离——即所谓‘正语’——生起。这就叫做‘正语’。显示巴利原文
Sammāvācāniddesepi yasmā aññeneva cittena musāvādā viramati, aññena aññena pisuṇāvācādīhi, tasmā catassopetā veramaṇiyo pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana micchāvācāsaṅkhātāya catubbidhāya akusaladussīlyacetanāya padacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva sammāvācāsaṅkhātā kusalaveramaṇi uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāvācā nāma.
在‘正业’的解说中,由于以不同的心远离杀生,以不同的心远离不与取,又以不同的心远离邪淫,因此这三种远离在预备阶段是各异的;然而在道刹那,对于被称为‘邪业’的三种不善坏戒之思,圣道以截断之、令不复起的方式圆满道支,那时唯有一种善的远离——即所谓‘正业’——生起。这就叫做‘正业’。显示巴利原文
Sammākammantaniddesepi yasmā aññeneva cittena pāṇātipātā viramati, aññena adinnādānā, aññena micchācārā, tasmā tissopetā veramaṇiyo pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana micchākammantasaṅkhātāya tividhāya akusaladussīlyacetanāya padacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva sammākammantasaṅkhātā kusalaveramaṇi uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammākammanto nāma.
在「正命」的解释里,「于此」是指在这教法之中。「圣弟子」是指圣者佛陀的弟子。「断除邪命」是指断除了邪恶的谋生方式。「以正命」是指以佛陀所赞叹的善的谋生方式。「维持生活」是指维持生命的延续过程。在这里,因为用一种心去远离通过身门违犯的行为,用另一种心去远离通过语门违犯的行为,所以在预备阶段,它们是在不同时刻生起的。然而在道刹那,圣道通过断除依身门、语门以及七种业道而生起的邪命坏戒之思的因,令它们不再生起,从而圆满道支。这时,唯有一种善的远离,也就是所谓的「正命」生起。这就叫做「正命」。显示巴利原文
Sammāājīvaniddese idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Ariyasāvakoti ariyassa buddhassa sāvako. Micchāājīvaṃ pahāyāti pāpakaṃ ājīvaṃ pajahitvā. Sammāājīvenāti buddhappasatthena kusalaājīvena. Jīvikaṃ kappetīti jīvitappavattiṃ pavatteti. Idhāpi yasmā aññeneva cittena kāyadvāravītikkamā viramati, aññeneva vacīdvāravītikkamā, tasmā pubbabhāge nānākkhaṇesu uppajjati, maggakkhaṇe pana dvīsu dvāresu sattannaṃ kammapathānaṃ vasena uppannāya micchāājīvadussīlyacetanāya padacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva sammāājīvasaṅkhātā kusalaveramaṇi uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāājīvo nāma.
在「正精进」的解释里,「于此,比丘」是指在这教法中修行的比丘。「未生」是指尚未生起的。「诸恶」是指那些低劣的。「不善法」是指那些从不善巧而生起的法。「为令不生」是指为了不使它们生起的目的。「生起欲」是指生起并引发想要去做的善法欲,也就是善的意欲。「策励」是指发起精勤,作出努力。「发勤精进」是指发动身、心的精进。「策心」是指用那同时生起的精进力将心提振起来。「精勤」是指作出勇猛的精进。按照顺序,这四句话应结合修习、修持、多修、持续不间断地精进来理解。显示巴利原文
Sammāvāyāmaniddese idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane paṭipannako bhikkhu. Anuppannānanti anibbattānaṃ. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Akusalānaṃ dhammānanti akosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Anuppādāyāti na uppādanatthāya. Chandaṃ janetīti kattukamyatāsaṅkhātaṃ kusalacchandaṃ janeti uppādeti. Vāyamatīti payogaṃ janeti parakkamaṃ karoti. Vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti kāyikaṃ cetasikaṃ vīriyaṃ karoti. Cittaṃ paggaṇhātīti teneva sahajātavīriyena cittaṃ ukkhipati. Padahatīti padhānavīriyaṃ karoti. Paṭipāṭiyā panetāni cattāripi padāni āsevanābhāvanābahulīkammasātaccakiriyāhi yojetabbāni.
「已生」是指那些已经从「未生」状态生起的法。「为断除」是指为了断除它们的目的。「未生诸善法」是指尚未生起的、从善巧而生起的法。「为令生起」是指为了令它们生起的目的。「已生」是指已经生起的善法。「为令住立」是指为了让它稳固安住的目的。「为令不忘失」是指为了不遗忘、不消逝的目的。「为令倍复增长」是指为了一次又一次地重复修习。「为令广大」是指为了达到广大的状态。「为令修习」是指为了让善法增长。「为令圆满」是指为了达到完全圆满的目的。显示巴利原文
Uppannānanti anuppannānanti avattabbataṃ āpannānaṃ. Pahānāyāti pajahanatthāya. Anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānanti anibbattānaṃ kosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Uppādāyāti uppādanatthāya. Uppannānanti nibbattānaṃ. Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthāya. Asammosāyāti anassanatthaṃ. Bhiyyobhāvāyāti punappunaṃ bhāvāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Bhāvanāyāti vaḍḍhiyā. Pāripūriyāti paripūraṇatthāya.
这些名为正精进的四正勤,在预备阶段为世间,在道刹那则为出世间。然在道刹那,唯有一种精进,因成就四种功用而得四种名称。此处,世间四正勤应依《迦叶相应》中所说之理而了知。正如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Ete pana sammāvāyāmasaṅkhātā cattāro sammappadhānā pubbabhāge lokiyā, maggakkhaṇe lokuttarā. Maggakkhaṇe pana ekameva vīriyaṃ catukiccasādhanavasena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Tattha lokiyā kassapasaṃyutte vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Vuttañhi tattha –
“贤友,有四正勤。何等为四?贤友,此处,有比丘为令我未生之恶不善法不生,‘若生起,则致不利’,如是发起精勤;为断除我已生之恶不善法,‘若不断,则致不利’,如是发起精勤;为令我未生之善法生起,‘若未生,则致不利’,如是发起精勤;为令我已生之善法不失,‘若灭去,则致不利’,如是发起精勤。”(《相应部》2.145)显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattārome , āvuso, sammappadhānā; Katame cattāro? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu ‘anuppannā me pāpakā akusalā dhammā uppajjamānā anatthāya saṃvatteyyu’nti ātappaṃ karoti, ‘uppannā me pāpakā akusalā dhammā appahīyamānā anatthāya saṃvatteyyu’nti ātappaṃ karoti, ‘anuppannā me kusalā dhammā anuppajjamānā anatthāya saṃvatteyyu’nti ātappaṃ karoti, ‘uppannā me kusalā dhammā nirujjhamānā anatthāya saṃvatteyyu’nti ātappaṃ karotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.145);
此处,‘未生’是指尚未表现为现行,或尚未以所缘被经验。否则,于无始轮回中,实无从未生起之恶不善法;然而,所谓‘未生’,是说当它们生起时,正是这些法生起;当被断除时,正是这些法被断除。显示巴利原文
Tattha ca anuppannāti asamudācāravasena vā ananubhūtārammaṇavasena vā anuppannā. Aññathā hi anamatagge saṃsāre anuppannā pāpakā akusalā dhammā nāma natthi, anuppannā pana uppajjamānāpi eteyeva uppajjanti, pahīyamānāpi eteyeva pahīyanti.
其中,有比丘由履行义务、研读经典、受持头陀支、修习定、修习观、从事新作等其中某一种因缘,烦恼便不现行。具体如何呢?有比丘精勤于履行义务,当他行持八十项犍度义务、十四种大义务,乃至打扫塔院、菩提树院、饮水台、布萨堂,迎送客比丘等种种义务时,烦恼便无有机缘。然而到后来,他若抛弃这些义务,像不守护律仪者那样过活,由于不如理作意、忘失正念,烦恼就会生起。如此,从尚未现行的意义上,这便称为‘未生者生起’。显示巴利原文
Tattha ekaccassa vattaganthadhutaṅgasamādhivipassanānavakammabhavānaṃ aññataravasena kilesā na samudācaranti. Kathaṃ? Ekacco hi vattasampanno hoti, asīti khandhakavattāni cuddasa mahāvattāni cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇapānīyamāḷakauposathāgāraāgantukagamikavattāni ca karontasseva kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa vattāni vissajjetvā bhinnavattassa carato ayonisomanasikāraṃ sativossaggañca āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有比丘致力于经典学习,受持一部、两部、三部、四部乃至五部尼迦耶。当他依义理、依文句、依前后连贯、依上下文次第,去把握、背诵、思惟、朗读、讲说、开示三藏佛语时,烦恼便无有机缘。然而到后来,他若搁置经典学习,像懈怠之人那样过活,由于不如理作意、忘失正念,烦恼就会生起。如此,从尚未现行的意义上,这便称为‘未生者生起’。显示巴利原文
Ekacco ganthayutto hoti, ekampi nikāyaṃ gaṇhāti dvepi tayopi cattāropi pañcapi. Tassa tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ atthavasena pāḷivasena anusandhivasena pubbāparavasena gaṇhantassa sajjhāyantassa cintentassa vācentassa desentassa pakāsentassa kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa ganthakammaṃ pahāya kusītassa carato ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
另有比丘是头陀支的受持者,他笃实守护十三头陀支的功德。当他这样护持头陀支功德时,烦恼便无有机缘。然而到后来,他若舍弃头陀支,转而顺随奢华安逸而生活,由于不如理作意、忘失正念,烦恼就会生起。如此,从尚未现行的意义上,那些原本未生起的烦恼,即称为‘生起’。显示巴利原文
Ekacco pana dhutaṅgadharo hoti, terasa dhutaṅgaguṇe samādāya vattati, tassa dhutaṅgaguṇe pariharantassa kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa dhutaṅgāni vissajjetvā bāhullāya āvattassa carato ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有一类人于八等至中修习纯熟、具足自在,当他依初禅等的转向自在等力而住时,烦恼无隙可乘。然而后来,当他退失禅那或放舍禅那,转而沉溺于谈论等事而住时,由于不如理作意与失念,烦恼便生起。如此,也是就尚未现行的意义,说未生起的烦恼为‘生起’。显示巴利原文
Ekacco aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu ciṇṇavasī hoti, tassa paṭhamajjhānādīsu āvajjanavasīādīnaṃ vasena viharantassa kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa parihīnajjhānassa vā vissaṭṭhajjhānassa vā bhassādīsu anuyuttassa viharato ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有一类人是修观者,他精勤修习七种随观或十八种大观而住。当他如此安住时,烦恼无隙可乘。然而后来,当他舍弃观业,多行强身之事而住时,由于不如理作意与失念,烦恼便生起。如此,也是就尚未现行的意义,说未生起的烦恼为‘生起’。显示巴利原文
Ekacco pana vipassako hoti, sattasu vā anupassanāsu (paṭi. ma. 3.35) aṭṭhārasasu vā mahāvipassanāsu (paṭi. ma. 1.22) kammaṃ karonto viharati, tassa evaṃ viharato kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa vipassanākammaṃ pahāya kāyadaḷhībahulassa viharato ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有一类人是做营造事的,他建造布萨堂、食堂等。当他思量这些工程的资具时,烦恼无隙可乘。然而后来,当这些营造事业已完成或放舍后,由于不如理作意与失念,烦恼便生起。如此,也是就尚未现行的意义,说未生起的烦恼为‘生起’。显示巴利原文
Ekacco navakammiko hoti, uposathāgārabhojanasālādīni karoti , tassa tesaṃ upakaraṇāni cintentassa kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa navakamme niṭṭhite vā vissaṭṭhe vā ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有些人是从梵天世界而来的清净众生,由于没有习行,烦恼得不到机会。但后来当他得到习行机会时,由于不如理作意与失念,烦恼便生起。这样,也是从不曾现行的角度,说明未生的烦恼得以生起。以上,首先应知:以尚未现行来说,即名为“未生起”。显示巴利原文
Ekacco pana brahmalokato āgato suddhasatto hoti, tassa anāsevanāya kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa laddhāsevanassa ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma. Evaṃ tāva asamudācāravasena anuppannatā veditabbā.
如何是以未曾经验的所缘的方式?在此,有人获得了未曾经验的、可意等不同所缘,对于该所缘,由于不如理作意与失念,贪等烦恼便生起。以此方式,未生起的烦恼称为“生起”。如此,见到未生的不善法生起将对自己造成无义后,为了令它们不生起,便致力于修习念处,修习第一正勤;而在那些不善法已生起后,见到若不将它们断除也会对自己造成无义,因此为了断除它们,同样地修习第二正勤。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ ananubhūtārammaṇavasena? Idhekacco ananubhūtapubbaṃ manāpikādibhedaṃ ārammaṇaṃ labhati, tassa tattha ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma rāgādayo kilesā uppajjanti. Evaṃ ananubhūtārammaṇavasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma. Evaṃ anuppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ uppāde sati attano anatthaṃ passitvā tesaṃ anuppādāya satipaṭṭhānabhāvanānuyogena paṭhamaṃ sammappadhānaṃ bhāveti, uppannesu pana tesu tesaṃ appahānato attano anatthaṃ passitvā tesaṃ pahānāya dutiyaṃ tatheva sammappadhānaṃ bhāveti.
“未生起的善法”,是指止、观以及道。见到它们尚未生起对自己是一种无义,为了令其生起,同样地修习第三正勤。“已生起的善法”,则唯独是指止与观。然而,道只生起一次,在灭去时并不会导致无义,因为它在给予了果的缘之后才灭去。见到止与观若已生起后又灭去,会对自己造成无义,为了让它们得以安住,同样地修习第四正勤。然而,在出世间道的刹那,实际上只有一种精进。显示巴利原文
Anuppannā kusalā dhammāti samathavipassanā ceva maggo ca. Tesaṃ anuppāde attano anatthaṃ passitvā tesaṃ uppādanatthāya tatheva tatiyaṃ sammappadhānaṃ bhāveti. Uppannā kusalā dhammāti samathavipassanāva. Maggo pana sakiṃ uppajjitvā nirujjhamāno anatthāya saṃvattanako nāma natthi. So hi phalassa paccayaṃ datvāva nirujjhati. Tāsaṃ samathavipassanānaṃ nirodhato attano anatthaṃ passitvā tāsaṃ ṭhitiyā tatheva catutthaṃ sammappadhānaṃ bhāveti. Lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekameva vīriyaṃ.
那些未生起而有可能生起的,通过如此令它们确实不生起,便成就了令未生起的不生起之责,以及令已生起的断除之责。此处所说的“已生起”,有四种已生起:现在已生起、已过去已生起、得机会已生起、得地已生起。其中,一切正经历生、老、灭的有为法,称为“现在已生起”。善与不善的心,在经验了所缘的作用之后灭去,称为“经历后过去”;其余有为法尚未经历生、老、灭三时便即灭去,称为“未经历过去”,这两种合称为“已过去已生起”。如同“凡是他以前所作的诸业”等经中所说的那种业,虽已过去,但因为排斥了其他果报、为自己的果报制造了机会并保持着,这种已制造机会的业,以及被制造了机会的果报——果报虽尚未生起,但在如此制造的机会中必将生起,即称为“得机会已生起”。在各种地当中,那些未被拔除的不善法,称为“得地已生起”。显示巴利原文
Ye evaṃ anuppannā uppajjeyyuṃ, te yathā neva uppajjanti, evaṃ tesaṃ anuppannānaṃ anuppādakiccaṃ, uppannānañca pahānakiccaṃ sādheti. Uppannāti cettha catubbidhaṃ uppannaṃ vattamānuppannaṃ bhūtāpagatuppannaṃ okāsakatuppannaṃ bhūmiladdhuppannanti. Tattha sabbampi uppādajarābhaṅgasamaṅgisaṅkhātaṃ vattamānuppannaṃ nāma. Ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavitvā niruddhaṃ anubhūtāpagatasaṅkhātaṃ kusalākusalaṃ uppādādittayamanuppatvā niruddhaṃ bhutvāpagatasaṅkhātaṃ sesasaṅkhatañca bhūtāpagatuppannaṃ nāma. ‘‘Yānissa tāni pubbe katāni kammānī’’ti evamādinā (ma. ni. 3.248) nayena vuttaṃ kammaṃ atītampi samānaṃ aññaṃ vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā attano vipākassa okāsaṃ katvā ṭhitattā tathā katokāsañca vipākaṃ anuppannampi samānaṃ evaṃ kate okāse ekantena uppajjanato okāsakatuppannaṃ nāma. Tāsu tāsu bhūmīsu asamūhataṃ akusalaṃ bhūmiladdhuppannaṃ nāma.
在这里,应当了解“地”与“得地者”的差别:所谓“地”,是指成为观所缘的三界五蕴。所谓“得地者”,是指在那些蕴中适于生起的烦恼类。正是因为藉由那类烦恼,该地得名为“得地”,故称为“得地者”。但这并非从所缘的角度而言。若从所缘的角度,那么缘于过去、未来以及已被遍知的漏尽者的蕴,烦恼也会生起。倘若那种情况也称作“得地者”,由于它未被断除,便无人能断除有的根本了。然而,应当从依处的角度来了知“得地者”。因为在任何生存处,那些尚未被观遍知的诸蕴正在生起,从它们生起的那一刻开始,属于轮回根本的烦恼类便随眠在其中。由于未被断除的意义,应知它为“得地者”。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca bhūmiyā bhūmiladdhassa ca nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ – bhūmīti hi vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā tebhūmakā pañcakkhandhā. Bhūmiladdhaṃ nāma tesu khandhesu uppattirahaṃ kilesajātaṃ. Tena hi sā bhūmiladdhā nāma hotīti tasmā bhūmiladdhanti vuccati. Sā ca kho na ārammaṇavasena. Ārammaṇavasena hi sabbepi atītānāgate pariññātepi ca khīṇāsavānaṃ khandhe ārabbha kilesā uppajjanti. Yadi ca taṃ bhūmiladdhaṃ nāma siyā, tassa appaheyyato na koci bhavamūlaṃ pajaheyya. Vatthuvasena pana bhūmiladdhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yattha yattha hi vipassanāya apariññātā khandhā uppajjanti, tattha tattha uppādato pabhuti tesu vaṭṭamūlaṃ kilesajātaṃ anuseti. Taṃ appahīnaṭṭhena bhūmiladdhanti veditabbaṃ.
其中,对于某位有情,若烦恼以未被断除的方式随眠在哪些蕴中,则那些蕴就是那些烦恼的依处,而不是其他有情所有的蕴。对于烦恼以未被断除的方式随眠在过去蕴中者,过去蕴即是它们的依处,而非其他蕴。同样的道理也适用于未来等。同样地,对于烦恼以未被断除的方式随眠在欲界蕴中者,欲界蕴即是它们的依处,而不是其他界的蕴。这一道理同样适用于色界与无色界。然而,在须陀洹等圣者中,对于哪一位圣者的蕴,哪一种轮回根本的烦恼类已被哪一条道所断除,则那些蕴对于已被断除的那些轮回根本烦恼来说,不再作为依处,也不能称为“地”。对于凡夫,由于一切轮回根本烦恼皆未断除,无论他造作善或不善的什么业,正是以此业与烦恼为缘,轮回才得以转动。对于这位凡夫,不能武断地说“那轮回根本只是在色蕴中,而不在受等蕴中”,或者“只是在识蕴中,而不在色蕴等中”。为什么呢?因为它无差别地随眠在五蕴的一切处。具体是怎样的呢?就像地味等之于树一样。譬如有一棵大树,依止于地表,依靠地味与水味,显示巴利原文
Tattha ca yassa yesu khandhesu appahīnaṭṭhena anusayitā kilesā, tassa te eva khandhā tesaṃ kilesānaṃ vatthu, na aññesaṃ santakā khandhā. Atītakkhandhesu ca appahīnānusayitānaṃ kilesānaṃ atītakkhandhāva vatthu, na itare. Esa nayo anāgatādīsu. Tathā kāmāvacarakkhandhesu appahīnānusayitānaṃ kilesānaṃ kāmāvacarakkhandhā eva vatthu, na itare. Esa nayo rūpārūpāvacaresu. Sotāpannādīsu pana yassa yassa ariyapuggalassa khandhesu taṃ taṃ vaṭṭamūlaṃ kilesajātaṃ tena tena maggena pahīnaṃ, tassa tassa te te khandhā pahīnānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ vaṭṭamūlakānaṃ kilesānaṃ avatthuto bhūmīti saṅkhaṃ na labhanti. Puthujjanassa sabbaso vaṭṭamūlakilesānaṃ appahīnattā yaṃkiñci kariyamānaṃ kammaṃ kusalamakusalaṃ vā hoti, iccassa kammakilesapaccayāva vaṭṭaṃ vaṭṭati, tassa tasseva taṃ vaṭṭamūlaṃ rūpakkhandheyeva, na vedanādīsu. Viññāṇakkhandheyeva vā, na rūpakkhandhādīsūti na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Avisesena pañcasupi khandhesu anusayitattā. Kathaṃ? Pathavīrasādi viya rukkhe. Yathā hi mahārukkhe pathavītalaṃ adhiṭṭhāya pathavīrasañca āporasañca nissāya tappaccayā mūlakhandhasākhāpasākhāpallavapalāsapupphaphalehi vaḍḍhitvā nabhaṃ pūretvā yāva kappāvasānā bījaparamparāya rukkhapaveṇiṃ santānayamāne ṭhite taṃ pathavīrasādimūleyeva, na khandhādīsu. Phaleyeva vā, na mūlādīsūti na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Avisesena sabbesu mūlādīsu anugatattāti. Yathā pana tasseva rukkhassa pupphaphalādīsu nibbinno koci puriso catūsu disāsu maṇḍūkakaṇṭakaṃ nāma visakaṇṭakaṃ ākoṭeyya, atha so rukkho tena visasamphassena phuṭṭho pathavīrasaāporasānaṃ pariyādinnattā appasavadhammataṃ āgamma puna santānaṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya, evameva khandhappavattiyaṃ nibbinno kulaputto tassa purisassa catūsu disāsu rukkhe visayojanaṃ viya attano santāne catumaggabhāvanaṃ ārabhati. Athassa so khandhasantāno tena catumaggavisasamphassena sabbaso vaṭṭamūlakilesānaṃ pariyādinnattā kiriyasabhāvamattaṃ upagatakāyakammādisabbakammappabhedo hutvā āyatiṃ punabbhavānabhinibbattanadhammataṃ āgamma bhavantarasantānaṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti, kevalaṃ carimaviññāṇanirodhena nirindhano viya jātavedo anupādāno parinibbāyati. Evaṃ bhūmiyā bhūmiladdhassa ca nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
另有四种‘已生’:现行已生、执取所缘已生、未镇伏已生、未正断已生。其中,唯有当下生起者才称为‘现行已生’。当眼等诸门的所缘呈现于前,在先前阶段并未生起的某种烦恼,却因后来执取了该所缘而必然生起,这就称为‘执取所缘已生’。依于止、观二法中的任何一种都未能镇伏的烦恼,虽尚未进入心相续,但因缺乏能阻止其生起之因,故称‘未镇伏已生’。即便已通过止、观将其镇伏,但未由圣道彻底断除,因而仍未超越其会生起的法性,这就称为‘未正断已生’。应知此三种已生——执取所缘已生、未镇伏已生与未正断已生——皆摄于‘得地已生’之中。显示巴利原文
Aparampi catubbidhaṃ uppannaṃ samudācāruppannaṃ ārammaṇādhiggahituppannaṃ avikkhambhituppannaṃ asamūhatuppannanti. Tattha vattamānuppannameva samudācāruppannaṃ. Cakkhādīnaṃ pana āpāthagate ārammaṇe pubbabhāge anuppajjamānampi kilesajātaṃ ārammaṇassa adhiggahitattā eva aparabhāge ekantena uppattito ārammaṇādhiggahituppannanti vuccati. Samathavipassanānaṃ aññataravasena avikkhambhitaṃ kilesajātaṃ cittasantatimanārūḷhampi uppattinivārakassa hetuno abhāvā avikkhambhituppannaṃ nāma. Samathavipassanāvasena pana vikkhambhitampi ariyamaggena asamūhatattā uppattidhammataṃ anatītattā asamūhatuppannanti vuccati. Tividhampi cetaṃ ārammaṇādhiggahitāvikkhambhitāsamūhatuppannaṃ bhūmiladdheneva saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti veditabbaṃ.
如是,于上述种种分类中,凡属现在已生、过去已灭已生、得机会已生及现行已生范畴的‘已生’,因非道所应断,故无须凭任何道智来断除。然而,那些称为得地已生、执取所缘已生、未镇伏已生、未正断已生的‘已生’,为了摧毁其‘已生’之状,种种世间与出世间的智慧便随之现起,因此这一切皆是所应断除的。故‘已生(之恶法应当断除)……’等说,乃是对那以圣道断除烦恼者而言。显示巴利原文
Iccetasmiṃ vuttappabhede uppanne yadetaṃ vattamānabhūtāpagatokāsakatasamudācārasaṅkhātaṃ uppannaṃ, taṃ amaggavajjhattā kenaci maggañāṇena pahātabbaṃ na hoti. Yaṃ panetaṃ bhūmiladdhārammaṇādhiggahitāvikkhambhitāsamūhatasaṅkhātaṃ uppannaṃ, tassa taṃ uppannabhāvaṃ nāsayamānaṃ yasmā taṃ taṃ lokiyalokuttarañāṇaṃ uppajjati, tasmā taṃ sabbampi pahātabbaṃ hotīti. Evaṃ ye maggo kilese pajahati, te sandhāya ‘‘uppannāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
然则,在出世间道刹那,如何是‘为令未生之善法生起而修习’,又如何是‘为令已生之善法安住而修习’呢?这恰由道本身的运作而达成。当道运作之时,因其先前未曾生起,故称‘未生’。正如有人说:‘我们到达了过去从未到过之处,体验了从未体验过的所缘。’而在其运作的当下,即住于此‘安住’之中,因此亦可说为‘为安住而修习’。如是,那位比丘在出世间道刹那,同一精进便获得了‘为令未生之恶、不善法不生……’等四种名称。这是就出世间道刹那正勤所作的说明。因此,此处所讨论的乃是世间与出世间正勤相杂合的正勤。显示巴利原文
Atha maggakkhaṇe kathaṃ anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ uppādāya bhāvanā hoti, kathañca uppannānaṃ ṭhitiyāti? Maggappavattiyā eva. Maggo hi pavattamāno pubbe anuppannapubbattā anuppanno nāma vuccati. Anāgatapubbañhi ṭhānaṃ āgantvā ananubhūtapubbaṃ vā ārammaṇaṃ anubhavitvā vattāro bhavanti ‘‘anāgataṭṭhānaṃ āgatamha, ananubhūtaṃ ārammaṇaṃ anubhavāmā’’ti. Yāvassa pavatti, ayameva ṭhiti nāmāti ṭhitiyā bhāvetītipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Evametassa bhikkhuno idaṃ lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe ekameva vīriyaṃ ‘‘anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāyā’’tiādīni cattāri nāmāni labhati. Ayaṃ lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe sammappadhānakathā. Evamettha lokiyalokuttaramissakā sammappadhānā niddiṭṭhāti.
在解释正念时,「身」指的是色身。因为此处色身是肢体、头发等诸法的聚集,如同象身、车身等一样,被理解为「身」。并且,如同以聚集为义,也以可厌之物的来处为义。因为那些极可厌、极令人厌恶之物的来处,也是身。「来处」即生起之处。此处的词义解释是:它们由此而来,故为「来处」。什么由此而来?可厌的头发等。因此,可厌之物的来处即是「身」。显示巴利原文
Sammāsatiniddese kāyeti rūpakāye. Rūpakāyo hi idha aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca dhammānaṃ samūhaṭṭhena hatthikāyarathakāyādayo viya kāyoti adhippeto. Yathā ca samūhaṭṭhena, evaṃ kucchitānaṃ āyaṭṭhena. Kucchitānañhi paramajegucchānaṃ so āyotipi kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – āyanti tatoti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo. Iti kucchitānaṃ āyoti kāyo.
「身随观者」是指以随观身为习惯者,或正在随观身者。虽然已经说了「身」,却又在「身随观者」中再度取「身」,应知这是为了显示不混杂地确定、破除密集等目的。由此,他并非在身之中随观受、随观心或随观法,而纯粹只是身随观者;于名为「身」的所依上,唯示现身随观之行相,便显示了不混杂的确定。同样地,他并非在身之中随观脱离肢体等部分的单一法,也不是随观脱离头发、体毛等的女人或男人。即使在此,对于由头发、体毛等四大与所造色聚集所成的此身,他也不是随观脱离四大与所造色的单一法。相反,他如同随观车乘部件者那样,随观肢体等的聚集;如同随观城市组成部分者那样,随观头发、体毛等的聚集;如同剥离芭蕉树干叶鞘者、拆解空拳者那样,纯粹只是随观四大与所造色的聚集。如此,通过显示名为「身」的所依的种种不同方式,便显示了破除密集。因为在此,除了如前所述的聚集之外,完全不见有所谓的身、女人、男人或任何其他法,众生只是对如前所述的诸法聚集,以种种方式生起邪执。因此,古德们说:显示巴利原文
Kāyānupassīti kāyaṃ anupassanasīlo, kāyaṃ vā anupassamāno. Kāyeti ca vatvāpi puna kāyānupassīti dutiyaṃ kāyaggahaṇaṃ asammissato vavatthānaghanavinibbhogādidassanatthaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tena na kāye vedanānupassī cittadhammānupassī vā, atha kho kāyānupassīyevāti kāyasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ kāyānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā na kāye aṅgapaccaṅgavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, nāpi kesalomādivinimuttaitthipurisānupassī. Yopi cettha kesalomādiko bhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhāto kāyo, tatthāpi na bhūtupādāyavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, atha kho rathasambhārānupassako viya aṅgapaccaṅgasamūhānupassī, nagarāvayavānupassako viya kesalomādisamūhānupassī, kadalikkhandhapattavaṭṭivinibhujjako viya rittamuṭṭhiviniveṭhako viya ca bhūtupādāyasamūhānupassīyevāti samūhavaseneva kāyasaṅkhātassa vatthuno nānappakārato dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dassito hoti. Na hettha yathāvuttasamūhavinimutto kāyo vā itthī vā puriso vā añño vā koci dhammo dissati, yathāvuttadhammasamūhamatteyeva pana tathā tathā sattā micchābhinivesaṃ karonti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
「他所看到的,并非那被看到的;那被看到的,他却未曾看到。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yaṃ passati na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passati; Apassaṃ bajjhate mūḷho, bajjhamāno na muccatī’’ti.
前面说“为显示破除密集等”。由这里的“等”字,还应了知此义:在这身中,那位比丘只是身随观者,而非随观其他法。这是什么意思呢?犹如在没有水的阳焰中,有人却随观为水;同样,于此身实为无常、苦、无我、不净,他却并不随观常、乐、我、净之相,而是身随观者——也就是说,他正是随观无常、苦、无我、不净这些行相的聚集者。又或者,如《大念处》所说:“在此,诸比丘,比丘或前往阿兰若,或去往树下……他以正念而入息……”依此理路所说的身,即从入出息直到碎骨为终极;且在后面的念处阐述中这样提到:“在此,有人于地界随观无常……于水界、火界、风界、发界、毛界、外皮界、内皮界、肉界、血界、筋界、骨界、骨髓界随观无常。”对这一切身,由于全都是在“此身”中随观,故也可视为“于身,身随观者”这一意义。显示巴利原文
Ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthanti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddena cettha ayampi attho veditabbo – ayañhi etasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassīyeva, na aññadhammānupassī. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā anudakabhūtāyapi marīciyā udakānupassino honti, na evaṃ aniccadukkhānattāsubhabhūteyeva imasmiṃ kāye niccasukhattasubhabhāvānupassī, atha kho kāyānupassī
再者,由于他不随观任何可执为“我”或“我所”的对象,唯独随观头发、体毛等种种法的聚集,因此应这样理解其义:于由头发等种种法聚集所成之身,他是身随观者。此外,依据随后所说的“于此身中随观无常,不随观常”等次第,因为他是随观由无常等一切行相聚集所成的身,故同样可视为“于身,身随观者”之义。而这就是四种念处共通的意义。显示巴利原文
Aniccadukkhānattāsubhākārasamūhānupassīyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yvāyaṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhāne ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā…pe… so satova assasatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.374; ma. ni. 1.107) nayena assāsapassāsādi cuṇṇakajātaaṭṭhikapariyosāno kāyo vutto, yo ca parato satipaṭṭhānakathāyaṃ ‘‘idhekacco pathavīkāyaṃ aniccato anupassati, āpokāyaṃ, tejokāyaṃ, vāyokāyaṃ, kesakāyaṃ, lomakāyaṃ, chavikāyaṃ, cammakāyaṃ, maṃsakāyaṃ, ruhirakāyaṃ, nhārukāyaṃ, aṭṭhikāyaṃ, aṭṭhimiñjakāya’’nti (paṭi. ma. 3.35) kāyo vutto, tassa sabbassa imasmiṃyeva kāye anupassanato kāye kāyānupassīti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo.
或者,由于不观见任何可执为“我”或“我所”者,而唯独随观头发、身毛等种种法的聚集,因此可理解为“于身,随观身”——即在由头发等种种法聚集所成的身上随观。又,依据下文“于身观无常,不观常”等次第,因为随观的是由无常相等种种行相聚集而成的身,故亦为“于身,随观身”之义。而这正是四种念处共通的意义。显示巴利原文
Atha vā kāye ahanti vā mamanti vā evaṃ gahetabbassa kassaci ananupassanato tassa tasseva pana kesalomādikassa nānādhammasamūhassa anupassanato kāye kesādidhammasamūhasaṅkhātakāyānupassīti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Apica ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye aniccato anupassati, no niccato’’tiādinā anukkamena parato āgatanayassa sabbasseva aniccalakkhaṇādino ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassa kāyassa anupassanatopi kāye kāyānupassīti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo. Ayaṃ pana catusatipaṭṭhānasādhāraṇo attho.
“于身随观身”:即在入出息身等多种所开示的身中,逐一随观每一种身。“住”:为显示与四种威仪住中的某一种相结合,意思是遮断一种威仪后,以另一种威仪无间断地相续,令自身持续运转。“精勤”:为显示与执持身的精进相结合。彼时,那种在三有中燃烧烦恼而被称为“烧燃”的精进,为此人所具备,故称精勤。“正知”:即具备名为执持身之正知的智慧。“具念”:即具备执持身的念。然而,先以念把握所缘,后以慧随观,若离念则无名副其实的随观。正如世尊所说:“诸比丘,我说念于一切时皆有必要。”因此,仅由“于身随观身而住”一句,便已开示了身随观念处。或者,不精勤者内心萎缩,成为障碍;不正知者于把握方便与舍弃非方便时迷昧;失念者于舍弃方便、把握非方便时无能为力,由此业处便不成就。故为显示依其威力而令此业处成就的诸法,乃说“精勤、正知、具念”,应作此解。显示巴利原文
Kāye kāyānupassīti assāsapassāsakāyādike bahudhā vutte kāye ekekakāyānupassī. Viharatīti catūsu iriyāpathavihāresu aññataravihārasamāyogaparidīpanametaṃ, ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā apatamānaṃ attānaṃ harati pavattetīti attho. Ātāpīti kāyapariggāhakavīriyasamāyogaparidīpanametaṃ. So hi yasmā tasmiṃ samaye yaṃ taṃ vīriyaṃ tīsu bhavesu kilesānaṃ ātāpanato ātāpoti vuccati, tena samannāgato hoti , tasmā ‘‘ātāpī’’ti vuccati. Sampajānoti kāyapariggāhakena sampajaññasaṅkhātena ñāṇena samannāgato. Satimāti kāyapariggāhikāya satiyā samannāgato. Ayaṃ pana yasmā satiyā ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā paññāya anupassati . Na hi sativirahitassa anupassanā nāma atthi. Tenevāha – ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Tasmā ettha ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’ti ettāvatā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānakammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yasmā anātāpino antosaṅkhepo antarāyakaro hoti, asampajāno upāyapariggahe anupāyaparivajjane ca sammuyhati, muṭṭhassati upāyāpariccāge anupāyāpariggahe ca asamattho hoti, tenassa taṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ na sampajjati, tasmā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ ānubhāvena taṃ sampajjati, tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ātāpī sampajāno satimā’’ti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
如此说明了身随观念处的相应支后,现在为显示断支,而说“除遣世间贪忧”。其中,“除遣”指以彼分断或镇伏断而除遣。“世间”:即之前所执取的此身,此处依坏散义而称为世间,意为此世间中的贪与忧当被舍弃。然而,由于不唯身中,于受等中贪忧亦同样被断,故《分别论》中说:“五取蕴为世间”。应知,因那些诸法即名为世间,故依义理引出此说。至于所说“此中,何为世间?即此身是世间”,此处即取此义。而“贪忧”于此为复合词,在相应部、增支部等其余经典中则分开读。其中,“贪”指因而冀求、自己贪求或仅仅是贪求。由于此处以贪一词摄入了欲贪,以忧一词摄入了嗔恚,故应了知,这是通过显示属于盖的两支强力法,而说明了断除诸盖。显示巴利原文
Iti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ sampayogaṅgañca dassetvā idāni pahānaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti vuttaṃ. Tattha vineyyāti tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā vinayitvā. Loketi yvāyaṃ kāyo pubbe pariggahito, sveva idha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko nāma. Tasmiṃ loke abhijjhaṃ domanassañca pajahitvāti attho. Yasmā panassa na kāyamatteyeva abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīyati, vedanādīsupi pahīyatiyeva, tasmā ‘‘pañcapi upādānakkhandhā loko’’ti (vibha. 362) vibhaṅge vuttaṃ. Lokasaṅkhātattāyeva tesaṃ dhammānaṃ atthuddhāravasenetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ panāha – ‘‘tattha katamo loko (vibha. 538), sveva kāyo loko’’ti ayamevettha attho. Abhijjhādomanassanti ca samāsetvā vuttaṃ. Saṃyuttaṅguttarapāṭhantaresu pana visuṃ katvā paṭhanti. Sā pana abhijjhāyanti patthayanti etāya, sayaṃ vā abhijjhāyati, abhijjhāyanamattameva vā esāti abhijjhā. Yasmā panettha abhijjhāgahaṇena kāmacchando, domanassagahaṇena byāpādo saṅgahaṃ gacchati, tasmā nīvaraṇapariyāpannabalavadhammadvayadassanena nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
特别在此而言:以断除贪,说明断除了依身成就为根源的顺适;以断除忧,说明断除了依身衰败为根源的违逆;以断除贪,说明断除了于身的乐着;以断除忧,说明断除了于修身的不乐;以断除贪,说明断除了将非真实的净、乐等投射于身;以断除忧,说明断除了将真实的不净、苦等排斥于身。这便是瑜伽行者的瑜伽威力与瑜伽堪能性的显示。这确实是瑜伽威力:即此行者脱离了顺适与违逆,堪忍不乐与乐,远离了非真实的投射与真实的排斥。而脱离顺适与违逆,堪忍不乐与乐,不投射非真实,不排斥真实,即堪为瑜伽行者。显示巴利原文
Visesena panettha abhijjhāvinayena kāyasampattimūlakassa anurodhassa, domanassavinayena kāyavipattimūlakassa virodhassa, abhijjhāvinayena ca kāye abhiratiyā, domanassavinayena kāyabhāvanāya anabhiratiyā, abhijjhāvinayena kāye abhūtānaṃ subhasukhabhāvādīnaṃ pakkhepassa, domanassavinayena kāye bhūtānaṃ asubhāsukhabhāvādīnaṃ apanayanassa pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena yogāvacarassa yogānubhāvo yogasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti. Yogānubhāvo hi esa, yadayaṃ anurodhavirodhavippamutto aratiratisaho abhūtapakkhepabhūtāpanayanavirahito ca hoti. Anurodhavirodhavippamutto cesa aratiratisaho abhūtaṃ apakkhipanto bhūtañca anapanento yogasamattho hotīti.
另一种理路:在“于身随观身”中,以“随观”说明了业处。在“住”中,以所说的“住”说明了业处修行者的持身方式。在“精勤”等句中,以精勤说明了正勤;以念与正知说明了遍一切处的业处,或是护持业处的方便。或者,以念说明由身随观所证得的止,以正知说明观,以除遣贪忧说明修习之果,应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti ettha anupassanāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Viharatī’’ti ettha vuttavihārena kammaṭṭhānikassa kāyapariharaṇaṃ. ‘‘Ātāpī’’tiādīsu ātāpena sammappadhānaṃ, satisampajaññena sabbatthakakammaṭṭhānaṃ, kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇūpāyo vā. Satiyā vā kāyānupassanāvasena paṭiladdhasamatho, sampajaññena vipassanā, abhijjhādomanassavinayena bhāvanāphalaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
至于“于受随观受”等句中,受等词的重复安立,其用意可依循在身随观中已述的方式,随其所应地配合理解。以下是不共的意义:在乐等众多分类的受中,各各从无常等角度随观一一受;在有贪等十六种分类的心中,各各从无常等角度随观一一心;在除去身、受、心之外的其余三地诸法中,各各从无常等角度随观一一法;或者依《念处经》所述方式,随观盖等诸法。此处,“身”是单数,因为身体是单一所依;“心”是单数,因为心无自性差别,是依生类而取。应知,如何随观受等,如此随观的人即称为于受随观受、于心随观心、于法随观法。那么,受应当如何随观呢?首先,乐受应观为苦,苦受应观为箭,不苦不乐受应观为无常。如说:显示巴利原文
Vedanāsu vedanānupassītiādīsu ca vedanādīnaṃ puna vacane payojanaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva yathāyogaṃ yojetvā veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana asādhāraṇattho – sukhādīsu anekappabhedāsu vedanāsu visuṃ visuṃ aniccādito ekekavedanānupassīti, sarāgādike soḷasappabhede citte visuṃ visuṃ aniccādito ekekacittānupassīti, kāyavedanācittāni ṭhapetvā sesatebhūmakadhammesu visuṃ visuṃ aniccādito ekekadhammānupassīti, satipaṭṭhānasuttante (dī. ni. 2.382; ma. ni. 1.115) vuttanayena nīvaraṇādidhammānupassīti vā. Ettha ca ‘‘kāye’’ti ekavacanaṃ sarīrassa ekattā, ‘‘citte’’ti ekavacanaṃ cittassa sabhāvabhedābhāvato jātiggahaṇena katanti veditabbaṃ. Yathā ca vedanādayo anupassitabbā, tathā anupassanto vedanāsu vedanānupassī, citte cittānupassī, dhammesu dhammānupassīti veditabbo. Kathaṃ tāva vedanā anupassitabbā? Sukhā tāva vedanā dukkhato, dukkhā vedanā sallato, adukkhamasukhā vedanā aniccato anupassitabbā. Yathāha –
“凡观乐为苦(yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda),见苦为箭(dukkhamaddakkhi sallato);
那寂静的不苦不乐(adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ),彼观之为无常(addakkhi naṃ aniccato);
这位比丘确实名正见(sa ve sammaddaso bhikkhu),他遍知诸受(parijānāti vedanā)”。(《相应部》4.253)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda, dukkhamaddakkhi sallato; Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, addakkhi naṃ aniccato; Sa ve sammaddaso bhikkhu, parijānāti vedanā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 4.253);
一切受,也都应当从“苦”的角度来观察。因为经中说:“凡所有感受,这些一切我说是苦。”(《相应部》4.259)同时也应从“乐”与“苦”的角度来观察。如经中所说:“乐受,安住时是乐,变坏时是苦;苦受,安住时是苦,变坏时是乐;不苦不乐受,有智时是乐,无智时是苦。”(《中部》1.465)此外,也可依无常等七种随观来观察它们。显示巴利原文
Sabbā eva cetā dukkhatopi anupassitabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃkiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.259). Sukhadukkhatopi ca anupassitabbā. Yathāha – ‘‘sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā. Dukkhā vedanā ṭhitidukkhā vipariṇāmasukhā. Adukkhamasukhā vedanā ñāṇasukhā aññāṇadukkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465). Apica aniccādisattaanupassanāvasenāpi anupassitabbā.
在“心”与“法”中:对于心,应从所缘、增上、俱生、地、业、果、唯作等种种差别,从无常等七随观,以及有贪等十六种分类来观察。对于法,应从自相、共相、空法,无常等七随观,以及寂静、非寂静等角度来观察。虽然,于此身所构成的世界中断除了贪忧的人,其在受等其他世界中的贪忧亦必定断除;然而,为显示不同人之差别,亦为显示不同刹那的念处修习,故于一切处如此说。或可理解为:若于一处断除,则于余各处亦断除。因此,为显示于其处断除的情形,而作如是说。应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Cittadhammesupi cittaṃ tāva ārammaṇādhipatisahajātabhūmikammavipākakiriyādinānattabhedānaṃ aniccādisattaanupassanānaṃ sarāgādisoḷasabhedānañca vasena anupassitabbaṃ, dhammā salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇānaṃ suññatādhammassa aniccādisattaanupassanānaṃ santāsantādīnañca vasena anupassitabbā. Kāmañcettha yassa kāyasaṅkhāte loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīnaṃ, tassa vedanādilokesupi taṃ pahīnameva, nānāpuggalavasena pana nānākkhaṇikasatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāvasena ca sabbattha vuttaṃ. Yato vā ekattha pahīnaṃ, sesesupi pahīnaṃ hoti. Tenevassa tattha pahānadassanatthampi evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
如是,此四念处在世间准备阶段,现起于不同心。确实是以一心把握身,以另一心把握受,以另一心把握心,更以另一心把握法。然而,在出世间道刹那,则唯于一心中得。最初由把握身所生、与观相应的念,称为“身随观”;成就此念者,称为“身随观者”。精勤修观而证圣道者,于道刹那,与道相应的念称为“身随观”;成就此念者,称为“身随观者”。同理,由把握受所生、与观相应的念,称为“受随观”;由把握心所生、与观相应的念,称为“心随观”;由把握法所生、与观相应的念,称为“法随观”。成就这些念者,各名为随观者。精勤修观而证圣道者,于道刹那,与道相应的念称为“受随观”乃至“法随观”;成就彼念者,名为随观者。至此,教说依人而安立。若就身而言:为断除“净”的颠倒,把握身之念由圣道圆满成就,故说“身随观”。就受而言:为断除“乐”的颠倒,把握受之念由圣道圆满成就,故说“受随观”。就心而言:为断除“常”的颠倒,把握心之念由圣道圆满成就,故说“心随观”。就法而言:显示巴利原文
Iti ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā pubbabhāge nānācittesu labbhanti. Aññeneva hi cittena kāyaṃ pariggaṇhāti, aññena vedanaṃ, aññena cittaṃ, aññena dhamme pariggaṇhāti. Lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitteyeva labbhanti. Ādito hi kāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā āgatassa vipassanāsampayuttā sati kāyānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo kāyānupassī nāma. Vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggaṃ pattassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayuttā sati kāyānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo kāyānupassī nāma. Vedanaṃ pariggaṇhitvā cittaṃ pariggaṇhitvā dhamme pariggaṇhitvā āgatassa vipassanāsampayuttā sati dhammānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo dhammānupassī nāma. Vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggaṃ pattassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayuttā sati dhammānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo dhammānupassī nāma. Evaṃ tāva desanā puggale tiṭṭhati. Kāye pana ‘‘subha’’nti vipallāsappahānā kāyapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti kāyānupassanā nāma. Vedanāya ‘‘sukhā’’ti vipallāsappahānā vedanāpariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti vedanānupassanā nāma. Citte ‘‘nicca’’nti vipallāsappahānā cittapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti cittānupassanā nāma. Dhammesu ‘‘attā’’ti vipallāsappahānā dhammapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti dhammānupassanā nāma. Iti ekāva maggasampayuttā sati catukiccasādhakattena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitteyeva labbhantī’’ti.
在正定的解释中,“离诸欲”的意思是:远离诸欲、分离诸欲、无有诸欲、离去诸欲。而这里所用的“唯”字,应理解为决定、限定的意思。正因为它具有决定义,所以在成就初禅而安住时,尽管欲已不现,仍能表明欲正是此初禅的对立,而初禅的证得也必定要彻底舍离诸欲。这是如何表明的呢?以“唯离诸欲”这样的限定来说明时,便可了知:“毫无疑问,欲是此禅那的对立,正如黑暗存在时光明不能出现,只要欲存在,此禅那便不能现起;它的证得,必须彻底舍离诸欲,犹如必须舍离此岸才能到达彼岸。”因此才作此限定。显示巴利原文
Sammāsamādhiniddese vivicceva kāmehīti kāmehi viviccitvā vinā hutvā apakkamitvā. Yo panāyamettha evakāro, so niyamatthoti veditabbo. Yasmā ca niyamattho, tasmā paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharaṇasamaye avijjamānānampi kāmānaṃ tassa paṭhamajjhānassa paṭipakkhabhāvaṃ kāmapariccāgeneva cassa adhigamaṃ dīpeti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Vivicceva kāmehī’’ti evañhi niyame kayiramāne idaṃ paññāyati – nūnimassa jhānassa kāmā paṭipakkhabhūtā, yesu sati idaṃ na pavattati, andhakāre sati padīpobhāso viya, tesaṃ pariccāgeneva cassa adhigamo hoti orimatīrapariccāgena pārimatīrassa viya. Tasmā niyamaṃ karotīti.
于此可能有人会问:为何这“唯”字只见于前句,而不见于后句?难道不离不善法也能成就禅那而安住吗?不应作如是解。这“唯”字用在前句,是因为此初禅正是欲的出离。由超越欲界、对治欲贪故,此禅那正是对欲的出离。如经中所说:“欲的出离,即指出离。”(《如是语》72)至于后句,此“唯”字也应依“诸比丘!此处方有第一沙门,此处方有第二沙门”(《中部》1.139;《增支部》4.241)等经文之例,被带入理解并宣说出来。因为若不舍离其余那些名为“盖”的不善法,便不可能成就禅那并安住其中。因此,“唯离诸欲”与“唯离诸不善法”这两句,皆应有此“唯”字。复次,此中虽共说“离”字,可摄彼分离、镇伏离、断离、安息离、出离离,以及心离、身离、依离等,然于世间的加行阶段,应视为指身离、心离、镇伏离;于出世间道刹那,则应视为指身离、心离、断离、安息离、出离离。显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā, kasmā panesa pubbapadeyeva vutto, na uttarapade, kiṃ akusalehi dhammehi aviviccāpi jhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyyāti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃnissaraṇato hi pubbapade esa vutto. Kāmadhātusamatikkamanato hi kāmarāgapaṭipakkhato ca idaṃ jhānaṃ kāmānameva nissaraṇaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ nekkhamma’’nti (itivu. 72). Uttarapadepi pana yathā ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241) ettha evakāro ānetvā vuccati, evaṃ vattabbo. Na hi sakkā ito aññehipi nīvaraṇasaṅkhātehi akusalehi dhammehi avivicca jhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ. Tasmā ‘‘vivicceva kāmehi vivicceva akusalehi dhammehī’’ti evaṃ padadvayepi esa daṭṭhabbo. Padadvayepi ca kiñcāpi viviccāti iminā sādhāraṇavacanena tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavivekā cittakāyaupadhivivekā ca saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, tathāpi pubbabhāge kāyavivekacittavivekavikkhambhanavivekā daṭṭhabbā, lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe kāyavivekacittavivekasamucchedavivekapaṭippassaddhivivekanissaraṇavivekā.
而此“诸欲”一词,当知包含两类:既包含在《大义释》中以“什么是事欲?可爱之色……”等方法所说的“事欲”,也包含在同一《大义释》及《分别论》中以“欲求是欲,贪是欲,欲贪是欲,思惟是欲,贪是欲,思惟贪是欲”等方法所说的“烦恼欲”,此二类悉被含摄。唯有如此,“唯离诸欲”即指从事欲远离,此义方为合理。由此,所说即是“身远离”。显示巴利原文
Kāmehīti iminā pana padena ye ca mahāniddese ‘‘katame vatthukāmā manāpikā rūpā’’tiādinā (mahāni. 1) nayena vatthukāmā vuttā, ye ca tattheva vibhaṅge ca ‘‘chando kāmo, rāgo kāmo, chandarāgo kāmo, saṅkappo kāmo, rāgo kāmo, saṅkapparāgo kāmo’’ti (mahāni. 1; vibha. 564) evaṃ kilesakāmā vuttā, te sabbepi saṅgahitā icceva daṭṭhabbā. Evañhi sati vivicceva kāmehīti vatthukāmehipi viviccevāti attho yujjati. Tena kāyaviveko vutto hoti.
“远离不善法”的意思,是从烦恼欲或一切不善法中远离,这一含义方为合理。以此,说的是“心远离”。在此,前句说从事欲中远离,正表明了舍弃欲乐;后句说从烦恼欲中远离,则表明了执取出离之乐。同样,正是通过说事欲远离与烦恼欲远离,前句揭示了舍弃杂染之所依,后句揭示了断除杂染本身。前句揭示了舍弃贪求状态之因,后句揭示了舍弃愚昧状态之因。前句揭示了修行上的清净,后句则揭示了内心倾向的滋养——应当如此了知。以上是就“诸欲”一词中的欲,采取“事欲”一方的理趣。显示巴利原文
Vivicca akusalehi dhammehīti kilesakāmehi sabbākusalehi vā viviccāti attho yujjati. Tena cittaviveko vutto hoti. Purimena cettha vatthukāmehi vivekavacanato eva kāmasukhapariccāgo, dutiyena kilesakāmehi vivekavacanato nekkhammasukhapariggaho vibhāvito hoti. Evaṃ vatthukāmakilesakāmavivekavacanatoyeva ca etesaṃ paṭhamena saṃkilesavatthuppahānaṃ, dutiyena saṃkilesappahānaṃ. Paṭhamena lolabhāvassa hetupariccāgo, dutiyena bālabhāvassa. Paṭhamena ca payogasuddhi, dutiyena āsayaposanaṃ vibhāvitaṃ hotīti viññātabbaṃ. Esa tāva nayo kāmehīti ettha vuttakāmesu vatthukāmapakkhe.
若取“烦恼欲”一方,则“欲”所指的是以“欲求”、“贪”等种种分类的欲贪本身。它虽属不善法,但在《分别论》中,以“何等为欲?欲求为欲……”等方式,为了显示它作为诸禅支的对立面而单独宣说;或因它是烦恼欲,故在前句中提及;又因它属于不善法,故在后句中提及。并且,因其有多种分类,故不单说“欲”,而说“诸欲”。此外,虽另有他法亦具不善性,但在《分别论》中,以“何等为不善法?欲贪……”等方式,为了显示它们是与诸禅支相违的对立面,故仅说诸“盖”。因为诸盖与禅支相违,而诸禅支正是它们的对治者、破坏者、消灭者,故如是说。正如《藏论》所说:“定对治欲贪,喜对治嗔恚,寻对治昏沉睡眠,乐对治掉举恶作,伺对治疑。”显示巴利原文
Kilesakāmapakkhe pana chandoti ca rāgoti ca evamādīhi anekabhedo kāmacchandova kāmoti adhippeto. So ca akusalapariyāpannopi samāno ‘‘tattha katame kāmā, chando kāmo’’tiādinā (vibha. 564) nayena vibhaṅge upari jhānaṅgapaṭipakkhato visuṃ vutto, kilesakāmattā vā purimapade vutto, akusalapariyāpannattā dutiyapade. Anekabhedato cassa kāmatoti avatvā kāmehīti vuttaṃ. Aññesampi ca dhammānaṃ akusalabhāve vijjamāne ‘‘tattha katame akusalā dhammā, kāmacchando’’tiādinā (vibha. 564) nayena vibhaṅge upari jhānaṅgapaccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanato nīvaraṇāneva vuttāni. Nīvaraṇāni hi jhānaṅgapaccanīkāni, tesaṃ jhānaṅgāneva paṭipakkhāni viddhaṃsakāni vināsakānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi ‘‘samādhi kāmacchandassa paṭipakkho, pīti byāpādassa, vitakko thinamiddhassa, sukhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccassa, vicāro vicikicchāyā’’ti peṭake vuttaṃ.
如是,在此,“唯离诸欲”一句,说明了对欲贪的镇伏远离;“离不善法”一句,说明了对五种盖的镇伏远离。然而,虽未直接指名,实则第一句指欲贪,第二句指其余诸盖。同样,第一句对应三种不善根中,以五欲功德品类为所缘的贪;第二句对应以嗔恚事等品类为所缘的嗔与痴。又或于诸流等法中,第一句对应欲流、欲轭、欲漏、欲取、贪欲身系、欲贪结;第二句对应所余诸流、轭、漏、取、身系、结。第一句对应渴爱及与彼相应之法,第二句对应无明及与彼相应之法。复次,当知:第一句说明了对与贪相应的八心的镇伏远离,第二句说明了对其余四不善心的镇伏远离。显示巴利原文
Evamettha ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’ti iminā kāmacchandassa vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hoti. ‘‘Vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’ti iminā pañcannampi nīvaraṇānaṃ. Agahitaggahaṇena pana paṭhamena kāmacchandassa, dutiyena sesanīvaraṇānaṃ. Tathā paṭhamena tīsu akusalamūlesu pañcakāmaguṇabhedavisayassa lobhassa, dutiyena āghātavatthubhedādivisayānaṃ dosamohānaṃ. Oghādīsu vā dhammesu paṭhamena kāmoghakāmayogakāmāsavakāmupādānaabhijjhākāyagantha kāmarāgasaññojanānaṃ, dutiyena avasesaoghayogāsavaupādānaganthasaṃyojanānaṃ. Paṭhamena taṇhāya taṃsampayuttakānañca, dutiyena avijjāya taṃsampayuttakānañca. Apica paṭhamena lobhasampayuttaaṭṭhacittuppādānaṃ, dutiyena sesānaṃ catunnaṃ akusalacittuppādānaṃ vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hotīti veditabbo.
至此,初禅的断支已显示完毕;为显示俱生支,现在说“有寻有伺”等句。其中,寻的特征是将心导向所缘;伺的特征是令心反复审察所缘。二者虽常不相离,然因粗显和先行,寻犹如撞钟时的初击,是心的最初撞击;因微细与审察,伺则如钟声余响,绵绵续起。在此,寻带有动荡,心最初生起时,犹如欲飞升空中的鸟拍动双翼,又如蜜蜂向莲花扑去,随香而趋;伺则运转寂静,心之动荡较少,犹如已在空中飞翔的鸟展开双翼,又如已经冲近莲花并在其上方盘旋的蜜蜂。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca paṭhamassa jhānassa pahānaṅgaṃ dassetvā idāni sampayogaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ savitakkaṃ savicārantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ārammaṇe cittassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇo vitakko. Ārammaṇānumajjanalakkhaṇo vicāro. Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge oḷārikaṭṭhena pubbaṅgamaṭṭhena ca ghaṇḍābhighāto viya cetaso paṭhamābhinipāto vitakko, sukhumaṭṭhena anumajjanasabhāvena ca ghaṇḍānuravo viya anuppabandho vicāro. Vipphāravā cettha vitakko paṭhamuppattikāle paripphandanabhūto cittassa, ākāse uppatitukāmassa pakkhino pakkhavikkhepo viya, padumābhimukhapāto viya ca gandhānubandhacetaso bhamarassa. Santavutti vicāro nātiparipphandanabhūto cittassa, ākāse uppatitassa pakkhino pakkhappasāraṇaṃ viya, paribbhamanaṃ viya ca padumābhimukhapatitassa bhamarassa padumassa uparibhāge.
在《二集注》中则说:“如大鸟御空而行,以双翼揽风,而后敛翼而飞——寻即以安立心于所缘的方式转起;如为揽风而扇动双翼般飞行——伺即以审察的方式转起。”这是从相续转起而言的。不过,二者的差别在初禅与第二禅中才变得明显。再者,如同抓住沾有污垢的铜盆,一只手紧握,另一只手以粉、油和毛刷擦拭——紧握的手如寻,擦拭的手如伺;又如陶师以棍击轮,转轮而制器——下压的手如寻,四处移动的手如伺;又如画圆时,定于中心的钉如安立之寻,环绕于外的钉如审察之伺。因此,此禅那与这样的寻、这样的伺俱起,犹如树木与花果同在,故说“有寻有伺”。显示巴利原文
Dukanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ākāse gacchato mahāsakuṇassa ubhohi pakkhehi vātaṃ gahetvā pakkhe sannisīdāpetvā gamanaṃ viya ārammaṇe cetaso abhiniropanabhāvena pavatto vitakko, vātaggahaṇatthaṃ pakkhe phandāpayamānassa gamanaṃ viya anumajjanabhāvena pavatto vicāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ anuppabandhena pavattiyaṃ yujjati. So pana tesaṃ viseso paṭhamadutiyajjhānesu pākaṭo hoti. Apica malaggahitaṃ kaṃsabhājanaṃ ekena hatthena daḷhaṃ gahetvā itarena hatthena cuṇṇatelavālaṇḍupakena parimajjantassa daḷhaggahaṇahattho viya vitakko, parimajjanahattho viya vicāro. Tathā kumbhakārassa daṇḍappahārena cakkaṃ bhamayitvā bhājanaṃ karontassa uppīḷanahattho viya vitakko, ito cito ca saṃsaraṇahattho viya vicāro. Tathā maṇḍalaṃ karontassa majjhe sannirujjhitvā ṭhitakaṇṭako viya abhiniropano vitakko, bahi paribbhamanakaṇṭako viya anumajjano vicāro. Iti iminā ca vitakkena iminā ca vicārena saha vattati rukkho viya pupphena phalena cāti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti vuccati.
“离生”:此处,“离”即是远离,义为诸盖的离去。或者,“离”指已远离的,即已远离诸盖的禅那相应法聚。因此,从远离中产生,或在彼远离中出生的,称为“离生”。“喜乐”:此处,能令喜悦的便是喜,它以喜爱为特征。喜有五种:小喜、刹那喜、继起喜、踊跃喜和遍满喜。显示巴利原文
Vivekajanti ettha vivitti viveko, nīvaraṇavigamoti attho. Vivittoti vā viveko, nīvaraṇavivitto jhānasampayuttadhammarāsīti attho. Tasmā vivekā, tasmiṃ vā viveke jātanti vivekajaṃ. Pītisukhanti ettha pīṇayatīti pīti, sā sampiyāyanalakkhaṇā. Sā panesā khuddikā pīti, khaṇikā pīti, okkantikā pīti, ubbegā pīti, pharaṇā pītīti pañcavidhā hoti.
其中,小喜仅能在身上引起毫毛竖立。刹那喜刹那刹那生起,犹如闪电。继起喜如海浪拍岸,一次次冲击身体而后破碎。踊跃喜强而有力,能令身体向上腾起,乃至腾空。遍满喜极为有力,当它生起时,整个身体如被吹胀的皮囊,又如大水冲灌的山谷,全然充满。这五种喜,在渐次成熟时,能圆满两种轻安——身轻安与心轻安。轻安成熟时,圆满两种乐——身乐与心乐。乐成熟时,则圆满三种定——刹那定、近行定与安止定。其中,遍满喜为安止定之根本,增长而与定相应,这便是此处经文所指的喜。显示巴利原文
Tattha khuddikā pīti sarīre lomahaṃsanamattameva kātuṃ sakkoti. Khaṇikā pīti khaṇe khaṇe vijjuppādasadisā hoti. Okkantikā pīti samuddatīraṃ vīci viya kāyaṃ okkamitvā okkamitvā bhijjati. Ubbegā pīti balavatī hoti kāyaṃ uddhaggaṃ katvā ākāse laṅghāpanappamāṇappattā. Pharaṇā pīti atibalavatī hoti. Tāya hi uppannāya sakalasarīraṃ dhamitvā pūritavatthi viya mahatā udakoghena pakkhandapabbatakucchi viya ca anupariphuṭaṃ hoti. Sā panesā pañcavidhā pīti gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī paripākaṃ gacchantī duvidhaṃ passaddhiṃ paripūreti kāyapassaddhiñca cittapassaddhiñca. Passaddhi gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī paripākaṃ gacchantī duvidhampi sukhaṃ paripūreti kāyikañca cetasikañca. Sukhaṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhantaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ tividhaṃ samādhiṃ paripūreti – khaṇikasamādhiṃ, upacārasamādhiṃ, appanāsamādhiñcāti. Tāsu ca yā appanāsamādhissa mūlaṃ hutvā vaḍḍhamānā samādhisampayogaṃ gatā pharaṇā pīti, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā pītīti.
至于乐,因能带来快乐,故称“乐”,意谓令生起者获得快乐。或谓“乐”是“善嚼”,即彻底嚼碎、摧毁身心之疾,此为悦受之名。乐以甜蜜为特征。虽然喜与乐有时不相分离,但获得可意所缘时的欢喜为喜,体验已得之味的感受为乐。有喜处必有乐,有乐处则未必有喜。喜属行蕴,乐属受蕴。犹如旷野中疲惫之人,见或听闻树林与水时的状态如同喜,进入树荫、受用水时的状态如同乐。应知这是就各阶段最显著的状态而言。因此,此禅那具有此喜与此乐,或此禅那中有此喜与此乐,故称此禅那为“喜乐”。又如“法与律”之类的复合词,喜与乐合称喜乐。此禅那具有离所生之喜乐,或此禅那中有离所生之喜乐,故又称“离生喜乐”。正如这禅那一样,此处的喜乐亦是离所生;而禅那具足此喜乐,因此不作分解,单以“离生喜乐”一词总而称之,也是合理的。显示巴利原文
Itaraṃ pana sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Sukhanaṃ vā sukhaṃ, suṭṭhu vā khādati, khaṇati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ, somanassavedanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Taṃ sātalakkhaṇaṃ. Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge iṭṭhārammaṇapaṭilābhatuṭṭhi pīti, paṭiladdharasānubhavanaṃ sukhaṃ. Yattha pīti, tattha sukhaṃ. Yattha sukhaṃ, tattha na niyamato pīti. Saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitā pīti, vedanākkhandhasaṅgahitaṃ sukhaṃ. Kantārakhinnassa vanantudakadassanasavanesu viya pīti, vanacchāyāpavesanaudakaparibhogesu viya sukhaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye pākaṭabhāvato cetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Iti ayañca pīti idañca sukhaṃ assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘pītisukha’’nti vuccati. Atha vā pīti ca sukhañca pītisukhaṃ dhammavinayādayo viya. Vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti evampi vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ. Yatheva hi jhānaṃ, evaṃ pītisukhampettha vivekajameva hoti. Tañcassa atthīti tasmā alopasamāsaṃ katvā ekapadeneva ‘‘vivekajaṃpītisukha’’ntipi vattuṃ yujjati.
“初”:因是计数次第之首,或为最先现起,故称初。“禅那”有两种:所缘禅那与相禅那。其中,八等至因观照地遍等所缘,故称“所缘禅那”。观、道、果则称“相禅那”。其中,观以观照无常等相故,为相禅那;道由观所作之功而生故,为相禅那;果以观照灭谛真实之相故,为相禅那。此中,在前行阶段,指所缘禅那;在出世间道刹那,指相禅那。因此,应从所缘禅那、相禅那及焚烧敌对法之义来理解“禅那”。“具足”:意为已近、已达,或说已成就、已圆满。“住”:以相应威仪而安住,即成就该种禅那具足者,令有身的相续得以成就。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamanti gaṇanānupubbatā paṭhamaṃ, paṭhamaṃ uppannantipi paṭhamaṃ. Jhānanti duvidhaṃ jhānaṃ ārammaṇūpanijjhānañca lakkhaṇūpanijjhānañca. Tattha aṭṭha samāpattiyo pathavīkasiṇādiārammaṇaṃ upanijjhāyantīti ‘‘ārammaṇūpanijjhāna’’nti saṅkhyaṃ gatā. Vipassanāmaggaphalāni pana lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ nāma. Tattha vipassanā aniccādilakkhaṇassa upanijjhānato lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, vipassanāya katakiccassa maggena ijjhanato maggo lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, phalaṃ pana nirodhasaccaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Tesu idha pubbabhāge ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ adhippetaṃ, tasmā ārammaṇūpanijjhānato lakkhaṇūpanijjhānato paccanīkajjhāpanato ca ‘‘jhāna’’nti veditabbaṃ. Upasampajjāti upagantvā, pāpuṇitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasampādayitvā vā, nipphādetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Viharatīti tadanurūpena iriyāpathavihārena iriyati, vuttappakārajhānasamaṅgī hutvā attabhāvassa vuttiṃ abhinipphādeti.
「寻与伺的止息」:在此,指寻和伺二者的止息、超越,也就是在第二禅那的刹那,它们不再出现。其中,虽然在第二禅那时,初禅的一切法都已不存在——因为初禅中的触等与第二禅中的触等是相异的——但为了显示由于粗重的支分被超越,而从初禅证得第二禅等,故说「寻与伺的止息」。「内」:指自身之内。因此,其意为:于自身中生起,于自相续中现起。显示巴利原文
Vitakkavicārānaṃvūpasamāti ettha vitakkassa ca vicārassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vūpasamā samatikkamā, dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe apātubhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kiñcāpi dutiyajjhāne sabbepi paṭhamajjhānadhammā na santi, aññeyeva hi paṭhamajjhāne phassādayo, aññe idhāti. Oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamo hotīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ . Ajjhattanti idha niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, tasmā attani jātaṃ, attasantāne nibbattanti attho.
「净信」:信被称为净信。由于与净信相应,禅那本身也因此被称为「净信」,如同因与蓝色相应,衣服便被称为蓝衣。又或者,因为那种禅那具足净信,并且由于寻与伺的波动止息,使得心变得清净、具足信心,所以也被称为「净信」。在此后一种释义中,应将「净信」视作与「心的」一词相连;而在前一种释义中,「心的」一词则应连接「心一境性」。显示巴利原文
Sampasādananti sampasādanaṃ vuccati saddhā. Sampasādanayogato jhānampi sampasādanaṃ nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viya. Yasmā vā taṃ jhānaṃ sampasādanasamannāgatattā vitakkavicārakkhobhavūpasamanena ca ceto sampasādayati, tasmāpi sampasādananti vuttaṃ. Imasmiñca atthavikappe sampasādanaṃ cetasoti evaṃ padasambandho veditabbo, purimasmiṃ pana atthavikappe cetasoti etaṃ ekodibhāvena saddhiṃ yojetabbaṃ.
在此,其释义为:「单独地生起」,故称「一境」;意思是,由于不为寻与伺所制伏,它是最殊胜、最顶尖的,以此状态而生起。因为在世间,最殊胜者也被称为「一」。或者,远离寻与伺,成为独一、无伴侣,也可以这样理解。再或者,它使相应的心所法生起,所以是「起」,意为令其生起;以最殊胜的含义,既是「一」又是「起」,故称为「一境」。这是定的同义词。如此,「修习、增长此一境」——这就是第二禅的「心一境性」。而此「一境」,因为是属于心的,非属于众生,非属于命我,所以被称为「心的心一境性」。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ atthayojanā – eko udetīti ekodi, vitakkavicārehi anajjhārūḷhattā aggo seṭṭho hutvā udetīti attho. Seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccati. Vitakkavicāravirahito vā eko asahāyo hutvā itipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Atha vā sampayuttadhamme udāyatīti udi, uṭṭhapetīti attho. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena eko ca so udi cāti ekodi. Samādhissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Iti imaṃ ekodiṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti idaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ ekodibhāvaṃ. So panāyaṃ ekodi yasmā cetaso, na sattassa na jīvassa. Tasmā etaṃ ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti vuttaṃ.
难道初禅中就没有这种信,也未得名为“一境”的定吗?为何唯独在此第二禅才称为“净信”与“心的心一境性”呢?答曰:因为初禅被寻与伺的波动所扰,犹如水被波浪搅乱,并非极清澈,所以那里虽也有信,却不称为“净信”。也正因为并非极清澈,其中的定在那里也不显著,故不称为“心一境性”。而在第二禅中,由于没有了寻与伺的障碍,信获得了空间而变得有力;又因得有力之信为助伴,定也明显起来。由此当知,唯在此处才作如是宣说。显示巴利原文
Nanu cāyaṃ saddhā paṭhamajjhānepi atthi, ayañca ekodināmako samādhi. Atha kasmā idameva ‘‘sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti ca vuttanti? Vuccate – aduñhi paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkavicārakkhobhena vīcitaraṅgasamākulamiva jalaṃ na suppasannaṃ hoti, tasmā satiyāpi saddhāya ‘‘sampasādana’’nti na vuttaṃ. Na suppasannattāyeva cettha samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭo. Tasmā ‘‘ekodibhāva’’ntipi na vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana jhāne vitakkavicārapalibodhābhāvena laddhokāsā balavatī saddhā, balavasaddhāsahāyapaṭilābheneva ca samādhipi pākaṭo, tasmā idameva evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“无寻无伺”:因修习已断除故,于此禅那中寻不存在;或此禅那无有寻,故称“无寻”。同理,称为“无伺”。于此或有人问:“由‘寻与伺的止息’一语,此义岂非已经成立?为何再言‘无寻无伺’?”答言:诚然,此义已立,然前语并非为直接显示此义而说。岂不先已说过:“为显示超越粗重禅支,而从初禅证得其余第二禅等诸禅,故以‘寻与伺的止息’而说。”显示巴利原文
Avitakkaṃavicāranti bhāvanāya pahīnattā etasmiṃ, etassa vā vitakko natthīti avitakkaṃ. Imināva nayena avicāraṃ. Etthāha – ‘‘nanu ca ‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’ti imināpi ayamattho siddho. Atha kasmā puna vuttaṃ ‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’nti’’? Vuccate – evametaṃ, siddhovāyamattho, na panetaṃ tadatthadīpakaṃ, nanu avocumha ‘‘oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ samadhigamo hotīti dassanatthaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti evaṃ vutta’’nti.
再者,“寻与伺的止息”是此净信之因,非如去除烦恼浑浊之止息;“寻与伺的止息”亦是心一境性之因,非如近行定由去除诸盖得,亦非如初禅由禅支显现得。故此言是显示净信与心一境性之因的表述。同样地,“寻与伺的止息”是此无寻无伺之因,非如第三禅和第四禅以寻伺自无故,亦非如眼识等本性无故。故此言亦是显示无寻无伺之因的表述。而“无寻无伺”一语,并无他义,唯在显示寻与伺的缺无。是故虽已说前句,仍应再说此句。显示巴利原文
Apica vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ sampasādanaṃ, na kilesakālussiyassa. Vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā ekodibhāvaṃ, na upacārajjhānamiva nīvaraṇappahānā, na paṭhamajjhānamiva ca aṅgapātubhāvāti evaṃ sampasādanaekodibhāvānaṃ hetuparidīpakamidaṃ vacanaṃ. Tathā vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ avitakkaavicāraṃ, na tatiyacatutthajjhānāni viya cakkhuviññāṇādīni viya ca abhāvāti evaṃ avitakkaavicārabhāvassa hetuparidīpakañca. Na vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakaṃ, vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakameva pana ‘‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ. Tasmā purimaṃ vatvāpi puna vattabbamevāti.
“定生”:从初禅之定,或从与此禅相应之定所生起,这是它的含义。在此,虽然初禅亦从相应之定生起,但唯独此第二禅中的定,因无寻、伺的波动,极为安稳、极澄净,才真正堪当“定”之称名。因此,为赞叹此第二禅的功德,才只在这里说它是“定生”。“喜乐”:如前所说之理。“第二”:依计数的次第,它是第二个,故称第二;又或,此第二是续(初禅)而生起,故亦称第二。显示巴利原文
Samādhijanti paṭhamajjhānasamādhito, sampayuttasamādhito vā jātanti attho. Tattha kiñcāpi paṭhamajjhānampi sampayuttasamādhito jātaṃ, atha kho ayameva samādhi ‘‘samādhī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati vitakkavicārakkhobhavirahena ativiya acalattā suppasannattā ca. Tasmā imassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ idameva ‘‘samādhija’’nti vuttaṃ. Pītisukhanti idaṃ vuttanayameva. Dutiyanti gaṇanānupubbatā dutiyaṃ, idaṃ dutiyaṃ uppannantipi dutiyaṃ.
“由喜的离染”:“离染”是指对前述那种喜的厌离或超越;而两个词中间的“和”字是连接词,它连接的是“止息”或是“寻与伺的止息”。在这里,当它只连接“止息”时,应知其连接关系是:“由喜的离染,更因止息”。在此连接关系中,“离染”即厌离之意,故应如此看待其义:“由对喜的厌离与超越”。然而,当它连接“寻与伺的止息”时,应知其连接关系是:“由喜的离染,更因寻与伺的止息”。在此连接关系中,“离染”即超越之意,故应如此看待其义:“由喜的超越,及由寻与伺的止息”。显示巴利原文
Pītiyā ca virāgāti virāgo nāma vuttappakārāya pītiyā jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā, ubhinnaṃ pana antarā casaddo sampiṇḍanattho, so vūpasamaṃ vā sampiṇḍeti vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ vā. Tattha yadā vūpasamameva sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā virāgā ca, kiñca bhiyyo vūpasamā cāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāya virāgo jigucchanattho hoti, tasmā pītiyā jigucchanā ca samatikkamā cāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo. Yadā pana vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā ca virāgā, kiñca bhiyyo vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāya virāgo samatikkamanattho hoti, tasmā pītiyā ca samatikkamā, vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo.
寻与伺虽在第二禅时便已止息,但此处是为显示进入此第三禅之道,并为赞叹而说。因为宣说“寻与伺的止息”时,便令人了知:“此寻与伺的止息,即是入此禅那之道。”又如在第三圣道,对那些尚未被断除的“有身见”等结,却说“断五下分结”,那样的断除宣说,是为了赞叹,也是为了激励那些精勤于此的人,令其发起更猛利的精进力;同样地,于此,对其实已止息的寻与伺(在第二禅已止息,相对于第三禅而言并非新被止息)而说“止息”,亦是为了赞叹。因此,其义便被表述为:“由喜的超越,及由寻与伺的止息”。显示巴利原文
Kāmañcete vitakkavicārā dutiyajjhāneyeva vūpasantā, imassa pana jhānassa maggaparidīpanatthaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthañcetaṃ vuttaṃ. Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti hi vutte idaṃ paññāyati ‘‘nūna vitakkavicāravūpasamo maggo imassa jhānassā’’ti. Yathā ca tatiye ariyamagge appahīnānampi sakkāyadiṭṭhādīnaṃ ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ pahānā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.373; ma. ni. 2.133; saṃ. ni. 5.184; a. ni. 3.88) evaṃ pahānaṃ vuccamānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti, tadadhigamāya ussukkānaṃ ussāhajanakaṃ, evameva idha avūpasantānampi vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo vuccamāno vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti. Tenāyamattho vutto ‘‘pītiyā ca samatikkamā vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā’’ti.
“住于舍者”:此处,“舍”源于“从旁而观”(upapattito ikkhati),意为平等地看待,即不偏袒地看。由于具备那种清晰、广大、稳固的舍,成就第三禅那者便被称为“住于舍者”。显示巴利原文
Upekkhako ca viharatīti ettha upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā , samaṃ passati apakkhapatitā hutvā passatīti attho. Tāya visadāya vipulāya thāmagatāya samannāgatattā tatiyajjhānasamaṅgī ‘‘upekkhako’’ti vuccati.
舍有十种,即:六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、精进舍、行舍、受舍、观舍、中舍、禅那舍、遍净舍。显示巴利原文
Upekkhā pana dasavidhā hoti chaḷaṅgupekkhā brahmavihārupekkhā bojjhaṅgupekkhā vīriyupekkhā saṅkhārupekkhā vedanupekkhā vipassanupekkhā tatramajjhattupekkhā jhānupekkhā pārisuddhupekkhāti.
其中,“六支舍”是指经中所说的:“诸比丘,此处,漏尽比丘以眼见色之后,既不喜悦也不忧伤,住于舍,具念、正知。”(《增支部》6.1)此即漏尽者于六根门,面对可爱与不可爱的六所缘境时,不舍离原本清净本性的舍,称为六支舍。显示巴利原文
Tattha yā ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavo bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno’’ti (a. ni. 6.1) evamāgatā khīṇāsavassa chasu dvāresu iṭṭhāniṭṭhachaḷārammaṇāpāthe parisuddhapakatibhāvāvijahanākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ chaḷaṅgupekkhā nāma.
而所谓「梵住舍」,即如经中所说:“以舍俱行之心遍满一方而住。”这是于有情众生所持的中舍,名为梵住舍。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.556; ma. ni. 1.77) evamāgatā sattesu majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ brahmavihārupekkhā nāma.
而所谓「觉支舍」,即如经中所说:“依远离修习舍觉支。”这是于俱生诸法所持的中舍,名为觉支舍。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti vivekanissita’’nti (ma. ni. 2.247) evamāgatā sahajātadhammānaṃ majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ bojjhaṅgupekkhā nāma.
而所谓「精进舍」,即如经中所说:“时时作意舍相。”这是不过急、不过缓的精进,名为精进舍。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘kālena kālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasikarotī’’ti (a. ni. 3.103) evamāgatā anaccāraddhanātisithilavīriyasaṅkhātā upekkhā, ayaṃ vīriyupekkhā nāma.
所谓“行舍”,即依《无碍解道》所说:“有多少行舍由止生起?有多少行舍由观生起?八种行舍由止生起,十种行舍由观生起。”在对诸盖等进行简择、舍离、安住、执取时,保持于中道的舍,即名行舍。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘kati saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, kati saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti? Aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.57) evamāgatā nīvaraṇādipaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanāgahaṇe majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā nāma.
所谓“受舍”,即依《法集论》所说:“有时,欲界善心以与舍俱行的方式生起。”此不苦不乐之舍,称为受舍。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti upekkhāsahagata’’nti (dha. sa. 150) evamāgatā adukkhamasukhasaññitā upekkhā, ayaṃ vedanupekkhā nāma.
所谓“观舍”,即依经中所说:“凡是存在的、已生的,他皆舍断,并证得舍。”在简择过程中保持于中道的舍,即名观舍。显示巴利原文
Yā ‘‘yadatthi yaṃ bhūtaṃ, taṃ pajahati, upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.71; a. ni. 7.55) evamāgatā vicinane majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā nāma.
其中,于欲等未了结法中所出现的、能令俱生诸法平等和合的舍,即名为‘此中立舍’。显示巴利原文
Yā pana chandādīsu yevāpanakesu āgatā sahajātānaṃ samavāhitabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhā nāma.
而所谓‘禅那舍’,是指如经中所说的‘具舍而住’(《法集论》163;《长部》1.230),那是即使面对最上之乐也不生起偏向的舍,名为禅那舍。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhako ca viharatī’’ti (dha. sa. 163; dī. ni. 1.230) evamāgatā aggasukhepi tasmiṃ apakkhapātajananī upekkhā, ayaṃ jhānupekkhā nāma.
而所谓‘遍净舍’,是指如经中所说的‘舍念清净第四禅’(《法集论》165;《长部》1.232),那是清净了一切对立、即使在对立已被止息时亦无所作用的舍,名为遍净舍。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhāna’’nti (dha. sa. 165; dī. ni. 1.232) evamāgatā sabbapaccanīkaparisuddhā paccanīkavūpasamanepi abyāpārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ pārisuddhupekkhā nāma.
此中,六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、中舍、禅那舍与遍净舍,从义理上实为一体,皆为此中舍本身。只是依不同阶段状态,才作此分别,恰如一个存在的人,依男孩、青年、长老、将军、国王等不同阶段而得名。因此应如此理解:在这些舍中,当有六支舍时,即无觉支舍等;或有觉支舍时,则无六支舍等。显示巴利原文
Tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā ca brahmavihārupekkhā ca bojjhaṅgupekkhā ca tatramajjhattupekkhā ca jhānupekkhā ca pārisuddhupekkhā ca atthato ekā, tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti. Tena tena avatthābhedena panassāyaṃ bhedo. Ekassāpi sato sattassa kumārayuvattherasenāpatirājādivasena bhedo viya, tasmā tāsu yattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā, na tattha bojjhaṅgupekkhādayo. Yattha vā pana bojjhaṅgupekkhā, na tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhādayo hontīti veditabbā.
就如这些舍在义理上合为一体,行舍与观舍也是如此。那其实只是慧本身,依其作用分为两种。譬如有人在黄昏时分,拿着山羊脚棍寻找进入家中的蛇。他在谷仓中看见那蛇盘卧,仔细察看,见到三环纹,便断定:‘这是蛇,并非他物’,这种简择中所生起的中立心态,就是所谓的‘观舍’。又如那人用山羊脚棍将蛇牢牢压住,心中思惟:‘我怎能既不伤害此蛇,又不被蛇咬,而将它放走呢?’当他这样寻思放走的方法时,在抓取中也有中立心态。同样地,因已照见三相,修行者视三界如大火坑,对诸行生起中立心态,这便称为‘行舍’。如此,当观舍成就时,行舍也得以成就。而此舍正是依‘简择时的中立’与‘抓取时的中立’这两种作用,才分为两种。至于精进舍与受舍,这两者彼此之间,以及与其他诸舍在义理上,则全然不同。显示巴利原文
Yathā cetāsaṃ atthato ekībhāvo, evaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanupekkhānampi. Paññā eva hi sā, kiccavasena dvidhā bhinnā. Yathā hi purisassa sāyaṃ gehaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ sappaṃ ajapadadaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pariyesamānassa taṃ thusakoṭṭhake nipannaṃ disvā ‘‘sappo nu kho, no’’ti avalokentassa sovatthikattayaṃ disvā nibbematikassa ‘‘sappo, na sappo’’ti vicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, evameva yā āraddhavipassakassa vipassanāñāṇena lakkhaṇattaye diṭṭhe saṅkhārānaṃ aniccabhāvādivicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā. Yathā pana tassa purisassa ajapadadaṇḍena gāḷhaṃ sappaṃ gahetvā ‘‘kintāhaṃ imaṃ sappaṃ aviheṭhento attānañca iminā aḍaṃsāpento muñceyya’’nti muñcanākārameva pariyesato gahaṇe majjhattatā hoti, evameva yā lakkhaṇattayassa diṭṭhattā āditte viya tayo bhave passato saṅkhāragahaṇe majjhattatā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā. Iti vipassanupekkhāya siddhāya saṅkhārupekkhāpi siddhāva hoti. Iminā panesā vicinanagahaṇesu majjhattasaṅkhātena kiccena dvidhā bhinnāti. Vīriyupekkhā pana vedanupekkhā ca aññamaññañca avasesāhi ca atthato bhinnā evāti. Āha cettha –
中立、梵住、觉支、六支、禅那、遍净——这些便是舍。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Majjhattabrahmabojjhaṅgachaḷaṅgajhānasuddhiyo; Vipassanā ca saṅkhāravedanā vīriyaṃ iti. Vitthārato dasopekkhā, cha majjhattādito tato; Duve paññā tato dvīhi, catassova bhavantimā’’ti.
因此,在这些舍中,这里指的是「禅那舍」。它以中舍性为特相。有人问:「此禅那舍,从义理上岂不就是中舍性吗?而中舍性亦存于初禅与第二禅,故在那二禅中也应说『具舍而住』,为何此处不说呢?」答:因为其作用不明显。之所以不明显,是因为在那些禅那中,它的作用被寻等所征服;而在此处,此舍不被寻、伺、喜所征服,如首昂起,作用明显,故于此处说。显示巴利原文
Iti imāsu upekkhāsu jhānupekkhā idha adhippetā. Sā majjhattalakkhaṇā. Etthāha – ‘‘nanu cāyaṃ atthato tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti, sā ca paṭhamadutiyajjhānesupi atthi, tasmā tatrapi ‘upekkhako ca viharatī’ti evamayaṃ vattabbā siyā, sā kasmā na vuttā’’ti? Aparibyattakiccato. Aparibyattañhi tassa tattha kiccaṃ vitakkādīhi abhibhūtattā, idha panāyaṃ vitakkavicārapītīhi anabhibhūtattā ukkhittasirā viya hutvā paribyattakiccā jātā, tasmā vuttāti.
现在解释「具念与正知」:此处「念」指能忆念,「正知」指能正确了知。因此,这是就补特伽罗而说的念与正知。其中,念的特征是忆念,正知的特征是不迷乱。虽然这种念与正知在之前的禅那中也是存在的——因为若人失念、无正知,则连近行定亦不得成就,更何况安止定——然而,那些禅那较为粗显,犹如在平地行,心容易感受乐,故念与正知的作用彼时还不明显。第三禅因为舍弃了粗重的支分而变得微细,如同在刀刃上行走,心必须被念与正知的作用摄持方得安住,故唯独在此处强调念与正知。再者,犹如小牛被从母牛身边拉开,若不守护,又会跑回母牛那里;同样,此第三禅之乐虽已离喜,若不以念与正知守护,则可能再回到喜,或成与喜相应。又,有情于乐易生染着,而第三禅之乐极为甘甜,因为由此往上更无乐。然而,正是依念与正知之力,于此乐中方不染着,非依其他方法。当知唯为显示此殊胜义,故仅于此说。显示巴利原文
Idāni sato ca sampajānoti ettha saratīti sato. Sampajānātīti sampajāno. Iti puggalena sati ca sampajaññañca vuttaṃ. Tattha saraṇalakkhaṇā sati. Asammohalakkhaṇaṃ sampajaññaṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi idaṃ satisampajaññaṃ purimajjhānesupi atthi, muṭṭhassatissa hi asampajānassa upacāramattampi na sampajjati, pageva appanā. Oḷārikattā pana tesaṃ jhānānaṃ bhūmiyaṃ viya purisassa cittassa gati sukhā hoti, abyattaṃ tattha satisampajaññakiccaṃ. Oḷārikaṅgappahānena pana sukhumattā imassa jhānassa purisassa khuradhārāyaṃ viya satisampajaññakiccapariggahitā eva cittassa gati icchitabbāti idheva vuttaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo – yathā dhenupago vaccho dhenuto apanīto arakkhiyamāno punadeva dhenuṃ upagacchati, evamidaṃ tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ pītito apanītampi satisampajaññārakkhena arakkhiyamānaṃ punadeva pītiṃ upagaccheyya, pītisampayuttameva siyā. Sukhe vāpi sattā sārajjanti, idañca atimadhuraṃ sukhaṃ tato paraṃ sukhābhāvā. Satisampajaññānubhāvena panettha sukhe asārajjanā hoti, no aññathāti imampi atthavisesaṃ dassetuṃ idaṃ idheva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
现在解释「以身感受乐」:虽然证得第三禅的人并无感受乐之作意,然而由于他拥有与名身相应之乐,且由这种名身相应之乐所生的极为殊胜之色,触及其色身;因被触及故,即使从禅那出起后,亦能感受乐。为显此义,故说「以身感受乐」。显示巴利原文
Idāni sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetīti ettha kiñcāpi tatiyajjhānasamaṅgino sukhapaṭisaṃvedanābhogo natthi, evaṃ santepi yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, yaṃ vā taṃ nāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhānenassa yasmā atipaṇītena rūpena rūpakāyo phuṭṭho, yassa phuṭṭhattā jhānā vuṭṭhitopi sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyya, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedehī’’ti āha.
现在解释「诸圣者所称说的“具舍、具念、乐住”」:此处的意思是,以此为因、以此禅那为缘故,佛陀等圣者们对于证得第三禅的补特伽罗,称扬、宣说、施设、安立、开显、分别、阐明、彰显——也就是赞叹。赞叹他如何?说他是“具舍、具念、乐住”。应知此即指成就这第三禅而安住。显示巴利原文
Idāni yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti ettha yaṃjhānahetu yaṃjhānakāraṇā taṃ tatiyajjhānasamaṅgipuggalaṃ buddhādayo ariyā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti pakāsenti, pasaṃsantīti adhippāyo. Kinti? Upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti. Taṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatīti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
再者,圣者们为何要这样赞叹呢?因为他值得赞叹。在第三禅中,乐虽已达极致、极为甘美,他依然“具舍”,不因贪著乐而被牵引。又因无有如喜那般的生起,他正念现前而“具念”。更由于他以名身感受那种无杂染、圣者所爱乐、唯圣者亲近的乐,所以值得赞叹。因此,圣者们为彰显这些应受赞叹的功德因相,便如此赞叹为“具舍、具念、乐住”。应这样理解。“第三”:按数目次第是第三,也因其是第三个生起,故称第三。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana taṃ te evaṃ pasaṃsantīti? Pasaṃsārahato. Ayañhi yasmā atimadhurasukhe sukhapāramippattepi tatiyajjhāne upekkhako, na tattha sukhābhisaṅgena ākaḍḍhīyati. Yathā ca pīti na uppajjati, evaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitāya satimā. Yasmā ca ariyakantaṃ ariyajanasevitameva ca asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ sukhaṃ nāmakāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, tasmā pasaṃsāraho hoti. Iti pasaṃsārahato naṃ ariyā te evaṃ pasaṃsārahahetubhūte guṇe pakāsentā ‘‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsantīti veditabbaṃ. Tatiyanti gaṇanānupubbatā tatiyaṃ, tatiyaṃ uppannantipi tatiyaṃ.
「由舍断乐,由舍断苦」:即舍断身乐与身苦。「先已」:指这种舍断必定是在之前便已完成的,不在第四禅的刹那。「由喜忧之灭没」:是说心乐与心忧这两种感受的先已灭没,也就是舍断。那么,这些乐、苦、喜、忧是在何时被舍断的呢?是在诸禅各自的近行刹那。喜唯在第四禅的近行刹那被舍断;而苦、忧、乐则在初禅、二禅、三禅的近行刹那就被舍断了。所以,此处虽未依舍断次第明说,但根据《根分别》(vibha. 219等)中诸根的排列顺序,当知它们正是这样被舍断的。显示巴利原文
Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānāti kāyikasukhassa ca kāyikadukkhassa ca pahānā. Pubbevāti tañca kho pubbeva, na catutthajjhānakkhaṇe. Somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāti cetasikasukhassa cetasikadukkhassa cāti imesampi dvinnaṃ pubbeva atthaṅgamā, pahānā icceva vuttaṃ hoti. Kadā pana nesaṃ pahānaṃ hoti? Catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe. Somanassañhi catutthassa jhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyati, dukkhadomanassasukhāni paṭhamadutiyatatiyānaṃ upacārakkhaṇesu. Evametesaṃ pahānakkamena avuttānaṃ indriyavibhaṅge (vibha. 219 ādayo) pana indriyānaṃ uddesakkameneva idhāpi vuttānaṃ sukhadukkhasomanassadomanassānaṃ pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
然而,如果这些受仅仅在各个禅那的近行阶段被舍断,那么为何经中说:“所生的苦根于何处无余灭尽?比丘们,于此,比丘离诸欲……具足初禅而住。所生的苦根即于此处无余灭尽。所生的忧根、乐根、喜根于何处无余灭尽?比丘们,于此,比丘由断乐……具足第四禅而住。所生的喜根即于此处无余灭尽”(《相应部》5.510),像这样将灭尽说在诸禅那本身呢?这是因为殊胜的灭尽。于初禅等之中,对这些受而言是殊胜的灭尽,并非仅仅是灭尽。仅仅灭尽发生在近行阶段,而非殊胜的灭尽。正如在转向不同所缘时,虽然苦根在初禅近行中便已灭尽,但由于蚊虻叮咬或不舒适的坐姿等所生的苦受,仍有可能生起,而在安止定中则决不会生起。或者说,近行中所灭尽的受并未彻底灭尽,因为未被对立面所摧破。然而在安止定中,由于喜的遍满,全身为乐所浸润;对于乐所浸润之身,苦根因被对立面摧破而彻底灭尽。同样,在转向不同所缘时,虽然忧根在第二禅近行中已被舍断,但忧根以寻与伺为缘,当身有疲劳或心有损恼时便会生起;若无寻无伺,则决无生起。而它生起之处,即有寻有伺存在。显示巴利原文
Yadi panetāni tassa tassa jhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyanti , atha kasmā ‘‘kattha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ettha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati. Kattha cuppannaṃ domanassindriyaṃ, sukhindriyaṃ, somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ettha cuppannaṃ somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.510) evaṃ jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti? Atisayanirodhattā. Atisayanirodho hi tesaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīsu, na nirodhoyeva. Nirodhoyeva pana upacārakkhaṇe, nātisayanirodho. Tathā hi nānāvajjane paṭhamajjhānūpacāre niruddhassāpi dukkhindriyassa ḍaṃsamakasādisamphassena vā visamāsanūpatāpena vā siyā uppatti, na tveva antoappanāyaṃ. Upacāre vā niruddhampetaṃ na suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti paṭipakkhena avihatattā. Antoappanāyaṃ pana pītipharaṇena sabbo kāyo sukhokkanto hoti, sukhokkantakāyassa ca suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti dukkhindriyaṃ paṭipakkhena vihatattā. Nānāvajjaneyeva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi domanassindriyassa, yasmā etaṃ vitakkavicārapaccayepi kāyakilamathe cittūpaghāte ca sati uppajjati, vitakkavicārābhāve neva uppajjati. Yattha pana uppajjati, tattha vitakkavicārabhāve. Appahīnāyeva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre vitakkavicārāti tatthassa siyā uppatti, natveva dutiyajjhāne pahīnapaccayattā. Tathā tatiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi sukhindriyassa pītisamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭṭhakāyassa siyā uppatti, natveva tatiyajjhāne. Tatiyajjhāne hi sukhassa paccayabhūtā pīti sabbaso niruddhā hoti. Tathā catutthajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi somanassindriyassa āsannattā, appanāppattāya upekkhāya abhāvena sammā anatikkantattā ca siyā uppatti, natveva catutthajjhāne. Tasmā eva ca ‘‘etthuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti tattha tattha aparisesaggahaṇaṃ katanti.
于此,有人问:“既然如此,这些受在相应禅那的近行中即已舍断,为何在此将它们总集一处?”这是为了把握乐受(不苦不乐受)。因为在此所说的“不苦不乐”这一不苦不乐受,微细难辨,不易把握。正如牧牛人为了捕捉一头桀骜不驯、无论如何都无法靠近的牛,他先把所有牛都赶入同一牛栏,然后逐一将它们赶出,当那头牛依序出来时,他便说:“就是这一头,抓住它!”这样便能将它捉住。同样地,为了把握不苦不乐受,便将所有这些受总集一处。如此总集之后,一一指出,便能令人了知:“那既非乐、非苦、非喜、非忧的,正是这不苦不乐受。”显示巴利原文
Etthāha – ‘‘athevaṃ tassa tassa jhānassūpacāre pahīnāpi etā vedanā idha kasmā samāharī’’ti ? Sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ . Yā hi ayaṃ ‘‘adukkhamasukha’’nti ettha adukkhamasukhā vedanā vuttā, sā sukhumā dubbiññeyyā na sakkā sukhena gahetuṃ, tasmā yathā nāma duṭṭhassa yathā tathā vā upasaṅkamitvā gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyassa goṇassa gahaṇatthaṃ gopo ekasmiṃ vaje sabbā gāvo samāharati, athekekaṃ nīharanto paṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ ‘‘ayaṃ so gaṇhatha na’’nti tampi gāhāpeti, evamevaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ sabbāpi etā samāhari. Evañhi samāhaṭā etā dassetvā ‘‘yaṃ neva sukhaṃ, na dukkhaṃ, na somanassaṃ, na domanassaṃ, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhāvedanā’’ti sakkā hoti esā gāhayituṃ.
此外,当知宣说这些受,也是为了显示不苦不乐心解脱的缘。因为断乐、断苦等正是它的缘。如经中说:“贤友,有四个缘能证得不苦不乐心解脱等至。贤友,于此,比丘由断乐……具足第四禅而住。贤友,这些便是证得不苦不乐心解脱等至的四个缘。”(《中部》1.458)又如他处虽已断有身见等,但为称扬第三道的功德而说于彼处断;同样,也应知此处说这些受,是为了称扬此第四禅的功德。或者,也当知说这些受,是为了通过摧毁其缘而显示贪与嗔极为遥远。因为在这些受中,乐是喜的缘,喜是贪的缘;苦是忧的缘,忧是嗔的缘。当乐等被摧毁时,以其为缘的贪与嗔便被摧毁,因而成为极远。显示巴利原文
Apica adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā paccayadassanatthañcāpi etā vuttāti veditabbā. Sukhadukkhappahānādayo hi tassā paccayā. Yathāha – ‘‘cattāro kho, āvuso, paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ime kho āvuso, cattāro paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458). Yathā vā aññattha pahīnāpi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo tatiyamaggassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ tattha pahīnāti vuttā , evaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthampetassa jhānassetā idha vuttātipi veditabbā. Paccayaghātena vā ettha rāgadosānaṃ atidūrabhāvaṃ dassetumpetā vuttāti veditabbā. Etāsu hi sukhaṃ somanassassa paccayo, somanassaṃ rāgassa, dukkhaṃ domanassassa, domanassaṃ dosassa. Sukhādighātena ca sappaccayā rāgadosā hatāti atidūre hontīti.
“不苦不乐”:因无苦,故为不苦;因无乐,故为不乐。因此,此处的“不苦不乐”并非仅指无苦无乐,而是显示与苦乐相对立的第三受。所谓第三受,即不苦不乐,亦名为舍。其特相为领纳非可爱、非不可爱之境。“舍念清净”:指由舍所生的念清净。在此禅中,念极为清净,而此念清净正是由舍所成,非由其他。故称为“舍念清净”。而令此中念得清净的舍,于义理上应知即是舍心。且不仅此中之念为清净,一切相应之法亦皆清净,但这里是以念为首而作阐述的。显示巴利原文
Adukkhamasukhanti dukkhābhāvena adukkhaṃ. Sukhābhāvena asukhaṃ. Etenettha dukkhasukhapaṭipakkhabhūtaṃ tatiyavedanaṃ dīpeti, na dukkhasukhābhāvamattaṃ. Tatiyavedanā nāma adukkhamasukhā, upekkhātipi vuccati. Sā iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇā. Upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti upekkhāya janitasatipārisuddhiṃ. Imasmiñhi jhāne suparisuddhā sati, yā ca tassā satiyā pārisuddhi, sā upekkhāya katā, na aññena. Tasmā etaṃ ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti vuccati. Yāya ca upekkhāya ettha satiyā pārisuddhi hoti, sā atthato tatramajjhattatāti veditabbā. Na kevalañcettha tāya satiyeva parisuddhā, apica kho sabbepi sampayuttadhammā, satisīsena pana desanā vuttā.
在此,虽然此舍在下三层禅那中亦存在,然而,正如月牙于白昼虽存,却被太阳的光芒所掩,因其自身之柔和,或因未得与之相应的夜晚作为助伴,而于昼间显得不清净、不明亮;同样地,此“中舍性”之月牙,于初禅等中虽存,却为寻、伺等敌对法之威光所掩,且未得与之相应的舍受之夜作为助伴,故显不清净。因其不清净,那些与之俱生的念等,便如白昼中不清净的月牙之光,亦皆不清净。因此,于彼诸禅中,无一被称为“舍念清净”。然而,在此第四禅中,此“中舍性”之月牙,因不再受寻、伺等敌对法之威光所掩,且获得了与之相应的舍受之夜,故极为清净。因其清净,那些与之俱生的念等,便如清净月牙的光芒,亦变得清净、明亮。因此,应知唯此第四禅得名为“舍念清净”。“第四”:依计数次第为第四,亦因是第四个生起者,故为第四。显示巴利原文
Tattha kiñcāpi ayaṃ upekkhā heṭṭhāpi tīsu jhānesu vijjati, yathā pana divā sūriyappabhābhibhavā sommabhāvena ca attano upakārakattena vā sabhāgāya rattiyā alābhā divā vijjamānāpi candalekhā aparisuddhā hoti apariyodātā, evamayampi tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā vitakkādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā alābhā vijjamānāpi paṭhamajjhānādibhede aparisuddhā hoti. Tassā ca aparisuddhāya divā aparisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo aparisuddhāva honti. Tasmā tesu ekampi ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti na vuttaṃ. Idha pana vitakkādipaccanīkatejābhibhavābhāvā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā paṭilābhā ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā ativiya parisuddhā. Tassā parisuddhattā parisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo parisuddhā honti pariyodātā. Tasmā idameva ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Catutthanti gaṇanānupubbatā catutthaṃ, catutthaṃ uppannantipi catutthaṃ.
这四种禅那,于前行阶段与道刹那阶段皆各各不同。于前行阶段,依等至之别而有不同;于道刹那阶段,则依不同之道而有不同。这是因为,于某人,初道属初禅类型,第二道等亦属初禅类型,或属于第二禅等中的某一种禅那类型。于另一人,初道是第二禅等中的某一种禅那类型,第二道等亦是第二禅等中的某一种禅那类型,或属于初禅类型。如是,所有四道,从禅那的角度来看,可以相同,可以相异,亦可以部分相同、部分相异。而此处的差别,乃由基础禅那所决定。因为,对于证得初禅者,从初禅出定后修观,其所生起之道属初禅类型,而此中的道支与觉支皆是圆满的。从第二禅出定后修观,生起之道属第二禅类型,然此中的道支仅有七支。从第三禅出定后修观,生起之道属第三禅类型,道支有七支,觉支有六支。从第四禅开始,乃至非想非非想处,皆同此理。在无色界中,会生起四禅或五禅,且他们是出世间的,非世间的,这是已说之义。此处如何说?于此,亦是从初禅等中出定,证得入流道后,修习无色定,于无色界中证得更为殊胜者,其随后生起的后三道,亦皆属此类型。显示巴利原文
Imāni cattāri jhānāni pubbabhāgepi nānā, maggakkhaṇepi. Pubbabhāge samāpattivasena nānā, maggakkhaṇe nānāmaggavasena. Ekassa hi paṭhamamaggo paṭhamajjhāniko hoti, dutiyamaggādayopi paṭhamajjhānikā vā dutiyādīsu aññatarajjhānikā vā. Ekassa paṭhamamaggo dutiyādīnaṃ aññatarajjhāniko hoti, dutiyādayopi dutiyādīnaṃ aññatarajjhānikā vā paṭhamajjhānikā vā. Evaṃ cattāropi maggā jhānavasena sadisā vā asadisā vā ekaccasadisā vā honti. Ayaṃ panassa viseso pādakajjhānaniyamena hoti. Paṭhamajjhānalābhino hi paṭhamajjhānā vuṭṭhāya vipassantassa uppannamaggo paṭhamajjhāniko hoti, maggaṅgabojjhaṅgāni panettha paripuṇṇāneva honti. Dutiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya vipassantassa uppanno dutiyajjhāniko hoti, maggaṅgāni panettha satta honti. Tatiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya vipassantassa uppanno tatiyajjhāniko, maggaṅgāni panettha satta, bojjhaṅgāni cha honti. Esa nayo catutthajjhānato paṭṭhāya yāva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanā. Āruppe catukkapañcakajjhānaṃ uppajjati, tañca kho lokuttaraṃ, na lokiyanti vuttaṃ. Ettha kathanti? Etthapi paṭhamajjhānādīsu yato vuṭṭhāya sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭilabhitvā arūpasamāpattiṃ bhāvetvā yo āruppe uppanno, taṃjhānikāva tassa tattha tayo maggā uppajjanti. Evaṃ pādakajjhānameva niyameti. Keci pana therā ‘‘vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā niyamentī’’ti vadanti. Keci ‘‘puggalajjhāsayo niyametī’’ti vadanti. Keci ‘‘vuṭṭhānagāminī vipassanā niyametī’’ti vadanti.
于此,以下是次第解说——依观的决择而定:无论是干观者生起的道,还是等至获得者不以禅那为基础而生起的道,抑或是以初禅为基础、对种种诸行作观后引生的道,皆为初禅类型。在所有这些情况中,都具足七觉支、八道支和五禅支。因为,他们的前分观,可能是喜俱的,也可能是舍俱的;但在出起抵达行舍状态时,便唯有喜俱。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – vipassanāniyamena hi sukkhavipassakassa uppannamaggopi, samāpattilābhino jhānaṃ pādakaṃ akatvā uppannamaggopi, paṭhamajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā pakiṇṇakasaṅkhāre sammasitvā uppāditamaggopi paṭhamajjhānikova hoti, sabbesu satta bojjhaṅgāni aṭṭha maggaṅgāni pañca jhānaṅgāni honti. Tesañhi pubbabhāgavipassanā somanassasahagatāpi upekkhāsahagatāpi hutvā vuṭṭhānakāle saṅkhārupekkhābhāvaṃ pattā somanassasahagatāva hoti.
若依五禅支的分类,以第二禅、第三禅、第四禅为基础禅那而引生的道,依次具足四禅支、三禅支、二禅支;然而,在所有这些道中,道支皆为七支,而在第四禅时,觉支为六支。这一差别,既由基础禅那所决定,也由观所决定。因为,他们的前分观,既可能是喜俱,也可能是舍俱;但出起观唯独是喜俱。显示巴利原文
Pañcakanaye dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānāni pādakāni katvā uppāditamaggesu yathākkameneva jhānaṃ caturaṅgikaṃ tivaṅgikaṃ duvaṅgikañca hoti, sabbesu pana satta maggaṅgāni honti, catutthe cha bojjhaṅgāni. Ayaṃ viseso pādakajjhānaniyamena ceva vipassanāniyamena ca hoti. Tesampi hi pubbabhāgavipassanā somanassasahagatāpi upekkhāsahagatāpi hoti, vuṭṭhānagāminī somanassasahagatāva.
然而,以第五禅为基础而生起的道,则依舍与心一境性而有二禅支;觉支与道支则分别为六支和七支。这一差别,同样由两种决定所造成。因为,在此方式中,前分观可以是喜俱,也可以是舍俱;但出起观唯独是舍俱。以无色界禅那为基础而生起的道,道理也是如此。不过,在此四禅分类中,由于没有无寻唯伺的第二禅,故应将其排除,再以其余禅那来配合。如此,从基础禅那出定后,对任何诸行进行观察而引生的道,在邻近出起的阶段,那种出起的等至会使自身与之相似,恰如地面的颜色会影响蜥蜴的体色一般。显示巴利原文
Pañcamajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā nibbattitamagge pana upekkhācittekaggatāvasena dve jhānaṅgāni, bojjhaṅgamaggaṅgāni cha satta ceva. Ayampi viseso ubhayaniyamavasena hoti. Imasmiñhi naye pubbabhāgavipassanā somanassasahagatā vā upekkhāsahagatā vā hoti, vuṭṭhānagāminī upekkhāsahagatāva hoti. Arūpajjhānāni pādakāni katvā uppāditamaggepi eseva nayo. Idha pana catukkanaye avitakkavicāramattassa dutiyajjhānassa abhāvā taṃ apanetvā sesānaṃ vasena yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ pādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya ye keci saṅkhāre sammasitvā nibbattitamaggassa āsannapadese vuṭṭhitasamāpatti attanā sadisabhāvaṃ karoti bhūmivaṇṇo viya godhāvaṇṇassa.
在第二种长老的观点中:从任何等至出定后,观察他们至中的法所引生的道,即与他们至相似。此处关于观的决定,也应依前文所述之理了知。显示巴利原文
Dutiyattheravāde pana yato yato samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ye ye samāpattidhamme sammasitvā maggo nibbattito hoti, taṃtaṃsamāpattisadisova hoti. Tatrāpi ca vipassanāniyamo vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
在第三种长老的观点中:随顺自己的意乐,以某禅那为基、观察某禅那法后所引生的道,即与该禅那相似。然而,若无基禅那或所观察之禅那,仅凭意乐,此道不能成就。此处关于观的决定,亦应依前述之理了知。显示巴利原文
Tatiyattheravāde attano ajjhāsayānurūpena yaṃ yaṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā ye ye jhānadhamme sammasitvā maggo nibbattito, taṃtaṃjhānasadisova hoti. Pādakajjhānaṃ pana sammasitajjhānaṃ vā vinā ajjhāsayamatteneva taṃ na ijjhati. Etthāpi ca vipassanāniyamo vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
所谓‘此称为正定’,即此四种禅那中的心一境性,在前期是世间的,在后期是出世间的,名为正定。法将(舍利弗尊者)即如此依世间与出世间而开示道谛。其中,在世间道中,所有道支皆随其所应,以六种所缘中的某一种为所缘。然而,在出世间道中——对于为证悟四谛而转起的圣弟子:以涅槃为所缘、能断除无明随眠的慧眼,是正见;对于具足如是见者,与其相应、能断除三种邪思惟、将心投入涅槃之处的,是正思惟;对于如是见、如是思惟者,与其相应、能断除四种语恶行、远离邪语的,是正语;对于如是远离者,与其相应、能断除三种邪业、远离邪业的,是正业;而作为其语业与身业之清净根源,与其相应、能断除诡诈等、远离邪命的,是正命;对于如是安住于由正语、正业、正命所成的戒地者,与其相应、能断除懈怠,令未生之不善法不生、已生之不善法断除、未生之善法生起、已生之善法安住成就的策励精进,是正精进;对于如是精进者,与其相应、能驱除邪念、成就于身等观身等的无忘失心,是正念;对于以无上正念善护其心者,与其相应、能摧破邪定的一境性,是正定。此即出世间、圣的。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ vuccati sammāsamādhīti yā imesu catūsu jhānesu ekaggatā, ayaṃ pubbabhāge lokiyo, aparabhāge lokuttaro sammāsamādhi nāma vuccati. Evaṃ lokiyalokuttaravasena dhammasenāpati maggasaccaṃ deseti. Tattha lokiyamagge sabbāneva maggaṅgāni yathānurūpaṃ chasu ārammaṇesu aññatarārammaṇāni honti. Lokuttaramagge pana catusaccappaṭivedhāya pavattassa ariyasāvakassa nibbānārammaṇaṃ avijjānusayasamugghātakaṃ paññācakkhu sammādiṭṭhi, tathā sampannadiṭṭhissa taṃsampayutto tividhamicchāsaṅkappasamugghātako cetaso nibbānapadābhiniropano sammāsaṅkappo, tathā passantassa vitakkentassa ca taṃsampayuttāva catubbidhavacīduccaritasamugghātikā micchāvācāya virati sammāvācā, tathā viramantassa taṃsampayuttāva tividhamicchākammantasamucchedikā micchākammantā virati sammākammanto, tesaṃyeva cassa vācākammantānaṃ vodānabhūtā taṃsampayuttāva kuhanādisamucchedikā micchāājīvā virati sammāājīvo, tassāyevassa sammāvācākammantājīvasaṅkhātāya sīlabhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhamānassa tadanurūpo taṃsampayuttova kosajjasamucchedako, anuppannuppannānaṃ akusalakusalānaṃ anuppādappahānuppādaṭṭhitisādhako ca vīriyārambho sammāvāyāmo, evaṃ vāyamantassa taṃsampayuttova micchāsativiniddhunako, kāyādīsu kāyānupassanādisādhako ca cetaso asammoso sammāsati. Evaṃ anuttarāya satiyā suvihitacittārakkhassa taṃsampayuttāva micchāsamādhividdhaṃsikā cittekaggatā sammāsamādhi. Esa lokuttaro ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo.
此道与世间道共,被称为“趣向苦灭之道”。然而,此道因正见与正思惟归摄于“明”,其余诸法归摄于“行”,故既是明亦是行。同样,因前二支摄于“观乘”,其余支摄于“止乘”,故既是止亦是观。又因前二支摄于慧蕴,随后三支摄于戒蕴,最后三支摄于定蕴,并归摄于增上慧学、增上戒学、增上心学,故既是三蕴亦是三学。具足此道的圣弟子,犹如兼具明目与健足的旅人,成为明行具足者;以观乘避耽著欲乐之极端,以止乘避自我折磨之极端,而正行中道;以慧蕴摧破愚痴蕴,以戒蕴摧破瞋恚蕴,以定蕴摧破贪欲蕴;由增上慧学成就慧具足,由增上戒学成就戒具足,由增上心学成就定具足,如此证得三种成就,亲证不死涅槃。他即入初善、中善、后善之法,以三十七菩提分法宝庄严自身,名为入正性决定之圣地。显示巴利原文
Yo saha lokiyena maggena dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāti saṅkhyaṃ gato, so kho panesa maggo sammādiṭṭhisaṅkappānaṃ vijjāya sesadhammānaṃ caraṇena saṅgahitattā vijjā ceva caraṇañca. Tathā tesaṃ dvinnaṃ vipassanāyānena itaresaṃ samathayānena saṅgahitattā samatho ceva vipassanā ca. Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ paññākkhandhena tadanantarānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sīlakkhandhena avasesānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhikkhandhena adhipaññāadhisīlaadhicittasikkhāhi ca saṅgahitattā khandhattayañceva sikkhattayañca hoti. Yena samannāgato ariyasāvako dassanasamatthehi cakkhūhi gamanasamatthehi ca pādehi samannāgato addhiko viya vijjācaraṇasampanno hutvā vipassanāyānena kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ samathayānena attakilamathānuyoganti antadvayaṃ parivajjetvā majjhimapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno paññākkhandhena mohakkhandhaṃ, sīlakkhandhena dosakkhandhaṃ, samādhikkhandhena ca lobhakkhandhaṃ padālento adhipaññāsikkhāya paññāsampadaṃ, adhisīlasikkhāya sīlasampadaṃ, adhicittasikkhāya samādhisampadanti tisso sampattiyo patvā amataṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti. Ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇaṃ sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammaratanavicittaṃ sammattaniyāmasaṅkhātaṃ ariyabhūmiṃ okkanto hotīti.
关于谛的杂论解释显示巴利原文
Saccapakiṇṇakavaṇṇanā
于四圣谛中,苦圣谛以逼迫为相,集圣谛以生起为相,灭圣谛以寂静为相,道圣谛以出离为相;复次,依其等第,更有转起、令转起、还灭、令还灭之相。同样,亦有有为、渴爱、无为、见之相。显示巴利原文
Catūsu pana saccesu bādhanalakkhaṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, pabhavalakkhaṇaṃ samudayasaccaṃ, santilakkhaṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ maggasaccaṃ, apica pavattipavattakanivattinivattakalakkhaṇāni paṭipāṭiyā. Tathā saṅkhatataṇhāasaṅkhatadassanalakkhaṇāni ca.
问:何以但说四圣谛,无减无增耶?答:因无余谛可得,且于其中亦无一谛可舍。诚然,于此四圣谛外,既不能另加一谛,亦不可从中去除任何一谛。即如所说:显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana cattāreva ariyasaccāni vuttāni anūnāni anadhikānīti ce? Aññassa asambhavato aññatarassa ca anapaneyyabhāvato. Na hi etehi aññaṃ adhikaṃ vā, etesaṃ vā ekampi apanetabbaṃ sambhoti. Yathāha –
比丘们,于此,若有沙门或婆罗门前来这样说:‘这不是苦圣谛,而是另一个苦圣谛。我要把沙门乔达摩所教导的这个苦圣谛搁置一旁,另立一个苦圣谛。’这是不可能的。”等等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, āgaccheyya samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ‘netaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, aññaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ. Yaṃ samaṇena gotamena desitaṃ, ahametaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ paññapessāmī’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’tiādi.
比丘们,确实,若有任何沙门或婆罗门这样说:‘这不是沙门乔达摩所教导的第一苦圣谛,我否定此第一苦圣谛,另立一个第一苦圣谛。’这是不可能的。”等等(相应部 5.1086)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṃ vadeyya ‘netaṃ dukkhaṃ paṭhamaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, yaṃ samaṇena gotamena desitaṃ, ahametaṃ dukkhaṃ paṭhamaṃ ariyasaccaṃ paccakkhāya aññaṃ dukkhaṃ paṭhamaṃ ariyasaccaṃ paññapessāmī’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.1086).
此外,世尊在开示转起时,即开示其因;在开示还灭时,亦开示其方法。由此,因转起、还灭及二者之因,以此四者为最上,故只说四谛。同样地,依应遍知、应断、应证、应修习;依渴爱所依、渴爱、渴爱灭、渴爱灭的方法;以及依执著、乐著执著、断除执著、断除执著的方法,也只是说此四谛。显示巴利原文
Apica pavattimācikkhanto bhagavā sahetukaṃ ācikkhi, nivattiñca saupāyaṃ. Iti pavattinivattitadubhayahetūnaṃ etapparamato cattāreva vuttāni. Tathā pariññeyyapahātabbasacchikātabbabhāvetabbānaṃ, taṇhāvatthutaṇhātaṇhānirodhataṇhānirodhūpāyānaṃ, ālayaālayarāmatāālayasamugghātaālayasamugghātūpāyānañca vasenāpi cattāreva vuttānīti.
在此,苦圣谛由于粗显且为一切众生共有,易于了知,故先宣说。为显示其因,随后即说集圣谛。为表明“因灭则果灭”,继而说灭圣谛。最后,为显示证得彼灭的方法,而说最终的道圣谛。或者,为令贪著生存之乐的有情生起悚惧,首先说苦。为表明“此苦并非无因而生,亦非由主宰神等创造而生,而是由此因生”,紧接着说集。此后,对于被有因之苦所逼迫、心生悚惧、寻求出离苦者,通过显示苦的出离令其获得安慰,故说灭。最后,为证得灭,说能趣入灭的道。此即其说法的次第。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca oḷārikattā sabbasattasādhāraṇattā ca suviññeyyanti dukkhasaccaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasseva hetudassanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ samudayasaccaṃ, hetunirodhā phalanirodhoti ñāpanatthaṃ tato nirodhasaccaṃ, tadadhigamūpāyadassanatthaṃ ante maggasaccaṃ. Bhavasukhassādagadhitānaṃ vā sattānaṃ saṃvegajananatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ dukkhamāha. Taṃ neva akataṃ āgacchati, na issaranimmānādito hoti, ito pana hotīti ñāpanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ samudayaṃ. Tato sahetukena dukkhena abhibhūtattā saṃviggamānasānaṃ dukkhanissaraṇagavesīnaṃ nissaraṇadassanena assāsajananatthaṃ nirodhaṃ. Tato nirodhādhigamanatthaṃ nirodhasampāpakaṃ magganti ayametesaṃ kamo.
在这些圣谛中,应将苦圣谛视为重担,集圣谛视为执取重担,灭圣谛视为舍弃重担,道圣谛视为舍弃重担的方法。或将苦圣谛视为疾病,集圣谛视为病因,灭圣谛视为病愈,道圣谛视为良药。或将苦圣谛视为饥荒,集圣谛视为干旱,灭圣谛视为丰收,道圣谛视为及时雨。进而,还可依怨敌、怨敌之根源、怨敌之根除、根除怨敌的方法,依毒树、树根、断除树根、断除的方法,依怖畏、怖畏的根源、无怖畏、证得无怖畏的方法,依此岸、大水、彼岸、到达彼岸的精勤——通过这些譬喻来通达四圣谛。显示巴利原文
Etesu pana bhāro viya dukkhasaccaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, bhārādānamiva samudayasaccaṃ, bhāranikkhepanamiva nirodhasaccaṃ, bhāranikkhepanūpāyo viya maggasaccaṃ. Rogo viya vā dukkhasaccaṃ, roganidānamiva samudayasaccaṃ, rogavūpasamo viya nirodhasaccaṃ, bhesajjamiva maggasaccaṃ. Dubbhikkhamiva vā dukkhasaccaṃ, dubbuṭṭhi viya samudayasaccaṃ, subhikkhamiva nirodhasaccaṃ, suvuṭṭhi viya maggasaccaṃ. Apica verīveramūlaverasamugghātaverasamugghātūpāyehi, visarukkharukkhamūlamūlūpacchedatadupacchedūpāyehi, bhayabhayamūlanibbhayatadadhigamūpāyehi, orimatīramahoghapārimatīrataṃsampāpakavāyāmehi ca yojetvāpetāni upamāto veditabbānīti.
然而,应知这一切圣谛,从究竟义而言,因无有感受者、造作者、寂灭者与到达者,故为空。因此有言:显示巴利原文
Sabbāneva panetāni saccāni paramatthena vedakakārakanibbutagamakābhāvato suññānīti veditabbāni. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
唯有苦存在,而无有受苦者;无有造作者,唯有造作存;
有寂灭存在,而无有寂灭者;有道存在,却无有行道者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dukkhameva hi na koci dukkhito, kārako na kiriyāva vijjati; Atthi nibbuti na nibbuto pumā, maggamatthi gamako na vijjatī’’ti.
Dhuvasubhasukhattasuññaṃ, purimadvayamattasuññamamatapadaṃ; Dhuvasukhaattavirahito, maggo iti suññatā tesu.
或者,苦、集、道三者于灭为空,灭于其余三者亦空。又或者,在这里,因于果为空:因为集中无苦,道中无灭,不似自然论者的自性那般,将果与因共置一处。果于因为空:因为苦与集、灭与道并不和合,不像和合论者所说的二微尘等那样,主张因与果和合。因此,如此说:显示巴利原文
Nirodhasuññāni vā tīṇi, nirodho ca sesattayasuñño. Phalasuñño vā ettha hetu samudaye dukkhassa abhāvato, magge ca nirodhassa, na phalena sagabbho pakativādīnaṃ pakati viya. Hetusuññañca phalaṃ dukkhasamudayānaṃ nirodhamaggānañca asamavāyā, na hetusamavetaṃ hetuphalaṃ samavāyavādīnaṃ dviaṇukādi viya. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“于此,三者于灭为空,彼涅槃亦以此三者为空;
因于果为空,彼果亦以彼因而空。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tayamidha nirodhasuññaṃ, tayena tenāpi nibbutī suññā; Suñño phalena hetu, phalampi taṃhetunā suñña’’nti.
一切圣谛彼此皆为“同类”,以其不虚妄、自性空,且皆难彻底证知。正如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Sabbāneva saccāni aññamaññasabhāgāni avitathato attasuññato dukkarapaṭivedhato ca. Yathāha –
“阿难,你认为如何?哪个更困难、更难达成:是有人从远处用极细的箭穿过钥匙孔,箭箭相续、毫无失误?还是用箭尖射穿分成七份的毫毛的毛尖?”“尊者,用箭尖射穿分成七份的毫毛的毛尖,这事更困难,也更难达成。”“然而,阿难,那些如实彻证‘此是苦’……乃至……如实彻证‘此是导向苦灭之道’的人,他们所彻证的,是更难以彻证的。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññasi, ānanda, katamaṃ nu kho dukkarataraṃ vā durabhisambhavataraṃ vā, yo dūratova sukhumena tāḷacchiggaḷena asanaṃ atipāteyya poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ avirādhitaṃ, yo vā sattadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭivijjheyyāti? Etadeva, bhante, dukkaratarañceva durabhisambhavatarañca; Yo vā sattadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭivijjheyyāti; Atha kho te, ānanda, duppaṭivijjhataraṃ paṭivijjhanti, ye ‘idaṃ dukkha’nti yathābhūtaṃ paṭivijjhanti…pe… ‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṃ paṭivijjhantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1115);
而彼此“相异”,则是依各自的“自相”来确定。前二谛(苦谛与集谛)彼此“同类”,因为皆甚深难入、属于世间、有漏;其“相异”在于果与因的差别,以及一为所应遍知、一为所应断除。后二谛(灭谛与道谛)彼此“同类”,因为皆甚深难入、出世间、无漏;其“相异”在于所缘与能缘的不同,以及一为所应证得、一为所应修习。第一与第三(苦谛与灭谛)亦为“同类”,以某种意义上皆可称为果故;其“相异”在于一为有为、一为无为。第二与第四(集谛与道谛)亦为“同类”,以皆可称为因故;其“相异”在于一为纯不善、一为纯善。第一与第四(苦谛与道谛)亦为“同类”,以皆是有为故;其“相异”在于一为世间、一为出世间。第二与第三(集谛与灭谛)亦为“同类”,以皆处于非有学、非无学状态故;其“相异”在于一为有所缘、一为无所缘。显示巴利原文
Visabhāgāni salakkhaṇavavatthānato. Purimāni ca dve sabhāgāni duravagāhatthena gambhīrattā lokiyattā sāsavattā ca, visabhāgāni phalahetubhedato pariññeyyapahātabbato ca. Pacchimānipi dve sabhāgāni gambhīrattena duravagāhattā lokuttarattā anāsavattā ca, visabhāgāni visayavisayībhedato sacchikātabbabhāvetabbato ca. Paṭhamatatiyāni cāpi sabhāgāni phalāpadesato, visabhāgāni saṅkhatāsaṅkhatato . Dutiyacatutthāni cāpi sabhāgāni hetuapadesato, visabhāgāni ekantakusalākusalato. Paṭhamacatutthāni cāpi sabhāgāni saṅkhatato, visabhāgāni lokiyalokuttarato. Dutiyatatiyāni cāpi sabhāgāni nevasekkhanāsekkhabhāvato, visabhāgāni sārammaṇānārammaṇato.
如是,智者依种种类别与方法,
便能遍知诸圣谛的同与异。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Iti evaṃ pakārehi, nayehi ca vicakkhaṇo; Vijaññā ariyasaccānaṃ, sabhāgavisabhāgata’’nti.
于此,一切苦有一类:即由转起状态而说;分为二类:依名色而分;分为三类:依欲有、色有、无色有等生有之差别而分;分为四类:依四种食之差别而分;分为五类:依五取蕴之差别而分。集亦有一类:即由令转起之状态而说;分为二类:依与见相应及不相应而分;分为三类:依欲爱、有爱、无有爱之差别而分;分为四类:依四道所应断而分;分为五类:依于色之欢喜等差别而分;分为六类:依六渴爱身之差别而分。灭亦有一类:即由无为界之状态而说——然依方便说,则分为二类:依有余依与无余依而分;分为三类:依三有之寂止而分;分为四类:依四道所应证得而分;分为五类:依五种欢喜之寂止而分;分为六类:依六渴爱身之灭尽差别而分。道亦有一类:即由所应修习而说;分为二类:依止与观之差别而分,或依见道与修道之差别而分;分为三类:依三蕴之差别而分。因此道是有部分故,正如城市为国土所包含,它亦为无部分的三蕴所包含。显示巴利原文
Sabbameva cettha dukkhaṃ ekavidhaṃ pavattibhāvato, duvidhaṃ nāmarūpato, tividhaṃ kāmarūpārūpūpapattibhavabhedato, catubbidhaṃ catuāhārabhedato, pañcavidhaṃ pañcupādānakkhandhabhedato. Samudayopi ekavidho pavattakabhāvato, duvidho diṭṭhisampayuttāsampayuttato, tividho kāmabhavavibhavataṇhābhedato, catubbidho catumaggappaheyyato, pañcavidho rūpābhinandanādibhedato, chabbidho chataṇhākāyabhedato. Nirodhopi ekavidho asaṅkhatadhātubhāvato, pariyāyato pana duvidho saupādisesaanupādisesato, tividho bhavattayavūpasamato, catubbidho catumaggādhigamanīyato, pañcavidho pañcābhinandanavūpasamato, chabbidho chataṇhākāyakkhayabhedato. Maggopi ekavidho bhāvetabbato, duvidho samathavipassanābhedato, dassanabhāvanābhedato vā, tividho khandhattayabhedato. Ayañhi sappadesattā nagaraṃ viya rajjena nippadesehi tīhi khandhehi saṅgahito. Yathāha –
贤友毗舍佉,并非由圣八支道统摄三蕴,而是由三蕴统摄圣八支道。贤友毗舍佉,正语、正业、正命,这些法统摄于圣戒蕴中。正精进、正念、正定,这些法统摄于圣定蕴中。正见、正思惟,这些法统摄于圣慧蕴中。显示巴利原文
‘‘Na kho, āvuso visākha, ariyena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena tayo khandhā saṅgahitā, tīhi ca kho, āvuso visākha, khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahito. Yā, cāvuso visākha, sammāvācā yo ca sammākammanto yo ca sammāājīvo, ime dhammā sīlakkhandhe saṅgahitā. Yo ca sammāvāyāmo yā ca sammāsati yo ca sammāsamādhi, ime dhammā samādhikkhandhe saṅgahitā. Yā ca sammādiṭṭhi yo ca sammāsaṅkappo, ime dhammā paññākkhandhe saṅgahitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.462).
依入流道等,分为四种。显示巴利原文
Catubbidho sotāpattimaggādivasena.
再者,一切谛以一种方式而言,皆是真实不虚,或皆是应证知者。以两种方式,可分为世间与出世间,或分为有为与无为。以三种方式,可分为:见修所断、无断,以及非所断非无断。以四种方式,即为:应遍知、应断、应证、应修。显示巴利原文
Apica sabbāneva saccāni ekavidhāni avitathattā, abhiññeyyattā vā. Duvidhāni lokiyalokuttarato, saṅkhatāsaṅkhatato vā. Tividhāni dassanabhāvanāhi pahātabbato appahātabbato nevapahātabbanāpahātabbato ca. Catubbidhāni pariññeyyapahātabbasacchikātabbabhāvetabbatoti.
同样地,觉者以种种方式了知这些难以觉悟的圣谛,
了知其种种分类,这是为了利益与安乐。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Evaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ, dubbodhānaṃ budho vidhiṃ; Anekabhedato jaññā, hitāya ca sukhāya cā’’ti.
现在,法将(舍利弗)依照世尊所教导的次第,在末尾开示了四谛组之后,通过“那以了知义为智”等语句,以四谛组来总结显示闻所成智。如此,便将之前所说的“于耳注集住的慧是闻所成智”这一切内容归纳显示出来。显示巴利原文
Idāni dhammasenāpati bhagavatā desitakkameneva ante saccacatukkaṃ niddisitvā ‘‘taṃ ñātaṭṭhena ñāṇa’’ntiādinā saccacatukkavasena sutamaye ñāṇaṃ nigametvā dasseti. Evaṃ ‘‘sotāvadhāne paññā sutamaye ñāṇa’’nti pubbe vuttaṃ sabbaṃ nigametvā dassetīti.
第二·戒所成智说注释显示巴利原文
2. Sīlamayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
37 在「戒所成智」的解释中,「五」是数目的限定;「戒」则是被这样限定下来的法的称谓。而「有边清净戒」等说法,是从自相上展示这五种戒。在「有边清净」等词中,就好比因为衣料与蓝色有关联,即使衣料本身并非蓝色,也可以说“它有蓝色”,从而称为「蓝衣」;同样地,因为在数目上有边际、有范围,所以称为「有边」;或者,对于已受具足戒者,其具足戒便有了终结;对于未受具足戒者,也有终结——这里的“边”就是终结的意思,由于它有这样一种终结,所以称为「有边」。本来应该说成‘有边的’,要知道这里省略了s音,正如‘dakaṃ dakāsayā pavisantī’这句话中省略了u音一样。清净的状态就是「清净」,既有边又是清净,所以称为「有边清净」;这种被称为有边清净的戒,就是「有边清净戒」。与刚才所说的相反,不是有边际的,所以称为「无边」;或者说,它没有那种边际,所以也称为「无边」;或者说,它的边际已经增长,所以也称为「无边」。从受戒那一刻起,戒就不曾破损;即便有了破损,也因已作出出罪等补救;而且连一念……显示巴利原文
37. Sīlamayañāṇaniddese pañcāti gaṇanaparicchedo. Sīlānīti paricchinnadhammanidassanaṃ. Pariyantapārisuddhisīlantiādi pañcannaṃ sarūpato dassanaṃ. Pariyantapārisuddhītiādīsu yathā nīlavaṇṇayogato vatthampi nīlamassa atthīti nīlanti vuccati, evaṃ gaṇanavasena pariyanto paricchedo assā atthīti pariyantā, upasampannasīle patto anupasampannasīlassa avasānasabbhāvato vā pariyanto avasānaṃ assā atthīti pariyantā. Sapariyantāti vā vattabbe sakāralopo katoti veditabbo ‘‘dakaṃ dakāsayā pavisantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.78; a. ni. 4.33) ettha ukāralopo viya. Parisuddhabhāvo pārisuddhi, pariyantā ca sā pārisuddhi cāti pariyantapārisuddhi, pariyantapārisuddhisaṅkhātaṃ sīlaṃ pariyantapārisuddhisīlaṃ. Vuttapaṭipakkhena na pariyantāti apariyantā, natthi etissā pariyantotipi apariyantā, vuddho etissā pariyantotipi apariyantā. Samādānato pabhuti akhaṇḍitattā khaṇḍitāpi katapaṭikammattā cittuppādamattakenāpi malena virahitattā ca parisuddhajātimaṇi viya sudhantasuparikammakatasuvaṇṇaṃ viya ca parisuddhattā ariyamaggassa padaṭṭhānabhūtā anūnaṭṭhena paripūṇṇā. Diṭṭhiyā pahīnattā diṭṭhiparāmāsena aggahitattā aparāmaṭṭhā.Ayaṃ te sīle dosoti kenaci codakena parāmasituṃ asakkuṇeyyattā vā aparāmaṭṭhā. Arahattaphalakkhaṇe sabbadarathapaṭippassaddhiyā paṭippassaddhi. Anupasampannānanti anavasesasamādānavasena sīlasampadāya bhusaṃ sampannāti upasampannā, na upasampannā anupasampannā. Tesaṃ anupasampannānaṃ.
「有边学处」:在这里,从应学的意义而称为「学」,从部分的意义而称为「处」,意思就是应学的各个部分。再者,由于安住于戒者还须向上证得更高之法,因此一切善法都是「学」;而戒作为这些「学」的安立处,故为「处」;因为是诸学的基础,所以叫作「学处」。以这些学处为边际,即「有边学处」,这便是指那些有边学处者。其中又有两种边际:学处边际与时间边际。什么是学处边际?优婆塞、优婆夷各自受持一条、二条、三条、四条、五条、八条乃至十条学处;在学尼、沙弥、沙弥尼则受持十条学处。这就是学处边际。什么是时间边际?优婆塞、优婆夷在行布施时,受持以食事结束为时限的戒;或来到寺院后,受持以停留在寺院期间为时限的戒;或限定一日、二日、三日乃至更多日夜为期限而受持戒。这就是时间边际。在这两种边际中,以学处为边际而受持的戒,会因违犯或命终而止息;以时间为边际而受持的戒,则因相应时限的逾越而止息。显示巴利原文
Pariyantasikkhāpadānanti ettha sikkhitabbaṭṭhena sikkhā, koṭṭhāsaṭṭhena padāni, sikkhitabbakoṭṭhāsānīti attho. Apica sīle patiṭṭhitena uparipattabbattā sabbe kusalā dhammā sikkhā, sīlāni tāsaṃ sikkhānaṃ patiṭṭhaṭṭhena padānīti sikkhānaṃ padattā sikkhāpadāni , pariyantāni sikkhāpadāni etesanti pariyantasikkhāpadā. Tesaṃ pariyantasikkhāpadānaṃ. Ettha ca dve pariyantā sikkhāpadapariyanto ca kālapariyanto ca. Katamo sikkhāpadapariyanto? Upāsakopāsikānaṃ yathāsamādānavasena ekaṃ vā dve vā tīṇi vā cattāri vā pañca vā aṭṭha vā dasa vā sikkhāpadāni honti, sikkhamānasāmaṇerasāmaṇerīnaṃ dasa sikkhāpadāni. Ayaṃ sikkhāpadapariyanto. Katamo kālapariyanto? Upāsakopāsikā dānaṃ dadamānā parivesanapariyantaṃ sīlaṃ samādiyanti, vihāragatā vihārapariyantaṃ sīlaṃ samādiyanti, ekaṃ vā dve vā tayo vā bhiyyo vā rattindivāni paricchedaṃ katvā sīlaṃ samādiyanti. Ayaṃ kālapariyanto. Imesu dvīsu pariyantesu sikkhāpadaṃ pariyantaṃ katvā samādinnaṃ sīlaṃ vītikkamanena vā maraṇena vā paṭippassambhati, kālaṃ pariyantaṃ katvā samādinnaṃ taṃtaṃkālātikkamena paṭippassambhati.
「无边学处」显示巴利原文
Apariyantasikkhāpadānanti –
这些律仪防护,是正自觉者所开示;
以上以省略方式所示者,即律仪防护中的诸学处。」——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nava koṭisahassāni, asīti satakoṭiyo; Paññāsa satasahassāni, chattiṃsa ca punāpare. ‘‘Ete saṃvaravinayā, sambuddhena pakāsitā; Peyyālamukhena niddiṭṭhā, sikkhā vinayasaṃvare’’ti. –
如此,从数目上说虽有边际,但因以无余受持、不依利养、名誉、亲族、肢体乃至生命等而设定边际,以及更上应守护的戒无分际之故,这些学处便没有边际,称为“无边”。他们具足无边学处,故称“无边学处者”。这些无边学处者,或意为“增上边际学处者”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ gaṇanavasena pariyantānampi sikkhāpadānaṃ anavasesasamādānabhāvavasena lābhayasañātiaṅgajīvitahetu adiṭṭhapariyantabhāvavasena upari rakkhitabbasīlaparicchedābhāvavasena ca natthi etesaṃ pariyantoti apariyantāni. Apariyantāni sikkhāpadāni etesanti apariyantasikkhāpadā. Tesaṃ apariyantasikkhāpadānaṃ, vuddhapariyantasikkhāpadānanti vā attho.
在「凡夫善人」(puthujjanakalyāṇaka)等词当中——显示巴利原文
Puthujjanakalyāṇakānantiādīsu –
「凡夫」:由「众多」和「生」等原因;或因归属于凡夫之类,故此人即是「众多之人」。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Puthūnaṃ jananādīhi, kāraṇehi puthujjano; Puthujjanantogadhattā, puthuvāyaṃ jano iti’’. –
纵使尚未超越前面所说的凡夫特征,然而——显示巴利原文
Vuttaputhujjanalakkhaṇānatikkamepi –
「佛陀——日亲——曾说有两种凡夫:一种是盲目的凡夫,另一种是善良的凡夫。」
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano’’ti. –
在两种凡夫中,由善法的和合而超越盲目凡夫状态、安住于善良凡夫状态者,即称为“凡夫善人”或“善良凡夫”。或者说,在凡夫中为善者,即是“凡夫善人”。显示巴利原文
Vuttaputhujjanadvaye kalyāṇadhammasamāgamena andhaputhujjanabhāvaṃ atikkamma kalyāṇaputhujjanabhāve ṭhitānaṃ puthujjanakalyāṇakānaṃ kalyāṇaputhujjanānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Puthujjanesu vā kalyāṇakānaṃ puthujjanakalyāṇakānaṃ.
在“于善法相应者”中,“善”一词依语境见于健康、无过失、善巧、乐报等义。如用于问候:“尊者是否安善?尊者是否无病?”即表健康义。在“尊者,何等身行是善?”“大王,无过失的身行即是善”以及“尊者,再者,世尊于善法中开示法,此即是无上”等处,表无过失义。在“你于车的各部善巧”“四位女子学得了歌舞的善巧”等处,表善巧义。在“诸比丘,由受持善法”“由造作、累积了善业”等处,表乐报义。而在此处,此词兼有健康、无过失、乐报三种意义。显示巴利原文
Kusaladhamme yuttānanti ettha kusalasaddo tāva ārogyānavajjachekasukhavipākesu dissati. Ayañhi ‘‘kacci nu bhoto kusalaṃ, kacci bhoto anāmaya’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.15.146; 2.20.129) ārogye dissati. ‘‘Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro kusalo? Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro anavajjo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.361) ca ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhante, etadānuttariyaṃ yathā bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti kusalesu dhammesū’’ti ca (dī. ni. 3.145) evamādīsu anavajje. ‘‘Kusalo tvaṃ rathassa aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ (ma. ni. 2.87), kusalā naccagītassa sikkhitā cāturitthiyo’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.22.94) cheke. ‘‘Kusalānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ samādānahetu (dī. ni. 3.80). Kusalassa kammassa katattā upacitattā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 431) sukhavipāke. Svāyamidha ārogyepi anavajjepi sukhavipākepi vaṭṭati.
此处词义:能令卑劣恶法动摇、震荡、坏灭者,称为善。或以卑劣的方式运行、转起者称为“kusā”,割断、斩断这些“kusā”者,称为善。或由使卑劣者变得微细、薄弱的智慧称为“kusaṃ”,依此智应得、应取、应转起者,称为善。又如茅草割伤握住其两端的手,同样,这些善法也割断位于两侧的杂染——已生与未生,故如同茅草能割断,称为善。又,依健康义、无过失义,或由巧慧所生义,亦可称为善。但此处专指观善,故应知舍弃其余义,唯为显示彼义而作单数词“善法”。意即:于观善法中,恒常勤行、恭敬而行,故为相应。显示巴利原文
Vacanattho panettha kucchite pāpake dhamme salayanti calayanti kampenti viddhaṃsentīti kusalā. Kucchitena vā ākārena sayanti pavattantīti kusā, te kuse lunanti chindantīti kusalā. Kucchitānaṃ vā sānato tanukaraṇato kusaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tena kusena lātabbā gahetabbā pavattetabbāti kusalā, yathā vā kusā ubhayabhāgagataṃ hatthappadesaṃ lunanti, evamimepi uppannānuppannabhāvena ubhayabhāgagataṃ saṃkilesapakkhaṃ lunanti, tasmā kusā viya lunantīti kusalā. Apica ārogyaṭṭhena anavajjaṭṭhena kosallasambhūtaṭṭhena vā kusalā. Idha pana yasmā vipassanākusalameva adhippetaṃ, tasmā sese vihāya tasseva dassanatthaṃ ‘‘kusaladhamme’’ti ekavacanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Vipassanākusaladhamme sātaccakiriyatāya sakkaccakāritāya ca yuttānanti attho.
「有学边际」:此处,「有学」指出于三学而生的修行者,也指这些法属于七类有学,或指他们自身仍处于学习之中。即:入流道与果、斯陀含道与果、阿那含道与果、阿罗汉道等法。这些有学法处于边际、终尽之处,或者这些有学法是其边际、分界,故称「有学边际」。应如此连接:在那些有学边际中的诸法。「圆满行」:指令其圆满、令其成就圆满的人,或者具备圆满行、圆满修习的人。这是指那些在入流道之前分的有学边际行道法中,以观的修习圆满而成就圆满行的人。「于身命无恋着」中:「身」指身体。因身体由不净物积聚而成,以及由头发等低劣物、眼病等数百种病而起,故称为身。「命」指命根。因为众生依它而活,故称为命。这些人对身与命无所恋着,即无有爱着之意。显示巴利原文
Sekkhapariyante paripūrakārīnanti ettha tīsu sikkhāsu jātātipi sekkhā, sattannaṃ sekkhānaṃ etetipi sekkhā, sayameva sikkhantītipi sekkhā . Sotāpattimaggaphalasakadāgāmimaggaphalaanāgāmimaggaphalaarahattamaggadhammā . Te sekkhā dhammā pariyante avasāne etassa, te vā sekkhā dhammā pariyanto paricchedo etassāti sekkhapariyanto. Tasmiṃ sekkhapariyante dhammeti sambandho. Paripūraṃ paripuṇṇataṃ karontīti paripūrakārino, paripūrakāro paripūrakiriyā etesaṃ atthīti vā paripūrakārino. Tesaṃ sotāpattimaggassa pubbabhāgabhūte sekkhapariyante paṭipadādhamme vipassanāpāripūriyā paripūrakārīnaṃ. Kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhānanti ettha kāyeti sarīre. Sarīrañhi asucisañcayato kucchitānañca kesādīnaṃ cakkhurogādīnañca rogasatānaṃ āyabhūtattā kāyoti vuccati. Jīviteti jīvitindriye. Tañhi jīvanti tenāti jīvitanti vuccati. Natthi etesaṃ apekkhāti anapekkhā, nissinehāti attho. Tesaṃ tasmiṃ kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhānaṃ.
现在,为了显示他们对身命无所恋着的原因,而说「已舍命者」。因为正是通过对世尊、对老师,或对自己生命的全然舍弃,当身体遭受疲劳,乃至生命消亡时,他们也无有恋着。「七类有学」:即被称为「有学」、正在修学之中的入流道等七种圣者。「如来弟子」:即如来的弟子。在这八类圣者中,他们因在听闻之末,由圣之生而生,以不坏净信相应,恭敬听闻世尊的教说与教诫,故称为「弟子」。为了特别显示其中最上的阿罗汉果位者,而说「诸漏尽者」,即依阿罗汉道智灭尽一切烦恼者。「独觉佛」:即依种种因缘,独自无师而觉悟四圣谛者。指这样的独觉佛。显示巴利原文
Idāni tesaṃ tesu anapekkhattassa kāraṇaṃ dassento pariccattajīvitānanti āha. Bhagavato ācariyassa vā sakajīvitapariccāgeneva hi te kilamamānepi kāye vinassamānepi jīvite anapekkhā hontīti. Sattannaṃ sekkhānanti sikkhantīti sekkhāti laddhanāmānaṃ sotāpattimaggaṭṭhādīnaṃ sattannaṃ ariyapuggalānaṃ. Tathāgatasāvakānanti tathāgatassa sāvakānaṃ. Aṭṭhapi hi ariyapuggalā savanante ariyāya jātiyā jātattā bhagavato desanaṃ anusiṭṭhiṃ aveccappasādayogena sakkaccaṃ suṇantīti sāvakā. Tesupi arahattaphalaṭṭheyeva visesetvā dassento khīṇāsavānanti āha, arahattamaggañāṇena parikkhīṇasabbāsavānanti attho. Paccekabuddhānanti taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca ekova anācariyako catusaccaṃ bujjhitavāti paccekabuddho. Tādisānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ.
「如来」:于此,世尊以八种理由被称为如来:因如同过去诸佛所行之道而来,故为如来;因如同过去诸佛所证而往,故为如来;因如实相而来,故为如来;因对如实法已如其实证得正觉,故为如来;因如实见,故为如来;因如实说,故为如来;因如实行,故为如来;因超越、胜伏一切,故为如来。显示巴利原文
Tathāgatānanti ettha aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato – tathā āgatoti tathāgato, tathā gatoti tathāgato, tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato, tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato, tathadassitāya tathāgato, tathavāditāya tathāgato, tathā kāritāya tathāgato, abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato.
为何世尊称为“如来”?因为他如同过去诸佛那样而来。是怎样的“如”而来呢?如同过去的正自觉者,为了利益一切世间,发起精勤,以那样的方式而来。意思是:过去诸佛依其愿行而来,我们的世尊也依同样的愿行而来。或者,如同过去诸佛圆满修习布施、持戒、出离、智慧、精进、忍辱、真实、决意、慈、舍这十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜与十究竟波罗蜜,总成三十波罗蜜;实践了舍弃肢体、眼睛、财物、王位、妻儿这五种大舍;圆满了前际瑜伽、前际行、法开示、义利知行等,到达悲智之行的顶点而来,我们的世尊也同样地而来。又如同过去诸佛修习并增长了四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八圣道支而来,我们的世尊也同样地而来。因此称为如来。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhagavā tathā āgatoti tathāgato? Yathā sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannā purimakā sammāsambuddhā āgatā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yenābhinīhārena purimakā bhagavanto āgatā, teneva amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Atha vā yathā purimakā bhagavanto dānasīlanekkhammapaññāvīriyakhantisaccādhiṭṭhānamettupekkhāsaṅkhātā dasa pāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā aṅgapariccāgaṃ nayanadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāganti ime pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajitvā, pubbayogapubbacariyadhammakkhānañātatthacariyādayo pūretvā buddhicariyāya koṭiṃ patvā āgatā, tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Yathā ca purimakā bhagavanto cattāro satipaṭṭhāne cattāro sammappadhāne cattāro iddhipāde pañcindriyāni pañca balāni satta bojjhaṅge ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvetvā brūhetvā āgatā, tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgatoti tathāgato.
正如燃灯佛等诸牟尼,已来此世间证得一切知性;
同样地,此释迦牟尼也已来此,因此被称为“如来”,具眼者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yatheva dīpaṅkarabuddhaādayo, sabbaññubhāvaṃ munayo idhāgatā; Tathā ayaṃ sakyamunīpi āgato, tathāgato vuccati tena cakkhumā’’ti.
为何称世尊为“如来”?因为他“如去”——如同过去诸佛刚刚降生时那样行去。他们如何行去呢?他们刚刚降生,便双足平立于大地,面向北方,以七步跨越而行。正如经中所言:“阿难,菩萨初降生时,便以双足平立于地,面朝北方,踏行七步。有天人高举白色伞盖,他遍观十方,发出狮子吼:‘我为世间最上者,世间之长者,世间之殊胜者。此是我最后之生,再无后有。’”(《中部》3.207;《长部》2.31)他的这种行步,便成为未来证得众多殊胜成果的前兆,真实不虚。具体而言:降生时双足平立,是获得四神足的前兆;面朝北方,是超胜一切世间的前兆;行步七步,是获得七觉支宝的前兆;如经中所说“金色拂尘飘动”(《经集》693),那拂尘摇曳,是降伏一切外道的前兆;高举白色伞盖,是证得阿罗汉解脱、殊胜无垢白伞盖的前兆;遍观十方,是获得遍知无碍智的前兆;作狮子吼,则是转动不退转胜法轮的前兆。同样地,我们的世尊也是如此行去,而……显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato? Yathā sampatijātā purimakā bhagavanto gatā. Kathañca te gatā? Te hi sampatijātā samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya uttarenamukhā sattapadavītihārena gatā. Yathāha ‘‘sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gacchati setamhi chatte anudhārayamāne, sabbā ca disā anuviloketi, āsabhiñca vācaṃ bhāsati ‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’’’ti (ma. ni. 3.207; dī. ni. 2.31). Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi avitathaṃ anekesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Yañhi so sampatijāto samehi pādehi patiṭṭhahi, idamassa caturiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, uttaramukhabhāvo panassa sabbalokuttarabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ, sattapadavītihāro sattabojjhaṅgaratanapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, ‘‘suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā’’ti (su. ni. 693) ettha vuttacāmarukkhepo pana sabbatitthiyanimmathanassa pubbanimittaṃ, setacchattadhāraṇaṃ arahattaphalavimuttivaravimalasetacchattapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, sabbādisānuvilokanaṃ sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, āsabhivācābhāsanaṃ pana appaṭivattiyavaradhammacakkappavattanassa pubbanimittaṃ. Tathāyaṃ bhagavāpi gato. Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi avitathaṃ tesaṃyeva visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Tenāhu porāṇā –
犹如牛王方降诞,双足平齐触大地;
乔达摩迈出七步,天人于上擎白盖。
乔达摩走了七步之后,便周遍观察十方;
发出具足八支的音声,犹如狮子屹立山巅。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Muhuttajātova gavaṃpatī yathā, samehi pādehi phusī vasundharaṃ; So vikkamī satta padāni gotamo, setañca chattaṃ anudhārayuṃ marū. ‘‘Gantvāna so satta padāni gotamo, disā vilokesi samā samantato; Aṭṭhaṅgupetaṃ giramabbhudīrayi, sīho yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito’’ti.
如此,他如是而去,故称如来。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato.
又或者,如同过去的诸佛世尊,这位世尊也完全相同:由出离而舍断欲贪……由初禅而舍断诸盖……由无常随观而舍断常想……由阿罗汉道而舍断一切烦恼而逝去。如此,因为是‘那样逝去’,故名为如来。显示巴利原文
Atha vā yathā purimakā bhagavanto, ayampi bhagavā tatheva nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ…pe… paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇe…pe… aniccānupassanāya niccasaññaṃ…pe… arahattamaggena sabbakilese pahāya gato. Evampi tathā gatoti tathāgato.
如何是‘由如实相而来’而得名如来?地界的坚硬相真实不虚,水界的流动相真实不虚,火界的暖热相真实不虚,风界的支持相真实不虚,空界的不触相真实不虚,识界的了别相真实不虚。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato? Pathavīdhātuyā kakkhaḷattalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ, āpodhātuyā paggharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, tejodhātuyā uṇhattalakkhaṇaṃ, vāyodhātuyā vitthambhanalakkhaṇaṃ, ākāsadhātuyā asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ, viññāṇadhātuyā vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
同样地,色的变坏相真实不虚,受的感受相真实不虚,想的取相相真实不虚,行的造作相真实不虚,识的了别相真实不虚。显示巴利原文
Rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ, saññāya sañjānanalakkhaṇaṃ, saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
寻的特征是投向,伺的特征是审察,喜的特征是遍满,乐的特征是愉悦,心一境性的特征是不散乱,触的特征是接触。显示巴利原文
Vitakkassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ, vicārassa anumajjanalakkhaṇaṃ, pītiyā pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, sukhassa sātalakkhaṇaṃ, cittekaggatāya avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信根的特征是胜解,精进根的特征是策励,念根的特征是现前,定根的特征是不散乱,慧根的特征是了知。显示巴利原文
Saddhindriyassa adhimokkhalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyindriyassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ, satindriyassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, samādhindriyassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, paññindriyassa pajānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信力的特征是不为无信所动摇,精进力的特征是不为懈怠所动摇,念力的特征是不为失念所动摇,定力的特征是不为掉举所动摇,慧力的特征是不为无明所动摇。显示巴利原文
Saddhābalassa assaddhiye akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyabalassa kosajje, satibalassa muṭṭhassacce, samādhibalassa uddhacce, paññābalassa avijjāya akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ.
念觉支的相是现起,择法觉支的相是审察,精进觉支的相是策励,喜觉支的相是遍满,轻安觉支的相是寂止,定觉支的相是不散乱,舍觉支的相是审观。显示巴利原文
Satisambojjhaṅgassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pavicayalakkhaṇaṃ, vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ, pītisambojjhaṅgassa pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa upasamalakkhaṇaṃ, samādhisambojjhaṅgassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇaṃ.
正见的相是照见,正思惟的相是投向,正语的相是摄受,正业的相是等起,正命的相是洁白,正精进的相是策励,正念的相是现起,正定的相是不散乱。显示巴利原文
Sammādiṭṭhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāsaṅkappassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāvācāya pariggahalakkhaṇaṃ, sammākammantassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāājīvassa vodānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāvāyāmassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāsatiyā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammāsamādhissa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ.
无明的相是不知,行的相是思,识的相是了别,名的相是朝向,色的相是变坏,六处的相是处,触的相是触对,受的相是感受,爱的相是因,取的相是执取,有的相是累积,生的相是再生,老的相是衰老,死的相是死灭。显示巴利原文
Avijjāya aññāṇalakkhaṇaṃ, saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇaṃ, viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ, nāmassa namanalakkhaṇaṃ, rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ, saḷāyatanassa āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ, phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ, taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇaṃ, upādānassa gahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ, bhavassa āyūhanalakkhaṇaṃ, jātiyā nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ, jarāya jīraṇalakkhaṇaṃ, maraṇassa cutilakkhaṇaṃ.
界以空为相,处以处为相,念处以现起为相,正勤以精勤为相,神足以成就为相,根以增上为相,力以不动摇为相,觉支以导引为相,道以因 为相。显示巴利原文
Dhātūnaṃ suññatālakkhaṇaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ, satipaṭṭhānānaṃ upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, sammappadhānānaṃ padahanalakkhaṇaṃ, iddhipādānaṃ ijjhanalakkhaṇaṃ, indriyānaṃ adhipatilakkhaṇaṃ, balānaṃ akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ, bojjhaṅgānaṃ niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ, maggassa hetulakkhaṇaṃ.
圣谛以真实为相,止以不散乱为相,观以随观为相,止与观以同一味为相,双运以不乖越为相。显示巴利原文
Saccānaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ, samathassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, vipassanāya anupassanālakkhaṇaṃ, samathavipassanānaṃ ekarasalakkhaṇaṃ, yuganaddhānaṃ anativattanalakkhaṇaṃ.
戒清净以防护为相,心清净以不散乱为相,见清净以照见为相。显示巴利原文
Sīlavisuddhiyā saṃvaralakkhaṇaṃ, cittavisuddhiyā avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, diṭṭhivisuddhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ.
“尽智”以断除为特征,“无生智”以寂止为特征。显示巴利原文
Khaye ñāṇassa samucchedalakkhaṇaṃ, anuppāde ñāṇassa passaddhilakkhaṇaṃ.
“欲”以根为特征,“作意”以等起为特征,“触”以和合为特征,“受”以集会为特征,“定”以上首为特征,“念”以增上为特征,“慧”以殊胜为特征,“解脱”以核心为特征,“不死涅槃”以究竟为特征;这些都是真实、不虚的。这些真实相,依智行而抵达,无谬地证得,而非未证得者,即是如来。如此,以如实相而来,故为如来。显示巴利原文
Chandassa mūlalakkhaṇaṃ, manasikārassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ, phassassa samodhānalakkhaṇaṃ, vedanāya samosaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ, samādhissa pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ, satiyā ādhipateyyalakkhaṇaṃ, paññāya tatuttarilakkhaṇaṃ, vimuttiyā sāralakkhaṇaṃ, amatogadhassa nibbānassa pariyosānalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ. Etaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ ñāṇagatiyā āgato avirajjhitvā patto anuppattoti tathāgato. Evaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato.
如何因如实地正觉真实法而称为如来?真实法即是四圣谛。如经中所说:“比丘们,有四种真实、不虚、不异之法。是哪四种?‘这是苦’,比丘们,这是真实的,这是不虚的,这是不异的。”……(广说)。而世尊已正觉这些,因为已正觉真实,故称为如来。此处的“来”字,即是正觉之义。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato? Tathadhammā nāma cattāri ariyasaccāni. Yathāha – ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāni avitathāni anaññathāni. Katamāni cattāri? ‘Idaṃ dukkha’nti, bhikkhave, tathametaṃ avitathametaṃ anaññathameta’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1090) vitthāro. Tāni ca bhagavā abhisambuddhoti tathānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Abhisambodhattho hi ettha gatasaddo.
再者,老死由生为缘所生、所集起之义,是真实、不虚、不异的;……乃至……诸行由无明为缘所生、所集起之义,也是真实、不虚、不异的。同样,无明作为诸行之缘的义理,是真实、不虚、不异的;……乃至……生作为老死之缘的义理,也是真实、不虚、不异的。世尊已正觉此一切。因此,亦因已正觉这些真实,故名为如来。如是,因如实正觉真实之法,故为如来。显示巴利原文
Apica jarāmaraṇassa jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho…pe… saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāpaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Tathā avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho…pe… jātiyā jarāmaraṇassa paccayaṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Taṃ sabbaṃ bhagavā abhisambuddho. Tasmāpi tathānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgato. Evaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato.
如何以见真实故名为如来?世尊在包含天界的世间……乃至……于天人无量世界中的无量众生,当色所缘现于眼门时,能以一切方式了知、看见。在如此了知与看见时,他依那些色是否可意或不可意等方式,或者依所见、所闻、所觉、所识中所得的名称方式,例如:‘什么是色、色处?即依四大种所造,有颜色、可见、有对的色,如青、黄等。’——以多种名目、十三种分别、五十二种方式加以分析,这一切唯是真实,无有虚妄。此法亦适用于耳门等现起的声等所缘。世尊也曾这般说:‘比丘们,凡是在包含天界的世间……乃至……天人所见、所闻、所觉、所识、所得、所求、以心遍行的,我都了知,我都证知。这是如来所知道的,但如来不执取它。’如是,因见真实,故为如来。此处,于见真实的意义上,应了知‘如来’此词的成立。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato? Bhagavā yaṃ sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchantaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ sabbākārena jānāti passati. Evaṃ jānatā passatā ca tena taṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādivasena vā diṭṭhasutamutaviññātesu labbhamānakapadavasena vā ‘‘katamaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ? Yaṃ rūpaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītaka’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 616) nayena anekehi nāmehi terasahi vārehi dvipaññāsāya nayehi vibhajjamānaṃ tathameva hoti, vitathaṃ natthi . Esa nayo sotadvārādīsupi āpāthamāgacchantesu saddādīsu. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… sadevamanussāya diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, tamahaṃ jānāmi, tamahaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ, taṃ tathāgatassa viditaṃ, taṃ tathāgato na upaṭṭhāsī’’ti (a. ni. 4.24). Evaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato. Tattha tathadassīatthe tathāgatoti padasambhavo veditabbo.
如何以如实语故名为如来?就在那夜,世尊于菩提道场,坐于不败座,摧破四魔之顶,证得无上正等觉;又在另一夜,于双沙罗树间,入无余涅槃界而般涅槃。在此中间的四十五年间,从初成正觉时,乃至中正觉时、后正觉时,世尊所说——无论是契经、应颂……乃至方广,此一切文句与义理,皆无过失、无可指摘、不增不减、一切行相圆满,能摧伏于贪之迷恋,摧伏于瞋与痴之迷恋。其中连一丝一毫的过失也无。这一切犹如以同一印章印出、以同一量器度量、以同一杆秤称过一般,皆如此真实。正如世尊所说:‘纯陀,如来在哪一夜证得无上正等觉,在哪一夜入无余涅槃界般涅槃,于此中间所说、所谈、所阐释的,一切皆如此,而非其他。故名为如来。’此处,‘来(gata)’即是‘说’义。如是,如来乃因‘如实语’而名为如来。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathavāditāya tathāgato? Yaṃ rattiṃ bhagavā bodhimaṇḍe aparājitapallaṅke nisinno catunnaṃ mārānaṃ matthakaṃ madditvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, yañca rattiṃ yamakasālānamantare anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi, etthantare pañcacattālīsavassaparimāṇe kāle paṭhamabodhiyāpi majjhimabodhiyāpi pacchimabodhiyāpi yaṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ…pe… vedallaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ atthato ca byañjanato ca anavajjaṃ anupavajjaṃ anūnamanadhikaṃ sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ rāgamadanimmadanaṃ dosamohamadanimmadanaṃ, natthi tattha vālaggamattampi pakkhalitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ ekamuddikāya lañchitaṃ viya, ekanāḷikāya mitaṃ viya, ekatulāya tulitaṃ viya, ca tathameva hoti. Yathāha ‘‘yañca, cunda, rattiṃ tathāgato anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhati, yañca rattiṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, yaṃ etasmiṃ antare bhāsati lapati niddisati, sabbaṃ taṃ tathameva hoti, no aññathā. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.188). Gadaattho hi ettha gatasaddo. Evaṃ tathavāditāya tathāgato.
再者,“āgadana”即“āgada”,意为“话语”。他拥有真实、不颠倒的话语,因此将d音转为t音,便称为“tathāgata(如来)”。应知在这一含义上,词形如此成立。显示巴利原文
Apica āgadanaṃ āgado, vacananti attho. Tatho aviparīto āgado assāti dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti evametasmiṃ atthe padasiddhi veditabbā.
如何因“如行”而称为如来?世尊的身体随顺其语言,语言也随顺其身体,因此他怎么说,便怎么做;怎么做,便怎么说。如是,语言如何,身体便如何而行;身体如何,语言便如何而说。因此世尊说:“比丘们,如来怎么说,就怎么做;怎么做,就怎么说。正因如此,他被称为如来。”这便是从“如行”而得名如来的道理。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato? Bhagavato hi vācāya kāyo anulometi, kāyassāpi vācā, tasmā yathāvādī tathākārī yathākārī tathāvādī ca hoti. Evaṃbhūtassa cassa yathā vācā, kāyopi tathā gato pavattoti attho. Yathā ca kāyo, vācāpi tathā gatā pavattāti tathāgato. Tenevāha – ‘‘yathāvādī, bhikkhave, tathāgato tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Iti yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti. Evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato.
如何因征服之义而称为如来?他以戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见,征服一切众生,范围上至有顶天、下至无间地狱,横向遍及无量世界。他无可衡量,无有标准,不可测度、无量、无上,是王中之王、天中之天、帝释中的帝释、梵天中的梵天。因此世尊说:“比丘们,在含天神的世间……乃至含天神与人的世间中,如来是征服者,不被征服,唯是支配者、自在者。因此称为如来。”(增支部4.23)这便是从“征服”之义而得名如来。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato? Upari bhavaggaṃ heṭṭhā avīciṃ pariyantaṃ katvā tiriyaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu sabbasatte abhibhavati sīlena samādhinā paññāya vimuttiyā vimuttiñāṇadassanena, na tassa tulā vā pamāṇaṃ vā atthi, atulo appameyyo anuttaro rājādhirājā devānaṃ atidevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā. Tenāha – ‘‘sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… sadevamanussāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthu daso vasavattī. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23).
在此,应如是了知词语的成就:‘agado’如同‘agada’(药)。那么,这药指什么呢?即说法之优美与功德之积聚。正因如此,这位具大神力的良医,犹如以天药降伏蛇毒一般,征服一切外道论师及连同天界在内的世间。如是,在征服一切世间上,他拥有真实不颠倒、由说法优美及功德所成之药。因此,将d音转为t音,称为‘tathāgata’。这便是从‘征服’之义而来的解释。显示巴利原文
Tatthevaṃ padasiddhi veditabbā – agado viya agado. Ko panesa? Desanāvilāso ceva puññussayo ca. Tena hesa mahānubhāvo bhisakko dibbāgadena sappe viya sabbaparappavādino sadevakañca lokaṃ abhibhavati. Iti sabbalokābhibhavane tatho aviparīto desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññamayo ca agado assāti dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti veditabbo. Evaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato.
此外,如来也因‘如实地去’而称为如来,因‘去了如实’而称为如来。‘去’的意思是了知、超越、到达、行道。其中,对于整个世间,以遍知而如实地去了、了知了,所以是如来;对于世间的集,以断遍知而如实地去了、超越了,所以是如来;对于世间的灭,以作证而如实地去了、到达了,所以是如来;对于导向世间灭的道,以如实而去了、行道了,所以是如来。因此世尊说:‘比丘们!世间已被如来正觉,如来已离世间。比丘们!世间的集已被如来正觉,如来的世间集已断。比丘们!世间的灭已被如来正觉,如来的世间灭已作证。比丘们!导向世间灭的道已被如来正觉,如来的导向世间灭的道已修习。比丘们!凡含天神的世间……乃至以心所遍求的一切,这一切都已被如来正觉。因此称为如来。’(增支部4.23)此义也应如此了知。而这只是显示如来之所以为如来的要点而已。然而,唯有如来才能以一切方式赞叹如来的如来性。又因为一切佛陀在如来功德上也是平等的,所以依于一切而说‘诸如来’。显示巴利原文
Apica tathāya gatotipi tathāgato, tathaṃ gatotipi tathāgatoti. Gatoti avagato atīto patto paṭipannoti attho . Tattha sakalaṃ lokaṃ tīraṇapariññāya tathāya gato avagatoti tathāgato, lokasamudayaṃ pahānapariññāya tathāya gato atītoti tathāgato, lokanirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāya tathāya gato pattoti tathāgato, lokanirodhagāminipaṭipadaṃ tathaṃ gato paṭipannoti tathāgato. Tena yaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘loko, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasmā tathāgato visaṃyutto. Lokasamudayo, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasamudayo tathāgatassa pahīno. Lokanirodho, bhikkhave , tathāgatena abhisambuddho lokanirodho tathāgatassa sacchikato. Lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, lokanirodhagāminīpaṭipadā tathāgatassa bhāvitā. Yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… anuvicaritaṃ manasā, sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Tassa evampi attho veditabbo. Idampi ca tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvadīpane mukhamattameva. Sabbākārena pana tathāgatova tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvaṃ vaṇṇeyya. Yasmā pana sabbabuddhā tathāgataguṇenāpi samasamā, tasmā sabbesaṃ vasena tathāgatānanti āha.
‘阿拉汉’:因远离烦恼,因已杀灭怨敌、斩断轮辐,因应受资具等供养,因于为恶时无所隐秘,故如来是阿拉汉。实则,他依道断除了连同习气的烦恼,故极远离一切烦恼,安住于甚远之处,因此称为阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Arahantānanti kilesehi ārakattā, arīnaṃ arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvā tathāgato arahaṃ. Ārakā hi so sabbakilesehi suvidūravidūre ṭhito maggena savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ pahīnattāti arahaṃ.
So tato ārakā nāma, yassa yenāsamaṅgitā; Asamaṅgī ca dosehi, nātho tenārahaṃ mato.
又以道已杀他们烦恼敌故,由‘杀敌’之义,亦是阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Te cānena kilesārayo maggena hatāti arīnaṃ hatattāpi arahaṃ.
因为所有被称为贪等的怨敌,皆已灭尽;
而那位以智慧为利剑的依怙者,因此也被称为阿拉汉。
显示巴利原文 Yasmā rāgādisaṅkhātā, sabbepi arayo hatā; Paññāsatthena nāthena, tasmāpi arahaṃ mato.
再者,那以无明、有、渴爱为毂,以福行等诸行为轮辐,以老死为轮辋,由漏集所成之轴贯穿,组装于三有之车上的轮回之轮,无始时来流转不息。他于菩提座上,以精进双足稳立于戒地,以信之手执持能灭尽诸业的智斧,斩断了它的所有辐条。辐条既断,故亦名为阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Yañcetaṃ avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhipuññādiabhisaṅkhārānaṃ jarāmaraṇanemi āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā tibhavarathe samāyojitaṃ anādikālappavattaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ, tassānena bodhimaṇḍe vīriyapādehi sīlapathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya saddhāhatthena kammakkhayakaraṃ ñāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā sabbe arā hatāti arānaṃ hatattāpi arahaṃ.
因为他已用智剑斩断了轮回之轮的辐条
因此,这位世间怙主被称为阿拉汉。
显示巴利原文 Arā saṃsāracakkassa, hatā ñāṇāsinā yato; Lokanāthena tenesa, arahanti pavuccati.
又因他是最上的应供者,所以值得受用衣等资具及殊胜的供养。正因如此,当如来出现于世间时,凡具大威力的天与人,都不会在别处行供养。正如梵天娑婆主以须弥山般大的宝鬘供养如来,其他天与人,如频婆娑罗王、憍萨罗王等也各随力供养。对于已般涅槃的世尊,阿育王也散尽九十六俱胝财富,于全赡部洲建造了八万四千座精舍,更不必说其他种种殊胜供养了。由于值得受用资具等供养,所以他被称为阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Aggadakkhiṇeyyattā ca cīvarādipaccaye arahati pūjāvisesañca. Teneva ca uppanne tathāgate ye keci mahesakkhā devamanussā, na te aññattha pūjaṃ karonti. Tathā hi brahmā sahampati sinerumattena ratanadāmena tathāgataṃ pūjesi, yathābalañca aññe devā manussā ca bimbisārakosalarājādayo. Parinibbutampi ca bhagavantaṃ uddissa channavutikoṭidhanaṃ vissajjetvā asokamahārājā sakalajambudīpe caturāsīti vihārasahassāni patiṭṭhāpesi, ko pana vādo aññesaṃ pūjāvisesānanti paccayādīnaṃ arahattāpi arahaṃ.
因为这位世间庇护者堪受殊胜的供养与资具;
在世间,随顺其义理,这位胜利者得‘阿拉汉’之名。
显示巴利原文 Pūjāvisesaṃ saha paccayehi, yasmā ayaṃ arahati lokanātho; Atthānurūpaṃ arahanti loke, tasmā jino arahati nāmametaṃ.
正如世间某些自以为聪明的愚人,因畏惧恶名而暗中行恶,这位胜利者却从不如此;由于行恶时无有隐秘,故也是阿拉汉。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca loke ye keci paṇḍitamānino bālā asilokabhayena raho pāpaṃ karonti, evamesa na kadāci karotīti pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvatopi arahaṃ.
因为对于那如如不动者,在恶业中本无所谓的‘秘密’可言。
显示巴利原文 Yasmā natthi raho nāma, pāpakammesu tādino; Rahābhāvena tenesa, arahaṃ iti vissuto.
如是,于一切处亦然——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sabbathāpi –
他已远离并杀灭烦恼怨敌,故为牟尼;
已摧破轮回之轮,堪受诸资具等供养;
不于隐处造恶,是故名为阿拉汉。
显示巴利原文 Ārakattā hatattā ca, kilesārīna so muni; Hatasaṃsāracakkāro, paccayādīna cāraho; Na raho karoti pāpāni, arahaṃ tena vuccatīti.
然而,由于一切佛陀在阿拉汉功德上也是平等的,因此依一切佛陀而说‘诸阿拉汉’。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana sabbabuddhā arahattaguṇenāpi samasamā, tasmā sabbesaṃ vasena ‘‘arahantāna’’nti āha.
‘正自觉者’:因正确地、亲自觉悟了一切法,所以是正自觉者。的确,他正确觉悟了一切法:对应了知的法,觉悟为应了知;对应遍知的法,觉悟为应遍知;对应断除的法,觉悟为应断除;对应作证的法,觉悟为应作证;对应修习的法,觉悟为应修习。因此他说:显示巴利原文
Sammāsambuddhānanti sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho. Tathā hesa sabbadhamme sammā sambuddho, abhiññeyye dhamme abhiññeyyato buddho, pariññeyye dhamme pariññeyyato, pahātabbe dhamme pahātabbato, sacchikātabbe dhamme sacchikātabbato, bhāvetabbe dhamme bhāvetabbato. Tenevāha –
‘应了知的已被了知,应修习的已被修习;
应断的已被我断除,婆罗门,因此我是佛陀。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhiññātaṃ, bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṃ; Pahātabbaṃ pahīnaṃ me, tasmā buddhosmi brāhmaṇā’’ti. (ma. ni. 2.399; su. ni. 563);
或者,也可这样领会:眼是苦谛,作为其根本因、能令之生起的过去渴爱是集谛,二者不再转起的状态是灭谛,了知灭的道是道谛。如此,以逐一择取的方式,于一切法正确而亲自觉悟。对耳、鼻、舌、身、意,亦复如是。依此理趣,色等六处、眼识等六识身、眼触等六触、眼触所生受等六受、色想等六想、色思等六思、色渴爱等六渴爱身、色寻等六寻、色伺等六伺、色蕴等五蕴、十遍、十随念、依膨胀想等十想、发等三十二身分、十二处、十八界、欲有等九有、初禅等四禅那、慈修习等四无量、四无色定、逆观老死等、顺观无明等缘起支,都应如此配合而解。此处以一句贯穿:老死是苦谛,生是集谛,出离此二者是灭谛,了知灭的道是道谛。就这样,以逐一择取的方式,于一切法正确、亲自、随觉、通达。又,凡有任何应了知者,他皆已正确地觉悟了它们,因此,藉由解脱终智而成为‘正自觉者’。关于此功德的详细分判,将在后面说明。又,一切佛陀在‘正自觉者’这项功德上皆悉等同,为使一切佛皆被涵盖,原文遂说‘诸正自觉者’。显示巴利原文
Atha vā cakkhu dukkhasaccaṃ, tassa mūlakāraṇabhāvena samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhappajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccanti evaṃ ekekapaduddhārenāpi sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho. Esa nayo sotaghānajivhākāyamanesu. Eteneva nayena rūpādīni cha āyatanāni, cakkhuviññāṇādayo cha viññāṇakāyā, cakkhusamphassādayo cha phassā, cakkhusamphassajādayo cha vedanā, rūpasaññādayo cha saññā, rūpasañcetanādayo cha cetanā, rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā, rūpavitakkādayo cha vitakkā, rūpavicārādayo cha vicārā, rūpakkhandhādayo pañcakkhandhā, dasa kasiṇāni, dasa anussatiyo, uddhumātakasaññādivasena dasa saññā, kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā, dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, kāmabhavādayo nava bhavā, paṭhamādīni cattāri jhānāni, mettābhāvanādayo catasso appamaññā, catasso arūpasamāpattiyo, paṭilomato jarāmaraṇādīni, anulomato avijjādīni paṭiccasamuppādaṅgāni ca yojetabbāni. Tatrāyaṃ ekapadayojanā – jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, jāti samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhappajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccanti evaṃ ekekapaduddhārena sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho anubuddho paṭividdho. Yaṃ vā pana kiñci atthi neyyaṃ nāma, sabbassa sammā sambuddhattā vimokkhantikañāṇavasena sammāsambuddho. Tassa pana vibhāgo upari āvi bhavissatīti. Yasmā pana sabbabuddhā sammāsambuddhaguṇenāpi samasamā, tasmā sabbesaṃ vasena ‘‘sammāsambuddhāna’’nti āha.
38 现在,为了将‘有边际的清净’与‘无边际的清净’这两种戒各自细分为五种来显示,故说「有边之戒,有无边之戒」等语。然而,其他三种戒并没有这样的分别。其中,「以利得为边」是说以利得作为边界,若逾越此边界戒即毁坏,故名「以利得为边」。其余各词也是如此。这里,「名声」是指「眷属」。「于此」是指在此世间。「有一类」指某一个人。「以利得为因」是说利得本身就是原因,故说「以利得为因」,这是在表因的意义上使用从格。「以利得为缘」、「以利得为原因」都是它的同义词。正是依于此因,果得以生起,所以称为「缘」;又因为它能令果产生,所以称为「原因」。显示巴利原文
38. Idāni pariyantapārisuddhiapariyantapārisuddhisīladvaye ekekameva sīlaṃ pañcadhā bhinditvā dassetuṃ atthi sīlaṃ pariyantaṃ, atthi sīlaṃ apariyantantiādimāha. Itaresu pana tīsu sīlesu tathāvidho bhedo natthīti. Tattha lābhapariyantanti lābhena pariyanto bhedo etassāti lābhapariyantaṃ. Evaṃ sesānipi. Yasoti panettha parivāro. Idhāti imasmiṃ loke. Ekaccoti eko. Lābhahetūti lābhoyeva hetu lābhahetu, tasmā lābhahetutoti vuttaṃ hoti. Hetvatthe nissakkavacanaṃ. ‘‘Lābhapaccayā lābhakāraṇā’’ti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Hetumeva hi paṭicca etaṃ phalametīti paccayoti ca, phaluppattiṃ kārayatīti kāraṇanti ca vuccati.
「正如已受持的」:凡是已经受持、已经纳受的戒。「违犯」:指违越而行。像这样的戒,就是指具有这种性质的,也就是上面所说的那一类戒。「戒」:无论是居士戒还是出家戒,如果在开头或结尾有一条戒毁坏,就如同衣裳的边缘被割破,称为「破裂」;如果在中间有一条戒毁坏,就如同衣裳中间破了一个洞,称为「有孔」;如果连着两条或三条戒毁坏,就如同母牛背部或腹部生出了长条等异样颜色——如身体为黑红色等的母牛那样,称为「斑驳」;如果每隔一条戒毁坏一条,就如同母牛身上隔一处就有异色斑点那样,称为「杂色」。总而言之,由于七种与淫欲结合的状况,以及被忿恨、覆藏等恶法所染污,这些戒便都是破裂的、有孔的、斑驳的、杂色的。这些戒本身,因为不能使人从渴爱的奴役中解脱、成就自由之身,所以是「非自由的」;因为不被佛陀等智者所称赞,所以是「非智者所赞」的;因为被渴爱和邪见所执取,或者因为有人可指责说‘你在戒上有这样的过失’而被执取,所以是「所执取」的;因为它们不能导向近行定或安止定。显示巴利原文
Yathāsamādinnanti yaṃ yaṃ samādinnaṃ gahitaṃ. Vītikkamatīti ajjhācarati. Evarūpānīti evaṃsabhāvāni, vuttappakārānīti adhippāyo. Sīlānīti gahaṭṭhasīlāni vā hontu pabbajitasīlāni vā, yesaṃ ādimhi vā ante vā ekaṃ bhinnaṃ, tāni pariyante chinnasāṭako viya khaṇḍāni. Yesaṃ vemajjhe ekaṃ bhinnaṃ, tāni majjhe vinividdhasāṭako viya chiddāni. Yesaṃ paṭipāṭiyā dve vā tīṇi vā bhinnāni, tāni piṭṭhiyā vā kucchiyā vā uṭṭhitena dīghavaṭṭādisaṇṭhānena visabhāgavaṇṇena kāḷarattādīnaṃ aññatarasarīravaṇṇā gāvī viya sabalāni. Yesaṃ antarantarā ekekāni bhinnāni, tāni antarantarā visabhāgavaṇṇabinduvicitrā gāvī viya kammāsāni. Avisesena vā sabbānipi sattavidhena methunasaṃyogena kodhūpanāhādīhi ca pāpadhammehi upahatattā khaṇḍāni chiddāni sabalāni kammāsānīti. Tāniyeva taṇhādāsabyato mocetvā bhujissabhāvākaraṇena na bhujissāni. Buddhādīhi viññūhi na pasatthattā na viññuppasatthāni. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi parāmaṭṭhattā, kenaci vā ‘‘ayaṃ te sīlesu doso’’ti parāmaṭṭhuṃ sakkuṇeyyatāya parāmaṭṭhāni. Upacārasamādhiṃ appanāsamādhiṃ vā, atha vā maggasamādhiṃ phalasamādhiṃ vā na saṃvattayantīti asamādhisaṃvattanikāni. Na samādhisaṃvattanikānītipi pāṭho.
然而,有一些人这样解释其中的含义:「‘破裂’,指这些戒成为善法无法安住之处;‘有孔’也是同样的道理。‘斑驳’,指使清净之色变得杂乱了;‘杂色’也是同样的道理。‘非自由的’,指陷入了渴爱的奴役状态。‘非智者所赞’,指被智者们所呵斥责备。‘所执取’,指被渴爱牢牢抓住。‘不引生定’,指成为引发懊悔的依处。」显示巴利原文
Keci pana ‘‘khaṇḍānīti kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ appatiṭṭhābhūtattā, chiddānītipi evaṃ. Sabalānīti vivaṇṇakaraṇattā, kammāsānītipi evaṃ. Na bhujissānīti taṇhādāsabyaṃ gatattā. Na viññuppasatthānīti kusalehi garahitattā. Parāmaṭṭhānīti taṇhāya gahitattā. Asamādhisaṃvattanikānīti vippaṭisāravatthubhūtattā’’ti evamatthaṃ vaṇṇayanti.
「非无懊悔的依处」:因为这些戒会带来懊悔,所以它们不是无懊悔的立足之处,这是它的意思。「非欢悦的依处」:它们不能成为由无懊悔所生的微细喜悦的依处,因为不能引生这种喜悦。对于剩余的各个词句,也应当作同样的连结。「非喜的依处」:它们不能成为由微细喜悦所生的强大喜悦的依处。「非轻安的依处」:它们不能成为由强大喜悦所生的身轻安与心轻安的依处。「非乐的依处」:它们不能成为由轻安所生的身乐与心乐的依处。「非定的依处」:它们不能成为由乐所生的定的依处。「非如实知见的依处」:它们不能成为以定为近因的如实知见的依处。显示巴利原文
Na avippaṭisāravatthukānīti vippaṭisārāvahattā avippaṭisārassa patiṭṭhā na hontīti attho. Na pāmojjavatthukānīti avippaṭisārajāya dubbalapītiyā na vatthubhūtāni tassā anāvahattā . Evaṃ sesesupi yojanā kātabbā. Na pītivatthukānīti dubbalapītijāya balavapītiyā na vatthubhūtāni. Na passaddhivatthukānīti balavapītijāya kāyacittapassaddhiyā na vatthubhūtāni. Na sukhavatthukānīti passaddhijassa kāyikacetasikasukhassa na vatthubhūtāni. Na samādhivatthukānīti sukhajassa samādhissa na vatthubhūtāni. Na yathābhūtañāṇadassanavatthukānīti samādhipadaṭṭhānassa yathābhūtañāṇadassanassa na vatthubhūtāni.
在「非一向厌离」等句中,应将「非」字提取出来,按照「非离贪」等的方式,类推连接到其余各句。或者也可读作带有「sa」音的「非离贪」等。其中,「一向厌离」指并非纯粹为了对轮回感到厌离,故而不导向(厌离)——这是(前后文的)关联。其余各句也应当如此连接。「离贪」指为了对轮回离染。「灭」指为了令轮回灭尽。「寂止」指为了令已灭的轮回归于寂静、不再生起。「证知」指为了彻底了知轮回。「正觉」指为令从烦恼的沉睡中醒来,从而觉悟轮回。「涅槃」指为了证得不死的涅槃。显示巴利原文
Na ekantanibbidāyātiādīsu na-kārameva āharitvā ‘‘na virāgāyā’’tiādinā nayena sesapadehipi yojetabbaṃ. Na virāgāyātiādīsu sanakāro vā pāṭho. Tattha ekantanibbidāyāti ekantena vaṭṭe nibbindanatthāya na saṃvattantīti sambandho. Evaṃ sesesupi yojetabbaṃ. Virāgāyāti vaṭṭe virajjanatthāya. Nirodhāyāti vaṭṭassa nirodhanatthāya. Upasamāyāti nirodhitassa puna anuppattivasena vaṭṭassa upasamanatthāya. Abhiññāyāti vaṭṭassa abhijānanatthāya. Sambodhāyāti kilesaniddāvigamena vaṭṭato pabujjhanatthāya. Nibbānāyāti amatanibbānatthāya.
「为了违犯已受持的学处」是指以违犯那已受持的学处为目的。然而,此处在格位变化的影响下,使用了宾格。至于说「连心也不生起」,是为了显示由于内心清净,戒行达到极度清净的状态,而并非说仅仅心生起就会毁犯戒律。「他怎么会违犯呢?」意思是:他出于什么目的而会去违犯呢?也就是他绝不会去违犯的意思。「不破裂」等语句,应按前文所述的对立方式来理解。也有读作「不破裂」的。在「一向厌离」等句中,应按照「纯粹为了对轮回感到厌离」等的方式去连接。不过在此处,「厌离」是指观智。「离贪」是指道。「灭」和「寂止」是指涅槃。「证知」和「正觉」是指道。「涅槃」是指涅槃本身。应当知道有这样的安立之说:一处说观,两处说道,三处说涅槃。然而,从同义异名的角度而言,所有这些词也都可以是道的同义词和涅槃的同义词。显示巴利原文
Yathāsamādinnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ vītikkamāyāti yathāsamādinnassa sikkhāpadassa vītikkamanatthāya. Vibhattivipallāsavasena panettha upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Cittampi na uppādetīti cittuppādasuddhiyā sīlassa ativisuddhabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na pana cittuppādamattena sīlaṃ bhijjati. Kiṃ so vītikkamissatīti kimatthaṃ vītikkamaṃ karissati, neva vītikkamaṃ karissatīti attho. Akhaṇḍānītiādīni heṭṭhā vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbāni. Na khaṇḍānītipi pāṭho. ‘‘Ekantanibbidāyā’’tiādīsu ekantena vaṭṭe nibbindanatthāyātiādinā nayena yojetabbaṃ . Ettha pana nibbidāyāti vipassanā. Virāgāyāti maggo. Nirodhāya upasamāyāti nibbānaṃ. Abhiññāya sambodhāyāti maggo. Nibbānāyāti nibbānameva. Ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vipassanā, dvīsu maggo, tīsu nibbānaṃ vuttanti evaṃ avatthānakathā veditabbā. Pariyāyena pana sabbānipetāni maggavevacanānipi nibbānavevacanānipi hontiyeva.
39 39. 现在,以有边和无边(的视角)显示了存在的分类之后,为了再依(戒所依的)法、依生起源、依缘、依相应法来显示戒的分类,于是便开始了「什么是戒?」等(问答)。这其中,「生起源」意指依此而生起。这是缘的别名。(问)「它是以什么为生起源的?」即是问「它以什么为生起源?」。(问)「是哪些法的集合、和合?」即是问「它是由几种法集合的?」。显示巴利原文
39. Idāni pariyantāpariyantavasena vijjamānapabhedaṃ dassetvā puna dhammavasena jātivasena paccayavasena sampayuttavasena sīlassa pabhedaṃ dassetuṃ kiṃ sīlantiādimāha. Tattha samuṭṭhāti etenāti samuṭṭhānaṃ. Paccayassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Kiṃ samuṭṭhānamassāti kiṃsamuṭṭhānaṃ. Katinaṃ dhammānaṃ samodhānaṃ samavāyo assāti katidhammasamodhānaṃ.
“思戒”:对于远离杀生等恶行之人,或履行义务与行持者所生起的思心所。“心所戒”:对于远离杀生等恶行之人所生起的远离心所。复次,所谓“思戒”,即断除杀生等七业道之思。所谓“心所戒”,即如“于世尊教法中,断除贪欲,以离贪之心而住”等语所说的无贪、无嗔、正见等法。“律仪戒”:于此当知有五种律仪——别解脱律仪、念律仪、智律仪、忍律仪、精进律仪。其中,“以此别解脱律仪具足、完全具足”(《分别论》511),是为别解脱律仪。“守护眼根,于眼根得律仪”(《长部》1.213等),是为念律仪。显示巴利原文
Cetanāsīlanti pāṇātipātādīhi viramantassa, vattapaṭipattiṃ vā pūrentassa cetanā. Cetasikaṃ sīlanti pāṇātipātādīhi viramantassa virati. Apica cetanā sīlaṃ nāma pāṇātipātādīni pajahantassa sattakammapathacetanā . Cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ nāma ‘‘abhijjhaṃ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.217) nayena vuttā anabhijjhāabyāpādasammādiṭṭhidhammā. Saṃvaro sīlanti ettha pañcavidho saṃvaro veditabbo – pātimokkhasaṃvaro, satisaṃvaro, ñāṇasaṃvaro, khantisaṃvaro, vīriyasaṃvaroti. Tattha ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto’’ti (vibha. 511) ayaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvaro. ‘‘Rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.213; ma. ni. 1.295; saṃ. ni. 4.239; a. ni. 3.16) ayaṃ satisaṃvaro.
我宣说诸流的抑制,以智慧而关闭它们。(《经集》1041)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasmiṃ, (ajitāti bhagavā;) Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ; Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti. (su. ni. 1041) –
这是智抑制。资具的受用也包含在此智抑制中。而以“能忍耐寒热……”(《中部》1.24;《增支部》4.114;6.58)等方式所说的,名为忍抑制。以“不忍受已生起的欲寻……”(《中部》1.26;《增支部》4.114;6.58)等方式所说的,名为精进抑制。活命遍净也包含在此精进抑制中。如此,这五类抑制,以及那些怖畏罪的善男子们从现前事物中的远离,这一切都应知为“抑制戒”。“不违犯戒”是指:对于受持戒律者,在身业和语业上的不违犯。以上是对“什么是戒”这一问题的解答。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ ñāṇasaṃvaro. Paccayapaṭisevanampi ettheva samodhānaṃ gacchati. Yo panāyaṃ ‘‘khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.24; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) nayena āgato, ayaṃ khantisaṃvaro nāma. Yo cāyaṃ ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) nayena āgato, ayaṃ vīriyasaṃvaro nāma. Ājīvapārisuddhipi ettheva samodhānaṃ gacchati. Iti ayaṃ pañcavidhopi saṃvaro, yā ca pāpabhīrukānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ sampattavatthuto virati, sabbametaṃ saṃvarasīlanti veditabbaṃ. Avītikkamo sīlanti samādinnasīlassa kāyikavācasiko avītikkamo. Idaṃ tāva kiṃ sīlanti pañhassa vissajjanaṃ.
在回答“有多少戒”这一问题时,说到善戒、不善戒和无记戒。此处,因为世间众生的各自本性即被称为“戒”,如说“此人是乐戒者,此人是苦戒者,此人是诤戒者,此人是装饰戒者”。因此,依这种说法,从义理上提取,不善戒也被说成是戒。然而,根据“听闻之后,以智慧抑制”(《无碍解道》1.37)这句话,这种不善戒并非此处所说的戒。显示巴利原文
Kati sīlānīti pañhassa vissajjane kusalasīlaṃ akusalasīlaṃ abyākatasīlanti ettha yasmā loke tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ pakati sīlanti vuccati, yaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ayaṃ sukhasīlo, ayaṃ dukkhasīlo, ayaṃ kalahasīlo, ayaṃ maṇḍanasīlo’’ti bhaṇanti. Tasmā tena pariyāyena atthuddhāravasena akusalasīlamapi sīlanti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana ‘‘sutvāna saṃvare paññā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.37) vacanato idhādhippetasīlaṃ na hotīti.
然而,由于按思等类别所区分的戒,是以相应心为生起因,所以说由善心生起的戒即称为“善戒”,等等。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana cetanādibhedassa sīlassa sampayuttacittaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā kusalacittasamuṭṭhānaṃ kusalasīlantiādimāha.
“防护聚集的戒”,即与防护相应的诸蕴。因为这些蕴由防护而和合、交融,故称为“防护聚集的戒”。同样,“不违犯聚集的戒”也应如此理解。“在那状态中,已生的思聚集的戒”,是指在防护状态、不违犯状态中,与已生的思相应的诸蕴。又因为在三种情况中所指的都是与它们相应的法,思的聚集已包含心所法,所以不再单独列出“心所聚集的戒”,应知。在下文中,思等法被称为“戒”,但并非只有它们才是戒,与它们相应的法也是戒。为阐明此义,故说此三聚,应知。显示巴利原文
Saṃvarasamodhānaṃ sīlanti saṃvarasampayuttakhandhā. Te hi saṃvarena samāgatā missībhūtāti saṃvarasamodhānanti vuttā. Evaṃ avītikkamasamodhānaṃ sīlampi veditabbaṃ. Tathābhāve jātacetanā samodhānaṃ sīlanti saṃvarabhāve avītikkamabhāve jātacetanāsampayuttā khandhā. Yasmā ca tīsupi cetesu taṃsampayuttā dhammā adhippetā, tasmā cetanāsamodhānena cetasikānampi saṅgahitattā cetasikasamodhānasīlaṃ visuṃ na niddiṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ. Heṭṭhā cetanādayo dhammā ‘‘sīla’’nti vuttā. Na kevalaṃ te eva sīlaṃ, taṃsampayuttā dhammāpi sīlamevāti dassanatthaṃ ayaṃ tiko vuttoti veditabbo.
40 现在,由于思及心所本身即是防护与不违犯,并非别别存在,因此仅就防护与不违犯,以共通的次第,配合直到阿拉汉道的修行,这样说:“以防护杀生之义为戒,以不违犯之义为戒”等。因为离杀生等各自防护其对立面,并且不违犯它,所以从防护与不违犯的角度,称为“以防护义为戒”、“以不违犯义为戒”。其中,“以防护杀生之义为戒”,意为以制止杀生为戒义。具体是离杀生,而此离杀生既能防护杀生,又不违犯它,故亦以不违犯义为戒。同样,离不与取等,乃至无贪、无瞋、正见,都应当这样配合解释。显示巴利原文
40. Idāni yasmā cetanācetasikā saṃvarāvītikkamāyeva honti na visuṃ, tasmā saṃvarāvītikkameyeva yāva arahattamaggā sādhāraṇakkamena yojento pāṇātipātaṃ saṃvaraṭṭhena sīlaṃ, avītikkamaṭṭhena sīlantiādimāha. Pāṇātipātā veramaṇiādayo hi yasmā attano attano paccanīkaṃ saṃvaranti, taṃ na vītikkamanti ca, tasmā saṃvaraṇato avītikkamanato ca saṃvaraṭṭhena sīlaṃ avītikkamaṭṭhena sīlaṃ nāma hoti. Tattha pāṇātipātaṃ saṃvaraṭṭhenāti pāṇātipātassa pidahanaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī. Sā ca taṃ saṃvarantīyeva taṃ na vītikkamatīti avītikkamaṭṭhena sīlaṃ. Evameva adinnādānā veramaṇiādayo anabhijjhāabyāpādasammādiṭṭhiyo yojetabbā.
在「杀生」等十不善业道中,杀害生命即是杀生,亦即杀死生命之意。此处所说的「生命」,就世俗而言指有情,就胜义而言则指命根。当行者于该生命生起生命想,并策动能截断命根之加行,由身门或语门之一而转起的杀心,即为杀生。若就无功德之小生命——如畜生等——而言,杀害微小生命者罪较轻,杀害身形广大者罪较重。何以故?因所用之加行更为重大故。即便加行相同,亦因所杀对象之重大而罪重。若就有功德之生命——如人类等——而言,功德少者罪轻,功德大者罪重。而当身形大小与功德皆相同时,若烦恼与加行轻微则罪轻,若猛烈则罪重。应当如此了知。此又有五支:生命、生命想、杀意、加行、彼因此而死。显示巴利原文
Pāṇātipātantiādīsu pana dasasu akusalakammapathesu pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto. Pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto. So guṇavirahitesu tiracchānagatādīsu pāṇesu khuddake pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāsarīre mahāsāvajjo. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya. Payogasamattepi vatthumahantatāya. Guṇavantesu manussādīsu appaguṇe pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo. Sarīraguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjoti veditabbo. Tassa pañca sambhārā – pāṇo, pāṇasaññitā, vadhakacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena maraṇanti.
取未给与之物即为「不与取」,亦即取他人之物、偷窃、盗窃之意。其中,「未给与」是指他人所执持守护之物,他人于此物可随意支配,若取之者,他人不加惩罚、亦无过失。于他人所执持守护之物上,持有「此乃他人所守护」之想,并策动夺取之加行,由身门或语门之一而转起的盗心,便是不与取。此不与取,若针对卑劣之他物,罪较轻;若针对高贵之物,罪较重。何以故?因物品本身殊胜故。当物品相同时,若盗取功德更高之人之物,罪便重;若盗取功德较低之人之物,罪便轻。此有五支:他人所守护之物、对该物生起他人守护之想、盗心、加行、以此而取走该物。显示巴利原文
Adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ, parasaṃharaṇaṃ, theyyaṃ, corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha adinnanti parapariggahitaṃ, yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti, tasmiṃ parapariggahite parapariggahitasaññino tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ. Taṃ hīne parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, paṇīte mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Vatthupaṇītatāya. Vatthusamatte sati guṇādhikānaṃ santake vatthusmiṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ, taṃ taṃ guṇādhikaṃ upādāya tato tato hīnaguṇassa santake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ. Tassa pañca sambhārā – parapariggahitaṃ, parapariggahitasaññitā theyyacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena haraṇanti.
「于诸欲中」:指于两性交合之事中。「邪行」:是指绝对应受呵责的卑劣行为。从特相上来说,即怀不正法之意图,由身门转起、违犯不可行处之思,便是于欲中之邪行。显示巴利原文
Kāmesūti methunasamācāresu. Micchācāroti ekantanindito lāmakācāro. Lakkhaṇato pana asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā kāmesu micchācāro.
在此,所谓“不可行处”是指:对男性而言,有母守护、父守护、父母守护、兄守护、弟守护、姐守护、妹守护、亲族守护、宗族守护、法守护、有夫守护、有罚守护,这十种;以及以财买得者、心愿共住者、财产共住者、布施共住者、水钵娶得者、取下环饰者、女奴、妻子、职业妻、战利妻、暂时妻,此十种。总计二十种女性。对女性而言,有夫守护、有罚守护,此两种,加上以财买得者等十种,共十二种女性。凡是这些女性所归属的男子之外的其他男子,便是不可行处。显示巴利原文
Tattha agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma purisānaṃ tāva māturakkhitā, piturakkhitā, mātāpiturakkhitā, bhāturakkhitā, bhaginirakkhitā, ñātirakkhitā, gottarakkhitā, dhammarakkhitā, sārakkhā, saparidaṇḍāti māturakkhitādayo dasa, dhanakkītā, chandavāsinī, bhogavāsinī, paṭavāsinī, odapattakinī, obhatacumbaṭā, dāsī ca, bhariyā ca, kammakārī ca bhariyā ca, dhajāhaṭā muhuttikāti dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati itthiyo. Itthīsu pana dvinnaṃ sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānaṃ dasannañca dhanakkītādīnanti dvādasannaṃ itthīnaṃ aññe purisā, idaṃ agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma.
这邪行,若是对无戒等功德者、行于不应行处,罪过较轻;若对方具足戒等功德,罪过则重。它有四个构成条件:不应行淫的对象、于该对象生起行淫之心、加行,以及忍受通过道或非道的方式行持。显示巴利原文
So panesa micchācāro sīlādiguṇarahite agamanīyaṭṭhāne appasāvajjo, sīlādiguṇasampanne mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā – agamanīyavatthu, tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ, sevanapayogo, maggenamaggapaṭipattiadhivāsananti.
“虚妄”(musā),指以欺骗为前导、破坏他人利益的身业或语业。出于欺骗的意图,发起身业或语业以欺诳他人,此中之思即为妄语。另有解说:“虚妄”指不实、非真之事;“语”指将其说为如实、真实。就特征而言,欲将不实之事当作真实而告知他人,由此告知行为所生起的思,即是妄语。这种妄语,若所破坏的利益微小,罪过即轻;若所破坏的利益重大,罪过即重。再者,在家居士因吝惜己物而说“没有”等语,所犯妄语罪过较轻;若作为证人,为破坏他人利益而说,罪过则重。出家人得到少量油或酥,出于戏笑之意,以夸张之语说“今日村中似乎油流成河了”,这些妄语罪过较轻;若将未见者说为“亲眼所见”等,罪过则重。它有四个构成条件:不实之事、欺诳之心、相应的加行,以及对方领会其义。显示巴利原文
Musāti visaṃvādanapurekkhārassa atthabhañjako vacīpayogo, kāyapayogo vā. Visaṃvādanādhippāyena panassa paravisaṃvādakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. Aparo nayo – musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu. Vādoti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. So yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appatāya appasāvajjo, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Apica gahaṭṭhānaṃ attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya natthītiādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, sakkhinā hutvā atthabhañjanatthaṃ vutto mahāsāvajjo. Pabbajitānaṃ appakampi telaṃ vā sappiṃ vā labhitvā hasādhippāyena ‘‘ajja gāme telaṃ nadī maññe sandatī’’ti pūraṇakathānayena pavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃyeva pana diṭṭhantiādinā nayena vadantānaṃ mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā – atathaṃ vatthu, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, parassa tadatthavijānananti.
凡是以那样的言语,对某人说时,能使说话者在对方心中变得可爱,而把别人说成空洞无物,这就是离间语。凡是使自己和他人变得粗恶,且言语本身也难听刺耳,既不悦耳也不悦心,这就是粗恶语。凡是毫无意义、东拉西扯的闲谈,就是杂秽语。这些语行的根本‘思’,便得名为离间语等,此处所指即是此思。显示巴利原文
Yāya vācāya yassa taṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tassa hadaye attano piyabhāvaṃ, parassa ca suññabhāvaṃ karoti, sā pisuṇā vācā. Yāya pana attānampi parampi pharusaṃ karoti, yā vācā sayampi pharusā neva kaṇṇasukhā na hadayasukhā vā, ayaṃ pharusā vācā. Yena samphaṃ palapati niratthakaṃ, so samphappalāpo. Tesaṃ mūlabhūtā cetanāpi pisuṇāvācādināmameva labhati. Sā eva ca idha adhippetāti.
其中,心怀杂染的人,为了离间他人,或为了让自己受人喜爱,而发起身业、语业的‘思’,就是离间语。它对谁进行离间,若被离间者功德微小,罪过则轻;功德大,罪过则重。它有四个构成要素:被离间的他人、以‘这样他们就会不和’为动机的离间意图,或以‘这样我就能受喜爱、得信赖’为动机的讨好意图、相应的加行,以及对方领会其意。然而,若他人尚未实际被离间,便不构成业道;只有确实被离间时,才构成业道。显示巴利原文
Tattha saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa paresaṃ vā bhedāya attano piyakamyatāya vā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pisuṇā vācā. Sā yassa bhedaṃ karoti, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā cattāro sambhārā – bhinditabbo paro, ‘‘iti ime nānā bhavissantī’’ti bhedapurekkhāratā vā ‘‘iti ahaṃ piyo bhavissāmi vissāsiko’’ti piyakamyatā vā, tajjo vāyāmo, tassa tadatthavijānananti. Pare pana abhinne kammapathabhedo natthi, bhinneyeva hoti.
伤害他人要害的身业或语业所生起的、绝对粗暴的‘思’,就是粗恶语。然而,即便行为是伤害对方要害,若发心柔软,也不成为粗恶语。例如,父母有时也会对子女说:‘让贼把你们砍成碎片!’但哪怕一片青莲叶落在儿女身上,他们都不愿意。亲教师与教授师有时也会对依止者说:‘这些无惭无愧的家伙,把他们赶走!’但心里仍希望他们能获得教法与证悟。所以,心里柔软时,即便言语粗暴,也不成为粗恶语;同样,言语柔软而心不柔软,也会成为不柔软的言语。比如,想杀人者说:‘让他舒舒服服地躺着吧。’这话并非不粗恶,因他内心凶暴,这其实就是粗恶语。此粗恶语针对谁而发,若被辱骂者功德微小,罪过就轻;功德大,罪过就重。它具有三个构成要件:应被辱骂的他人、愤恨的心、辱骂的行为。显示巴利原文
Parassa mammacchedakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā ekantapharusacetanā pharusā vācā. Mammacchedakopi pana payogo cittasaṇhatāya pharusā vācā na hoti. Mātāpitaro hi kadāci puttake evampi vadanti ‘‘corā vo khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ karontū’’ti. Uppalapattampi ca nesaṃ upari patantaṃ na icchanti. Ācariyupajjhāyā ca kadāci nissitake evaṃ vadanti ‘‘kiṃ ime ahirikā anottappino, niddhamatha ne’’ti. Atha ca nesaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiṃ icchanti. Yathā ca cittasaṇhatāya pharusā vācā na hoti, evaṃ vacanasaṇhatāya apharusā vācāpi na hoti. Na hi mārāpetukāmassa ‘‘imaṃ sukhaṃ sayāpethā’’ti vacanaṃ apharusā vācā hoti, cittapharusatāya panesā pharusā vācāva. Sā yaṃ sandhāya pavattitā, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā tayo sambhārā – akkositabbo paro, kupitacittaṃ, akkosanāti.
经由身、语之行传达无义之事,由此发起的不善思,即是杂秽语。偶尔造作,罪过轻微;频繁造作、程度深重,则罪过重大。它具有两个条件:一、以谈论婆罗多战争、掠走悉多等无义闲谈为动机;二、实际说出那样的言语。若对方未领会所言,则不构成业道;唯有对方领会了这些杂秽语,方成业道。显示巴利原文
Anatthaviññāpikā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā akusalacetanā samphappalāpo. So āsevanamandatāya appasāvajjo, āsevanamahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Tassa dve sambhārā – bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇādiniratthakakathāpurekkhāratā, tathārūpikathākathanañcāti. Pare pana taṃ kathaṃ agaṇhante kammapathabhedo natthi, parena samphappalāpe gahiteyeva hoti.
“贪欲”即贪求之义,意指面对他人财物时,心向彼物转起。其特相为面对他人财物时,生起“啊,但愿此物属于我”这样的贪求。如同不与取,它亦有罪轻、罪重之别。它具有两个条件:一、他人财物;二、想将它化为己有。因为即使对他人财物生起贪,若尚未生起“啊,但愿这属于我”而执为己有,此时仍不构成业道。显示巴利原文
Abhijjhāyatīti abhijjhā, parabhaṇḍābhimukhī hutvā tanninnatāya pavattatīti attho. Sā ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamassā’’ti evaṃ parabhaṇḍābhijjhāyanalakkhaṇā, adinnādānaṃ viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca. Tassa dve sambhārā – parabhaṇḍaṃ, attano pariṇāmanañcāti. Parabhaṇḍavatthuke hi lobhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamassā’’ti attano na pariṇāmeti.
“嗔恨”即伤害利益与安乐之义。其特相为想要毁灭对方的心意伤害。如同粗恶语,它亦有罪轻、罪重之别。它具有两个条件:一、其他有情;二、思维其消亡。因为即使对有情感起忿怒,若未生起“啊,但愿他被消灭、毁灭”的思维,此时仍不构成业道。显示巴利原文
Hitasukhaṃ byāpādayatīti byāpādo. So paravināsāya manopadosalakkhaṇo, pharusā vācā viya appasāvajjo mahāsāvajjo ca. Tassa dve sambhārā – parasatto ca, tassa ca vināsacintāti. Parasattavatthuke hi kodhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatāyaṃ ucchijjeyya vinasseyyā’’ti tassa vināsaṃ na cinteti.
“邪见”:因不如实地执取、邪辟地观察,故称邪见。它的特相是:以“布施无有果报”等颠倒的方式看待事物。如同杂秽语,有罪轻者,亦有罪重者。再者,不决定的邪见罪轻,决定的邪见罪重。它具足两个条件:一是对事物的认知方式颠倒;二是事物恰好以符合其颠倒认知的状态呈现给他。在邪见中,唯有持无有见、无因见、无作业见才构成业道,其余邪见则不构成。显示巴利原文
Yathābhuccagahaṇābhāvena micchā passatīti micchādiṭṭhi. Sā ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā nayena viparītadassanalakkhaṇā, samphappalāpo viya appasāvajjā, mahāsāvajjā ca. Apica aniyatā appasāvajjā, niyatā mahāsāvajjā. Tassā dve sambhārā – vatthuno ca gahitākāraviparītatā, yathā ca taṃ gaṇhāti, tathābhāvena tassūpaṭṭhānanti. Tattha natthikāhetukaakiriyadiṭṭhīhi eva kammapathabhedo hoti, na aññadiṭṭhīhi.
对这十种不善业道,应从法、类别、所缘、受、根源这五个方面来加以判定。显示巴利原文
Imesaṃ pana dasannaṃ akusalakammapathānaṃ dhammato, koṭṭhāsato, ārammaṇato, vedanāto, mūlatoti pañcahākārehi vinicchayo veditabbo.
其中,就法而言:在这些不善业道中,依次第前七种唯是思心所法;而贪欲等后三种,则是与思心所相应之法。显示巴利原文
Tattha dhammatoti etesu hi satta paṭipāṭiyā cetanādhammāva honti, abhijjhādayo tayo cetanāsampayuttā.
从类别上说,依次前七种及邪见,这八种仅是业道,并非根。贪欲与嗔恚则既是业道,又是根。因为贪欲作为根时,即是贪不善根;嗔恚即是嗔不善根。显示巴利原文
Koṭṭhāsatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta, micchādiṭṭhi cāti ime aṭṭha kammapathā eva honti, no mūlāni. Abhijjhābyāpādā kammapathā ceva mūlāni ca. Abhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvā lobho akusalamūlaṃ hoti, byāpādo doso akusalamūlaṃ.
从所缘上说,杀生以命根为所缘,故以行为所缘。不与取或以有情为所缘,或以行为所缘。邪淫,依触而言,以行为所缘;有些论师也认为以有情为所缘。妄语或以有情为所缘,或以行为所缘。离间语也是如此。粗恶语唯以有情为所缘。杂秽语,依见、闻、觉、知,或以有情为所缘,或以行为所缘。贪欲也是如此。嗔恚唯以有情为所缘。邪见,依三界诸法,唯以行为所缘。显示巴利原文
Ārammaṇatoti pāṇātipāto jīvitindriyārammaṇato saṅkhārārammaṇo. Adinnādānaṃ sattārammaṇaṃ vā saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ vā. Micchācāro phoṭṭhabbavasena saṅkhārārammaṇo, sattārammaṇotipi eke. Musāvādo sattārammaṇo vā saṅkhārārammaṇo vā. Tathā pisuṇā vācā. Pharusā vācā sattārammaṇāva samphappalāpo diṭṭhasutamutaviññātavasena sattārammaṇo vā saṅkhārārammaṇo vā. Tathā abhijjhā. Byāpādo sattārammaṇova. Micchādiṭṭhi tebhūmakadhammavasena saṅkhārārammaṇāva.
从受上说,杀生是苦受。因为,即便国王见到盗贼时笑着说:‘去吧,把他杀了!’他们下定决心的思心所却与苦受相应。不与取有三种受。见到他人财物后,欢喜踊跃而取者,是乐受;因惧怕而取者,是苦受;在取用时,处于中舍状态而取者,是不苦不乐受。邪淫有乐受与中舍受两种;不过,在下定决心的心中,中舍受不会生起。妄语,如同在不与取中所说,有三种受;离间语也是如此。粗恶语是苦受。杂秽语有三种受。当别人赞叹、举起衣物等时,欢喜踊跃地讲述凉风、负重、战斗等话题者,是乐受;先前由他人付了酬金,而后又有人来要求‘从头讲起’,此时心想‘我是否要毫无保留地顺着关联讲这些杂谈呢?’因而忧愁,这样讲说时是苦受;以中舍心讲说者,是不苦不乐受。贪欲有乐受与中舍受两种;邪见也是如此。嗔恚是苦受。显示巴利原文
Vedanātoti pāṇātipāto dukkhavedano hoti. Kiñcāpi hi rājāno coraṃ disvā hasamānāpi ‘‘gacchatha bhaṇe, māretha na’’nti vadanti, sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā pana nesaṃ dukkhasampayuttāva hoti. Adinnādānaṃ tivedanaṃ. Tañhi parabhaṇḍaṃ disvā haṭṭhatuṭṭhassa gaṇhato sukhavedanaṃ hoti, bhītatasitassa gaṇhato dukkhavedanaṃ, tathā vipākanissandaphalāni paccavekkhantassa. Gahaṇakāle majjhattabhāve ṭhitassa pana gaṇhato adukkhamasukhavedanaṃ hoti. Micchācāro sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedano, sanniṭṭhāpakacitte pana majjhattavedano na hoti. Musāvādo adinnādāne vuttanayeneva tivedano, tathā pisuṇā vācā. Pharusā vācā dukkhavedanā. Samphappalāpo tivedano. Paresu hi sādhukāraṃ dentesu celādīni ukkhipantesu haṭṭhatuṭṭhassa sītāharaṇabhāratayuddhādīni kathanakāle so sukhavedano hoti, paṭhamaṃ dinnavetanena ekena pacchā āgantvā ‘‘ādito paṭṭhāya kathehī’’ti vutte ‘‘niravasesaṃ yathānusandhikaṃ pakiṇṇakakathaṃ kathessāmi nu kho, no’’ti domanassitassa kathanakāle dukkhavedano hoti, majjhattassa kathayato adukkhamasukhavedano hoti. Abhijjhā sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedanā, tathā micchādiṭṭhi. Byāpādo dukkhavedano.
就根而言:杀生依嗔与痴,是二根。不与取依嗔与痴,或依贪与痴。邪淫依贪与痴。妄语依嗔与痴,或依贪与痴。离间语与杂秽语亦同。粗恶语依嗔与痴。贪欲唯依痴,为单根;嗔恚也是如此。邪见依贪与痴,是二根。显示巴利原文
Mūlatoti pāṇātipāto dosamohavasena dvimūlako hoti, adinnādānaṃ dosamohavasena vā lobhamohavasena vā, micchācāro lobhamohavasena, musāvādo dosamohavasena vā lobhamohavasena vā. Tathā pisuṇā vācā samphappalāpo ca. Pharusā vācā dosamohavasena, abhijjhā mohavasena ekamūlā, tathā byāpādo. Micchādiṭṭhi lobhamohavasena dvimūlāti.
远离杀生等,以及无贪、无嗔、正见,这十种名为善业道。“离”的意思是:以此远离杀生等,或是自己主动远离,或仅仅是那远离的行为本身。当一个人远离杀生等恶行时,与善心相应的离,依其差别有三种:成就离、受持离、正断离。其中,那些未受持学处的人,遇到造恶的机缘时,思惟自己的出身、年龄、多闻等,心想:“做这样的恶事,于我们不合适”,便不去违犯,他们心中所生起的这种离,名为成就离。而那些已受持学处的人,在受持学处时及受持之后,即使舍弃生命也不去违犯造恶的机缘,所生起的这种离,名为受持离。与圣道相应的离,名为正断离,从这种离生起的那一刻开始,圣者们连“我将杀生”这样的念头都不会再生起。显示巴利原文
Pāṇātipātādīhi pana viratiyo, anabhijjhāabyāpādasammādiṭṭhiyo cāti ime dasa kusalakammapathā nāma. Pāṇātipātādīhi etāya viramanti, sayaṃ vā viramati, viramaṇamattameva vā etanti virati. Yā pāṇātipātādīhi viramantassa kusalacittasampayuttā virati, sā pabhedato tividhā hoti sampattavirati samādānavirati samucchedaviratīti. Tattha asamādinnasikkhāpadānaṃ attano jātivayabāhusaccādīni paccavekkhitvā ‘‘ayuttaṃ amhākaṃ evarūpaṃ pāpaṃ kātu’’nti sampattavatthuṃ avītikkamantānaṃ uppajjamānā virati sampattavirati nāma. Samādinnasikkhāpadānaṃ pana sikkhāpadasamādāne ca tatuttari ca attano jīvitampi pariccajitvā vatthuṃ avītikkamantānaṃ uppajjamānā virati samādānavirati nāma. Ariyamaggasampayuttā pana virati samucchedavirati nāma, yassā uppattito pabhuti ariyapuggalānaṃ ‘‘pāṇaṃ ghātessāmā’’tiādicittampi na uppajjatīti.
现在,如同阐述不善业道那样,对于这些善业道,也应当从法、分类、所缘、感受、根这五个方面来进行抉择判断。显示巴利原文
Idāni akusalakammapathānaṃ viya imesaṃ kusalakammapathānaṃ dhammato, koṭṭhāsato, ārammaṇato, vedanāto, mūlatoti pañcahākārehi vinicchayo veditabbo.
其中,就“法”而言:这些善业道中,依次前七者,可以是思,也可以是离;最后三者唯与思相应。显示巴利原文
Tattha dhammatoti etesupi paṭipāṭiyā satta cetanāpi vaṭṭanti viratiyopi, ante tayo cetanāsampayuttāva.
就类别而言:依次前七者唯是业道而非根;最后三者既是业道又是根。其中,无贪作为根,即无贪善根;无嗔作为根,即无嗔善根;正见作为根,即无痴善根。显示巴利原文
Koṭṭhāsatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta kammapathā eva, no mūlāni, ante tayo kammapathā ceva mūlāni ca. Anabhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvā alobho kusalamūlaṃ hoti, abyāpādo adoso kusalamūlaṃ, sammādiṭṭhi amoho kusalamūlaṃ.
就所缘而言:杀生等各自的所缘,即是这些善业道的所缘。因为离正是以所应避免之事为所缘而生起的。然而,正如以涅槃为所缘的圣道能断除烦恼,同样地,这些以命根等为所缘的业道,也能断除杀生等恶戒。显示巴利原文
Ārammaṇatoti pāṇātipātādīnaṃ ārammaṇāneva etesaṃ ārammaṇāni. Vītikkamitabbatoyeva hi veramaṇī nāma hoti. Yathā pana nibbānārammaṇo ariyamaggo kilese pajahati, evaṃ jīvitindriyādiārammaṇāpete kammapathā pāṇātipātādīni dussīlyāni pajahantīti.
就感受而言:所有这些善业道,都与乐受或中舍受相应。因为当入于善位时,苦受是不存在的。显示巴利原文
Vedanātoti sabbe sukhavedanā vā honti majjhattavedanā vā. Kusalaṃ patvā hi dukkhā vedanā nāma natthi.
就根而言:依其顺序,前七个业道——当以与智相应之心远离时,依无贪、无嗔、无痴而为三根;当以与智不相应之心远离时,依无贪、无嗔而为二根。无贪业道——当以与智相应之心远离时,依无嗔、无痴而为二根;当以与智不相应之心远离时,无嗔故为一根。然而,无贪本身不能作为自己的根。无嗔也是同样的道理。正见则依无贪、无嗔而为二根。显示巴利原文
Mūlatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta ñāṇasampayuttacittena viramantassa alobhaadosaamohavasena timūlā honti. Ñāṇavippayuttacittena viramantassa alobhādosavasena dvimūlā. Anabhijjhā ñāṇasampayuttacittena viramantassa adosaamohavasena dvimūlā. Ñāṇavippayuttacittena viramantassa adosavasena ekamūlā. Alobho pana attanāva attano mūlaṃ na hoti. Abyāpādepi eseva nayo. Sammādiṭṭhi alobhādosavasena dvimūlāvāti.
如此,在以十善业道显示戒之后,为了进一步从出离等诸法,直到以阿罗汉道为究竟的三十七法来显示,于是说:“以出离对治欲贪,从防护义而言是戒,从不违犯义而言是戒”等。这其中,由于是以出离防护欲贪而不违犯,故意在说明出离即是戒。或者,此处所用之格是“各自”义,意即“以出离”。对其余诸法,也应以同理推知。在巴利原文中,则仅先举出离与无嗔,依前文已阐明的义理,将其余诸法略去,最终显示了阿罗汉道。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ dasakusalakammapathavasena sīlaṃ dassetvā idāni nekkhammādīnaṃ arahattamaggapariyosānānaṃ sattatiṃsadhammānaṃ vasena dassetuṃ nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ saṃvaraṭṭhena sīlaṃ, avītikkamaṭṭhena sīlantiādimāha. Tattha yasmā nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ saṃvarati na vītikkamati, tasmā nekkhammaṃ sīlanti adhippāyo. Paccattatthe vā karaṇavacanaṃ, nekkhammanti attho. Esa nayo sesesu. Pāḷiyaṃ pana nekkhammaabyāpāde dassetvā heṭṭhā vuttanayattā sesaṃ saṅkhipitvā ante arahattamaggoyeva dassito.
如此,从防护与不违犯的角度显示戒之后,为了具体阐明这两者的分类,便说:“五种戒:断除杀生是戒”等。这里应如此理解其关联:“断除杀生是戒”,“离杀生是戒”,“与杀生相对立的思心所是戒”,“防护杀生是戒”,“不违犯杀生是戒”。所谓“断除”,除了指前述杀生等行为的止息之外,并非另有实体性的法存在。然而,由于对每一种行为的断除,依其能安立善法的意义而成为“持”,又依其令散乱之性不复散乱的意义而成为“合”,所以,依据前文所述、含摄“持”与“合”之内涵的所谓戒行义,它便被称之为“戒”。其余四法,是就心的活动状态而言:或从“离”、或从“防护”、或从与他们相应之思心所、或对不违犯者从其“不违犯”的角度而说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṃvaraavītikkamavasena sīlaṃ dassetvā idāni tesaṃyeva dvinnaṃ pabhedadassanatthaṃ pañca sīlāni pāṇātipātassa pahānaṃ sīlantiādimāha. Ettha ca pāṇātipātassa pahānaṃ sīlaṃ, pāṇātipātā veramaṇī sīlaṃ, pāṇātipātassa paṭipakkhacetanā sīlaṃ, pāṇātipātassa saṃvaro sīlaṃ, pāṇātipātassa avītikkamo sīlanti yojanā kātabbā. Pahānanti ca koci dhammo nāma natthi aññatra vuttappakārānaṃ pāṇātipātādīnaṃ anuppādamattato. Yasmā pana taṃ taṃ pahānaṃ tassa tassa kusalassa dhammassa patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena upadhāraṇaṃ hoti, vippakiṇṇasabhāvākaraṇena ca samodhānaṃ, tasmā pubbe vutteneva upadhāraṇasamodhānasaṅkhātena sīlanaṭṭhena sīlanti vuttaṃ. Itare cattāro dhammā tato tato veramaṇivasena tassa tassa saṃvaravasena tadubhayasampayuttacetanāvasena taṃ taṃ avītikkamantassa avītikkamavasena ca cetaso pavattisabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttā.
或者,从法的角度来看,“断除”也确实是存在的。为何如此说?因为依此法能断除杀生等的对立面,或者说它能断除那个对立面,故称之为“断除”。这是什么?即是所有善蕴。然而,其他学派的论师则认为:“即便在出离等法中,仅凭抓住‘离是戒’这句话,便可认定在一切善法中,必定存有一种被称为‘离’的、决定性的弃除状态。”但在此处,义理并非如此。因此,用“断除”等五种表述加以区分时,在“有边际戒”与“无边际戒”这两种戒中,此唯指“无边际戒”。正因如此,经中说:“如是之戒,能导向心无懊悔……乃至……于所应证悟之法,为证悟而修学。”显示巴利原文
Atha vā pahānampi dhammato atthiyeva. Kathaṃ? Pahīyate anena pāṇātipātādipaṭipakkho, pajahati vā taṃ paṭipakkhanti pahānaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Sabbepi kusalā khandhā. Aññe pana ācariyā ‘‘nekkhammādīsupi ‘veramaṇī sīla’nti vacanamattaṃ gahetvā sabbakusalesupi niyatayevāpanakabhūtā virati nāma atthī’’ti vadanti, na tathā idhāti. Evamimehi pahānādīhi pañcahi padehi visesetvā pariyantāpariyantasīladvaye apariyantasīlameva vuttaṃ. Tasmā eva hi evarūpāni sīlāni cittassa avippaṭisārāya saṃvattanti…pe… sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikaronto sikkhatīti vuttaṃ.
在这里,‘能导向无懊悔’:根据‘防护是为了无懊悔’(《无碍解道》366)和‘阿难,善戒以无懊悔为目的、以无懊悔为利益’(《增支部》10.1; 11.1)等文句,戒能导向无懊悔。根据‘无懊悔是为了欢悦’(《无碍解道》366)和‘于如理作意者,欢悦生起’(《无碍解道》1.74)等文句,戒能导向欢悦。根据‘欢悦是为了喜悦’(《无碍解道》366)和‘心生欢悦者,便得喜悦’(《增支部》5.26;《相应部》5.376;《长部》3.322)等文句,戒能导向喜悦。根据‘喜悦是为了轻安’(《无碍解道》366)和‘心得喜悦者,身得轻安’(同上)等文句,戒能导向轻安。根据‘轻安是为了乐’(《无碍解道》366)和‘身得轻安者,便感受乐’(同上)等文句,戒能导向乐。在这里,属于心所法的乐,即称为悦。‘修习’:意思是强有力的修习。修习什么呢?由于紧接‘悦’这个词,已经说明了乐,所以此处的乐是已成就的。根据‘有乐者,心得定’(同上)的文句,依于此乐,定便得以成就。显示巴利原文
Tattha avippaṭisārāya saṃvattantīti ‘‘saṃvaro avippaṭisāratthāyā’’ti (pari. 366) ca ‘‘avippaṭisāratthāni kho, ānanda, kusalāni sīlāni avippaṭisārānisaṃsānī’’ti (a. ni. 10.1; 11.1) ca vacanato avippaṭisāratthāya saṃvattanti. ‘‘Avippaṭisāro pāmojjatthāyā’’ti (pari. 366) ca ‘‘yoniso manasikaroto pāmojjaṃ jāyatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.74) ca vacanato pāmojjāya saṃvattanti. ‘‘Pāmojjaṃ pītatthāyā’’ti (pari. 366) ca ‘‘pamuditassa pīti jāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.26; saṃ. ni. 5.376; dī. ni. 3.322) ca vacanato pītiyāsaṃvattanti. ‘‘Pīti passaddhatthāyā’’ti (pari. 366) ca ‘‘pītimanassa kāyo passambhatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.26; saṃ. ni. 5.376; dī. ni. 3.322) ca vacanato passaddhiyā saṃvattanti. ‘‘Passaddhi sukhatthāyā’’ti (pari. 366) ca ‘‘passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedetī’’ti (a. ni. 5.26; saṃ. ni. 5.376; dī. ni. 3.322) ca vacanato somanassāya saṃvattanti. Cetasikaṃ sukhañhi somanassanti vuccati. Āsevanāyāti bhusā sevanā āsevanā. Kassa āsevanā? Anantaraṃ somanassavacanena sukhassa vuttattā sukhaṃ siddhaṃ. ‘‘Sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.26; saṃ. ni. 5.376; dī. ni. 3.322) ca vacanato tena sukhena samādhi siddho hoti. Evaṃ siddhassa samādhissa āsevanā. Tassa samādhissa āsevanāya saṃvattanti, paguṇabalavabhāvāya saṃvattantīti attho. Bhāvanāyāti tasseva samādhissa vuddhiyā. Bahulīkammāyāti tasseva samādhissa punappunaṃ kiriyāya. Avippaṭisārādipavattiyā mūlakāraṇaṃ hutvā samādhissa saddhindriyādialaṅkārasādhanena alaṅkārāya saṃvattanti. Avippaṭisārādikassa samādhisambhārassa sādhanena parikkhārāya saṃvattanti. ‘‘Ye ca kho ime pabbajitena jīvitaparikkhārā samudānetabbā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.192) viya hi ettha sambhārattho parikkhārasaddo. ‘‘Ratho sīlaparikkhāro, jhānakkho cakkavīriyo’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.54) pana alaṅkārattho. ‘‘Sattahi nagaraparikkhārehi suparikkhataṃ hotī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 7.67) parivārattho. Idha pana alaṅkāraparivārānaṃ visuṃ āgatattā sambhāratthoti vuttaṃ. Sambhārattho ca paccayatthoti. Mūlakāraṇabhāveneva samādhisampayuttaphassādidhammasampattisādhanena parivārāya saṃvattanti. Samādhissa vipassanāya ca padaṭṭhānabhāvapāpanena vasībhāvapāpanena ca paripuṇṇabhāvasādhanato pāripūriyā saṃvattanti.
如此,显示了以戒为依止、一切方面圆满的定之后,现在根据‘心得定时,即如实知、如实见;如实知、如实见者,心生厌离;心生厌离者,便得离染;由离染故,便得解脱’(《无碍解道》1.73;《长部》3.359)的文句,为阐明以戒为根本、以定为近因的如实知见等,而说‘导向一向的厌离’等语。之所以如此,是因为显示了厌离,那么作为它近因的如实知见,也就一并被显示出来了。如果如实知见没有成就,厌离便不可能成就。这些正是随后的经文内容。不过,这里所说的‘如实知见’,指的是对有因有缘的名色法的把握。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sīlūpanissayena sabbākāraparipūraṃ samādhiṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘samāhite citte yathābhūtaṃ jānāti passati, yathābhūtaṃ jānaṃ passaṃ nibbindati, nibbindaṃ virajjati, virāgā vimuccatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.73; dī. ni. 3.359) vacanato sīlamūlakāni samādhipadaṭṭhānāni yathābhūtañāṇadassanādīni dassento ekantanibbidāyātiādimāha. Nibbidāya hi dassitāya tassā padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ dassitameva hoti. Tasmiñhi asiddhe nibbidā na sijjhatīti. Tāni pana vuttatthāneva. Yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ panettha sappaccayanāmarūpapariggaho.
这样,显示了以不死之大般涅槃为终极的戒之效用后,现在为了表明这种戒即是增上戒学,以及以它为基础的增上心学与增上慧学,便说道:‘对于像这样的戒,别解脱清净,这是增上戒’等等。其中,‘别解脱清净’:别解脱本身就是清净。对于这种无边际的、以出离为依归的戒,其别解脱清净因以出离为依归,故比其余的戒更为殊胜,因此称为‘增上戒’。意思是,安住于此戒之清净别解脱的心,因能善巧地达成无懊悔等利益,故不走向散乱,而能稳固地安立于定中。无散乱本身就是清净,即‘无散乱清净’。这种远离一切污垢的、属于抉择分的定,由于比其余的定更为殊胜,因此称为‘增上心’。在这里,是以‘心’为主导词来指代定的。正确地观察别解脱清净,就是以‘知遍知’和‘度遍知’的方式,正确地观察清净的戒律别解脱;同样,也正确地观察那称为无散乱清净的清净定。对于如此观察的人来说,他那称为‘见’的清净,就是‘见清净’。这种见清净,由于比其余的慧更为殊胜,因此称为‘增上慧’。‘在彼之中’:即在别解脱、无散乱和见这三者之中。‘别解脱的状态’:‘别解脱’本身即是‘别解脱的状态’。就解脱的特相而言,一切戒律本身也都是别解脱的状态,但在这里,它是针对戒的清净抑制所说的。如此,在轮回的基础上,通过这句颂文阐明了三学:‘别解脱’、‘无散乱’和‘见’;在出离的基础上,‘戒清净’是增上戒学,‘心清净’是增上心学,‘见清净’是增上慧学。如是,当知其中这三种清净,即此三学。也就是说,别解脱的状态等乃至解脱的状态,三学得以遍净。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ amatamahānibbānapariyosānaṃ sīlappayojanaṃ dassetvā idāni tassa sīlassa adhisīlasikkhābhāvaṃ tammūlakā ca adhicittaadhipaññāsikkhā dassetukāmo evarūpānaṃ sīlānaṃ saṃvarapārisuddhi adhisīlantiādimāha. Tattha saṃvaroyeva pārisuddhi saṃvarapārisuddhi. Evarūpānaṃ apariyantabhūtānaṃ vivaṭṭanissitānaṃ sīlānaṃ saṃvarapārisuddhi vivaṭṭanissitattā sesasīlato adhikaṃ sīlanti adhisīlanti vuccati. Saṃvarapārisuddhiyā ṭhitaṃ cittanti edisāya sīlasaṃvarapārisuddhiyā patiṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ suṭṭhu avippaṭisārādīnaṃ āvahanato na vikkhepaṃ gacchati, samādhismiṃ patiṭṭhātīti attho. Avikkhepoyeva pārisuddhi avikkhepapārisuddhi. So sabbamalavirahito nibbedhabhāgiyo samādhi sesasamādhito adhikattā adhicittanti vuccati. Cittasīsena hettha samādhi niddiṭṭho. Saṃvarapārisuddhiṃ sammā passatīti parisuddhaṃ sīlasaṃvaraṃ ñātapariññāvasena tīraṇapariññāvasena ca sammā passati, evameva avikkhepapārisuddhisaṅkhātaṃ parisuddhaṃ samādhiṃ sammā passati. Evaṃ passato cassa dassanasaṅkhātā pārisuddhi dassanapārisuddhi. Sāyeva sesapaññāya adhikattā adhipaññāti vuccati. Yo tatthāti yo tattha saṃvaraavikkhepadassanesu. Saṃvaraṭṭhoti saṃvarabhāvo. Evameva avikkhepaṭṭhadassanaṭṭhā ca veditabbā. Adhisīlameva sikkhā adhisīlasikkhā. Evaṃ itarāpi veditabbā.
如此,在开示了三学之后,为显示其圆满的次第,便说“转向此三学者,即是在修学”等。其义为:为逐一圆满它们而转向,也名修学;转向之后,了知“这是某学”,也名修学;了知之后,再三地观察,也名修学;观察之后,依所见而作意,也名修学;作意之后,令心于所缘安住不动,也名修学;以与各学相应的信、精进、念、定、慧作用,也名修学;乃至于证知所应证等的阶段发挥那些作用时,也还是在三学上修学。其后,“五种戒”等,其义已如前说。而“以阿拉汉道断尽一切烦恼”等文,因阿拉汉是彻底离于追悔等,且具有修习等状态者,故那些词句在此也完全适用。不过,“导向一向的厌离”等句,则如念处、正勤一样,唯应配合于证道的那一刹那来理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ tisso sikkhāyo dassetvā idāni tāsaṃ pāripūrikkamaṃ dassetuṃ imā tisso sikkhāyo āvajjanto sikkhatītiādimāha. Tassattho – paccekaṃ paripūretuṃ āvajjantopi sikkhati nāma, āvajjetvā ‘‘ayaṃ nāma sikkhā’’ti jānantopi sikkhati nāma, jānitvā punappunaṃ passantopi sikkhati nāma, passitvā yathādiṭṭhaṃ paccavekkhantopi sikkhati nāma, paccavekkhitvā tattheva cittaṃ acalaṃ katvā patiṭṭhapentopi sikkhati nāma, taṃtaṃsikkhāsampayuttasaddhāvīriyasatisamādhipaññāhi sakasakakiccaṃ karontopi sikkhati nāma, abhiññeyyābhijānanādikālepi taṃ taṃ kiccaṃ karonto tissopi sikkhāyo sikkhati nāmāti . Puna pañca sīlānītiādīni vuttatthāneva. Arahattamaggena sabbakilesānantiādīsu pana arahantānaṃ suṭṭhu vippaṭisārādiabhāvato āsevanādibhāvato ca tāni padāni yujjanteva. Ekantanibbidāyātiādīni pana satipaṭṭhānasammappadhānāni viya maggakkhaṇeyeva yojetabbāni.
“正见律仪清净”与“正见不散乱清净”这两句,应配合观,为证果等至而说;后一句亦可配合观,为证灭等至而说。在“转向而学”等五句中,阿拉汉虽已无可学,但因有无学戒蕴等的实质,故说为“学”。而“以信胜解而学”等,仅是就道的刹那而言。其余文句,则依近行、安止、观、道来配合,应当如理理解。显示巴利原文
Saṃvarapārisuddhiṃ sammā passati, avikkhepapārisuddhiṃ sammā passatīti idaṃ pana vacanadvayaṃ phalasamāpattatthāya vipassanāvasena yojetabbaṃ, dutiyavacanaṃ pana nirodhasamāpattatthāya vipassanāvasenāpi yujjati. Āvajjanto sikkhatītiādīsu pañcasu vacanesu arahato sikkhitabbābhāvepi asekkhasīlakkhandhādisabhāvato ‘‘sikkhatī’’ti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Saddhāya adhimuccanto sikkhatītiādīni pana maggakkhaṇaññeva sandhāya vuttāni. Aññānipi upacārappanāvipassanāmaggavasena vuttāni vacanāni yathāyogaṃ yojetabbānīti.
定修所成智的解释显示巴利原文
3. Samādhibhāvanāmayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
43 在定修所成智之解释中,首先说明定的类别,从一种定至十种定,故说「一种定」等。其中,「心一境性」:因无种种所缘之散乱,以一所缘为最胜、为至上,故称一境;一境的状态,即是一境性。而此一境性是心的,非众生的,为显此义,故说「心」。在二法中,「世间」:世间义为破坏、离散,指轮回;因系属彼轮回,故为世间。「出世间」:已超越故,称为超出;因不系属世间,故为出世间。在三法中,「有寻有伺」:具寻与伺,故称有寻有伺。同理,「无寻无伺」:无寻亦无伺,故称无寻无伺。「唯伺」:于寻与伺中,唯以伺为限量,即只与伺相应,不与寻相应。「无寻唯伺」:无寻而唯有伺,故称无寻唯伺。此三者亦可分开解读。四法与五法,其义已明。在六法中,「随念」:因屡屡生起,念即是随念;或因其于当起处生起,适合净信出家的善男子,故称随念。「佛随念」:以佛陀为所缘而生起的随念。这是以阿拉汉等佛陀功德为所缘之念的名称。依此佛显示巴利原文
43. Samādhibhāvanāmayañāṇaniddese ādito tāva ekakato paṭṭhāya yāva dasakā samādhippabhedaṃ dassento eko samādhītiādimāha. Tattha cittassa ekaggatāti nānārammaṇavikkhepābhāvato ekaṃ ārammaṇaṃ aggaṃ uttamaṃ assāti ekaggo, ekaggassa bhāvo ekaggatā. Sā pana ekaggatā cittassa, na sattassāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘cittassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Duke lokiyoti loko vuccati lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena vaṭṭaṃ, tasmiṃ pariyāpannabhāvena loke niyuttoti lokiyo. Lokuttaroti uttiṇṇoti uttaro, loke apariyāpannabhāvena lokato uttaroti lokuttaro. Tike savitakko ca so savicāro cāti savitakkasavicāro. Evaṃ avitakkaavicāro. Vitakkavicāresu vicārova mattā pamāṇaṃ etassāti vicāramatto, vicārato utthari vitakkena saddhiṃ sampayogaṃ na gacchatīti attho. Avitakko ca so vicāramatto cāti avitakkavicāramatto. Tīsupi vicchedaṃ katvāpi paṭhanti. Catukkapañcakā vuttatthā . Chakke punappunaṃ uppajjanato satiyeva anussati, pavattitabbaṭṭhānamhiyeva vā pavattattā saddhāpabbajitassa kulaputtassa anurūpā satītipi anussati, buddhaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati bauddhānussati. Arahatādibuddhaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tassā buddhānussatiyā vasena cittassa ekaggatāyeva uddhaccasaṅkhātassa vikkhepassa paṭipakkhabhāvato na vikkhepoti avikkhepo. Dhammaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati dhammānussati. Svākkhātatādidhammaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saṅghaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati saṅghānussati. Suppaṭipannatādisaṅghaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ . Sīlaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati sīlānussati. Attano akhaṇḍatādisīlaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cāgaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati cāgānussati. Attano muttacāgatādicāgaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Devatā ārabbha uppannā anussati devatānussati. Devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā attano saddhādiguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
在七法中,「定善巧」:对于一种、多种等种种差别的定,能了知「此定如是,此定如是」的善巧。这是定差别智的别名。于令定生起的规则中具有善巧,亦名定善巧。显示巴利原文
Sattake samādhikusalatāti ekavidhādibhedena anekabhede samādhimhi ‘‘ayamevaṃvidho samādhi, ayamevaṃvidho samādhī’’ti chekabhāvo. Samādhiparicchedakapaññāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Samādhiuppādanavidhānepi chekabhāvo samādhikusalatā.
入定善巧:对于已生起的定,善能进入。以此说明入定自在。显示巴利原文
Samādhissa samāpattikusalatāti uppāditassa samādhissa samāpajjane chekabhāvo. Etena samāpajjanavasitā vuttā hoti.
住定善巧:对于已进入的定,能以相续的方式随顺意愿安住,这是善巧。以此说明决意自在。或者,他虽能取相,令彼行相成就,仅得安止,不能久住。而定能久住,是因为定的障碍法得到了很好的净化。为什么呢?如果比丘未以观察欲的过患等善能镇伏爱欲,未以身轻安善能止息身之粗重,未以界作意等善能驱除昏沉睡眠,未以止相作意等善能灭除掉举与悔恨,也未善能净化其他定的障碍法便入禅那,他便会像进入未净窝的蜜蜂,或进入不净园林的国王,很快退出来。然而,如果能善加净化定的障碍法而后入定,他就会像进入善净窝的蜜蜂,或进入极净园林的国王那样,能整整一日住于等至之中。因此古人说:显示巴利原文
Samādhissa ṭhitikusalatāti samāpannassa samādhissa santativasena yathāruci ṭhapane chekabhāvo. Etena adhiṭṭhānavasitā vuttā hoti. Atha vā nimittaggahaṇena cassa puna te ākāre sampādayato appanāmattameva ijjhati, na ciraṭṭhānaṃ. Ciraṭṭhānaṃ pana samādhiparipanthānaṃ dhammānaṃ suvisodhitattā hoti. Yo hi bhikkhu kāmādīnavapaccavekkhaṇādīhi kāmacchandaṃ na suṭṭhu vikkhambhetvā, kāyapassaddhivasena kāyaduṭṭhullaṃ na suppaṭippassaddhaṃ katvā, ārambhadhātumanasikārādivasena thinamiddhaṃ na suṭṭhu paṭivinodetvā, samathanimittamanasikārādivasena uddhaccakukkuccaṃ na suṭṭhu samūhataṃ katvā, aññepi samādhiparipanthe dhamme na suṭṭhu visodhetvā jhānaṃ samāpajjati, so avisodhitaṃ āsayaṃ paviṭṭhabhamaro viya, asuddhaṃ uyyānaṃ paviṭṭharājā viya ca khippameva nikkhamati. Yo pana samādhiparipanthe dhamme suṭṭhu visodhetvā jhānaṃ samāpajjati, so suvisodhitaṃ āsayaṃ paviṭṭhabhamaro viya, suparisuddhaṃ uyyānaṃ paviṭṭharājā viya ca sakalampi divasabhāgaṃ antosamāpattiyaṃyeva hoti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
应消除对欲乐的贪欲与嗔恚,以及掉举、昏沉,第五种盖——疑。
以远离所生的欢喜心,犹如国王进入清净内宫,于彼处喜悦而住。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāmesu chandaṃ paṭighaṃ vinodaye, uddhaccathīnaṃ vicikicchapañcamaṃ; Vivekapāmojjakarena cetasā, rājāva suddhantagato tahiṃ rame’’ti .
因此,既然说“欲令定长久安住者,应先清除障碍法而后入定”,依此义而行之后,于令定长久安住方面,即称为善巧。显示巴利原文
Tasmā ‘‘ciraṭṭhitikāmena pāripanthikadhamme sodhetvā jhānaṃ samāpajjitabba’’nti vuttattā taṃ vidhiṃ sampādetvā samādhissa ciraṭṭhitikaraṇe chekabhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“出定善巧”是指:对于依心相续之势、随其所欲而转起的定,唯在如所限定的时间出定,由此于出定方面具有善巧。应知此处如《本生经》“Yassa hi dhammaṃ puriso vijaññā”等句,是为表责备义而作属格,或可理解为仅作属格。由此宣说了“出定自在”。显示巴利原文
Samādhissa vuṭṭhānakusalatāti santativasena yathāruci pavattassa samādhissa yathāparicchinnakāleyeva vuṭṭhānena samādhissa vuṭṭhāne chekabhāvo. ‘‘Yassa hi dhammaṃ puriso vijaññā’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.10.152) viya nissakkatthe vā sāmivacanaṃ katanti veditabbanti. Etena vuṭṭhānavasitā vuttā hoti.
「定的适业善巧」:无病、无患的状态称为“适业”。因为有病即称为“不适业”。律藏中也说:“尊者,我并非不适业”(《波罗夷》151)。在《无秽经》与《广说经》(《中部》1.57等、70等)中所说的那些证得禅那的障碍——邪恶的欲行等已不存在,并且贪欲等心的随烦恼已被去除,由此令定离病,这就是“定的适业善巧”,也即是关于除去烦恼病的善巧。或者,“适业”(kallatā)就是“适业性”,因为“kalla”一词与“适业性”(kammaññatā)同义。正如所引:“心的那种不适业性、不柔软性”(《法集论》1162),以及“适业的心、柔软的心、离盖的心”(《长部》1.298;《中部》2.395;《大品》26)。此处“kalla”正是“适合作业”的意思。因此,通过遍顺、遍逆、遍顺逆、禅那顺、禅那逆、禅那顺逆、跳禅、跳遍、禅遍跳、跳支、跳所缘、支所缘跳、支的确定、所缘的确定——这十四种行相,或加上支所缘的确定共十五种行相,调练心而令定适合作业,这种善巧便称为「定的适业善巧」。显示巴利原文
Samādhissa kallatākusalatāti agilānabhāvo arogabhāvo kallatā. Gilāno hi akallakoti vuccati. Vinayepi vuttaṃ ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhante, akallako’’ti (pārā. 151). Anaṅgaṇasuttavatthasuttesu (ma. ni. 1.57 ādayo, 70 ādayo) vuttānaṃ jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkānaṃ pāpakānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ abhāvena ca abhijjhādīnaṃ cittassa upakkilesānaṃ vigamena ca samādhissa agilānabhāvakaraṇe chekabhāvo samādhissa kallatākusalatā, kilesagelaññarahitabhāve kusalatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā kallatāti kammaññatā kammaññatāpariyāyattā kallavacanassa. ‘‘Yā cittassa akallatā akammaññatā’’ti (dha. sa. 1162) hi vuttaṃ ‘‘kallacittaṃ muducittaṃ vinīvaraṇacitta’’nti (dī. ni. 1.298; ma. ni. 2.395; mahāva. 26) ca. Ettha kallasaddo kammaññattho. Tasmā kasiṇānulomato kasiṇapaṭilomato kasiṇānulomapaṭilomato jhānānulomato jhānapaṭilomato jhānānulomapaṭilomato jhānukkantikato kasiṇukkantikato jhānakasiṇukkantikato aṅgasaṅkantito ārammaṇasaṅkantito aṅgārammaṇasaṅkantito aṅgavavatthānato ārammaṇavavatthānatoti imehi cuddasahi ākārehi, aṅgārammaṇavavatthānatoti iminā saha pañcadasahi vā ākārehi cittaparidamanena samādhissa kammaññabhāvakaraṇe kusalabhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti.
「定的行处善巧」:对于定的行处,即诸遍等所缘,因希求入于种种禅那,随其所好而作意转向,于他们所缘极为熟练。由此,依于遍的转向之势,便说出了“转向自在”。或者,依于各个方所的遍满之势,对于如此触得的遍,以及依久住之势,在定的行处方面具有善巧。显示巴利原文
Samādhissa gocarakusalatāti samādhissa gocaresu kasiṇādīsu ārammaṇesu taṃ taṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitukāmatāya yathāruci āvajjanakaraṇavasena tesu ārammaṇesu chekabhāvo. Etena kasiṇāvajjanavasena āvajjanavasitā vuttā hoti. Atha vā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ disābhāge kasiṇapharaṇavasena evaṃ phuṭṭhassa kasiṇassa ciraṭṭhānavasena ca samādhissa gocaresu chekabhāvo.
「定的转向善巧」:以连贯的方式,将下下的定引导、转入上上的定之状态,在如此转向、引导方面熟练,即是善巧。因为,已达自在的近行定,会为了初禅或为了观而转向;同样,初禅等为第二禅等或为观而转向;第四禅为无色定、为神通或为观而转向;空无边处等为识无边处等或为观而转向——像这样,于一切处皆具定的转向善巧。然而,由于善巧其实是慧,而非定,所以应知,这是依作为定之引导者的慧,而说这“七种定”。显示巴利原文
Samādhissa abhinīhārakusalatāti ekattanayena heṭṭhāheṭṭhāsamādhiṃ uparūparisamādhibhāvūpanayanena abhinīharaṇe abhininnāmane chekabhāvo. Upacārajjhānañhi vasippattaṃ paṭhamajjhānatthāya vipassanatthāya vā abhinīharati, evaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīni dutiyajjhānādiatthāya vipassanatthāya vā, catutthajjhānaṃ arūpasamāpattatthāya abhiññatthāya vipassanatthāya vā, ākāsānañcāyatanādayo viññāṇañcāyatanādiatthāya vipassanatthāya vā abhinīharatīti evaṃ samādhissa tattha tattha abhinīhārakusalatā. Yasmā pana kusalatā nāma paññā, sā samādhi na hoti, tasmā samādhipariṇāyakapaññāvasena sattavidho samādhi vuttoti veditabbo.
然而,有些老师这样解释这些词的意义:「定善巧」:由于某种作意,心不散乱,于彼具有善巧。「入定善巧」:由于某种作意,正入定时禅支显现,于彼具有善巧。「住定善巧」:由于某种作意,已安止的定不散乱,于彼具有善巧。「出定善巧」:在初禅,知道从诸盖出起;在三禅,知道从禅支出起;在无色定,知道从所缘出起;在殊胜行境等时,知道从散乱出起;在限定之时和所作已办之时,知道随愿出起。「适业善巧」:知道凭借心舒适、身舒适、食舒适、坐卧具舒适、人的舒适,令定成为适业。「行处善巧」:知道对所缘作限定,知道作遍,知道增长。「转向善巧」:以各处的如理作意,令心转向、倾注;在已达自在的近行上,转向初禅;同样地,转向以上诸禅、诸神通、诸无色定、诸观。如此,在一切处皆有转向善巧。显示巴利原文
Keci pana ācariyā ‘‘samādhikusalatāti yena manasikārena cittaṃ na vikkhipati, tattha kusalatā. Samāpattikusalatāti yena manasikārena samāpajjantassa jhānaṅgāni pātubhavanti, tattha kusalatā. Ṭhitikusalatāti yena manasikārena appito samādhi na vikkhipati, tattha kusalatā. Vuṭṭhānakusalatāti nīvaraṇavuṭṭhānaṃ jānāti paṭhamajjhāne, aṅgavuṭṭhānaṃ jānāti tīsu jhānesu, ārammaṇavuṭṭhānaṃ jānāti arūpasamāpattīsu, vikkhepavuṭṭhānaṃ jānāti visayādhimattesu, sacchandavuṭṭhānaṃ jānāti pariyantakāle ca avasānakaraṇīyakāle ca. Kallatākusalatāti cittaphāsutāya sarīraphāsutāya āhāraphāsutāya senāsanaphāsutāya puggalaphāsutāya ca samādhissa kallatā hotīti jānāti. Gocarakusalatāti ārammaṇassa paricchedaṃ kātuṃ jānāti, disāpharaṇaṃ kātuṃ jānāti, vaḍḍhetuṃ jānāti. Abhinīhārakusalatāti tattha tattha sammā manasikārena cittaṃ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti, upacāre vasippatte paṭhamajjhāne abhinīharati, evaṃ uparūparijhānesu abhiññāsu arūpasamāpattīsu vipassanāsu ca abhinīharati. Evaṃ tattha tattha abhinīhārakusalatā’’ti evametesaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti.
「第八组」的意义已如前所述。关于第九组,「属于色界者」是指:包含在“哪些法是色界法?下至以梵众天为边际,上至以阿迦腻吒天为界限”等(《法集论》1289)方式所说的色界法当中。此处的词义是:以色蕴所构成的色在这里活动,并非在欲中活动,故称为「色界」。色蕴也被称为“色”,正如“色蕴是色”等说法(《双论》1.蕴双2)。而这个色界,依梵众天、梵辅天、大梵天、少光天、无量光天、光音天、少净天、无量净天、遍净天、无想有情天、广果天,以及无烦天、无热天、善见天、善现天、阿迦腻吒天,分作十六种区域。那名为“色界”的区域,省略后面的词而被称为“色”,于色中活动故,即是「色界」。或者,色有即是色,于其中活动,故称「色界」。虽然这种定也会在欲有中活动,但好比因在战场上活动而得“战场活动者”之名的象,即便在城镇中行走,仍被称为“战场活动者”;又如同陆行、水行的生物,即便站于干地或水中,仍被称为陆行者、水行者;同样地,这种定虽然也在其他地方活动,仍称为「色界」。再者,把结生推进到名为“色有”的色显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhakaṃ vuttatthameva. Navake rūpāvacaroti ‘‘katame dhammā rūpāvacarā? Heṭṭhato brahmapārisajjaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito akaniṭṭhe deve antokaritvā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1289) nayena vuttesu rūpāvacaradhammesu pariyāpanno. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – rūpakkhandhasaṅkhātaṃ rūpaṃ ettha avacarati, na kāmoti rūpāvacaro. Rūpakkhandhopi hi rūpanti vuccati ‘‘rūpakkhandho rūpa’’ntiādīsu (yama. 1.khandhayamaka.2) viya. So pana brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmānaṃ parittābhaappamāṇābhaābhassarānaṃ parittasubhaappamāṇasubhasubhakiṇhānaṃ asaññasattavehapphalānaṃ avihātappasudassasudassīakaniṭṭhānañca vasena soḷasavidho padeso. So rūpāvacarasaṅkhāto padeso uttarapadalopaṃ katvā ‘‘rūpa’’nti vuccati, tasmiṃ rūpe avacaratīti rūpāvacaro. Rūpabhavo vā rūpaṃ, tasmiṃ avacaratīti rūpāvacaraṃ. Kiñcāpi hi eso samādhi kāmabhavepi avacarati, yathā pana saṅgāme avacaraṇato saṅgāmāvacaroti laddhanāmo nāgo nagare carantopi saṅgāmāvacaroti vuccati, thalacarā jalacarā ca pāṇino athale ajale ca ṭhitāpi thalacarā jalacarāti vuccanti, evamayaṃ aññattha avacarantopi rūpāvacaroti vutto. Apica rūpabhavasaṅkhāte rūpe paṭisandhiṃ avacāretītipi rūpāvacaro. Hīnoti lāmako. Hīnuttamānaṃ majjhe bhavo majjho. Majjhimotipi pāṭho, soyevattho. Padhānabhāvaṃ nīto paṇīto, uttamoti attho. Ete pana āyūhanavasena veditabbā. Yassa hi āyūhanakkhaṇe chando vā hīno hoti vīriyaṃ vā cittaṃ vā vīmaṃsā vā, so hīno nāma. Yassa te dhammā majjhimā, so majjhimo. Yassa paṇītā, so paṇīto. Uppāditamatto vā hīno, nātisubhāvito majjhimo, atisubhāvito vasippatto paṇīto. Arūpāvacaro rūpāvacare vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
关于「空定」等:当一个人依照“一切诸行无常、苦、无我”的观修次第而观察时,由无我随观生起道之出起,由于该观在离我的诸行上以“空”的方式转起,故名为「空」。依此所成就的圣道定,名为「空定」,指依空之力而转起的定。这是随顺观转起的方式而转起。当由无常随观生起道之出起时,由于该观是与常相相违的方式而转起,故名为「无相」。依此所成就的圣道定,名为「无相定」,指离常相的定。这是随顺观转起的方式而转起。当由苦随观生起道之出起时,由于该观是与愿求相违的方式而转起,故名为「无愿」。依此所成就的圣道定,名为「无愿定」,指离愿求的定。这是随顺观转起的方式而转起。同样的,三种果定也应当知道被这三种定所包含。但是,由于出世间定极为殊胜,故不引用劣、中等这些分类。显示巴利原文
Suññato samādhītiādīsu ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā dukkhā anattā’’ti vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā vipassantassa anattānupassanāya maggavuṭṭhāne jāte yasmā sā vipassanā attavirahitesu saṅkhāresu suññato pavattā, tasmā suññatā nāma hoti. Tāya siddho ariyamaggasamādhi suññato samādhi nāma hoti, suññatavasena pavattasamādhīti attho. Vipassanāya pavattākārena hi so pavattati. Aniccānupassanāya maggavuṭṭhāne jāte yasmā sā vipassanā niccanimittapaṭipakkhavasena pavattā, tasmā animittā nāma hoti. Tāya siddho ariyamaggasamādhi animitto samādhi nāma hoti, niccanimittavirahito samādhīti attho. Vipassanāya pavattākārena hi so pavattati. Dukkhānupassanāya maggavuṭṭhāne jāte yasmā sā vipassanā paṇidhipaṭipakkhavasena pavattā, tasmā appaṇihitā nāma hoti. Tāya siddho ariyamaggasamādhi appaṇihito samādhi nāma hoti, paṇidhivirahito samādhīti attho. Vipassanāya pavattākārena hi so pavattati. Tādisā eva tayo phalasamādhayopi etehiyeva tīhi samādhīhi gahitā hontīti veditabbā. Lokuttarasamādhīnaṃ pana paṇītattā hīnādibhedo na uddhaṭo.
在十相中,“依膨胀想”等:如同皮囊被风灌满,命终之后依次隆起,因肿胀的状态而膨胀,这便称为“膨胀”;“膨胀”本身就是“膨胀相”;或者因为是厌恶不净的膨胀,故称“膨胀相”。这是对此类尸体的指称。颜色变异就称为“青瘀”;“青瘀”本身就是“青瘀相”;或者因为是厌恶不净的青瘀,故称“青瘀相”。这是对那种在肉隆起处呈红色、脓积聚处呈白色、大部分呈青黑色,如同披着青布的尸体的指称。在破裂处流出脓液,称为“脓烂”;“脓烂”本身就是“脓烂相”;或者因为是厌恶不净的脓烂,故称“脓烂相”。这是对此类尸体的指称。被从中间切断而断为两段,称为“断坏”;“断坏”本身就是“断坏相”;或者因为是厌恶不净的断坏,故称“断坏相”。这是对那种中间被切断的尸体的指称。被狗、豺等从各处以种种方式啃食,称为“食残”——原本应说‘vikhāyita’,却说成了‘vikkhāyita’。“食残”本身就是“食残相”;或者因为是厌恶不净的食残,故称“食残相”。这是对此类尸体的指称。被散乱各处……显示巴利原文
Dasake uddhumātakasaññāvasenātiādīsu bhastā viya vāyunā uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā yathānukkamaṃ samuggatena sūnabhāvena uddhumātattā uddhumātaṃ, uddhumātameva uddhumātakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ uddhumātanti uddhumātakaṃ. Tathārūpassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vinīlaṃ vuccati viparibhinnavaṇṇaṃ, vinīlameva vinīlakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vinīlanti vinīlakaṃ. Maṃsussadaṭṭhānesu rattavaṇṇassa, pubbasannicayaṭṭhānesu setavaṇṇassa, yebhuyyena ca nīlavaṇṇassa nīlaṭṭhāne nīlasāṭakapārutasseva chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Paribhinnaṭṭhānesu vissandamānapubbaṃ vipubbaṃ, vipubbameva vipubbakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vipubbanti vipubbakaṃ. Tathārūpassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vicchiddaṃ vuccati dvidhā chindanena apadhāritaṃ, vicchiddameva vicchiddakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vicchiddanti vicchiddakaṃ. Vemajjhe chinnassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ito ca etto ca vividhākārena soṇasiṅgālādīhi khāyitanti vikkhāyitaṃ, vikhāyitanti vattabbe vikkhāyitanti vuttaṃ. Vikkhāyitameva vikkhāyitakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vikkhāyitanti vikkhāyitakaṃ. Tathārūpassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vividhaṃ khittaṃ vikkhittaṃ, vikkhittameva vikkhittakaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vikkhittanti vikkhittakaṃ. Aññena hatthaṃ aññena pādaṃ aññena sīsanti evaṃ tato tato khittassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Hatañca taṃ purimanayeneva vikkhittakañcāti hatavikkhittakaṃ. Kākapadākārena aṅgapaccaṅgesu satthena hanitvā vuttanayena vikkhittassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Lohitaṃ kirati vikkhipati ito cito ca paggharatīti lohitakaṃ. Paggharitalohitamakkhitassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Puḷavā vuccanti kimayo, puḷave kiratīti puḷavakaṃ. Kimiparipuṇṇassa chavasarīrassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Aṭṭhiyeva aṭṭhikaṃ, paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ aṭṭhīti aṭṭhikaṃ. Aṭṭhisaṅkhalikāyapi ekaṭṭhikassapi etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Imāni ca pana uddhumātakādīni nissāya uppannanimittānampi nimittesu paṭiladdhajjhānānampi etāneva nāmāni. Idha pana uddhumātakanimitte paṭikūlākāragāhikā appanāvasena uppannā saññā uddhumātakasaññā, tassā uddhumātakasaññāya vasena uddhumātakasaññāvasena. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Pañcapaññāsa samādhīti ekakādivasena vuttā.
44 像这样,依单一等类别展示了定的分类之后,现在想要用另一种理趣来显示定,于是用了“再者”来开启另一种理趣,然后说“二十五”等。这里,「定的地基」是指:就定的状态、自性而言,那些自性使定成为定,它们在定当中具有意义。以「摄受」之义来说:定因为被信等根所摄受,所以是以“已被摄受”为自性的定。而且那些根是互相作为眷属的,并且由于修习圆满而成为完备。因此,以「眷属」的意义,以「圆满」的意义,而成为定。相对于那些根依于定而朝向同一个所缘,这是「一境」的意义;相对于没有种种所缘的散乱,这是「不散乱」的意义;唯独对于出世间定,因为它需要凭借强大的精进力量才能证得,又唯独对于出世间道,因为没有由于退失而流散的情况,所以前面所取的“策励”义和“不放逸”义,在这里没有被采用,应当这样理解。由于没有烦恼的浑浊,以「无浊」的意义为定。由于不被动摇,以「无摇动」的意义为定。由于通过镇伏或断除而解脱了烦恼,并且对所缘已经倾向,以「解脱」的意义为定。显示巴利原文
44. Evaṃ ekakādivasena samādhippabhedaṃ dassetvā idāni aññenapi pariyāyena samādhiṃ dassetukāmo apicāti aññaṃ pariyāyārambhaṃ dassetvā pañcavīsatītiādimāha. Tattha samādhissa samādhiṭṭhāti samādhissa samādhibhāve sabhāvā, yehi sabhāvehi so samādhi hoti, te tasmiṃ atthā nāma. Pariggahaṭṭhena samādhīti saddhādīhi indriyehi pariggahitattā tasmā pariggahitasabhāvena samādhi. Tāneva ca indriyāni aññamaññaparivārāni honti, bhāvanāpāripūriyā paripuṇṇāni ca honti. Tasmā parivāraṭṭhena paripūraṭṭhena samādhi. Tesaṃyeva samādhivasena ekārammaṇamapekkhitvā ekaggaṭṭhena, nānārammaṇavikkhepābhāvamapekkhitvā avikkhepaṭṭhena, lokuttarasseva mahatā vīriyabalapaggahena pattabbattā lokuttaramaggasseva ca parihānivasena visārābhāvato heṭṭhā gahitapaggahaṭṭhaavisāraṭṭhā idha na gahitāti veditabbā. Kilesakālussiyassābhāvena anāvilaṭṭhena samādhi. Avikampattā aniñjanaṭṭhena samādhi. Vikkhambhanavasena samucchedavasena vā kilesehi vimuttattā ārammaṇe ca adhimuttattā vimuttaṭṭhena samādhi.
以「住立于一境的状态」而说「心的安住故」:正是由于与定相应,依靠心强力安住于一个所缘的状态,心对所缘毫不动摇地安住,所以说安住。在八对当中,「寻求、不寻求」、「执取、不执取」、「行道、不行道」,应当知道这三对是在安止速行之前,依近行定的弱、中、强状态而说的。「禅思、燃烧」这一对,应当知道是在安止速行中,依近行定而说的。「已寻求故、已不寻求故」、「已执取故、已不执取故」、「已行道故、已不行道故」、「已禅思故、已不燃烧故」,应当知道这四对是依安止定而说的。显示巴利原文
Ekattupaṭṭhānavasenacittassa ṭhitattāti samādhiyogeneva ekārammaṇe bhusaṃ patiṭṭhānavasena cittassa ārammaṇe niccalabhāvena patiṭṭhitattā. Aṭṭhasu yugalesu esati nesati, ādiyati nādiyati, paṭipajjati na paṭipajjatīti imāni tīṇi yugalāni appanāvīthito pubbabhāge upacārassa mudumajjhādhimattatāvasena vuttānīti veditabbāni, jhāyati jhāpetīti idaṃ appanāvīthiyaṃ upacāravasena veditabbaṃ. Esitattā nesitattā, ādinnattā anādinnattā, paṭipannattā nappaṭipannattā, jhātattā na jhāpitattāti imāni cattāri yugalāni appanāvasena vuttānīti veditabbāni.
其中,‘等寻求故为定’等句中的‘等’,是指安止。因为安止能寂灭敌对法,所以是‘等’;或者因为它脱离了敌对的种种不平等状态,所以是‘平等’。它寻求那个‘等’,即依自己的意乐而寻求。‘iti’表示原因,由于寻求‘等’,因此称为‘定’。‘不寻求不等’:不寻求那些称为诸禅那敌对法的‘不等’。作为前分的弱定是初始阶段,它会寻求‘等’,故说不寻求‘不等’。中等的定,由于已得稳固,会执取‘等’,这称为不执取‘不等’。殊胜的定,由于邻近安止速行心路,会正确地行道于‘等’,这称为不行道于‘不等’。‘等禅思’:这是一个中性词的修习用语,意思是成为‘等’之后而禅思,或者以‘等’的方式禅思。因为在安止速行心路中,定因敌对法消失而寂静,并且是以顺应寂静安止的状态而安住的,所以它是以‘等’的方式进行的。‘禅思’是燃烧的意思,正如‘这些殿堂中的灯盏整夜燃烧……’、‘油灯燃烧一整夜,这里的油灯也可能燃烧’等句中所用的那样。也有‘等生’的读法,意思是以‘等’的方式生起。不过,因为显示巴利原文
Tattha samaṃ esatīti samādhītiādīsu samanti appanaṃ. Sā hi paccanīkadhamme sameti nāsetīti samā, paccanīkavisamābhāvato vā samabhūtāti samā. Taṃ samaṃ esati ajjhāsayavasena gavesati. Itisaddo kāraṇattho, yasmā samaṃ esati, tasmā samādhīti attho. Visamaṃ nesatīti taṃ taṃ jhānapaccanīkasaṅkhātaṃ visamaṃ na esati. Mudubhūto hi pubbabhāgasamādhi ādibhūtattā samaṃ esati, visamaṃ nesati nāma. Majjhimabhūto thirabhūtattā samaṃ ādiyati, visamaṃ nādiyati nāma. Adhimattabhūto appanāvīthiyā āsannabhūtattā samaṃ paṭipajjati, visamaṃ nappaṭipajjati nāma. Samaṃ jhāyatīti bhāvanapuṃsakavacanaṃ, samaṃ hutvā jhāyati, samena vā ākārena jhāyatīti attho. Appanāvīthiyañhi samādhi paccanīkadhammavigamena santattā, santāya appanāya anukūlabhāvena ca ṭhitattā samenākārena pavattati. Jhāyatīti ca pajjalatīti attho ‘‘ete maṇḍalamāḷe dīpā jhāyanti (dī. ni. 1.159) sabbarattiṃ, sabbarattiyo ca telappadīpo jhāyati, telappadīpo cettha jhāyeyyā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.255-256) viya. Samaṃ jāyatītipi pāṭho , samenākārena uppajjatīti attho. Jhāyati jhāpetīti yugalattā pana purimapāṭhova sundarataro. Jhāpetīti ca dahatīti attho. So hi samādhipaccanīkadhamme dūratarakaraṇena dahati nāma. Esanānesanādīnaṃ pana appanāya siddhattā ‘‘esitattā nesitattā’’tiādīhi appanāsamādhi vutto. Samaṃ jhātattāti samaṃ jalitattā. Samaṃ jātattātipi pāṭho. Iti imesaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ yugalānaṃ vasena soḷasa, purimā ca navāti ime pañcavīsati samādhissa samādhiṭṭhā.
‘既是等、又是已安置、又是乐,所以叫定’:这句是为说明依二十五种行相所成就的‘定’的意义而说的。其中,‘等’是sama这个词或saṃ前缀的意思。它因为已远离敌对、扰动的种种不平等状态,所以是‘等’。‘已安置’是ādhi前缀的意思,指对于所缘,通过造作不动摇的状态而得以安置、确立。合此二者,便说‘既是等、又是已安置,所以叫定’。‘乐’:以寂静的意义为‘乐’。因为经中说:‘尊者,那不苦不乐受,是世尊所说的寂静、殊胜之乐所摄。’又说:‘然而,舍受因其寂静,故也称为乐。’以此寂静的意义,通过‘乐’这个词,也包含了与舍俱行的定。因为在这里,一切定都是以通例的方式宣说的。而那个‘乐’字,也说明了‘已安置’的原因。应当知道其意是:因为寂静,所以对于一种所缘是已安置的。显示巴利原文
Samoca hito ca sukho cāti samādhīti idaṃ pana pañcavīsatiyā ākārehi sādhitassa samādhissa atthasādhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha samoti samasaddassa, saṃsaddassa vā attho. So hi paccanīkakkhobhavisamavirahitattā samo. Hitoti ādhisaddassa attho, ārammaṇe āhito niccalabhāvakaraṇena patiṭṭhāpitoti adhippāyo. Ubhayena samo ca āhito cāti samādhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sukhoti santaṭṭhena sukho. ‘‘Yāyaṃ, bhante, adukkhamasukhā vedanā, santasmiṃ esā paṇīte sukhe vuttā bhagavatā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.88) ca ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti ca vuttattā tena santatthena sukhasaddena upekkhāsahagatasamādhipi gahito hoti. Aniyāmena hi sabbasamādhayo idha vuccanti. Tena ca sukhasaddena āhitabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmā santo, tasmā ekārammaṇe āhitoti adhippāyo veditabboti.
4. 法住智解说释义显示巴利原文
4. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
45 45. 在法住智的解说中,对于“无明、行的生起住立故”等语句,其中所说的「住立」,是指诸行依之而安立。那是什么呢?即是无明。也就是说,无明是诸行生起、产生的住立、原因,故称「生起住立」;对于已生起的诸行,它也是其持续运转的原因,故称「运转住立」。虽然能生缘只在令生的刹那发挥其作用,但由于诸行在被它令生之后方能持续运转,因此,仅就其自身那一刹那而言,也可称为运转之因;或从相续的角度,说其为运转之因。“Pavattanti”是中性词,表“成为”义,因此 pavattaṃ 与 pavatti 意义相通。然而,因 pavatti 一词更为常用,此处便结合它来解释其义。ṭhiti 一词也可用于“成为”之义,但在这里并非此意,而是指“原因”。为了表明这一点,便说「相住立」,意即:作为相的住立,亦即作为原因的住立。为了彰显此缘的力量,又说「造作住立」,意即:作为造作的住立。也就是说,它不仅仅是相而已,在产生诸行之时。显示巴利原文
45. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaniddese avijjāsaṅkhārānaṃ uppādaṭṭhitītiādīsu tiṭṭhanti etāya saṅkhārāti ṭhiti. Kā sā? Avijjā. Sā hi saṅkhārānaṃ uppādāya nibbattiyā ṭhiti kāraṇanti uppādaṭṭhiti. Uppannānaṃ pavattiyāpi kāraṇanti pavattaṭṭhiti. Kiñcāpi hi janakapaccayassa jananakkhaṇeyeva kiccānubhāvo hoti, tena pana janitānaṃyeva pavattattā sakakkhaṇe pavattiyāpi kāraṇaṃ nāma hoti, santativasena vā pavattiyā kāraṇanti attho . Pavattanti ca napuṃsake bhāvavacanametaṃ, tasmā pavattaṃ pavattīti atthato ekaṃ. Pavattisaddassa pana pākaṭattā tena yojetvā attho vutto. Bhāvepi ṭhitisaddassa sijjhanato na idha bhāve ṭhitisaddo, kāraṇe ṭhitisaddoti dassanattaṃ nimittaṭṭhitīti vuttaṃ, nimittabhūtā ṭhitīti attho, kāraṇabhūtāti vuttaṃ hoti. Na kevalaṃ nimittamattaṃ hoti, atha kho saṅkhārajanane sabyāpārā viya hutvā āyūhati vāyamatīti paccayasamatthataṃ dassento āyūhanaṭṭhitīti āha, āyūhanabhūtā ṭhitīti attho. Yasmā avijjā saṅkhāre uppādayamānā uppāde saṃyojeti nāma, ghaṭetīti attho. Saṅkhāre pavattayamānā pavattiyaṃ palibundhati nāma, bandhatīti attho. Tasmā saññogaṭṭhiti palibodhaṭṭhitīti vuttā. Saññogabhūtā ṭhiti, palibodhabhūtā ṭhitīti attho. Yasmā avijjāva saṅkhāre uppādayamānā uppādāya pavattiyā ca mūlakāraṇaṭṭhena samudayo nāma, samudayabhūtā ṭhitīti samudayaṭṭhiti, mūlakāraṇabhūtā ṭhitīti attho. Avijjāva saṅkhārānaṃ uppāde janakapaccayattā, pavattiyaṃ upatthambhakapaccayattā hetuṭṭhiti paccayaṭṭhitīti vuttā, hetubhūtā ṭhiti, paccayabhūtā ṭhitīti attho. Janakapaccayo hi hetūti, upatthambhako paccayoti vuccati. Evaṃ sesesupi yojetabbaṃ.
然而,在“有是生的缘,生是老死的缘”这里,应知:这是依于“生起”的方式,将「生起住立」、「结缚住立」、「因住立」等词结合,并依具有生老死的诸蕴,以间接方式而说。然而,有些人却用“对于生起是住立,便名生起住立”等方法,来解释此处的义理。「以无明为缘」:这是着眼于无明作为诸行之缘的状态而说。为了表明无明也是由缘所生的,故而它也能被缘所摄受,于是说:“这两种法都是缘所生的。这就是在把握缘上的慧。”对其余诸支,也应如此结合。而“生是缘,老死是缘所生”,这同样是以间接方式而说。「过去时的长时」:指已经过去的时间。「未来的长时」:指尚未到来的时间。这两处都是就极其长远的相续这一意义,而使用业格的。显示巴利原文
Bhavojātiyā, jāti jarāmaraṇassāti ettha pana uppādaṭṭhiti saññogaṭṭhiti hetuṭṭhitīti uppādavasena yojitāni padāni jātijarāmaraṇavantānaṃ khandhānaṃ vasena pariyāyena vuttānīti veditabbāni. Keci pana ‘‘uppādāya ṭhiti uppādaṭṭhitī’’ti evamādinā nayenettha atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Avijjā paccayoti avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayabhāvaṃ apekkhitvā vuttaṃ. Avijjāyapi paccayasambhūtattā tassā api paccayapariggahaṇadassanatthaṃ ubhopete dhammā paccayasamuppannāti paccayapariggahe paññāti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi yojetabbaṃ. Jāti paccayo, jarāmaraṇaṃ paccayasamuppannanti pana pariyāyena vuttaṃ. Atītampi addhānanti atikkantampi kālaṃ. Anāgatampi addhānanti appattampi kālaṃ. Ubhayatthāpi accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ.
46 46. 现在,在九行相轮之后,舍弃那些九行相,仅以因、缘、缘生等词来结合,开示了“无明是因,行是因所生”等三个轮。在九行相轮中,是依能生与支持的作用而说「缘」。而在这里,由于「因轮」和「缘轮」是分开的,所以应知:「因」指能生缘的性质,「缘」指支持缘的性质,因为如无明等每一个缘,都可依这两种方式而存在。在缘轮中,「缘于无明」:诸行于自身生起时,需要依靠无明,因此对诸行而言,无明是应当被面向、被趋近的对象,故说为「缘」。这便说明了无明具有令诸行生起的能力。「行是缘所生」:诸行是缘于无明,朝着它而转起,以它为面向,不离开无明而一同生起的。对余下的诸支,也应根据名词的性别来相应结合。或者,有另一种读法,以“努力”的方式读作“无明是所缘”。但这里,是顺着“无明是朝着自己的缘而转起”这种读法的余势来解释意义的,对其他支亦是如此。在这四个轮中,法住智应当依十二缘起支的缘来说明,所以只就无明等十一支来解说,而老死因为处在末端,便不依它来解说。然而,由于老死便是愁、叹、苦、忧、恼的。显示巴利原文
46. Idāni navākāravārānantaraṃ te navākāre vihāya hetupaṭiccapaccayapadeheva yojetvā avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannātiādayo tayo vārā niddiṭṭhā. Navākāravāre janakaupatthambhakavasena paccayo vutto. Idha pana hetuvārassa paccayavārassa ca visuṃ āgatattā hetūti janakapaccayattaṃ, paccayoti upatthambhakapaccayattaṃ veditabbaṃ ekekassāpi avijjādikassa paccayassa ubhayathā sambhavato. Paṭiccavāre avijjā paṭiccāti attano uppāde saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāpekkhattā saṅkhārehi avijjā paṭimukhaṃ etabbā gantabbāti paṭiccā. Etena avijjāya saṅkhāruppādanasamatthatā vuttā hoti. Saṅkhārā paṭiccasamuppannāti saṅkhārā avijjaṃ paṭicca tadabhimukhaṃ pavattanato paṭimukhaṃ katvā na vihāya samaṃ uppannā. Evaṃ sesesupi liṅgānurūpena yojetabbaṃ. Avijjā paṭiccāti ussukkavasena vā pāṭho, attho panettha avijjā attano paccaye paṭicca pavattāti pāṭhasesavasena yojetabbo. Evaṃ sesesupi. Catūsupi ca etesu vāresu dvādasannaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṅgānaṃ paccayasseva vasena dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇassa niddisitabbattā avijjādīnaṃ ekādasannaṃyeva aṅgānaṃ vasena dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ, jarāmaraṇassa pana ante ṭhitattā tassa vasena na niddiṭṭhaṃ. Jarāmaraṇassāpi sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsānaṃ paccayattā jarāmaraṇaṃ tesaṃ paccayaṃ katvā upaparikkhamānassa tassāpi jarāmaraṇassa vasena dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ yujjateva.
47 47. 现在,为了以二十种行相分别这十二缘起支,并显示四个概要、三时连结,以解说法住智,于是说“于过去的业有中”等。其中,“于过去的业有中”:指于过去的业有,即于过去生中,正在被造作的业有中。“痴即无明”:那时,对苦等圣谛的痴,即以此痴蒙蔽而造业,此痴即是无明。“造作即行”:对正在造作该业者,生起“我将布施”的心之后,用一个月或一整年准备布施资具时,心中生起的那些前思,便称为造作即行;然而,把施物放入受者手中时的那个思,则称为“有”。或者,在一个转向心和六个速行心中的思,名为“造作即行”;第七个速行心中的思,是“有”。或者,任何一种思是“有”,与之相应的思,即名为“造作即行”。显示巴利原文
47. Idāni tāneva dvādasa paṭiccasamuppādaṅgāni vīsatiākāravasena vibhajitvā catusaṅkhepatiyaddhatisandhiyo dassetvā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ niddisitukāmo purimakammabhavasmintiādimāha. Tattha purimakammabhavasminti purime kammabhave, atītajātiyaṃ kammabhave kariyamāneti attho. Moho avijjāti yo tadā dukkhādīsu moho, yena mūḷho kammaṃ karoti, sā avijjā. Āyūhanā saṅkhārāti taṃ kammaṃ karontassa purimacetanāyo, yathā ‘‘dānaṃ dassāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā māsampi saṃvaccharampi dānūpakaraṇāni sajjentassa uppannā purimacetanāyo. Paṭiggāhakānaṃ pana hatthe dakkhiṇaṃ patiṭṭhāpayato cetanā bhavoti vuccati. Ekāvajjanesu vā chasu javanesu cetanā āyūhanā saṅkhārā nāma, sattamajavane cetanā bhavo. Yā kāci vā pana cetanā bhavo, taṃsampayuttā āyūhanā saṅkhārā nāma.
“喜求即渴爱”:对造业者而言,对其业果的再生有生起喜好与希求,这就名为渴爱。“趋近而紧执即取”:作为业有的缘而生起的,例如:“做了此业,便会成就诸欲乐”,或“我做了这件事之后,将在某处享受欲乐”,或“自我已断灭,已彻底断灭”,或“成为快乐者,脱离了热恼”,或“戒禁得以安乐地圆满”等,像这样趋近并紧紧执取,这就名为取。“思即有”:在造作之终所说的那个思,名为“有”。“于过去的业有中”:在过去生中,正在造作业有时所生起的这些,即成为此处的结生之缘:也就是今世结生的缘。显示巴利原文
Nikanti taṇhāti yā kammaṃ karontassa tassa phale upapattibhave nikāmanā patthanā, sā taṇhā nāma. Upagamanaṃ upādānanti yaṃ kammabhavassa paccayabhūtaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ nāma kamme kate kāmā sampajjantī’’ti vā ‘‘idaṃ katvā asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne kāme sevissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘attā ucchinno suucchinno hotī’’ti vā ‘‘sukhī hotiṃ vigatapariḷāho’’ti vā ‘‘sīlabbataṃ sukhena paripūratī’’ti vā pavattaṃ upagamanaṃ daḷhagahaṇaṃ, idaṃ upādānaṃ nāma. Cetanā bhavoti āyūhanāvasāne vuttā cetanā bhavo nāma. Purimakammabhavasminti atītajātiyā kammabhave kariyamāne pavattā. Idha paṭisandhiyā paccayāti paccuppannapaṭisandhiyā paccayabhūtā.
在此,“结生识”:由于是为了现世之有,而在结生于诸有间时生起的,故称为结生,那即是识。“入胎的名色”:如同前来进入母胎中的色法和非色法一样,这入胎即是名色。“明净的处”:那种明净的状态,即是处。此处以“生”之单数词来表示眼等五处。而在“比丘们,此心极光净,然被客来之染污所染污”(A. I. 49)中,所说的是有分心,故应知此处,意处是异熟性质,并无烦恼暗昧而明净,因此“明净”一词也表达了意处。“已触到的触”:凡已触到、正在触着所缘而生起的,即是触。“已感受的受”:与结生识俱生,或以六处为缘而生起的触俱生,所生起的异熟受,即是受。此处的再生有中,即“先前所作之业的缘”之意:于现在的异熟有,由过去生中所造之业作为缘而转起,即是此意。显示巴利原文
Idha paṭisandhi viññāṇanti yaṃ paccuppannabhavassa bhavantarapaṭisandhānavasena uppannattā paṭisandhīti vuccati, taṃ viññāṇaṃ. Okkanti nāmarūpanti yā gabbhe rūpārūpadhammānaṃ okkanti āgantvā pavisanaṃ viya, idaṃ nāmarūpaṃ. Pasādo āyatananti yo pasannabhāvo, idaṃ āyatanaṃ. Jātiggahaṇena ekavacanaṃ kataṃ. Etena cakkhādīni pañcāyatanāni vuttāni. ‘‘Pabhassaramidaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, tañca kho āgantukehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭha’’nti (a. ni. 1.49) ettha bhavaṅgacittaṃ adhippetanti vacanato idhāpi manāyatanassa vipākabhūtattā, tassa ca kilesakālussiyābhāvena pasannattā pasādavacanena manāyatanampi vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Phuṭṭho phassoti yo ārammaṇaṃ phuṭṭho phusanto uppanno, ayaṃ phasso. Vedayitaṃ vedanāti yaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇena vā saḷāyatanapaccayena vā phassena saha uppannaṃ vipākavedayitaṃ, ayaṃ vedanā. Idhupapattibhavasmiṃ purekatassa kammassa paccayāti paccuppanne vipākabhave atītajātiyaṃ katassa kammassa paccayena pavattantīti attho.
这里“因诸处成熟”,是指对于诸处成熟者,在造业之时,无明等便显示出来。“对未来的结生而言”,即对于未来的结生。“未来的结生识”等语,其义前文已释。显示巴利原文
Idha paripakkattā āyatanānanti paripakkāyatanassa kammakaraṇakāle mohādayo dassitā. Āyatiṃ paṭisandhiyāti anāgate paṭisandhiyā. Āyatiṃ paṭisandhi viññāṇantiādīni vuttatthāni.
那么,如何以十二缘起支摄此二十种行相呢?“无明”与“行”:这两支依其自性,被说为过去之因。然而,因为无明者会恐惧战栗,恐惧战栗者则生执取,而以其执取为缘便有“有”,所以当这两支被摄时,“渴爱”、“取”和“有”也就一并被摄了。“现在的识、名色、六处、触、受”:这些是依自性而说的现在果。“渴爱、取、有”:是依自性而说的现在因。然而,当“有”被摄时,其前分即与它相应的那些“行”也就被摄;并且,由摄“渴爱”与“取”,与之相应的行亦一同被摄。又或者,凡是在愚痴中造业者,其“无明”亦被含摄其中。“未来的生、老死”:这两支是依自性而说的,然而仅仅由摄“生”与“老死”,“识”等五种未来果即全部被摄,因为它们的体现就是生与老死。如是,以十二支摄二十种行相。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ pana dvādasahi paṭiccasamuppādaṅgehi ime vīsati ākārā gahitā hontīti? Avijjā saṅkhārāti ime dve atītahetuyo sarūpato vuttā. Yasmā pana avidvā paritassati, paritassito upādiyati, tassupādānapaccayā bhavo, tasmā tehi dvīhi gahitehi taṇhupādānabhavāpi gahitāva honti. Paccuppanne viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanā sarūpato vuttāyeva. Taṇhupādānabhavā paccuppannahetuyo sarūpato vuttā . Bhave pana gahite tassa pubbabhāgā taṃsampayuttā vā saṅkhārā gahitāva honti, taṇhupādānaggahaṇena ca taṃsampayuttā. Yāya vā mūḷho kammaṃ karoti, sā avijjā gahitāva hoti. Anāgate jāti jarāmaraṇanti dve sarūpena vuttāni, jātijarāmaraṇaggahaṇeneva pana viññāṇādīni pañca anāgataphalāni gahitāneva honti. Tesaṃyeva hi jātijarāmaraṇānīti evaṃ dvādasahi aṅgehi vīsati ākārā gahitā honti.
过去因有五支,现在果有五支;
现在因有五支,未来果有五支。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Atīte hetavo pañca, idāni phalapañcakaṃ; Idāni hetavo pañca, āyatiṃ phalapañcaka’’nti. –
这首偈颂所说的正是此义。“Itimeti”即“iti ime”(如此这些),或也可读作“iti ime”。显示巴利原文
Gāthāya ayamevattho vutto. Itimeti iti ime. Iti imeti vā pāṭho.
“四摄”:即四个组别。过去的五种因法,为第一因摄;现在的五种果法,为第一果摄;现在的五种因法,为第二因摄;未来的五种果法,为第二果摄。显示巴利原文
Catusaṅkhepeti caturo rāsī. Atīte pañca hetudhammā eko hetusaṅkhepo, paccuppanne pañca phaladhammā eko phalasaṅkhepo, paccuppanne pañca hetudhammā eko hetusaṅkhepo, anāgate pañca phaladhammā eko phalasaṅkhepo.
「三时」:即三个时间段。应知:第一组五支为过去时,第二与第三组五支为现在时,第四组五支为未来时。显示巴利原文
Tayo addheti tayo kāle. Paṭhamapañcakavasena atītakālo, dutiyatatiyapañcakavasena paccuppannakālo, catutthapañcakavasena anāgatakālo veditabbo.
「三连结」:意为具有三个连结,故称三连结,即那三连结。过去因与现在果之间为一因果连结;现在果与未来因之间为一果因连结;现在因与未来果之间为一因果连结。显示巴利原文
Tisandhinti tayo sandhayo assāti tisandhi, taṃ tisandhiṃ. Atītahetupaccuppannaphalānamantarā eko hetuphalasandhi, paccuppannaphalaanāgatahetūnamantarā eko phalahetusandhi, paccuppannahetuanāgataphalānamantarā eko hetuphalasandhi.
然而,若依《缘起》经文中诸支以自性呈现的方式,无明与行为第一摄,识、名色、六处、触、受为第二摄,渴爱、取、有为第三摄,生、老死为第四摄。其中,无明与行二支为过去时;识等至有为止的八支为现在时;生与老二支为未来时。行与识之间为一因果连结,受与渴爱之间为一果因连结,有与生之间为一因果连结。显示巴利原文
Paṭiccasamuppādapāḷiyaṃ sarūpato āgatavasena pana avijjāsaṅkhārā eko saṅkhepo, viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanā dutiyo, taṇhupādānabhavā tatiyo, jātijarāmaraṇaṃ catuttho. Avijjāsaṅkhārāti dve aṅgāni atītakālāni, viññāṇādīni bhavāvasānāni aṭṭha paccuppannakālāni , jātijarāmaraṇanti dve anāgatakālāni. Saṅkhāraviññāṇānaṃ antarā eko hetuphalasandhi, vedanātaṇhānamantarā eko phalahetusandhi, bhavajātīnamantarā eko hetuphalasandhi.
“以二十种行相”意为以二十个方面。关联句义为:他以二十种行相了知四摄、三时、三连结以及缘起。显示巴利原文
Vīsatiyāākārehīti vīsatiyā koṭṭhāsehi. Catusaṅkhepe ca tayo addhe ca tisandhiṃ paṭiccasamuppādañca vīsatiyā ākārehi jānātīti sambandho.
“了知”:依随所听闻的教法,以修习的起始智而了知。“观见”:将已了知的对象,以智清晰观见,犹如以眼明见、以手触摸掌中的庵摩罗果一般。“遍知”:在观见的范围界限内反复修习,唯以智了知。此处“行相”即范围之义。“通达”:由修习圆满而达究竟,唯以智通达。或者,以自相而“了知”,以味而“观见”,以现起而“遍知”,以足处而“通达”。显示巴利原文
Jānātīti sutānusārena bhāvanārambhañāṇena jānāti. Passatīti ñātameva cakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ viya hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya ca phuṭaṃ katvā ñāṇeneva passati. Aññātīti diṭṭhamariyādeneva āsevanaṃ karonto ñāṇeneva jānāti. Mariyādattho hi ettha ākāro. Paṭivijjhatīti bhāvanāpāripūriyā niṭṭhaṃ pāpento ñāṇeneva paṭivedhaṃ karoti. Salakkhaṇavasena vā jānāti, sarasavasena passati, paccupaṭṭhānavasena aññāti, padaṭṭhānavasena paṭivijjhati.
于此,“缘起”应理解为缘法。“缘生法”则指由各各因缘所生之法。如何得知此义?依于世尊的开示。世尊在《缘起与缘生法开示经》中如是说:显示巴利原文
Tattha paṭiccasamuppādoti paccayadhammā veditabbā. Paṭiccasamuppannā dhammāti tehi tehi paccayehi nibbattadhammā. Kathamidaṃ jānitabbanti ce? Bhagavato vacanena. Bhagavatā hi paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannadhammadesanāsutte –
诸比丘,什么是缘起?‘以生为缘,有老死’——无论诸如来出现或不出现,那界、那法住性、法决定性、此缘性都常恒安住。如来觉悟此、通达此,觉悟通达之后,便宣说、开示、令知、安立、开显、分别、阐明,并说:‘你们且看。’诸比丘,以生为缘而有老死;以有为缘而有生……乃至……以无明为缘而有行。无论诸如来出现或不出现……阐明,并说:‘你们且看。’诸比丘,以无明为缘而有行。如是,诸比丘,那其中的如性、不虚妄性、不异如性、此缘性,诸比丘,这便称为缘起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamo ca, bhikkhave, paṭiccasamuppādo, jātipaccayā, bhikkhave, jarāmaraṇaṃ, uppādā vā tathāgatānaṃ anuppādā vā tathāgatānaṃ ṭhitāva sā dhātu dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatā idappaccayatā, taṃ tathāgato abhisambujjhati abhisameti, abhisambujjhitvā abhisametvā ācikkhati deseti paññāpeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati vibhajati uttānīkaroti ‘passathā’ti cāha. Jātipaccayā, bhikkhave, jarāmaraṇaṃ, bhavapaccayā, bhikkhave, jāti…pe… avijjāpaccayā, bhikkhave, saṅkhārā. Uppādā vā tathāgatānaṃ…pe… uttānīkaroti ‘passathā’ti cāha. Avijjāpaccayā, bhikkhave, saṅkhārā. Iti kho, bhikkhave, yā tatrata thatā avitathatā anaññathatā idappaccayatā. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.20) –
如此宣说缘起时,是以如性等不同名称,指出缘法本身即是缘起。因此,缘起的特相是以老死等的缘为其相;作用是相续结缚于苦;现起是邪道;而因为它自身亦有所依,故以它自己独特的缘为足处。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ desentena tathatādīhi vevacanehi paccayadhammāva paṭiccasamuppādoti vuttā. Tasmā jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayalakkhaṇo paṭiccasamuppādo, dukkhānubandhanaraso kummaggapaccupaṭṭhāno, ayampi sapaccayattā attano visesapaccayapadaṭṭhāno.
‘无论出现或不出现’:意思是无论如来出现于世间或不出现于世间。‘那界恒住’:意思是那作为缘的自性恒常安住,从未有一时不是生与老死的缘。‘法住性、法决定性、此缘性’:所指的正是‘以生为缘’本身。因为由生之缘而生起、被称为老死的缘生法,其安住是依存于生的;‘以生为缘’本身决定了老死法,所以‘生’才被称为‘法住性、法决定性’。又因为生正是此老死的缘,故生是‘此缘’,而此缘本身的存在状态即是‘此缘性’。所谓‘彼’:就是指那个缘。‘觉悟’:是以智慧彻底觉悟。‘通达’:是以智慧完全通达。‘宣说’:是讲述出来。‘开示’:是指明出来。‘令知’:是让人知晓。‘安立’:是置于智慧之前。‘开显’:是揭开后显示出来。‘分别’:是以分别的方式显示。‘阐明’:是使其变得清楚明白。‘如是’:就是‘这样’的意思。‘那些’:指出现在‘以生为缘,有老死’等教法中的种种法。而这‘缘起’,由于各个法都是依于那些不多不少、恰如其分的缘而生起的,故称为‘如性’;当诸缘和合时,由它们所生的法显示巴利原文
Uppādāvā anuppādā vāti uppāde vā anuppāde vā, tathāgatesu uppannesupi anuppannesupīti attho. Ṭhitāva sā dhātūti ṭhitova so paccayasabhāvo, na kadāci jātijarāmaraṇassa paccayo na hotīti attho. Dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatā idappaccayatāti jātipaccayoyeva. Jātipaccayena hi jarāmaraṇasaṅkhāto paccayasamuppannadhammo tadāyattatāya tiṭṭhati, jātipaccayova jarāmaraṇadhammaṃ niyameti, tasmā jāti ‘‘dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatā’’ti vuccati. Jātiyeva imassa jarāmaraṇassa paccayoti idappaccayo, idappaccayova idappaccayatā. Tanti taṃ paccayaṃ. Abhisambujjhatīti ñāṇena abhisambujjhati. Abhisametīti ñāṇena abhisamāgacchati. Ācikkhatīti katheti. Desetīti dasseti. Paññāpetīti jānāpeti. Paṭṭhapetīti ñāṇamukhe ṭhapeti. Vivaratīti vivaritvā dasseti. Vibhajatīti vibhāgato dasseti. Uttānīkarotīti pākaṭaṃ karoti. Iti khoti evaṃ kho. Yā tatrāti yā tesu ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’ntiādīsu . So panāyaṃ paṭiccasamuppādo tehi tehi paccayehi anūnādhikeheva tassa tassa dhammassa sambhavato tathatāti, sāmaggiṃ upagatesu paccayesu muhuttampi tato nibbattanadhammānaṃ asambhavābhāvato avitathatāti, aññadhammapaccayehi aññadhammānuppattito anaññathatāti, yathāvuttānaṃ etesaṃ jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayato vā paccayasamūhato vā idappaccayatāti vutto. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – imesaṃ paccayā idappaccayā, idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā, idappaccayānaṃ vā samūho idappaccayatā. Lakkhaṇaṃ panettha saddasatthato veditabbanti.
第五 思择智的解释显示巴利原文
5. Sammasanañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
48 在思择智的解释中,「任何」一词表示毫无遗漏的遍取。「色」一词则是避免过度引申的限定。由这二词,便已对色完成了无余的把握。接着,便开始从过去等方面对色加以区分,因为‘任何’色有过去、未来等种种分类。这一理趣同样适用于受等其余诸蕴。在此,先说色。色依‘世’、‘相续’、‘时’、‘刹那’这四种方式而有过去、未来、现在之分。首先,依‘世’而言:一位有情在某一生中,结生以前为过去,死亡以后为未来,此两者之间为现在。依‘相续’而言:属于同一种类、由同一时节或同一食素所生的色,虽前后相续流转,但正在发生的部分是现在;在此之前,由不同种类的时节、食素所生的色是过去;在此之后的是未来。由心所生的色:在同一心路、同一速行心或同一等至中所生的色是现在,在此之前的是过去,在此之后的是未来。至于由业所生的色,依各别相续而言,并无过去、未来等区分;但可借助那些时节、食素、心所生色对它的支持作用,来了解其过去、未来的状态。依‘时’而言:在一须臾、上午、中午、下午、显示巴利原文
48. Sammasanañāṇaniddese yaṃ kiñcīti anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Rūpanti atippasaṅganiyamanaṃ. Evaṃ padadvayenāpi rūpassa asesapariggaho kato hoti. Athassa atītādinā vibhāgaṃ ārabhati. Tañhi kiñci atītaṃ kiñci anāgatādibhedanti. Esa nayo vedanādīsupi. Tattha rūpaṃ tāva addhāsantatisamayakhaṇavasena catudhā atītaṃ nāma hoti, tathā anāgatapaccuppannaṃ. Tattha addhāvasena tāva ekassa ekasmiṃ bhave paṭisandhito pubbe atītaṃ, cutito uddhaṃ anāgataṃ, ubhinnamantare paccuppannaṃ. Santativasena sabhāgaekautusamuṭṭhānaṃ ekāhārasamuṭṭhānañca pubbāpariyabhāvena vattamānampi paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe visabhāgautuāhārasamuṭṭhānaṃ atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ. Cittajaṃ ekavīthiekajavanaekasamāpattisamuṭṭhānaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ, kammasamuṭṭhānassa pāṭiyekkaṃ santativasena atītādibhedo natthi, tesaññeva pana utuāhāracittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ upatthambhanavasena tassa atītādibhāvo veditabbo. Samayavasena ekamuhuttapubbaṇhasāyanharattindivādīsu samayesu santānavasena pavattamānaṃ taṃ taṃ samayaṃ paccuppannaṃ nāma, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ. Khaṇavasena uppādādikhaṇattayapariyāpannaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe anāgataṃ, pacchā atītaṃ. Apica atikkantahetupaccayakiccaṃ atītaṃ, niṭṭhitahetukiccamaniṭṭhitapaccayakiccaṃ paccuppannaṃ, ubhayakiccamasampattaṃ anāgataṃ. Sakiccakkhaṇe vā paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe anāgataṃ, pacchā atītaṃ. Ettha ca khaṇādikathāva nippariyāyā sesā sapariyāyā.
「内」:在此,对于五蕴,特指‘自身内在’。因此应知,在自己相续中现起的、属于个人自身的色,名为「内」。而在此之外的色,无论与根结合与否,都叫作「外」。「粗」:指眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、色、声、香、味、触,以及地、火、风,这十二种色。由于它们能通过触对而被觉知,故是粗的。其余十六种色——水界、女根、男根、命根、心所依处、食素、空界、身表、语表,以及色的轻快性、柔软性、适业性、积集、相续、老性、无常性,因不能被触对觉知,故是细的。「或劣或胜」:这里所说的劣与胜,可从方便说与胜义说两方面来理解。方便说:例如,相对于色究竟天的色,善见天的色是劣的;而此善见天的色,相对于其下的天界之色,又是胜的。应当如此,沿此顺序直至地狱有情的色,来了解方便说中的劣与胜。胜义说:凡是在生起不善异熟之处所生的色是劣的,凡是在生起善异熟之处所生的色是胜的。「或远或近」:在此,所有细的色,因其难可通达的特性,称为远;所有粗的色,因其易可了知的特性,称为近。显示巴利原文
Ajjhattanti pañcasupi khandhesu idha niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, tasmā attano santāne pavattaṃ pāṭipuggalikaṃ rūpaṃ ajjhattanti veditabbaṃ. Tato bahibhūtaṃ pana indriyabaddhaṃ vā anindriyabaddhaṃ vā rūpaṃ bahiddhā nāma. Oḷārikanti cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyarūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbasaṅkhātā pathavītejovāyo cāti dvādasavidhaṃ rūpaṃ ghaṭṭanavasena gahetabbato oḷārikaṃ. Sesaṃ pana āpodhātu itthindriyaṃ purisindriyaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ hadayavatthu ojā ākāsadhātu kāyaviññatti vacīviññatti rūpassa lahutā mudutā kammaññatā upacayo santati jaratā aniccatāti soḷasavidhaṃ rūpaṃ ghaṭṭanavasena agahetabbato sukhumaṃ. Hīnaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vāti ettha hīnapaṇītabhāvo pariyāyato nippariyāyato ca. Tattha akaniṭṭhānaṃ rūpato sudassīnaṃ rūpaṃ hīnaṃ, tadeva sudassānaṃ rūpato paṇītaṃ. Evaṃ yāva narakasattānaṃ rūpaṃ, tāva pariyāyato hīnapaṇītatā veditabbā. Nippariyāyato pana yattha akusalavipākaṃ uppajjati, taṃ hīnaṃ. Yattha kusalavipākaṃ, taṃ paṇītaṃ. Yaṃ dūre santike vāti ettha yaṃ sukhumaṃ, tadeva duppaṭivijjhasabhāvattā dūre. Yaṃ oḷārikaṃ, tadeva suppaṭivijjhasabhāvattā santike.
将一切色确定为无常,是一种思择;将一切色确定为苦,是一种思择;将一切色确定为无我,是一种思择。在此,这位比丘将并非特指而说的“凡任何色”这一切色,以过去等三时,及内与外、粗与细、劣与胜、远与近这四种二法,共计十一种角度加以区划。之后,他将一切色确定为无常,即作为无常来思择。如何思择?依后文所说的方法。即《无碍解道》所说:“过去、未来、现在的色是无常的,以灭尽义。”因此,他这样思择:“过去”的色,于过去就已灭尽,未到达此有,故为无常,以灭尽义;“未来”的色,将在随后的有中生起,但也将在那里灭尽,不会从此往更后的有,故为无常,以灭尽义;“现在”的色,于此处灭尽,并非离去,故为无常,以灭尽义。“内”的色,也在内灭尽,不会成为外的状态,故为无常,以灭尽义;外、粗、细、劣、胜、远、近的色,也都各于其处灭尽,不会转变成远的状态,故为无常,以灭尽义。所有这一切,依“无常以灭尽义”而言是一种思择,若依分别而观,则有十一种。显示巴利原文
Sabbaṃrūpaṃ aniccato vavattheti ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, dukkhato vavattheti ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, anattato vavattheti ekaṃ sammasananti ettha ayaṃ bhikkhu ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpa’’nti evaṃ aniyamaniddiṭṭhaṃ sabbampi rūpaṃ atītattikena ceva catūhi ajjhattādidukehi cāti ekādasahi okāsehi paricchinditvā sabbaṃ rūpaṃ aniccato vavattheti aniccanti sammasati. Kathaṃ? Parato vuttanayena. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.48). Tasmā esa yaṃ atītaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ yasmā atīteyeva khīṇaṃ, nayimaṃ bhavaṃ sampattanti aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena, yaṃ anāgataṃ rūpaṃ anantarabhave nibbattissati, tampi tattheva khīyissati, na tato paraṃ bhavaṃ gamissatīti aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena, yaṃ paccuppannaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ idheva khīyati, na ito gacchatīti aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena, yaṃ ajjhattaṃ rūpaṃ, tampi ajjhattameva khīyati, na bahiddhābhāvaṃ gacchatīti aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena, yaṃ bahiddhā oḷārikaṃ sukhumaṃ hīnaṃ paṇītaṃ dūre santike, tampi ettheva khīyati, na dūrabhāvaṃ gacchatīti aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenāti sammasati. Idaṃ sabbampi ‘‘aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenā’’ti etassa vasena ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, pabhedato pana ekādasavidhaṃ hoti.
他将这一切都思择为“苦,以恐怖义”。以恐怖义,即因其可怖畏的缘故。凡是无常的,就是引生恐怖的,正如《狮子譬喻经》中所说的诸天那样。因此,这也依“苦以恐怖义”而言是一种思择,若从分别来看,则有十一种。显示巴利原文
Sabbameva cetaṃ dukkhaṃ bhayaṭṭhenāti sammasati. Bhayaṭṭhenāti sappaṭibhayatāya. Yañhi aniccaṃ, taṃ bhayāvahaṃ hoti sīhopamasutte (a. ni. 4.33; saṃ. ni. 3.78) devānaṃ viya. Iti idampi ‘‘dukkhaṃ bhayaṭṭhenā’’ti etassa vasena ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, pabhedato pana ekādasavidhaṃ hoti.
如同是苦,他也将这一切思择为“无我,以无坚实义”。以无坚实义,即没有所谓“我是常住者、作者、受者、自主者”这样假设的自我坚实性。因为凡是无常、苦的法,连自身的无常性,或生灭的逼迫,都无法阻止,又哪里还会有作者等状态呢?因此佛陀说:“比丘们,如果此色是我,那么此色不应导致疾病……”等等。如此,这也依“无我以无坚实义”而言是一种思择,若从分别来看,则有十一种。对于受等诸蕴,也以此方法类推。如此,于每一蕴中各作十一种思择,在五蕴中便有五十五种思择;无常的有五十五种,苦的有五十五种,无我的也有五十五种。依这三种随观,总共有六五零种思择。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca dukkhaṃ, evaṃ sabbampi taṃ anattā asārakaṭṭhenāti sammasati. Asārakaṭṭhenāti ‘‘attā nivāsī kārako vedako sayaṃvasī’’ti evaṃ parikappitassa attasārassa abhāvena. Yañhi aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ, attanopi aniccataṃ vā udayabbayapīḷanaṃ vā vāretuṃ na sakkoti, kuto tassa kārakādibhāvo. Tenāha – ‘‘rūpañca hidaṃ, bhikkhave, attā abhavissa, nayidaṃ rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvatteyyā’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.59). Iti idaṃ ‘‘anattā asārakaṭṭhenā’’ti etassa vasena ekaṃ sammasanaṃ, pabhedato pana ekādasavidhaṃ hoti. Eseva nayo vedanādīsu. Iti ekekasmiṃ khandhe ekādasa ekādasa katvā pañcasu khandhesu pañcapaññāsa sammasanāni honti, aniccato pañcapaññāsa , dukkhato pañcapaññāsa, anattato pañcapaññāsāti tividhānupassanāvasena sabbāni pañcasaṭṭhisatasammasanāni honti.
然而有人主张:“加上‘一切色、一切受、一切想、一切行、一切识’之文,于每一蕴各作十二种,则五蕴便有六十种;随观方面,则有一百八十种思择。”显示巴利原文
Keci pana ‘‘sabbaṃ rūpaṃ, sabbaṃ vedanaṃ, sabbaṃ saññaṃ, sabbe saṅkhāre, sabbaṃ viññāṇanti padampi pakkhipitvā ekekasmiṃ khandhe dvādasa dvādasa katvā pañcasu saṭṭhi, anupassanāto asītisatasammasanānī’’ti vadanti.
于此,对于过去等的分类,应依相续与刹那等方式,了知受的过去、未来、现在性。其中,依相续:凡属于同一心路、同一速行、同一等至,且在与同一种所缘相应中生起的受,为现在;此前为过去,此后为未来。依刹那等:含于三刹那中,住于前际后际中间且正在执行自作用的受,为现在;此前为过去,此后为未来。内与外的区分,应依自身内而了知。显示巴利原文
Atītādivibhāge panettha santativasena khaṇādivasena ca vedanāya atītānāgatapaccuppannabhāvo veditabbo. Tattha santativasena ekavīthiekajavanaekasamāpattipariyāpannā ekavidhavisayasamāyogappavattā ca paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Khaṇādivasena khaṇattayapariyāpannā pubbantāparantamajjhagatā sakiccañca kurumānā vedanā paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Ajjhattabahiddhābhedo niyakajjhattavaseneva veditabbo.
粗与细的状态,应依种类、自性、补特伽罗、世间与出世间等方式了知,如《分别论》所说:“不善受为粗,善及无记受为细”等。首先,依种类:不善受因是有罪业之原因、有烦恼热恼性,且不寂静而存,故较善受为粗;因有恚、有勤、有异熟、有烦恼热恼性及有罪过,故较异熟无记为粗;又因有异熟、有烦恼热恼性、有苦及有罪过,故较唯作无记为粗。反之,善与无记受则与所说相反,较不善受为细。善与不善两种受,因有恚、有勤、有异熟等,依相应的方式,亦较两种无记为粗;反之,两种无记则较他们为细。如是以种类方式应知粗细。显示巴利原文
Oḷārikasukhumabhāvo ‘‘akusalā vedanā oḷārikā, kusalābyākatā vedanā sukhumā’’tiādinā (vibha. 4) nayena vibhaṅge vuttena jātisabhāvapuggalalokiyalokuttaravasena veditabbo. Jātivasena tāva akusalā vedanā sāvajjakiriyahetuto, kilesasantāpabhāvato ca avūpasantavuttīti kusalavedanāya oḷārikā, sabyāpārato saussāhato savipākato kilesasantāpabhāvato sāvajjato ca vipākābyākatāya oḷārikā, savipākato kilesasantāpabhāvato sabyābajjhato sāvajjato ca kiriyābyākatāya oḷārikā. Kusalābyākatā pana vuttavipariyāyato akusalāya vedanāya sukhumā. Dvepi kusalākusalā vedanā sabyāpārato saussāhato savipākato ca yathāyogaṃ duvidhāyapi abyākatāya oḷārikā, vuttavipariyāyena duvidhāpi abyākatā tāhi sukhumā. Evaṃ tāva jātivasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.
依自性方式:苦受因无滋味、遍满、能扰动、令人厌逆、具征服性,故比其余两种受更粗;其余两种受则因其乐、寂静、殊胜、悦意、中舍,随其所应,比苦受微细。乐受与苦受二者,由于遍满、令人厌逆、能扰动、明显,故比不苦不乐受更粗;不苦不乐受则与之相反,比这两种受微细。这便是依自性了知粗细。显示巴利原文
Sabhāvavasena pana dukkhā vedanā nirassādato savipphārato khobhakaraṇato ubbejanīyato abhibhavanato ca itarāhi dvīhi oḷārikā, itarā pana dve sātato santato paṇītato manāpato majjhattato ca yathāyogaṃ dukkhāya sukhumā. Ubho pana sukhadukkhā savipphārato ubbejanīyato khobhakaraṇato pākaṭato ca adukkhamasukhāya oḷārikā, sā vuttavipariyāyena tadubhayato sukhumā. Evaṃ sabhāvavasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.
依补特伽罗方式:未得定者,其受因心散乱于种种所缘,故比得定者的受更粗;反之,得定者的受则微细。这便是依补特伽罗了知粗细。显示巴利原文
Puggalavasena pana asamāpannassa vedanā nānārammaṇe vikkhittabhāvato samāpannassa vedanāya oḷārikā, vipariyāyena itarā sukhumā. Evaṃ puggalavasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.
依世间与出世间方式:有漏受是世间法,因为是诸漏生起之因、是暴流所缘、是轭所缘、是结所缘、是盖所缘、是取所缘、是杂染法、与凡夫共通,故比无漏受更粗;无漏受则反之,比有漏受微细。这便是依世间与出世间了知粗细。显示巴利原文
Lokiyalokuttaravasena pana sāsavā vedanā lokiyā, sā āsavuppattihetuto oghaniyato yoganiyato ganthaniyato nīvaraṇiyato upādāniyato saṃkilesikato puthujjanasādhāraṇato ca anāsavāya oḷārikā, anāsavā ca vipariyāyena sāsavāya sukhumā. Evaṃ lokiyalokuttaravasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.
在此,应避免因种类等而产生的混淆。与不善异熟身识相应的受,依种类而言,由于是无记,虽属微细,但依自性等方式则成为粗重。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Tattha jātiādivasena sambhedo pariharitabbo. Akusalavipākakāyaviññāṇasampayuttā hi vedanā jātivasena abyākatattā sukhumāpi samānā sabhāvādivasena oḷārikā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“无记的受微细,苦受粗重;得定者的受微细,未得定者的受粗重;无漏的受微细,有漏的受粗重。”(《分别论》11)显示巴利原文
‘‘Abyākatā vedanā sukhumā, dukkhā vedanā oḷārikā. Samāpannassa vedanā sukhumā, asamāpannassa vedanā oḷārikā. Anāsavā vedanā sukhumā, sāsavā vedanā oḷārikā’’ti (vibha. 11).
正如苦受一样,乐受等也是如此。因为它们依种类方式是粗的,依自性等方式则是微细的。因此,应当不混淆种类等而了知受的粗细。这就是说:无记受在种类上比善与不善受更微细。于此,不应执取自性等的差别:什么是无记?什么是苦?什么是乐?什么是有得定者?什么是未得定者?什么是有漏?什么是无漏?此原则适用于一切处。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca dukkhā vedanā, evaṃ sukhādayopi. Tāpi hi jātivasena oḷārikā, sabhāvādivasena sukhumā honti. Tasmā yathā jātiādivasena sambhedo na hoti, tathā vedanānaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā. Seyyathidaṃ, abyākatā jātivasena kusalākusalāhi sukhumā. Tattha katamā abyākatā? Kiṃ dukkhā? Kiṃ sukhā? Kiṃ samāpannassa? Kiṃ asamāpannassa? Kiṃ sāsavā? Kiṃ anāsavāti? Evaṃ sabhāvādibhedo na parāmasitabbo. Esa nayo sabbattha.
再者,依据“依止彼彼受而受当视为粗、细”之说,于不善等中,与嗔俱行之受如火烧灼所依,故较与贪俱行之受为粗;与贪俱行之受则为细。与嗔俱行受中,决定者粗,不决定者细;决定者中,能持续一劫者粗,其余者为细;持续一劫者中,无行者粗,有行者细。与贪俱行受中,与见相应者粗,不与见相应者细;其中,若是决定、持续一劫、无行者则更粗,余者则细。总之,不善法中,感得多异熟者粗,感得少异熟者细;善法中,感得少异熟者粗,感得多异熟者细。显示巴利原文
Apica ‘‘taṃ taṃ vā pana vedanaṃ upādāyupādāya vedanā oḷārikā sukhumā daṭṭhabbā’’ti vacanato akusalādīsupi lobhasahagatāya dosasahagatā vedanā aggi viya nissayadahanato oḷārikā, lobhasahagatā sukhumā. Dosasahagatāpi niyatā oḷārikā, aniyatā sukhumā. Niyatāpi kappaṭṭhitikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Kappaṭṭhitikāsupi asaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Lobhasahagatā pana diṭṭhisampayuttā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Sāpi niyatā kappaṭṭhitikā asaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Avisesena ca akusalā bahuvipākā oḷārikā, appavipākā sukhumā. Kusalā pana appavipākā oḷārikā, bahuvipākā sukhumā.
再者,欲界善为粗,色界善为细,无色界善更细,出世间善最细。欲界善中,布施所成善为粗,持戒所成善为细;持戒所成善中,修习所成者更细。修所成善中,二因者粗,三因者细;三因中,有行者粗,无行者细。色界中,与初禅相应之受为粗……乃至与第五禅相应者为最细。无色界中,与空无边处相应之受为粗……乃至与非想非非想处相应者为最细。出世间中,与入流道相应之受为粗……乃至与阿拉汉道相应者为最细。此理亦适用于各地(界)之异熟受及唯作受,并可通于依苦等、未得定等、有漏等而说之受。又依生存处而言:地狱之苦受为粗,畜生道中微细……乃至他化自在天之苦受为最细。如于苦受,乐受亦应在一切处如是配比。又依事(所依)而言:凡依托低劣事物而生之受为粗,依托殊胜事物而生之受为细。当知,在此粗细差别中,凡粗者即低劣,凡细者即殊胜。显示巴利原文
Apica kāmāvacarakusalā oḷārikā, rūpāvacarā sukhumā, tato arūpāvacarā, tato lokuttarā. Kāmāvacarā ca dānamayā oḷārikā, sīlamayā sukhumā. Sīlamayāpi oḷārikā, tato bhāvanāmayā sukhumā. Bhāvanāmayāpi duhetukā oḷārikā, tihetukā sukhumā. Tihetukāpi sasaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, asaṅkhārikā sukhumā . Rūpāvacarā ca paṭhamajjhānikā oḷārikā…pe… pañcamajjhānikā sukhumāva. Arūpāvacarā ca ākāsānañcāyatanasampayuttā oḷārikā…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasampayuttā sukhumāva. Lokuttarā ca sotāpattimaggasampayuttā oḷārikā…pe… arahattamaggasampayuttā sukhumāva. Esa nayo taṃtaṃbhūmivipākakiriyāvedanāsu dukkhādiasamāpannādisāsavādivasena vuttavedanāsu ca. Okāsavasena vāpi niraye dukkhā oḷārikā, tiracchānayoniyaṃ sukhumā…pe… paranimmitavasavattīsu sukhumāva. Yathā ca dukkhā, evaṃ sukhāpi sabbattha yathānurūpaṃ yojetabbā. Vatthuvasena cāpi hīnavatthukā yā kāci vedanā oḷārikā, paṇītavatthukā sukhumā. Hīnapaṇītabhede yā oḷārikā, sā hīnā. Yā ca sukhumā, sā paṇītāti daṭṭhabbā.
于“远”与“近”之分,依《分别论》所说:“不善受与善、无记受为远;不善受与不善受为近”等。是故,不善受因体性相异、互不杂合、不相类似,而与善受及无记受为“远”;善受及无记受于不善受亦然。余一切处悉依此理。不善受因体性相同、相互杂合、相互类似,而与不善受为“近”——此为分别受之过去等时所宣说之总纲。至于与诸受相应之想等,亦应如是了知。显示巴利原文
Dūrasantikapade pana ‘‘akusalā vedanā kusalābyākatāhi vedanāhi dūre, akusalā vedanā akusalāya vedanāya santike’’tiādinā (vibha. 13) nayena vibhaṅge vibhattā. Tasmā akusalā vedanā visabhāgato asaṃsaṭṭhato asarikkhato ca kusalābyākatāhi dūre, tathā kusalābyākatā akusalāya. Esa nayo sabbavāresu. Akusalā pana vedanā sabhāgato saṃsaṭṭhato sarikkhato ca akusalāya santiketi idaṃ vedanāya atītādivibhāge vitthārakathāmukhaṃ. Taṃtaṃvedanāsampayuttānaṃ pana saññādīnampi etaṃ evameva veditabbaṃ.
然而,在依“眼……乃至老死”等省略方式略说的诸法当中,若出现了出世间法,由于它们并非可观察的对象,在此论题中便不予采纳。它们纯粹是为了显示被各个词语所涵盖的法,以及依照《应遍知解说》所述的方法而说。而对于那些可作为观察对象的法,其中哪些法于某人是明显的、容易把握的,便应从那些法开始观察。即使没有单独就“生”和“老死”进行观察,但在观察那些有生、有老死的诸法时,该生与老死也同样被观察到了,因此应知,这是以间接的方式说明了依生与老死的观察。由于依“将过去、未来、现在的色确定为无常”等方法,唯依过去等三时来说明观察,所以即使不涉及内等种种分类,也可唯以过去等三时来限定,而作无常等的观察。显示巴利原文
Ye panettha vedanādīsu cakkhu…pe… jarāmaraṇanti peyyālena saṃkhittesu ca dhammesu lokuttaradhammā āgatā, te asammasanūpagattā imasmiṃ adhikāre na gahetabbā. Te pana kevalaṃ tena tena padena saṅgahitadhammadassanavasena ca abhiññeyyaniddese āgatanayena ca vuttā. Yepi ca sammasanūpagā, tesu ye yassa pākaṭā honti, sukhena pariggahaṃ gacchanti, tesu tena sammasanaṃ ārabhitabbaṃ. Jātijarāmaraṇavasena visuṃ sammasanābhāvepi jātijarāmaraṇavantesuyeva pana sammasitesu tānipi sammasitāni hontīti pariyāyena tesampi vasena sammasanaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ aniccato vavatthetītiādinā nayena atītattikasseva ca vasena sammasanassa vuttattā ajjhattādibhedaṃ anāmasitvāpi atītattikasseva vasena paricchinditvāpi aniccādito sammasanaṃ kātabbameva.
凡是无常的,必定属于有为等,为了显示它的同义语,或为了显示作意以种种方式生起,便说:“色,过去、未来、现在的,是无常、有为……”。因为那色以“有已还无”之义而为无常,或因无常性、或因有边际故为无常。由诸缘聚合而造作故,为有为。依缘、靠缘而平等生起,或与缘一同生起故,为缘生。以此显示:虽由缘所造作,缘却无刻意的作为。“灭法”是具有灭尽性质的法,以灭尽为自性。“坏法”是具有坏灭性质的法。这里并非以变弱而灭称为灭法,纯粹是以消失为自性。因为在世间,大量之物变弱也被称为灭。“离染法”:这并非以去往某处为坏法,纯粹是以超越自性为自性。因为经中说:“离染,即名为厌离或超越。”“灭法”:这并非超越自性后又回转的法,纯粹是以不再回转的灭而止息为自性——应知后后句是为了解释前前句之义而说。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana aniccaṃ, taṃ yasmā niyamato saṅkhatādibhedaṃ hoti, tenassa pariyāyadassanatthaṃ, nānākārehi vā manasikārappavattidassanatthaṃ rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ aniccaṃ saṅkhatantiādimāha . Tañhi hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccaṃ, aniccantikatāya ādiantavantatāya vā aniccaṃ. Paccayehi samāgantvā katattā saṅkhataṃ. Paccaye paṭicca nissāya samaṃ, saha vā uppannattā paṭiccasamuppannaṃ. Etena paccayehi katepi paccayānaṃ abyāpārataṃ dasseti. Khayadhammanti khīyanadhammaṃ khīyanapakatikaṃ. Vayadhammanti nassanadhammaṃ. Nayidaṃ mandībhāvakkhayavasena khayadhammaṃ, kevalaṃ vigamanapakatikaṃ. Pahūtassa mandībhāvopi hi loke khayoti vuccati. Virāgadhammanti nayidaṃ kuhiñci gamanavasena vayadhammaṃ, kevalaṃ sabhāvātikkamanapakatikaṃ. ‘‘Virāgo nāma jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Nirodhadhammanti nayidaṃ sabhāvātikkamena punarāvattidhammaṃ, kevalaṃ apunarāvattinirodhena nirujjhanapakatikanti purimapurimapadassa atthavivaraṇavasena pacchimapacchimapadaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
或者,也可作如下配合:以属于一有的色之坏灭为坏法,以属于一相续的色之灭尽为灭法,以色的刹那坏灭为离染法,以三者皆不再生起为灭法。显示巴利原文
Atha vā ekabhavapariyāpannarūpabhaṅgavasena khayadhammaṃ, ekasantatipariyāpannarūpakkhayavasena vayadhammaṃ, rūpassa khaṇabhaṅgavasena virāgadhammaṃ, tiṇṇampi apunappavattivasena nirodhadhammantipi yojetabbaṃ.
于“老死是无常”等说法中,老死本身并非无常,但因具有无常自性的诸蕴被称为老死,故得“无常”之名。于“有为”等,其理亦同。在中间省略的部分,对于“生”,由于生也是无常等,其理亦同。显示巴利原文
Jarāmaraṇaṃ aniccantiādīsu jarāmaraṇaṃ na aniccaṃ, aniccasabhāvānaṃ pana khandhānaṃ jarāmaraṇattā aniccaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Saṅkhatādīsupi eseva nayo. Antarapeyyāle jātiyāpi aniccāditāya eseva nayo.
“缘生而有老死”等,并非依观智而说,纯粹是将缘起各支归纳而安立,由此而得“思择智”之名,这是以间接方式说的。然而,这并非“聚思择智”,那仅是“法住智”。“无生时”是词性的颠倒,实为说“因无生”;“无行时”是表达的颠倒,实为说“因无诸行”。应依“缘有而有生,无有时则无生”等方式配合,即:“缘有而有生,无有时则无生”等。显示巴利原文
Jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇantiādi na vipassanāvasena vuttaṃ, kevalaṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa ekekaaṅgavasena saṅkhipitvā vavatthānato sammasanañāṇaṃ nāma hotīti pariyāyena vuttaṃ. Na panetaṃ kalāpasammasanañāṇaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇameva taṃ hotīti. Asati jātiyāti liṅgavipallāso kato, asatiyā jātiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Asati saṅkhāresūti vacanavipallāso kato, asantesu saṅkhāresūti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhavapaccayā jāti, asatītiādi ‘‘bhavapaccayā jāti, asati bhave natthi jātī’’tiādinā nayena yojetabbaṃ.
第六 生灭智论释义显示巴利原文
6. Udayabbayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
49 现在,对紧接前文所说的“遍知智”——通过种种方法令其修习坚固、达到究竟而安住,从无常等角度观见诸行,再以生灭限定诸行,为从无常等角度进行观照而宣说的“生灭随观智”,在其论释中,从“已生的色”等开始:依相续之理,随各自因缘而生的色。此已生之色,其产生的相状——即生、生起、新生之相,称为“生”;其变易的相状——即尽灭、坏灭,称为“灭”;“随观”是反复审察,因此意为“生灭随观智”。对于受等也是如此。由于只有具足生、老、死的诸法,其生灭才能被遍摄,而生、老、死本身并无生灭,所以不提生、老、死,而用“已生的眼……乃至……已生的有”作为省略之文。当他这样观见五蕴的生灭时,便如此了知:“这些蕴在未生起之前,既无堆也无聚;在生起时,也非从堆或聚中来;在灭去时,也未去往此处或他处;在已灭之后,更不驻留于某处,而成堆、聚或贮藏。然而,就像弹奏琵琶所生起的音声,在未生起前并没有积聚,生起时也不是从积聚中而来,灭去时没有去往此处或他处,已灭后也不在任何地方积聚而停驻;只是缘于琵显示巴利原文
49. Idāni anantaraṃ vuttassa sammasanañāṇassa nānānayehi bhāvanāthirakaraṇena pāraṃ gantvā ṭhitena aniccādito diṭṭhe saṅkhāre udayabbayena paricchinditvā aniccādito vipassanatthaṃ vuttassa udayabbayānupassanāñāṇassa niddese jātaṃ rūpantiādīsu santativasena yathāsakaṃ paccayehi nibbattaṃ rūpaṃ. Tassa jātassa rūpassa nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ jātiṃ uppādaṃ abhinavākāraṃ udayoti, vipariṇāmalakkhaṇaṃ khayaṃ bhaṅgaṃ vayoti, anupassanā punappunaṃ nisāmanā, udayabbaya anupassanāñāṇanti attho. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Jātijarāmaraṇavantānaṃyeva udayabbayassa pariggahetabbattā jātijarāmaraṇānaṃ udayabbayābhāvato jātijarāmaraṇaṃ anāmasitvā jātaṃ cakkhu…pe… jāto bhavoti peyyālaṃ kataṃ. So evaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ passanto evaṃ jānāti ‘‘imesaṃ khandhānaṃ uppattito pubbe anuppannānaṃ rāsi vā nicayo vā natthi, uppajjamānānampi rāsito vā nicayato vā āgamanaṃ nāma natthi, nirujjhamānānampi disāvidisāgamanaṃ nāma natthi, niruddhānampi ekasmiṃ ṭhāne rāsito nicayato nidhānato avaṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi. Yathā pana vīṇāya vādiyamānāya uppannassa saddassa neva uppattito pubbe sannicayo atthi, na uppajjamāno sannicayato āgato, na nirujjhamānassa disāvidisāgamanaṃ atthi, na niruddho katthaci sannicito tiṭṭhati, atha kho vīṇañca upavīṇañca purisassa ca tajjaṃ vāyāmaṃ paṭicca ahutvā sambhoti, hutvā paṭiveti, evaṃ sabbepi rūpārūpino dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’’ti.
50 这样简略说明了生灭观之后,现在为详细解说,以“观五蕴之生者,观见多少相?”等语句,作总体提问;以“观五蕴之生者,观见二十五相”等语句,作总体回答;然后再以“观色蕴之生者,观见多少相?”等语句,作分别提问;以“观色蕴之生者,观见五相”等语句,作分别回答;再以“观色蕴之生者,观见哪五相?”等语句,询问相的差别,随后作出回答。显示巴利原文
50. Evaṃ saṅkhepato udayabbayadassanaṃ dassetvā idāni vitthārato dassetuṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayaṃ passanto kati lakkhaṇāni passatītiādīhi rāsito gaṇanaṃ pucchitvā, pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayaṃ passanto pañcavīsati lakkhaṇāni passatītiādīhi rāsitova gaṇanaṃ vissajjetvā, puna rūpakkhandhassa udayaṃ passanto kati lakkhaṇāni passatītiādīhi vibhāgato gaṇanaṃ pucchitvā rūpakkhandhassa udayaṃ passanto pañca lakkhaṇāni passatītiādīhi vibhāgato gaṇanaṃ vissajjetvā, puna rūpakkhandhassa udayaṃ passanto katamāni pañca lakkhaṇāni passatītiādīhi lakkhaṇavibhāgaṃ pucchitvā vissajjanaṃ kataṃ.
其中,“由无明集而有色集”,意思是:当存在“过去业有中的迷妄即是无明”所说的无明时,在现在有中,色便生起。“以缘集的意义”指缘已生起的状态。在此,无明、渴爱、业是作为结生之因的过去缘。当这三法被执取时,行与取也同时被执取。“由食集”,是因为在转起缘中,段食的力量最强,所以只取段食;而取段食时,作为转起之因的时节与心也同时被取。“产生之相”,指依分位、相续、刹那三种方式所说的色之生起;这个生起本身,作为有为的相状,也称为“相”。所谓“五相”,就是无明、渴爱、业、食、产生这五种相。无明等也是色生起的标志,由它们所标示,所以称为“相”;而“产生”纯粹是有为之相状,它也是将诸法标示为“有为”的那个标记,所以也叫做“相”。显示巴利原文
Tattha avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayoti ‘‘purimakammabhavasmiṃ moho avijjā’’ti vuttāya avijjāya sati imasmiṃ bhave rūpassa uppādo hotīti attho. Paccayasamudayaṭṭhenāti paccayassa uppannabhāvenāti attho. Avijjātaṇhākammāni cettha idha paṭisandhihetubhūtā atītapaccayā . Imesu ca tīsu gahitesu saṅkhārupādānāni gahitāneva honti. Āhārasamudayāti pavattipaccayesu kabaḷīkārāhārassa balavattā soyeva gahito. Tasmiṃ pana gahite pavattihetubhūtāni utucittānipi gahitāneva honti. Nibbattilakkhaṇanti addhāsantatikhaṇavasena rūpassa uppādaṃ, uppādoyeva saṅkhatalakkhaṇattā lakkhaṇanti ca vutto. Pañca lakkhaṇānīti avijjā taṇhā kammāhārā nibbatti cāti imāni pañca lakkhaṇāni. Avijjādayopi hi rūpassa udayo lakkhīyati etehīti lakkhaṇāni. Nibbatti pana saṅkhatalakkhaṇameva, tampi saṅkhatanti lakkhīyati etenāti lakkhaṇaṃ.
“由无明灭而有色灭”的意思是:当成为未来有之缘、属于现在有的无明,被阿拉汉道智灭除时,因缘不具足,未来的色便不再生起,此即称为灭。“以缘灭的意义”是指缘已灭尽的状态。这里所说的灭,即是作为未来结生缘、存在于现在有的无明、渴爱与业的灭。“由食之灭而有色灭”是指:当作为转起缘的段食不存在时,由那种食所生的色便即不再生起。“变易之相”是指依分位、相续、刹那而说的色的坏灭;此坏灭本身作为有为的相状,故也称为“相”。这里“五相”,即无明、渴爱、业、食四者的不存在与灭尽,再加上变易这一相,总共五相。这个道理同样适用于受蕴等。但有一点差别:对于非色蕴,其生灭观是依分位和相续说的,而不是依刹那。触是受、想、行蕴的转起缘,因此触灭,那些蕴便随之而灭。名色是识蕴的转起缘,因此名色灭,识蕴便随之而灭。显示巴利原文
Avijjānirodhā rūpanirodhoti anāgatabhavassa paccayabhūtāya imasmiṃ bhave avijjāya arahattamaggañāṇena nirodhe kate paccayābhāvā anāgatassa rūpassa anuppādo nirodho hotīti attho. Paccayanirodhaṭṭhenāti paccayassa niruddhabhāvenāti attho. Nirodho cettha anāgatapaṭisandhipaccayānaṃ idha avijjātaṇhākammānaṃyeva nirodho. Āhāranirodhā rūpanirodhoti pavattipaccayassa kabaḷīkārāhārassa abhāve taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpābhāvo hoti. Vipariṇāmalakkhaṇanti addhāsantatikhaṇavasena rūpassa bhaṅgaṃ, bhaṅgoyeva saṅkhatalakkhaṇattā lakkhaṇanti vutto. Idha pañca lakkhaṇānīti avijjātaṇhākammāhārānaṃ abhāvanirodhā cattāri, vipariṇāmo ekanti pañca. Esa nayo vedanākkhanthādīsu. Ayaṃ pana viseso – arūpakkhandhānaṃ udayabbayadassanaṃ addhāsantativasena, na khaṇavasena. Phasso vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhānaṃ pavattipaccayo, taṃnirodhā ca tesaṃ nirodho. Nāmarūpaṃ viññāṇakkhandhassa pavattipaccayo, taṃnirodhā ca tassa nirodhoti.
然而,有一些人这样说:“在四种分类的依缘生灭观中,不涉及过去等分别,只从总相上把握‘由无明等而生起’,这仅仅是把握正在生起的状态,并非把握生起本身;把握‘由无明等之灭而灭’,这也仅仅是把握不再生起的状态,并非把握坏灭本身。而在依刹那的生灭观中,则是把握现在诸法的生起与坏灭。”显示巴利原文
Keci panāhu – ‘‘catudhā paccayato udayabbayadassane atītādivibhāgaṃ anāmasitvāva sabbasāmaññavasena avijjādīhi udetīti uppajjamānabhāvamattaṃ gaṇhāti, na uppādaṃ. Avijjādinirodhā nirujjatīti anuppajjamānabhāvamattaṃ gaṇhāti, na bhaṅgaṃ. Khaṇato udayabbayadassane paccuppannānaṃ uppādaṃ bhaṅgaṃ gaṇhātī’’ti.
然而,修观者在修观时,首先作意依缘的生灭,到了正修观的阶段,便舍弃无明等四种法,只执取具有生灭的诸蕴,观察它们的生灭。这样,这位修观者如此详尽地观察依缘和依刹那的生灭:‘这就是色等的生起;这就是色等的灭去;色等是这样生起的;色等是这样灭去的。’由此,他的‘确实,这些法先前没有而生起,生起后即灭去’的智慧变得更加清晰,四圣谛、缘起的理趣以及相状的差别也都变得明显起来。因为他观察‘由无明等集,所以有蕴的集’、‘由无明等灭,所以有蕴的灭’,这便是他的依缘生灭观。而当他观察‘生起之相’与‘变易之相’,从而见到诸蕴的生灭时,便是他的依刹那生灭观。因为,生起之相只存在于生起的那一刹那,而变易之相只存在于坏灭的那一刹那。显示巴利原文
Vipassamāno pana vipassako paṭhamaṃ paccayato udayabbayaṃ manasikaritvā vipassanākāle avijjādike caturo dhamme vissajjetvā udayabbayavanteyeva khandhe gahetvā tesaṃ udayabbayaṃ passati, evañca tassa vipassakassa ‘‘evaṃ rūpādīnaṃ udayo, evaṃ vayo, evaṃ rūpādayo udenti, evaṃ ventī’’ti paccayato ca khaṇato ca vitthārena udayabbayaṃ passato ‘‘iti kira ime dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’’ti ñāṇaṃ visadataraṃ hoti, saccapaṭiccasamuppādanayalakkhaṇabhedā pākaṭā honti . Yañhi so avijjādisamudayā khandhānaṃ samudayaṃ avijjādinirodhā ca khandhānaṃ nirodhaṃ passati, idamassa paccayato udayabbayadassanaṃ. Yaṃ pana nibbattilakkhaṇavipariṇāmalakkhaṇāni passanto khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ passati, idamassa khaṇato udayabbayadassanaṃ. Uppattikkhaṇeyeva hi nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ, bhaṅgakkhaṇe ca vipariṇāmalakkhaṇaṃ.
如此,对于这位从依缘与依刹那两方面观察生灭的人:由依缘观生,了知能生之理,故集谛显明;由依刹那观生,了知生即是苦,故苦谛显明;由依缘观灭,了知缘若不生,则缘所生法亦不生,故灭谛显明;由依刹那观灭,了知死即是苦,故苦谛本身亦显明;而他所具备的此一生灭观,因在二种观中破除迷乱,故是世间道——道谛由此显明。显示巴利原文
Iccassevaṃ paccayato ceva khaṇato ca dvedhā udayabbayaṃ passato paccayato udayadassanena samudayasaccaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti janakāvabodhato. Khaṇato udayadassanena dukkhasaccaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti jātidukkhāvabodhato. Paccayato vayadassanena nirodhasaccaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti paccayānuppādena paccayavataṃ anuppādāvabodhato. Khaṇato vayadassanena dukkhasaccameva pākaṭaṃ hoti maraṇadukkhāvabodhato. Yañcassa udayabbayadassanaṃ, maggovāyaṃ lokikoti maggasaccaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti tatra sammohavighātato.
由依缘观察生,了知“此有故彼有”,顺缘起便得显明;由依缘观察灭,了知“此灭故彼灭”,逆缘起便得显明;由依刹那观察生灭,了知有为相,缘生法便得显明,因为凡具生灭者即是有为法,而这些正是缘生法。显示巴利原文
Paccayato cassa udayadassanena anulomo paṭiccasamuppādo pākaṭo hoti ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.404; saṃ. ni. 2.21; udā. 1) avabodhato. Paccayato vayadassanena paṭilomo paṭiccasamuppādo pākaṭo hoti ‘‘imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.406; saṃ. ni. 2.21; udā. 2) avabodhato. Khaṇato pana udayabbayadassanena paṭiccasamuppannā dhammā pākaṭā honti saṅkhatalakkhaṇāvabodhato. Udayabbayavanto hi saṅkhatā, te ca paṭiccasamuppannāti.
由依缘观察生,了悟因果相联、相续无间,故“同一之理”显明,由此更能彻底舍离断见。由依刹那观察生,了悟新法不断生起,故“差异之理”显明,由此更能彻底舍离常见。由依缘观察生灭,了悟诸法无自主、非我所主宰,故“无主宰之理”显明,由此更能彻底舍离我见。由依缘观察生,了悟果随缘而生,故“法性之理”显明,由此更能彻底舍离无作用见。显示巴利原文
Paccayato cassa udayadassanena ekattanayo pākaṭo hoti hetuphalasambandhena santānassa anupacchedāvabodhato. Atha suṭṭhutaraṃ ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati. Khaṇato udayadassanena nānattanayo pākaṭo hoti navanavānaṃ uppādāvabodhato. Atha suṭṭhutaraṃ sassatadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati. Paccayato cassa udayabbayadassanena abyāpāranayo pākaṭo hoti dhammānaṃ avasavattibhāvāvabodhato. Atha suṭṭhutaraṃ attadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati. Paccayato pana udayadassanena evaṃdhammatānayo pākaṭo hoti paccayānurūpena phalassuppādāvabodhato. Atha suṭṭhutaraṃ akiriyadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati.
从缘的角度观察生起时,由于了悟到诸法无有造作者,其生起唯依诸缘,因此‘无我相’清晰显现。从刹那的角度观察生灭时,由于了悟到诸法生起后随即坏灭,且前后际彼此分离,因此‘无常相’清晰显现。由于了悟到生灭二者本身即是逼迫,因此‘苦相’也清晰显现。由于了悟到法被生与灭所限定,因此‘自性相’清晰显现。就在这‘自性相’中,由于了悟到在生的刹那即有灭,灭的刹那已无生,由此‘有为相’的暂住性也清晰显现。显示巴利原文
Paccayato cassa udayadassanena anattalakkhaṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti dhammānaṃ nirīhakattapaccayapaṭibaddhavuttitāvabodhato. Khaṇato udayabbayadassanena aniccalakkhaṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti hutvā abhāvāvabodhato, pubbantāparantavivekāvabodhato ca. Dukkhalakkhaṇampi pākaṭaṃ hoti udayabbayehi paṭipīḷanāvabodhato. Sabhāvalakkhaṇampi pākaṭaṃ hoti udayabbayaparicchinnāvabodhato . Sabhāvalakkhaṇe saṅkhatalakkhaṇassa tāvakālikattampi pākaṭaṃ hoti, udayakkhaṇe vayassa, vayakkhaṇe ca udayassa abhāvāvabodhatoti.
当他如此通达了谛、缘起、理、相的差别之后,诸行便以‘这些法确实未生者生起,已生者即灭’的方式,呈现为刹那新新不住的无常。不仅只是刹那的无常,它们还如同朝阳下的露珠、水泡、水中的日影、针尖的芥子、闪电一般,安住极为短暂;又如同幻术、阳焰、梦境、旋火轮、乾闼婆城、水沫、芭蕉树一般,显现为没有坚实、没有核心。到了这个阶段,他通过这种方式通达并安住于五十种相,此观智即称为‘生灭随观’,是尚属幼嫩的初步观智;成就此智的人,即名为‘初修观者’。安住于此智时,光明等十种观随染便会生起。由于这些随染的生起,不善巧的瑜伽行者会将它们误认为是道智,将非道执为‘道’,并被随染的缠缚所束缚。善巧的瑜伽行者则将这些随染作为观察的对象,以观智审察,解开随染的缠缚,这样进行决择:‘这些法不是道,只有远离随染、行于正道的观智才是道’,从而确立了何为道、何为非道。如此了知道与非道而安住的智,便称为‘道非道智见清净’。显示巴利原文
Tassevaṃ pākaṭībhūtasaccapaṭiccasamuppādanayalakkhaṇabhedassa ‘‘evaṃ kira nāmime dhammā anuppannapubbā uppajjanti, uppannā nirujjhantī’’ti niccanavāva hutvā saṅkhārā upaṭṭhahanti. Na kevalañca niccanavāva, sūriyuggamane ussāvabindu viya udakapubbuḷo viya udake daṇḍarāji viya āragge sāsapo viya vijjuppādo viya ca parittaṭṭhāyino māyāmarīcisupinantaalātacakkagandhabbanagarapheṇakadaliādayo viya asārā nissārāti cāpi upaṭṭhahanti. Ettāvatā tena ‘‘vayadhammameva uppajjati, uppannañca vayaṃ upetī’’ti iminā ākārena samapaññāsa lakkhaṇāni paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitaṃ udayabbayānupassanā nāma paṭhamaṃ taruṇavipassanāñāṇaṃ adhigataṃ hoti, yassādhigamā ‘‘āraddhavipassako’’ti saṅkhaṃ gacchati. Imasmiṃ ñāṇe ṭhitassa obhāsādayo dasa vipassanūpakkilesā uppajjanti, yesaṃ uppattiyā akusalo yogāvacaro tesu maggañāṇasaññī hutvā amaggameva ‘‘maggo’’ti gaṇhāti, upakkilesajaṭājaṭito ca hoti. Kusalo pana yogāvacaro tesu vipassanaṃ āropento upakkilesajaṭaṃ vijaṭetvā ‘‘ete dhammā na maggo, upakkilesavimuttaṃ pana vīthipaṭipannaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggo’’ti maggañca amaggañca vavatthapeti. Tassevaṃ maggañca amaggañca ñatvā ṭhitaṃ ñāṇaṃ maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi nāma.
至此,这位行者已对四谛作了决择。是如何作的呢?当把握了名色时,通过被称为‘法住智’的、也就是名为「见清净」的名色确定,即是对苦谛作了决择。通过名为「度疑清净」的缘把握,即是对集谛作了决择。以生灭随观,通过观察刹那的生灭,对苦谛作了决择;通过观察依缘而生起,对集谛作了决择;通过观察依缘而息灭,对灭谛作了决择。再者,他在观察生灭时,基于‘这是世间道’的认识遣除了迷妄;并在「道非道智见清净」中,修观者通过对正道的决择,即是对道谛作了决择。如此,暂依世间智,便已对四谛作了决择。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca pana tena catunnaṃ saccānaṃ vavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Kathaṃ? Nāmarūpapariggahe sati paccayapariggahasambhavato dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇavacaneneva vuttena diṭṭhivisuddhisaṅkhātena nāmarūpavavatthāpanena dukkhasaccassa vavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti, kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhisaṅkhātena paccayapariggahaṇena samudayasaccassa vavatthānaṃ, udayabbayānupassanena ca khaṇato udayabbayadassanena dukkhasaccassa vavatthānaṃ kataṃ, paccayato udayadassanena samudayasaccassa vavatthānaṃ, paccayato vayadassanena nirodhasaccassa vavatthānaṃ, yañcassa udayabbayadassanaṃ, maggovāyaṃ lokikoti tatra sammohavighātato imissañca maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhiyaṃ vipassato sammā maggassa avadhāraṇena maggasaccassa vavatthānaṃ kataṃ. Evaṃ lokiyena tāva ñāṇena catunnaṃ saccānaṃ vavatthānaṃ kataṃ hotīti.
第七章:坏灭随观智的注释显示巴利原文
7. Bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
51 安住于生灭随观的瑜伽行者,通过道非道的决择,了知‘远离随染、行于正道的生灭随观智’方为道,为使此道透过三相的善巧观察而更臻清净,再次开始修习生灭随观。他对被生灭所限定的诸行,以无常等来随观。由此,他的智变得锐利而运转,诸行轻快地现起。当智慧锐利运转、诸行轻快现起时,念便超越生起而安住于灭;又或因为心倾向于灭,他舍离对生起的观照,只将念安住于灭。在这个阶段,坏灭随观智便生起了。现在,在对该智的注释中:「以色为所缘的心生起后坏灭」——意思是,缘取色所缘的心生起之后便坏灭;或者也可以说:‘当存在色所缘的状态时,心生起后便坏灭’。「了知彼所缘」——即审察了知那色所缘,见其是灭尽、衰坏的。「随观此心的坏灭」——即以之前那个见到色所缘坏灭之心,由后续的心去随观该心的坏灭。因此,古师们说:‘所知的与能知的,两者都被观照。’此处「心」指与相应心所俱起之心。显示巴利原文
51. So udayabbayānupassanāyaṃ ṭhito yogāvacaro maggāmaggavavatthāpanena upakkilesavimuttaṃ vīthipaṭipannaṃ udayabbayānupassanāñāṇaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti ñatvā tilakkhaṇasallakkhaṇena tasseva maggassa suvisadakaraṇatthaṃ puna udayabbayānupassanaṃ ārabhitvā udayabbayena paricchinne saṅkhāre aniccādito vipassati. Evaṃ tassa taṃ ñāṇaṃ tikkhaṃ hutvā vahati, saṅkhārā lahuṃ upaṭṭhahanti, ñāṇe tikkhe vahante saṅkhāresu lahuṃ upaṭṭhahantesu uppādaṃ atikkamitvā bhaṅge eva sati santiṭṭhati. Nirodhādhimuttattā vā udayaṃ pahāya bhaṅgeyeva satiṃ upaṭṭhapeti. Etasmiṃ ṭhāne bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Idāni tassa ñāṇassa niddese rūpārammaṇatā cittaṃ uppajjitvā bhijjatīti rūpārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ uppajjitvā bhijjati. Atha vā rūpārammaṇabhāve cittaṃ uppajjitvā bhijjatīti attho. Taṃ ārammaṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhāti taṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhāya jānitvā, khayato vayato disvāti attho. Tassa cittassa bhaṅgaṃ anupassatīti yena cittena taṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ khayato vayato diṭṭhaṃ, tassa cittassa aparena cittena bhaṅgaṃ anupassatīti attho. Tenāhu porāṇā – ‘‘ñātañca ñāṇañca ubho vipassatī’’ti. Cittanti cettha sasampayuttacittaṃ adhippetaṃ.
「随观」:谓一再地观、以种种方式反复地观察。故问:‘随观’如何观?即以无常等随观。其中,因坏灭乃是无常性的极致,故修习坏灭随观的瑜伽行者,对一切色法皆以无常随观,不以常。其次,无常故苦,苦故无我,所以他以苦随观而非乐,以无我随观而非我。再者,凡是无常、苦、无我者,即不应欢喜;凡不应欢喜者,即不应生贪染。因此,他随顺坏灭随观之流,见一切色法为‘无常、苦、无我’时,便生厌离而不欢喜,离欲而不贪染。当他如是离欲时,先以世间智令贪爱止息而不生起,即不令贪爱累积生起。又或者,如是离欲后,依类智,于已见之色法既如是,于未见者亦令其止息而不生起。他唯作意于灭,只见灭,不见生。如此修习时,他‘弃舍’而不执取。这是什么意思呢?此无常等随观,以彼分断的方式,连同对诸行的造作,舍断烦恼,并由于见到诸行的过患,转而倾向、投入相反的涅槃,故称为‘舍离之弃舍’及‘趣入之弃舍’。因此,成就此观的比丘,依前述之理,既已舍断显示巴利原文
Anupassatīti anu anu passati, anekehi ākārehi punappunaṃ passatīti attho. Tenāha anupassatīti kathaṃ anupassati, aniccato anupassatītiādi . Tattha yasmā bhaṅgo nāma aniccatāya paramā koṭi, tasmā bhaṅgānupassako yogāvacaro sabbaṃ rūpagataṃ aniccato anupassati, no niccato. Tato aniccassa dukkhattā, dukkhassa ca anattattā, tadeva dukkhato anupassati, no sukhato. Anattato anupassati, no attato . Yasmā pana yaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā, na taṃ abhinanditabbaṃ. Yañca na abhinanditabbaṃ, na tattha rajjitabbaṃ. Tasmā esa tasmiṃ bhaṅgānupassanānusārena ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā’’ti diṭṭhe rūpagate nibbindati, no nandati. Virajjati, no rajjati. So evaṃ virajjanto lokikeneva tāva ñāṇena rāgaṃ nirodheti, no samudeti, samudayaṃ na karotīti attho. Atha vā so evaṃ viratto yathā diṭṭhaṃ rūpagataṃ, tathā adiṭṭhampi anvayañāṇavasena nirodheti, no samudeti. Nirodhatova manasi karoti, nirodhamevassa passati, no samudayanti attho. So evaṃ paṭipanno paṭinissajjati, no ādiyati. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ayampi hi aniccādianupassanā tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilesānaṃ pariccajanato, saṅkhatadosadassanena ca tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandanato pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo cāti vuccati. Tasmā tāya samannāgato bhikkhu yathāvuttena nayena kilese ca pariccajati, nibbāne ca pakkhandati. Nāpi nibbattanavasena kilese ādiyati, na adosadassitāvasena saṅkhatārammaṇaṃ. Tena vuccati paṭinissajjati, no ādiyatīti.
52 现在,为说明以那些智断除哪些法,故说「以无常随观断除常想」等。其中,「欣乐」指带有喜悦的渴爱;「贪」指其余的渴爱;「集」指贪的生起,或也可指色法所摄事物的生起;「执取」指以令烦恼再生的方式执取烦恼。此处及后文所说的「受所缘性」等,也当依前文之理来理解。显示巴利原文
52. Idānissa tehi ñāṇehi yesaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānaṃ hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahatītiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nandinti sappītikaṃ taṇhaṃ. Rāganti sesaṃ taṇhaṃ. Samudayanti rāgassa uppattiṃ. Atha vā rūpagatassa udayaṃ. Ādānanti nibbattanavasena kilesānaṃ ādānaṃ. Vedanārammaṇatātiādīni idha ca heṭṭhā ca vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.
而在偈颂中,「事转移」:即逐一见到色等坏灭后,为见到见坏灭之心的坏灭,从先前一事(所缘)转移到另一事。「慧的离转」:即舍弃生而安住于灭。「以及转向力」:即逐一见到色等坏灭后,为见到以坏灭为所缘之心的坏灭,能无间转向下一刹那的力量。「审察观」:即审察所缘,也就是坏灭随观本身。「以所缘类比,对两者作同一确定」:意谓,以现见所缘为类比,推知「如今所见,过去诸行所摄亦曾坏灭,未来亦将坏灭」,从而将过去与未来二者确定为同一性质。此义,古之师长亦曾宣说。显示巴利原文
Gāthāsu pana vatthusaṅkamanāti rūpādīsu ekekassa bhaṅgaṃ disvā puna yena cittena bhaṅgo diṭṭho, tassāpi bhaṅgadassanavasena purimavatthuto aññavatthusaṅkamanā. Paññāya ca vivaṭṭanāti udayaṃ pahāya vaye santiṭṭhanā. Āvajjanā balañcevāti rūpādīsu ekekassa bhaṅgaṃ disvā puna bhaṅgārammaṇassa cittassa bhaṅgadassanatthaṃ anantarameva āvajjanasamatthatā. Paṭisaṅkhā vipassanāti esā ārammaṇapaṭisaṅkhā bhaṅgānupassanā nāma. Ārammaṇaanvayenaubho ekavavatthanāti paccakkhato diṭṭhassa ārammaṇassa anvayena anugamanena yathā idaṃ, tathā atītepi saṅkhāragataṃ bhijji, anāgatepi bhijjissatīti evaṃ ubhinnaṃ ekasabhāveneva vavatthāpananti attho. Vuttampi cetaṃ porāṇehi –
于清净见现前时,便依此随顺推及过去与未来;
一切行皆为坏灭,犹如日出时之露珠。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saṃvijjamānamhi visuddhadassano, tadanvayaṃ neti atītanāgate; Sabbepi saṅkhāragatā palokino, ussāvabindū sūriyeva uggate’’ti.
「于灭倾向」:如此将两种坏灭统一确定后,对于那名称为坏灭的灭,倾心、珍重、趣向、低垂、朝向——这是其义。「坏相观」:即说此名为坏相观。「且审察所缘」:即先了知色等所缘之后。显示巴利原文
Nirodhe adhimuttatāti evaṃ ubhinnaṃ bhaṅgavasena ekavavatthānaṃ katvā tasmiṃyeva bhaṅgasaṅkhāte nirodhe adhimuttatā taggarutā tanninnatā tappoṇatā tappabbhāratāti attho. Vayalakkhaṇavipassanāti esā vayalakkhaṇavipassanā nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ārammaṇañca paṭisaṅkhāti purimañca rūpādiārammaṇaṃ jānitvā. Bhaṅgañca anupassatīti tassārammaṇassa bhaṅgaṃ disvā tadārammaṇassa cittassa ca bhaṅgaṃ anupassati. Suññato ca upaṭṭhānanti tassevaṃ bhaṅgamanupassato ‘‘saṅkhārāva bhijjanti, tesaṃ bhedo maraṇaṃ, na añño koci atthī’’ti suññato upaṭṭhānaṃ ijjhati. Tenāhu porāṇā –
‘‘Khandhā nirujjhanti na catthi añño, khandhāna bhedo maraṇanti vuccati; Tesaṃ khayaṃ passati appamatto, maṇiṃva vijjhaṃ vajirena yoniso’’ti.
“增上慧观”:即所缘的审察、坏灭的随观以及空的现起——此三者便称为增上慧观。“于三随观善巧”:即比丘于无常随观等三种随观中善巧。“及于四观”:即于厌离等四种观中善巧。“于三种现起善巧”:即于坏灭现起、衰灭现起、空现起此三种现起中善巧。“于种种见不动摇”:即于常见等种种邪见中安住不动。他如此不动摇,持续作意“未灭者正在灭,未破者正在破”,舍弃一切行的生、住、转起之相,唯见破坏,犹如弱瓶之碎裂,犹如微尘之飞散,犹如芝麻之碾碎。譬如一个有眼之人立于池畔或河边,当大雨粗滴降落时,他看见水面上一个个大水泡生起后又即刻迅速破灭;同样地,他见到一切行唯是坏灭、坏灭。世尊正是针对这样的瑜伽行者而说。显示巴利原文
Adhipaññā vipassanāti yā ca ārammaṇapaṭisaṅkhā, yā ca bhaṅgānupassanā, yañca suññato upaṭṭhānaṃ, ayaṃ adhipaññā vipassanā nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kusalo tīsu anupassanāsūti aniccānupassanādīsu tīsu cheko bhikkhu. Catasso ca vipassanāsūti nibbidādīsu ca catūsu vipassanāsu. Tayo upaṭṭhāne kusalatāti khayato vayato suññatoti imasmiñca tividhe upaṭṭhāne kusalatāya. Nānādiṭṭhīsu na kampatīti sassatadiṭṭhiādīsu nānappakārāsu diṭṭhīsu na vedhati. So evaṃ avedhamāno ‘‘aniruddhameva nirujjhati, abhinnameva bhijjatī’’ti pavattamanasikāro dubbalabhājanassa viya bhijjamānassa, sukhumarajasseva vippakiriyamānassa, tilānaṃ viya bhajjiyamānānaṃ sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ uppādaṭṭhitipavattanimittaṃ vissajjetvā bhedameva passati. So yathā nāma cakkhumā puriso pokkharaṇītīre vā nadītīre vā ṭhito thūlaphusitake deve vassante udakapiṭṭhe mahantamahantāni udakapubbuḷāni uppajjitvā uppajjitvā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ bhijjamānāni passeyya, evameva sabbe saṅkhārā bhijjanti bhijjantīti passati. Evarūpañhi yogāvacaraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ bhagavatā –
如见水泡,如见阳焰;
如此观察世间者,死神便无法看见他。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yathā pubbuḷakaṃ passe, yathā passe marīcikaṃ; Evaṃ lokaṃ avekkhantaṃ, maccurājā na passatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 170);
如此一再观见“一切行皆悉坏灭”者,其坏灭随观智便得强而有力,并有八种功德为眷属。此八种功德是:舍弃有见、弃舍对生命的贪爱、恒常精勤相应、活命清净、舍弃焦虑、远离怖畏、获得忍辱与柔和、于不乐与乐皆能安忍。是故古德如是说:显示巴利原文
Tassevaṃ ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā bhijjanti bhijjantī’’ti abhiṇhaṃ passato aṭṭhānisaṃsaparivāraṃ bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ balappattaṃ hoti. Tatrime aṭṭhānisaṃsā – bhavadiṭṭhippahānaṃ, jīvitanikantipariccāgo, sadāyuttapayuttatā, visuddhājīvitā, ussukkappahānaṃ, vigatabhayatā, khantisoraccapaṭilābho, aratiratisahanatāti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
圣者如救头燃、如衣燃火,为证得不死,而修习坏灭随观。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Imāni aṭṭhagguṇamuttamāni, disvā tahiṃ sammasatī punappunaṃ; Ādittacelassirasūpamo muni, bhaṅgānupassī amatassa pattiyā’’ti.
第八 过患智释义显示巴利原文
8. Ādīnavañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
53 在《过患智解说》中:“生起”是指由先前的业为缘,在此处出现。“转起”是指如是出现后,持续地流转。“相”是指一切行相。“集积”是指作为未来结生之因的业。“结生”是指未来的出现。“趣”是指结生所依托的去处。“生出”是指诸蕴的产生。“往生”是指如所说的“入定者或往生者”那样的果报转起。“生”是指作为老等苦的缘、以有为缘而生起的结生。从普遍意义上说,一切有情于各处出生时,那些次第生起的诸蕴,其初次呈现即是“生”。“老”是指在同一生命期内,诸蕴相续所呈现的诸根衰朽等旧貌。“愁”是指因亲属遭遇不幸等所触动而生的内心焦灼。“悲”是指被亲属遭遇不幸等所触动时,所发出的空洞哀叹。“忧”是指因亲属遭遇不幸等所触动的极度心苦,由此引发的内在热恼。在这里,唯有“生起”等五种属于过患智的范畴,其余均为其同义词。因为“生出”与“生”是“生起”和“结生”的同义词;“趣”与“往生”是“转起”的同义词;而老等则是“相”的同义词。显示巴利原文
53. Ādīnavañāṇaniddese uppādoti purimakammapaccayā idha uppatti. Pavattanti tathāuppannassa pavatti. Nimittanti sabbampi saṅkhāranimittaṃ. Āyūhanāti āyatiṃ paṭisandhihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ. Paṭisandhīti āyatiṃ uppatti. Gatīti yāya gatiyā sā paṭisandhi hoti. Nibbattīti khandhānaṃ nibbattanaṃ. Upapattīti ‘‘samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā’’ti (dha. sa. 1289) evaṃ vuttā vipākappavatti . Jātīti jarādīnaṃ paccayabhūtā bhavapaccayā jāti. Nippariyāyato tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ paṭhamapātubhāvo jāti. Jarāti khaṇḍiccādisammato santatiyaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannakhandhasantānassa purāṇabhāvo. Sokoti ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa cittasantāpo. Paridevoti ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa vacīpalāpo. Upāyāsoti bhuso āyāso, ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa adhimattacetodukkhappabhāvito dosoyeva. Ettha ca uppādādayo pañceva ādīnavañāṇassa vatthuvasena vuttā, sesā tesaṃ vevacanavasena. ‘‘Nibbatti jātī’’ti idañhi dvayaṃ uppādassa ceva paṭisandhiyā ca vevacanaṃ, ‘‘gati upapattī’’ti idaṃ dvayaṃ pavattassa, jarādayo nimittassāti. Tenāha –
见到生起、转起与相为苦;
见到集积与结生,这便是过患智。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Uppādañca pavattañca, nimittaṃ dukkhanti passati; Āyūhanaṃ paṭisandhiṃ, ñāṇaṃ ādīnave ida’’nti. ca ‘‘Idaṃ ādīnave ñāṇaṃ, pañcaṭhānesu jāyatī’’ti. ca
在一切处(即偈颂的每一行)中,“bhayaṃ”应解析为“bhayaṃ iti”。“bhayaṃ”:因与压迫相连故,具可怖畏性,故为怖畏。“iti”:此是对怖畏现起因由的说明。显示巴利原文
Sabbapadesu ca bhayanti iccetassa vacanassa bhayaṃ itīti padacchedo . Bhayanti pīḷāyogato sappaṭibhayatāya bhayaṃ. Itīti bhayatupaṭṭhānassa kāraṇaniddeso.
「无生起是安稳」等,是为显示与过患智相对立的智而说的“寂静处之智”等。或者,有的人通过怖畏现起见到过患后,心生恐慌,为了令其获得信心,而作此说:也有无怖畏的安稳,无过患。或者,因为当某人的生起等以怖畏的方式清晰地现起时,他的心便会倾向于彼之对立面,所以,这样说也是为了显示依怖畏现起而成就的过患智的功德。应如此理解。而“无生起、无转起”等,完全是指涅槃。“寂静处”:在寂静的一分中,即涅槃。因为哪怕只是依传闻而执取“寂静处”这个名称所生起的智,也称为“寂静处之智”。显示巴利原文
Anuppādo khemanti santipade ñāṇantiādi pana ādīnavañāṇassa paṭipakkhañāṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Bhayatupaṭṭhānena vā ādīnavaṃ disvā ubbiggahadayānaṃ abhayampi atthi khemaṃ nirādīnavanti assāsajananatthampi etaṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā vā yassa uppādādayo bhayato sūpaṭṭhitā honti, tassa tappaṭipakkhaninnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tasmā bhayatupaṭṭhānavasena siddhassa ādīnavañāṇassa ānisaṃsadassanatthampetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Anuppādo appavattantiādi nibbānameva. Santipadeti santikoṭṭhāse, nibbāneti attho. Anussavavasenāpi hi santipadanti nāmamattaṃ gahetvā uppannaṃ ñāṇampi ‘‘santipade ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
「生起是怖畏,无生起是安稳」等,是以对立与对治的方式将两者总括起来,把握正在生起的智而说的。在这里,凡是怖畏,由于必定是苦;凡是苦,由于未脱离轮回的染着、世间的染着、烦恼的染着,故是有染着的;凡是有染着的,便仅是诸行。因此,说“生起是苦”等,也就是依怖畏现起而有的慧,称为过患智等。尽管如此,从怖畏相、苦相、有染着相、行相这些相的差别,应知此处是由转起的不同而有差异。“生起是怖畏、是苦、是有染着、是诸行”,这些话不随“生起”等词的词性,如同“此非安稳的皈依,非最上的皈依”(《法句经》189)等经句一般,仅依所描述事物本身的词性而说。而“诸行”一词,亦不依单数,如“无因法、无为法”(《法集论·双论母》7-8)等用复数一般;或者,因为生起等只是诸行的一部分,如同“北般遮罗、南般遮罗”等,对多数中的一个部分亦用复数,应如此理解。「安稳、乐、无染着、涅槃」,是将涅槃针对之前所说诸相的对立面,而说为四种。「他以十种智了知」:修习过患智时,以生起等为所缘的五种,以无生起等为所缘的五种,他以此十种智了知。显示巴利原文
Uppādobhayaṃ, anuppādo khemantiādi vipakkhapaṭipakkhavasena ubhayaṃ samāsetvā uppajjamānaṃ ñāṇaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Ettha ca yaṃ bhayaṃ, taṃ yasmā niyamato dukkhaṃ. Yañca dukkhaṃ, taṃ vaṭṭāmisalokāmisakilesāmisehi avippamuttattā sāmisameva. Yañca sāmisaṃ, taṃ saṅkhāramattameva. Tasmā uppādo dukkhanti bhayatupaṭṭhāne paññā ādīnave ñāṇantiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi bhayākārena dukkhākārena sāmisākārena saṅkhārākārenāti evaṃ ākāranānattato pavattivasenettha nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Uppādo bhayaṃ, dukkhaṃ, sāmisaṃ, saṅkhārā cāti uppādādiliṅgamanapekkhitvā ‘‘netaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, netaṃ saraṇamuttama’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 189) viya attano liṅgāpekkhameva vuttaṃ. Saṅkhārāti ca ekattamanapekkhitvā ‘‘appaccayā dhammā, asaṅkhatā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. dukamātikā 7-8) viya bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ, uppādādīnaṃ vā saṅkhārekadesattā ‘‘uttare pañcālā, dakkhiṇe pañcālā’’tiādīsu viya bahunnaṃ ekadesepi bahuvacanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Khemaṃ sukhaṃ nirāmisaṃ nibbānanti nibbānameva vuttākārānaṃ paṭipakkhavasena catudhā vuttaṃ. Dasa ñāṇe pajānātīti ādīnave ñāṇaṃ pajānanto uppādādivatthukāni pañca, anuppādādivatthukāni pañcāti dasa ñāṇe pajānāti paṭivijjhati sacchikaroti. Dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kusalatāti ādīnavañāṇassa ceva santipadañāṇassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kusalatāya. Nānādiṭṭhīsu na kampatīti paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānādivasena pavattāsu diṭṭhīsu na vedhatīti.
9. 行舍智论释显示巴利原文
9. Saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
54 在行舍智的论释中,「生起」等词,如前文所说。而「是苦」「是怖畏」「是有染着」「诸行」等语,是成就「从生起等中解脱之智」的因由。如此从相上阐明行舍之后,为再从义理上显示,便说:「生起即是诸行,对此诸行持中舍,故称行舍」等语。其中,「对此诸行持中舍」的意思是:那位已开始修观的行者,因依观智照见三共相,已然放下拣择诸相的功用,见三界如大火聚,对诸行的执取处于中舍的状态。此观智一方面特别照见诸行,另一方面又以无执取的方式得以照见与观察,故称为「行舍」。正如世间语言习惯,「特别胜」是指特别地战胜,「斋戒」是指舍离食物而住,此词的构成也是如此。进而,从无常等角度观照诸行之后,安住于对执取持中舍状态的行舍,又再从此行舍本身,从无常等角度加以观照。因为此智本身亦安住于对执取的中舍相,所以由于行舍智的存在,而说「那些行及那种舍」等语。显示巴利原文
54. Saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaniddese uppādādīni vuttatthāneva. Dukkhanti bhayanti sāmisanti saṅkhārāti uppādādimuñcanañāṇassa kāraṇavacanāni. Evañca lakkhaṇato saṅkhārupekkhaṃ dassetvā idāni atthato dassetuṃ uppādo saṅkhārā, te saṅkhāre ajjhupekkhatīti saṅkhārupekkhātiādimāha. Tattha saṅkhāre ajjhupekkhatīti tassa āraddhavipassakassa vipassanāñāṇena lakkhaṇattayassa diṭṭhattā lakkhaṇavicinane pahīnabyāpārassa āditte viya tayo bhave passato saṅkhāraggahaṇe majjhattassa taṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ te saṅkhāre visesena ca ikkhati, gahaṇena vajjitañca hutvā ikkhati oloketīti saṅkhārupekkhā nāmāti attho. Yathā loke visesena jayanto adhijayatīti, annena vajjito vasanto upavasatīti vuccati. Puna saṅkhāre aniccādito vipassitvā gahaṇe majjhattabhāvasaṇṭhitaṃ saṅkhārupekkhampi aniccādito vipassitvā tassāpi saṅkhārupekkhāya gahaṇe majjhattākārasaṇṭhitāya saṅkhārupekkhāya sabbhāvato ye ca saṅkhārā yā ca upekkhātiādi vuttaṃ.
55 现在为了说明将心引向行舍的种种差别,便说「以几种行相」等语。其中,「于行舍」是位格。「将心引向」,是指那已获得行舍的人,让其余的心朝向行舍,强有力地引导过去。此处,「abhi」是「朝向」之义,「nī」则是「强力引导」之义。对于「以几种行相?」的提问,先答以「八种行相」,之后本应通过第二次问答来显示那八种行相,却没有直接显示,而是先提出了「凡夫以几种行相?」等问题。至于「凡夫」——显示巴利原文
55. Idāni saṅkhārupekkhāya cittābhinīhārabhedaṃ dassetuṃ katihākārehītiādimāha. Tattha saṅkhārupekkhāyāti bhummavacanaṃ. Cittassa abhinīhāroti saṅkhārupekkhālābhino tato aññassa cittassa saṅkhārupekkhābhimukhaṃ katvā bhusaṃ haraṇaṃ. Abhimukhattho hi ettha abhisaddo, bhusattho nīsaddo. Katihākārehīti pucchitaṃ pucchaṃ aṭṭhahākārehīti vissajjetvā dutiyapucchāvissajjaneneva te aṭṭhākāre dassetukāmo te adassetvāva puthujjanassa katihākārehītiādi pucchaṃ akāsi. Puthujjanassāti ettha pana –
佛陀,太阳的亲人,曾说有两种凡夫:
一类是盲凡夫,一类是善凡夫。
显示巴利原文 Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjanoti.
其中,若对蕴、界、处等没有学习、遍问、听闻、忆持、省察等,此人即名盲凡夫;若具足这些,则名善凡夫。然而,这两类凡夫——显示巴利原文
Tattha yassa khandhadhātuāyatanādīsu uggahaparipucchāsavanadhāraṇapaccavekkhaṇādīni natthi, ayaṃ andhaputhujjano. Yassa tāni atthi, so kalyāṇaputhujjano. Duvidhopi panesa –
由于他归属于众多凡夫之列,或由于这人是众多的、杂乱的,故称为凡夫。
显示巴利原文 Puthūnaṃ jananādīhi, kāraṇehi puthujjano; Puthujjanantogadhattā, puthuvāyaṃ jano iti.
他因种种不同种类的烦恼等的产生等原因而称为凡夫。如所说:‘他们产生种种烦恼,故为凡夫;他们具有种种未破除的身见,故为凡夫;他们仰望众多导师之面,故为凡夫;他们未从一切趣中出离,故为凡夫;他们造作种种不同的行,故为凡夫;他们被种种暴流冲走,故为凡夫;他们被种种热恼烧灼,故为凡夫;他们被种种炽燃焚烧,故为凡夫;他们对五种欲功德贪染、耽著、系缚、陶醉、执取、固著、障碍,故为凡夫;他们被五种盖遮蔽、包围、笼罩、覆盖、隐藏、遮掩,故为凡夫。’另外,由于他归属于那些不可计数、违背圣法、行持卑劣法的人们之中,故为凡夫;或者,这个人被单独视为与具足戒、闻等功德的圣者们相分离的人,故为凡夫。在此处,这是指善凡夫,因为另一类根本未修习。显示巴利原文
So hi puthūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesādīnaṃ jananādīhi kāraṇehi puthujjano. Yathāha – ‘‘puthu kilese janentīti puthujjanā, puthu avihatasakkāyadiṭṭhikāti puthujjanā, puthu satthārānaṃ mukhullokikāti puthujjanā, puthu sabbagatīhi avuṭṭhitāti puthujjanā, puthu nānābhisaṅkhāre abhisaṅkharontīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāoghehi vuyhantīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāsantāpehi santappentīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāpariḷāhehi pariḍayhantīti puthujjanā, puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattā giddhā gadhitā mucchitā ajjhosannā laggā laggitā palibuddhāti puthujjanā, puthu pañcahi nīvaraṇehi āvutā nivutā ovutā pihitā paṭicchannā paṭikujjitāti puthujjanā’’ti (mahāni. 94). Puthūnaṃ vā gaṇanapathātītānaṃ ariyadhammaparammukhānaṃ nīcadhammasamācārānaṃ janānaṃ antogadhattāpi puthujjanā, puthu vā ayaṃ visuṃyeva saṅkhaṃ gato, visaṃsaṭṭho sīlasutādiguṇayuttehi ariyehi janotipi puthujjano. Tesu kalyāṇaputhujjano idhādhippeto itarassa bhāvanāya eva abhāvā.
「有学者」在此是指:有七种有学,即住于入流道、入流果、一来道、一来果、不来道、不来果、阿拉汉道者。因为他们修学三学,故称为「有学」。其中,住于入流果、一来果、不来果的这三种人,是此处所指的;因为住于道者,心尚未导向行舍。显示巴利原文
Sekkhassāti ettha satta sekkhā sotāpattimaggaphalasakadāgāmimaggaphalaanāgāmimaggaphalaarahattamaggaṭṭhā. Te hi tisso sikkhā sikkhantīti sekkhā. Tesu sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmiphalaṭṭhā tayo idhādhippetā maggaṭṭhānaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāya cittābhinīhārābhāvā.
「离贪者」在此意指:以断除的方式离去了贪的人,称为离贪者。这是阿拉汉的别称。在这三处段落中,为配合主语而统一使用了单数形式。显示巴利原文
Vītarāgassāti ettha samucchedavigamena vigato rāgo assāti vītarāgo. Arahato etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tīsupi padesu jātiggahaṇena ekavacanaṃ kataṃ.
「喜悦行舍」是指:在那舍的安住中,获得了「安住轻利」的想之后,由于对安住轻利的喜爱而倾向于行舍并感到喜悦,也就是生起伴有喜悦的渴爱,这便是它的含义。「观察」是指:为了证得入流道,而以无常等角度作种种观察;有学圣者为了证得更上的道而观察;离贪者为了现法乐住而观察。「审虑」是指:同样以无常等角度审察。然而,正因为入流等圣者进入各自相应的果等至时,如果不以生灭智等九种观智进行观察便无法进入,所以才说「或者审虑之后进入果等至」。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhārupekkhaṃ abhinandatīti tasmiṃ upekkhāvihāre phāsuvihārasaññaṃ paṭilabhitvā phāsuvihāranikantiyā saṅkhārupekkhābhimukho hutvā nandati, sappītikaṃ taṇhaṃ uppādetīti attho. Vipassatīti sotāpattimaggapaṭilābhatthaṃ aniccādivasena vividhā passati, sekkho uparimaggatthaṃ, vītarāgo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ vipassati. Paṭisaṅkhāyāti aniccādivaseneva upaparikkhitvā. Yasmā pana sotāpannādayo ariyā sakaṃ sakaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjamānā udayabbayañāṇādīhi navahi vipassanāñāṇehi avipassitvā samāpajjituṃ na sakkonti, tasmā paṭisaṅkhāya vā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjatīti vuttaṃ.
为了说明果等至的运作方式,而有如下这些论题:什么是果等至?哪些人进入它?哪些人不进入它?为何进入它?其进入方式是怎样的?安住方式是怎样的?出起方式是怎样的?什么紧接在果之后?果又紧接在什么之后?显示巴利原文
Phalasamāpattiyā pavattidassanatthaṃ pana tesaṃ idaṃ pañhakammaṃ – kā phalasamāpatti? Ke taṃ samāpajjanti? Ke na samāpajjanti? Kasmā samāpajjanti? Kathañcassā samāpajjanaṃ hoti? Kathaṃ ṭhānaṃ? Kathaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ? Kiṃ phalassa anantaraṃ? Kassa ca phalaṃ anantaranti?
此处,什么是果等至?即圣果于灭尽中的安止。显示巴利原文
Tattha kā phalasamāpattīti? Yā ariyaphalassa nirodhe appanā.
哪些人能入这些至,哪些人不能?一切凡夫皆不能入。何以故?以未证得故。一切圣者则皆能入。何以故?以已证得故。然而,上位的圣者不入下位的果等至,因已超越其位分而得止息;下位的圣者不入上位的果等至,因尚未证得故。至于自己入自己相应之果,则一切圣者皆能,这便是此处的定论。显示巴利原文
Ke taṃ samāpajjanti? Ke na samāpajjantīti? Sabbepi puthujjanā na samāpajjanti. Kasmā? Anadhigatattā. Ariyā pana sabbepi samāpajjanti. Kasmā ? Adhigatattā. Uparimā pana heṭṭhimaṃ na samāpajjanti puggalantarabhāvūpagamanena paṭippassaddhattā, heṭṭhimā ca uparimaṃ anadhigatattā. Attano attanoyeva pana phalaṃ sabbepi samāpajjantīti idamettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ.
然而,有些人说:“入流者与一来者亦不入,唯有上二界的圣者能入。”他们的理由是:“因为只有他们才于定中修习圆满。”但此理并不成立,因为即便凡夫也能入自己证得的世间定。于此何必计较理由当与不当?岂不是就在这《无碍解道》中,对于“哪十种行舍依观而生,哪十种种姓法依观而生”等问题,便分别明确提到“为入流果等至”、“为一来果等至”吗?因此,应得出最终结论:一切圣者皆入各自之果。显示巴利原文
Keci pana ‘‘sotāpannasakadāgāminopi na samāpajjanti, uparimā dveyeva samāpajjantī’’ti vadanti. Idañca nesaṃ kāraṇaṃ – ete hi samādhismiṃ paripūrakārinoti. Taṃ puthujjanassāpi attanā paṭiladdhaṃ lokiyasamādhiṃ samāpajjanato akāraṇameva. Kiñcettha kāraṇākāraṇacintāya. Nanu idheva pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘katame dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti, katame dasa gotrabhudhammā vipassanāvasena uppajjantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.60) imesaṃ pañhānaṃ vissajjane ‘‘sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāya sakadāgāmiphalasamāpattatthāyā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.60) visuṃ visuṃ vuttā. Tasmā sabbepi ariyā attano attano phalaṃ samāpajjantīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
为何进入果等至?为了现法乐住。犹如国王享受王权之乐,天人享受天界之乐,圣者们心想:‘我们要去体验出世间之乐’,便划定一段时间,在随心所欲的时刻进入果等至。显示巴利原文
Kasmā samāpajjantīti? Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ. Yathā hi rājāno rajjasukhaṃ, devatā dibbasukhamanubhavanti, evaṃ ariyā ‘‘lokuttarasukhaṃ anubhavissāmā’’ti addhānaparicchedaṃ katvā icchiticchitakkhaṇe phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjanti.
它如何进入?如何安住?如何出起?首先,其进入方式有二:不作意涅槃以外的任何所缘,以及作意涅槃。正如经中所说:‘贤友,证入无相心解脱之等至有两个条件:不作意一切相,以及作意无相界。’此处,进入的次第如下:欲入果等至的圣弟子应当独处宴坐,从生灭等角度观照诸行。当他如此次第修观时,在以诸行为所缘的种姓智之后,心便凭借果等至之力,投入并安止于灭。在此,因为心倾向于果等至,所以有学圣者唯生起果心,不生起道心。另有人言:‘入流者为入果等至而着手修观,结果变为一来者;一来者又变为不来者。’应对他们言:‘若如此,则不来者将变为阿拉汉,阿拉汉将变为独觉佛,独觉佛又将变为佛陀了。’显示巴利原文
Kathañcassā samāpajjanaṃ hoti, kathaṃ ṭhānaṃ, kathaṃ vuṭṭhānanti? Dvīhi tāva ākārehi assā samāpajjanaṃ hoti nibbānato aññassa ārammaṇassa amanasikārā, nibbānassa ca manasikārā. Yathāha – ‘‘dve kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā sabbanimittānañca amanasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā manasikāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458). Ayaṃ panettha samāpajjanakkamo – phalasamāpattatthikena hi ariyasāvakena rahogatena paṭisallīnena udayabbayādivasena saṅkhārā vipassitabbā. Tassa pavattānupubbavipassanassa saṅkhārārammaṇagotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ phalasamāpattivasena nirodhe cittaṃ appeti. Phalasamāpattininnatāya cettha sekkhassāpi phalameva uppajjati, na maggo. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘sotāpanno ‘phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjissāmī’ti vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā sakadāgāmī hoti, sakadāgāmī ca anāgāmī’’ti. Te vattabbā ‘‘evaṃ sati anāgāmī arahā bhavissati, arahā paccekabuddho, paccekabuddho ca buddho’’ti.
因此,此说不实,亦不应仅因其见载于圣典便予以采信。而应采纳的是:即使是有学圣者,也唯生起果心,不生起道心。就其所证之果而言,若证得的是初禅道,则唯生起初禅果;若证得的是第二禅等任一道,则唯生起第二禅等相应之果。如此,便是它的进入方式。显示巴利原文
Tasmā na kiñci etaṃ, pāḷivaseneva ca paṭikkhittantipi na gahetabbaṃ. Idameva pana gahetabbaṃ. Sekkhassāpi phalameva uppajjati, na maggo. Phalañcassa sace anena paṭhamajjhāniko maggo adhigato hoti, paṭhamajjhānikameva uppajjati, sace dutiyādīsu aññatarajjhāniko, dutiyādīsu aññatarajjhānikamevāti evaṃ tāvassā samāpajjanaṃ hoti.
根据“贤友,无相心解脱的安住有三个缘:不作意于一切相,作意于无相界,以及事先的行作”的说法,其安住便依此三种方式。其中,“事先的行作”是指在进入等至之前所作的时间限定。正是由于他限定了“我将于彼时出定”,在那一刻到来之前,它可以一直安住。这即是它的安住方式。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tayo kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā ṭhitiyā sabbanimittānañca amanasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā manasikāro, pubbe ca abhisaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458) vacanato panassā tīhākārehi ṭhānaṃ hoti. Tattha pubbe ca abhisaṅkhāroti samāpattito pubbe kālaparicchedo. ‘‘Asukasmiṃ nāma kāle vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti paricchinnattā hissā yāva so kālo nāgacchati, tāva ṭhānaṃ hoti. Evamassa ṭhānaṃ hoti.
而根据“贤友,从无相心解脱出起有两个缘:作意于一切相,以及不作意于无相界”的说法,它的出起则有这两种方式。这里,“一切相”是指色相、受相、想相、行相、识相。虽非于一时缘取这一切,但这是从总括一切的角度而说的。所以,当他对此作为有分所缘的对象转向作意时,便从果等至中出起。应当这样来理解它的出起方式。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dve kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā vuṭṭhānāya sabbanimittānañca manasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā amanasikāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458) vacanato panassā dvīhākārehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Tattha sabbanimittānanti rūpanimittavedanāsaññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇanimittānaṃ. Kāmañca na sabbānevetāni ekato manasi karoti, sabbasaṅgāhikavasena panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ bhavaṅgassa ārammaṇaṃ hoti, taṃ manasikaroto phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti evamassā vuṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
什么是果的无间?又,什么是以果为无间?对于果本身而言,它的无间或是另一个果,或是有分。然而,果有以道为无间的,有以果为无间的,有以种姓为无间的,也有以非想非非想处为无间的。其中,在道心路中,果以道为无间;前一个果之后的后一个果,则以前一个果为无间;在果等至中,果以前一个种姓为无间,此处的“种姓”应当理解为随顺。正如《发趣论》所说:“阿拉汉的随顺,以无间缘为果等至的缘。有学的随顺,也以无间缘为果等至的缘。”而由那个果出灭尽定的,则以非想非非想处为无间。在此,除了在道心路中生起的果,其余一切果都是依果等至而生起的。以上,即是从道心路或果等至中的生起方式而说的。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ phalassa anantaraṃ, kassa ca phalaṃ anantaranti? Phalassa tāva phalameva vā anantaraṃ hoti bhavaṅgaṃ vā. Phalaṃ pana atthi maggānantaraṃ, atthi phalānantaraṃ, atthi gotrabhuanantaraṃ, atthi nevasaññānāsaññāyatanānantaranti. Tattha maggavīthiyaṃ maggānantaraṃ, purimassa purimassa pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ phalānantaraṃ, phalasamāpattīsu purimaṃ purimaṃ gotrabhuanantaraṃ. Gotrabhūti cettha anulomaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭṭhāne ‘‘arahato anulomaṃ phalasamāpattiyā anantarapaccayena paccayo. Sekkhānaṃ anulomaṃ phalasamāpattiyā anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417). Yena phalena nirodhā vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, taṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanānantaranti. Tattha ṭhapetvā maggavīthiyaṃ uppannaphalaṃ avasesaṃ sabbaṃ phalasamāpattivasena pavattaṃ nāma. Evametaṃ maggavīthiyaṃ vā phalasamāpattiyaṃ vā uppajjanavasena –
止息了热恼,以不死为所缘,清净,
已舍世间诱饵,寂静,最上沙门果。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Paṭippassaddhadarathaṃ, amatārammaṇaṃ subhaṃ; Vantalokāmisaṃ santaṃ, sāmaññaphalamuttama’’nti.
“已审察彼”的意思是:以另一同类的观智审察那行舍。在“以空住”等情形中,对于不欲入果等至、唯愿以观住而住的阿拉汉:他见到对自我的执取是怖畏的,因而倾心于空,于行舍中观见诸行的灭尽,这三种观住即称为“空住”;见到诸行为相是怖畏的,因而倾心于无相,于行舍中观见诸行的灭尽,这三种观住即称为“无相住”;见到渴爱的愿求是怖畏的,因而倾心于无愿,于行舍中观见诸行的灭尽,这三种观住即称为“无愿住”。如同接下来所说:显示巴利原文
Tadajjhupekkhitvāti taṃ saṅkhārupekkhaṃ aññena tādiseneva vipassanāñāṇena ajjhupekkhitvā. Suññatavihārena vātiādīsu phalasamāpattiṃ vinā vipassanāvihāreneva viharitukāmassa arahato attābhinivesaṃ bhayato disvā suññatādhimuttassa saṅkhārupekkhāya vayaṃ passantassa vipassanattayavihāro suññatavihāro nāma, saṅkhāranimittaṃ bhayato disvā animittādhimuttassa saṅkhārupekkhāya vayaṃ passantassa vipassanattayavihāro animittavihāro nāma, taṇhāpaṇidhiṃ bhayato disvā appaṇihitādhimuttassa saṅkhārupekkhāya vayaṃ passantassa vipassanattayavihāro appaṇihitavihāro nāma. Tathā hi parato vuttaṃ –
他正见偏执为怖畏,心倾向于空,触证诸行而观其灭,这是空住。他正见相为怖畏,心倾向于无相,触证诸行而观其灭,这是无相住。他正见愿求为怖畏,心倾向于无愿,触证诸行而观其灭,这是无愿住。显示巴利原文
‘‘Abhinivesaṃ bhayato sampassamāno suññate adhimuttattā phussa phussa vayaṃ passati, suññato vihāro. Nimittaṃ bhayato sampassamāno animitte adhimuttattā phussa phussa vayaṃ passati, animitto vihāro. Paṇidhiṃ bhayato sampassamāno appaṇihite adhimuttattā phussa phussa vayaṃ passati, appaṇihito vihāro’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.78).
正是由于具足了六支舍,也由于安住于对违逆境生起不违逆想等自在,阿拉汉得以完全自在地驾驭其心,因此说此种观住唯阿拉汉方能成就。至于‘离贪者观行舍’等文句,在这里则是指不曾经历三种怖畏,也不生起三种倾向,纯粹只是‘观’而已。如此,前后便有了差别。显示巴利原文
Chaḷaṅgupekkhāsabbhāvena ca paṭikūle appaṭikūlasaññādivihārasabbhāvena ca arahatoyeva sabbākārena cittaṃ vase vattati, tato ayaṃ vipassanāvihāro arahatoyeva ijjhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vītarāgo saṅkhārupekkhaṃ vipassati vāti ettha pana tidhā ca bhayaṃ, tidhā ca adhimuttiṃ anāpajjitvā kevalaṃ vipassanāti veditabbā. Evañhi sati pubbāparaviseso hoti.
56 现在,为了依两种或三种人来展示行舍的单一性与差异性的分别,经中开始说:‘如何于凡夫及有学……’等。其中,‘心的引出成为单一性’即是成为一,应知这是依其自性而说的抽象名词。正如‘此缘性’即是指‘此缘性’本身,同理,‘单一性’也就是单一。或者,‘引出’是属格作主格用,意为‘引出之’;应知如同‘清扫该处后’等例中那样,发生了格的转变。‘心被染污’,是指被称作观喜的贪烦恼所染污,即心被烧灼、被逼迫。‘成为修习的障碍’,是指对已证得的观修造成损害。‘成为通达的障碍’,是指对依观修习所应证得的圣谛通达造成障碍。‘成为未来结生的缘’,意即:由于与行舍相应的业力量强大,当以此业而投生善趣时,那种名为随喜的贪烦恼,便成为未来欲界善趣结生的缘。因为与烦恼俱行的业能产生果报,所以业是令生缘,烦恼是支持缘。对于有学而言,‘更高的通达’,是指以一来道等方式证得圣谛的通达。‘成为未来结生的缘’,则是这样:有学之中,那些未证得禅那的入流者和一来者,当依行舍业投生于欲界善趣时,随喜烦恼便成为结生的缘;然而,对于已证禅那者及不来者,则不是这样。显示巴利原文
56. Idāni dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena saṅkhārupekkhāya ekattanānattabhedaṃ dassetukāmo kathaṃ puthujjanassa ca sekkhassa cātiādimāha. Tattha cittassa abhinīhāro ekattaṃ hotīti eko hoti, sakatthe bhāvavacananti veditabbaṃ. Yathā idappaccayā eva idappaccayatāti vuttaṃ, tathā ekova ekattaṃ. Abhinīhāroti sāmiatthe paccattavacanaṃ vā, abhinīhārassāti attho. ‘‘So deso sammajjitvā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 168) viya vibhattivipallāso katoti veditabbo. Cittaṃ kilissatīti vipassanānikantisaṅkhātena lobhakilesena cittaṃ kilissati, tāpīyati bādhīyatīti attho. Bhāvanāya paripantho hotīti paṭiladdhāya vipassanābhāvanāya upaghāto hoti. Paṭivedhassa antarāyo hotīti vipassanābhāvanāya paṭilabhitabbassa saccappaṭivedhassa paṭilābhantarāyo hoti. Āyatiṃ paṭisandhiyā paccayo hotīti saṅkhārupekkhāsampayuttakammassa balavattā teneva sugatipaṭisandhiyā dīyamānāya atinandanasaṅkhāto lobhakileso anāgate kāmāvacarasugatipaṭisandhiyā paccayo hoti . Yasmā kilesasahāyaṃ kammaṃ vipākaṃ janeti, tasmā kammaṃ janakapaccayo hoti, kileso upatthambhakapaccayo. Sekkhassa pana uttaripaṭivedhassāti sakadāgāmimaggādivasena saccappaṭivedhassa. Āyatiṃ paṭisandhiyā paccayo hotīti sekkhesu sotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃ anadhigatajjhānānaṃ saṅkhārupekkhākammena dīyamānāya kāmāvacarasugatipaṭisandhiyā abhinandanakileso paccayo hoti, jhānalābhīnaṃ pana anāgāmissa ca brahmalokeyeva paṭisandhānato paccayo na hoti, anulomagotrabhūhi ca dīyamānāya paṭisandhiyā ayameva kileso paccayo hotīti veditabbo.
所谓“无常”:因有生之后即归于无,以无常性故,以有始有终故,而观为无常。所谓“苦”:因不断逼迫,以生灭的逼迫故,以是苦的所依故,而观为苦。所谓“无我”:因无法自主,以依因缘而生起故,以无主人、无住者、无作者、无受者故,而观为无我。所谓“随观”之义:即对无常等不断地观察。“引出成为非单一性”:应知即引出种种,或引出各异体性。显示巴利原文
Aniccatoti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccantikatāya ādiantavantatāya ca aniccato. Dukkhatoti abhiṇhaṃ paṭipīḷanaṭṭhena uppādavayapaṭipīḷanatāya dukkhavatthutāya ca dukkhato. Anattatoti avasavattanaṭṭhena paccayāyattavuttitāya sāminivāsīkārakavedakābhāvena ca anattato. Anupassanaṭṭhenāti anu anu aniccādito passanaṭṭhena. Abhinīhāro nānattaṃ hotīti abhinīhāro nānā hotīti vā abhinīhārassa nānābhāvo hotīti vā veditabbaṃ.
所谓“善”:以无病之义、无过失之义、由善巧所生之义,故称为善。“无记”:即不以善或不善来记说。“有时善知”:指在修观时清楚地了知。“有时非善知”:指在随喜时并不清楚地了知。“极善知”:因已断除随喜,所以一向清楚地了知。以“已知及非已知义”而言:在此,凡夫及有学圣者处于善知的状态,即是已知的状态;离贪者处于极善知的状态,同样是已知的状态。凡处于非善知的状态,就是非已知的状态。显示巴利原文
Kusalāti ārogyaṭṭhena anavajjaṭṭhena kosallasambhūtaṭṭhena ca. Abyākatāti kusalākusalabhāvena na byākatā. Kiñcikāle suviditāti vipassanākāle suṭṭhu viditā. Kiñcikāle na suviditāti abhinandanakāle na suṭṭhu viditā. Accantaṃ suviditāti abhinandanāya pahīnattā ekantena suviditā. Viditaṭṭhena ca aviditaṭṭhena cāti ettha puthujjanasekkhānaṃ suviditaṭṭhopi vītarāgassa accantasuviditaṭṭhopi viditaṭṭhova hoti, dvinnampi na suviditaṭṭho aviditaṭṭhova.
所谓“未满足”:是说由于观应作之事尚未究竟,因此是不殊胜的。与此相反,即是“满足”。“为断三种结”:为断除有身见、疑、戒禁取。即使是最后生的菩萨也摄在此中。而非最后生者则将观推进到行舍之后便停住。关于“为得入流道”:若全读,即“为得入流道”;若取简略读法,则更优美。“有学者,以断三种结故”:这是通称入流者、一来者和不还者。一来者和不还者也同样断除了这些结。“为更得上”:为了证得更为上层的道。“为现法安乐住”:即于现前可见的五蕴身中,为了那安乐而住。“以住等至之义”:对于有学者,是指果等至;对于离贪者,是指观住与果等至。显示巴利原文
Atittattāti vipassanāya karaṇīyassa apariyositattā appaṇītabhāvena. Tabbiparītena tittattā. Tiṇṇaṃ saññojanānaṃ pahānāyāti sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsānaṃ pahānatthaṃ. Pacchimabhavikāpi bodhisattā ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Apacchimabhavikā pana vipassanaṃ saṅkhārupekkhaṃ pāpetvā ṭhapenti. Sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭilābhatthāyāti asamāsetvā paṭhanti, samāsetvā pāṭho sundarataro. Sekkho tiṇṇaṃ saññojanānaṃ pahīnattāti sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmīnaṃ sāmaññena vuttaṃ. Sakadāgāmianāgāmīnampi hi tāni pahīnāneva. Uttaripaṭilābhatthāyāti uparūparimaggapaṭilābhatthaṃ. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthāyāti diṭṭheva dhamme paccakkhe attabhāve yo sukho vihāro, tadatthāya. Vihārasamāpattaṭṭhenāti sekkhassa phalasamāpattaṭṭhena, vītarāgassa vipassanāvihāraphalasamāpattaṭṭhena.
57 57. 现在为了说明行舍的数量分际,而提问:“行舍有几种?”等。其中,“依止”是指依于定。或者,这就是原有文句。“于盖中逆思择”:把握五盖为应断除的对象。“安住”:因为心已朝向断除诸盖,对于断除它们亦无特别的加行,处于中舍的状态而安住。所谓“于行舍中”:由于在断盖时不作加行,对于被称为“行”的那些盖法,处于中舍的状态。这个道理对寻、伺等也同样适用。在止中,所谓行舍,是指接近安止道前分、已获得强力的修所成慧。关于为得入流道等,在四道句中,可以获得空、无相、无愿三道中的任意一种。然而,在关于为得入流果等至等的四果句中,应当知道是指无愿果等至。为什么这么说呢?因为“为得空住等至、为得无相住等至”,已经把其余两种果等至单独说了。也就是说,从无常随观出起,即是无相道;在果等至时也一样,是无相果等至。从苦随观出起,是无愿道与果等至。从无我随观出起,是空道与果等至。这应当依经教的理路来理解。显示巴利原文
57. Idāni saṅkhārupekkhānaṃ gaṇanaparicchedaṃ dassetuṃ kati saṅkhārupekkhātiādimāha. Tattha samathavasenāti samādhivasena. Ayameva vā pāṭho. Nīvaraṇe paṭisaṅkhāti pañca nīvaraṇāni pahātabbabhāvena pariggahetvā. Santiṭṭhanāti nīvaraṇānaṃ pahānābhimukhībhūtattā tesaṃ pahānepi abyāpārabhāvūpagamanena majjhattatāya santiṭṭhanā. Saṅkhārupekkhāsūti nīvaraṇappahāne byāpārākaraṇena nīvaraṇasaṅkhātānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ upekkhanāsu. Esa nayo vitakkavicārādīsu ca. Samathe saṅkhārupekkhā nāma appanāvīthiyā āsannapubbabhāge balappattabhāvanāmayañāṇaṃ. Sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭilābhatthāyātiādīsu catūsu maggavāresu suññatānimittaappaṇihitamaggānaṃ aññataraññataro maggo labbhati. Sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāyātiādīsu catūsu phalavāresu pana appaṇihitā phalasamāpatti veditabbā. Kasmā? ‘‘Suññatavihārasamāpattatthāya animittavihārasamāpattatthāyā’’ti itarāsaṃ dvinnaṃ phalasamāpattīnaṃ visuṃ vuttattā. Aniccānupassanāvuṭṭhānavasena hi animittamaggo, tatheva phalasamāpattikāle animittaphalasamāpatti, dukkhānupassanāvuṭṭhānavasena appaṇihitamaggaphalasamāpattiyo, anattānupassanāvuṭṭhānavasena suññatamaggaphalasamāpattiyo suttantanayeneva veditabbā.
在此,于四道句中,说到了“生”等五根本句,以及“去”等十同义词句,共宣说了十五句。而在六种果等至句中,仅宣说了五根本句。这是什么原因呢?因为若行舍具有猛利的状态,则能断烦恼的道便会生起;为了显示行舍的猛利,故而连同同义词句一起,将根本句牢固地建立起来。而果本身不起加行,体性寂静,依属于道,因此即使行舍较为柔和,也同样能成为果的缘;为了显示这一意义,便只宣说了根本句。应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca catūsu maggavāresu uppādantiādīni pañca mūlapadāni, gatintiādīni dasa vevacanapadānīti pannarasa padāni vuttāni. Chasu pana phalasamāpattivāresu pañca mūlapadāneva vuttāni. Taṃ kasmā iti ce? Saṅkhārupekkhāya tikkhabhāve sati kilesappahāne samatthassa maggassa sambhavato tassā tikkhabhāvadassanatthaṃ vevacanapadehi saha daḷhaṃ katvā mūlapadāni vuttāni. Phalassa nirussāhabhāvena santasabhāvattā maggāyattattā ca mandabhūtāpi saṅkhārupekkhā phalassa paccayo hotīti dassanatthaṃ mūlapadāneva vuttānīti veditabbāni.
58 58. 现在,为了依类别提问、依可得的方式解答,而说起“善行舍有几种”等。其中,“十五种行舍”:依止而得的有八种,依四道和三果而得的有七种,合为十五种。依止而得的八种行舍,对于阿拉汉而言,由于不再有对盖的逆思择,也由于断除寻、伺等不再需要特别加行,轻而易举便能断除,因此与“行舍”这一名称并不相应。所以,那些行舍并未被说为无记。应当这样了解。然而,阿拉汉若想入果等至,没有行舍则无法进入,故而又说“三种无记行舍”,即阿拉汉依无愿、空、无相而有的三种行舍。显示巴利原文
58. Idāni jātivasena pucchitvā labbhamānavasena vissajjetuṃ kati saṅkhārupekkhā kusalātiādimāha. Tattha pannarasa saṅkhārupekkhāti samathavasena aṭṭha, catunnaṃ maggānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ phalānaṃ vasena sattāti pannarasa. Samathavasena aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā arahato nīvaraṇapaṭisaṅkhāabhāvato, vitakkavicārādīnaṃ pahānabyāpāraṃ vinā sukhena pahānato ca saṅkhārupekkhānāmassa ananurūpāti katvā tāsaṃ abyākatatā na vuttāti veditabbā. Arahatā pana phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjantena saṅkhārupekkhaṃ vinā samāpajjituṃ na sakkāti tisso saṅkhārupekkhā abyākatāti vuttā. Appaṇihitasuññatānimittavasena hi arahato tisso saṅkhārupekkhā.
如今,在以解说行舍的方式所说的三首偈颂中,「审察安住慧」即指行舍。「八是心行境」:依于止而说的八种行舍,是定之领域,即定地,这是其含义。正如在「应修心与慧」等句中,以心代指定;以及在「诸比丘,应于行境,即自家父祖之境而行」等句中,以「行境」一词代指领域。凡某法所依存之处,彼处即为该法之领域。「凡夫有二」:即依于止与观,有两种。「有学有三」:即依止、观与等至,有三种。「离贪者亦有三」:即依无愿、空、无相之果等至,有三种。本应作阴性词‘tisso’,此处作阳性词‘tayo’,乃语法性之倒错;或可将其理解为‘三种行舍法’。「以此心离转」:因他们行舍法,心从寻、伺等中,或从生起等中离转。由于离贪者亦有行舍,故亦可说:心从诸行离转,而趣入涅槃。「八是定之缘」:依于止而说的八种行舍,因能引生安止,故为安止定之缘。「十是智行境」:依于观而说的十种行舍,为道智与果智之所依地。「是三解脱缘」:他们为空、无相、无愿解脱之亲依止缘。「于诸异见不动摇」:不舍坏灭,以无常等角度而观时,于诸异见不动摇。显示巴利原文
Idāni saṅkhārupekkhānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāvasena vuttāsu tīsu gāthāsu paṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanā paññāti saṅkhārupekkhā . Aṭṭha cittassa gocarāti samathavasena vuttā aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samādhissa visayā, bhūmiyoti attho. ‘‘Cittaṃ paññañca bhāvaya’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.23, 192) viya cittasīsena samādhi niddiṭṭho, ‘‘gocare, bhikkhave, caratha sake pettike visaye’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.372) viya gocarasaddena visayo. Yañhi yadāyattaṃ, tasseso visayoti vuccati. Puthujjanassa dveti samathavasena vipassanāvasena ca. Tayosekkhassāti samathavipassanāsamāpattivasena. Tayo ca vītarāgassāti appaṇihitasuññatānimittaphalasamāpattivasena. ‘‘Tisso’’ti vattabbe ‘‘tayo’’ti ca liṅgavipallāso kato. Tayo saṅkhārupekkhā dhammāti vā yojetabbaṃ. Yehi cittaṃ vivaṭṭatīti yehi saṅkhārupekkhādhammehi vitakkavicārādito, uppādādito vā cittaṃ apagacchati. Vītarāgassāpi hi saṅkhārupekkhāsabbhāvato ca saṅkhārato cittaṃ vivaṭṭitvā nibbānaṃ pakkhandatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Aṭṭha samādhissa paccayāti samathavasena vuttā aṭṭha appanāsampāpakattā appanāsamādhissa paccayā. Dasa ñāṇassa gocarāti vipassanāvasena vuttā dasa maggañāṇassa phalañāṇassa ca bhūmiyo. Tiṇṇaṃ vimokkhāna paccayāti suññatānimittaappaṇihitavimokkhānaṃ upanissayapaccayā. Nānādiṭṭhīsu na kampatīti bhaṅgaṃ avissajjitvāva saṅkhāre aniccādivasena vipassanto sassatadiṭṭhiādīsu nānappakārāsu diṭṭhīsu na vedhatīti.
10. 种姓智解说之注释显示巴利原文
10. Gotrabhuñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
59 59. 于种姓智解说中,「被胜伏」即被制伏、被超越。「外诸行相」:指相对于自身相续中生起的不善蕴而言,属于外在的诸行相。因世间诸行是烦恼之相,或以相状而显现,故称为「相」。因胜伏了(凡夫种姓),故说「被胜伏」而名为「种姓」;因修习圣种姓,故说「跃进」而名为「种姓」;说「胜伏已并跃进」而名为「种姓」,则是将这两层含义结合起来解释称为种姓。至于说「出起」而名为种姓,以及说「离转」而名为种姓,这是配合根本论母中「出起」「离转」的文句,仅表达了胜伏凡夫种姓这一含义。然而,在依止于奢摩他而说的种姓中,因胜伏了盖等种姓,故称为种姓;在「为证入预流果等至」等六种等至句中,因胜伏了生起等种姓,故称为种姓;在「为证得一来道」等三种道句中,因胜伏了预流者等种姓,故称为种姓──应如此理解。显示巴利原文
59. Gotrabhuñāṇaniddese abhibhuyyatīti abhibhavati atikkamati. Bahiddhā saṅkhāranimittanti sakasantānappavattaakusalakkhandhato bahiddhābhūtaṃ saṅkhāranimittaṃ. Lokikasaṅkhārā hi kilesānaṃ nimittattā, nimittākārena upaṭṭhānato vā nimittanti vuccanti. Abhibhuyyatīti gotrabhūti ca puthujjanagottābhibhavanato gotrabhubhāvo vutto. Pakkhandatīti gotrabhūti ariyagottabhāvanato gotrabhubhāvo vutto. Abhibhuyyitvā pakkhandatīti gotrabhūti ubho atthe samāsetvā vuttaṃ. Vuṭṭhātīti gotrabhūti ca vivaṭṭatīti gotrabhūti ca mātikāya vuṭṭhānavivaṭṭanapadānurūpena puthujjanagottābhibhavanatthoyeva vutto. Samathavasena vuttagotrabhūnaṃ pana nīvaraṇādigottābhibhavanato gotrabhūti, ‘‘sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāyā’’tiādīsu chasu samāpattivāresu uppādādigottābhibhavanato gotrabhūti, ‘‘sakadāgāmimaggaṃ paṭilābhatthāyā’’tiādīsu tīsu maggavāresu sotāpannādigottābhibhavanato gotrabhūti attho veditabbo. Gottattho cettha bījattho. Vattanipakaraṇe kira vuttaṃ – gottaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ sabbaparipanthehi guttattā, taṃ paṭipajjatīti gotrabhūti, aṭṭha samāpattiyopi gottaṃ gotrabhuparipanthehi guttattā, taṃ gottaṃ paṭipajjatīti gotrabhūti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Catunnaṃ maggānaṃyeva gotrabhu nibbānārammaṇaṃ, catassannaṃ phalasamāpattīnaṃ gotrabhu saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattininnattā’’ti vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ visuddhimagge – ‘‘tassa pavattānupubbavipassanassa saṅkhārārammaṇagotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ phalasamāpattivasena nirodhe cittaṃ appetī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.863). Tenevettha maggavāresu soḷasamaṃ katvā gahitassa bahiddhāsaṅkhāranimittapadassa samāpattivāresu chaṭṭhaṃ katvā gahaṇaṃ na katanti veditabbaṃ. Itarathā hi mūlapadagahaṇena gahetabbaṃ bhaveyya.
另有一些人说:「最初将心转向涅槃、最初作意涅槃的,即称为种姓。」但从果的角度看,这一说法并不恰当。应知,在「十五种姓法是善」等论述中,阿罗汉因没有被应胜伏的盖,且寻、伺等也容易断除,故从「胜伏」这一意义上说,不称为种姓;又因种姓为无记,所以未说其为无记。然而,阿罗汉进入果等至时,若不胜伏诸行便无法进入,因此而有「三种种姓法是无记」之说。又有人说:「此处只是将属于顺决择分的八种等至列出,所以这八种等至的种姓是善的。」对于行舍智,也当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Aññe pana ‘‘yo nibbāne paṭhamābhogo paṭhamasamannāhāro, ayaṃ vuccati gotrabhū’’ti vadanti. Taṃ phalaṃ sandhāya na yujjati. Pannarasa gotrabhudhammā kusalāti ettha arahato abhibhavitabbanīvaraṇābhāvato vitakkavicārādīnaṃ sukheneva pahātabbabhāvato ca abhibhavanaṭṭhena gotrabhunāmaṃ nārahantīti katvā gotrabhūnaṃ abyākatatā na vuttāti veditabbā. Arahatā pana phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjantena saṅkhāre anabhibhuyya samāpajjituṃ na sakkāti ‘‘tayo gotrabhudhammā abyākatā’’ti vuttā. Keci pana ‘‘aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbedhabhāgiyā eva idha niddiṭṭhā, tasmā aṭṭha samāpattigotrabhū kusalā hontī’’ti vadanti. Tathā saṅkhārupekkhāyapi veditabbaṃ.
60 60. 就「有食」(sāmisa)等而言:因以烦恼为食而成为有食,即具有可悦可染的特性。哪一种是呢?即八种止的种姓智。这里所说的「轮回食」即三地轮回,「世间食」即五种欲功德,「烦恼食」即烦恼本身。「无食」(nirāmisa)则指十种观的种姓智,因为不具可悦可染的特性。圣者们确实不会对种姓生起爱染。有些写本作「sāmisañce」,这样并不太好。同样,对于「有愿」(paṇihita)与「无愿」(appaṇihita)、「有结缚」(saññutta)与「无结缚」(visaññutta)、「出起」(vuṭṭhita)与「未出起」(avuṭṭhita)这几组,也应当这样理解。因有染爱之愿而称为「有愿」,意即有所希求;因无此愿而称为「无愿」。因与染爱相连结而称为「有结缚」;因无此连结而称为「无结缚」。「出起」是指观的种姓智,它能切断染爱,故称为「出起」;其余止的种姓智则是「未出起」。或者,因为是从外诸行相中出起,所以称为「出起」。也就是说,果……显示巴利原文
60.Sāmisañcātiādīsu vaṭṭāmisalokāmisakilesāmisānaṃ kilesāmisena sāmisaṃ sanikantikattā. Kiṃ taṃ? Aṭṭhavidhaṃ samathagotrabhuñāṇaṃ. Vaṭṭāmisanti cettha tebhūmakavaṭṭameva. Lokāmisanti pañca kāmaguṇā. Kilesāmisanti kilesā eva. Nirāmisanti dasavidhaṃ vipassanāgotrabhuñāṇaṃ anikantikattā. Na hi ariyā gotrabhusmiṃ nikantiṃ karonti. Potthake ‘‘sāmisañce’’ti likhanti, taṃ na sundarataraṃ. Evameva paṇihitañca appaṇihitaṃ saññuttañca visaññuttaṃ vuṭṭhitañca avuṭṭhitaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nikantipaṇidhiyā hi paṇihitaṃ patthitanti attho. Tadabhāvena appaṇihitaṃ. Nikantisaññogeneva saññuttaṃ. Tadabhāvena visaññuttaṃ. Vuṭṭhitanti vipassanāgotrabhuñāṇameva. Tañhi nikanticchedakattā vuṭṭhitaṃ nāma. Itaraṃ avuṭṭhitaṃ. Bahiddhā vuṭṭhānattā vā vuṭṭhitaṃ. Phalagotrabhupi hi nibbānajjhāsayavasena nibbānābhimukhībhūtattā bahiddhāsaṅkhāranimittā vuṭṭhitaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Heṭṭhābhibhavanavuṭṭhānavivaṭṭanavāresupi phalagotrabhu ajjhāsayavasena nibbānābhimukhībhūtattā abhibhuyyati vuṭṭhāti vivaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ vimokkhāna paccayāti tiṇṇaṃ lokuttaravimokkhānaṃ samathagotrabhu pakatūpanissayapaccayā honti, vipassanāgotrabhu anantarasamanantarūpanissayapaccayā honti. Paññā yassa pariccitāti pubbabhāgapaññā yassa paricitā pariciṇṇā. Kusalo vivaṭṭe vuṭṭhāneti asammohavaseneva vivaṭṭasaṅkhāte gotrabhuñāṇe kusalo cheko, pubbabhāgañāṇena vā kusalo. Nānādiṭṭhīsu na kampatīti samucchedena pahīnāsu nānappakārāsu diṭṭhīsu na vedhatīti.
11. 道智解说之注释显示巴利原文
11. Maggañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
61 在“道智解说”中,“从邪见出起”指:通过断除邪见随眠,以彻底断除的方式,从六十二类的邪见中出起。“以及从随顺彼的烦恼”指:从那些与邪见相应、以邪见为依止而生起的、随顺于邪见的种种烦恼中出起。由此便说明了与彼邪见同处的烦恼亦被断除。同处有二种:俱生同处与断除同处。与彼邪见于同一心中,或于同一补特伽罗中持续存在直至被断除者,即属同处。当邪见被断除时,于两个无行心中与彼邪见俱生的贪、痴、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,以及于两个有行心中与彼邪见俱生的贪、痴、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,便以俱生同处的方式被断除。而当邪见烦恼本身被断除时,与它共存于同一补特伽罗之中、能导致堕入恶趣的贪、嗔、痴、慢、疑、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,便以断除同处的方式被断除。“从蕴”指:从那些随顺的蕴——即随顺于彼邪见而转的、以俱生同处与断除同处的方式存在的四种非色蕴,或是与此邪见等共生之色法合在一起的五蕴,以及从以邪见等烦恼为缘,于未来当生的异熟蕴中出起。“以及从外一切行相”指:从如上所述烦恼与蕴之外的一切存在形态中出起。显示巴利原文
61. Maggañāṇaniddese micchādiṭṭhiyā vuṭṭhātīti diṭṭhānusayappahānena samucchedavasena dvāsaṭṭhibhedato micchādiṭṭhito vuṭṭhāti. Tadanuvattakakilesehīti micchādiṭṭhisampayogavasena ca micchādiṭṭhiupanissayena ca uppajjamānehi micchādiṭṭhianuvattamānehi nānāvidhehi kilesehi. Tena tadekaṭṭhakilesappahānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Duvidhañhi ekaṭṭhaṃ sahajekaṭṭhaṃ pahānekaṭṭhañca. Tāya diṭṭhiyā saha ekasmiṃ citte, ekasmiṃ puggale vā yāva pahānā ṭhitāti tadekaṭṭhā. Diṭṭhiyā hi pahīyamānāya diṭṭhisampayuttesu dvīsu asaṅkhārikacittesu tāya diṭṭhiyā sahajātā lobho moho uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā, dvīsu sasaṅkhārikacittesu tāya diṭṭhiyā sahajātā lobho moho thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Diṭṭhikileseyeva pahīyamāne tena saha ekasmiṃ puggale ṭhitā apāyagamanīyā lobho doso moho māno vicikicchā thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā pahānekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Khandhehīti tadanuvattakeheva khandhehi, taṃ diṭṭhiṃ anuvattamānehi sahajekaṭṭhehi ca pahānekaṭṭhehi ca catūhi arūpakkhandhehi, taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpehi vā saha pañcahi khandhehi micchādiṭṭhiādikilesapaccayā anāgate uppajjitabbehi vipākakkhandhehi. Bahiddhā ca sabbanimittehīti yathāvuttakilesakkhandhato bahibhūtehi sabbasaṅkhāranimittehi. Micchāsaṅkappā vuṭṭhātīti sotāpattimaggena pahātabbesu catūsu diṭṭhisampayuttesu, vicikicchāsahagate cāti pañcasu cittesu apāyagamanīyasesākusalacittesu ca micchāsaṅkappā vuṭṭhāti.
“从邪语出起”指:从妄语,以及从可导致堕入恶趣的离间语、粗恶语和杂秽语中出起。“从邪业出起”指:从杀生、不与取和邪行中出起。“从邪命出起”指:从诡诈、谄媚、占相、强取,以及以利求利——即从以邪命为因的七种身业和语业中出起。从邪精进、邪念、邪定中出起的道理,应参照从邪思惟中出起的道理来理解。此处所说的“邪念”,不过是针对正念而安立的一个不善心所而已。在更高的三道中,“由于见义而为正见”等八支圣道,如同在初禅和初道中所获得的那样,同样可以获得。其中,在初道中,正见因能断除邪见故,得名正见;正思惟等也应以断除邪思惟等的道理来理解。既然如此,因为初道已断除了六十二种恶见,所以在更高的三道中,便再也没有什么见需要断除了。显示巴利原文
Micchāvācāya vuṭṭhātīti musāvādato ceva apāyagamanīyapisuṇapharusasamphappalāpehi ca vuṭṭhāti . Micchākammantā vuṭṭhātīti pāṇātipātādinnādānamicchācārehi vuṭṭhāti. Micchāājīvāvuṭṭhātīti kuhanā lapanā nemittikatā nippesikatā lābhenalābhaṃnijigīsanatā, ājīvahetukehi vā sattahipi kāyavacīkammehi vuṭṭhāti. Micchāvāyāmamicchāsatimicchāsamādhīhi vuṭṭhānaṃ micchāsaṅkappavuṭṭhāne vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Micchāsatīti ca satiyā paṭipakkhākārena uppajjamānā akusalacittuppādamattameva. Uparimaggattaye ‘‘dassanaṭṭhena sammādiṭṭhī’’tiādīni aṭṭha maggaṅgāni yathā paṭhamajjhānike paṭhamamagge labbhanti, tatheva labbhanti. Tattha paṭhamamagge sammādiṭṭhi micchādiṭṭhiṃ pajahatīti sammādiṭṭhi. Sammāsaṅkappādayopi micchāsaṅkappādīnaṃ pajahanaṭṭheneva veditabbā. Evaṃ sante paṭhamamaggeneva dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahīnattā uparimaggattayena pahātabbā diṭṭhi nāma natthi.
那么,“正见”之名是如何安立的呢?犹如解毒药,不论毒存在与否,它都称作“解毒药”;同样,不论邪见存在与否,这个就称作“正见”。若如此,则正见仅成徒有虚名,而在更高的三道中,正见的作用便不存在,道支也就不圆满了。因此,正见应有其自身的作用,道支亦应圆满。于此,正见发挥其作用,当依其证得之理来解说。因为上三道所对治的一个“慢”,它占据了见的位置,正见能断除那个慢,故称为“正见”。在入流道中,正见断除邪见。对于入流者,则有被一来道所断的慢,正见断除那个慢,故称为正见。同样地,他有与七种不善心俱生的思惟,有与那些心一同生起的语表躁动、身表躁动、资具受用、俱生精进、失念、俱生心一境性,这些即称为“邪思惟”等。在一来道中,正思惟等通过断除它们而成为正思惟等,应如此理解。由此,在一来道中,八支圣道皆各自发挥作用。对于一来者,则有被不来道所断的慢,它占据了见的位置。同样地,他有与七种心俱生的思惟等。通过断除它们,在不来道中,这八支圣道皆有其各自的作用,应当了知。对于不来者,则有……显示巴利原文
Tattha sammādiṭṭhīti nāmaṃ kathaṃ hotīti? Yathā visaṃ atthi vā hotu mā vā, agado agadotveva vuccati, evaṃ micchādiṭṭhi atthi vā hotu mā vā, ayaṃ sammādiṭṭhi eva nāma. Yadi evaṃ nāmamattamevetaṃ hoti, uparimaggattaye pana sammādiṭṭhiyā kiccābhāvo āpajjati, maggaṅgāni na paripūrenti. Tasmā sammādiṭṭhi sakiccakā kātabbā, maggaṅgāni paripūretabbānīti. Sakiccakā cettha sammādiṭṭhi yathālābhaniyamena dīpetabbā. Uparimaggattayavajjho hi eko māno atthi, so diṭṭhiṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati, sā taṃ mānaṃ pajahatīti sammādiṭṭhi. Sotāpattimaggasmiñhi sammādiṭṭhi micchādiṭṭhiṃ pajahati. Sotāpannassa pana sakadāgāmimaggavajjho māno atthi, taṃ mānaṃ pajahatīti sammādiṭṭhi. Tasseva sattaakusalacittasahajāto saṅkappo atthi, teheva cittehi vācaṅgacopanaṃ atthi, kāyaṅgacopanaṃ atthi, paccayaparibhogo atthi, sahajātavāyāmo atthi, assatiyabhāvo atthi, sahajātacittekaggatā atthi, ete micchāsaṅkappādayo nāma. Sakadāgāmimagge sammāsaṅkappādayo tesaṃ pahānena sammāsaṅkappādayoti veditabbā. Evaṃ sakadāgāmimagge aṭṭhaṅgāni sakiccakāni honti. Sakadāgāmissa anāgāmimaggavajjho māno atthi, so diṭṭhiṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Tasseva sattahi cittehi sahajātā saṅkappādayo atthi. Tesaṃ pahānena anāgāmimagge aṭṭhannaṃ aṅgānaṃ sakiccakatā veditabbā. Anāgāmissa arahattamaggavajjho māno atthi, so diṭṭhiṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Yāni panassa pañca akusalacittāni, tehi sahajātā saṅkappādayo atthi. Tesaṃ pahānena arahattamagge aṭṭhannaṃ aṅgānaṃ sakiccakatā veditabbā.
「粗」:指作为身门与语门违犯的缘而变得粗大。「欲贪结」:即名为淫欲贪的结。因为它能系缚于欲有,故称为结。「嗔结」:即嗔恚结。因为它对所缘生起嗔恚,故称为嗔。这些烦恼以强力之义在相续中随眠,故称「随眠」。「细俱行」:指细小,即微细。此处「俱行」一词是表示在那个状态中存在。对于一来者,欲贪与嗔恚由于两个原因而变得微细:一是不常生起,二是现行时极其微弱。因为他的烦恼不像凡夫那样频繁生起,只是偶尔生起;即使生起,也不像凡夫那样以摧压、遍满、覆盖、令人盲目的方式现行,而是由于已被两道断除,变得极弱极细,以微薄的行相现行,不能导致犯戒的行为。这样微薄的烦恼,被不还道所断除。「色贪」:指对色有的爱染贪。「无色贪」:指对无色有的爱染贪。「慢」:以高举行相为特征。「掉举」:以不寂静行相为特征。「无明」:以愚痴行相为特征。「有贪随眠」:即以色贪及无色贪而转起的有贪随眠。显示巴利原文
Oḷārikāti kāyavacīdvāre vītikkamassa paccayabhāvena thūlabhūtamhā. Kāmarāgasaññojanāti methunarāgasaṅkhātā saññojanā. So hi kāmabhave saññojetīti saññojananti vuccati. Paṭighasaññojanāti byāpādasaññojanā. So hi ārammaṇe paṭihaññatīti paṭighanti vuccati. Te eva thāmagataṭṭhena santāne anusentīti anusayā. Aṇusahagatāti aṇubhūtā, sukhumabhūtāti attho. Tabbhāve hi ettha sahagatasaddo. Sakadāgāmissa hi kāmarāgabyāpādā dvīhi kāraṇehi aṇubhūtā adhiccuppattiyā ca pariyuṭṭhānamandatāya ca. Tassa hi bālaputhujjanassa viya kilesā abhiṇhaṃ na uppajjanti, kadāci karahaci uppajjanti. Uppajjamānā ca bālaputhujjanassa viya maddantā pharantā chādentā andhaandhaṃ karontā na uppajjanti, dvīhi pana maggehi pahīnattā mandamandā tanukākārā hutvā uppajjanti, vītikkamaṃ pāpetuṃ samatthā na honti. Evaṃ tanubhūtā anāgāmimaggena pahīyanti rūparāgāti rūpabhave chandarāgā. Arūparāgāti arūpabhave chandarāgā. Mānāti unnatilakkhaṇā. Uddhaccāti avūpasamalakkhaṇā. Avijjāyāti andhalakkhaṇāya. Bhavarāgānusayāti rūparāgārūparāgavasena pavattabhavarāgānusayā.
62 「不生者被烧燃」等:这是说,由已生起的出世间禅那,将那未生起的烦恼烧燃;因此该禅那被称为「烧燃不生者」。即,以自相续中显现的种种出世间禅那,具足彼禅那的人将本未生起的种种烦恼烧燃、焚毁、断除;以此因缘,此出世间法称为「禅那」。「于禅那、解脱而善巧」:指对于与圣道相应的寻、伺等禅那,以及对于称为解脱的圣道,以无迷惑的方式善巧;对于在初道便已断除的种种邪见,亦不动摇。禅那有两种:所缘现观与特相现观。世间的初禅等,以缘取遍相等所缘而现观,故称禅那;观对诸行以共相与特相而现观,故称禅那;出世间的道以涅槃的真实特相而现观,故称禅那。但这里并非取与种姓地共的特相现观义,而是取其不共的烧烦恼义而说「禅那」。而此处的「解脱」,是指于涅槃所缘极善信解、从烦恼极善解脱的意思。显示巴利原文
62. Idāni maggañāṇasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ karonto ajātaṃ jhāpetītiādimāha. Tattha ca ajātaṃ jhāpeti jātena, jhānaṃ tena pavuccatīti attano santāne pātubhūtena tena tena lokuttarajjhānena taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo ajātameva taṃ taṃ kilesaṃ jhāpeti dahati samucchindati, tena kāraṇena taṃ lokuttaraṃ jhānanti pavuccatīti attho. Jhānavimokkhe kusalatāti tasmiṃ ariyamaggasampayutte vitakkādike jhāne ca vimokkhasaṅkhāte ariyamagge ca asammohavasena kusalatāya paṭhamamaggeneva pahīnāsu nānādiṭṭhīsu na kampati. Jhānaṃ nāma duvidhaṃ ārammaṇūpanijjhānañca lakkhaṇūpanijjhānañca. Lokiyapaṭhamajjhānādikaṃ kasiṇādiārammaṇūpanijjhānaṭṭhena jhānaṃ, vipassanāsaṅkhārānaṃ sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṭṭhena jhānaṃ, lokuttaraṃ nibbāne tathalakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṭṭhena jhānaṃ. Idha pana gotrabhunāpi sādhāraṇaṃ lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṭṭhaṃ anāmasitvā asādhāraṇena kilesajhāpanaṭṭhena jhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Vimokkhaṭṭho panettha nibbānārammaṇe suṭṭhu adhimuccanaṭṭho kilesehi ca suṭṭhu muccanaṭṭho.
「如已令安止而观者」等:意思是用近行定、安止定、刹那定中的某一种定,先让心安定下来,之后再如实地观察。“而”字将观也包含在内。正在观的时候,也应当令心安止:因为这种观是粗糙的、没有滋味的;止则是柔软的、有滋味的。因此,为了滋润那粗糙的心,正在观的时候又要让心进入安止。观察者再进入定,应当照样让心安住,正如同观察一样。这里的“而”字把安止也包含在内。这两处都是用“而”字来凑足偈颂,而意思就是“与”的意思。「观与止,于彼时为有」:因为当止观双运时,圣道才会出现,所以在能产生圣道的时候,也就是止观结合的时候,那时就有观和止,这叫作“有止观”。那些止观在趋向圣道的时刻和在道刹那,是「同分」、是「双运」而转的:「同分」是指它们有相同分量的部分,即同分;「双运」就像在轭中连接在一起,两者互不超越,是等力、均势的意思。详情将在双运论里阐发。显示巴利原文
Samādahitvā yathā ce vipassatīti appanūpacārakhaṇikasamādhīnaṃ aññatarena samādhinā paṭhamaṃ cittasamādhānaṃ katvā pacchā yathā vipassati ca. Samuccayattho ce-saddo vipassanaṃ samuccinoti. Vipassamāno tathā ce samādaheti vipassanā nāmesā lūkhabhūtā nirassādā, samatho ca nāma siniddhabhūto saassādo. Tasmā tāya lūkhabhūtaṃ cittaṃ sinehetuṃ vipassamāno tathā ca samādahe. Vipassamāno puna samādhiṃ pavisitvā cittasamādhānañca tatheva kareyya, yatheva vipassananti attho. Idha ce-saddo samādahanaṃ samuccinoti. Ubhayatthāpi gāthābandhānuvattanena ce-kāro kato, attho pana ca-kārattho eva. Vipassanā ca samatho tadā ahūti yasmā samathavipassanānaṃ yuganaddhabhāve sati ariyamaggapātubhāvo hoti, tasmā ariyamaggajananasamatthattā yadā tadubhayasamāyogo hoti, tadā vipassanā ca samatho ca ahu, samathavipassanā bhūtā nāma hotīti attho. Tā ca samathavipassanā ariyamaggābhimukhīkāle ca maggakkhaṇe ca samānabhāgā yuganaddhā vattare samāno samo bhāgo koṭṭhāso etesanti samānabhāgā, yuge naddhā viyāti yuganaddhā, aññamaññaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena samadhurā samabalāti attho. Vitthāro panassa yuganaddhakathāyaṃ āvibhavissati.
「诸行是苦,寂灭是乐」:这是见。从两边出起的慧,触证不死之句。对于修行「诸行是苦,寂灭(即涅槃)是乐」的人,由此修行而见到涅槃的圣道智,即称为「从两边出起的慧」。此慧通过以涅槃为所缘而触证不死之句,意为获得。因为涅槃以无热恼故犹如不死,所以称为「不死」;又因它没有死亡、没有老灭,故也称「不死」。它从前行阶段开始,以巨大的精勤、伟大的行道而被修习,故称为「句」。显示巴利原文
Dukkhā saṅkhārā sukho, nirodho iti dassanaṃ. Dubhato vuṭṭhitāpaññā, phasseti amataṃpadanti dukkhā saṅkhārā, sukho nirodho nibbānanti paṭipannassa tato nibbānadassanaṃ ariyamaggañāṇaṃ dubhato vuṭṭhitā paññā nāma. Sā eva ca paññā amataṃ padaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaphusanena phusati, paṭilabhatīti attho. Nibbānañhi atappakaṭṭhena amatasadisanti amataṃ, nāssa mataṃ maraṇaṃ vayo atthītipi amataṃ, pubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya mahatā ussāhena mahatiyā paṭipadāya pajjati paṭipajjīyatīti padanti vuccati.
「知道解脱行」:即通过不痴而了知解脱的运作方式,通过省察而了知。因为在后面的解脱论(《无碍解道》1.209等)中说:「两边出起的解脱、四个两边出起的解脱、四个随顺两边出起的解脱、四个两边出起止息的解脱」——应当知道这些就是解脱行,详细内容即在彼处。「善巧于种种与单一」:即对于这些解脱的种种状态和单一状态善巧。因为依两边出起的解脱而有单一,依四圣道而有种种;或者,每一圣道依随观的不同而有种种,依圣道体性而有单一,应如此理解。「二智的善巧」:即对于这两种智——称为「见」的智与称为「修」的智——的善巧。所谓「见」,是指入流道。因为此道最先见到涅槃,故称为「见」。种姓心虽更早见到涅槃,但犹如有人因事来到国王处,远远看见国王乘着象肩在街上行,当被问“你见到国王了吗?”时,却因应办之事尚未完成而说“我没看见”;同样,种姓心虽见到涅槃,但因未做应断烦恼之事,故不称为「见」——因为此智处在转向道的位置。「修」则指其余三道。因为这些道是在第一道已见的同一法上,依修习而次第生起。显示巴利原文
Vimokkhacariyaṃ jānātīti vimokkhapavattiṃ asammohavasena jānāti, paccavekkhaṇavasena jānāti. ‘‘Dubhato vuṭṭhāno vimokkho, dubhato vuṭṭhānā cattāro vimokkhā, dubhato vuṭṭhānānaṃ anulomā cattāro vimokkhā, dubhato vuṭṭhānapaṭippassaddhi cattāro vimokkhā’’ti hi upari vimokkhakathāyaṃyeva (paṭi. ma. 1.209 ādayo) āgatā vimokkhacariyā veditabbā. Tesaṃ vitthāro tattheva āgato. Nānattekattakovidoti tesaṃ vimokkhānaṃ nānābhāve ekabhāve ca kusalo. Dubhato vuṭṭhānavimokkhavasena hi tesaṃ ekattaṃ, catuariyamaggavasena nānattaṃ, ekekassāpi vā ariyamaggassa anupassanābhedena nānattaṃ, ariyamaggabhāvena ekattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kusalatāti dassanasaṅkhātassa ca bhāvanāsaṅkhātassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kusalatāya. Dassananti hi sotāpattimaggo. So hi paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato dassananti vutto. Gotrabhu pana kiñcāpi paṭhamataraṃ nibbānaṃ passati, yathā pana rañño santikaṃ kenacideva karaṇīyena āgato puriso dūratova rathikāya carantaṃ hatthikkhandhagataṃ rājānaṃ disvāpi ‘‘diṭṭho te rājā’’ti puṭṭho disvā kattabbakiccassa akatattā ‘‘na passāmī’’ti āha, evameva nibbānaṃ disvā kattabbassa kilesappahānassābhāvā na ‘‘dassana’’nti vuccati. Tañhi ñāṇaṃ maggassa āvajjanaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Bhāvanāti sesamaggattayaṃ. Tañhi paṭhamamaggena diṭṭhasmiṃyeva dhamme bhāvanāvasena uppajjati, na adiṭṭhapubbaṃ kiñci passati, tasmā ‘‘bhāvanā’’ti vuccati. Heṭṭhā pana bhāvanāmaggassa apariniṭṭhitattā ‘‘dvinnaṃ ñāṇāna’’nti avatvā sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmimaggalābhino sandhāya ‘‘jhānavimokkhe kusalatā’’ti vuttaṃ, arahattamaggalābhino pana bhāvanāmaggassa pariniṭṭhitattā ‘‘dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ kusalatā’’ti vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
12. 果智解说注释显示巴利原文
12. Phalañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
63 63. 果智解说中,「由彼加行止息故」:指那向内外出离的加行已经止息。道于自生刹那,以断烦恼而作双向出离的加行;至果刹那,因烦恼已断,道上彼双向出离的加行便止息、寂止,故称已寂静。「生起」:即道生起后之刹那,有时仅生起一或二次;入果等至时则多次生起;于出灭尽定者,生起二次。这一切皆由加行止息而生起。「这是道的果」:为表‘果’义,此处使用中性词。于一来道等圣道刹那,亦应知唯依每一道支而有出离的连结。显示巴利原文
63. Phalañāṇaniddese taṃpayogappaṭippassaddhattāti tassa ajjhattabahiddhā vuṭṭhānapayogassa paṭippassaddhattā. Maggo hi sakakkhaṇe kilesappahānena ubhato vuṭṭhānapayogaṃ karoti nāma, phalakkhaṇe kilesānaṃ pahīnattā maggassa ubhato vuṭṭhānapayogo paṭippassaddho vūpasanto nāma hoti. Uppajjatīti maggānantaraṃ sakiṃ vā dvikkhattuṃ vā uppajjati, phalasamāpattikāle pana bahukkhattuṃ, nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa dvikkhattuṃ uppajjati, sabbampi hi taṃ payogappaṭippassaddhattā uppajjati. Maggassetaṃ phalanti phalaṃ apekkhitvā napuṃsakavacanaṃ kataṃ. Sakadāgāmimaggakkhaṇādīsupi ekekamaggaṅgavaseneva vuṭṭhānayojanā veditabbā.
13. 解脱智解说注释显示巴利原文
13. Vimuttiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
64 64. 解脱智解说中,「有身见」:于五蕴所成之身执为真实,或执‘我’在于此身,如是见即名有身见。「疑」:谓离去治疗(cikicchā),或于抉择事物本质时陷于困苦、疲惫,故名疑。「戒禁取」:错误执信‘由戒得清净,由禁制得清净,由戒禁得清净’,此执超出真实,唯从外在执取,故名戒禁取。戒禁取与有身见虽皆属见,然为显示:若能断除本具二十所依之有身见,即能断一切见,故特说有身见;别举戒禁取,则为明彼自谓‘我修清净道’者所修实为邪道。应如是知。为明此三者唯由断随眠而断,故说‘见随眠、疑随眠’,非谓他们为别别烦恼。「随烦恼」:令心烦恼、热恼、损恼;以其势力强盛,成为增盛之烦恼,故名随烦恼。「正确地被根断」:以断灭之断,达至不复生起之灭尽,故称正确地被根断。「与缠俱」:缠,谓覆盖心而现起、生起,此为已现为语行之烦恼。显示巴利原文
64. Vimuttiñāṇaniddese sakkāyadiṭṭhīti vijjamānaṭṭhena sati khandhapañcakasaṅkhāte kāye, sayaṃ vā satī tasmiṃ kāye diṭṭhīti sakkāyadiṭṭhi. Vicikicchāti vigatā cikicchā, sabhāvaṃ vā vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamatīti vicikicchā. Sīlabbataparāmāsoti sīlena suddhi vatena suddhi sīlabbatena suddhīti gahitaabhiniveso. So hi sabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasatīti sīlabbataparāmāso. Ubhinnaṃ samānepi diṭṭhibhāve takkañca parūpadesañca vinā pakatiyā eva sakkāyadiṭṭhigahaṇato pakatibhūtāya vīsativatthukāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā pahāneneva sabbadiṭṭhippahānadassanatthaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhi vuttā. Sīlabbataparāmāso pana ‘‘suddhipaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjāmā’’ti paṭipannānaṃ paṭipadāya micchābhāvadassanatthaṃ visuṃ vuttoti veditabbo. Tiṇṇampi anusayappahāneneva pahānaṃ dassetuṃ diṭṭhānusayo vicikicchānusayoti vuttaṃ, na visuṃ kilesattā. Upakkilesāti kilesenti upatāpenti vibādhentīti kilesā, thāmagataṭṭhena bhusā kilesāti upakkilesā. Sammā samucchinnā hontīti samucchedappahānena anuppādanirodhena sammā samucchinnā honti. Sapariyuṭṭhānehīti cittaṃ pariyonandhantāni uṭṭhenti uppajjantīti pariyuṭṭhānāni, samudācārappattānaṃ kilesānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saha pariyuṭṭhānehīti sapariyuṭṭhānāni. Tehi sapariyuṭṭhānehi anusayitaupakkilesehi. Cittaṃ vimuttaṃ hotīti tesaṃ abhabbuppattikabhūtattā santativasena pavattamānaṃ cittaṃ tato vimuttaṃ nāma hoti. Tadeva suṭṭhu vimuttattā suvimuttaṃ. Taṃvimuttiñātaṭṭhenāti tassā vimuttiyā jānanaṭṭhena.
14. 省察智解说释义显示巴利原文
14. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
65 在省察智的解说中,首先于道刹那当下,以因之义分别说明诸道支;接着又以觉支之义,将那些以“觉悟义”而得名为“菩提”的圣者之支分——包括属于道支的法与不属于道支的法——分别显示出来。其中,念觉支、择法觉支、精进觉支、定觉支即是道支;喜觉支、轻安觉支、舍觉支则不是道支。其后,在从力与根的角度分别解说时,唯有信不是道支。再接着,为了说明在道刹那中生起的种种法,将它们以积聚的方式显示,故而说了“以增上义”等语。此处,“以安立义为念处”是指:唯有一种以涅槃为所缘的念,由于它完成了对身、受、心、法中舍离净想、乐想、常想、我想的作用,故说为四念处。唯有一种以涅槃为所缘的精进,由于它完成了对已生与未生不善的断除、令其不生,以及对未生与已生善的生起、安住的作用,故说为四正勤。显示巴利原文
65. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaniddese maggakkhaṇeyeva hetuṭṭhena paṭhamaṃ maggaṅgāni visuṃ visuṃ vatvā puna maggaṅgabhūte ca amaggaṅgabhūte ca dhamme ‘‘bujjhanaṭṭhena bodhī’’ti laddhanāmassa ariyassa aṅgabhāvena bojjhaṅge visuṃ dassesi. Satidhammavicayavīriyasamādhisambojjhaṅgā hi maggaṅgāneva, pītipassaddhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgā amaggaṅgāni. Puna balavasena indriyavasena ca visuṃ niddiṭṭhesu saddhā eva amaggaṅgabhūtā. Puna maggakkhaṇe jāteyeva dhamme rāsivasena dassento ādhipateyyaṭṭhenātiādimāha. Tattha upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena satipaṭṭhānāti ekāva nibbānārammaṇā sati kāyavedanācittadhammesu subhasukhaniccaattasaññāpahānakiccasādhanavasena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā nāma. Nibbānārammaṇaṃ ekameva vīriyaṃ uppannānuppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ pahānānuppattikiccassa, anuppannuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ uppādaṭṭhitikiccassa sādhanavasena cattāro sammappadhānā nāma.
“以如实义为谛”是指:以在苦性等方面不欺诳之义,而有四种圣谛。在此,这些圣谛是以通达之义在那时集起的;而单独所说的“不死之所入——涅槃”,则是涅槃本身,其余诸法是以获得之义在那时集起的。由“以如实义为谛在那时集起”这句话,应当得出这样的结论:在道与果的终了时,必然会省察四谛。同时,因为有“了知:应作已作,更无如此状态”的经文,以及“苦已遍知,集已断除,灭已证得,道已修习”这样的省察,也可知省察是必然的。如此,省察便成为合理。这里所说的“集”,应理解为各别圣道所应断除的烦恼。正是依据这里所说的对“集”的省察,注释中说:两种烦恼的省察,以及道、果、涅槃的省察,在这里都是以本来面貌出现的。唯独没有提到苦的省察。虽然经中未直接宣说,但基于经典依据与合理性,仍应承许。因为一个为了通达圣谛而修行的人,在完成圣谛的通达之后,自然会省察自己所成就之事,此是合理的。“以不散乱义为止”等语,是为显示与道相应的止与观这些法,具有一味性且不相超越,故而如此说。显示巴利原文
Tathaṭṭhena saccāti dukkhabhāvādīsu avisaṃvādakaṭṭhena cattāri ariyasaccāni. Etāneva cettha paṭivedhaṭṭhena tadā samudāgatāni, ‘‘amatogadhaṃ nibbāna’’nti visuṃ vuttaṃ nibbānañca, sesā pana dhammā paṭilābhaṭṭhena tadā samudāgatā. ‘‘Tathaṭṭhena saccā tadā samudāgatā’’ti vacanato maggaphalapariyosāne avassaṃ cattāri saccāni paccavekkhatīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. ‘‘Kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ nāparaṃ itthattāyāti pajānātī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.248) vacanato ca ‘‘dukkhaṃ me pariññātaṃ, samudayo me pahīno, nirodho me sacchikato, maggo ca me bhāvito’’ti paccavekkhaṇaṃ vuttameva hoti. Tathā paccavekkhaṇaṃ yujjati ca. Samudayoti cettha taṃtaṃmaggavajjhoyeva veditabbo. Ettha vuttasamudayapaccavekkhaṇavaseneva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ duvidhaṃ kilesapaccavekkhaṇaṃ maggaphalanibbānapaccavekkhaṇāni idha sarūpeneva āgatānīti vuttāni. Kevalaṃ dukkhapaccavekkhaṇameva na vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi na vuttaṃ, atha kho pāṭhasabbhāvato yuttisabbhāvato ca gahetabbameva. Saccapaṭivedhatthañhi paṭipannassa niṭṭhite saccapaṭivedhe sayaṃ katakiccapaccavekkhaṇaṃ yuttamevāti. Avikkhepaṭṭhena samathotiādi maggasampayutte eva samathavipassanādhamme ekarasaṭṭhena anativattanaṭṭhena ca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Saṃvaraṭṭhena sīlavisuddhīti sammāvācākammantājīvā eva. Avikkhepaṭṭhena cittavisuddhīti sammāsamādhi eva. Dassanaṭṭhena diṭṭhivisuddhīti sammādiṭṭhiyeva. Vimuttaṭṭhenāti samucchedavasena maggavajjhakilesehi muccanaṭṭhena, nibbānārammaṇe vā adhimuccanaṭṭhena. Vimokkhoti samucchedavimokkho, ariyamaggoyeva. Paṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjāti saccapaṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjā, sammādiṭṭhiyeva. Pariccāgaṭṭhena vimuttīti maggavajjhakilesānaṃ pajahanaṭṭhena tato muccanato vimutti, ariyamaggoyeva. Samucchedaṭṭhena khaye ñāṇanti kilesasamucchindanaṭṭhena kilesakkhayakare ariyamagge ñāṇaṃ, sammādiṭṭhiyeva.
欲等应依前文所述之理而了知。唯此处于道刹那本身,方以道的初、中、后三个阶段而显示。此处的“解脱”即是道的解脱。虽然在“以如实的意义为谛”处已包含了涅槃,但在此处为了揭示其作为最终目标的状态而再度提出,应如此理解。在果刹那,此道理也同样适用。不过此处,“以因的意义为道”是指以果道的方式而成为道。“正勤”应知是在道刹那完成了四种作用之后,于果生起的刹那因已成就而如此说。否则,在果刹那其实不得正勤。一位长老在解说三十七菩提分法时曾这样说:“在果刹那,除四正勤外,其余三十三种法可得。”同样地,基于通达等作用的成就,也可相应地去理解“谛”等。“解脱(vimokkha)”即是果的解脱,“解脱(vimuttī)”即是果的解脱。“以止息的意义”对于不再生起的智,其义如前所述。“出起后”:因无中间出起,故于果结束时如此说。“这些法在那时集起”:指上述诸法,在道刹那与果刹那已经集起,他如此审察;应知此处省略了“iti”一词,并以此作为结语。显示巴利原文
Chandādayo heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Kevalañhettha maggakkhaṇeyeva maggassa ādimajjhapariyosānākārena dassitā. Vimuttīti cettha maggavimuttiyeva. ‘‘Tathaṭṭhena saccā’’ti ettha gahitampi ca nibbānaṃ idha pariyosānabhāvadassanatthaṃ puna vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Phalakkhaṇepi eseva nayo. Ettha pana hetuṭṭhena maggoti phalamaggabhāveneva. Sammappadhānāti maggakkhaṇe catukiccasādhakassa vīriyakiccassa phalassa uppādakkhaṇe siddhattā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Aññathā hi phalakkhaṇe sammappadhānā eva na labbhanti. Vuttañhi maggakkhaṇe sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhamme uddharantena therena ‘‘phalakkhaṇe ṭhapetvā cattāro sammappadhāne avasesā tettiṃsa dhammā labbhantī’’ti. Evameva paṭivedhakiccādisiddhivasena saccādīnipi yathāyogaṃ veditabbāni. Vimokkhoti ca phalavimokkho. Vimuttīti phalavimutti. Paṭippassaddhaṭṭhena anuppāde ñāṇaṃ vuttatthameva. Vuṭṭhahitvāti antarā vuṭṭhānābhāvā phalāvasānena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ime dhammā tadā samudāgatāti ime vuttappakārā dhammā maggakkhaṇe phalakkhaṇe ca samudāgatāti paccavekkhatīti iti-saddaṃ pāṭhasesaṃ katvā sambandho veditabbo.
15. 种种事智解说之注释显示巴利原文
15. Vatthunānattañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
66 于种种事智的解说中,“于内确定眼”,是指确定内属的眼。为说明他如何确定眼,便问道“如何于内确定眼?”,随后以“眼由无明所生”等来显示确定的方法。其中,过去的无明与爱是资助因,过去的业是生起因,现在的食是资助因。以此,资助眼的时节与心也就被包含在内了。“基于四大种”:此处是以属格表示受格的意义,意指执取了四大种而生起。由此显示了净色眼的状态,而排除了附带物的状态。“已生”:是从时间上,或以相续刹那来说,指现在的。“集起”:指从因而生起。到此,显示了于修观前行阶段对眼的确定。通过“非有而生”等显示了无常随观。因为在生起之前并不存在,所以说“非有而生”;由于未来将灭去而不再存在,所以说“有已,便不存在”。“有边故”:“有边”是指它有终结,故称有边者;有边者即是“有边者”,如同说“有念者、有行者、有慧者”一般。因此,“有边者故”是指它有坏灭的存在状态。“不坚固”:因在所有阶段都会破坏,且无坚固性,故不坚固。“非常”:即无常。“变易法”:因衰老与死亡这两方面而有变易的性质。“眼无常”显示巴利原文
66. Vatthunānattañāṇaniddese cakkhuṃ ajjhattaṃ vavatthetīti ajjhattabhūtaṃ cakkhuṃ vavatthapeti. Yathā so cakkhuṃ vavatthapeti, tathā vattukāmo kathaṃ cakkhuṃ ajjhattaṃ vavatthetīti pucchitvā puna cakkhu avijjāsambhūtanti vavatthetītiādinā vavatthāpanākāraṃ dasseti. Tattha avijjātaṇhā atītā upatthambhakahetuyo, kammaṃ atītaṃ janakahetu, āhāro idāni upatthambhakahetu. Etena cakkhūpatthambhakāni utucittāni gahitāneva honti. Catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyāti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, cattāri mahābhūtāni upādiyitvā pavattanti attho. Etena pasādacakkhubhāvo dassito hoti, sasambhārabhāvo paṭikkhitto. Uppannanti addhāvasena, santatikhaṇavasena vā paccuppannaṃ. Samudāgatanti hetuto samuṭṭhitaṃ. Ettāvatā vipassanāpubbabhāge cakkhuvavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ. Ahutvā sambhūtantiādīhi aniccānupassanā. Pubbe udayā avijjamānato ahutvā sambhūtaṃ, uddhaṃ vayā abhāvato hutvā na bhavissati. Antavantatoti anto assa atthīti antavā, antavā eva antavanto yathā ‘‘satimanto, gatimanto, dhitimanto ca yo isī’’ti (theragā. 1052). Tato antavantato, bhaṅgavijjamānatoti attho. Addhuvanti sabbāvatthānipātitāya, thirabhāvassa ca abhāvatāya na thiraṃ. Asassatanti na niccaṃ. Vipariṇāmadhammanti jarāya ceva maraṇena cāti dvedhā vipariṇāmapakatikaṃ. Cakkhu aniccantiādīni cakkhuṃ aniccatotiādīni ca vuttatthāni. Manoti idha bhavaṅgamanassa adhippetattā avijjāsambhūtotiādi yujjatiyeva. Āhārasambhūtoti ettha sampayuttaphassāhāramanosañcetanāhāravasena veditabbaṃ. Uppannoti ca addhāsantativasena.
种种行境智解说注释显示巴利原文
16. Gocaranānattañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
67 在种种行境智的解说中,「于外确定色」是指对于内在而言外在的色处诸法进行确定。之所以说「无明所生」等,是因为它们属于自身相续的业生色。食也是业生色的资助缘。而声音因是时节与心所生,故未说「无明所生」等四种。触则因其本身即是四大种,而未说「依于四大种」。这里的「法」包含了与有分心相应的三个无色蕴、属于法处且由业所生的细色,以及所有的色。此外,任何法由何种因生起,便应依彼因来理解。否则,即使是属于自身相续的色等诸法,也无法完全涵盖。因为那些不系属根的色等亦是观禅之所缘,故应知它们被「业所生」一词所包含。它们也是以一切众生共通的业为缘而由时节所生。然而,其他人说:「不系属根的色等不是观禅的所缘。」然而——显示巴利原文
67. Gocaranānattañāṇaniddese rūpe bahiddhā vavatthetīti ajjhattato bahiddhābhūte rūpāyatanadhamme vavatthapetīti attho. Avijjāsambhūtātiādi attabhāvapariyāpannakammajarūpattā vuttaṃ. Āhāropi hi kammajarūpassa upatthambhakapaccayo hoti. Saddassa pana utucittasamuṭṭhānattā avijjāsambhūtādicatukkaṃ na vuttaṃ. Phoṭṭhabbānaṃ sayaṃ mahābhūtattā ‘‘catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyā’’ti na vuttaṃ. Dhammāti cettha bhavaṅgamanosampayuttā tayo arūpino khandhā, dhammāyatanapariyāpannāni sukhumarūpāni ca kammasamuṭṭhānāni, sabbānipi rūpādīni ca. Apica yāni yāni yena yena samuṭṭhahanti, tāni tāni tena tena veditabbāni. Itarathā hi sakasantānapariyāpannāpi rūpādayo dhammā sabbe na saṅgaṇheyyuṃ. Yasmā anindriyabaddharūpādayopi vipassanūpagā, tasmā tesaṃ kammasambhūtapadena saṅgaho veditabbo. Tepi hi sabbasattasādhāraṇakammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānā. Aññe pana ‘‘anindriyabaddhā rūpādayo avipassanūpagā’’ti vadanti. Taṃ pana –
当以智慧见到‘一切行无常’时,
因此,对苦生起厌离,这便是清净之道。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbe saṅkhārā aniccāti, yadā paññāya passati; Atha nibbindati dukkhe, esa maggo visuddhiyā’’ti. (dha. pa. 277) –
这与最初的原文相违。在《清净道论》中又说:「在此,有人一开始便专注内在的诸行而修观。然而,仅凭纯粹的内观并不能令道生起,外部的诸行也必须被观见。因此,对他人的蕴及无执受的诸行,也观为无常、苦、无我。」(《清净道论》2.784)因此,对他人眼等依处的分别,以及对不系属于根之色的分别,也是必然被认可的。所以,三界的一切行中,没有不能作为观禅对象的。显示巴利原文
Ādikāya pāḷiyā virujjhati. Vuttañca visuddhimagge – ‘‘idhekacco āditova ajjhattasaṅkhāre abhinivisitvā vipassati, yasmā pana na suddhaajjhattadassanamatteneva maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, bahiddhāpi daṭṭhabbameva, tasmā parassa khandhepi anupādinnasaṅkhārepi aniccaṃ dukkhamanattāti vipassatī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.784). Tasmā paresaṃ cakkhādivavatthānampi anindriyabaddharūpādivavatthānampi icchitabbameva, tasmā tebhūmakasaṅkhārā avipassanūpagā nāma natthi.
种种行智解说注释显示巴利原文
17. Cariyānānattañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
68 在「行差别智」的解说中,对于「识行」等词:于所缘转起,故称为行;识本身即是行,故称识行。以无明行作,或以无明转起,或在未知中转起,或无明之行作,故称无明行。智本身即是行,或以智为行,或以智转起,或在已知中转起,或智之行作,故称智行。「为见」:为见色而生起的。「转向唯作无记」:将心相续从有分流中牵引而出,转向色所缘,这称为转向;因无果报而仅是作用,故是唯作;不依善或不善而记别,故是无记。「见的含义」:依之而见,或自身能见,或即见本身,故称为见;见即其含义,故称见的含义。「眼识」:指善果报或不善果报。「因已见故」:由于眼识已见色所缘,对未见的所缘便无领受心。「推度的果报意界」:登上那已见的所缘,故称推度;这是兼具两种果报的领受意界。「因已被推度故」:指已登上了色所缘。「果报意识界」:指兼具两种果报的推度意识界。此理亦适用于耳门等。推度之后,论中虽未提及确定心,但注释师们说显示巴利原文
68. Cariyānānattañāṇaniddese viññāṇacariyātiādīsu ārammaṇe caratīti cariyā, viññāṇameva cariyā viññāṇacariyā. Aññāṇena caraṇaṃ , aññāṇena vā carati, aññāte vā carati, aññāṇassa vā caraṇanti aññāṇacariyā. Ñāṇameva cariyā, ñāṇena vā cariyā, ñāṇena vā carati, ñāte vā carati, ñāṇassa vā caraṇanti ñāṇacariyā. Dassanatthāyāti rūpadassanatthāya pavattā. Āvajjanakiriyābyākatāti bhavaṅgasantānato apanetvā rūpārammaṇe cittasantānaṃ āvajjeti nāmetīti āvajjanaṃ, vipākābhāvato karaṇamattanti kiriyā, kusalākusalavasena na byākatāti abyākatā. Dassanaṭṭhoti passanti tena, sayaṃ vā passati, dassanamattameva vā tanti dassanaṃ, dassanameva attho dassanaṭṭho. Cakkhuviññāṇanti kusalavipākaṃ vā akusalavipākaṃ vā. Diṭṭhattāti adiṭṭhe sampaṭicchanassa abhāvato cakkhuviññāṇena rūpārammaṇassa diṭṭhattā. Abhiniropanā vipākamanodhātūti diṭṭhārammaṇameva ārohatīti atiniropanā, ubhayavipākā sampaṭicchanamanodhātu. Abhiniropitattāti rūpārammaṇaṃ abhiruḷhattā. Vipākamanoviññāṇadhātūti ubhayavipākā santīraṇamanoviññāṇadhātu. Esa nayo sotadvārādīsupi. Santīraṇānantaraṃ voṭṭhabbane avuttepi aṭṭhakathācariyehi vuttattā labbhatīti gahetabbaṃ. Vijānanatthāyāti dhammārammaṇassa ceva rūpādiārammaṇassa ca vijānanatthāya. Āvajjanakiriyābyākatāti manodvārāvajjanacittaṃ. Vijānanaṭṭhoti tadanantarajavanavasena ārammaṇassa vijānanameva attho, na añño. Upari akusalajavanānaṃ vipassanāmaggaphalajavanānañca visuṃ vuttattā sesajavanāni idha gahetabbāni siyuṃ. ‘‘Kusalehi kammehi vippayuttā caratīti viññāṇacariyā’’tiādivacanato (paṭi. ma. 1.70) pana hasituppādacittajavanameva gahetabbaṃ. Chasu dvāresu ahetukānaṃyeva cittānaṃ vuttattā dve āvajjanāni dve pañcaviññāṇāni dve sampaṭicchanāni tīṇi santīraṇāni ekaṃ hasituppādacittanti aṭṭhārasa ahetukacittāniyeva viññāṇacariyāti veditabbāni.
69 如今,为显示识行仅是了知所缘之义,故说「无贪而行」等语。识在与贪等相应,及与信等相应时,会进入不同的状态;当这些相应法不存在时,识唯安住于自身状态。因此,以「无贪」等言,显示了前述诸识纯粹只是识的作用。此行中无有贪,故称「无贪」。「无贪」(nīrāgā)亦有读作短音形(nirāgā)的。此处,贪即染着义。其余诸项,嗔即厌恶义,痴即迷惑义,慢即自恃义,见即颠倒见义。掉举,即高举或不寂静的状态。疑,其义前已说。随眠,即潜伏烦恼义。本应说「无随眠」,却说为「非随眠」,其义相同。于此应知,唯指已至缠缚位的烦恼不存在。因为并非仅说已断随眠者才有识行。而称之为「无贪」等,即与贪等不相应之义。为显示此即同义异说,故又说了「与贪不相应」等词。又为显示亦与其他法不相应,说了「与善业」等词。善业,因无贪等过失,故是「无过失」;因有能令清显示巴利原文
69. Idāni visayavijānanamattaṭṭhena viññāṇacariyāti dassetuṃ nīrāgā caratītiādimāha, viññāṇañhi rāgādisampayoge saddhādisampayoge ca avatthantaraṃ pāpuṇāti, tesu asati sakāvatthāyameva tiṭṭhati. Tasmā nīrāgādivacanena tesaṃ vuttaviññāṇānaṃ viññāṇakiccamattaṃ dasseti. Natthi etissā rāgoti nīrāgā. Nirāgāti rassaṃ katvāpi paṭhanti . So pana rajjanavasena rāgo. Itaresu dussanavasena doso. Muyhanavasena moho. Maññanavasena māno. Viparītadassanavasena diṭṭhi. Uddhatabhāvo, avūpasantabhāvo vā uddhaccaṃ. Vicikicchā vuttatthā. Anusentīti anusayā. ‘‘Niranusayā’’ti vattabbe nānusayāti vuttaṃ, soyevattho. Pariyuṭṭhānappattānamevettha abhāvo veditabbo. Na hi viññāṇacariyā pahīnānusayānaṃyeva vuttā. Yā ca nīrāgādināmā, sā rāgādīhi vippayuttāva nāma hotīti pariyāyantaradassanatthaṃ rāgavippayuttātiādimāha. Puna aññehi ca vippayuttataṃ dassetuṃ kusalehi kammehītiādimāha. Kusalāniyeva rāgādivajjābhāvā anavajjāni. Parisuddhabhāvakarehi hiriottappehi yuttattā sukkāni. Pavattisukhattā sukho udayo uppatti etesanti sukhudrayāni, sukhavipākattā vā sukho udayo vaḍḍhi etesanti sukhudrayāni. Vuttavipakkhena akusalāni yojetabbāni. Viññāte caratīti viññāṇena viññāyamānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ viññātaṃ nāma, tasmiṃ viññāte ārammaṇe. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viya viññāṇayogato viññātaṃ viññāṇaṃ nāma hoti, tasmiṃ viññāṇe caratīti viññāṇacariyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Viññāṇassaevarūpā cariyā hotīti vuttappakārassa viññāṇassa vuttappakārā cariyā hotīti attho. ‘‘Viññāṇassa cariyā’’ti ca vohāravasena vuccati, viññāṇato pana visuṃ cariyā natthi. Pakatiparisuddhamidaṃ cittaṃ nikkilesaṭṭhenāti idaṃ vuttappakāraṃ cittaṃ rāgādikilesābhāvena pakatiyā eva parisuddhaṃ. Tasmā vijānanamattameva cariyāti viññāṇacariyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Niklesaṭṭhenātipi pāṭho.
在无明行中,“于可意之法等”:令心投入、令心欢喜,或者令心增长、扩展,所以称为“可意”;可意的对象就是“可意的”。于那些可意的所缘中。然而,那些无论是可意还是不可意的所缘,从对它产生执取的角度来说,都叫可意的。因为并不是只在可意所缘才生起贪,只在不可意所缘才生起嗔。“为了贪的速行”:指以相续的方式,为了生起贪的速行而转起的。“转向唯作无记”:指在眼门中,成为不如理作意的转向唯作无记意界。“贪的速行”:指贪大多数生起七次,那一次一次反复转起的贪本身。因为贪是由无明产生的,所以被说成是以无明而有的贪之行,这就称为无明行。其余诸项也同这个道理。“于那两者不平等的所依中”:指在因贪与嗔而失去平等观察的、名为色所缘的所依中。“为了痴的速行”:指以疑和掉举的方式,为了生起痴的速行。“无明行”:纯粹是无明的行,而不是其他的行。“结缚的”等词,是描述慢等本性的词。其中,“结缚的”:指以高举的方式结缚而安住的状态。“所执取的”:指超越了色的无常等真实样态,而从对立面执取了常等样态的邪见。“散乱的”:指在色所缘上达到散乱状态的掉举。“达不可意之行的”:指达到不确定状态的疑。“得强力的”:指达到力量强盛状态的随眠。“于诸法中”:指在色等法中,或者作为法所缘的诸法中。显示巴利原文
Aññāṇacariyāya manāpiyesūti manasi appenti pasīdanti, manaṃ vā appāyanti vaḍḍhentīti manāpāni, manāpāniyeva manāpiyāni. Tesu manāpiyesu. Tāni pana iṭṭhāni vā hontu aniṭṭhāni vā, gahaṇavasena manāpiyāni. Na hi iṭṭhasmiṃyeva rāgo aniṭṭhasmiṃyeva doso uppajjati. Rāgassa javanatthāyāti santativasena rāgassa javanatthāya pavattā. Āvajjanakiriyābyākatāti cakkhudvāre ayoniso manasikārabhūtā āvajjanakiriyābyākatā manodhātu. Rāgassa javanāti yebhuyyena sattakkhattuṃ rāgassa pavatti, punappunaṃ pavatto rāgoyeva. Aññāṇacariyāti aññāṇena rāgassa sambhavato aññāṇena rāgassa cariyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Tadubhayena asamapekkhanasmiṃ vatthusminti rāgadosavasena samapekkhanavirahite rūpārammaṇasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ. Mohassa javanatthāyāti vicikicchāuddhaccavasena mohassa javanatthāya. Aññāṇacariyāti aññāṇasseva cariyā, na aññassa. Vinibandhassātiādīni mānādīnaṃ sabhāvavacanāni. Tattha vinibandhassāti unnativasena vinibandhitvā ṭhitassa. Parāmaṭṭhāyāti rūpassa aniccabhāvādiṃ atikkamitvā parato niccabhāvādiṃ āmaṭṭhāya gahitāya. Vikkhepagatassāti rūpārammaṇe vikkhittabhāvaṃ gatassa. Aniṭṭhaṅgatāyāti asanniṭṭhānabhāvaṃ gatāya. Thāmagatassāti balappattassa. Dhammesūti rūpādīsu vā dhammārammaṇabhūtesu vā dhammesu.
70 70. 由于贪等依无明而生,为显明无明在与贪等相应时的殊胜作用,故说“有贪而行”等语。其中,应知“有贪而行”是以痴、慢、邪见、慢随眠、见随眠与无明随眠的速行而生起的行。“有嗔而行”是以痴、无明随眠的速行而生起的行。“有痴而行”是以贪、嗔、慢、见、掉举、疑随眠的速行而生起的行。“有慢而行”是以贪、痴、欲贪、有贪与无明随眠的速行而生起的行。“有见而行”是以贪、痴、欲贪与无明随眠的速行而生起的行。“有掉举而行”与“有疑而行”,则是以痴、无明随眠的速行而生起的行。“有随眠而行”也应按上述方式理解:以每一种随眠为根本,在其心中依可得的其余随眠,构成“有随眠”的状态。“与贪相应”等语,只是“有贪”等的同义词。正是这些行,因与贪等相应而俱起,故得“有贪”等名;因与贪等在同一方式上结合——即俱生、俱灭、依处相共、所缘相共等——故得“与贪相应”等名。再者,为显示它们也是无明行,正因与善等业不相应而与不善等业相应,故说“与善业”等语。其中,显示巴利原文
70. Yasmā rāgādayo aññāṇena honti, tasmā rāgādisampayogena aññāṇaṃ visesento sarāgā caratītiādimāha. Tattha sarāgā caratīti mohamānadiṭṭhimānānusayadiṭṭhānusayaavijjānusayajavanavasena cariyā veditabbā. Sadosā caratīti mohaavijjānusayajavanavasena. Samohā caratīti rāgadosamānadiṭṭhiuddhaccavicikicchānusayajavanavasena. Samānā caratīti rāgamohakāmarāgabhavarāgāvijjānusayajavanavasena. Sadiṭṭhi caratīti rāgamohakāmarāgāvijjānusayajavanavasena. Sauddhaccā carati savicikicchā caratīti mohaavijjānusayajavanavasena. Sānusayā caratīti etthāpi vuttanayeneva ekekaṃ anusayaṃ mūlaṃ katvā tasmiṃ citte labbhamānakasesānusayavasena sānusayatā yojetabbā. Rāgasampayuttātiādi sarāgādivevacanameva. Sā eva hi cariyā sampayogavasena saha rāgādīhi vattatīti sarāgādiādīni nāmāni labhati. Rāgādīhi samaṃ ekuppādekanirodhekavatthekārammaṇādīhi pakārehi yuttāti rāgasampayuttānītiādīni nāmāni labhati. Sāyeva ca yasmā kusalādīhi kammehi vippayuttā, akusalādīhi kammehi sampayuttā, tasmāpi aññāṇacariyāti dassetuṃ kusalehi kammehītiādimāha. Tattha aññāteti mohassa aññāṇalakkhaṇattā yathāsabhāvena aññāte ārammaṇe. Sesaṃ vuttatthameva.
71 71. 在智行中,由于并不存在能成为还灭随观等无间缘的转向唯作无记,因此,此处不为它们述说转向唯作无记,而直接说还灭随观等。因为转向的现起,正是为了随顺智;由此而有还灭随观、道与果。至于此处的“果等至”,无论是紧接在道后生起的,还是隔了时间才生起的,二者皆包含在内。在“无贪而行”等表述中,应知“无贪”等是就与贪等相对立的角度而说的;而在识行中,则只是指无有贪等。“于已知中”是说依据实相而了知。其余的,则通过“识行”等说法,显示三种行相互交杂的状态。纯粹以识的作用生起的无因心,是识行;专以无明的作用生起的十二种不善心,是无明行;而以殊胜智慧作用生起的观、道、果,是智行。如此,这些行既相互交杂,则除了观之外的有因欲界唯作善、有因欲界果报,以及色界、无色界的善与无记,当知是脱离这三种行的。由于以涅槃为所缘的还灭随观已归入智行,因此应知,那些对涅槃、道、果进行观察的、属于有学与无学的观察智,也已包含在智行之内。因为它们同样殊胜地发挥着智慧的作用。显示巴利原文
71. Ñāṇacariyāyaṃ yasmā vivaṭṭanānupassanādīnaṃ anantarapaccayabhūtā āvajjanakiriyābyākatā natthi, tasmā tesaṃ atthāya āvajjanakiriyābyākataṃ avatvā vivaṭṭanānupassanādayova vuttā. Anulomañāṇatthāya eva hi āvajjanā hoti, tato vivaṭṭanānupassanāmaggaphalāni. Phalasamāpattīti cettha maggānantarajā vā hotu kālantarajā vā, ubhopi adhippetā. Nīrāgā caratītiādīsu rāgādīnaṃ paṭipakkhavasena nīrāgāditā veditabbā, viññāṇacariyāyaṃ rāgādīnaṃ abhāvamattaṭṭhena. Ñāteti yathāsabhāvato ñāte. Aññā viññāṇacariyātiādīhi tissannaṃ cariyānaṃ aññamaññamasammissataṃ dasseti. Viññāṇakiccamattavasena hi ahetukacittuppādā viññāṇacariyā, aññāṇakiccavataṃ dvādasannaṃ akusalacittuppādānaṃ vaseneva aññāṇacariyā, visesena ñāṇakiccakārīnaṃ vipassanāmaggaphalānaṃ vasena ñāṇacariyā. Evamimā aññamaññamasammissā ca, vipassanaṃ ṭhapetvā sahetukakāmāvacarakiriyākusalā ca, sahetukakāmāvacaravipākā ca, rūpāvacarārūpāvacarakusalābyākatā ca tīhi cariyāhi vinimuttāti veditabbā. Nibbānārammaṇāya vivaṭṭanānupassanāya ñāṇacariyāya niddiṭṭhattā nibbānamaggaphalapaccavekkhaṇabhūtāni sekkhāsekkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni ñāṇacariyāya saṅgahitānīti veditabbāni. Tānipi hi visesena ñāṇakiccakarānevāti.
第十八 地差别智之解说显示巴利原文
18. Bhūminānattañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
72 在“地差别智”的解说中,“地”指部分或区分。对于“欲界”,此中有两种欲:烦恼欲和事欲。烦恼欲即欲贪,事欲即三界的轮转。烦恼欲因能欲求而称为欲,事欲因被欲求而称为欲。这两种欲,依其转起,在某一处活动,则该处即有欲活动,因此称为“欲界”。而该处依四恶趣、人界、六天界,共有十一种。譬如有某处有持武器者行走,纵使也有其他二足、四足众生行走,但为了标示那些持武器者,那处便称为“持武器者行处”;同样,纵然也有其他色界等处存在,但为了标示这些欲,此界仍单称为“欲界”。又如同将“色有”略去后词而称为“色”,此处也单称为“欲”。凡系属于此的诸法,在这十一种处所摄的“欲”中活动,故是欲界法。此中有些法虽也活动于色界、无色界等地,然而就如因在战场活动而得称“战场行处”的象,即使在城中行走,仍被称为“战场行处”;又如陆行、水行动物,即使站于干地或水中,仍被称为“陆行、水行”;同样,这些法虽也活动于其他地,仍应知为欲界法。或者,以显示巴利原文
72. Bhūminānattañāṇaniddese bhūmiyoti bhāgā paricchedā vā. Kāmāvacarāti ettha duvidho kāmo kilesakāmo vatthukāmo ca. Kilesakāmo chandarāgo, vatthukāmo tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ. Kilesakāmo kāmetīti kāmo, vatthukāmo kāmīyatīti kāmo. So duvidho kāmo pavattivasena yasmiṃ padese avacarati, so padeso kāmo ettha avacaratīti kāmāvacaro. So pana padeso catunnaṃ apāyānaṃ, manussalokassa, channañca devalokānaṃ vasena ekādasavidho . Yathā hi yasmiṃ padese sasatthā purisā avacaranti, so vijjamānesupi aññesu dvipadacatuppadesu avacarantesu tesaṃ abhilakkhitattā ‘‘sasatthāvacaro’’ti vuccati, evaṃ vijjamānesupi aññesu rūpāvacarādīsu tattha avacarantesu tesaṃ abhilakkhitattā ayaṃ padeso ‘‘kāmāvacaro’’tveva vuccati. Svāyaṃ yathā rūpabhavo rūpaṃ, evaṃ uttarapadalopaṃ katvā ‘‘kāmo’’tveva vuccati. Tappaṭibaddho ekeko dhammo imasmiṃ ekādasavidhapadesasaṅkhāte kāme avacaratīti kāmāvacaro. Kiñcāpi hi ettha keci dhammā rūpārūpabhavesupi avacaranti, yathā pana saṅgāme avacaraṇato ‘‘saṅgāmāvacaro’’ti laddhanāmo nāgo nagare carantopi ‘‘saṅgāmāvacaro’’tveva vuccati, thalajalacarā ca pāṇino athale ajale ca ṭhitāpi ‘‘thalacarā jalacarā’’tveva vuccanti, evaṃ te aññattha avacarantāpi kāmāvacarāyevāti veditabbā. Ārammaṇakaraṇavasena vā etesu vuttappakāresu dhammesu kāmo avacaratīti kāmāvacarā. Kāmañcesa rūpārūpāvacaradhammesupi avacarati, yathā pana ‘‘vadatīti vaccho, mahiyaṃ setīti mahiṃso’’ti vutte na yattakā vadanti, mahiyaṃ vā senti, sabbesaṃ taṃ nāmaṃ hoti. Evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ettha sabbe te dhamme ekarāsiṃ katvā vuttabhūmisaddamapekkhitvā kāmāvacarāti itthiliṅgavacanaṃ kataṃ. Rūpāvacarātiādīsu rūpabhavo rūpaṃ, tasmiṃ rūpe avacarantīti rūpāvacarā. Arūpabhavo arūpaṃ, tasmiṃ arūpe avacarantīti arūpāvacarā. Tebhūmakavaṭṭe pariyāpannā antogadhāti pariyāpannā, tasmiṃ na pariyāpannāti apariyāpannā.
在欲界等地的解说中,“以下方”是依向下部分而说。无间地狱:因为此中火焰、众生或感受之间没有任何间隙,故称“无间”;因为没有微少的所谓安乐,故称“地狱”,也以无喜悦之义而称地狱。以无间地狱为边界。“以上方”,他化自在天:因于他人所化的欲事上得自在转起,故得此名。包摄其中,即指在此区间。“在那个区间中”是依语法上处格与属格之转化而说。而说“行处”,因为在这区间中,其他众生有时、某处也会活动,为不将之包含,故说“行处”。由此,那些沉浸并于一处活动,且于一切时一切处皆有可能,以及向下部分由无间地狱下之生起因转起而活动的诸法,便被包含。因为它们沉浸而活动,并在下方活动,故称“行处”。而说“所属”,因为这些法在此行处虽也活动于他处,却不属于他处,故将其亦活动于他处的情况也一并包含了。显示巴利原文
Kāmāvacarādibhūminiddesesu heṭṭhatoti heṭṭhābhāgena. Avīcinirayanti jālānaṃ vā sattānaṃ vā vedanānaṃ vā vīci antaraṃ chiddaṃ ettha natthīti avīci. Sukhasaṅkhāto ayo ettha natthīti nirayo, niratiatthenapi nirayo. Pariyantaṃ karitvāti taṃ avīcisaṅkhātaṃ nirayaṃ antaṃ katvā. Uparitoti uparibhāgena. Paranimmitavasavattī deveti paranimmitesu kāmesu vasaṃ vattanato evaṃladdhavohāre deve. Anto karitvāti anto pakkhipitvā. Yaṃ etasmiṃ antareti ye etasmiṃ okāse. Yanti ca liṅgavacanavipallāso kato. Etthāvacarāti iminā yasmā tasmiṃ antare aññepi caranti kadāci katthaci sambhavato, tasmā tesaṃ asaṅgaṇhanatthaṃ avacarāti vuttaṃ. Tena ye ekasmiṃ antare ogāḷhā hutvā caranti, sabbattha sadā ca sambhavato, adhobhāge ca caranti avīcinirayassa heṭṭhā bhūtūpādāya pavattibhāvena, tesaṃ saṅgaho kato hoti. Te hi ogāḷhā caranti, adhobhāge ca carantīti avacarā. Ettha pariyāpannāti iminā pana yasmā ete etthāvacarā aññatthāpi avacaranti, na pana tattha pariyāpannā honti, tasmā tesaṃ aññatthāpi avacarantānaṃ pariggaho kato hoti.
现在,为了显示这些属于此处的诸法,从蕴聚、空性、缘的角度,以及自性方面,而说“蕴、界、处”等。梵界:即初禅地所摄的梵天处。色究竟天:以最上之义,故非卑小。入定者:指入于禅定者,以此说善禅那。生起者:指以异熟而生梵界者,以此说异熟禅那。现法乐住者:现法即此现前的自身,乐住即现法乐住,具足此者即为现法乐住者——阿拉汉。对于此现法乐住者,以此说作用禅那。心所:存在于心者即为心所,乃与心相应之义。空无边处有:已到达名为空无边处的有。第二句之理亦同。道:即四圣道。道果:即四圣道果。无为界:即非由缘所造的无余涅槃界。显示巴利原文
Idāni te ettha pariyāpanne dhamme rāsisuññatāpaccayabhāvato ceva sabhāvato ca dassento khandhadhātuāyatanātiādimāha. Brahmalokanti paṭhamajjhānabhūmisaṅkhātaṃ brahmaṭṭhānaṃ. Akaniṭṭheti uttamaṭṭhena na kaniṭṭhe. Samāpannassāti samāpattiṃ samāpannassa. Etena kusalajjhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Upapannassāti vipākavasena brahmaloke upapannassa. Etena vipākajjhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissāti diṭṭheva dhamme paccakkhe attabhāve sukho vihāro diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāro, so assa atthīti diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārī, arahā. Tassa diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa. Etena kiriyajjhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Cetasikāti cetasi bhavā cetasikā, cittasampayuttāti attho. Ākāsānañcāyatanūpageti ākāsānañcāyatanasaṅkhātaṃ bhavaṃ upagate. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Maggāti cattāro ariyamaggā. Maggaphalānīti cattāri ariyamaggaphalāni. Asaṅkhatā ca dhātūti paccayehi akatā nibbānadhātu.
另外四种“地”,应各依一类四法来理解。四念处:即身随观念处、受随观念处、心随观念处、法随观念处。其含义为:能建立,故称为“处”(paṭṭhāna),即安住、跃入、投入而转起之意。念本身即是处,故为念处;或以忆念之义为念,以安住、现起之义为处,念即是处,故亦称念处。因所缘而有众多那样的念,故说为念处(复数)。四正勤:即为令未生恶法不生而正勤,为令已生恶法断除而正勤,为令未生善法生起而正勤,为令已生善法安住而正勤。依此而勤策、精进,故称“勤”,此为精进之名。正勤即不颠倒之勤、有因之勤、有方便之勤、如理之勤。同一精进,依作用分为四种,故说为正勤。四神足:即欲神足、心神足、精进神足、观神足。其义如前已说。四禅那:即依寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性五支的初禅;依喜、乐、心一境性三支的第二禅;依乐、心一境性二支的第三禅;依舍、心一境性二支的第四禅。这些支,因对所缘静虑之义而称为禅那。四无量:即慈、悲、喜、舍。因遍满无量,故称无量。显示巴利原文
Aparāpi catasso bhūmiyoti ekekacatukkavasena veditabbā. Cattāro satipaṭṭhānāti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Tassattho – patiṭṭhātīti paṭṭhānaṃ, upaṭṭhāti okkanditvā pakkhanditvā pavattatīti attho. Satiyeva paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Atha vā saraṇaṭṭhena sati, upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena paṭṭhānaṃ, sati ca sā paṭṭhānañcātipi satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Ārammaṇavasena bahukā tā satiyoti satipaṭṭhānā. Cattāro sammappadhānāti anuppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ anuppādāya sammappadhānaṃ, uppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ pahānāya sammappadhānaṃ, anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ uppādāya sammappadhānaṃ, uppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ ṭhitiyā sammappadhānaṃ. Padahanti vāyamanti etenāti padhānaṃ, vīriyassetaṃ nāmaṃ . Sammappadhānanti aviparītappadhānaṃ kāraṇappadhānaṃ upāyappadhānaṃ yonisopadhānaṃ. Ekameva vīriyaṃ kiccavasena catudhā katvā sammappadhānāti vuttaṃ. Cattāro iddhipādāti chandiddhipādo, cittiddhipādo, vīriyiddhipādo, vīmaṃsiddhipādo. Tassattho vuttoyeva. Cattāri jhānānīti vitakkavicārapītisukhacittekaggatāvasena pañcaṅgikaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ. Pītisukhacittekaggatāvasena tivaṅgikaṃ dutiyajjhānaṃ, sukhacittakaggatāvasena duvaṅgikaṃ tatiyajjhānaṃ, upekkhācittekaggatāvasena duvaṅgikaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ. Imāni hi aṅgāni ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṭṭhena jhānanti vuccanti. Catasso appamaññāyoti mettā, karuṇā, muditā, upekkhā. Pharaṇaappamāṇavasena appamaññāyo. Etāyo hi ārammaṇavasena appamāṇe vā satte pharanti, ekaṃ sattampi vā anavasesapharaṇavasena pharantīti pharaṇaappamāṇavasena appamaññāyoti vuccanti. Catasso arūpasamāpattiyoti ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpatti, viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpatti, ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpatti, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpatti. Catasso paṭisambhidā vuttatthā eva.
四行道:即“苦行道迟通达,苦行道速通达,乐行道迟通达,乐行道速通达”(《长部》3.311)所说的四种行道。四所缘:即小·小所缘、小·无量所缘、无量·小所缘、无量·无量所缘(《法集》181等)所说的四种所缘。应知,这是就未决定遍等所缘、而具有所缘的禅那而言。四圣种:圣者指诸佛、独觉佛及如来弟子,这些圣者的种姓、传统、相续,即是圣种。哪四种呢?即满足于衣服、满足于团食、满足于坐卧处、乐于修习,此四种。对病缘药的满足,已包含在满足于团食之中;因为若有人对团食能知足,岂会对病缘药不知足呢?显示巴利原文
Catassopaṭipadāti ‘‘dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā, dukkhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā, sukhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā, sukhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.311) vuttā catasso paṭipadā. Cattāri ārammaṇānīti parittaṃ parittārammaṇaṃ, parittaṃ appamāṇārammaṇaṃ, appamāṇaṃ parittārammaṇaṃ, appamāṇaṃ appamāṇārammaṇanti (dha. sa. 181 ādayo) vuttāni cattāri ārammaṇāni. Kasiṇādiārammaṇānaṃ avavatthāpetabbato ārammaṇavantāni jhānāni vuttānīti veditabbāni. Cattāro ariyavaṃsāti ariyā vuccanti buddhā ca paccekabuddhā ca tathāgatasāvakā ca, tesaṃ ariyānaṃ vaṃsā tantiyo paveṇiyoti ariyavaṃsā. Ke pana te? Cīvarasantoso piṇḍapātasantoso senāsanasantoso bhāvanārāmatāti ime cattāro. Gilānapaccayasantoso piṇḍapātasantose vutte vuttoyeva hoti. Yo hi piṇḍapāte santuṭṭho, so kathaṃ gilānapaccaye asantuṭṭho bhavissati.
四摄事:即四种摄受大众的原因——布施、爱语、利行、同事。布施:即适当的布施。爱语:即适当的亲切言辞。利行:即在各种情况下,通过实际做应做之事并教示应做与不应做之事,而利益他人。同事:与衡量共存即是“有共同性”,意为有界限、有计量。由此,向他表现出与自己相同的态度,即是“同事”;同事的状态就是同事性。意思是先衡量“他比我低劣”“他与我相等”“他比我殊胜”,而后据此给予相应的对待。又有说法认为:“同甘共苦,即是同事。”显示巴利原文
Cattāri saṅgahavatthūnīti cattāri janasaṅgaṇhanakāraṇāni – dānañca peyyavajjañca atthacariyā ca samānattatā cāti imāni cattāri. Dānanti yathārahaṃ dānaṃ. Peyyavajjanti yathārahaṃ piyavacanaṃ. Atthacariyāti tattha tattha kattabbassa karaṇavasena kattabbākattabbānusāsanavasena ca vuddhikiriyā. Samānattatāti saha mānena samāno, saparimāṇo saparigaṇanoti attho. Samāno parassa attā etenāti samānatto, samānattassa bhāvo samānattatā, ‘‘ayaṃ mayā hīno, ayaṃ mayā sadiso, ayaṃ mayā adhiko’’ti parigaṇetvā tadanurūpena upacaraṇaṃ karaṇanti attho. ‘‘Samānasukhadukkhatā samānattatā’’ti ca vadanti.
“四轮”:此处所说的“轮”有五种,即木轮、宝轮、法轮、威仪轮、成就轮。其中,“大王,那个以六个月减去六日完成的轮”(《增支部》3.15)是指木轮。“取轮而转”(《本生》1.13.68)是指宝轮。“我所转之轮”(《经集》562)是指法轮。“有四轮九门”(《相应部》1.29)是指威仪轮。“诸比丘,有这四种轮,凡是具足这四种轮的天与人,他们的四轮便得运转。哪四种?住适宜处、亲近善士、正确发愿、往昔所积之福”(《增支部》4.31)是指成就轮。此处所说的四轮,正是指成就轮。其中,住适宜处:谓安住于四众弟子可得相遇的合宜处所。亲近善士:谓依止、亲近、归向佛陀等善良之士。正确发愿:谓正确地安立自身——若过去带有无信等过失,便舍离那些,安立于信等善法之中。往昔所积之福:谓过去所积累的善业。这便是此处所说的含义。因为,凡是以智慧相应之心所造的善业,此善业便会引导此人到达适宜之处,令他亲近善士,而此人自身也能正确安立。显示巴利原文
Cattāri cakkānīti ettha cakkaṃ nāma dārucakkaṃ, ratanacakkaṃ, dhammacakkaṃ, iriyāpathacakkaṃ, sampatticakkanti pañcavidhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘yaṃ pana taṃ, deva, cakkaṃ chahi māsehi niṭṭhitaṃ chārattūnehī’’ti (a. ni. 3.15) idaṃ dārucakkaṃ. ‘‘Cakkaṃ vattayato pariggahetvā’’ti (jā. 1.13.68) idaṃ ratanacakkaṃ. ‘‘Mayā pavattitaṃ cakka’’nti (su. ni. 562) idaṃ dhammacakkaṃ. ‘‘Catucakkaṃ navadvāra’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.29) idaṃ iriyāpathacakkaṃ. ‘‘Cattārimāni , bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ vattati. Katamāni cattāri? Patirūpadesavāso, sappurisāvassayo, attasammāpaṇidhi, pubbe ca katapuññatā’’ti (a. ni. 4.31) idaṃ sampatticakkaṃ. Idhāpi etadeva adhippetaṃ. Tattha patirūpadesavāsoti yattha catasso parisā sandissanti, evarūpe anucchavike dese vāso. Sappurisāvassayoti buddhādīnaṃ sappurisānaṃ avassayanaṃ sevanaṃ bhajanaṃ. Attasammāpaṇidhīti attano sammā patiṭṭhāpanaṃ. Sace pubbe assaddhādīhi samannāgato hoti, tāni pahāya saddhādīsu patiṭṭhāpanaṃ. Pubbe ca katapuññatāti pubbe upacitakusalatā. Idameva cettha pamāṇaṃ. Yena hi ñāṇasampayuttacittena kusalakammaṃ kataṃ hoti, tadeva kusalaṃ taṃ purisaṃ patirūpadese upaneti, sappurise bhajāpeti, so eva puggalo attānaṃ sammā ṭhapetīti.
“四法句”即四种法的分类。哪四种?无贪法句、无嗔法句、正念法句、正定法句。“无贪法句”指无贪,或依无贪之力而证得的禅那、观、道、果、涅槃。“无嗔法句”指无嗔,或依慈等而证得的禅那等。“正念法句”指善住之念,或依念等而证得的禅那等。“正定法句”指八等至,或依八等至等而证得的禅那等。又,依十不净之力而证得的禅那等为无贪法句,依四梵住之力而证得的为无嗔法句,依十随念与食厌逆想之力而证得的为正念法句,依十遍与入出息念之力而证得的为正定法句。这四种地,每一种皆当以四法相应组合。显示巴利原文
Cattāri dhammapadānīti cattāro dhammakoṭṭhāsā. Katamāni cattāri? Anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ, abyāpādo dhammapadaṃ, sammāsati dhammapadaṃ, sammāsamādhi dhammapadaṃ. Anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ nāma alobho vā anabhijjhāvasena adhigatajjhānavipassanāmaggaphalanibbānāni vā. Abyāpādo dhammapadaṃ nāma akopo vā mettāsīsena adhigatajjhānādīni vā. Sammāsati dhammapadaṃ nāma sūpaṭṭhitassati vā satisīsena adhigatajjhānādīni vā. Sammāsamādhi dhammapadaṃ nāma aṭṭhasamāpatti vā aṭṭhasamāpattisīsena adhigatajjhānādīni vā. Dasaasubhavasena vā adhigatajjhānādīni anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ, catubrahmavihāravasena adhigatāni abyāpādo dhammapadaṃ, dasānussatiāhārepaṭikūlasaññāvasena adhigatāni sammāsati dhammapadaṃ, dasakasiṇaānāpānavasena adhigatāni sammāsamādhi dhammapadanti. Imā catasso bhūmiyoti ekekaṃ catukkavaseneva yojetabbaṃ.
19. 法种种智解说注释显示巴利原文
19. Dhammanānattañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
73 在“法种种智”的解说中,“业道”:那些业同时也是道,因为是通往恶趣之路,故称业道,即那些业道。“十善业道”即远离杀生、远离不与取、远离欲邪行,这是三种身善行;远离妄语、远离离间语、远离粗恶语、远离杂秽语,这是四种语善行;无贪、无嗔、正见,这是三种意善行。“十不善业道”即杀生、不与取、欲邪行,三种身恶行;妄语、离间语、粗恶语、杂秽语,四种语恶行;贪欲、嗔害、邪见,三种意恶行。善与不善之中,唯有能引生结生的才称为业道;其余在引生结生上作用不定的,则不称作业道。应当知道,举出粗显的善与不善时,其余的也被包含在内了。“色”:依大种和所造色的差别,有二十八种色。“异熟”:欲界善异熟十六种,不善异熟七种,合共二十三种异熟。“唯作”:无因唯作三种,有因唯作八种,合共十一种欲界唯作。因为没有异熟,只是纯粹的造作,所以称为唯作。至此,已依欲界的色无记、异熟无记、唯作无记三类作了说明。显示巴利原文
73. Dhammanānattañāṇaniddese kammapatheti kammāni ca tāni pathā ca apāyagamanāyāti kammapathā, te kammapathe. Dasa kusalakammapathā nāma pāṇātipātā adinnādānā kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇīti tīṇi kāyasucaritāni, musāvādā pisuṇāya vācāya pharusāya vācāya samphappalāpā veramaṇīti cattāri vacīsucaritāni, anabhijjhā abyāpādo sammādiṭṭhīti tīṇi manosucaritāni. Dasa akusalakammapathā nāma pāṇātipāto adinnādānaṃ kāmesumicchācāroti tīṇi kāyaduccaritāni, musāvādo pisuṇā vācā pharusā vācā samphappalāpoti cattāri vacīduccaritāni, abhijjhā byāpādo micchādiṭṭhīti tīṇi manoduccaritāni. Kusalākusalāpi ca paṭisandhijanakāyeva kammapathāti vuttā, vuttāvasesā paṭisandhijanane anekanti kattā kammapathāti na vuttā. Oḷārikakusalākusalagahaṇeneva sesakusalākusalāpi gahitāti veditabbā. Rūpanti bhūtopādāyabhedato aṭṭhavīsatividhaṃ rūpaṃ. Vipākanti kāmāvacarakusalavipākānaṃ soḷasannaṃ, akusalavipākānaṃ sattannañca vasena tevīsatividhaṃ vipākaṃ. Kiriyanti tiṇṇamahetukakiriyānaṃ, aṭṭhannaṃ sahetukakiriyānañca vasena ekādasavidhaṃ kāmāvacarakiriyaṃ. Vipākābhāvato kiriyāmattāti kiriyā. Ettāvatā kāmāvacarameva rūpābyākatavipākābyākatakiriyābyākatavasena vuttaṃ.
“住于此”指住于此世间。因为人间多有禅那修习,故主要依人间来作解说;但禅那有时在天界也能获得,在色界梵天中,通过在那里投生、从下地投生、从上地投生等方式也都可获得。然而在净居天和无色界,则没有从下地投生的情况。在色界与无色界,未修习禅那者若转生下地,唯生于欲界善趣,不生于恶趣。“在那里投生者”指由异熟而生于梵天者,他们的四种异熟禅那以结生、有分、死心的方式持续流转。而色界与无色界禅那等至中的唯作无记,此处并未提及。虽未提及,但由于它们与善有相同的生起方式,因此在说到善时,实际上已将其包含在内,应当如此理解。恰如《发趣论》中所说:“善与不善灭时,异熟以彼为所缘而生起”,仅以善速行便摄括了唯作速行,此处看待这个问题的道理也应当如此。“沙门果”指四种沙门果。以此说及出世间异熟无记。“涅槃”即涅槃无记。显示巴利原文
Idhaṭṭhassāti imasmiṃ loke ṭhitassa. Yebhuyyena manussaloke jhānabhāvanāsabbhāvato manussalokavasena vuttaṃ, jhānāni pana kadāci karahaci devalokepi labbhanti, rūpībrahmalokepi tatrūpapattikaheṭṭhūpapattikauparūpapattikānaṃ vasena labbhanti. Suddhāvāse pana arūpāvacare ca heṭṭhūpapattikā natthi. Rūpārūpāvacaresu abhāvitajjhānā heṭṭhā nibbattamānā kāmāvacarasugatiyaṃyeva nibbattanti, na duggatiyaṃ. Tatrūpapannassāti vipākavasena brahmaloke upapannassa paṭisandhibhavaṅgacutivasena vattamānāni cattāri vipākajjhānāni. Rūpārūpāvacarajjhānasamāpattīsu kiriyābyākatāni na vuttāni. Kiñcāpi na vuttāni, atha kho kusalehi samānapavattittā kusalesu vuttesu vuttāneva hontīti veditabbāni. Yathā paṭṭhāne ‘‘kusalākusale niruddhe vipāko tadārammaṇatā uppajjatī’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.406, 409) kusalajavanaggahaṇeneva kiriyajavanaṃ saṅgahitaṃ, evamidhāpi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sāmaññaphalānīti cattāri sāmaññaphalāni. Etena lokuttaravipākābyākataṃ vuttaṃ. Nibbānanti nibbānābyākataṃ.
“以欢悦为根本”:欢悦是这些法的根、起始,故称“以欢悦为根本”,意为以欢悦为首。因为这些法都是由于欢悦而和合生起的。当观无常而作意时,欢悦便生起——此处唯有如理作意时,欢悦才会生起,不如理作意时则不会生起。不如理作意者,善法尚且不生,何况观慧?若问为什么要以欢悦本身形态来说明?是为了显示欢悦的强作用。因为若没有欢悦,对于边远住处和殊胜善法,便会生起不乐与厌倦,如此修行便会退失。而若有欢悦,便不会有这不乐,修行就能达到圆满。又因为如理作意作为根本,对修习有大利益,为了彰显这一点,下文将说到九支。显示巴利原文
Pāmojjamūlakāti pāmojjaṃ mūlaṃ ādi etesanti pāmojjamūlakā, pāmojjādikāti attho. Pāmojjena hi samāgatāneva honti. Aniccato manasikaroto pāmojjaṃ jāyatīti ettha yonisomanasikarotoyeva pāmojjaṃ jāyati, na ayonisomanasikaroto. Ayonisomanasikaroto kusaluppattiyeva natthi, pageva vipassanā. Kasmā sarūpena vuttanti ce? Pāmojjassa balavabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Pāmojje hi asati pantesu ca senāsanesu adhikusalesu ca dhammesu arati ukkaṇṭhitā uppajjati. Evaṃ sati bhāvanāyeva ukkamati. Pāmojje pana sati aratiabhāvato bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchati. Yonisomanasikārassa pana mūlabhāvena bhāvanāya bahūpakārattaṃ dassetuṃ upari navakaṃ vakkhati.
他无论从何处如实思择诸蕴的生灭,便获得喜与欢悦,此即知者、见者的不死之境。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 374) –
如前所说,于观者而言,欢悦以观为缘而生;但在此处,应理解为欢悦以聚的思择为缘而生起。欢悦(pāmojja)即欢悦之状态,这是一种尚属微弱的喜。应知前缀“pa-”有起始之义。欢悦者(pamuditassa),指因彼欢悦而喜悦、满足之人。亦有人读作pamoditassa,其义相同。喜(pīti),即强有力的喜。喜心者(pītimanassa),谓心与喜相应。当知此处省略了“具足”一词,犹如说“马车”。身(kāyo),指名身,或与色身一起。轻安(passambhatī),指内心的热恼止息。轻安身者(passaddhakāyo),即由两种轻安的相应而获得寂止之身。感受乐(sukhaṃ vedeti),指领受心所法之乐,或与身乐一同领受。乐者(sukhino),指成就乐者。心得定(cittaṃ samādhiyati),指心被平稳地安置,成为统一境。于定心(samāhite citte),此为处格语。显示巴利原文
Vacanato vipassakassa vipassanāpaccayā pāmojjaṃ uppajjati. Idha pana kalāpasammasanapaccayā pāmojjaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Pamuditassa bhāvo pāmojjaṃ, dubbalā pīti. Ādikammatthe pa-kāro daṭṭhabbo. Pamuditassāti tena pāmojjena pamuditassa tuṭṭhassa. Pamoditassātipi pāṭho. Soyevattho. Pītīti balavapīti. Pītimanassāti pītiyuttamanassa. Yuttasaddassa lopo daṭṭhabbo yathā assarathoti . Kāyoti nāmakāyo, rūpakāyena saha vā. Passambhatīti vūpasantadaratho hoti. Passaddhakāyoti ubhayapassaddhiyogena nibbutakāyo. Sukhaṃ vedetīti cetasikaṃ sukhaṃ vindati, kāyikasukhena saha vā. Sukhinoti sukhasamaṅgissa. Cittaṃ samādhiyatīti cittaṃ samaṃ ādhiyati, ekaggaṃ hoti. Samāhite citteti bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇatthe bhummavacanaṃ. Cittasamāhitabhāvena hi yathābhūtajānanaṃ lakkhīyati. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti udayabbayañāṇādivasena saṅkhāraṃ yathāsabhāvaṃ jānāti. Passatīti taṃyeva cakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ viya phuṭaṃ katvā paññācakkhunā passati. Nibbindatīti navavidhavipassanāñāṇayogena saṅkhāresu ukkaṇṭhati. Nibbindaṃ virajjatīti taṃ vipassanaṃ sikhaṃ pāpento maggañāṇayogena saṅkhārehi viratto hoti. Virāgā vimuccatīti virāgasaṅkhātamaggahetu phalavimuttiyā nibbāne adhimokkhena vimuccati. Kesuci pana potthakesu imasmiṃ vāre ‘‘samāhitena cittena idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’tiādi saccanayo likhito, sopi ca kesuci potthakesu ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti yoniso manasi karotī’’tiādinā nayena likhito. Vāradvayepi byañjanatoyeva viseso, na atthato. ‘‘Nibbindaṃ virajjatī’’ti hi maggañāṇassa vuttattā maggañāṇe ca siddhe catusaccābhisamayakiccaṃ siddhameva hoti. Tasmā catusaccanayena vuttavāropi iminā vārena atthato avisiṭṭhoyeva.
74 前面以“无常”等述说时未对所缘加以分别,因此为了分别所缘,现在便说“于色作意无常”等。“以如理作意为根本”,是说如理作意是这些法的根本与依止,故称以如理作意为根本。因为若舍弃如理作意,欢悦等九法便不会生起。“以定心”,是指以此定心为因。“如实知”,即依慧而了知。当说到“如理作意‘此是苦’”时,这也含有了前分随觉圣谛之义,这是随顺传承的解释。而“如理作意”,即通过正确的方法作意。显示巴利原文
74. Idāni aniccatotiādīhi ārammaṇassa avisesetvā vuttattā ārammaṇaṃ visesento rūpaṃ aniccato manasi karotītiādimāha. Yonisomanasikāramūlakāti yonisomanasikāro mūlaṃ patiṭṭhā etesanti yonisomanasikāramūlakā. Yonisomanasikāraṃ muñcitvāyeva hi pāmojjādayo nava na honti. Samāhitena cittenāti kāraṇabhūtena cittena. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti paññāya pajānāti. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhanti yoniso manasi karotī’’ti vuccamāne anussavavasena pubbabhāgasaccānubodhopi saṅgayhati. Yonisomanasikāroti ca upāyena manasikāro.
「依界的种种而生触的种种」:意思是,依眼等界的种种,而生起眼触等的种种。「依触的种种」:指依眼触等的种种。「受的种种」:指眼触所生受等的种种。「想的种种」:指欲想等的种种。「思惟的种种」:指欲思惟等的种种。「欲的种种」:由于思惟的种种,便生起对色的欲等欲的种种。「热恼的种种」:由于欲的种种,便生起色的热恼等热恼的种种。「遍求的种种」:由于热恼的种种,便生起对色的遍求等遍求的种种。「获得的种种」:由于遍求的种种,便生起获得色等获得的种种。显示巴利原文
Dhātunānattaṃpaṭicca uppajjati phassanānattanti cakkhādidhātunānattaṃ paṭicca cakkhusamphassādinānattaṃ uppajjatīti attho. Phassanānattaṃ paṭiccāti cakkhusamphassādinānattaṃ paṭicca. Vedanānānattanti cakkhusamphassajādivedanānānattaṃ . Saññānānattanti kāmasaññādinānattaṃ. Saṅkappanānattanti kāmasaṅkappādinānattaṃ. Chandanānattanti saṅkappanānattatāya rūpe chando sadde chandoti evaṃ chandanānattaṃ uppajjati. Pariḷāhanānattanti chandanānattatāya rūpapariḷāho saddapariḷāhoti evaṃ pariḷāhanānattaṃ uppajjati. Pariyesanānānattanti pariḷāhanānattatāya rūpapariyesanādinānattaṃ uppajjati. Lābhanānattanti pariyesanānānattatāya rūpapaṭilābhādinānattaṃ uppajjatīti.
20-24. 智五支解说释义显示巴利原文
20-24. Ñāṇapañcakaniddesavaṇṇanā
75 在智五支的解说中,由于这五种智具有前后次第的关联,因此将提问与解答一并给出。“已善知者”:即依了知诸法自性相的智慧而善知。“已知悉者”:即依“已知遍知”,从自性上已了知,故称已知悉。凭借那种智慧了知诸法,此智慧就“了知”义而言为“智”,就“了知”义而言为“慧”——应如此理解其关联。以此方法,其余诸智也应如此配合解释。“已遍知者”:即依共通之相,从各方面周遍了知。“已决断者”:即依“决断遍知”,从无常等角度审察决断。“已断除者”:即由无常随观等智慧,从坏灭随观开始,断除常想等。“已弃舍者”:即依断除而弃舍。“已修习者”:即已令其增长,反复修习。“一味者”:即由于各自的作用而成为一味、同一相。显示巴利原文
75. Ñāṇapañcakaniddese tesaṃ pañcannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ anupubbasambandhasabbhāvato ekatova pucchāvissajjanāni katāni. Abhiññātā hontīti dhammasabhāvalakkhaṇajānanavasena suṭṭhu ñātā honti. Ñātā hontīti ñātapariññāvasena sabhāvato ñātattā ñātā nāma honti. Yena ñāṇena te dhammā ñātā honti, taṃ ñātaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ, pajānanaṭṭhena paññāti sambandho. Imināva nayena sesañāṇānipi yojetabbāni. Pariññātā hontīti sāmaññalakkhaṇavasena samantato ñātā honti. Tīritā hontīti tīraṇapariññāvasena aniccādito upaparikkhitā samāpitā nāma honti. Pahīnā hontīti aniccānupassanādinā ñāṇena niccasaññādayo bhaṅgānupassanato paṭṭhāya pahīnā honti. Pariccattā hontīti pahānavaseneva chaḍḍitā nāma honti. Bhāvitā hontīti vaḍḍhitā paribhāvitā ca honti. Ekarasā hontīti sakiccasādhanapaṭipakkhapahānena ekakiccā honti, paccanīkato vā vimuttivasena vimuttirasena ekarasā honti. Sacchikatā hontīti paṭilābhavasena phaladhammo paṭivedhavasena nibbānadhammoti paccakkhakatā honti. Phassitā hontīti paṭilābhaphusanena paṭivedhaphusanena ca phassitā anubhūtā honti. Imāni pañca ñāṇāni heṭṭhā sutamayañāṇavasena vuttāni, idha sakiccasādhanavasena.
无碍解智的解说释义显示巴利原文
25-28. Paṭisambhidāñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
76 在无碍解智的解说中,若不先解说“法”,其作用便无法阐释,因此未依所列次第,而先解说“法”。法等的含义,前文已说。先以“信根法”等说明“法”字所摄的法,为显示“种种”一词的含义,又说“与信根法不同的其他法”等。由于说“不同的法”,便显示了法的种种差异。“已现知”:即面对面、明显地了知而变得清晰。这样便说明了“无碍解”一词的意义。“胜解义为义”等,是为了说明:信等的胜解等作用,即称为“义”。“作开示”:当有人想要令他人了知时,便会为他人开示;他人听闻其言说时,也同样能获得开示。“音节、训释、言说”:是指名的音节、名的训释和名的言说。因“名”能表明意义,故称“音节”;譬如:“诸比丘,‘有为’与‘造作’,因此称为‘行’。”显示巴利原文
76. Paṭisambhidāñāṇaniddese yasmā dhamme avutte tassa kiccaṃ na sakkā vattuṃ, tasmā uddiṭṭhānaṃ paṭipāṭiṃ anādiyitvā paṭhamaṃ dhammā niddiṭṭhā. Dhammādīnaṃ atthā vuttāyeva. Saddhindriyaṃ dhammotiādīhi dhammasaddapariyāpanne dhamme vatvā nānattasaddassa atthaṃ dassento añño saddhindriyaṃ dhammotiādimāha. ‘‘Añño dhammo’’ti hi vutte dhammānaṃ nānattaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Paṭividitāti abhimukhabhāvena viditā pākaṭā nāma honti. Tena paṭisambhidāpadassa attho vutto. Adhimokkhaṭṭho atthotiādīhi tesaṃ saddhādīnaṃ adhimuccanādikiccaṃ attho nāmāti dasseti. Sandassetunti paraṃ ñāpetukāmassa paraṃ sandassetuṃ. Parassa pana vacanaṃ suṇantassāpi labbhatiyeva. Byañjananiruttābhilāpāti nāmabyañjanaṃ nāmanirutti nāmābhilāpo. Nāmañhi atthaṃ byañjayatīti byañjanaṃ, ‘‘saṅkhatamabhisaṅkharontīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā saṅkhārāti vuccantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.79) evaṃ niddhāretvā sahetukaṃ katvā vuccamānattā nirutti, abhilapīyati etena atthoti abhilāpoti vuccati.
“名”有四种:共名、德名、假名、化生名。其中,初劫时大众共同推举并确立的名号——“大选出者”这一国王之名,即是共名。经中对此说道:“婆悉吒,因得大众推许,故最初便安立了‘大选出者、大选出者’之名。”(长部3.131)诸如‘说法者、粪扫衣者、持律者、三藏持者、有信者、具念者’等依功德而来的名称,是德名。‘世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者’等乃至上百种如来名号,也都是德名。因此说道:显示巴利原文
Nāmañca nāmetaṃ catubbidhaṃ – sāmaññanāmaṃ, guṇanāmaṃ, kittimanāmaṃ, opapātikanāmanti. Tattha paṭhamakappikesu mahājanena sammannitvā ṭhapitattā ‘‘mahāsammato’’ti rañño nāmaṃ sāmaññanāmaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘mahājanasammatoti kho, vāseṭṭha, ‘mahāsammato mahāsammato’tveva paṭhamaṃ akkharaṃ upanibbatta’’nti (dī. ni. 3.131). ‘‘Dhammakathiko paṃsukūliko vinayadharo tipiṭakadharo saddho sato’’ti evarūpaṃ guṇato āgatanāmaṃ guṇanāmaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādīnipi tathāgatassa anekāni nāmasatāni guṇanāmāneva. Tena vuttaṃ –
具德大仙之名号,其数无量不可计;
纵有千百种名,亦当依功德而称名。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino; Guṇehi nāmamuddheyyaṃ, api nāmasahassato’’ti.
孩子出生后的命名日,亲友们供养应供者后,经过商议、斟酌,便说:“他名叫某某”,这个名字即是假名。前一个假名落入后一个假名之中,前一种称谓被后一种称谓所取代,例如:过去劫中,月亮名为“月”,现在依然叫“月”;过去的太阳、海洋、大地、山岳,名为“山”,现在也仍叫“山”——这即是化生名。这四种名,都只是一种名,它只是依世间的约定而成立,在究竟意义上并不存在。而另外一些人则说:“所谓名,就是能表明意义的音声。”至于“力”、“觉支”、“道支”的意义,应依照前面所说的方式来理解。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana jātassa kumārakassa nāmaggahaṇadivase dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ sakkāraṃ katvā samīpe ṭhitā ñātakā kappetvā pakappetvā ‘‘ayaṃ asuko nāmā’’ti nāmaṃ karonti, idaṃ kittimanāmaṃ. Yā pana purimapaññatti aparapaññattiyaṃ patati, purimavohāro pacchimavohāre patati. Seyyathidaṃ, purimakappepi cando candoyeva nāma, etarahipi candoyeva. Atīte sūriyo, samuddo, pathavī, pabbato pabbatoyeva nāma, etarahipi pabbatoyevāti, idaṃ opapātikanāmaṃ. Idaṃ catubbidhampi nāmaṃ ekaṃ nāmameva hoti , taṃ lokasaṅketamattasiddhaṃ paramatthato avijjamānaṃ. Aññe pana ‘‘nāmaṃ nāma atthajotako saddo’’ti vadanti. Balabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgānaṃ vuttanayānusāreneva attho veditabbo.
三种智解说释义显示巴利原文
29-31. Ñāṇattayaniddesavaṇṇanā
78 在智三种解说中,“相”指行相。“无相”指与行相相反的涅槃。“已倾向”是说心倾向于那个境界,即心从中解脱而舒展开来。“触触即见坏灭”的意思是:以智慧反复触及行相,继而以观智见到它的坏灭。由此,坏灭随观得以成立。坏灭随观成就无常随观;因为无常本身就是苦,所以它也成就苦随观;因为苦就是无我,所以它也成就无我随观。如此,此处便宣说了三种随观。“无相住”是由于见到相的过患与怖畏,故将这三种随观所成的安住方式,称为无相住。“誓愿”指渴爱。“无愿”指与渴爱相反的涅槃。“倾向”指“我是……”之类的执取倾向。“空”是指已远离了“我”这个执取的涅槃。所谓“空”,即是原本就空,故称为“空”。“舍置相续”的意思,是以行舍智舍弃异熟相续。众生确实会喜爱、乐着那些可称为善趣的异熟相续。然而,这位希求进入果等至的禅修者,当见到那异熟相续及一切诸行法为无常等之后,便对其舍置不顾。唯有如此见后,才能进入果等至;若不如此见,则不可能。“转向后”是指以转向心转向之后。“进入”是指进入显示巴利原文
78. Ñāṇattayaniddese nimittanti saṅkhāranimittaṃ. Animitteti saṅkhāranimittapaṭipakkhe nibbāne. Adhimuttattāti tanninnabhāvena cittassa vissaṭṭhattā. Phussa phussa vayaṃ passatīti saṅkhāranimittaṃ ñāṇena phusitvā phusitvā tassa bhaṅgaṃ vipassanāñāṇeneva passati. Etena bhaṅgānupassanā siddhā. Sā aniccānupassanaṃ sādheti, aniccassa dukkhattā sā dukkhānupassanaṃ, dukkhassa anattattā sā anattānupassananti evamettha tisso anupassanā vuttā honti. Animitto vihāroti nimittaṃ bhayato diṭṭhattā so vipassanattayavihāro animittavihāro nāma hoti. Paṇidhinti taṇhaṃ. Appaṇihiteti taṇhāpaṭipakkhe nibbāne. Abhinivesanti attābhinivesaṃ. Suññateti attavirahite nibbāne. Suññatoti suññaṃyeva suññato. Pavattaṃ ajjhupekkhitvāti vipākappavattaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāya ajjhupekkhitvā. Sugatisaṅkhātavipākappavattābhinandino hi sattā. Ayaṃ pana phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitukāmo taṃ pavattaṃ, sabbañca saṅkhāragataṃ aniccādito passitvā ajjhupekkhatiyeva. Evañhi diṭṭhe phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjituṃ sakkoti, na aññathā. Āvajjitvāti āvajjanena āvajjitvā. Samāpajjatīti phalasamāpattiṃ paṭipajjati. Animittā samāpattīti nimittaṃ bhayato disvā samāpannattā animittā samāpatti nāma. Animittavihārasamāpattīti vipassanāvihāravasena ca phalasamāpattivasena ca tadubhayaṃ nāma hoti.
79 现在,为了将行相本身再作分解说明,而说出「色相」等。关于「执取老死」此节,应说的内容如前已述。接著以「另一种无相住……」等语句,将已说过者归纳后再作展示。简略来说:所谓「住」面之慧,是指在果等至的前行阶段、安住于行舍智的修行者,对「观住」种种差别的智慧;所谓「等至」面之慧,是指对「果等至」种种差别的智慧;所谓「住等至」面之慧,是指对此二者(观住与果等至住)种种差别的智慧。若他唯欲以观住度时,便唯令观住生起;若他唯欲以果等至住度时,便依观之次第精勤用功后,唯令果等至住生起;若欲依两者度时,便令两者俱起。如是,依修行者之欲而有此三种方式的差别。此处其余应说明者,皆已于行舍智的解说中述及。显示巴利原文
79. Idāni saṅkhāranimittameva vibhajitvā dassento rūpanimittantiādimāha. Jarāmaraṇaggahaṇe vattabbaṃ pubbe vuttameva. ‘‘Añño animittavihāro’’tiādīhi vutteyeva nigametvā dasseti. Saṅkhepena vihāraṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ nāma phalasamāpattiyā pubbabhāge saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇe ṭhitassa vipassanāvihāranānatte ñāṇaṃ samāpattaṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ nāma phalasamāpattinānatte ñāṇaṃ. Vihārasamāpattaṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ nāma tadubhayanānatte ñāṇaṃ. Vipassanāvihāreneva vītināmetukāmo vipassanāvihārameva pavatteti, phalasamāpattivihāreneva vītināmetukāmo vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā ussakkitvā phalasamāpattivihārameva pavatteti, tadubhayena vītināmetukāmo tadubhayaṃ pavatteti. Evaṃ puggalādhippāyavasena tividhaṃ jātaṃ. Sesamettha vattabbaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva.
无间等至智解说之注释。显示巴利原文
32. Ānantarikasamādhiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
80 在无间等至智解说中,「依出离之威力」等这段文指出:于「干观者」,出离、无嗔、光明想、无散乱、法之抉择、智慧及喜悦此七法,与近行禅那相应,它们各为对应烦恼之对治,且此七法同在一心中。「心一境性」即是「无散乱」:成为专一的状态名为一境性,因心不散乱于种种所缘,故称无散乱;亦即心一境性这一特质称为无散乱。「定」者,令心平等安住于同一所缘,故称为定。「依彼定之威力」是指,对于依近行定而得定者,因能如实通达诸法,故依彼已述之定力。「智慧生起」者,即依此第次,道智生起。「灭尽」谓以断之力而灭尽烦恼。「如是」二字,总结前述之义。「先有奢摩他」谓道之前行有定,「后有智慧」谓随后之道心刹那,智慧现起。显示巴利原文
80. Ānantarikasamādhiñāṇaniddese nekkhammavasenātiādīsu nekkhammaabyāpādaālokasaññāavikkhepadhammavavatthānañāṇapāmojjāni sukkhavipassakassa upacārajjhānasampayuttā tassa tassa kilesassa vipakkhabhūtā satta dhammā ekacittasampayuttā eva. Cittassa ekaggatā avikkhepoti ekaggassa bhāvo ekaggatā, nānārammaṇe na vikkhipati tena cittanti avikkhepo, cittassa ekaggatāsaṅkhāto avikkhepoti attho. Samādhīti ekārammaṇe samaṃ ādhīyati tena cittanti samādhi nāmāti attho. Tassa samādhissa vasenāti upacārasamādhināpi samāhitacittassa yathābhūtāvabodhato vuttappakārassa samādhissa vasena. Uppajjati ñāṇanti maggañāṇaṃ yathākkamena uppajjati. Khīyantīti samucchedavasena khīyanti. Itīti vuttappakārassa atthassa nigamanaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ samathoti pubbabhāge samādhi hoti. Pacchā ñāṇanti aparabhāge maggakkhaṇe ñāṇaṃ hoti.
「欲漏」是指对五种欲的贪染。「有漏」是指在色界与无色界的生存中,由欲贪、禅那之喜、与常见俱生的贪染,以及以渴求生有而展现的期盼。「见漏」是指六十二种邪见。「无明漏」是指对于苦等八种处境的不了知。此处以位格提问处所后,又以「透过入流道……」等语,显示了藉由能灭尽诸漏的道而灭尽诸漏,再以「在此处」回答了处所问题——即「道心刹那的时刻」。「无余」是指它没有任何残余留存。「导至恶趣者」:地狱、畜生道、饿鬼道、阿修罗身,这四者由于缺失善趣、远离福乐,故称为恶趣。若具足此结,便会令人投生恶趣,因此名为「导至恶趣者」。关于灭尽诸漏的详细论述,已在「两边出起之说」的部分说过。显示巴利原文
Kāmāsavoti pañcakāmaguṇikarāgo. Bhavāsavoti rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo jhānanikanti sassatadiṭṭhisahajāto rāgo bhavavasena patthanā. Diṭṭhāsavoti dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo. Avijjāsavoti dukkhādīsu aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu aññāṇaṃ. Bhummavacanena okāsapucchaṃ katvā ‘‘sotāpattimaggenā’’tiādinā āsavakkhayakarena maggena āsavakkhayaṃ dassetvā ‘‘etthā’’ti okāsavissajjanaṃ kataṃ, maggakkhaṇeti vuttaṃ hoti. Anavasesoti natthi etassa avasesoti anavaseso. Apāyagamanīyoti nirayatiracchānayonipettivisayāsurakāyā cattāro sukhasaṅkhātā ayā apetattā apāyā, yassa saṃvijjati , taṃ puggalaṃ apāye gametīti apāyagamanīyo. Āsavakkhayakathā dubhatovuṭṭhānakathāyaṃ vuttā.
「依无散乱之力」是指,凭借作为现前生起之定的近缘的定力。「依地遍之力……等」这段话中,十种遍,是依于以这些遍为所缘的安止定之力而说;佛随念等、死随念和寂止随念,则依近行禅那之力而说;入出息念和身至念,依安止定之力而说;十种不净观,依初禅之力而说。显示巴利原文
Avikkhepavasenāti pavattamānassa samādhissa upanissayabhūtasamādhivasena. Pathavīkasiṇavasenātiādīsu dasa kasiṇāni tadārammaṇikaappanāsamādhivasena vuttāni, buddhānussatiādayo maraṇassati upasamānussati ca upacārajjhānavasena vuttā, ānāpānassati kāyagatāsati ca appanāsamādhivasena vuttā, dasa asubhā paṭhamajjhānavasena vuttā.
以佛陀为对象而生起的随念,就是佛随念。这是指以“彼世尊是阿罗汉……”等佛陀功德为所缘的念(中部1.74;增支部3.71;9.27),即依于佛随念之力。同样地,以法为对象而生起的随念,就是法随念。这是指以“法为世尊所善说……”等法功德为所缘的念。以僧为对象而生起的随念,就是僧随念。这是指以“世尊的声闻僧团是善行道者……”等僧功德为所缘的念。以戒为对象而生起的随念,就是戒随念。这是指以自己戒行无缺等戒功德为所缘的念。以施为对象而生起的随念,就是施随念。这是指以自己慷慨无吝啬等施功德为所缘的念。以天为对象而生起的随念,就是天随念。这是指将诸天置于见证者的位置后,以自己信心等功德为所缘的念。以入出息为对象而生起的念,就是入出息念。这是指以入出息相为所缘的念。以死为对象而生起的念,就是死随念。这是指以“一生所包含的生命根断绝”为内涵的死为所缘的念。对于头发等这些属于厌恶、令人作呕的种种不净物,由于它们被包含、来源于这个叫作“身”的身体中,因而“已去”(存在于身中)、“已起”(在身中活动);或者说,缘于那样已去到身体各个部分的念,就是身至念。本来应当说“kāyagatasati”而保留简音形式,却说成了“kāyagatāsati”。在这里也是如此,说“以身至念之力”。这是指以头发等身体各部分的不净相为所缘的念。以寂静为对象而生起的随念,就是寂止随念。这是指以一切苦的止息为所缘的念。十种不净的意义,在前面已经说过。显示巴利原文
Buddhaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati buddhānussati. ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā araha’’ntiādibuddhaguṇārammaṇāya (ma. ni. 1.74; a. ni. 3.71; 9.27) satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tassā buddhānussatiyā vasena. Tathā dhammaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati dhammānussati. ‘‘Svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo’’tiādidhammaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saṅghaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati saṅghānussati. ‘‘Suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’’tiādisaṅghaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sīlaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati sīlānussati. Attano akhaṇḍatādisīlaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cāgaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati cāgānussati. Attano muttacāgatādicāgaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Devatā ārabbha uppannā anussati devatānussati. Devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā attano saddhādiguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ānāpāne ārabbha uppannā sati ānāpānassati. Ānāpānanimittārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Maraṇaṃ ārabbha uppannā sati maraṇassati. Ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyupacchedasaṅkhātamaraṇārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ kesādīnaṃ paṭikūlānaṃ āyattā ākarattā kāyotisaṅkhāte sarīre gatā pavattā, tādisaṃ vā kāyaṃ gatā sati kāyagatāsati. ‘‘Kāyagatasatī’’ti vattabbe rassaṃ akatvā ‘‘kāyagatāsatī’’ti vuttā. Tatheva idhāpi kāyagatāsativasenāti vuttaṃ. Kesādikesu kāyakoṭṭhāsesu paṭikūlanimittārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Upasamaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussati upasamānussati. Sabbadukkhūpasamārammaṇāya satiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Dasa asubhā heṭṭhā vuttatthā.
81 “依长入息的方式”等言说,唯是为了显示安止定与近行定的差别。“依长入息的方式”,即依于被称为“长”的入息。如经中说:“出息长时,他了知‘我出息长’……”(长部2.374;中部1.107;3.148)。余者同理。“觉知全身”,指觉知入出息的全部过程。“令身行宁静”,是说令粗显的、称为入出息的身行归于宁静、止息。由“长、短、觉知全身、令身行宁静”所成的这四句,说的是安止定。“觉知喜”,指令喜变得明确清晰。“觉知乐”,指令乐变得明确清晰。“觉知心行”,指令称为想与受的心行变得明确清晰。“令心行宁静”,指令粗显的心行归于宁静、止息。“觉知心”,指令心变得明确清晰。“令心欢喜”,是说令心喜悦。“令心入定”,是将心平稳地安置于所缘。“令心解脱”,是从五盖等障碍中解脱其心。觉知喜、觉知乐、觉知心行、令心行宁静这四句,以及觉知心、令心欢喜、令心入定、令心解脱这四句,是依安止定与观相应定而说的。“随观无常”,依无常随观的方式。“随观离欲”,依厌离随观的方式。“随观灭”,依坏灭随观的方式。“随观弃舍”,依出起观的方式。因为这种观,能显示巴利原文
81.Dīghaṃassāsavasenātiādīni appanūpacārasamādhibhedaṃyeva dassetuṃ vuttāni. Dīghaṃ assāsavasenāti dīghanti vuttaassāsavasena. ‘‘Dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānātī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.374; ma. ni. 1.107; 3.148) hi vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedīti sabbassa assāsapassāsakāyassa paṭisaṃvedī. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti oḷārikaṃ assāsapassāsaṅkhātaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento vūpasamento. ‘‘Dīghaṃ rassaṃ sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti imināva catukkena appanāsamādhi vutto. Pītipaṭisaṃvedīti pītiṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto. Cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedīti saññāvedanāsaṅkhātaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto. Abhippamodayaṃ cittanti cittaṃ modento. Samādahaṃ cittanti ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ṭhapento. Vimocayaṃ cittanti cittaṃ nīvaraṇādīhi vimocento. Pītipaṭisaṃvedī sukhapaṭisaṃvedī cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedī passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāranti catukkañca cittapaṭisaṃvedī abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ samādahaṃ cittaṃ vimocayaṃ cittanti catukkañca appanāsamādhivasena vipassanāsampayuttasamādhivasena ca vuttāni. Aniccānupassīti aniccānupassanāvasena. Virāgānupassīti nibbidānupasanāvasena. Nirodhānupassīti bhaṅgānupassanāvasena. Paṭinissaggānupassīti vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanāvasena. Sā hi tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati. Saṅkhatadosadassanena ca tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandati. Idaṃ catukkaṃ vipassanāsampayuttasamādhivaseneva vuttaṃ. Assāsavasena passāsavasenāti cettha assāsapassāsapavattimattaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ, na tadārammaṇakaraṇavasena. Vitthāro panettha ānāpānakathāyaṃ āvibhavissati.
33. 无诤住智的解说注释显示巴利原文
33. Araṇavihārañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
82 在无诤住智的解说中,无常随观等义前已述及。“空住”,是对于由无我随观出起者,纯粹以空相持续生起的阿拉汉果定。“无相住”,是对于由无常随观出起者,以无相相持续生起的阿拉汉果定。“无愿住”,是对于由苦随观出起者,以无愿相持续生起的阿拉汉果定。“已倾向于空”,指因空性果定前置分慧力的作用而倾向于此。其余二者亦然。“初禅”等言,是就那些欲证入阿拉汉果定者,其观以禅那定为所缘而说。实际上,唯有已断尽一切烦恼的阿拉汉,其与观、果定、殊胜倾向相应的禅那定,方可称为“无诤住”。显示巴利原文
82. Araṇavihārañāṇaniddese aniccānupassanādayo vuttatthā. Suññato vihāroti anattānupassanāya vuṭṭhitassa suññatākāreneva pavattā arahattaphalasamāpatti. Animitto vihāroti aniccānupassanāya vuṭṭhitassa animittākārena pavattā arahattaphalasamāpatti. Appaṇihitovihāroti dukkhānupassanāya vuṭṭhitassa appaṇihitākārena pavattā arahattaphalasamāpatti. Suññate adhimuttatāti suññate phalasamāpattiyā pubbabhāgapaññāvasena adhimuttatā. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Paṭhamaṃ jhānantiādīhi arahattaphalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitukāmassa vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā jhānasamāpattiyo vuttā. Arahatoyeva hi vipassanāphalasamāpattipaṇītādhimuttijhānasamāpattiyo sabbakilesānaṃ pahīnattā ‘‘araṇavihāro’’ti vattuṃ arahanti.
“以初禅去除诸盖,故为无诤住”的意思是:具足初禅者以初禅去除诸盖,因此那初禅称为无诤住。对其余诸禅,理趣亦同。应知,阿拉汉虽已无有盖,但因初禅与盖相违,故说“以初禅去除诸盖”。若问:已从观、果等至、胜解倾向三个方面开示了无诤住智,为何只将禅那等至说为无诤住?答:因为仅由开示,那三种无诤住性便已成立。然而,作为果等至与观之基础的禅那等至,若不说明其无诤住性便不能成立,故为了成立尚未成立的部分,而说“初禅为无诤住”等,应如此理解。因为那些禅那的无诤住性,虽未由开示成立,却由解说而成立了。或者,可依同一理趣作如下贯解:“无常随观去除常想,故为无诤住;苦随观去除乐想,故为无诤住;无我随观去除我想,故为无诤住;空住去除不空,故为无诤住;无相住去除相,故为无诤住;无愿住去除愿,故为无诤住;空胜解去除不空胜解,故为无诤住;无相胜解去除相胜解,故为无诤住;无愿胜解去除愿胜解,故为无诤住。”显示巴利原文
Paṭhamena jhānena nīvaraṇe haratīti araṇavihāroti paṭhamajjhānasamaṅgī paṭhamena jhānena nīvaraṇe haratīti taṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ araṇavihāroti attho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Arahato nīvaraṇābhāvepi nīvaraṇavipakkhattā paṭhamassa jhānassa nīvaraṇe haratīti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Vipassanāphalasamāpattipaṇītādhimuttivasena tidhā araṇavihārañāṇaṃ uddisitvā kasmā jhānasamāpattiyova araṇavihāroti niddiṭṭhāti ce? Uddesavaseneva tāsaṃ tissannaṃ araṇavihāratāya siddhattā. Phalasamāpattivipassanāya pana bhūmibhūtānaṃ jhānasamāpattīnaṃ araṇavihāratā avutte na sijjhati, tasmā asiddhameva sādhetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ araṇavihāro’’tiādi vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tāsañhi araṇavihāratā uddesavasena asiddhāpi niddese vuttattā siddhāti. Tesaṃ vā yojitanayeneva ‘‘aniccānupassanā niccasaññaṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, dukkhānupassanā sukhasaññaṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, anattānupassanā attasaññaṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, suññato vihāro asuññataṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, animitto vihāro nimittaṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, appaṇihito vihāro paṇidhiṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, suññatādhimuttatā asuññatādhimuttiṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, animittādhimuttatā nimittādhimuttiṃ haratīti araṇavihāro, appaṇihitādhimuttatā paṇihitādhimuttiṃ haratīti araṇavihāro’’ti yojetvā gahetabbaṃ.
34. 灭尽定智的解说显示巴利原文
34. Nirodhasamāpattiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
83 在灭尽定智的解说中,“止力”:平息欲贪等敌对法,故称为止;此止本身以不可动摇之義而称为力。唯有阿那含与阿拉汉,因已断除了定的敌对法——欲贪,于定中圆满成就,故唯他们之定得名为力,而说为“止力”,非于他人。另有“定力”的异读。“观力”:以无常等种种行相观察诸法,故称为观;此观本身以不可动摇之義而称为力。这便是由此二力所成就的观智。其中,止力是为渐次令心相续寂静,以及为生起灭尽;观力是为见到流转的过患,以及见到灭尽的功德。显示巴利原文
83. Nirodhasamāpattiñāṇaniddese samathabalanti kāmacchandādayo paccanīkadhamme sametīti samatho, soyeva akampanīyaṭṭhena balaṃ. Anāgāmiarahantānaṃyeva samādhipaṭipakkhassa kāmacchandassa pahānena samādhismiṃ paripūrakāribhāvappattattā tesaṃyeva samādhi balappattoti katvā ‘‘samathabala’’nti vuccati, na aññesaṃ. Samādhibalantipi pāṭho. Vipassanābalanti aniccādivasena vividhehi ākārehi dhamme passatīti vipassanā, sāyeva akampanīyaṭṭhena balaṃ. Tesaṃyeva ubhinnaṃ balappattaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Tattha samathabalaṃ anupubbena cittasantānavūpasamanatthaṃ nirodhe ca paṭipādanatthaṃ, vipassanābalaṃ pavatte ādīnavadassanatthaṃ nirodhe ca ānisaṃsadassanatthaṃ.
「于诸盖」:是表示因相处格,意为盖之相、盖之缘;或为表示工具处格,意为以盖。「不摇动」:指得禅那者。又因「禅那」意指诸禅支,故与初禅相应之定,于诸盖中不摇动。此处应取此解释。 「于掉举等」:即于掉举及与掉举俱生之心。掉举即是掉举性,其相为不寂静。「于掉举俱生烦恼等」:即与掉举俱生、同一生起等状态、与掉举相应之痴、无惭、无愧烦恼。「于诸蕴等」:即与掉举相应之四蕴。不摇动、不动、不震,三者同义。应连接为:于掉举不摇动,于掉举俱生烦恼不动,于掉举俱生蕴不震。应知:观力唯依七随观而说,故仅依此七,观力方得圆满。「于无明等」:即于生起十二不善心中之无明。「于无明俱生烦恼等」:即依相应之理,与无明相应之贪、瞋、慢、见、疑、惛沉、掉举、无惭、无愧烦恼。显示巴利原文
Nīvaraṇeti nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ, nīvaraṇanimittaṃ nīvaraṇapaccayāti attho. Karaṇatthe vā bhummavacanaṃ, nīvaraṇenāti attho. Na kampatīti jhānasamaṅgīpuggalo. Atha vā jhānanti jhānaṅgānaṃ adhippetattā paṭhamena jhānena taṃsampayuttasamādhi nīvaraṇe na kampati. Ayameva cettha yojanā gahetabbā. Uddhacce cāti uddhaccasahagatacittuppāde uddhacce ca. Uddhaccanti ca uddhatabhāvo , taṃ avūpasamalakkhaṇaṃ. Uddhaccasahagatakilese cāti uddhaccena sahagate ekuppādādibhāvaṃ gate uddhaccasampayutte mohaahirikaanottappakilese ca. Khandhe cāti uddhaccasampayuttacatukkhandhe ca. Na kampati na calati na vedhatīti aññamaññavevacanāni. Uddhacce na kampati, uddhaccasahagatakilese na calati, uddhaccasahagatakkhandhe na vedhatīti yojetabbaṃ. Vipassanābalaṃ sattannaṃyeva anupassanānaṃ vuttattā tāsaṃyeva vasena vipassanābalaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Avijjāya cāti dvādasasupi akusalacittuppādesu avijjāya ca. Avijjāsahagatakilese cāti yathāyogaṃ avijjāya sampayuttalobhadosamānadiṭṭhivicikicchāthinauddhaccaahirikaanottappakilese ca.
「语行」即寻与伺。如《中部》所说:「贤友维沙卡,先寻后伺,而后发语,故寻与伺为语行。」(《中部》1.463)由造作、生起语言,故称语行。「身行」即入出息。如所说:「贤友维沙卡,入出息是这些属身、系缚于身之法,故入出息为身行。」(《中部》1.463)由身所造作,故为身行。「想受灭」即想与受之灭。「心行」即想与受。如所说:「这些是心所法、系缚于心,故想与受为心行。」(《中部》1.463)由心所造作,故为心行。显示巴利原文
Vacīsaṅkhārāti vitakkavicārā. ‘‘Pubbe kho, āvuso visākha, vitakketvā vicāretvā pacchā vācaṃ bhindati, tasmā vitakkavicārā vacīsaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.463) vacanato vācaṃ saṅkharonti uppādentīti vacīsaṅkhārā. Kāyasaṅkhārāti assāsapassāsā. ‘‘Assāsapassāsā kho, āvuso visākha, kāyikā ete dhammā kāyapaṭibaddhā, tasmā assāsapassāsā kāyasaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.463) vacanato kāyena saṅkharīyantīti kāyasaṅkhārā. Saññāvedayitanirodhanti saññāya vedanāya ca nirodhaṃ. Cittasaṅkhārāti saññā ca vedanā ca. ‘‘Cetasikā ete dhammā cittapaṭibaddhā, tasmā saññā ca vedanā ca cittasaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.463) vacanato cittena saṅkharīyantīti cittasaṅkhārā.
84 应知:在智行中,于随观之末,或以摄转向随观——彼为行说之始——而说为智行,故其余随观亦已被摄。所谓「以十六智行」,是就最胜界限而言;然阿那含除阿罗汉道与阿罗汉果外,亦能以十四智行而令力圆满。显示巴利原文
84. Ñāṇacariyāsu anupassanāvasāne, vivaṭṭanānupassanāgahaṇena vā tassā ādibhūtā cariyākathāya ñāṇacariyāti vuttā sesānupassanāpi gahitā hontīti veditabbaṃ. Soḷasahi ñāṇacariyāhīti ca ukkaṭṭhaparicchedo, anāgāmissa pana arahattamaggaphalavajjāhi cuddasahipi hoti paripuṇṇabalattā.
85 在“九种定行”一节:初禅等八种安止,加上为证得初禅等而于一切处修习的近行定,合为九种定行。那么,这些与力行有何差别?其实,在止力中,也通过“以出离”等七种方式说明了近行定;在广说中,又通过“以初禅”等七十七种情况,随宜说明了安止及近行定;而在定行中,同样通过“初禅”等八种方式说明了安止定,又通过“为证得初禅”等八种方式说明了近行定。因此,这两者所说的无非都是安止定与近行定。然而应知:从不可动摇的意义说,它们是力;从自在的意义说,它们则是行。但就观力而言,七种随观便被称为“观力”;而在智行中,不仅说了七种随观,还特别提到了还灭随观等九种。这就是它们的差别。同样,七种随观应以不可动摇的意义作为力,以自在的意义作为行。显示巴利原文
85.Navahi samādhicariyāhīti ettha paṭhamajjhānādīhi aṭṭha, paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ paṭilābhatthāya sabbattha upacārajjhānavasena ekāti nava samādhicariyā. Balacariyānaṃ kiṃ nānattaṃ? Samathabalenapi hi ‘‘nekkhammavasenā’’tiādīhi sattahi pariyāyehi upacārasamādhi vutto, peyyālavitthārato ‘‘paṭhamajjhānavasenā’’tiādīhi samasattatiyā vārehi yathāyogaṃ appanūpacārasamādhi vutto, samādhicariyāyapi ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhāna’’ntiādīhi aṭṭhahi pariyāyehi appanāsamādhi vutto. Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ paṭilābhatthāyātiādīhi aṭṭhahi pariyāyehi upacārasamādhi vuttoti ubhayatthāpi appanūpacārasamādhiyeva vutto. Evaṃ santepi akampiyaṭṭhena balāni vasībhāvaṭṭhena cariyāti veditabbā. Vipassanābale pana satta anupassanāva ‘‘vipassanābala’’nti vuttā, ñāṇacariyāya satta ca anupassanā vuttā, vivaṭṭanānupassanādayo nava ca visesetvā vuttā. Idaṃ nesaṃ nānattaṃ. Satta anupassanā pana akampiyaṭṭhena balāni vasībhāvaṭṭhena cariyāti veditabbā.
解释“自在状态之慧”中的“自在”时,说到“自在”即五种自在,此处以阴性名词称之。“自在”本身就是“自在”。接着,在以补特伽罗安立的教法中,为解释这些自在,又说“转向自在”等。所谓“转向自在”,即于转向得自在,具足此自在者,名为转向自在者。其余各项同理。“于所欲处入初禅”:无论想在村庄还是森林等处,皆能随心所欲转向初禅。“于所欲时”:无论想在寒冷或炎热等时,皆能随心所欲转向。或可解释为:无论想入何种初禅——或依地遍,或依其它遍处为所缘,皆能随心所欲转向。由于经中已说明对每一种遍处所缘的禅皆能获得自在,因此前一种解释更为合理。“于所欲的时长”:无论想入一弹指顷,抑或七日之久,皆能按那样的时长转向。“对于转向”:指意门转向。“迟钝”:指不能自在掌控的状态,或懈怠的状态。“入定”:指进入修习,即安止。“住定”:指于等至之中,增强其力而安住。“于出定自在,初禅”:此处的“初禅”是出格的宾格,意为从初禅出定。“观”显示巴利原文
‘‘Vasībhāvatā paññā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.34 mātikā) ettha vuttavasiyo vissajjetuṃ vasīti pañca vasiyoti itthiliṅgavohārena vuttaṃ. Vaso eva vasīti vuttaṃ hoti. Puna puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya tā vasiyo vissajjento āvajjanavasītiādimāha. Āvajjanāya vaso āvajjanavaso, so assa atthīti āvajjanavasī. Eseva nayo sesesu. Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ yatthicchakanti yattha yattha padese icchati gāme vā araññe vā, tattha tattha āvajjati. Yadicchakanti yadā yadā kāle sītakāle vā uṇhakāle vā, tadā tadā āvajjati. Atha vā yaṃ yaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ icchati pathavīkasiṇārammaṇaṃ vā sesārammaṇaṃ vā, taṃ taṃ āvajjati. Ekekakasiṇārammaṇassāpi jhānassa vasitānaṃ vuttattā purimayojanāyeva sundaratarā. Yāvaticchakanti yāvatakaṃ kālaṃ icchati accharāsaṅghātamattaṃ sattāhaṃ vā, tāvatakaṃ kālaṃ āvajjati. Āvajjanāyāti manodvārāvajjanāya. Dandhāyitattanti avasavattibhāvo, alasabhāvo vā. Samāpajjatīti paṭipajjati, appetīti attho. Adhiṭṭhātīti antosamāpattiyaṃ adhikaṃ katvā tiṭṭhati. Vuṭṭhānavasiyaṃpaṭhamaṃ jhānanti nissakkatthe upayogavacanaṃ, paṭhamajjhānāti attho. Paccavekkhatīti paccavekkhaṇajavanehi nivattitvā passati. Ayamettha pāḷivaṇṇanā.
以下阐明其义:从初禅出定后,当禅修者转向“寻”时,切断有分之后,转向心生起;紧接其后,便生起以“寻”为所缘的四或五个速行心;其后有两个有分心;随后再转向“伺”为所缘,如前所述生起速行。如此,当禅修者能对五个禅支无间断地运心时,他的“转向自在”便已成就。然而,这种到达极点的转向自在,只有在世尊示现双神变时才可获得,再没有比此更快的转向自在了。其他修行者在其中所经过的有分心,其数量无法计算。如同大目犍连尊者调伏难陀乌巴难达龙王时那样,能够迅速入等至的能力,称为“入定自在”。能够将等至安住一弹指或十弹指的短暂时间,称为“住定自在”。同样,能够迅速从该定中出定,称为“出定自在”。而“观察自在”,其实在说转向自在时便已解释:因为在那里,转向无间之后即有观察速行生起。因此,转向自在成就时,观察自在也就成就;住定自在成就时,出定自在也就成就。虽然如此,由于提到“这种到达极点的自在,仅在世尊的双神变中可得”,因此在示现神变时,并没有对禅支的观察,并且种种颜色的化现……显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana atthappakāsanā – paṭhamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya vitakkaṃ āvajjayato bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā pavattāvajjanānantaraṃ vitakkārammaṇāneva cattāri pañca vā javanāni javanti, tato dve bhavaṅgāni, tato puna vicārārammaṇaṃ āvajjanaṃ vuttanayeneva javanānīti evaṃ pañcasu jhānaṅgesu yadā nirantaraṃ cittaṃ pesetuṃ sakkoti, athassa āvajjanavasī siddhāva hoti. Ayaṃ pana matthakappattā vasī bhagavato yamakapāṭihāriyeva labbhati. Ito paraṃ sīghatarā āvajjanavasī nāma natthi. Aññesaṃ pana antarantarā bhavaṅgavāre gaṇanā natthi. Mahāmoggallānattherassa nandopanandadamane viya sīghaṃ samāpattisamāpajjanasamatthatā samāpajjanavasī nāma. Accharāmattaṃ vā dasaccharāmattaṃ vā khaṇaṃ samāpattiṃ ṭhapetuṃ samatthatā adhiṭṭhānavasī nāma. Tatheva tato lahuṃ vuṭṭhānasamatthatā vuṭṭhānavasī nāma. Paccavekkhaṇavasī pana āvajjanavasiyā eva vuttā. Paccavekkhaṇajavanāneva hi tattha āvajjanānantarānīti. Iti āvajjanavasiyā siddhāya paccavekkhaṇavasī siddhā hoti, adhiṭṭhānavasiyā ca siddhāya vuṭṭhānavasī siddhā hoti. Evaṃ santepi ‘‘ayaṃ pana matthakappattā vasī bhagavato yamakapāṭihāriyeva labbhatī’’ti vuttattā pāṭihāriyakāle jhānaṅgapaccavekkhaṇānaṃ abhāvato nānāvidhavaṇṇādinimmānassa nānākasiṇavasena ijjhanato taṃtaṃkasiṇārammaṇaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitukāmassa yathāruci lahuṃ tasmiṃ kasiṇe vuttanayena āvajjanapavattanasamatthatā āvajjanavasī, tadāvajjanavīthiyaṃyeva tassa jhānassa appanāsamatthatāsamāpajjanasamatthatā samāpajjanavasī. Evañhi vuccamāne yutti ca na virujjhati, vasīpaṭipāṭi ca yathākkameneva yujjati. Jhānaṅgapaccavekkhaṇāyaṃ pana ‘‘matthakappattāyeva pañca javanānī’’ti vuttattā vuttanayena sattasupi javanesu javantesu paccavekkhaṇavasīyeva hoti. Evaṃ sante ‘‘paṭhamajjhānaṃ āvajjatī’’ti vacanaṃ na yujjatīti ce? Yathā kasiṇe pavattaṃ jhānaṃ kāraṇopacārena kasiṇanti vuttaṃ, tathā jhānapaccayaṃ kasiṇaṃ ‘‘sukho buddhānamuppādo’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 194) viya phalopacārena jhānanti vuttaṃ. Yathāparicchinne kāle ṭhatvā vuṭṭhitassa niddāya pabuddhassa puna niddokkamane viya puna jhānokkamane satipi adhiṭṭhānavasīyeva nāma, yathāparicchedena vuṭṭhitassa pana vuṭṭhāneyeva adhiṭṭhāne satipi vuṭṭhānavasī nāma hotīti ayaṃ tesaṃ viseso.
为阐明灭尽定,兹列一组问题:什么是灭尽定?哪些人能入此定,哪些人不能?在何处入?为何入?如何入?如何住?如何出?出定者的心倾向于什么?死者与入定者有何差别?灭尽定是有为法,还是无为法?是世间法,还是出世间法?是所造法,还是非所造法?显示巴利原文
Nirodhasamāpattiyā vibhāvanatthaṃ pana idaṃ pañhakammaṃ – kā nirodhasamāpatti, ke taṃ samāpajjanti, ke na samāpajjanti, kattha samāpajjanti, kasmā samāpajjanti, kathañcassā samāpajjanaṃ hoti, kathaṃ ṭhānaṃ, kathaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ, vuṭṭhitassa kinninnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, matassa ca samāpannassa ca ko viseso, nirodhasamāpatti kiṃ saṅkhatā asaṅkhatā lokiyā lokuttarā nipphannā anipphannāti?
什么是灭尽定?即依渐次灭,心与心所法不再转起。显示巴利原文
Tattha kā nirodhasamāpattīti? Yā anupubbanirodhavasena cittacetasikānaṃ dhammānaṃ appavatti.
哪些人能入此定,哪些人不能?一切凡夫、入流者、一来者、干观不来者以及阿拉汉,皆不能入此定。唯有证得八等至的不来者与漏尽者,方能入此定。显示巴利原文
Ke taṃ samāpajjanti, ke na samāpajjantīti? Sabbepi puthujjanā sotāpannā sakadāgāmino sukkhavipassakā ca anāgāmī arahanto na samāpajjanti, aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino pana anāgāmino ca khīṇāsavā ca samāpajjanti.
在何处入此定?在五蕴有中入。为什么呢?因为那里有次第等至。在四蕴有中,初禅等根本不生起,所以不能在那里入定。显示巴利原文
Katthasamāpajjantīti? Pañcavokārabhave. Kasmā? Anupubbasamāpattisabbhāvato. Catuvokārabhave pana paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ uppattiyeva natthi, tasmā na sakkā tattha samāpajjituṃ.
为什么入此定?由于厌离了诸行的生灭变易,他们希望于现法成为无心者,“证得灭尽涅槃后安乐而住”,因此进入此定。显示巴利原文
Kasmā samāpajjantīti? Saṅkhārānaṃ pavattibhede ukkaṇṭhitvā diṭṭheva dhamme acittakā hutvā ‘‘nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ patvā sukhaṃ viharissāmā’’ti samāpajjanti.
如何入此定呢?以止与观上进,已作前行之事者,令非想非非想处灭时,便这样入定。若仅依止上进,则证得非想非非想处等至后便停住;若仅依观上进,则证得果等至后便停住。唯有依止与观二者上进,令非想非非想处灭者,方能入此定。这就是对此的要略。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ cassā samāpajjanaṃ hotīti? Samathavipassanāvasena ussakkitvā katapubbakiccassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ nirodhayato evamassā samāpajjanaṃ hoti. Yo hi samathavaseneva ussakkati, so nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ patvā tiṭṭhati. Yo vipassanāvaseneva ussakkati, so phalasamāpattiṃ patvā tiṭṭhati. Yo pana ubhayavasena ussakkitvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ nirodheti, so taṃ samāpajjatīti ayamettha saṅkhepo.
以下是详细解说:比丘欲入灭尽定,于饭后料理诸事,洗净手足,在寂静处,坐于敷设好的座具上,结跏趺坐,端正身体,安立正念于面前。他先入初禅,从初禅出定后,于彼处观诸行无常、苦、无我。此观有三种:诸行把握观、果等至观、灭尽定观。其中,诸行把握观无论钝利,皆当成为道之亲依止。果等至观必须锋利,相似于修道。而灭尽定观则不适宜过钝或过利。因此,他以不太钝、不太利的观来观察那些诸行。然后入第二禅,出定后,同样观察其中诸行。接着入第三禅……乃至入识无边处,出定后,同样观察。之后入无所有处,出定后,作四种预备任务:不破坏非共缚物、等待僧团、佛陀召唤、以及限定时间。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana vitthāro – idha bhikkhu nirodhaṃ samāpajjitukāmo katabhattakicco sudhotahatthapādo vivitte okāse supaññatte āsane nisīdati pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā. So paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya tattha saṅkhāre aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassati. Vipassanā panesā tividhā hoti – saṅkhārapariggaṇhanakavipassanā, phalasamāpattivipassanā, nirodhasamāpattivipassanāti. Tattha saṅkhārapariggaṇhanakavipassanā mandā vā hotu tikkhā vā, maggassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hotiyeva. Phalasamāpattivipassanā tikkhāva vaṭṭati maggabhāvanāsadisā. Nirodhasamāpattivipassanā pana nātimandā nātitikkhā vaṭṭati. Tasmā esa nātimandāya nātitikkhāya vipassanāya te saṅkhāre vipassati. Tato dutiyajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya tattha saṅkhāre tatheva vipassati. Tato tatiyajjhānaṃ…pe… tato viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya tattha saṅkhāre tatheva vipassati. Atha ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya catubbidhaṃ pubbakiccaṃ karoti – nānābaddhaavikopanaṃ, saṅghapaṭimānanaṃ, satthupakkosanaṃ, addhānaparicchedanti.
其中,“不破坏非共缚物”即:与这位比丘不共执、各别放置的物品,如钵与衣、床与椅、住所,或其他任何种资具,为避免其遭受火焚、水淹、风吹、盗贼、鼠啮等破坏,他应当如此决意。此处决意的方法为:“愿这些及那些物品,于七日内,不为火所烧,不为水所漂,不为风所刮毁,不为贼所窃,不为鼠等所啮。”如此决意后,七日之内,那些物品即免于任何灾厄;若不决意,则可能被火等所毁。这就称为“不破坏非共缚物”。至于那些与比丘共执的物品,如下衣、上衣或所坐的座位,则无需另行决意;单凭此灭尽定之力便能护佑之。显示巴利原文
Tattha nānābaddhaavikopananti yaṃ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekābaddhaṃ na hoti, nānābaddhaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ pattacīvaraṃ vā mañcapīṭhaṃ vā nivāsagehaṃ vā aññaṃ vā pana kiñci parikkhārajātaṃ, taṃ yathā na vikuppati, aggiudakavātacoraundūrādīnaṃ vasena na vinassati, evaṃ adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Tatridaṃ adhiṭṭhānavidhānaṃ – ‘‘idañcidañca imasmiṃ sattāhabbhantare mā agginā jhāyatu, mā udakena vuyhatu, mā vātena viddhaṃsatu, mā corehi harīyatu, mā undūrādīhi khajjatū’’ti. Evaṃ adhiṭṭhite taṃ sattāhaṃ tassa na koci parissayo hoti, anadhiṭṭhahato pana aggiādīhi vinassati. Idaṃ nānābaddhaavikopanaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana ekābaddhaṃ hoti nivāsanapārupanaṃ vā nisinnāsanaṃ vā, tattha visuṃ adhiṭṭhānakiccaṃ natthi, samāpattiyeva naṃ rakkhati.
什么是“等待僧团”?即对比丘僧团的等候与期待,意思是:“直至那位比丘到来之前,不举行僧团羯磨。”在此,“等待”本身并非预备任务,而对等待的“作意”才是预备任务。因此,应当如此作意:“若我入灭尽定,坐满七日,期间僧团欲行白二甘马等任何羯磨,那么,直至有比丘前来唤我,我当即出定。”如此作意而后入定者,届时必定出定。若不这样作意,当僧团集会时,见不到那位比丘,便问:“某比丘在何处?”答:“他入了灭尽定。”于是僧团便派一位比丘去,说:“去,以僧团的名义唤他出定。”那位比丘便站在可听闻处,说:“贤友,僧团等候您。”话音一落,他立即出定。因为僧团的敕令极为重大。因此,应当先作此意而后入定,以便自己能及时出定。显示巴利原文
Saṅghapaṭimānananti bhikkhusaṅghassa paṭimānanaṃ udikkhanaṃ. Yāva eso bhikkhu āgacchati, tāva saṅghakammassa akaraṇanti attho. Ettha ca na paṭimānanaṃ etassa pubbakiccaṃ, paṭimānanāvajjanaṃ pana pubbakiccaṃ. Tasmā evaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ – ‘‘sace mayi sattāhaṃ nirodhaṃ samāpajjitvā nisinne saṅgho apalokanakammādīsu kiñcideva kammaṃ kattukāmo hoti, yāva maṃ koci bhikkhu āgantvā na pakkosati, tāvadeva vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti. Evaṃ katvā samāpanno hi tasmiṃ samaye vuṭṭhātiyeva. Yo pana evaṃ na karoti, saṅgho ca sannipatitvā taṃ apassanto ‘‘asuko bhikkhu kuhi’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘nirodhaṃ samāpanno’’ti vutte kañci bhikkhuṃ peseti ‘‘gaccha taṃ saṅghassa vacanena pakkosā’’ti. Athassa tena bhikkhunā savanūpacāre ṭhatvā ‘‘saṅgho taṃ āvuso paṭimānetī’’ti vuttamatteyeva vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Evaṃgarukā hi saṅghassa āṇā nāma. Tasmā taṃ āvajjitvā yathā sayameva vuṭṭhāti, evaṃ samāpajjitabbaṃ.
「导师召唤」:此处同样以作意导师的召唤为其前行准备。因此,应当如此作意:「若我入灭尽定安坐七日期间,导师因所发生之事而制定学处,或依类似因缘而说法——若无人前来召唤,我便不出定。」如此作意后再入坐者,届时必定出定。若不作如是作意,导师在僧团集会时不见那位比丘,问:「某比丘何在?」答言:「已入灭尽定。」导师便会差遣一位比丘,说道:「去,以我之言召唤他。」那位比丘便站在可听闻之处说:「导师召唤尊者。」话音刚落,他即刻便出定了。因为导师的召唤是极其重大之事。因此,应当如此作意之后再入定,以便能自行出定。显示巴利原文
Satthupakkosananti idhāpi satthupakkosanāvajjanameva imassa pubbakiccaṃ. Tasmā tampi evaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ – ‘‘sace mayi sattāhaṃ nirodhaṃ samāpajjitvā nisinne satthā otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ sikkhāpadaṃ vā paññapeti, tathārūpāya vā aṭṭhuppattiyā dhammaṃ deseti. Yāva maṃ koci āgantvā na pakkosati, tāvadeva vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti. Evaṃ katvā nisinno hi tasmiṃ samaye vuṭṭhātiyeva. Yo pana evaṃ na karoti, satthā ca saṅghe sannipatite taṃ apassanto ‘‘asuko bhikkhu kuhi’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘nirodhaṃ samāpanno’’ti vutte kañci bhikkhuṃ peseti ‘‘gaccha taṃ mama vacanena pakkosā’’ti. Athassa tena bhikkhunā savanūpacāre ṭhatvā satthā āyasmantaṃ āmantetī’’ti vuttamatteyeva vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Evaṃgarukañhi satthupakkosanaṃ. Tasmā taṃ āvajjitvā yathā sayameva vuṭṭhāti, evaṃ samāpajjitabbaṃ.
「时限限定」:指对生命时限的限定。这位比丘必须善知寿命时限,应当先作意:「我的寿行于七日之内将持续,抑或不会持续?」之后方可入定。若他的寿行将于七日内灭尽,而未作意便入定,则其灭尽定并不能遮止死亡。因为在灭尽定中不会发生死亡,他将于中途出定;所以必须对此作意之后方可入定。其余事项即便不作意尚可,但此项却必须作意。他如此从无所有处定入定,出定后完成这些前行准备,再进入非想非非想处定。随后,经一个或两个心识刹那,便成为无心,触及了灭。为何于二心之后心识不再生起?因为这是为入灭而作之加行。这位比丘将止与观二法结合并行,次第入于八种等至,这是为渐次入灭而作之加行,并非为获得非想非非想处定而作之加行;是故,由于入灭之加行,于二心之后心识便不再生起。显示巴利原文
Addhānaparicchedoti jīvitaddhānassa paricchedo. Iminā hi bhikkhunā addhānaparicchede kusalena bhavitabbaṃ. ‘‘Attano āyusaṅkhārā sattāhaṃ pavattissanti, na pavattissantī’’ti āvajjitvāva samāpajjitabbaṃ. Sace hi sattāhabbhantare nirujjhanake āyusaṅkhāre anāvajjitvāva samāpajjati, tassa nirodhasamāpatti maraṇaṃ paṭibāhituṃ na sakkoti. Antonirodhe maraṇassa natthitāya antarāva samāpattito vuṭṭhāti, tasmā etaṃ āvajjitvāva samāpajjitabbaṃ. Avasesañhi anāvajjitumpi vaṭṭati, idaṃ pana āvajjitabbamevāti vuttaṃ. So evaṃ ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya imaṃ pubbakiccaṃ katvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samāpajjati. Athekaṃ vā dve vā cittavāre atikkamitvā acittako hoti, nirodhaṃ phusati. Kasmā panassa dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ upari cittāni nappavattantīti? Nirodhassa payogattā. Idañhi imassa bhikkhuno dve samathavipassanādhamme yuganaddhe katvā aṭṭhasamāpattiārohanaṃ anupubbanirodhassa payogo, na nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyāti nirodhassa payogattā dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ upari nappavattanti.
「如何安住?」:如此入定之后,依于时限的限定,以及中间无寿尽、无僧团期待、无导师召唤此三种情况,而得以安住。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ ṭhānanti? Evaṃ samāpannāya panassā kālaparicchedavasena ceva antarā āyukkhayasaṅghapaṭimānanasatthupakkosanābhāvena ca ṭhānaṃ hoti.
如何出定?出定有两种:不来者以不来果等至而出定,阿拉汉以阿拉汉果等至而出定。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ vuṭṭhānanti? Anāgāmissa anāgāmiphalasamāpattiyā arahato arahattaphalasamāpattiyāti evaṃ dvedhā vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti.
出定者的心倾向什么?倾向涅槃。如经中说:“毗舍佉贤友,从想受灭定出定的比丘,其心倾向远离、趣向远离、趋向远离。”(《中部》1.464)显示巴利原文
Vuṭṭhitassa kinninnaṃ cittaṃ hotīti? Nibbānaninnaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhitassa kho, āvuso visākha, bhikkhuno vivekaninnaṃ cittaṃ hoti vivekapoṇaṃ vivekapabbhāra’’nti (ma. ni. 1.464).
死者与入定者有何差别?此义经中已说。如经云:“贤友,那已死、命终者,其身行已灭、已止息,语行、心行已灭、已止息,寿命已尽,暖气已消散,诸根已坏。而此入想受灭定的比丘,其身行亦已灭、已止息,语行、心行亦已灭、已止息,然寿命未尽,暖气未消散,诸根不坏。”(《中部》1.457)显示巴利原文
Matassa ca samāpannassa ca ko visesoti? Ayampi attho sutte vuttoyeva. Yathāha – ‘‘yo cāyaṃ, āvuso, mato kālaṅkato, tassa kāyasaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, vacīsaṅkhārā, cittasaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, āyu parikkhīṇo, usmā vūpasantā, indriyāni paribhinnāni. Yvāyaṃ bhikkhu saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ samāpanno, tassapi kāyasaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, vacīsaṅkhārā, cittasaṅkhārā niruddhā paṭippassaddhā, āyu aparikkhīṇo, usmā avūpasantā, indriyāni aparibhinnānī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.457).
在“灭尽定是有为”等问难中,不可说它是“有为”,也不可说它是“无为”;不可说它是“世间”,也不可说它是“出世间”。为什么呢?因为就其自性而言,它并非实有。然而,由于依入定者而假名为“入定”,故可说它是“所成”,不可说它是“非所成”。显示巴利原文
Nirodhasamāpatti kiṃ saṅkhatātiādipucchāyaṃ pana ‘‘saṅkhatā’’tipi ‘‘asaṅkhatā’’tipi ‘‘lokiyā’’tipi ‘‘lokuttarā’’tipi na vattabbā. Kasmā? Sabhāvato natthitāya. Yasmā pana samāpajjantassa vasena samāpanno nāma hoti, tasmā nipphannāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati, no anipphannāti.
如是,此定寂静,为圣者所亲近;
于现法中,即称为涅槃。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Iti santā samāpatti, ayaṃ ariyanisevitā; Diṭṭheva dhamme nibbānamiti saṅkhamupāgatā’’ti.
35. 般涅槃智论释义显示巴利原文
35. Parinibbānañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
86 86. 在般涅槃智论中,「于此」指在此教法中。「正知」即通过四种正知而成为正知:有益正知、适宜正知、行境正知、无痴正知。「流转」指在一切处,随其所应,以现行而起的流转及以随眠而存的流转。「遍取」的意思是:对于通过近行定与安止定所述者,以镇伏的方式灭尽;对于通过观所述者,以彼分断的方式灭尽;对于通过道所述者,以正断的方式灭尽,令其不再生起。以此略说,亦涵盖了第二禅那等定、大观及圣道。当修行者如此观察时,此观察流转之智即称为般涅槃智,因而镇伏般涅槃、彼分般涅槃、正断般涅槃亦已述及。依此诸义,说明了观察烦恼般涅槃的智。随后,又以「又或」等词指出观察蕴般涅槃的智。「无余涅槃界」:涅槃界有两种,即有余涅槃界与无余涅槃界。其中,因为被强烈地显示巴利原文
86. Parinibbānañāṇaniddese idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Sampajānoti sātthakasampajaññaṃ, sappāyasampajaññaṃ, gocarasampajaññaṃ, asammohasampajaññanti imehi catūhi sampajaññehi sampajāno. Pavattanti sabbattha yathānurūpaṃ pariyuṭṭhānapavattañca anusayappavattañca. Pariyādiyatīti upacārappanāvasena vuttesu vikkhambhanavasena, vipassanāvasena vuttesu tadaṅgavasena, maggavasena vuttesu samucchedavasena khepeti appavattaṃ karoti. Peyyālamukhena hi dutiyādijhānasamāpattimahāvipassanāmaggā saṃkhittā. Yasmā etaṃ paccavekkhantassa pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ parinibbāne ñāṇaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā vikkhambhanaparinibbānaṃ tadaṅgaparinibbānaṃ samucchedaparinibbānantipi vuttameva hoti. Etehi kilesaparinibbānapaccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Atha vā panātiādīhi khandhaparinibbānapaccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ niddisati. Anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyāti duvidhā hi nibbānadhātu saupādisesā ca anupādisesā ca. Tattha upādīyate ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti bhusaṃ gaṇhīyatīti upādi, khandhapañcakassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Upādiyeva seso avasiṭṭhoti upādiseso, saha upādisesena vattatīti saupādisesā. Natthettha upādisesoti anupādisesā. Saupādisesā paṭhamaṃ vuttā. Ayaṃ pana anupādisesā. Tāya anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā. Cakkhupavattanti cakkhupavatti cakkhusamudācāro. Pariyādiyatīti khepīyati maddīyatīti. Esa nayo sesesu.
36. 等首义智论释义显示巴利原文
36. Samasīsaṭṭhañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
87 87.在‘等首义智论’中,应知一切法由‘五蕴’等十种聚集所摄。并非仅凭处、界、蕴之外的其余八种聚集,便能各自分别含摄一切法。然而,由于出世间法并非以因的正断而可断除,因此虽‘一切法’之语亦摄出世间法,但在此正断的语境中,则不将其计入;唯有必须以因的正断方能断除的三地法,方被取用。‘正断’(sammā samucchindati)意为:以适当的方法,通过镇伏、彼分、正断的断除,令现行的烦恼与随眠的烦恼止息,从而正断。如此,以众生为主要的宣说对象,阐明了正断。‘灭’(nirodheti)意为:以不复生起的灭而使之灭尽,这也就是正断的含义。‘不现起’(na upaṭṭhāti)意为:如此灭后,诸法不再显现,即不再生起,这也就是灭的含义。如是,由法的不现起,说明了不现起的状态。‘等’(samaṃ)意为:因贪欲等已被平息,故是平等的。那些诸法即是:七种出离、八种色界及无色界禅那、十八种大观、四种圣道,显示巴利原文
87. Samasīsaṭṭhañāṇaniddese pañcakkhandhātiādīhi dasahi rāsīhi sabbadhammasaṅgaho veditabbo. Na hi ekekassa vasena āyatanadhāturāsivajjehi sesehi aṭṭhahi rāsīhi visuṃ visuṃ sabbadhammo saṅgayhatīti. Yasmā pana lokuttaradhammā hetusamucchedena samucchinditabbā na honti, tasmā sabbadhammasaddena saṅgahitāpi lokuttaradhammā samucchedavasena sambhavato idha na gahetabbā, hetusamucchedena samucchinditabbā eva tebhūmakadhammā gahetabbā. Sammā samucchindatīti yathāyogaṃ vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedapahānavasena pariyuṭṭhānaṃ anusayañca nirodhento sammā samucchindati. Evaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya sammā samucchedo niddiṭṭho. Nirodhetīti anuppādanirodhena nirodheti. Iminā samucchedattho vutto. Na upaṭṭhātīti evaṃ nirodhe kate so so dhammo puna na upatiṭṭhati, na uppajjatīti attho. Iminā nirodhattho vutto. Evaṃ anupaṭṭhahanadhammavasena anupaṭṭhānabhāvo niddiṭṭho. Samanti kāmacchandādīnaṃ samitattā samaṃ. Tāni pana nekkhammādīni satta, rūpārūpajjhānāni aṭṭha, mahāvipassanā aṭṭhārasa, ariyamaggā cattāroti sattatiṃsa honti.
虽然总共以十三种‘头’涵盖了一切被称为‘头’的内容,但在这里,适合的唯有信等八种头,因为阿拉汉已无渴爱等五种头。‘盖障首’(palibodhasīsa):盖障是束缚,意为障碍涅槃之道;‘首’意为首要、增上。盖障本身即是首,或在与彼相应等一切盖障中而为首要,故称盖障首。其余词语亦同此理。别释如下:‘结缚’(vinibandhana)是因增上慢而在轮回中产生的束缚;‘执取’(parāmāsa)即是错误的执著;‘散乱’(vikkhepa)即是散乱的状态;‘烦恼’(kilesa)即是染污;‘胜解’(adhimokkha)即是信解;‘策励’(paggaha)即是努力;‘现起’(upaṭṭhāna)即是令其现前;‘不散乱’(avikkhepa)即是不散乱的状态;‘见’(dassana)即是如实地通达;‘流转’(pavatta)即是已执取的五蕴之流转;‘行境’(gocara)即是所缘。在此十二种情形中,‘首’的意思就是主要的意思。‘解脱’(vimokkha):于镇伏解脱、彼分解脱显示巴利原文
Terasa sīsāni sīsabhūtānaṃ sabbesaṃ saṅgahavasena vuttāni. Idha pana saddhādīni aṭṭheva sīsāni yujjanti. Na hi arahato taṇhādīni pañca sīsāni santi. Palibodhasīsanti palibundhanaṃ palibodho, nibbānamaggāvaraṇanti attho. Sīsanti padhānaṃ, adhikanti attho. Palibodhoyeva sīsaṃ, taṃsampayuttādisabbapalibodhesu vā sīsanti palibodhasīsaṃ. Esa nayo sesesu. Visesato pana vinibandhananti unnativasena saṃsāre bandhanaṃ. Parāmāsoti abhiniveso. Vikkhepoti vippakiṇṇatā. Kilesoti kilissanaṃ. Adhimokkhoti adhimuccanaṃ. Paggahoti ussāhanaṃ. Upaṭṭhānanti apilāpanaṃ. Avikkhepoti avippakiṇṇatā. Dassananti yathāsabhāvapaṭivedho. Pavattanti upādinnakkhandhapavattaṃ. Gocaroti ārammaṇaṃ. Imesu dvādasasupi vāresu padhānaṭṭho sīsaṭṭho. Vimokkhoti vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttīsu pañcasu nissaraṇavimutti nibbānaṃ. Saṅkhārasīsanti sabbasaṅkhatasaṅkhārānaṃ sīsaṃ, koṭi avasānanti attho. Etena anupādisesaparinibbānaṃ vuttaṃ. Saṅkhārābhāvamattavasena vā khandhaparinibbānameva vuttaṃ hoti. Nekkhammādikaṃ samañca saddhādikaṃ sīsañca, samasīsaṃ vā assa atthīti samasīsīti. Atha vā terasannaṃ sīsānaṃ taṇhādīni pañca sīsāni samudayasaccaṃ, saddhādīni pañca maggasaccaṃ, pavattasīsaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, gocarasīsañca saṅkhārasīsañca nirodhasaccanti imesaṃ catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ekasmiṃ roge vā ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe vā ekasmiṃ sabhāgajīvitindriye vā abhisamayo ca anupādisesaparinibbānañca yassa hoti, so pubbe vuttasamānañca imesañca sīsānaṃ atthitāya samasīsīti vuccati.
37. 削减义智论释义显示巴利原文
37. Sallekhaṭṭhañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
88 在“削减义之智”的解释中,「贪是各别的」(rāgo puthū)意为:贪是离散的,不与出世间法混杂。对其余烦恼,也依此理而解。「贪」,是从染著的意义上说;「嗔」,是从损害的意义上说;「痴」,是从迷惑的意义上说。贪的特相是染著,嗔的特相是损害,痴的特相是迷惑——如此说完这三个根本烦恼之后,现在为从分类上加以说明,便开始说「忿」等。其中,「忿」的特相是愤怒,这里指的是以有情为对象的愤怒。「恨」的特相是紧缚不舍,它只是变得坚固的忿。「覆」的特相是抹杀他人的功德,也就是擦除他人的长处。「恼」的特相是执持对立的两端,即以对立的方式去对待他人的功德。「嫉」的特相是妒忌他人的成就,亦即嫉妒。「悭」的特相是隐藏自己的成就,心想“这是我的,不能让别人得到”。「诳」的特相是隐藏自己已造下的恶行,犹如以物覆盖,以隐蔽为内涵。「谄」的特相是炫耀自己本不具备的功德,即奸诈的心态。「骄」的特相是内心膨胀的状态,即心变得僵硬。「害」的特相是较劲、争胜。「慢」的特相是高估自己。显示巴利原文
88. Sallekhaṭṭhañāṇaniddese rāgo puthūti rāgo visuṃ, lokuttarehi asammissoti attho. Esa nayo sesesu. Rāgoti rañjanaṭṭhena. Dosoti dussanaṭṭhena. Mohoti muyhanaṭṭhena. Rañjanalakkhaṇo rāgo, dussanalakkhaṇo doso, muyhanalakkhaṇo mohoti ime tayo sīsakilese vatvā idāni pabhedato dassento kodhotiādimāha. Tattha kujjhanalakkhaṇo kodhoti idha sattavatthuko adhippeto. Upanandhanalakkhaṇo upanāho, daḷhabhāvappatto kodhoyeva. Paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇo makkho, paraguṇapuñchananti attho. Yugaggāhalakkhaṇo paḷāso, yugaggāhavasena paraguṇadassananti attho. Parasampattikhīyanalakkhaṇā issā, usūyanāti attho . Attasampattinigūhanalakkhaṇaṃ macchariyaṃ, ‘‘mayhaṃ acchariyaṃ mā parassa hotū’’ti attho. Attanā katapāpapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā māyā, paṭicchādanaṭṭhena māyā viyāti attho. Attano avijjamānaguṇappakāsanalakkhaṇaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ, saṭhabhāvoti attho. Cittassa uddhumātabhāvalakkhaṇo thambho, thaddhabhāvoti attho. Karaṇuttariyalakkhaṇo sārambho. Unnatilakkhaṇo māno. Abbhunnatilakkhaṇo atimāno. Mattabhāvalakkhaṇo mado. Pañcasu kāmaguṇesu cittavosaggalakkhaṇo pamādo.
如此,将烦恼逐一分开,显示为各别之后,为以总摄的方式,涵盖已说及未说的其他一切烦恼,便说「一切烦恼」等。其中,那些在今生与来世中,能令有情烦恼、折磨、逼恼的,故名为「烦恼」。烦恼包括已摄入不善业道者,以及未摄入不善业道者。「恶行」(duccaritā):因为行为卑劣,或是恶的行为,故称恶行。恶行有三种:身恶行、语恶行、意恶行。能造作异熟果报的,故名为「行」。行也有三种:福行、非福行、不动行。由于此异熟而趋向于“有”的,称为「趣有者」;趣向于有的业,即是「趣有之业」。虽然这些也属于“行”的范畴,但这里排除了不能感得异熟的业,这便是不同之处。此处「恶行」与「业」两个词有词性上的变化。「种种与单一」(nānattekatta)——在此总说中,虽然并未出现“单一”这个词,但由于种种与单一相互关联,为了一并指出“单一”,才用了「种种与单一」这样的总括之说。在削减种种的过程中,便能显出单一,如此即可容易地显示削减智。所谓「种种」,是因为不安住、有显示巴利原文
Evaṃ visuṃ visuṃ kilesavasena puthū dassetvā vuttakilese ca avutte ca aññe sabbasaṅgāhikavasena dassetuṃ sabbe kilesātiādimāha. Tattha diṭṭhadhammasamparāyesu satte kilesenti upatāpenti vibādhentīti kilesā. Akusalakammapathasaṅgahitā ca asaṅgahitā ca. Duṭṭhu caritā, duṭṭhā vā caritāti duccaritā. Te pana kāyaduccaritaṃ vacīduccaritaṃ manoduccaritanti tippakārā. Vipākaṃ abhisaṅkharontīti abhisaṅkhārā. Tepi puññābhisaṅkhāro apuññābhisaṅkhāro āneñjābhisaṅkhāroti tippakārā. Vipākavasena bhavaṃ gacchantītibhavagāmino , bhavagāmino kammā bhavagāmikammā. Iminā abhisaṅkhārabhāvepi sati avedanīyāni kammāni paṭikkhittāni hontīti ayaṃ viseso. ‘‘Duccaritā’’ti ca ‘‘kammā’’ti ca liṅgavipallāso kato. Nānattekattanti ettha uddese ekattasaddassa abhāvepi nānattekattānaṃ aññamaññāpekkhattā ekattampi niddisitukāmena ‘‘nānattekatta’’nti uddeso kato. Nānattasallekhake ekatte dassite sallekhañāṇaṃ sukhena dassīyatīti. Nānattanti anavaṭṭhitattā saparipphandattā ca nānāsabhāvo. Ekattanti avaṭṭhitattā aparipphandattā ca ekasabhāvo.
「行焰」(caraṇatejo):依此而行,能到达未曾到达之处——涅槃,所以称为「行」。什么是行?就是戒。也正是这戒,以其能烧毁对立面的烦恼,故称为「焰」。「德焰」(guṇatejo):依戒而得稳固的定之焰。「慧焰」(paññātejo):依定而得稳固的观慧之焰。「福焰」(puññatejo):依观慧而得稳固的圣道善法之焰。「法焰」(dhammatejo):作为上述四种焰的依止之处的佛语之焰。由于被行焰所燃烧(tejitattā):即由于被戒的焰所激励、磨砺。无戒之焰(dussīlyateja):即名为无戒状态的焰;这种状态也能燃烧相续的生命,所以叫作焰。它被彻底耗尽(pariyādiyati):即被完全消灭。无德之焰(aguṇateja):与定对立的散乱之焰。劣慧之焰(duppaññateja):与观慧对立的愚痴之焰。非福之焰(apuññateja):由各道所应断除的烦恼所伴随的不善业之焰。不仅仅是耗尽非福而已,正如经文所说:「比丘们,有一种业,既不是显示巴利原文
Caraṇatejoti caranti tena agataṃ disaṃ nibbānaṃ gacchantīti caraṇaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Sīlaṃ. Tadeva paṭipakkhatāpanaṭṭhena tejo. Guṇatejoti sīlena laddhapatiṭṭho samādhitejo. Paññātejoti samādhinā laddhapatiṭṭho vipassanātejo. Puññatejoti vipassanāhi laddhapatiṭṭho ariyamaggakusalatejo. Dhammatejoti catunnaṃ tejānaṃ patiṭṭhābhūto buddhavacanatejo. Caraṇatejena tejitattāti sīlatejena tikhiṇīkatattā. Dussīlyatejanti dussīlabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ tejaṃ. Tampi hi santānaṃ tāpanato tejo nāma. Pariyādiyatīti khepeti. Aguṇatejanti samādhissa paṭipakkhaṃ vikkhepatejaṃ. Duppaññatejanti vipassanāñāṇapaṭipakkhaṃ mohatejaṃ. Apuññatejanti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesappahānena kilesasahāyaṃ akusalakammatejaṃ. Na kevalañhetaṃ apuññameva khepeti, ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, kammaṃ akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ akaṇhaasukkavipākaṃ kammaṃ kammakkhayāya saṃvattatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.233; dī. ni. 3.312; ma. ni. 2.18) vacanato kusalakammampi khepetiyeva. Puññatejapaṭipakkhavasena apuññatejameva vuttaṃ. Adhammatejanti nānātitthiyānaṃ samayavacanatejaṃ. Imassa ñāṇassa uddesavaṇṇanāyaṃ vutte dutiye atthavikappe rāgādayo ekūnavīsati puthu dussīlyatejā honti. ‘‘Abhisaṅkhārā, bhavagāmikammā’’ti ettha apuññābhisaṅkhārā akusalakammañca apuññatejā honti, āneñjābhisaṅkhārāni lokiyakusalakammāni puññatejeneva khepanīyato apuññatejapakkhikāva honti. Kāmacchandādayo pañcadasa nānattā aguṇatejā honti, niccasaññādayo aṭṭhārasa nānattā duppaññatejā honti, catumaggavajjhā cattāro nānattā apuññatejā honti. Sotāpattimaggavajjhanānattena adhammatejo saṅgahetabbo.
在释义中,为了以削减的对立面——非削减,来显示削减的含义,故先说明非削减,再说明削减。出离等三十七种法,正是同一类法,因能削减与之相对的一切法,故称为“削减”。对于出离等三十七类削减,了知它们的智,便是“削减义之智”。显示巴利原文
Niddese sallekhapaṭipakkhena asallekhena sallekhaṃ dassetukāmena asallekhapubbako sallekho niddiṭṭho. Nekkhammādayo sattatiṃsa ekattadhammāva paccanīkānaṃ sallikhanato ‘‘sallekho’’ti vuttā. Tasmiṃ nekkhammādike sattatiṃsapabhede sallekhe ñāṇaṃ sallekhaṭṭhe ñāṇanti.
38. 精进发动之智释义显示巴利原文
38. Vīriyārambhañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
89 在“精进发动之智”的解说中,“未生起的”指在某一有身中,或在某一所缘中,尚未产生的。因为在无始的轮回中,并不存在未生起的不善法,但善法则有未生起的。“恶的”指低劣的。“不善法”指由不善巧所产生的法。“为不令生起”即不是为了生起。“已生起的”指在此有身中已产生的。“为断除”即为了断除。“未生起的善法”指在此有身中从未产生、由善巧所生的法。“为令生起”即为了生起。“已生起的”指在此有身中已产生的。“为安住”即为了安住。“为不忘失”即为了不毁坏。“为更增广”即为了反复增上。“为广开”即为了广大。“为修习”即为了增长。“为圆满”即为了完全圆满。显示巴利原文
89. Vīriyārambhañāṇaniddese anuppannānanti ekasmiṃ attabhāve, ekasmiṃ vā ārammaṇe anibbattānaṃ. Anamatagge hi saṃsāre anuppannā akusalā nāma natthi, kusalā pana atthi. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Akusalānaṃ dhammānanti akosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Anuppādāyāti na uppādanatthāya. Uppannānanti imasmiṃ attabhāve nibbattānaṃ. Pahānāyāti pajahanatthāya. Anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānanti imasmiṃ attabhāve anibbattapubbānaṃ kosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Uppādāyāti uppādanatthāya. Uppannānanti imasmiṃ attabhāve nibbattānaṃ. Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthāya. Asammosāyāti avināsatthāya. Bhiyyobhāvāyāti punappunabhāvāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Bhāvanāyāti vaḍḍhiyā. Pāripūriyāti paripūraṇatthāya.
现在,为在不善法中特标欲贪、在善法中特标出离,而宣说“未生起的欲贪”等。其中,“欲贪”是指与定相违的欲贪。“出离”是指初禅的定,或指初禅,亦可说一切善法皆是出离。显示巴利原文
Idāni akusalesu kāmacchandaṃ, kusalesu nekkhammaṃ visesetvā dassetuṃ anuppannassa kāmacchandassātiādimāha. Tattha kāmacchandoti samādhipaṭipakkho kāmarāgo. Nekkhammanti paṭhamajjhānasamādhi, paṭhamajjhānaṃ vā, sabbe eva vā kusalā dhammā nekkhammaṃ.
现在,为将一切烦恼与对治一切烦恼的阿罗汉道配合说明,而宣说“未生起的一切烦恼”等。其中,关于“已生起的阿罗汉道之安住”等,应知是依于生起刹那生起的阿罗汉道,以住刹那与灭刹那而作“安住”等的配合。《分别论注》中说:“它的转起,即名为住。”然而,有些人则说:“应视为阿罗汉道的前分道。”显示巴利原文
Idāni sabbakilesānaṃ sabbakilesapaṭipakkhassa arahattamaggassa ca vasena yojetvā dassetuṃ anuppannānaṃ sabbakilesānantiādimāha. Tattha uppannassa arahattamaggassa ṭhitiyātiādīsu uppādakkhaṇe uppannassa arahattamaggassa ṭhitikkhaṇabhaṅgakkhaṇavasena ‘‘ṭhitiyā’’tiādiyojanā veditabbā. Vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘yā cassa pavatti, ayameva ṭhiti nāmā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 406) vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘arahattamaggassa pubbabhāgamaggo daṭṭhabbo’’ti vadanti.
39. 义开示智的解说注释显示巴利原文
39. Atthasandassanañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
90 在“义开示智”的解说中,“五蕴”等词,其义如前所说。“开显”意为使之显著,即令听众以智眼看见,成就其见。所说的“种种法”,指世间与出世间的一切法。若问:为何在开显的解说中只说了世间法?因为是从无常等角度开始开显的。而出世间法不适合作思维观察,故未说出世间法。然而,由“种种法”的解说与“义开示”的解说已将其含摄,所以应如其所应开显者而开显,那开显即是开显。“令断除”意为令听众断除。“开示”指对听众正确地开示。然而,有些人依“因欲贪已断,故为出离义而开示”等方式读诵。应知,这是表明:当听众的断除过失与获得功德都已圆满时,教法之智才达到顶峰,故说此理。显示巴利原文
90. Atthasandassanañāṇaniddese pañcakkhandhātiādīni vuttatthāneva. Pakāsetīti pākaṭaṃ karoti, sotūnaṃ ñāṇacakkhunā dassanaṃ sampādetīti attho. Nānādhammāti lokiyalokuttarā sabbadhammā vuttā. Kasmā pakāsanāniddese lokiyā eva vuttāti ce? Aniccādivasena pakāsanāya āraddhattā. Lokuttarānañca asammasanūpagattā lokuttarā na vuttā. Nānādhammaniddesena pana atthasandassananiddesena ca tesaṃ saṅgahitattā yathā te pakāsetabbā, tathā pakāsanā pakāsanāyeva. Pajahantoti sotāraṃ pajahāpentoti attho. Sandassetīti sotūnaṃ sammā dasseti. Keci pana ‘‘kāmacchandassa pahīnattā nekkhammatthaṃ sandassetī’’tiādinā nayena paṭhanti. Tesaṃ ujukameva sotūnaṃ dosappahāne guṇapaṭilābhe ca kate sikhāppattaṃ desanāñāṇaṃ hotīti dassanatthaṃ ayaṃ nayo vuttoti veditabbo.
见清净智解说注释显示巴利原文
40. Dassanavisuddhiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
91 在“见清净智”的解说中,“一切法为一所摄”:指一切有为与无为法被一所摄持、所界定。“以如义”:即以真实义,谓依各自的自性而存在。“以无我义”:指远离了称为作者、受者的我的意思。“以谛义”:即不欺诳义,谓自性不会变成其他状态。“以通达义”:指依自性应以智通达。应知,这是由出世间智无迷乱地于所缘而通达。“以遍知义”:即依世间智于所缘、依出世间智无迷乱于所缘,对那些法依其自性应当遍知。正如所说:“诸比丘!一切应遍知。”(《相应部》4.46)“以遍知义”:即按前述方式,依世间与出世间智,对已依自性遍知的诸法,通过无常等以及出离等加以限定而了知。正如所说:“诸比丘!一切应遍知。”“以法义”:即持自性等的法义。“以界义”:即无命等的界义。“以所知义”:即依世间与出世间智可被认知的意思。正如通过“所见、所闻、所觉、所识之色”等义而说,于此也应知,可被认知的意思即是“所知义”。“以作证义”:即于所缘应现前证得的意思。“以触证义”:即对已现前证得的,于所缘一再触证的意思。显示巴利原文
91. Dassanavisuddhiñāṇaniddese sabbe dhammā ekasaṅgahitāti sabbe saṅkhatāsaṅkhatā dhammā ekena saṅgahitā paricchinnā. Tathaṭṭhenāti bhūtaṭṭhena, attano attano sabhāvavasena vijjamānatthenāti attho. Anattaṭṭhenāti kārakavedakasaṅkhātena attanā rahitaṭṭhena. Saccaṭṭhenāti avisaṃvādakaṭṭhena, attano sabhāvaññathattābhāvenāti attho. Paṭivedhaṭṭhenāti sabhāvato ñāṇena paṭivijjhitabbaṭṭhena. Idha lokuttarañāṇena asammohato ārammaṇato ca paṭivedho veditabbo. Abhijānanaṭṭhenāti lokikena ñāṇena ārammaṇato, lokuttarena ñāṇena asammohato ārammaṇato ca tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvato abhijānitabbaṭṭhena. ‘‘Sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, abhiññeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.46) hi vuttaṃ. Parijānanaṭṭhenāti vuttanayeneva lokiyalokuttarehi ñāṇehi sabhāvato abhiññātānaṃ dhammānaṃ aniccādito niyyānādito ca paricchinditvā jānitabbaṭṭhena. ‘‘Sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, pariññeyya’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Dhammaṭṭhenāti sabhāvadhāraṇādinā dhammaṭṭhena. Dhātuṭṭhenāti nijjīvatādinā dhātuṭṭhena. Ñātaṭṭhenāti lokiyalokuttarehi ñāṇehi ñātuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṭṭhena. Yathā daṭṭhuṃ sakkuṇeyyādinā atthena ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ rūpa’’nti vuttaṃ, evamidhāpi ñātuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṭṭho ñātaṭṭhoti veditabbo. Sacchikiriyaṭṭhenāti ārammaṇato paccakkhakātabbaṭṭhena. Phusanaṭṭhenāti paccakkhakatassa ārammaṇato punappunaṃ phusitabbaṭṭhena. Abhisamayaṭṭhenāti lokikena ñāṇena abhisamāgantabbaṭṭhena. Kiñcāpi hi ‘‘tathaṭṭhe paññā saccavivaṭṭe ñāṇaṃ, abhiññāpaññā ñātaṭṭhe ñāṇaṃ, sacchikiriyāpaññā phassanaṭṭhe ñāṇa’’nti ekekameva ñāṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyañca –
在集合、刹那、时间、聚集、因、见等义中,
在获得、断除及通达中,也能见到此词。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Samavāye khaṇe kāle, samūhe hetudiṭṭhisu; Paṭilābhe pahāne ca, paṭivedhe ca dissatī’’ti . –
在偈颂的注释中,说“现观”一词有通达义;但在此处,应依如上所述之义而知其差别。因为正是在义注中,才依世间智而说为“法现观”。显示巴利原文
Gāthāvaṇṇanāyaṃ abhisamayasaddassa paṭivedhattho vutto, idha pana yathāvuttena atthena tesaṃ nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyameva hi so lokiyañāṇavasena dhammābhisamayo vuttoti.
“欲贪为种种”:以其散乱之相、所缘各异,故自性为种种——这就是它的含义。一切烦恼亦应如是了知。“出离为单一”:以其心一境性之相、无种种所缘之散乱,故自性为单一——这就是它的含义。一切善法亦应如是了知。这里,以略说方式所包含的嗔恚等不善法,应如前所述之义了知为种种。至于寻、伺等,则应依从低至高、以粗重之义而了知为种种。由于在道刹那中,通过谛通达成就了对‘被总摄为一的种种与单一’的通达,故特举‘通达’一词,以显谛现观。显示巴利原文
Kāmacchando nānattanti vikkhepasabbhāvato nānārammaṇattā ca nānāsabhāvoti attho. Evaṃ sabbakilesā veditabbā. Nekkhammaṃ ekattanti cittekaggatāsabbhāvato nānārammaṇavikkhepābhāvato ca ekasabhāvanti attho. Evaṃ sabbakusalā veditabbā. Idha peyyālena saṃkhittānaṃ byāpādādīnaṃ akusalānaṃ yathāvuttena atthena nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vitakkavicārādīnaṃ pana heṭṭhimānaṃ heṭṭhimānaṃ uparimato uparimato oḷārikaṭṭhena nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yasmā ekasaṅgahitanānattekattānaṃ paṭivedho maggakkhaṇe saccapaṭivedhena sijjhati, tasmā ‘‘paṭivedho’’ti padaṃ uddharitvā saccābhisamayaṃ dassesi.
“以遍知通达而通达”:即以遍知现观而现观。余者同理。因为于谛现观之时,道智在一刹那中具有遍知、断除、作证、修习四种作用。犹如一艘船,在一刹那中不前不后地完成四事:弃舍此岸、截断水流、运载货物、抵达彼岸;同样地,道智在一刹那中不前不后地现观四谛:以遍知现观而现观苦,以断除现观而现观集,以修习现观而现观道,以作证现观而现观灭。这是在说什么?这是说:以涅槃为所缘,由作用而触及、看见、通达了四谛。如同弃舍此岸,道智遍知苦。如同截断水流,道智断除集。如同运载货物,道智藉俱生等缘之力而修习道。如同抵达彼岸,道智现证如彼岸般的涅槃。应当如此配合譬喻来理解。显示巴利原文
Pariññā paṭivedhaṃ paṭivijjhatīti pariññābhisamayena abhisameti. Esa nayo sesesu. Saccābhisamayakālasmiñhi maggañāṇassa ekakkhaṇe pariññā, pahānaṃ, sacchikiriyā, bhāvanāti cattāri kiccāni honti. Yathā nāvā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ ekakkhaṇe cattāri kiccāni karoti, orimaṃ tīraṃ pajahati, sotaṃ chindati, bhaṇḍaṃ vahati, pārimaṃ tīraṃ appeti, evameva maggañāṇaṃ apubbaṃ acarimaṃ ekakkhaṇe cattāri saccāni abhisameti, dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena abhisameti, samudayaṃ pahānābhisamayena abhisameti, maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayena abhisameti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccavasena cattāripi saccāni pāpuṇāti passati paṭivijjhatīti. Yathā orimaṃ tīraṃ pajahati, evaṃ maggañāṇaṃ dukkhaṃ parijānāti. Yathā sotaṃ chindati, evaṃ samudayaṃ pajahati. Yathā bhaṇḍaṃ vahati, evaṃ sahajātādipaccayatāya maggaṃ bhāveti. Yathā pārimaṃ tīraṃ appeti, evaṃ pārimatīrabhūtaṃ nirodhaṃ sacchikarotīti evaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“见清净”:由断除各个道所应断的烦恼黑暗,智见达至清净。“见已清净”:在各自果的生起刹那,因各自道智的作用已成就,智见便达至清净的状态。由于总摄一切法的‘通达种种与单一’之慧,依于道果智而成就,故最后开示道果智。显示巴利原文
Dassanaṃvisujjhatīti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesatamappahānena ñāṇadassanaṃ visuddhibhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti. Dassanaṃ visuddhanti tassa tassa phalassa uppādakkhaṇe tassa tassa maggañāṇassa kiccasiddhippattito ñāṇadassanaṃ visuddhibhāvaṃ pattaṃ hoti. Sabbadhammānaṃ ekasaṅgahitāya nānattekattapaṭivedhapaññāya maggaphalañāṇehi siddhito ante maggaphalañāṇāni vuttāni.
第41-42项:忍智与洞察智解说注释显示巴利原文
41-42. Khantiñāṇapariyogāhaṇañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
92-93 第92-93项的解说:「色被知为无常」——即以无常随观,了知色为无常。「色被知为苦」——即以苦随观,了知色为苦。「色被知为无我」——即以无我随观,了知色为无我。「凡所了知的,那些全都堪忍」:意指凡是被了知为无常等的色,它们便作为无常等而被「堪忍」,即被认可、接受。某些写本将「色被知为无常,凡所了知的,那些全都堪忍」等句分开单独书写。至于「受被知为无常」等句式,则应随其性与数转换来理解。「触知」:即通过观智的接触而触知、遍满。「洞察」:即通过观智而进入。也有读作「pariyogāhati(洞察)」的。显示巴利原文
92-93. Khantiñāṇapariyogāhaṇañāṇaniddesesu rūpaṃ aniccato viditanti aniccānupassanāya aniccanti ñātaṃ. Rūpaṃ dukkhato viditanti dukkhānupassanāya dukkhanti ñātaṃ. Rūpaṃ anattato viditanti anattānupassanāya anattāti ñātaṃ. Yaṃ yaṃ viditaṃ, taṃ taṃ khamatīti yaṃ yaṃ rūpaṃ aniccādito viditaṃ, taṃ taṃ rūpaṃ aniccādito khamati ruccati. ‘‘Rūpaṃ aniccato viditaṃ, yaṃ yaṃ viditaṃ, taṃ taṃ khamatī’’ti visuṃ visuñca katvā kesuci potthakesu likhitaṃ. ‘‘Vedanā saññā saṅkhārā aniccato viditā’’tiādinā liṅgavacanāni parivattetvā yojetabbāni. Phusatīti vipassanāñāṇaphusanena phusati pharati. Pariyogahatīti vipassanāñāṇena pavisati. Pariyogāhatītipi pāṭho.
第43项:一分住智解说注释显示巴利原文
43. Padesavihārañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
94 在第94项解释“一分住”时,为说明应以何种方式观察论母中所列之“一分”,而说“以邪见为缘也有感受”等。此处,“以邪见为缘”不仅指与邪见相应的感受,也指以邪见为亲依止而生起的善、不善感受,以及异熟感受。其中,与邪见相应的感受只能是不善的;但依止于邪见,善的感受可以生起,不善的感受也可以生起。因为邪见者会依凭邪见,在随喜日等日子布施粥饭,照料盲龟等,在十字街口建造殿堂,令人挖掘池塘,种植花园与果园,于河流险要处架设桥梁,修补崎岖的道路。他们便这样生起了善的感受。然而,同样依凭邪见,他们又会辱骂、诽谤正见者,从事杀害、捆绑等行为,杀生后用以祭献天神。他们便这样生起了不善的感受。至于异熟感受,那只是投生到其他生存界的人才有的。而且,那种邪见对于与自己同时生起的感受,是以俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、有缘、不离去缘等诸缘而为缘的;刚刚灭去的邪见对于现在与邪见相应的感受,是以无间缘、等无间缘、亲依止缘、习行缘、无有缘、离去缘等诸缘而为缘的。显示巴利原文
94. Padesavihārañāṇaniddese yenākārena mātikāya uddiṭṭho padeso paccavekkhitabbo, taṃ dassento micchādiṭṭhipaccayāpi vedayitantiādimāha. Tattha micchādiṭṭhipaccayāti diṭṭhisampayuttavedanāpi vaṭṭati diṭṭhiṃ upanissayaṃ katvā uppannā kusalākusalavedanāpi vipākavedanāpi. Tattha micchādiṭṭhisampayuttā akusalāva hoti, diṭṭhiṃ pana upanissāya kusalāpi uppajjanti akusalāpi. Micchādiṭṭhikā hi diṭṭhiṃ upanissāya pakkhadivasesu yāgubhattādīni denti, andhakuṭṭhiādīnaṃ vattaṃ paṭṭhapenti, catumahāpathe sālaṃ karonti, pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇāpenti, pupphārāmaṃ phalārāmaṃ ropenti, nadīviduggesu setuṃ attharanti, visamaṃ samaṃ karonti. Iti tesaṃ kusalā vedanā uppajjati. Micchādiṭṭhiṃ pana nissāya sammādiṭṭhike akkosanti paribhāsanti vadhabandhādīni karonti, pāṇaṃ vadhitvā devatānaṃ upaharanti. Iti nesaṃ akusalā vedanā uppajjati. Vipākavedanā pana bhavantaragatānaṃ hoti. Sā pana micchādiṭṭhi sahajātāya vedanāya sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayo hoti, samanantaraniruddhā micchādiṭṭhi paccuppannamicchādiṭṭhisampayuttāya vedanāya anantarasamanantarūpanissayaāsevananatthivigatapaccayehi paccayo hoti, micchādiṭṭhiṃ garuṃ katvā abhinandantassa lobhasahagatavedanāya ārammaṇaārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayapaccayehi paccayo hoti, sabbākusalehi micchādiṭṭhiṃ ārammaṇamattaṃ karontassa sabbākusalavedanāya micchādiṭṭhiṃ paccavekkhantassa vipassantassa kusalābyākatavedanāya ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo hoti, micchādiṭṭhipaccayena uppajjamānānaṃ kusalākusalavedanānaṃ bhavantare vipākavedanānañca upanissayapaccayena paccayo hoti.
“以邪见的寂止为缘”:所谓邪见的寂止,就是指正见。因此,前文所说的以正见为缘的感受,在这里就应理解为“以邪见的寂止为缘”。但也有些人说:“邪见的寂止,指的是在观的那一刹那,以及在入流道的那一刹那。”显示巴利原文
Micchādiṭṭhivūpasamapaccayāti micchādiṭṭhivūpasamo nāma sammādiṭṭhi, tasmā yaṃ sammādiṭṭhipaccayā vedayitaṃ vuttaṃ, tadeva ‘‘micchādiṭṭhivūpasamapaccayā’’ti veditabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘micchādiṭṭhivūpasamo nāma vipassanākkhaṇe sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe cā’’ti vadanti.
“以正见为缘也有感受”:在这里,不仅指与正见相应的感受,也指以正见为亲依止而生起的善、不善感受,以及异熟感受。其中,与正见相应的感受只能是善的;然而依止于正见,人们会供养佛陀、燃灯奉献、听闻大法、在未立塔庙的边地安立塔庙等种种功德。他们便这样生起了善的感受。同样依凭正见,他们也会辱骂、诽谤邪见者,抬高自己而贬低他人。他们便这样生起了不善的感受。异熟感受则唯属投生到其他生存界的人才有的。再者,那种正见对于同时生起的、刚刚灭去的以及现在的感受,正如前文解说邪见时所述的那些缘一样,也是依那些缘而为缘的。世间正见对于与思察相应、与观相应、与欲贪相应的感受,是依所缘缘而为缘的;依解说邪见时所示的方式,世间正见也以亲依止缘为缘。道与果的正见对于与思察相应的感受,则以所缘缘、所缘增上缘、所缘亲依止缘之力而为缘。显示巴利原文
Sammādiṭṭhipaccayāpi vedayitanti etthāpi sammādiṭṭhisampayuttavedanāpi vaṭṭati sammādiṭṭhiṃ upanissayaṃ katvā uppannā kusalākusalavedanāpi vipākavedanāpi. Tattha sammādiṭṭhisampayuttā kusalāva hoti, sammādiṭṭhiṃ pana upanissāya buddhapūjā dīpamālāropanaṃ mahādhammassavanaṃ appatiṭṭhite disābhāge cetiyapatiṭṭhāpananti evamādīni puññāni karonti. Iti nesaṃ kusalā vedanā uppajjati. Sammādiṭṭhimeva nissāya micchādiṭṭhike akkosanti paribhāsanti, attānaṃ ukkaṃsanti, paraṃ vambhenti. Iti nesaṃ akusalā vedanā uppajjati. Vipākavedanā pana bhavantaragatānaṃyeva hoti. Sā pana sammādiṭṭhi sahajātāya samanantaraniruddhāya paccuppannāya vedanāya micchādiṭṭhiyā vuttapaccayeheva paccayo hoti, lokikasammādiṭṭhi paccavekkhaṇasampayuttāya vipassanāsampayuttāya nikantisampayuttāya ca vedanāya ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo hoti, micchādiṭṭhiyā vuttanayeneva upanissayapaccayena paccayo hoti, maggaphalasammādiṭṭhi paccavekkhaṇasampayuttāya vedanāya ārammaṇaārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayapaccayavasena paccayo hoti.
“以正见的寂止为缘也有感受”:所谓正见的寂止,即是邪见。因此,凡是此前所说以邪见为缘的感受,在这里应当理解为“以正见的寂止为缘”。在“以邪思惟为缘”“以邪思惟的寂止为缘”等表述中,道理亦同。凡是被称作“以某法的寂止为缘”的,其真义便是以那能对治它的法为缘而生起的那些感受。然而,在“邪智”等语词中:所谓“邪智”,是指在造作恶行时所用的方法思惟;或者,也可以说“邪智”就是错误的反思观察之智。所谓“正智”,是指排除了作为观智的正见与出世间正见之后,所剩余的那些善与无记的智。所谓“邪解脱”,是指倾向于恶的状态;或者说,就是指不真实的解脱、不能导向出离的解脱,亦即那种本无解脱却自以为“我已解脱”的想法。所谓“正解脱”,是指倾向于善的状态以及证果的解脱。至于正见等的含义,如前文所述。显示巴利原文
Sammādiṭṭhivūpasamapaccayāpivedayitanti sammādiṭṭhivūpasamo nāma micchādiṭṭhi, tasmā yaṃ micchādiṭṭhipaccayā vedayitaṃ vuttaṃ, tadeva ‘‘sammādiṭṭhivūpasamapaccayā’’ti veditabbaṃ. Micchāsaṅkappapaccayā micchāsaṅkappavūpasamapaccayātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Yassa yassa hi ‘‘vūpasamapaccayā’’ti vuccati, tassa tassa paṭipakkhadhammapaccayāva taṃ taṃ vedayitaṃ adhippetaṃ. Micchāñāṇādīsu pana micchāñāṇaṃ nāma pāpakiriyāsu upāyacintā. Atha vā micchāñāṇaṃ micchāpaccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Sammāñāṇaṃ nāma vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiṃ lokuttarasammādiṭṭhiñca ṭhapetvā avasesakusalābyākataṃ ñāṇaṃ. Micchāvimutti nāma pāpādhimuttitā. Atha vā ayāthāvavimutti aniyyānikavimutti avimuttasseva sato vimuttisaññīti. Sammāvimutti nāma kalyāṇādhimuttitā phalavimutti ca. Sammādiṭṭhiādayo heṭṭhā vuttatthāyeva.
然而,在“以欲为缘”等表述中:所谓“欲”,指的是贪;以欲为缘,应当理解为与八种贪俱行心相应的受。“以欲的止息为缘”,指的便是初禅的受。“以寻为缘”,是初禅的受。“以寻的止息为缘”,则是第二禅的受。“以想为缘”,除了初禅之外,指其余六种等至的受。“以想的止息为缘”,是非想非非想处的受。显示巴利原文
Chandapaccayāpītiādīsu pana chando nāma lobho, chandapaccayā aṭṭhalobhasahagatacittasampayuttavedanā veditabbā. Chandavūpasamapaccayā paṭhamajjhānavedanāva. Vitakkapaccayā paṭhamajjhānavedanā. Vitakkavūpasamapaccayā dutiyajjhānavedanā. Saññāpaccayā ṭhapetvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ sesā cha samāpattivedanā. Saññāvūpasamapaccayā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanavedanā.
“如果欲未被止息”等等,其含义是:如果欲、寻、想未被止息。“彼缘”的意思是:那欲、寻、想的未止息状态本身即是缘,故称为彼缘;也就是说,以欲、寻、想未止息为缘而生起受。此即指与八种贪俱行心相应的受。如果欲已被止息,而寻和想未被止息,“彼缘”的意思是:那欲的止息以及寻和想的未止息状态本身即是缘,故称为彼缘。这指的就是初禅的受。如果欲和寻皆已被止息,而想未被止息,“彼缘”的意思是:那欲与寻的止息以及想的未止息状态本身即是缘,故称为彼缘。这指的就是第二禅的受。如果欲、寻、想皆已被止息,“彼缘”的意思是:那欲、寻、想的止息状态本身即是缘,故称为彼缘。这指的就是非想非非想处的受。又有一类人作这样的解释:“‘欲’是指在安止之前,生起‘我将证得安止’的对法的意欲;已证得安止者,其此欲便已止息。他在初禅中有寻;证得第二禅者,其寻已止息。在七种等至中有想;已入非想非非想处定与已入灭尽定者,其想已止息。”然而,在此处提及灭尽定并不合适。所谓“为证得未证得者”,乃是为了……显示巴利原文
Chando ca avūpasanto hotītiādīsu sace chandavitakkasaññā avūpasantā hontīti attho. Tappaccayāti so chandavitakkasaññānaṃ avūpasamo eva paccayo tappaccayo, tasmā tappaccayā. Chandavitakkasaññāavūpasamapaccayā vedanā hotīti attho. Sā aṭṭhalobhasahagatacittasampayuttavedanā hoti. Sace chando vūpasanto vitakkasaññā avūpasantā. Tappaccayāti so chandassa vūpasamo vitakkasaññānaṃ avūpasamo eva paccayo tappaccayo, tasmā tappaccayā. Sā paṭhamajjhānavedanāva. Sace chandavitakkā vūpasantā saññā avūpasantā. Tappaccayāti so chandavitakkānaṃ vūpasamo saññāya avūpasamo eva paccayo tappaccayo, tasmā tappaccayā. Sā dutiyajjhānavedanāva. Sace chandavitakkasaññā vūpasantā. Tappaccayāti so chandavitakkasaññānaṃ vūpasamo eva paccayo tappaccayo, tasmā tappaccayā. Sā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanavedanāva. Keci pana ‘‘chando nāma appanaṃ pāpuṇissāmīti pubbabhāge dhammacchando, appanāppattassa so chando vūpasanto hoti. Paṭhamajjhāne vitakko hoti, dutiyajjhānappattassa vitakko vūpasanto hoti. Sattasu samāpattīsu saññā hoti, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samāpannassa ca nirodhaṃ samāpannassa ca saññā vūpasantā hotī’’ti evaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Idha pana nirodhasamāpatti na yujjati. Appattassapattiyāti arahattaphalassa pattatthāya. Atthi āyavanti atthi vīriyaṃ. Āyāvantipi pāṭho. Tasmimpi ṭhāne anuppatteti tassa vīriyārambhassa vasena tasmiṃ arahattaphalassa kāraṇe ariyamagge anuppatte . Tappaccayāpi vedayitanti arahattassa ṭhānapaccayā vedayitaṃ. Etena catumaggasahajātā nibbattitalokuttaravedanā gahitā. Keci pana ‘‘āyavanti paṭipatti. Tasmimpi ṭhāne anuppatteti tassā bhūmiyā pattiyā’’ti vaṇṇayanti.
44-49. 对“还灭智六种”说明的注释。显示巴利原文
44-49. Vivaṭṭañāṇachakkaniddesavaṇṇanā
95 在“还灭智六种”的说明中,“以出离为增上故为智”,是指以出离为增上、依出离增上而生起的智慧。“从欲想回转”的意思是:以与出离增上智相应的想为因,或以之为缘,而从欲贪中回转、背离、转身而去。其余各处,亦同此理。显示巴利原文
95. Vivaṭṭañāṇachakkaniddese nekkhammādhipatattā paññāti nekkhammaṃ adhikaṃ katvā nekkhammādhikabhāvena pavattā paññā. Kāmacchandato saññāya vivaṭṭatīti nekkhammādhipatikatapaññāsampayuttasaññāya hetubhūtāya, karaṇabhūtāya vā kāmacchandato vivaṭṭati parāvattati, parammukhī hotīti attho. Esa nayo sesesu.
96 “爱欲是多种多样的”:由于爱欲并非寂静地生起,所以其本质不是单一的。“出离是单一的”:由于出离是寂静地生起,所以其本质是单一的。“思量出离为单一的人”:指通过观察爱欲的过患而使出离心生起的人。“心从爱欲中回转”:由于见到了爱欲的过患,所以在出离心生起的刹那,心便从爱欲中回转而出。其余各处,亦同此理。显示巴利原文
96.Kāmacchando nānattanti kāmacchando santavuttitāya abhāvato na ekasabhāvo. Nekkhammaṃ ekattanti nekkhammaṃ santavuttibhāvato ekasabhāvo. Nekkhammekattaṃ cetayatoti kāmacchande ādīnavadassanena nekkhammaṃ pavattayato. Kāmacchandato cittaṃ vivaṭṭatīti diṭṭhādīnavato kāmacchandato nekkhammakkhaṇe cittaṃ vivaṭṭati. Esa nayo sesesu.
97 “断除爱欲者”,是指当出离心生起的刹那,以镇伏断的方式正在断除爱欲的人。“以出离之力令心安住者”,是指依凭已获得的出离之力,让与此相应的心安住并使之增上,也就是令其持续生起。这一道理同样适用于其余各处。显示巴利原文
97.Kāmacchandaṃ pajahantoti nekkhammapavattikkhaṇe kāmacchandaṃ vikkhambhanappahānena pajahanto. Nekkhammavasena cittaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti paṭiladdhassa nekkhammassa vasena taṃsampayuttacittaṃ adhitiṭṭhati adhikaṃ karonto tiṭṭhati, pavattetīti attho. Esa nayo sesesu.
98 “眼因我而空”,是因为凡夫所妄想计度的、被称为造作者与感受者的“我”并不存在,所以眼依“我”而空。但凡某物不存在于某处,该处便依该物而说为“空”。“因我所而空”,是因为“我”不存在,自然也就不存在“我所有”之物,所以眼依“我所”而空。世间对所缘有执取为“我”和“我所”两种执着,为了遮止这两种执着,才说“我”不存在,进而说“我所”不存在。“因常而空”,是因为没有任何事物能超越坏灭而常存,所以依“常”而空。“因坚固而空”,是因为即便在生起的一刹那,也没有任何坚住不变的事物,所以依“坚固”而空。“因永恒而空”,是因为没有任何事物能存在于一切时间,所以依“永恒”而空。“因非变易法而空”,是因为没有任何事物的自性能不为老、坏二法所变易,所以依“非变易法”而空。或者说,也就是依常性、坚固性、永恒性、非变易法性而空。此处的“或”字,意为总括、集合。“如实知见者”,是指那些以如此无我随观智,如其真实地了知和照见的人。如同用眼睛看一般,如实了知者。显示巴利原文
98.Cakkhu suññaṃ attena vāti bālajanaparikappitassa kārakavedakasaṅkhātassa attano abhāvā cakkhu attena ca suññaṃ. Yañhi yattha na hoti, tena taṃ suññaṃ nāma hoti. Attaniyena vāti attano abhāveneva attano santakassapi abhāvā attano santakena ca suññaṃ. Lokassa attāti ca attaniyanti ca ubhayathā gāhasambhavato tadubhayagāhapaṭisedhanatthaṃ attābhāvo ca attaniyābhāvo ca vutto. Niccena vāti bhaṅgaṃ atikkamitvā tiṭṭhantassa kassaci abhāvato niccena ca suññaṃ. Dhuvena vāti pavattikkhaṇepi thirassa kassaci abhāvato dhuvena ca suññaṃ. Sassatena vāti sabbakālepi vijjamānassa kassaci abhāvato sassatena ca suññaṃ. Avipariṇāmadhammena vāti jarābhaṅgavasena dvidhā aparivattamānapakatikassa kassaci abhāvato avipariṇāmadhammena ca suññaṃ. Atha vā niccabhāvena ca dhuvabhāvena ca sassatabhāvena ca avipariṇāmadhammabhāvena ca suññanti attho. Samuccayattho vā-saddo. Yathābhūtaṃ jānato passatoti iccevaṃ anattānupassanāñāṇena yathāsabhāvena jānantassa cakkhunā viya ca passantassa. Cakkhābhinivesato ñāṇaṃ vivaṭṭatīti cakkhu attāti vā attaniyanti vā pavattamānato diṭṭhābhinivesato tadaṅgappahānavasena ñāṇaṃ vivaṭṭati. Esa nayo sesesu.
99 “以出离弃舍爱欲”,是指证得出离的人,以出离断除与之相违的爱欲。“于弃舍中有慧”,是指在作为弃舍爱欲的出离中,与出离相应的智慧。此理于其余各处亦然。逼迫等含义,已如前文所说。“遍知已而转出”,是依补特伽罗而立的开示:具足道者,以作用遍知苦的四种义理,从两方面出起而转出;在慧转出中,也宣说具慧者转出。显示巴利原文
99.Nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ vosajjatīti nekkhammalābhī puggalo nekkhammena tappaṭipakkhaṃ kāmacchandaṃ pariccajati. Vosagge paññāti kāmacchandassa vosaggabhūte nekkhamme taṃsampayuttā paññā. Esa nayo sesesu. Pīḷanaṭṭhādayo heṭṭhā vuttatthā eva. Parijānanto vivaṭṭatīti puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā, maggasamaṅgīpuggalo dukkhassa catubbidhaṃ atthaṃ kiccavasena parijānanto dubhato vuṭṭhānavasena vivaṭṭati, ñāṇavivaṭṭanepi ñāṇasamaṅgī vivaṭṭatīti vutto.
100 “谛义智”即此人于谛义而转出的智慧,其余各处亦同此理。为了显示在道刹那依作用而分的六种转出智在行相上的差别,先列出“想转出”等论母,随后解释其含义,说“想知而转出”等。其中,“想知而转出”即是“想转出”:在预备阶段,行者以出离等为主要所缘而起想知,随后以与出离相应的智慧从爱欲等中转出,故此智慧称为想转出。“思而转出”即是“思转出”:行者思惟出离的单一性等,以相应的智慧从爱欲等中转出,故此智慧称为思转出。“了别而转出”即是“心转出”:行者依出离等,以心为安住处而了别,以此相应的智慧从爱欲等中转出,故此智慧称为心转出。“作智而转出”即是“智转出”:行者以无我随观智了知六内处为空,即以此智从见的执着中转出,故此智慧称为智转出。“弃舍而转出”即是“解脱转出”:行者以出离等弃舍爱欲等,以相应的智慧从爱欲等中转出,故此智慧称为解脱转出。“于谛义转出”即是“谛转出”:行者由两方面出起,于四谛义上转出,故道智称为谛转出。显示巴利原文
100.Tathaṭṭhepaññāti etassa puggalasseva tathaṭṭhe vivaṭṭanā paññā. Esa nayo sesesu. Idāni maggakkhaṇe eva kiccavasena ākāranānattato cha vivaṭṭañāṇāni dassetuṃ saññāvivaṭṭotiādimātikaṃ ṭhapetvā taṃ atthato vibhajanto sañjānanto vivaṭṭatītiādimāha. Tattha sañjānanto vivaṭṭatīti saññāvivaṭṭoti yasmā pubbabhāge nekkhammādiṃ adhipatito sañjānanto yogī pacchā nekkhammasampayuttañāṇena kāmacchandādito vivaṭṭati, tasmā taṃ ñāṇaṃ saññāvivaṭṭo nāmāti attho. Cetayanto vivaṭṭatīti cetovivaṭṭoti yasmā yogī nekkhammekattādīni cetayanto sampayuttañāṇena kāmacchandādito vivaṭṭati, tasmā taṃ ñāṇaṃ cetovivaṭṭo nāmāti attho. Vijānanto vivaṭṭatīti cittavivaṭṭoti yasmā yogī nekkhammādivasena cittādhiṭṭhānena vijānanto taṃsampayuttañāṇena kāmacchandādito vivaṭṭati, tasmā taṃ ñāṇaṃ cittavivaṭṭo nāmāti attho. Ñāṇaṃ karonto vivaṭṭatīti ñāṇavivaṭṭoti yasmā yogī chabbidhaṃ ajjhattikāyatanaṃ anattānupassanāñāṇena suññato viditaṃ karonto teneva ñāṇena diṭṭhābhinivesato vivaṭṭati, tasmā taṃ ñāṇaṃ ñāṇavivaṭṭo nāmāti attho. Vosajjanto vivaṭṭatīti vimokkhavivaṭṭoti yasmā yogī nekkhammādīhi kāmacchandādīni vosajjanto taṃsampayuttañāṇena kāmacchandādito vivaṭṭati, tasmā taṃ ñāṇaṃ vimokkhavivaṭṭo nāmāti attho. Tathaṭṭhe vivaṭṭatīti saccavivaṭṭoti yasmā yogī catubbidhe tathaṭṭhe dubhato vuṭṭhānavasena vivaṭṭati, tasmā maggañāṇaṃ saccavivaṭṭo nāmāti attho. Maggañāṇameva vā tathaṭṭhe dubhato vuṭṭhānabhāvena vivaṭṭatīti saccavivaṭṭoti attho.
应知“在哪里有想转出”等文句,是针对谛转出智的刹那而言,因为这在谛转出智的说明中已有阐述。实际上,这一切唯在道刹那才成立。何以故?在智转出中,除智本身外,其余诸法在圣道中皆以自身面目出现。然而,观的作用实由道来完成,从观的作用得以成就而言,智转出之智在道刹那亦得成立。或者,因道智本身即通过“眼是空”等作用方式而通达,故于道刹那,说彼智亦完全成立。又,此处义理的贯通应如此:于一切关联中,以“(道刹那)有想转出之处,即有心转出;有心转出之处,即有想转出”的方式加以联结。或者,因为在想转出、思转出、心转出、解脱转出这四种之中出现了四种圣道,故谛转出自然出现,而智转出则藉由谛转出的作用方式而成就。再者,当于想转出、思转出、心转出、解脱转出中以省略方式详细展开时,可有如下文句:“因为以无我随观为主,慧从执取中通过想而转出,故为主的慧是于想转出的智。”“执取是种种相,无我随观是单一相。当思惟无我随观的单一相时,心从执取中转出。”显示巴利原文
Yatthasaññāvivaṭṭotiādi saccavivaṭṭañāṇaniddese vuttattā saccavivaṭṭañāṇakkhaṇameva sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Maggakkhaṇeyeva hi sabbāni yujjanti. Kathaṃ? Ñāṇavivaṭṭe ñāṇañhi vajjetvā sesesu ariyamaggo sarūpeneva āgato. Vipassanākiccassa pana maggeneva sijjhanato vipassanākiccasiddhivasena ñāṇavivaṭṭañāṇampi maggakkhaṇe yujjati. Maggañāṇeneva vā ‘‘cakkhu suñña’’ntiādi kiccavasena paṭividdhameva hotīti maggakkhaṇe taṃ ñāṇaṃ vattuṃ yujjatiyeva. Atthayojanā panettha ‘‘yattha maggakkhaṇe saññāvivaṭṭo, tattha cetovivaṭṭo. Yattha maggakkhaṇe cetovivaṭṭo , tattha saññāvivaṭṭo’’ti evamādinā nayena sabbasaṃsandanesu yojanā kātabbā. Atha vā saññāvivaṭṭacetovivaṭṭacittavivaṭṭavimokkhavivaṭṭesu catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ āgatattā saccavivaṭṭo āgatoyeva hoti. Ñāṇavivaṭṭo ca saccavivaṭṭeneva kiccavasena siddho hoti. Saññācetocittavimokkhavivaṭṭesveva ca peyyāle vitthāriyamāne ‘‘anattānupassanādhipatattā paññā abhinivesato saññāya vivaṭṭatīti adhipatattā paññā saññāvivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti ca, ‘‘abhiniveso nānattaṃ, anattānupassanā ekattaṃ. Anattānupassanekattaṃ cetayato abhinivesato cittaṃ vivaṭṭatīti nānatte paññā cetovivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti ca, ‘‘abhinivesaṃ pajahanto anattānupassanāvasena cittaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti adhiṭṭhāne paññā cittavivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti ca, ‘‘anattānupassanāya abhinivesaṃ vosajjatīti vosagge paññā vimokkhavivaṭṭe ñāṇa’’nti ca pāṭhasambhavato ñāṇavivaṭṭe ñāṇampi tesu āgatameva hoti. Ñāṇavivaṭṭe ca anattānupassanāya vuṭṭhāya ariyamaggaṃ paṭiladdhassa kiccavasena ‘‘cakkhu suññaṃ attena vā attaniyena vā’’tiādiyujjanato saccavivaṭṭo labbhati, tasmā ekekasmiṃ vivaṭṭe sesā pañca pañca vivaṭṭā labbhanti. Tasmā evaṃ ‘‘yattha saññāvivaṭṭo, tattha cetovivaṭṭo’’tiādikāni saṃsandanāni vuttānīti veditabbaṃ.
五十、神变智说明之注释显示巴利原文
50. Iddhividhañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
101 在神变智的说明中,“于此,比丘”意即在此教法中的比丘。“具足欲定与勤行”——这里,“欲定”指以欲为因的定,或以欲为增上的定,即是以“想要做”之欲作为主导而获得的定的同义词。“勤行”指作为勤的诸行,这是成就四种作用的正勤精进的同义词;因成就四种作用,故用复数形式。“具足”即具备欲定与勤行。“神足”的意思:依成就的语义,或依“众生由此而成就、增长、达到殊胜”的语义而称为“神”的——即近行定等善心相应的欲定与勤行,以这些作为安住的基础,即是“足”;也就是其余心、心所的集合。这便是它的意义。如《神足分别·经分别》中所说:“神足,即处于那种状态者的受蕴……乃至……识蕴。”(《分别论》434)《阿毗达摩分别》中也说:“神足,即处于那种状态者的触、受……乃至……策励、不散乱。”(《分别论》447)因此,对于“其余的心、心所集合”,应这样理解:在欲、定、勤行三者中,将每一法单独视为“神”,并连同其余二者,以“其余”一词来表述。这样一来,四蕴……显示巴利原文
101. Iddhividhañāṇaniddesaṃ idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgatanti ettha chandahetuko samādhi, chandādhiko vā samādhi chandasamādhi, kattukamyatāchandaṃ adhipatiṃ karitvā paṭiladdhasamādhissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Padhānabhūtā saṅkhārā padhānasaṅkhārā, catukiccasādhakassa sammappadhānavīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Catukiccasādhanavasena bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ. Samannāgatanti chandasamādhinā ca padhānasaṅkhārehi ca upetaṃ. Iddhipādanti nipphattipariyāyena vā ijjhanaṭṭhena, ijjhanti etāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iminā vā pariyāyena iddhīti saṅkhaṃ gatānaṃ upacārajjhānādikusalacittasampayuttānaṃ chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena pādabhūtaṃ sesacittacetasikarāsinti attho. Vuttañhi iddhipādavibhaṅge suttantabhājanīye ‘‘iddhipādoti tathābhūtassa vedanākkhandho…pe… viññāṇakkhandho’’ti (vibha. 434). Abhidhammabhājanīye ca ‘‘iddhipādoti tathābhūtassa phasso vedanā…pe… paggāho avikkhepo’’ti (vibha. 447) vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘sesacittacetasikarāsi’’nti ettha? Chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhāresu ekekaṃ iddhiṃ katvā dvīhi dvīhi saha sesavacanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Evañhi cattāro khandhā sabbe ca phassādayo dhammā saṅgahitā honti. Iminā nayena sesesupi attho veditabbo. Yatheva hi chandaṃ adhipatiṃ karitvā paṭiladdhasamādhi chandasamādhīti vutto, evaṃ vīriyaṃ cittaṃ vīmaṃsaṃ adhipatiṃ karitvā paṭiladdhasamādhi vīmaṃsāsamādhīti vuccati. Evamekekasmiṃ iddhipāde chandādayo vīriyādayo cittādayo vīmaṃsādayoti tayo tayo dhammā iddhīpi honti iddhipādāpi, sesā pana sampayuttakā cattāro khandhā iddhipādāyeva . Yasmā vā ime tayo tayo dhammā sampayuttakehi catūhi khandhehi saddhiṃyeva ijjhanti, na vinā tehi, tasmā tena pariyāyena sabbe cattāropi khandhā ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhi nāma honti, patiṭṭhaṭṭhena pādā nāmātipi veditabbaṃ.
在“具足精进定与勤行”中,“精进”与“勤行”实为同一法。为何分说为二?为显示精进的主导性,先举“精进”一词;为显示其成就四种作用,又立“勤行”之说。正因如此分说,这里也说有三种法。然而,有论师说:“《分别论》中言:‘神,即那些诸法的成就、成功、成就状态、成功状态。’(《分别论》434)因此,神为非实成,神足为实成。”但在此处,神与神足皆已确定为实成,是由自相触证而决断的。当知“成就”、“成功”等,只是依成就的状态而说的法义。显示巴利原文
Vīriyasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgatanti ettha pana vīriyanti ca padhānasaṅkhāroti ca ekoyeva. Kasmā dvidhā vuttanti ce? Vīriyassa adhipatibhāvadassanavasenettha paṭhamaṃ vīriyaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, tasseva catukiccasādhakattadassanatthaṃ padhānasaṅkhāravacanaṃ kataṃ. Evaṃ dvidhā vuttattā eva cetthāpi tayo tayo dhammāti vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘vibhaṅge ‘iddhīti yā tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ iddhi samiddhi ijjhanā samijjhanā’ti (vibha. 434) vuttattā iddhi nāma anipphannā, iddhipādo nipphanno’’ti vadanti. Idha pana iddhipi iddhipādopi nipphanno lakkhaṇabbhāhatoti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ. Iddhi samiddhītiādīhi ijjhanākārena dhammā eva vuttāti veditabbaṃ.
“修习”即反复实践。如同《经分别》(《分别论》431等)中所说,此处的神足修习也唯是世间性的。因此,欲成就神变者,修习世间神足时,于地遍等八遍处,成就八等至并得更高自在者,以顺遍、逆遍、顺逆遍,顺禅、逆禅、顺逆禅,跳禅、跳遍、跳禅与遍,跳支、跳所缘、跳支与所缘,支的确定、所缘的确定——以此十四种方式调练心已,复以欲为主、精进为主、心为主、观为主的方式,反复入于禅那。亦有主张支与所缘之确定者。然而,对于具备前因、仅在遍处上熟练四种禅那并获得自在者,亦可修习。他在修习每一种神足之定时,确立“为令未生之恶不善法不生……”等四种精进,了知退减与增长后,安立精进的平等。如是于四种神足中遍修心已,便成就神变。显示巴利原文
Bhāvetīti āsevati. Suttantabhājanīye (vibha. 431 ādayo) viya idhāpi iddhipādabhāvanā lokiyā eva. Tasmā iddhividhaṃ tāva sampādetukāmo lokiyaṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvento pathavīkasiṇādīsu aṭṭhasu kasiṇesu adhikatavasippattaaṭṭhasamāpattiko kasiṇānulomato kasiṇapaṭilomato kasiṇānulomapaṭilomato jhānānulomato jhānapaṭilomato jhānānulomapaṭilomato jhānukkantikato kasiṇukkantikato jhānakasiṇukkantikato aṅgasaṅkantikato ārammaṇasaṅkantikato aṅgārammaṇasaṅkantikato aṅgavavatthānato ārammaṇavavatthānatoti imehi cuddasahi ākārehi cittaṃ paridametvā chandasīsavīriyasīsacittasīsavīmaṃsāsīsavasena punappunaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjati. Aṅgārammaṇavavatthānampi keci icchanti. Pubbahetusampannena pana kasiṇesu catukkajjhānamatte ciṇṇavasināpi kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti taṃ taṃ iddhipādaṃ samādhiṃ bhāvento ‘‘anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāyā’’tiādikaṃ (vibha. 432) catuppakāraṃ vīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāti, tassa ca hānivuddhiyo ñatvā vīriyasamataṃ adhiṭṭhāti. So evaṃ catūsu iddhipādesu cittaṃ paribhāvetvā iddhividhaṃ sampādeti.
「于四种神足中……比丘」等句中:「他」是指已修习四种神足的比丘。「于四种神足中遍修心」:以欲等每一种作为主导,反复进入禅那,以此方式于诸神足中遍修其心,意思是使其熟习欲等之行。「调练」:令心无有障碍。前句为后句之因,因为已遍修的心即是已被调练的心。「令柔软」:令已调练的心达到自在。能够自在运转的心,便称为「柔软」。「令堪任」:使心适于作业、堪能作业。柔软的心,如同善加冶炼的黄金,成为堪任的;此处则指堪能神变之业。「他」是那位遍修其心的比丘。至于「将身并合于心」等,是为了显示在成就神变时,为使心能如意而行所做的加行。其中,「将身并合于心」:即把自己的生身并合于基本定心中,投入、安立,意思是令身随心而转。这对以不可见的身体而行有所助益。「将心并合于身」:即将基本定心并合于自己的生身中,安立,意思是令心随身而转。这对以可见的身体而行有所助益。亦有「并合」的读法,意为安立。「以身调心」:即执取基本定心而安置于生身,令心随身转,这是「将心并合于身」的同义语。「以心调身」:即执取生身而安置于基本定心,令身随心转,这是「将显示巴利原文
Soimesu catūsu iddhipādesūtiādīsu soti so bhāvitacaturiddhipādo bhikkhu. Catūsu iddhipādesu cittaṃ paribhāvetīti punappunaṃ chandādīsu ekekaṃ adhipatiṃ katvā jhānasamāpajjanavasena tesu cittaṃ paribhāveti nāma, chandādivāsanaṃ gāhāpetīti attho. Paridametīti nibbisevanaṃ karoti. Purimaṃ pacchimassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Paribhāvitañhi cittaṃ paridamitaṃ hotīti. Muduṃ karotīti tathā dantaṃ cittaṃ vasippattaṃ karoti. Vase vattamānañhi cittaṃ ‘‘mudū’’ti vuccati. Kammaniyanti kammakkhamaṃ kammayoggaṃ karoti. Mudu hi cittaṃ kammaniyaṃ hoti sudhantamiva suvaṇṇaṃ, idha pana iddhividhakammakkhamaṃ. Soti so paribhāvitacitto bhikkhu. Kāyampi citte samodahatītiādi iddhikaraṇakāle yathāsukhaṃ cittacārassa ijjhanatthaṃ yogavidhānaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha kāyampi citte samodahatīti attano karajakāyampi pādakajjhānacitte samodahati paveseti āropeti, kāyaṃ cittānugatikaṃ karotīti attho. Evaṃ karaṇaṃ adissamānena kāyena gamanassa upakārāya hoti. Cittampi kāye samodahatīti pādakajjhānacittaṃ attano karajakāye samodahati āropeti , cittampi kāyānugatikaṃ karotīti attho. Evaṃ karaṇaṃ dissamānena kāyena gamanassa upakārāya hoti. Samādahatītipi pāṭho, patiṭṭhāpetīti attho. Kāyavasena cittaṃ pariṇāmetīti pādakajjhānacittaṃ gahetvā karajakāye āropeti kāyānugatikaṃ karoti, idaṃ cittaṃ kāye samodahanassa vevacanaṃ. Cittavasena kāyaṃ pariṇāmetīti karajakāyaṃ gahetvā pādakajjhānacitte āropeti, cittānugatikaṃ karoti, idaṃ kāyaṃ citte samodahanassa vevacanaṃ. Adhiṭṭhātīti ‘‘evaṃ hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāti. Samodahanassa atthavivaraṇatthaṃ pariṇāmo vutto, pariṇāmassa atthavivaraṇatthaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā samodahatīti mūlapadaṃ, pariṇāmeti adhiṭṭhātīti tassa atthaniddesapadāni , tasmā tesaṃ dvinnaṃyeva padānaṃ vasena pariṇāmetvāti adhiṭṭhahitvāti vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ samodahitvāti.
「以乐想与轻想进入身体而住」:通过入定的方式,将第四禅那俱生的乐想及轻想导入、渗入生身而安住。当那些想进入他的身体时,他的生身便会如棉絮一般轻盈。「他」是已完成加行的比丘。「以此修习之心」:这是一个具格,表示「以此为特征的状态」;或者是一个因格,意为「以这样修习的心为因」。「清净」:由于舍与念清净的状态而清净。因为清净,所以「洁白」,即极其光明。「为神变智」:为了神变的部分,或是为了神变分别的智。「引导心」:那位比丘在已生起神通基础心的时候,按照前面所述的方法,为了证得神变智而引导遍作心,将其从遍所缘上移开,引向神变。「倾向」:让它趋向于应证得的神变,低垂于神变。「他」就是已经这样引导心的比丘。「种种」:多种多样。「神变」:神变的部分,或神变的分别。「体验」:亲自经历,即触证、现证、到达。显示巴利原文
Sukhasaññañca lahusaññañca kāye okkamitvā viharatīti catutthajjhānena sahajātasukhasaññañca lahusaññañca samāpajjanavasena karajakāye okkamitvā pavesetvā viharati. Tāya saññāya okkantakāyassa panassa karajakāyopi tūlapicu viya lahuko hoti. Soti so katayogavidhāno bhikkhu. Tathābhāvitena cittenāti itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ, hetuatthe vā, tathābhāvitena cittena hetubhūtenāti attho. Parisuddhenāti upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvato parisuddhena. Parisuddhattāyeva pariyodātena, pabhassarenāti attho. Iddhividhañāṇāyāti iddhikoṭṭhāse, iddhivikappe vā ñāṇatthāya. Cittaṃ abhinīharatīti so bhikkhu vuttappakāravasena tasmiṃ citte abhiññāpādake jāte iddhividhañāṇādhigamatthāya parikammacittaṃ abhinīharati, kasiṇārammaṇato apanetvā iddhividhābhimukhaṃ peseti. Abhininnāmetīti adhigantabbaiddhipoṇaṃ iddhipabbhāraṃ karoti. Soti so evaṃ katacittābhinīhāro bhikkhu. Anekavihitanti anekavidhaṃ nānappakārakaṃ. Iddhividhanti iddhikoṭṭhāsaṃ, iddhivikappaṃ vā. Paccanubhotīti paccanubhavati, phasseti sacchikaroti pāpuṇātīti attho.
102 102. 现在,为了显示它的种种状态,而说「一身」等语。其中,「一身」:在行神变之前,依原本状态是一身。「成为多身」:想去众人近处经行,或诵经,或问问题时,便化作百身、千身。那么,他如何成就此呢?成就了作为神通地基、足处的法后,进入神通基础禅那,出定后,如果想要成为百身,便作意“我成百身,我成百身”的遍作,再次进入基础禅那,出定后决意。与决意心一同生起,便成为百身。千身等情况也如此。倘若如此仍不成就,则需要再作遍作,第二次入定出定后决意。在《相应部注释》中说:「可以入一次或两次」。其中,基础禅那心以似相为所缘;遍作心以百身或千身为所缘,且唯以色相为所缘,而非概念。决意心同样以百身或千身为所缘,它如初安止心紧随种姓心之后一样,仅生起一次,属于色界第四禅那心。那些众多的化身,由于未作特别的区分而化出,所以与神通者本身相似。不论是行、住、坐、卧等威仪,或是说话、沉默等,神通者所为,他们亦复如是。如果想化作各种形态:有的呈少年期,有的呈中年期,有的呈老年期;又如长发、半秃、全秃、杂发,半红袈裟、显示巴利原文
102. Idānissa anekavihitabhāvaṃ dassento ekopi hutvātiādimāha. Tattha ekopi hutvāti iddhikaraṇato pubbe pakatiyā ekopi hutvā. Bahudhā hotīti bahunnaṃ santike caṅkamitukāmo vā, sajjhāyaṃ vā kattukāmo, pañhaṃ vā pucchitukāmo hutvā satampi sahassampi hoti. Kathaṃ panāyamevaṃ hoti? Iddhiyā bhūmipādapadamūlabhūte dhamme sampādetvā abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya sace sataṃ icchati, ‘‘sataṃ homi sataṃ homī’’ti parikammaṃ katvā puna pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya adhiṭṭhāti. Adhiṭṭhānacittena saheva sataṃ hoti. Sahassādīsupi eseva nayo. Sace evaṃ na ijjhati, puna parikammaṃ katvā dutiyampi samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Saṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyañhi ‘‘ekavāraṃ dvevāraṃ samāpajjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha pādakajjhānacittaṃ nimittārammaṇaṃ, parikammacittāni satārammaṇāni vā sahassārammaṇāni vā. Tāni ca kho vaṇṇavaseneva, no paṇṇattivasena. Adhiṭṭhānacittampi tatheva satārammaṇaṃ vā sahassārammaṇaṃ vā, taṃ paṭhamappanācittamiva gotrabhuanantaraṃ ekameva uppajjati rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānikaṃ . Tattha ye te bahū nimmitā, te aniyametvā nimmitattā iddhimatā sadisāva honti. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu vā bhāsitatuṇhībhāvādīsu vā yaṃ yaṃ iddhimā karoti, taṃtadeva karonti. Sace pana nānāvaṇṇe kātukāmo hoti, keci paṭhamavaye keci majjhimavaye keci pacchimavaye, tathā dīghakese upaḍḍhamuṇḍamuṇḍe missakakese upaḍḍharattacīvare paṇḍukacīvare padabhāṇadhammakathāsarabhaññapañhapucchanapañhavissajjanarajanapacanacīvarasibbanadhovanādīni karonte, aparepi vā nānappakārake kātukāmo hoti, tena pādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ettakā bhikkhū paṭhamavayā hontū’’tiādinā nayena parikammaṃ katvā puna samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānacittena saddhiṃ icchitappakārāyeva hontīti. Esa nayo ‘‘bahudhāpi hutvā eko hotī’’tiādīsu. Ayaṃ pana viseso – iminā hi bhikkhunā evaṃ bahubhāvaṃ nimminitvā puna ‘‘ekova hutvā caṅkamissāmi, sajjhāyaṃ karissāmi, pañhaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti cintetvā vā ‘‘ayaṃ vihāro appabhikkhuko, sace keci āgamissanti, kuto ime ettakā ekasadisā bhikkhū addhā therassa esānubhāvoti maṃ jānissantī’’ti appicchatāya vā antarāva ‘‘eko homī’’ti icchantena pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘eko homī’’ti parikammaṃ katvā puna samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘eko homī’’ti adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ . Adhiṭṭhānacittena saddhiṃyeva eko hoti. Evaṃ akaronto pana yathāparicchinnakālavasena sayameva eko hoti.
“显现”:令事物变得明显。“隐匿”:令事物变得隐藏。或与前文相衔接:“体验显现,体验隐匿。”此处,这位具神通者若欲作显现,则令暗处变明,令遮蔽处显露,或令不现前者现前。如何做到呢?他若想让自身或他人——即使原本被遮蔽或立于远处——也能被看见,便从基础禅那出定后,作意:“此处黑暗应成光明”,或“此处遮蔽应成显露”,或“此处不现前应成现前”。作遍作后,依前说方法决意。随着决意,便如所决意般成为现实。他人即便立于远处也能看见,自己若想看也能看见。若欲作隐匿,则令明处变暗,令未遮蔽者成遮蔽,或令现前者成不现前。如何做到呢?他若想让自身或他人——即使原本未遮蔽或立于近处——也不被看见,便从基础禅那出定后,作意:“此处光明应成黑暗”,或“此处未遮蔽应成遮蔽”,或“此处现前应成不现前”。作遍作后,依前说方法决意。随着决意,便如所决意般成为现实。他人即便立于近处也看不见,自己不想看见时也看不见。此外,一切明显的示现称为“显现”,不明显的示现称为“隐匿”。其中,在明显示巴利原文
Āvibhāvanti pākaṭabhāvaṃ karotīti attho. Tirobhāvanti paṭicchannabhāvaṃ karotīti attho. Āvibhāvaṃ paccanubhoti, tirobhāvaṃ paccanubhotīti purimena vā sambandho. Tatrāyaṃ iddhimā āvibhāvaṃ kattukāmo andhakāraṃ vā ālokaṃ karoti, paṭicchannaṃ vā vivaṭaṃ karoti, anāpāthaṃ vā āpāthaṃ karoti. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi yathā paṭicchannopi dūre ṭhitopi vā dissati, evaṃ attānaṃ vā paraṃ vā kattukāmo pādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘idaṃ andhakāraṃ ālokajātaṃ hotū’’ti vā, ‘‘idaṃ paṭicchannaṃ vivaṭaṃ hotū’’ti vā, ‘‘idaṃ anāpāthaṃ āpāthaṃ hotū’’ti vā āvajjitvā parikammaṃ katvā vuttanayeneva adhiṭṭhāti. Saha adhiṭṭhānā yathādhiṭṭhitameva hoti. Pare dūre ṭhitāpi passanti, sayampi passitukāmo passati. Tirobhāvaṃ kattukāmo pana ālokaṃ vā andhakāraṃ karoti, appaṭicchannaṃ vā paṭicchannaṃ, āpāthaṃ vā anāpāthaṃ karoti. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi yathā appaṭicchannopi samīpe ṭhitopi vā na dissati, evaṃ attānaṃ vā paraṃ vā kattukāmo pādakajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā ‘‘idaṃ ālokaṭṭhānaṃ andhakāraṃ hotū’’ti vā, ‘‘idaṃ appaṭicchannaṃ paṭicchannaṃ hotū’’ti vā, ‘‘idaṃ āpāthaṃ anāpāthaṃ hotū’’ti vā āvajjitvā parikammaṃ katvā vuttanayeneva adhiṭṭhāti. Saha adhiṭṭhānā yathādhiṭṭhitameva hoti. Pare samīpe ṭhitāpi na passanti, sayampi apassitukāmo na passati. Apica sabbampi pākaṭapāṭihāriyaṃ āvibhāvo nāma, apākaṭapāṭihāriyaṃ tirobhāvo nāma. Tattha pākaṭapāṭihāriye iddhipi paññāyati iddhimāpi. Taṃ yamakapāṭihāriyena dīpetabbaṃ. Apākaṭapāṭihāriye iddhiyeva paññāyati, na iddhimā. Taṃ mahakasuttena (saṃ. ni. 4.346) ca brahmanimantanikasuttena (ma. ni. 1.501 ādayo) ca dīpetabbaṃ.
“穿墙”(Tirokuṭṭa)指墙的另一边,即墙的对侧。此方法同样适用于“穿墙壁”和“穿山”。“墙”指房屋的墙壁。“墙壁”指房屋、寺院、村落等的围墙。“山”指土山或石山。“无碍”(asajjamāno)义为不附着、无障碍,犹如在虚空中。欲如此行走的比丘,应先入虚空遍禅那,出定后作意墙、墙壁或山,作遍作后决意:“愿成虚空。”它便成为虚空。若想向下走或向上走,则成为空心;若想穿透而过,则出现孔洞。他在其中无碍而行。然而,若这位比丘在决意而行的途中,有山或树等突然出现,是否还须重新入定决意呢?这并无过失。因为再次入定决意,就如同在亲教师面前重新求取依止一般。不过,由于这位比丘已决意“愿成虚空”,因此它确实是虚空。凭藉先前决意的力量,中途绝不会出现另一座由时节所生的山或树。若是由其他具神通者变化而出,则以先变化者为胜。他则应向上方或下方而行。显示巴利原文
Tirokuṭṭanti parakuṭṭaṃ, kuṭṭassa parabhāganti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo tiropākāratiropabbatesu. Kuṭṭoti ca gehabhitti. Pākāroti gehavihāragāmādīnaṃ parikkhepapākāro. Pabbatoti paṃsupabbato vā pāsāṇapabbato vā. Asajjamānoti alaggamāno. Seyyathāpi ākāseti ākāse viya. Evaṃ gantukāmena pana ākāsakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya kuṭṭaṃ vā pākāraṃ vā pabbataṃ vā āvajjitvā kataparikammena ‘‘ākāso hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhātabbo, ākāsova hoti. Adho otaritukāmassa, uddhaṃ vā ārohitukāmassa susiro hoti, vinivijjhitvā gantukāmassa chiddo. So tattha asajjamāno gacchati. Sace panassa bhikkhuno adhiṭṭhahitvā gacchantassa antarā pabbato vā rukkho vā uṭṭheti, kiṃ puna samāpajjitvā adhiṭṭhātabbanti? Doso natthi. Puna samāpajjitvā adhiṭṭhānañhi upajjhāyassa santike nissayaggahaṇasadisaṃ hoti. Iminā pana bhikkhunā ‘‘ākāso hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhitattā ākāso hotiyeva. Purimādhiṭṭhānabaleneva cassa antarā añño pabbato vā rukkho vā utumayo uṭṭhahissatīti aṭṭhānametaṃ. Aññena iddhimatā nimmite pana paṭhamaṃ nimmānaṃ balavaṃ hoti. Itarena tassa uddhaṃ vā adho vā gantabbaṃ.
关于“于地中出没”:此处“出”(ummujjati)是浮出,“没”(nimujjati)是沉入,浮出与沉入合称“出没”。欲如此做者,应先入水遍禅那,出定后划定范围:“愿此地在如此范围内变为水。”作遍作后,依前说方法决意。随着决意,在所划定区域内,地即转变成水。他在其中出没,如同在水中。不仅能够出没,凡是沐浴、饮水、洗脸、洗衣等,想做什么都能做到。不仅能变水,凡酥、油、蜜、糖浆等,想变成什么,都可如是作意:“愿这些物如此如此,成为这样的分量。”作遍作后决意,便如所决意般实现。若取出放进容器,酥仍是酥,油等仍是油等,水仍是水。他想浸入才浸入,不想浸入便不浸入。唯有这位比丘见地变成了水,其余人仍见为地。在那片区域,人们可以行走,或驾车等通行,照样耕作等。若这位比丘愿意:“让他们也见为水”,同样能够实现。不过,一旦超过所限定的时间,那么除了原本罐子、池塘等处的水予以保留外,其余被划定的区域依然恢复为地。显示巴利原文
Pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjanti ettha ummujjanti uṭṭhānaṃ, nimujjanti saṃsīdanaṃ, ummujjañca nimujjañca ummujjanimujjaṃ. Evaṃ kattukāmena pana āpokasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā uṭṭhāya ‘‘ettake ṭhāne pathavī udakaṃ hotū’’ti paricchinditvā parikammaṃ katvā vuttanayeneva adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Saha adhiṭṭhānā yathāparicchinne ṭhāne pathavī udakameva hoti. So tattha ummujjanimujjaṃ karoti seyyathāpi udake. Na kevalañca ummujjanimujjameva, nhānapānamukhadhovanabhaṇḍakadhovanādīsu yaṃ yaṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ karoti. Na kevalañca udakameva karoti, sappitelamadhuphāṇitādīsupi yaṃ yaṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ ‘‘idañcidañca ettakaṃ hotū’’ti āvajjitvā parikammaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhahantassa yathādhiṭṭhitameva hoti. Uddharitvā bhājanagataṃ karontassa sappi sappiyeva hoti, telādīni telādīniyeva, udakaṃ udakameva. So tattha temitukāmova temeti, na temitukāmo na temeti. Tasseva ca sā pathavī udakaṃ hoti, sesajanassa pathavīyeva. Tattha manussā pattikāpi gacchanti, yānādīhipi gacchanti, kasikammādīnipi karontiyeva. Sace panāyaṃ ‘‘tesampi udakaṃ hotū’’ti icchati, hotiyeva. Paricchinnakālaṃ pana atikkamitvā yaṃ pakatiyā ghaṭataḷākādīsu udakaṃ, taṃ ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ paricchinnaṭṭhānaṃ pathavīyeva hoti.
“履水不破而行”者:在此,水若被踩踏便会沉陷,称为“破裂”;反之则称为“不破裂”。欲如此行者,应先入地遍禅那,出定后划定范围,如“愿此范围之水化为地”,完成遍作后,依前述方法决意。决意即成,所划范围内的水即转为地。彼于其上行走,如同行于大地。不仅可行走,凡所愿之威仪,皆能成办。不仅可化地为地,若欲化为何物——宝物、金山、树木等,皆依前述方法作意并决意,即能如愿实现。唯此比丘见水为地,余人仍见为水。鱼、龟、水鸟等仍于其中随心游弋。若此比丘愿他人亦见彼处为地,同样可以实现。时限过后,便复归于水。显示巴利原文
Udakepi abhijjamāne gacchatīti ettha yaṃ udakaṃ akkamitvā saṃsīdati, taṃ bhijjamānanti vuccati, viparītaṃ abhijjamānaṃ. Evaṃ gantukāmena pana pathavīkasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ettake ṭhāne udakaṃ pathavī hotū’’ti paricchinditvā parikammaṃ katvā vuttanayeneva adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Saha adhiṭṭhānā yathāparicchinnaṭṭhāne udakaṃ pathavīyeva hoti. So tattha gacchati seyyathāpi pathaviyaṃ. Na kevalañca gacchati, yaṃ yaṃ iriyāpathaṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ kappeti. Na kevalañca pathavimeva karoti, maṇisuvaṇṇapabbatarukkhādīsupi yaṃ yaṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ vuttanayeneva āvajjitvā adhiṭṭhāti, yathādhiṭṭhitameva hoti. Tasseva ca taṃ udakaṃ pathavī hoti, sesajanassa udakameva . Macchakacchapā ca udakakākādayo ca yathāruci vicaranti. Sace panāyaṃ aññesampi manussānaṃ taṃ pathaviṃ kātuṃ icchati, karotiyeva. Yathāparicchinnakālātikkamena pana udakameva hoti.
“于空中结跏趺座而行”者:彼于虚空中,以双腿盘结而坐(结跏趺座)而行。“有翼之鸟”者,指拥有完整羽翼的鸟,而非羽翼未丰或双翼被剪断者。那样的鸟无法翱翔于空中。欲如此行于空中者,应先入地遍禅那,出定后,若欲坐着而行,应划定跏趺座大小的范围;若欲卧着而行,应划定床铺大小的范围;若欲徒步而行,应划定道路大小的范围。如此依所宜划定范围后,依前述方法决意:“愿化为地”。由决意力,即成大地。欲行空中的比丘,还须证得天眼。何以故?因途中会有由时节所生的山、树等,或由龙、金翅鸟等出于嫉妒而变现,为能见他们故。见已又当如何?应入根本禅那,出定后作意“愿成虚空”,完成遍作后决意。此外,为观察降落之处,天眼亦属必需。若于人群聚集处,如浴场、村口等处降落,将置身众人环视之中。故应以天眼观察,避开不宜之处,于适当之处降落。显示巴利原文
Ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamatīti antalikkhe samantato ūrubaddhāsanena gacchati. Pakkhī sakuṇoti pakkhehi yutto sakuṇo, na aparipuṇṇapakkho lūnapakkho vā. Tādiso hi ākāse gantuṃ na sakkoti. Evamākāse gantukāmena pana pathavīkasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya sace nisinno gantumicchati, pallaṅkappamāṇaṃ ṭhānaṃ paricchinditvā parikammaṃ katvā vuttanayeneva adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Sace nipanno gantukāmo hoti, mañcappamāṇaṃ, sace padasā gantukāmo hoti, maggappamāṇanti evaṃ yathānurūpaṃ ṭhānaṃ paricchinditvā vuttanayeneva ‘‘pathavī hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Saha adhiṭṭhānā pathavīyeva hoti. Ākāse gantukāmena ca bhikkhunā dibbacakkhulābhināpi bhavitabbaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā antarā utusamuṭṭhānā vā pabbatarukkhādayo honti, nāgasupaṇṇādayo vā usūyantā māpenti, tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ. Te pana disvā kiṃ kātabbanti? Pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ākāso hotū’’ti parikammaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Apica okāse orohaṇatthampi iminā dibbacakkhulābhinā bhavitabbaṃ. Ayañhi sace anokāse nhānatitthe vā gāmadvāre vā orohati, mahājanassa pākaṭo hoti, tasmā dibbacakkhunā passitvā anokāsaṃ vajjetvā okāse otaratīti.
“亦能触摸彼具大神力、大威德之日月”者:在此,日月运行于四万二千由旬之高空,故有大神力;于一刹那普照三洲,故有大威德。或者,因高空运行与光明遍照而有大神力,即以此大神力而有此大威德。“触摸”者,指把握或碰触一处部位。“遍摩”者,指如打磨镜面一般全面摩擦。此神变唯依神通根本禅那而成,此处并无遍禅成就的必然要求。若彼愿往而触摸,即往而触摸。若彼欲于坐、卧之间,原地触摸,则作意:“愿彼来至伸手可及处”。凭藉决意之力,日月即如脱柄之棕榈果一般,来至伸手可及处。彼或触摸安住原处之日月,或伸手去触摸。伸手之时,所增长者为执受色,抑或非执受色?以执受色为所依,非执受色得增长。如此成办之后,不仅可触摸日月,若愿,还可将日月当作脚凳搁脚,或作为椅子安坐,或作为床铺躺卧,或作为靠板倚靠。一人如此行,他人亦能成。纵有百千比丘同时行之,亦复如是。显示巴利原文
Imepi candimasūriye evaṃmahiddhike evaṃmahānubhāveti ettha candimasūriyānaṃ dvācattālīsayojanasahassoparicaraṇena mahiddhikatā, tīsu dīpesu ekakkhaṇe ālokakaraṇena mahānubhāvatā veditabbā, evaṃ uparicaraṇaālokapharaṇehi vā mahiddhike, teneva mahiddhikattena mahānubhāve . Parāmasatīti pariggaṇhāti, ekadese vā phusati. Parimajjatīti samantato ādāsatalaṃ viya parimajjati. Ayaṃ panassa iddhi abhiññāpādakajjhānavaseneva ijjhati, natthettha kasiṇasamāpattiniyamo. Svāyaṃ yadi icchati gantvā parāmasituṃ, gantvā parāmasati. Sace pana idheva nisinnako vā nipannako vā parāmasitukāmo hoti, ‘‘hatthapāse hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāti. Adhiṭṭhānabalena vaṇṭā muttatālaphalaṃ viya āgantvā hatthapāse ṭhite vā parāmasati, hatthaṃ vā vaḍḍhetvā parāmasati. Hatthaṃ vaḍḍhentassa pana kiṃ upādinnakaṃ vaḍḍhati anupādinnakaṃ vāti? Upādinnakaṃ nissāya anupādinnakaṃ vaḍḍhati. Yo evaṃ katvā na kevalaṃ candimasūriye parāmasati, sace icchati, pādakathalikaṃ katvā pāde ṭhapeti, pīṭhaṃ katvā nisīdati, mañcaṃ katvā nipajjati, apassenaphalakaṃ katvā apassayati. Yathā eko, evaṃ aparopi. Anekesupi hi bhikkhusatasahassesu evaṃ karontesu tesañca ekamekassa tatheva ijjhati. Candimasūriyānañca gamanampi ālokakaraṇampi tatheva hoti. Yathā hi pātisahassesu udakapūresu sabbapātīsu candamaṇḍalāni dissanti, pākatikameva candassa gamanaṃ ālokakaraṇañca hoti, tathūpamametaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ. Yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṃ vattetīti brahmalokaṃ paricchedaṃ katvā etthantare anekavidhaṃ abhiññaṃ karonto attano kāyena vasaṃ issariyaṃ vatteti. Vitthāro panettha iddhikathāyaṃ āvibhavissatīti.
天耳界清净智的解说显示巴利原文
51. Sotadhātuvisuddhiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
103 《天耳界清净智》的解说中,“于远处诸声”等语,是为欲发起天耳的初学比丘指示修习方法而说。此中,“于远处诸声的声相”,是指远处那些声音本身。声音本身即是“相”的成因,故称“声相”。虽言“远处”,最初亦仅指常耳所能听闻的范围。“粗大的”(oḷārika)指厚重的声音;“微细的”(sukhuma)指细微的声音;“极细的”(saṇhasaṇha)指微细中更为微细者,即最微细的声音。以此句,已将最微细的声音含括无余。欲发起此智的初学比丘,应进入神通根本禅那,出定后,以遍作定心,先从常耳能听闻的范围,作意远处的粗大声音。如林中狮子等的吼声,或寺院里的钟声、鼓声、螺贝声,沙弥与年少比丘尽力诵经之声,日常对话中“尊者,什么?”“贤友,什么?”等语声,鸟声、风声、脚步声、沸水嘶嘶声、烈日下暴晒的棕榈叶声,乃至虫蚁之声等。应如此从最粗大之声开始,渐次作意越来越微细的声音。显示巴利原文
103. Sotadhātuvisuddhiñāṇaniddese dūrepi saddānantiādi dibbasotaṃ uppādetukāmassa ādikammikassa bhikkhuno upāyasandassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha dūrepi saddānaṃ saddanimittanti dūre saddānaṃ antare saddaṃ. Saddoyeva hi nimittakaraṇavasena saddanimittaṃ. ‘‘Dūre’’ti vuttepi pakatisotassa āpāthaṭṭhāneyeva. Oḷārikānanti thūlānaṃ. Sukhumānanti aṇūnaṃ. Saṇhasaṇhānanti saṇhatopi saṇhānaṃ, atisaṇhānanti attho. Etena paramasukhumā saddā vuttā honti. Imaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppādetukāmena ādikammikena jhāyinā abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya parikammasamādhicittena paṭhamataraṃ pakatisotapathe dūre oḷāriko araññe sīhādīnaṃ saddo āvajjitabbo. Vihāre ghaṇḍisaddo bherisaddo saṅkhasaddo sāmaṇeradaharabhikkhūnaṃ sabbathāmena sajjhāyantānaṃ sajjhāyanasaddo pakatikathaṃ kathentānaṃ ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, kiṃ, āvuso’’tiādisaddo sakuṇasaddo vātasaddo padasaddo pakkuthitaudakassa cicciṭāyanasaddo ātape sussamānatālapaṇṇasaddo kunthakipillikādisaddoti evaṃ sabboḷārikato pabhuti yathākkamena sukhumasukhumasaddā āvajjitabbā.
如此作意时,他应当依前述方法,于东、西等十方,依次一一作意每一方的声相。作意时,对于常耳所能听闻的一切声音,应以常耳为依止,用意门心作意。那些声音,于一般心已属明显,而于遍作定心,则更为显著。当他如此作意声相时,天耳界即将现前。他便以其中一个声音为所缘,生起意门转向心。彼心灭后,即有四或五个速行心生起。前三或四个为欲界心,名为遍作、近行、随顺、种姓;第四或第五为安止心,属色界第四禅。与彼安止心同时生起的智慧,即是天耳界。欲令此智稳固有力,应以“我听闻此范围内之声”为念,从一指节之范围开始,然后次第扩展:由两指节、四指节、八指节,至一拃、一肘;再至内室、露台、精舍、僧园、行乞村落、国土,乃至轮围山,甚至更远,不断划定范围而扩展之。如是证得神通之比丘,纵不再入根本禅那,亦能以神通智听闻落入根本禅那所缘境域内的一切声音。如此听闻之时,下至下方,上至梵天界,螺贝声、大鼓声、小鼓显示巴利原文
Evaṃ karontena ca puratthimādīsu dasasu disāsu kamena ekekissā disāya saddanimittaṃ vuttanayena manasi kātabbaṃ. Manasi karontena ca ye saddā pakatisotassa suyyanti, tesu pakatisotamodhāya manodvārikena cittena manasi kātabbaṃ. Tassa te saddā pakaticittassāpi pākaṭā honti, parikammasamādhicittassa pana ativiya pākaṭā honti. Tassevaṃ saddanimittaṃ manasikaroto idāni dibbasotadhātu uppajjissatīti tesu saddesu aññataraṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjati, tasmiṃ niruddhe cattāri pañca vā javanāni javanti. Yesaṃ purimāni tīṇi cattāri vā parikammopacārānulomagotrabhunāmakāni kāmāvacarāni, catutthaṃ pañcamaṃ vā appanācittaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānikaṃ. Tattha yaṃ tena appanācittena saddhiṃ uppannaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ayaṃ dibbasotadhātu. Taṃ thāmagataṃ karontena ‘‘etthantare saddaṃ suṇāmī’’ti ekaṅgulamattaṃ paricchinditvā vaḍḍhetabbaṃ, tato dvaṅgulacaturaṅgulaaṭṭhaṅgulavidatthiratanaantogabbhapamukha- pāsādapariveṇasaṅghārāmagocaragāmajanapadādivasena yāva cakkavāḷaṃ, tato vā bhiyyopi paricchinditvā paricchinditvā vaḍḍhetabbaṃ. Evaṃ adhigatābhiñño esa pādakajjhānārammaṇena phuṭṭhokāsabbhantaragate sadde puna pādakajjhānaṃ asamāpajjitvāpi abhiññāñāṇena suṇātiyeva. Evaṃ suṇanto ca sacepi yāvabrahmalokā saṅkhabheripaṇavādisaddehi ekakolāhalaṃ hoti, pāṭiyekkaṃ vavatthāpetukāmatāya sati ‘‘ayaṃ saṅkhasaddo, ayaṃ bherisaddo’’ti vavatthāpetuṃ sakkotiyeva. Abhiññāñāṇena sute sātthake sadde pacchā kāmāvacaracittena atthaṃ jānāti. Dibbasotaṃ pakatisotavatoyeva uppajjati, no badhirassa. Pacchā pakatisote vinaṭṭhepi dibbasotaṃ na vinassatīti vadanti.
“以天耳界”:在此,因与天耳相似,故称为“天”。诸天由善业所生,不为胆汁、痰、血等所障碍,因远离随烦恼,其清净净色耳界能于远处领受所缘,这即是天耳。而此比丘由精进修习之力所生的智耳界,亦复如是,因与天耳相似,故称为“天”。又因依天住而得,及自身依止天住故,亦称为“天”;以能听闻、无命义故,称为耳界;以能行使耳界作用故,亦如耳界。以此天耳界。“清净”即遍净无秽,远离随烦恼。“超越人耳”即超越人的听闻范围而闻声,故超越人的肉耳界,超然而住。“闻二种声”即闻两种声音。哪两种?天与人,即闻诸天及人之声。当知此是分摄。“或远或近”即无论远至他方轮围之声,或近至乃至依止自身而住之虫声,彼皆能闻。当知此为无余摄。显示巴利原文
So dibbāya sotadhātuyāti ettha dibbasadisattā dibbā. Devānañhi sucaritakammābhinibbattā pittasemharudhirādīhi apalibuddhā upakkilesavimuttatāya dūrepi ārammaṇasampaṭicchanasamatthā dibbā pasādasotadhātu hoti. Ayañcāpi imassa bhikkhuno vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattā ñāṇasotadhātu tādisāyevāti dibbasadisattā dibbā. Apica dibbavihāravasena paṭiladdhattā, attanā ca dibbavihārasannissitattāpi dibbā, savanaṭṭhena nijjīvaṭṭhena ca sotadhātu, sotadhātukiccakaraṇena ca sotadhātu viyātipi sotadhātu. Tāya dibbāya sotadhātuyā. Visuddhāyāti parisuddhāya nirupakkilesāya. Atikkantamānusikāyāti manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā saddasavanena mānusikaṃ maṃsasotadhātuṃ atikkantāya vītivattitvā ṭhitāya. Ubho sadde suṇātīti dve sadde suṇāti. Katame dve? Dibbe ca mānuse ca, devānañca manussānañca saddeti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena padesapariyādānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ye dūre santike cāti ye saddā dūre paracakkavāḷepi, ye ca santike antamaso sadehasannissitapāṇakasaddāpi, te suṇātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena nippadesapariyādānaṃ veditabbanti.
52. 他心智论释注疏显示巴利原文
52. Cetopariyañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
104 104. 于他心智论释中,“他这样了知”此句,今指示应说之法。“此色从喜根等起”等,是初学禅那者应行之道。如何而行?欲生起此智的禅修者,首先应生起天眼智。因此智依天眼而成就,天眼是其遍作。是故,彼比丘应增广光明,以天眼反复观察依他人心脏色而转起的血色,而后遍求其心。当善俱喜转起时,彼血为红色,如尼拘律果之色;不善俱喜转起时,彼血混浊;忧转起时,为黑色,如阎浮果之色且混浊;善俱舍转起时,为清净,如芝麻油之色;不善俱舍转起时,彼血则混浊。是故,彼比丘反复观察他人心脏血色后,遍求其心:“此色从喜根等起,此色从忧根等起,此色从舍根等起”,应令其他心智坚固。当其如此坚固时,渐次了知一切欲界等差别心,唯从心至心而转,无需观心脏色。此义亦于注疏中说:显示巴利原文
104. Cetopariyañāṇaniddese so evaṃ pajānātīti idāni vattabbaṃ vidhānaṃ upadisati. Idaṃ rūpaṃ somanassindriyasamuṭṭhitantiādi ādikammikena jhāyinā paṭipajjitabbaṃ vidhānaṃ. Kathaṃ? Etañhi ñāṇaṃ uppādetukāmena jhāyinā paṭhamaṃ tāva dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Etañhi dibbacakkhuvasena ijjhati, taṃ etassa parikammaṃ. Tasmā tena bhikkhunā ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbena cakkhunā parassa hadayarūpaṃ nissāya vattamānassa lohitassa vaṇṇaṃ passitvā passitvā cittaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ. Tañhi lohitaṃ kusalasomanasse vattamāne rattaṃ hoti nigrodhapakkavaṇṇaṃ, akusalasomanasse vattamāne tadeva luḷitaṃ hoti, domanasse vattamāne kāḷakaṃ hoti jambupakkavaṇṇaṃ luḷitaṃ. Kusalūpekkhāya vattamānāya pasannaṃ hoti tilatelavaṇṇaṃ. Akusalūpekkhāya vattamānāya tadeva luḷitaṃ hoti. Tasmā tena ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ somanassindriyasamuṭṭhitaṃ, idaṃ rūpaṃ domanassindriyasamuṭṭhitaṃ, idaṃ rūpaṃ upekkhindriyasamuṭṭhita’’nti parassa hadayalohitavaṇṇaṃ passitvā passitvā cittaṃ pariyesantena cetopariyañāṇaṃ thāmagataṃ kātabbaṃ. Evaṃ thāmagate hi tasmiṃ anukkamena sabbampi kāmāvacarādibhedaṃ cittaṃ pajānāti cittā cittameva saṅkamanto vinā hadayarūpadassanena. Vuttampi cetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
想知无色界他心的人,观察谁的心脏色?察看谁的根变化呢?他不观察任何人。这是具神通者的境界,即无论将心转向何处,都能了知那十六种分类的心。不过,这番话是依未作决意者而说的。”(《清净道论》2.401)显示巴利原文
‘‘Āruppe parassa cittaṃ jānitukāmo kassa hadayarūpaṃ passati, kassindriyavikāraṃ oloketīti? Na kassaci. Iddhimato visayo esa, yadidaṃ yattha katthaci cittaṃ āvajjanto soḷasappabhedaṃ cittaṃ jānāti. Akatābhinivesassa pana vasena ayaṃ kathā’’ti (visuddhi. 2.401).
“对其他众生”:除了自己以外的其余众生。“对其他补特伽罗”:这也是同一意义,只是依应调伏者及说法的善巧,而有言辞上的差别。“以心周遍了知心”:即用自己的心,周遍判别他们的心,依有贪等各种方式而了知。在“有贪或”等句中,“或”字是总括义。其中,八种贪俱心为有贪心,其余四地所摄的善及无记心为离贪心。两种忧俱心、两种疑俱心及掉举俱心,这四种心不入此二类。但有些长老也以“离贪”一词涵盖它们。两种忧俱心为有瞋心,一切四地的善及无记心为离瞋心。其余十种不善心不入此二类。但有些长老也以“离瞋”一词涵盖它们。在“有痴”与“离痴”中,唯有唯依痴一因而起的疑俱及掉举俱二种心为有痴。然而,因为痴存在于一切不善心中,所以十二种不善心也应当知为“有痴”。其余善及无记心为离痴。与昏沉睡眠俱行的为收缩,与掉举俱行的为散乱。色界及无色界心为大,其余为不大。一切三地之心为有上,出世间心为无上。达到近行及达到安止者为定,未达此二者为未定。达到分断、镇伏断、正断、止息断、出离解脱者为解脱,未达这五种解脱者为未解脱,应当这样了知。这样,获得他心智的比丘了知十六种分类的心。然而,凡夫不知圣者之道显示巴利原文
Parasattānanti attānaṃ ṭhapetvā sesasattānaṃ. Parapuggalānanti idampi iminā ekatthameva, veneyyavasena pana desanāvilāsena ca byañjanena nānattaṃ kataṃ. Cetasā ceto paricca pajānātīti attano cittena tesaṃ cittaṃ paricchinditvā sarāgādivasena nānappakārato jānāti. Sarāgaṃ vātiādīsu vā-saddo samuccayattho. Tattha aṭṭhavidhaṃ lobhasahagatacittaṃ sarāgaṃ cittaṃ nāma, avasesaṃ catubhūmakakusalābyākatacittaṃ vītarāgaṃ nāma. Dve domanassacittāni, dve vicikicchāuddhaccacittānīti imāni pana cattāri cittāni imasmiṃ duke saṅgahaṃ na gacchanti. Keci pana therā tānipi vītarāgapadena saṅgaṇhanti. Duvidhaṃ pana domanassasahagataṃ cittaṃ sadosaṃ cittaṃ nāma, sabbampi catubhūmakaṃ kusalābyākataṃ vītadosaṃ nāma. Sesāni dasa akusalacittāni imasmiṃ duke saṅgahaṃ na gacchanti. Keci pana therā tānipi vītadosapadena saṅgaṇhanti. Samohaṃ vītamohanti ettha pana mohekahetukavasena vicikicchāuddhaccasahagatadvayameva samohaṃ. Mohassa pana sabbākusalesu sambhavato dvādasavidhampi akusalaṃ cittaṃ ‘‘samoha’’nti veditabbaṃ. Avasesaṃ kusalābyākataṃ vītamohaṃ. Thinamiddhānugataṃ pana saṃkhittaṃ, uddhaccānugataṃ vikkhittaṃ. Rūpāvacarārūpāvacaraṃ mahaggataṃ, avasesaṃ amahaggataṃ. Sabbampi tebhūmakaṃ sauttaraṃ, lokuttaraṃ anuttaraṃ. Upacārappattaṃ appanāppattañca samāhitaṃ, tadubhayamasampattaṃ asamāhitaṃ. Tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttippattaṃ vimuttaṃ, pañcavidhampi etaṃ vimuttimappattaṃ avimuttanti veditabbaṃ. Iti cetopariyañāṇalābhī bhikkhu soḷasappabhedampi cittaṃ pajānāti. Puthujjanā pana ariyānaṃ maggaphalacittaṃ na jānanti, ariyāpi ca heṭṭhimā heṭṭhimā uparimānaṃ uparimānaṃ maggaphalacittaṃ na jānanti, uparimā uparimā pana heṭṭhimānaṃ heṭṭhimānaṃ cittaṃ jānantīti.
53. 宿命随念智论释注疏显示巴利原文
53. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
105 在《宿命随念智论释》中,「他这样了知」等语句,是为了说明:对于已在四神足中修习其心、想要生起宿命随念智的人,应当如何生起该智的方法。因为,当他渐次观察缘起时,会见到由识、名色、六处、触、受所构成的现在果的概要;接着见到这果的缘,也就是过去世中由业与烦恼所构成的因的概要;再见到那因的缘,也就是再前一世的果的概要;又见到那果的缘,也就是第三世中的因的概要。就这样,通过对缘起的观察,他见到了生生世世的相续。由此可见,缘起作意对于成就宿命随念智有很大的助益。这其中,「此有故彼有,此生故彼生」这句话,是缘起论释的纲要性表述。可能有人会问:既然一句便已说明了这层意思,为何还要分作两句?回答是:因为它们之间有着内涵上的差别。如何理解呢?「此有故」的意思是:当此缘存在的时候。这是对所有类型的缘都通用的表述。「彼有」的意思是:此缘所生的法便会存在。这是对所有缘生的法都通用的表述。以此完整的语句,遮遣了无因论。因为,凡是依于因缘而存在的法,并非在没有因缘的情况下存在,所以它们不能被称为无因。显示巴利原文
105. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaniddese evaṃ pajānātītiādi catūsu iddhipādesu paribhāvitacittassa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ uppādetukāmassa taduppādanavidhānadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Kamato hi paṭiccasamuppādaṃ passitvā viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanāsaṅkhātaṃ paccuppannaṃ phalasaṅkhepaṃ passati, tassa paccayaṃ purimabhave kammakilesasaṅkhātaṃ hetusaṅkhepaṃ passati, tassa paccayaṃ purimabhaveyeva phalasaṅkhepaṃ passati, tassa paccayaṃ tatiyabhave hetusaṅkhepaṃ passati. Evaṃ paṭiccasamuppādadassanena jātiparamparaṃ passati. Evaṃ bahūpakāro pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇassa paṭiccasamuppādamanasikāro . Tattha ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti idaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaniddesassa uddesavacanaṃ. Evaṃ tesaṃ aññataravacaneneva atthe siddhe dvidhā vacanaṃ kasmāti ce? Atthanānattasabbhāvato. Kathaṃ? Imasmiṃ satīti imasmiṃ paccaye vijjamāne. Idaṃ sabbapaccayānaṃ sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Idaṃ hotīti idaṃ paccayuppannaṃ bhavati. Idaṃ sabbapaccayuppannānaṃ sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Iminā sakalena vacanena ahetukavādo paṭisiddho hoti. Ye hi dhammā paccayasambhavā honti, na paccayābhāvā, te ahetukā nāma na hontīti. Imassuppādāti imassa paccayassa uppādahetu. Idaṃ sabbapaccayānaṃ uppādavantatādīpanavacanaṃ. Idaṃ uppajjatīti idaṃ paccayuppannaṃ uppajjati. Idaṃ sabbapaccayuppannānaṃ tato uppajjamānatādīpanavacanaṃ. Iminā sakalena vacanena sassatāhetukavādo paṭisiddho hoti. Ye hi uppādavanto dhammā, te aniccā. Tasmā satipi sahetukatte aniccahetukā ete dhammā na loke niccasammatapakatipurisādihetukāti vuttaṃ hoti.
「此即是」这个词,是用来指出接下来所要阐述的具体内容。在「无明缘行」这一句中,果所依托的那个东西,就是「缘」。「缘」的意思是「非离于它」或「不排除它」。「行」的意思是「生起」并且「持续地运作」。另外,起资助作用这个含义,就是「缘」的含义。无明既是那个东西,又是缘,所以称为「无明缘」。因此,应当这样来组合理解:以无明为缘,诸行便生起。同样地,「生起」这个词也应当与后面其他的语句进行这样的组合理解。在忧等诸苦中:悲恸叫作「忧」;哭泣叫作「悲」;令人感到痛苦叫作「苦」,或者从生起和持续两种角度来说,它就像被挖伤一样,所以也叫作「苦」;内心郁郁寡欢的状态叫作「忧」;极度的疲惫叫作「过劳」。「生起」就是「产生」。「如是」这个词,指出了前面所阐释的道理。以此表明,这纯粹是由于无明等种种原因,而不是由于自在天所造作等原因。「此」是指如前所述的那个。「纯整的」是指不混杂的,或者说完整的。「苦蕴」是指痛苦的集合,而不是指有情,也不是指快乐、清净等。「集」就是「产生」。「有」就是「存在」。显示巴利原文
Yadidanti niddisitabbatthasandassanaṃ. Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāti ettha yaṃ paṭicca phalameti, so paccayo. Paṭiccāti na vinā, apaccakkhitvāti attho. Etīti uppajjati ceva pavattati cāti attho. Apica upakārakaṭṭho paccayaṭṭho, avijjā ca sā paccayo cāti avijjāpaccayo. Tasmā avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantīti yojanā. Evaṃ sambhavanti-saddassa sesapadehipi yojanā kātabbā. Sokādīsu ca socanaṃ soko. Paridevanaṃ paridevo. Dukkhatīti dukkhaṃ. Uppādaṭṭhitivasena vā dvedhā khanatītipi dukkhaṃ. Dummanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Bhuso āyāso upāyāso. Sambhavantīti nibbattanti. Evanti niddiṭṭhanayanidassanaṃ. Tena avijjādīheva kāraṇehi, na issaranimmānādīhīti dasseti. Etassāti yathāvuttassa. Kevalassāti asammissassa, sakalassa vā. Dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkhasamūhassa, na sattassa na sukhasubhādīnaṃ. Samudayoti nibbatti. Hotīti sambhavati.
这其中,什么是「无明」?就是对苦的无知,对苦集的无知,对苦灭的无知,对通向苦灭之道的无知,对前际的无知,对后际的无知,对前后际的无知,对缘已生起的缘起诸法的无知。什么是「行」?就是福行、非福行、不动行、身行、语行、心行。其中,八种欲界善思和五种色界善思是「福行」;十二种不善思是「非福行」;四种无色界善思是「不动行」。身思是「身行」,语思是「语行」,意思是「心行」。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamā avijjā? Dukkhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya aññāṇaṃ, pubbante aññāṇaṃ, aparante aññāṇaṃ, pubbantāparante aññāṇaṃ, idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu aññāṇaṃ. Katame saṅkhārā? Puññābhisaṅkhāro, apuññābhisaṅkhāro, āneñjābhisaṅkhāro, kāyasaṅkhāro, vacīsaṅkhāro, cittasaṅkhāro. Aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalacetanā pañca rūpāvacarakusalacetanā puññābhisaṅkhāro, dvādasa akusalacetanā apuññābhisaṅkhāro, catasso arūpāvacarakusalacetanā āneñjābhisaṅkhāro. Kāyasañcetanā kāyasaṅkhāro, vacīsañcetanā vacīsaṅkhāro, manosañcetanā cittasaṅkhāro.
于此,或许有人会问:“应如何了知‘这些行以无明为缘’呢?”答:因为无明存在时,它们才存在。也就是说,若有人于苦等诸法,尚未断除那名为无明的无知,则他首先因对苦的无知,将轮回之苦执取为乐想,进而造作成为其因的三种行。因对集谛的无知,把本是以渴爱为资粮的苦因之行,误执为乐因,从而造作。因对灭谛与道谛的无知,把并非苦灭之处的殊胜趣处,执为苦灭;又把并非道谛的祭祀、苦行等,执为灭苦之道;为了希求灭苦,便通过祭祀、苦行等途径,造作三种行。显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā – kathaṃ panetaṃ jānitabbaṃ ‘‘ime saṅkhārā avijjāpaccayā hontī’’ti? Avijjābhāve bhāvato. Yassa hi dukkhādīsu avijjāsaṅkhātaṃ aññāṇaṃ appahīnaṃ hoti. So dukkhe tāva pubbantādīsu ca aññāṇena saṃsāradukkhaṃ sukhasaññāya gahetvā tasseva hetubhūte tividhepi saṅkhāre ārabhati. Samudaye aññāṇena dukkhahetubhūtepi taṇhāparikkhāre saṅkhāre sukhahetuto maññamāno ārabhati. Nirodhe pana magge ca aññāṇena dukkhassa anirodhabhūtepi gativisese dukkhanirodhasaññī hutvā nirodhassa ca amaggabhūtesupi yaññāmaratapādīsu nirodhamaggasaññī hutvā dukkhanirodhaṃ patthayamāno yaññāmaratapādimukhena tividhepi saṅkhāre ārabhati.
再者,由于他未断除对四圣谛的无明,尤其对于充满生、老、病、死等无量过患、名为福果的苦,不能如实了知为苦。为了获得其果报,便造作由身、语、意行所区分的福行,如同贪求天女者纵身跃入悬崖。即便是那被世人认可为乐的福果,终究会引生大热恼的变易之苦,且仅有少分乐味,他对此视而不见,依然以此为缘,如前所说造作福行,犹如飞蛾扑向灯火,又如贪著蜜味之人舔舐涂有蜜糖的刀刃。对于受用欲乐等有果报之事,他不见其中的过患,因乐想和烦恼的驱使,又造作由三门生起的非福行,如同幼童玩弄粪秽,又如想死之人吞服毒药。对于无色界的果报,他不能如实了知行本身即是变易之苦,由于常见等颠倒见,造作属于心行的不动行,犹如迷路之人走向毗舍遮鬼城的所在。如此,正因为行只有依于无明的存在而存在,不会在无明不存在时出现,所以应当了知:‘这些行是以无明为缘的。’显示巴利原文
Apica so tāya catūsu saccesu appahīnāvijjatāya visesato jātijarārogamaraṇādianekādīnavavokiṇṇampi puññaphalasaṅkhātaṃ dukkhaṃ dukkhato ajānanto tassa adhigamāya kāyavacīcittasaṅkhārabhedaṃ puññābhisaṅkhāraṃ ārabhati devaccharakāmako viya marupapātaṃ. Sukhasammatassāpi ca tassa puññaphalassa ante mahāpariḷāhajanikaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhataṃ appassādatañca apassantopi tappaccayaṃ vuttappakārameva puññābhisaṅkhāraṃ ārabhati salabho viya dīpasikhābhinipātaṃ, madhubindugiddho viya ca madhulittasatthadhārālehanaṃ. Kāmūpasevanādīsu ca savipākesu ādīnavaṃ apassanto sukhasaññāya ceva kilesābhibhūtatāya ca dvārattayappavattampi apuññābhisaṅkhāraṃ ārabhati bālo viya gūthakīḷanaṃ, maritukāmo viya ca visakhādanaṃ. Āruppavipākesu cāpi saṅkhāravipariṇāmadukkhataṃ anavabujjhamāno sassatādivipallāsena cittasaṅkhārabhūtaṃ āneñjābhisaṅkhāraṃ ārabhati disāmūḷho viya pisācanagarābhimukhamaggagamanaṃ. Evaṃ yasmā avijjābhāvatova saṅkhārabhāvo, na abhāvato, tasmā jānitabbametaṃ ‘‘ime saṅkhārā avijjāpaccayā hontī’’ti.
此处有问:“我们先暂且接受‘无明是诸行的缘’这一说法。然而,只是这单一的无明为诸行之缘,还是也有其余的缘呢?”对此,如果只有单一之缘,便落入单一因的过失;如果还有其他缘,那么‘无明为缘而有诸行’这种唯举一因的说法,岂非不合理?答:并非不合理。何以故?因为——显示巴利原文
Etthāha – gaṇhāma tāva etaṃ ‘‘avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo’’ti. Kiṃ panāyamekāva avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo, udāhu aññepi paccayā santīti? Kiṃ panettha yadi tāva ekāva, ekakāraṇavādo āpajjati. Atha aññepi santi, ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’ti ekakāraṇaniddeso nupapajjatīti? Na nupapajjati. Kasmā? Yasmā –
一因并非仅由一因,多因亦非由多因,一因非一;
果是存在的,因此阐明一因一果是有意义的。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ekaṃ na ekato idha, nānekamanekatopi no ekaṃ; Phalamatthi atthi pana eka-hetuphaladīpane attho’’.
世尊有时因某因是主要的,有时因某因是明显的,有时因某因是不共的,并随顺说法善巧及所化有情根机,唯开示一因一果。因此,于此虽尚有其他能作行之因的缘,如依处、所缘、俱生法等,仍唯以无明为行之因。当知,此因无明为渴爱等其他行因之因,故为主要,即如经中所言:‘随观乐味者,渴爱增长’(《相应部》2.52),以及‘由无明集,便有漏集’(《中部》1.104);亦因‘诸比丘,无闻凡夫为无明所缚,造作福行’等文明显而了知;更因其为不共因。依此义趣,并通过此番维护一因一果的解说,便能了知于一切处唯示一因一果的意旨。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā hi katthaci padhānattā katthaci pākaṭattā katthaci asādhāraṇattā desanāvilāsassa ca veneyyānañca anurūpato ekameva hetuñca phalañca dīpeti. Tasmā ayamidha avijjā vijjamānesupi aññesu vatthārammaṇasahajātadhammādīsu saṅkhārakāraṇesu ‘‘assādānupassino taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.52) ca, ‘‘avijjāsamudayā āsavasamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.104) ca vacanato aññesampi taṇhādīnaṃ saṅkhārahetūnaṃ hetūti padhānattā, ‘‘avidvā, bhikkhave, avijjāgato puññābhisaṅkhārampi abhisaṅkharotī’’ti pākaṭattā, asādhāraṇattā ca saṅkhārānaṃ hetubhāvena dīpitāti veditabbā. Eteneva ca ekekahetuphaladīpanaparihāravacanena sabbattha ekekahetuphaladīpane payojanaṃ veditabbanti.
这里有人提出质疑:“既然如此,无明绝对招致不可爱的果报,是有过失的,又怎么会是福行与不动行的缘呢?确实,苦楝种子长不出甘蔗。”怎么会不成立呢?因为在世间——显示巴利原文
Etthāha – evaṃ santepi ekantāniṭṭhaphalāya sāvajjāya avijjāya kathaṃ puññāneñjābhisaṅkhārapaccayattaṃ yujjati? Na hi nimbabījato ucchu uppajjatīti. Kathaṃ na yujjissati? Lokasmiñhi –
相违与不相违,相似与不相似;诸法之缘可以成立,果报却未必。
相违与不相违,相似与不相似:诸法的缘是成立的,果报则不然。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Viruddho cāviruddho ca, sadisāsadiso tathā; Dhammānaṃ paccayo siddho, vipākā eva te ca na’’.
因此,应当了知:这无明,从果报而言,结出的必然是纯苦之果;从自性而言,虽有过失,却依然能作为这一切福行等诸行的缘。它依据恰如其分的处所、作用与自性,以相违与不相违的缘,以及相似与不相似的缘,而成为诸行的缘。显示巴利原文
Iti ayaṃ avijjā vipākavasena ekantāniṭṭhaphalā, sabhāvavasena ca sāvajjāpi samānā sabbesampi etesaṃ puññābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ yathānurūpaṃ ṭhānakiccasabhāvaviruddhāviruddhapaccayavasena sadisāsadisapaccayavasena ca paccayo hotīti veditabbā.
于死、生与轮回之中,亦于诸行之相状中,
而有人在缘生的诸法上陷入迷惑。
正因为他造作这三种行,
是故,无明便是这三种行的缘。
犹如天生目盲之人,没有引导者;
时而走上正道,时而又入歧途。
愚者流转于轮回,同样没有引导者;
有时他造作福业,有时造作非福业。
当他了知法、现观诸谛时,
那时,无明止息,他将平静而行。(Tadā avijjūpasamā, upasanto carissatī’’ti.)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cutūpapāte saṃsāre, saṅkhārānañca lakkhaṇe; Yo paṭiccasamuppanna-dhammesu ca vimuyhati. ‘‘Abhisaṅkharoti so ete, saṅkhāre tividhe yato; Avijjā paccayo tesaṃ, tividhānaṃ ayaṃ tato. ‘‘Yathāpi nāma jaccandho, naro apariṇāyako; Ekadā yāti maggena, ummaggenāpi ekadā. ‘‘Saṃsāre saṃsaraṃ bālo, tathā apariṇāyako; Karoti ekadā puññaṃ, apuññamapi ekadā. ‘‘Yadā ca ñatvā so dhammaṃ, saccāni abhisamessati; Tadā avijjūpasamā, upasanto carissatī’’ti.
“行缘识”是指六识身:眼识、耳识、鼻识、舌识、身识、意识。其中,眼识分为善果报与不善果报两种;耳、鼻、舌、身识也同样各分两种。意识则包括两类果报意界、三种无因意识界、八种有因果报心、五种色界心及四种无色界心,共计二十二种。如此,世间一切果报识总计三十二种。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhārapaccayāviññāṇanti cha viññāṇakāyā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ sotaviññāṇaṃ ghānaviññāṇaṃ jivhāviññāṇaṃ kāyaviññāṇaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ. Tattha cakkhuviññāṇaṃ kusalavipākaṃ akusalavipākanti duvidhaṃ. Tathā sotaghānajivhākāyaviññāṇāni. Manoviññāṇaṃ dve vipākamanodhātuyo, tisso ahetukamanoviññāṇadhātuyo, aṭṭha sahetukavipākacittāni, pañca rūpāvacarāni, cattāri arūpāvacarānīti bāvīsatividhaṃ. Iti sabbāni bāttiṃsa lokiyavipākaviññāṇāni.
于此,或许有人会问:“如何能了知如前所说的识是以行为缘呢?”——因为没有已累积的业,就不会有果报。这识正是果报,而果报若无已累积的业便不会生起。倘若它会生起,那么一切有情的所有果报都应生起,但事实并非如此,因此应知“此识以行为缘”。所有这些识,依转起与结生而有二种运作方式。其中,双五识、两种意界及悦俱无因意识界,这十三种识只在五蕴有中转起。其余的十九种识,则随其所应,在三有中既于转起、亦于结生中运作。显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā – kathaṃ panetaṃ jānitabbaṃ ‘‘idaṃ vuttappakāraṃ viññāṇaṃ saṅkhārapaccayā hotī’’ti? Upacitakammābhāve vipākābhāvato. Vipākañhetaṃ, vipākañca na upacitakammābhāve uppajjati. Yadi uppajjeyya, sabbesaṃ sabbavipākāni uppajjeyyuṃ, na ca uppajjantīti jānitabbametaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā idaṃ viññāṇaṃ hotī’’ti. Sabbameva hi idaṃ pavattipaṭisandhivasena dvedhā pavattati. Tattha dve pañcaviññāṇāni dve manodhātuyo somanassasahagatāhetukamanoviññāṇadhātūti imāni terasa pañcavokārabhave pavattiyaṃyeva pavattanti, sesāni ekūnavīsati tīsu bhavesu yathānurūpaṃ pavattiyampi paṭisandhiyampi pavattanti.
“获得了缘,这只是法,便进入另一有;它既非从彼处迁移而来,亦非无因从彼处生起。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Laddhappaccayamiti dhammamattametaṃ bhavantaramupeti; Nāssa tato saṅkanti, na tato hetuṃ vinā hoti’’.
因此,这依缘而生的、唯是色法与非色法的现象,在正生起时,即被称为“进入另一有”,它非众生,亦非命者。并且,它既没有从过去有实质地转移到此处,亦非无因地从彼处在此显现。此处,前者因命终而称为“死”,后者因连结于另一有等而称为“结生”。显示巴利原文
Iti hetaṃ laddhappaccayaṃ rūpārūpadhammamattaṃ uppajjamānaṃ bhavantaramupetīti vuccati, na satto, na jīvo. Tassa ca nāpi atītabhavato idha saṅkanti atthi, nāpi tato hetuṃ vinā idha pātubhāvo. Ettha ca purimaṃ cavanato cuti, pacchimaṃ bhavantarādipaṭisandhānato paṭisandhīti vuccati.
于此,若问:“若无转移而生起,则此人身之诸蕴灭尽后,作为果缘的业又未至彼处,此果岂非属于他者,或从另一处而来?且若无受用者,此果复属于谁?是故此安立并不善美。”显示巴利原文
Etthāha – nanu evaṃ asaṅkantipātubhāve sati ye imasmiṃ manussattabhāve khandhā, tesaṃ niruddhattā, phalappaccayassa ca kammassa tattha agamanato, aññassa aññato ca taṃ phalaṃ siyā . Upabhuñjake ca asati kassa taṃ phalaṃ siyā. Tasmā na sundaramidaṃ vidhānanti. Tatridaṃ vuccati –
正如因树结果实之故,世间便共同认可说‘树结果了’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Santāne yaṃ phalaṃ etaṃ, nāññassa na ca aññato; Bījānaṃ abhisaṅkhāro, etassatthassa sādhako. ‘‘Phalassuppattiyā eva, siddhā bhuñjakasammuti; Phaluppādena rukkhassa, yathā phalati sammutī’’ti.
若有人这样说:‘即便如此,这些行,无论存在或不存,都能成为果的缘。若存在,则于其转起的刹那,必有其果;若不存在,则在转起之前、之后乃至恒常,都应能带来果。’应当这样回答他:显示巴利原文
Yopi vadeyya ‘‘evaṃ santepi ete saṅkhārā vijjamānā vā phalassa paccayā siyuṃ avijjamānā vā. Yadi ca vijjamānā, pavattikkhaṇeyeva nesaṃ vipākena bhavitabbaṃ. Athāpi avijjamānā, pavattito pubbe pacchā ca niccaṃ phalāvahā siyu’’nti. So evaṃ vattabbo –
‘这些行以已作业为缘,并非恒常带来果;
此处应以担保等为譬喻而了知。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Katattā paccayā ete, na ca niccaṃ phalāvahā; Pāṭibhogādikaṃ tattha, veditabbaṃ nidassana’’nti.
「以识为缘而有名色」:这里,“名”指受蕴、想蕴、行蕴;“色”指四大种及所造色。对于无性根的胎生者和卵生者,于结生刹那,有处十法聚与身十法聚,即二十种色法,再加三种无色蕴,这二十三种法,应知即是“以识为缘而有名色”。若有性根的有情,则需再加性十法聚,成为三十三种。如梵身天等化生有情,于结生刹那,有眼十法聚、耳十法聚、处十法聚及命根九法聚,共三十九种色法,再加三种无色蕴,这四十二种法即是“以识为缘而有名色”。在欲有中,其他化生者或湿生者,若六根具足,于结生刹那,则有眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、处、性七种十法聚,即七十种色法,再加三种无色蕴,这七十三种法即是“以识为缘而有名色”。此为最广的情况。就最略而言,应知结生时随各种十法聚的缺失,依次减去后,所余色法及无色蕴的组合,也称为“以识为缘而有名色”。对于无色界众生,则显示巴利原文
Viññāṇapaccayānāmarūpanti idha vedanā saññā saṅkhārakkhandhā nāmaṃ, cattāri ca mahābhūtāni catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpaṃ rūpaṃ. Abhāvakagabbhaseyyakānaṃ aṇḍajānañca paṭisandhikkhaṇe vatthudasakaṃ kāyadasakanti vīsati rūpāni, tayo ca arūpino khandhāti ete tevīsati dhammā viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpanti veditabbā. Sabhāvakānaṃ bhāvadasakaṃ pakkhipitvā tettiṃsa, opapātikasattesu brahmakāyikādīnaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe cakkhusotavatthudasakāni jīvitindriyanavakañcāti ekūnacattālīsa rūpāni, tayo ca arūpino khandhāti ete dvācattālīsa dhammā viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ. Kāmabhave pana sesaopapātikānaṃ saṃsedajānaṃ vā sabhāvakaparipuṇṇāyatanānaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyavatthubhāvadasakānīti sattati rūpāni, tayo ca arūpino khandhāti ete tesattati dhammā viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ. Esa ukkaṃso. Avakaṃsena pana taṃtaṃdasakavikalānaṃ tassa tassa vasena hāpetvā hāpetvā paṭisandhiyaṃ viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpasaṅkhā veditabbā. Arūpīnaṃ pana tayova arūpino khandhā, asaññānaṃ rūpato jīvitindriyanavakamevāti. Esa tāva paṭisandhiyaṃ nayo.
于此或有人问:“如何了知结生时的名色以识为缘?”答:依据经典与正理。因为经中,以“随转于心之法”等(《法集论·二法论母》62)所示,已从多方面确立了受等心所是以识为缘的。再从正理而言:显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā – kathaṃ panetaṃ jānitabbaṃ ‘‘paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ viññāṇapaccayā hotī’’ti? Suttato yuttito ca. Sutte hi ‘‘cittānuparivattino dhammā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. dukamātikā 62) nayena bahudhā vedanādīnaṃ viññāṇapaccayatā siddhā. Yuttito pana –
因此,凭藉于此世间所见、由心所生之色,得以成立;
而对于未见的色,识亦为其缘。
显示巴利原文 Cittajena hi rūpena, idha diṭṭhena sijjhati; Adiṭṭhassāpi rūpassa, viññāṇaṃ paccayo iti.
“以名色为缘而有六处”:其中,“名”即如前所述的受、想、行三蕴。而此处所说的“色”,则被明确限定为十一种,即:四大种、六依处与命根。而“六处”即是指:眼处、耳处、鼻处、舌处、身处、意处。显示巴利原文
Nāmarūpapaccayāsaḷāyatananti nāmaṃ vuttameva. Idha pana rūpaṃ niyamato cattāri bhūtāni cha vatthūni jīvitindriyanti ekādasavidhaṃ. Saḷāyatanaṃ – cakkhāyatanaṃ, sotāyatanaṃ, ghānāyatanaṃ, jivhāyatanaṃ, kāyāyatanaṃ, manāyatanaṃ.
于此,可能会有这样的疑问:「如何能了知名色是六处的缘呢?」答:因为只有在名色存在时,六处才存在。实际上,正是因为有了彼彼名色,才有了彼彼处;若非如此,则不会产生。显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā – kathaṃ panetaṃ jānitabbaṃ ‘‘nāmarūpaṃ saḷāyatanassa paccayo’’ti? Nāmarūpabhāve bhāvato. Tassa tassa hi nāmassa rūpassa ca bhāve taṃ taṃ āyatanaṃ hoti, na aññathāti.
「以六处为缘而有触」——显示巴利原文
Saḷāyatanapaccayā phassoti –
从略说而言,触有六种,即眼触、耳触、鼻触、舌触、身触、意触。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Chaḷeva phassā saṅkhepā, cakkhusamphassaādayo; Viññāṇamiva bāttiṃsa, vitthārena bhavanti te’’.
「以触为缘而有受」的意思是:显示巴利原文
Phassapaccayā vedanāti –
依于门,受被说为由眼触等所生起的;
它们依差别分为六种,此处则有三十二种受。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dvārato vedanā vuttā, cakkhusamphassajādikā; Chaḷeva tā pabhedena, idha bāttiṃsa vedanā’’.
“以受为缘而有渴爱”的意思是:显示巴利原文
Vedanāpaccayā taṇhāti –
此处依色渴爱等的分类,阐明了六种渴爱;
其中,每一类都以三种方式在流转中转起,如是而被理解。
处苦者希求快乐,受乐者却期盼更多快乐;
然而,因舍是寂静的,所以它被说为乐。
以渴爱为缘,故有三受;
以受为缘而有渴爱,此是大仙所说。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Rūpataṇhādibhedena, cha taṇhā idha dīpitā; Ekekā tividhā tattha, pavattākārato matā. ‘‘Dukkhī sukhaṃ patthayati, sukhī bhiyyopi icchati; Upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā. ‘‘Taṇhāya paccayā tasmā, honti tissopi vedanā; Vedanāpaccayā taṇhā, iti vuttā mahesinā’’.
“以渴爱为缘而有取”即四种取:欲取、见取、戒禁取、我语取。“以取为缘而有有”:这里所说的“有”指业有,而生有依文句的引述而说。“以有为缘而有生”:指由业有为缘,而有结生蕴的显现。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāpaccayā upādānanti cattāri upādānāni – kāmupādānaṃ, diṭṭhupādānaṃ, sīlabbatupādānaṃ, attavādupādānaṃ. Upādānapaccayā bhavoti idha kammabhavo adhippeto. Upapattibhavo pana paduddhāravasena vutto. Bhavapaccayā jātīti kammabhavapaccayā paṭisandhikhandhānaṃ pātubhāvo.
在此,或许有人会问:何以得知“有为生的缘”呢?因为即使外在的缘具足时,也可以见到众生有低劣、殊胜等差别。虽然外在的能生者、父母、精血、食物等缘都已具足,但在众生之中,即使是双胞胎,也可看出有低劣、殊胜等差别。而这种差别并非无因,因为并非一切时处、一切人都无差别;也非由业有之外的其他原因所致,因为那些由业有所生的众生,在其内在相续中,并无其他原因。因此,差别是以业有为因。的确,业是众生低劣、殊胜等差别之因。正如世尊所说:“业区分众生,即指此低劣、殊胜等差别。”显示巴利原文
Tattha siyā – kathaṃ panetaṃ jānitabbaṃ ‘‘bhavo jātiyā paccayo’’ti ce? Bāhirapaccayasamattepi hīnapaṇītādivisesadassanato. Bāhirānañhi janakajananisukkasoṇitāhārādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ samattepi sattānaṃ yamakānampi sataṃ hīnappaṇītatādiviseso dissati. So ca na ahetuko sabbadā ca sabbesañca abhāvato, na kammabhavato aññahetuko tadabhinibbattakasattānaṃ ajjhattasantāne aññassa kāraṇassa abhāvatoti kammabhavahetukoyeva. Kammañhi sattānaṃ hīnappaṇītatādivisesassa hetu. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘kammaṃ satte vibhajati, yadidaṃ hīnappaṇītatāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.289).
在“以生为缘而有老死”等句中,因为没有生时,便不会有所谓的老死及愁等法;而当生存在时,则会生起老死,并且对于那个为老死所摄的苦法所触的愚者,或是因与老死相关联,或是为种种苦法所触——虽不与老死直接相关者,也都会有愁等法产生。因此应知,这个生是老死及愁等法的缘。显示巴利原文
Jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇantiādīsu yasmā asati jātiyā jarāmaraṇaṃ nāma sokādayo vā dhammā na honti, jātiyā pana sati jarāmaraṇañceva jarāmaraṇasaṅkhātadukkhadhammaphuṭṭhassa ca bālassa jarāmaraṇābhisambandhā vā tena tena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa anabhisambandhā vā sokādayo ca dhammā honti, tasmā ayaṃ jāti jarāmaraṇassa ceva sokādīnañca paccayo hotīti veditabbā.
在“他以如此修习之心”等语句中,“为了宿住随念智”的意思是:为了获得、证得此智。“种种”指多种多样、种类各异,或以种种方式展现,这便是“种种”的义涵。“宿住”指以紧接过去的那一生为开端,在每一处居住过的相续。“随念”是说,依照蕴的次第,或依照死亡与结生的次第,随逐追念。的确,能随念宿住的有六种人:外道、普通声闻、大声闻、上首弟子、独觉佛及诸佛。其中,外道只能随念四十劫,不能超过。何以故?因其智慧薄弱。由于他们无力辨别名与色,所以智慧微弱。普通声闻因智慧强,能随念百劫、千劫。八十位大声闻能随念十万劫。两位上首弟子能随念一个阿僧祇劫加十万劫。独觉佛能随念两个阿僧祇劫加十万劫。这便是他们各自愿力所能达到的极限。而对于诸佛来说,则没有时间限制。此外,外道只能依照蕴的次第来随念,他们无法抛开次第,直接以死亡与结生的方式随念。犹如盲人不握杖便不能行走,他们也不能抛开蕴的次第而随念。普通声闻则既能依蕴次第随念,也能以死亡与结生次第随念。显示巴利原文
So tathābhāvitena cittenātiādīsu pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāyāti etassa ñāṇassa adhigamāya, pattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Anekavihitanti anekavidhaṃ nānappakāraṃ, anekehi vā pakārehi pavattitaṃ, saṃvaṇṇitanti attho. Pubbenivāsanti samanantarātītaṃ bhavaṃ ādiṃ katvā tattha tattha nivutthasantānaṃ. Anussaratīti khandhapaṭipāṭivasena cutipaṭisandhivasena vā anugantvā anugantvā sarati. Imañhi pubbenivāsaṃ cha janā anussaranti titthiyā pakatisāvakā mahāsāvakā aggasāvakā paccekabuddhā buddhāti. Tattha titthiyā cattālīsaṃyeva kappe anussaranti , na tato paraṃ. Kasmā? Dubbalapaññattā. Tesañhi nāmarūpaparicchedavirahitattā dubbalā paññā hoti. Pakatisāvakā kappasatampi kappasahassampi anussarantiyeva balavapaññattā. Asīti mahāsāvakā satasahassakappe anussaranti. Dve aggasāvakā ekamasaṅkheyyaṃ kappasatasahassañca. Paccekabuddhā dve asaṅkheyyāni satasahassañca. Ettako hi tesaṃ abhinīhāro. Buddhānaṃ pana paricchedo nāma natthi. Titthiyā ca khandhapaṭipāṭimeva saranti, paṭipāṭiṃ muñcitvā cutipaṭisandhivasena sarituṃ na sakkonti. Yathā andhā yaṭṭhiṃ amuñcitvāva gacchanti, evaṃ te khandhapaṭipāṭiṃ amuñcitvāva saranti. Pakatisāvakā khandhapaṭipāṭiyāpi anussaranti, cutipaṭisandhivasenāpi saṅkamanti, tathā asīti mahāsāvakā. Dvinnaṃ pana aggasāvakānaṃ khandhapaṭipāṭikiccaṃ natthi. Ekassa attabhāvassa cutiṃ disvā paṭisandhiṃ passanti, puna aparassa cutiṃ disvā paṭisandhinti evaṃ cutipaṭisandhivaseneva saṅkamantā gacchanti, tathā paccekabuddhā. Buddhānaṃ pana neva khandhapaṭipāṭikiccaṃ, na cutipaṭisandhivasena saṅkamanakiccaṃ atthi. Tesañhi anekāsu kappakoṭīsu heṭṭhā vā upari vā yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ icchanti, taṃ taṃ pākaṭameva hoti. Tasmā anekāpi kappakoṭiyo saṅkhipitvā yaṃ yaṃ icchanti, tattha tattheva okkamantā sīhokkantavasena gacchanti. Evaṃ gacchantānañca nesaṃ ñāṇaṃ antarantarāsu jātīsu asajjamānaṃ icchiticchitaṭṭhānameva gaṇhāti.
在这六种随念宿住的人当中,外道的宿住之见显现犹如萤火虫之光;普通声闻则如灯焰之光;大声闻犹如火炬之光;上首弟子犹如晨星之光;独觉佛则如月光;诸佛的宿住之见,则如饰以千道光芒的秋日轮一般显现。外道的宿住随念,犹如盲人以杖尖摸索而行;普通声闻,犹如行于独木桥上;大声闻,犹如行于临时搭就的腿桥上;上首弟子,犹如行于车辆架起的桥上;独觉佛,犹如行于人行小径;诸佛的,则犹如行于宽敞的大车道。而在此语境中,所指的乃是声闻弟子的宿住随念。显示巴利原文
Imesu pana chasu pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantesu titthiyānaṃ pubbenivāsadassanaṃ khajjopanakappabhāsadisaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti, pakatisāvakānaṃ dīpappabhāsadisaṃ, mahāsāvakānaṃ ukkāpabhāsadisaṃ, aggasāvakānaṃ osadhitārakāpabhāsadisaṃ, paccekabuddhānaṃ candappabhāsadisaṃ. Buddhānaṃ rasmisahassapaṭimaṇḍitasaradasūriyamaṇḍalasadisaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Titthiyānaṃ pubbenivāsānussaraṇaṃ andhānaṃ yaṭṭhikoṭigamanaṃ viya hoti. Pakatisāvakānaṃ daṇḍakasetugamanaṃ viya, mahāsāvakānaṃ jaṅghasetugamanaṃ viya, aggasāvakānaṃ sakaṭasetugamanaṃ viya, paccekabuddhānaṃ jaṅghamaggagamanaṃ viya, buddhānaṃ mahāsakaṭamaggagamanaṃ viya hoti. Imasmiṃ pana adhikāre sāvakānaṃ pubbenivāsānussaraṇaṃ adhippetaṃ.
因此,一位想要如此随念的初学比丘,于午后托钵返回,独处静居,依次证入四种禅那,从作为神通基础的禅那出定后,依前述方法观察缘起,随后应作意最后一座。接着依次作意:敷设座位、进入住所、收拾衣钵、用餐时辰、从村落返回、于村落中托钵、进入村落乞食、离开寺院、礼拜塔庙与菩提树、洗钵、收钵、自收钵直至漱口之间所为、晨间所为、中夜所为、初夜所为。如此逆序作意一整日又一整夜所做的一切事。这些事即使对通常之心也是清晰的,而对遍作定心则极为清晰。若某事节不清晰,便应再次进入基础禅那,出定后再作意。如此一来,便会如同灯被点亮般清晰。以同样的逆序方式,还应作意第二天、第三、第四、第五天,乃至十天、半月、一月、一年中所行。依同法,从十年、二十年,一直作意到在此生中自己的结生。作意之时,应将心转向过去世死亡刹那现行的名色。因为一位有智慧的比丘,完全有能力于初次便突破结生,取死亡刹那的名色为所缘。然而,由于过去生的名色已彻底灭尽,而此处生起的是新的名色,是故彼处幽暗闭塞,犹如……显示巴利原文
Tasmā evaṃ anussaritukāmena ādikammikena bhikkhunā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantena rahogatena paṭisallīnena paṭipāṭiyā cattāri jhānāni samāpajjitvā abhiññāpādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya vuttanayena paṭiccasamuppādaṃ paccavekkhitvā sabbapacchimā nisajjā āvajjitabbā. Tato āsanapaññāpanaṃ senāsanappavesanaṃ pattacīvarapaṭisāmanaṃ bhojanakālo gāmato āgamanakālo gāme piṇḍāya caritakālo gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhakālo vihārato nikkhamanakālo cetiyabodhivandanakālo pattadhovanakālo pattapaṭiggahaṇakālo pattapaṭiggahaṇato yāva mukhadhovanā katakiccaṃ paccūsakāle katakiccaṃ, majjhimayāme paṭhamayāme katakiccanti evaṃ paṭilomakkamena sakalaṃ rattindivaṃ katakiccaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ. Ettakaṃ pana pakaticittassapi pākaṭaṃ hoti, parikammasamādhicittassa pana atipākaṭameva. Sace panettha kiñci na pākaṭaṃ hoti, puna pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya āvajjitabbaṃ. Ettakena dīpe jalite viya pākaṭaṃ hoti . Evaṃ paṭilomakkameneva dutiyadivasepi tatiyacatutthapañcamadivasesupi dasāhepi addhamāsepi māsepi saṃvaccharepi katakiccaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ. Eteneva upāyena dasa vassāni vīsati vassānīti yāva imasmiṃ bhave attano paṭisandhi, tāva āvajjantena purimabhave cutikkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāmarūpaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ. Pahoti hi paṇḍito bhikkhu paṭhamavāreneva paṭisandhiṃ ugghāṭetvā cutikkhaṇe nāmarūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ kātuṃ. Yasmā pana purimabhave nāmarūpaṃ asesaṃ niruddhaṃ, idha aññaṃ uppannaṃ, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ āhundarikaṃ andhatamamiva hoti sududdasaṃ duppaññena. Tenāpi ‘‘na sakkomahaṃ paṭisandhiṃ ugghāṭetvā cutikkhaṇe nāmarūpārammaṇaṃ kātu’’nti dhuranikkhepo na kātabbo. Tadeva pana pādakajjhānaṃ punappunaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya vuṭṭhāya taṃ ṭhānaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ.
如此精进而为之时,犹如一个大力士,为取尖顶屋的栋梁而砍伐大树,仅断其枝叶斧刃便已崩坏,虽无力砍倒大树,却毫不气馁,径自前往铁匠铺,将斧头磨得锋利,回来再砍;斧刃复坏,又同样磨利再伐。他这样砍伐时,先前已砍断的部分不必再砍,专断未断之处,不久便能伐倒大树。同样地,从基础禅那出定后,不必回顾先前已作意的内容,唯作意于结生,如此不久便能突破结生,取死亡刹那的名色为所缘。在此,以最后一座乃至结生这些为所缘而生起的智慧,并不名为宿住智,而称为遍作定智。有人称此为‘过去分智’,但那是对应于色界心的过去分智而言,此说并不合理。然而,当那位比丘超越了结生,取死亡刹那现行的名色为所缘,生起意门转向心,并依前述方法生起安止心时,此刻与此心相应的智慧,方名宿住随念智。他依与此智相应的念,随念宿住。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ karonto hi seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso kūṭāgārakaṇṇikatthāya mahārukkhaṃ chindanto sākhāpalāsacchedanamatteneva pharasudhārāya vipannāya mahārukkhaṃ chindituṃ asakkontopi dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvāva kammārasālaṃ gantvā tikhiṇaṃ pharasuṃ kārāpetvā puna āgantvā chindeyya, puna vipannāya ca punapi tatheva kāretvā chindeyya, so evaṃ chindanto chinnassa chinnassa puna chettabbābhāvato achinnassa ca chedanato nacirasseva mahārukkhaṃ pāteyya, evameva pādakajjhānā vuṭṭhāya pubbe āvajjitaṃ anāvajjitvā paṭisandhimeva āvajjanto taṃ nacirasseva paṭisandhiṃ ugghāṭetvā cutikkhaṇe nāmarūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ kareyyāti. Tattha pacchimanisajjato pabhuti yāva paṭisandhito ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ nāma na hoti, taṃ pana parikammasamādhiñāṇaṃ nāma hoti. ‘‘Atītaṃsañāṇa’’nti petaṃ eke vadanti . Taṃ atītaṃsañāṇassa rūpāvacarattā rūpāvacaraṃ sandhāya vacanaṃ na yujjati. Yadā panassa bhikkhuno paṭisandhiṃ atikkamma cutikkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāmarūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjitvā pubbe vuttanayena appanācittaṃ uppajjati, tadāssa tena cittena sampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ nāma. Tena ñāṇena sampayuttāya satiyā pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati.
在此,“即所说的”是表示起始类别的介词。正因如此,为显示已开始的宿住之类别差别,才说“一生”等语。其中,“一生”是指以一个结生为始、一个死亡为终、包含在一期生命中的蕴之相续。对“二生”等也应如此理解。而在“许多坏劫”等处,衰败的劫称为坏劫,因那时一切众生聚集于梵天界;增长的劫称为成劫,因众生从梵天界转出。其中,提到坏劫时便包含了坏住劫,因为坏住劫以坏劫为根本;提到成劫时便包含了成住劫。如此便含摄了《增支部》所说的四种不可计数:“比丘们,有这四种劫之不可计数。哪四种?比丘们,当劫正在毁灭,此难以计算;当劫停住于毁灭状态,此难以计算;当劫正在生成,此难以计算;当劫停住于生成状态,此难以计算。”显示巴利原文
Tattha seyyathidanti āraddhappakāradassanatthe nipāto. Teneva yvāyaṃ pubbenivāso āraddho, tassa pakārappabhedaṃ dassento ekampi jātintiādimāha. Tattha ekampi jātinti ekampi paṭisandhimūlaṃ cutipariyosānaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannaṃ khandhasantānaṃ. Esa nayo dvepi jātiyotiādīsu. Anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappetiādīsu pana parihāyamāno kappo saṃvaṭṭakappo tadā sabbesaṃ brahmaloke sannipatanato. Vaḍḍhamāno kappo vivaṭṭakappo tadā brahmalokato sattānaṃ vivaṭṭanato. Tattha saṃvaṭṭena saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī gahito hoti taṃmūlakattā. Vivaṭṭena ca vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Evañhi sati ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, kappassa asaṅkhyeyyāni. Katamāni cattāri? Yadā, bhikkhave, kappo saṃvaṭṭati, taṃ na sukaraṃ saṅkhātuṃ. Yadā, bhikkhave, kappo saṃvaṭṭo tiṭṭhati…pe… yadā, bhikkhave, kappo vivaṭṭati…pe… yadā, bhikkhave, kappo vivaṭṭo tiṭṭhati, taṃ na sukaraṃ saṅkhātu’’nti (a. ni. 4.156) vuttāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni pariggahitāni honti.
其中,毁灭有三种:火毁灭、水毁灭、风毁灭。毁灭的界限有三种:光音天、遍净天、广果天。当劫以火毁灭时,从光音天以下皆被火焚毁;当以水毁灭时,从遍净天以下皆被水消融;当以风毁灭时,从广果天以下皆被风摧毁。然而,就广度而言,毁灭的始终仅是一个佛刹。所谓佛刹有三种:诞生刹、教令刹、境界刹。其中,诞生刹以一万个轮围世界为疆界,如来入胎等时,此区域会发生震动。教令刹以百千俱胝轮围世界为疆界,这是《宝经》《蕴护经》《幢顶护经》《阿吒那胝护经》《孔雀护经》等护经的威力所及之处。境界刹则无限无量,即“只要如来愿意”所及的范围,诸如来于此范围内,欲知任何事便能了知。如是,在这三种佛刹中,毁灭的是教令刹;当它毁灭时,诞生刹自然也一同毁灭。而且,毁灭时是整体一起毁灭,重新建立时也是整体一起建立。显示巴利原文
Tattha tayo saṃvaṭṭā – tejosaṃvaṭṭo, āposaṃvaṭṭo, vāyosaṃvaṭṭoti. Tisso saṃvaṭṭasīmā – ābhassarā, subhakiṇhā, vehapphalāti. Yadā kappo tejena saṃvaṭṭati, ābhassarato heṭṭhā agginā ḍayhati. Yadā āpena saṃvaṭṭati, subhakiṇhato heṭṭhā udakena vilīyati. Yadā vāyunā saṃvaṭṭati, vehapphalato heṭṭhā vātena viddhaṃsīyati. Vitthārato pana sadāpi ekaṃ buddhakkhettaṃ vinassati. Buddhakkhettaṃ nāma tividhaṃ hoti – jātikkhettaṃ, āṇākkhettaṃ, visayakkhettañca. Tattha jātikkhettaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷapariyantaṃ hoti, yaṃ tathāgatassa paṭisandhigahaṇādīsu kampati. Āṇākkhettaṃ koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷapariyantaṃ, yattha ratanaparittaṃ, khandhaparittaṃ, dhajaggaparittaṃ, āṭānāṭiyaparittaṃ , moraparittanti imesaṃ parittānaṃ ānubhāvo vattati. Visayakkhettaṃ anantamaparimāṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘yāvatā vā pana ākaṅkheyyā’’ti (a. ni. 3.81) vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ yaṃ tathāgato ākaṅkhati, taṃ taṃ jānāti. Evametesu tīsu buddhakkhettesu ekaṃ āṇākkhettaṃ vinassati, tasmiṃ pana vinassante jātikkhettaṃ vinaṭṭhameva hoti, vinassantañca ekatova vinassati, saṇṭhahantañca ekatova saṇṭhahati.
应当这样理解此世界的毁灭与建立:当劫为火所毁时,最初会有劫灭大云生起,在百千俱胝轮围世界中降下滂沱大雨。人们欢欣鼓舞,取出所有种子播下。然而,当庄稼长至仅够牛啃食的程度时,便不再降下一滴雨,自此降雨彻底断绝。依赖雨水维生的众生,逐渐投生至梵天界;依赖花果维生的天神也是如此。如此经过漫长岁月,各处之水渐次枯竭。随后,鱼龟等亦皆死去,投生梵天界;地狱众生亦然。对此,有人言:“地狱众生须待七个太阳皆出现时方得毁灭。”然而,无有禅那则不能投生梵天界,而这些众生中,有的正受饥荒逼迫,有的则根本无力证得禅那,他们如何能投生彼处?乃是依靠在天界获得的禅那。因为那时,名为“世间群集”的欲界天神,会披头散发,满面泪痕,以手拭泪,身着赤衣,显现极为怪异可怖之相,游走于人间各处,如是宣告:“诸位贤者啊!从今起十万年后,劫将生起,此世界将毁灭,大海亦将枯竭,此大地与须弥山王都必将烧毁殆尽,世界之毁灭将一直漫延至梵天界。诸位贤者,请修习慈心!修习悲心!修习喜心!修习舍心!奉侍母亲,奉侍父亲,恭敬显示巴利原文
Tassevaṃ vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ – yasmiṃ samaye kappo agginā nassati, āditova kappavināsakamahāmegho vuṭṭhahitvā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷe ekaṃ mahāvassaṃ vassati. Manussā tuṭṭhā sabbabījāni nīharitvā vapanti. Sassesu pana gokhāyitakamattesu jātesu gadrabharavaṃ ravanto ekabindumattampi na vassati, tadā pacchinnaṃ pacchinnameva vassaṃ hoti. Vassūpajīvino sattā kamena brahmaloke nibbattanti, pupphaphalūpajīviniyo ca devatā. Evaṃ dīghe addhāne vītivatte tattha tattha udakaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchati. Athānukkamena macchakacchapāpi kālaṃ katvā brahmaloke nibbattanti, nerayikasattāpi. Tattha ‘‘nerayikā sattamasūriyapātubhāve vinassantī’’ti eke. Jhānaṃ vinā natthi brahmaloke nibbatti, etesañca keci dubbhikkhapīḷitā, keci abhabbā jhānādhigamāya, te kathaṃ tattha nibbattantīti? Devaloke paṭiladdhajjhānavasena. Tadā hi ‘‘vassasatasahassassa accayena kappavuṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti lokabyūhā nāma kāmāvacaradevā muttasirā vikiṇṇakesā rudamukhā assūni hatthehi puñchamānā rattavatthanivatthā ativiya virūpavesadhārino hutvā manussapathe vicarantā evaṃ ārocenti – ‘‘mārisā, mārisā, ito vassasatasahassassa accayena kappavuṭṭhānaṃ bhavissati, ayaṃ loko vinassissati, mahāsamuddopi ussussissati, ayañca mahāpathavī sineru ca pabbatarājā uddayhissanti vinassissanti, yāva brahmalokā lokavināso bhavissati. Mettaṃ, mārisā, bhāvetha. Karuṇaṃ… muditaṃ… upekkhaṃ, mārisā, bhāvetha. Mātaraṃ upaṭṭhahatha, pitaraṃ upaṭṭhahatha, kule jeṭṭhāpacāyino hothā’’ti. Tesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā yebhuyyena manussā ca bhummā devā ca saṃvegajātā aññamaññaṃ muducittā hutvā mettādīni puññāni karitvā devaloke nibbattanti. Tattha dibbasudhābhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā jhānaṃ paṭilabhanti. Tadaññe pana aparapariyavedanīyena kammena devaloke nibbattanti. Aparapariyavedanīyakammarahito hi saṃsāre saṃsaranto nāma satto natthi. Tepi tattha tatheva jhānaṃ paṭilabhanti. Evaṃ devaloke paṭiladdhajjhānavasena sabbepi brahmaloke nibbattantīti.
雨断之后,又历经漫长岁月,第二个太阳出现了。当它出现时,黑夜与白昼的界限全然无辨。一个太阳落下,另一个太阳升起,世间承受着无有间断的太阳炙烤。平常的太阳中有日天子,劫灭之时的太阳则无。平常太阳运行时,空中尚有云雾与烟霞飘浮;劫灭太阳运行时,天空了无云烟,清净如同镜面。除五大河外,其余中小河流之水悉皆枯竭。显示巴利原文
Vassūpacchedato pana uddhaṃ dīghassa addhuno accayena dutiyo sūriyo pātubhavati, tasmiṃ pātubhūte neva rattiparicchedo, na divāparicchedo paññāyati. Eko sūriyo udeti, eko atthaṃ gacchati, avicchinnasūriyasantāpova loko hoti. Yathā ca pakatisūriye sūriyadevaputto hoti, evaṃ kappavināsakasūriye natthi. Tattha pakatisūriye vattamāne ākāse valāhakāpi dhūmasikhāpi caranti. Kappavināsakasūriye vattamāne vigatadhūmavalāhakaṃ ādāsamaṇḍalaṃ viya nimmalaṃ nabhaṃ hoti. Ṭhapetvā pañca mahānadiyo sesakunnadīādīsu udakaṃ sussati.
此后又经过漫长的岁月,第三个太阳出现了。由于它的出现,连大河也干涸了。显示巴利原文
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena tatiyo sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā mahānadiyopi sussanti.
此后又经过漫长的岁月,第四个太阳出现了。由于它的出现,雪山中那些作为大河源头的七个大湖皆悉枯竭,即:狮子崖池、鹅崖池、耳环池、车匠池、无热恼池、六牙池、拘那罗池。显示巴利原文
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena catuttho sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā himavati mahānadīnaṃ pabhavā – ‘‘sīhapapātano, haṃsapātano, kaṇṇamuṇḍako, rathakāradaho, anotattadaho, chaddantadaho, kuṇāladaho’’ti ime satta mahāsarā sussanti.
此后,又经过漫长的岁月,第五个太阳出现了。因它的出现,大海里的水渐渐消失,连手指节那么一点水都无法存留。显示巴利原文
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena pañcamo sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā anupubbena mahāsamudde aṅgulipabbatemanamattampi udakaṃ na saṇṭhāti.
此后,又经过漫长的岁月,第六个太阳出现了。因它的出现,整个轮围世界变成一团浓烟,一切湿润都被烟吸尽。正如这个轮围世界,百千俱胝个轮围世界也同样如此。显示巴利原文
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena chaṭṭho sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā sakalacakkavāḷaṃ ekadhūmaṃ hoti pariyādinnasinehaṃ dhūmena. Yathā cidaṃ, evaṃ koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷānipi.
此后,又经过漫长的岁月,第七个太阳出现了。因它的出现,整个轮围世界连同百千俱胝个轮围世界,都化为一片火网。那些百由旬等大小各异的须弥山峰,也崩裂消散,没入虚空。火焰向上狂烧,吞噬了四大王天,烧毁了那里的金殿、宝殿、玛瑙殿后,又继续烧到三十三天。如此,火焰一路烧到初禅地,烧遍三个梵天界,直到光音天才停住。只要还有纤毫如尘的行所摄残余,这火便不会熄灭。直到一切行法彻底灭尽,火焰才像烧尽芝麻油的灯焰,不余灰烬,全然熄灭。此时,下方虚空与上方虚空合为一体,成为一片巨大的黑暗。显示巴利原文
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena sattamo sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā sakalacakkavāḷaṃ ekajālaṃ hoti saddhiṃ koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷehi. Yojanasatikādibhedāni sinerukūṭānipi palujjitvā ākāseyeva antaradhāyanti. Sā aggijālā uṭṭhahitvā cātumahārājike gaṇhāti. Tattha kanakavimānaratanavimānamaṇivimānāni jhāpetvā tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ gaṇhāti. Eteneva upāyena yāva paṭhamajjhānabhūmiṃ gaṇhāti. Tattha tayopi. Brahmaloke jhāpetvā ābhassare āhacca tiṭṭhati. Sā yāva aṇumattampi saṅkhāragataṃ atthi, tāva na nibbāyati. Sabbasaṅkhāraparikkhayā pana sappitelajhāpanaggisikhā viya chārikampi anavasesetvā nibbāyati. Heṭṭhāākāsena saha upariākāso eko hoti mahandhakāro.
又经过了漫长的时光,大暴雨云升腾而起,最初降下极细的雨丝。渐渐地,雨水倾泻而下,粗如藕茎、臼杵、棕榈树干,注满了百千俱胝轮围世界中的一切焦枯之处,方才消失。风从下方和侧方生起,将水凝聚,变得坚实,如同莲叶上的水珠。何以如此巨大的水聚竟能凝为一体?是因风为水提供了缝隙。那风在处处为水留出缝隙。就这样,水被风聚集、压紧和浓缩,逐渐减少,不断向下沉降。每当水位降到某一层面,原来梵天界的位置便出现了梵天界,上方四欲界天所在之处便出现了天界。而当水降到先前大地所在的位置时,强劲的大风便生了起来。那些大风如同密闭的风箱困住空气一般,将水困住,令水无法流动而停驻。甘甜之水逐渐减少时,水面上便生起了地味。那片地味具足色泽,也具足香与味,就像不加水熬煮的米粥表面凝结的那层皮。这时,当初在光音梵天界最早化生的有情,因寿命结束或福报耗尽,从彼处死去,再投生到这里。他们自身散发光明,能在空中飞行。按照《起世经》所讲述的方式,他们尝了那地味,被贪爱所征服后,便开始用手团成食团来吃。显示巴利原文
Atha dīghassa addhuno accayena mahāmegho uṭṭhahitvā paṭhamaṃ sukhumaṃ sukhumaṃ vassati. Anupubbena kumudanāḷayaṭṭhimusalatālakkhandhādippamāṇāhi dhārāhi vassanto koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu sabbaṃ daḍḍhaṭṭhānaṃ pūretvā antaradhāyati. Taṃ udakaṃ heṭṭhā ca tiriyañca vāto samuṭṭhahitvā ghanaṃ karoti parivaṭumaṃ paduminipatte udakabindusadisaṃ. Kathaṃ tāva mahantaṃ udakarāsiṃ ghanaṃ karotīti ce? Vivarasampadānato. Taṃ hissa tahiṃ tahiṃ vivaraṃ deti. Taṃ evaṃ vātena sampiṇḍiyamānaṃ ghanaṃ kariyamānaṃ parikkhayamānaṃ anupubbena heṭṭhā otarati. Otiṇṇe otiṇṇe udake brahmalokaṭṭhāne brahmalokā, upari catukāmāvacaradevalokaṭṭhāne ca devalokā pātubhavanti. Purimapathaviṭṭhānaṃ otiṇṇe pana balavavātā uppajjanti. Te taṃ pihitadvāre dhamakaraṇe ṭhitaudakamiva nirussāsaṃ katvā rumbhanti. Madhurodakaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchamānaṃ upari rasapathaviṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Sā vaṇṇasampannā ceva hoti gandharasasampannā ca nirudakapāyāsassa upari paṭalaṃ viya. Tadā ca ābhassarabrahmaloke paṭhamatarābhinibbattā sattā āyukkhayā vā puññakkhayā vā tato cavitvā idhūpapajjanti. Te honti sayaṃpabhā antalikkhacarā. Te aggaññasutte (dī. ni. 3.120) vuttanayena taṃ rasapathaviṃ sāyitvā taṇhābhibhūtā āluppakārakaṃ paribhuñjituṃ upakkamanti.
后来,他们自身的光明消失了,黑暗降临。他们看见黑暗,便恐惧起来。这时,一轮直径整整五十由旬的日轮出现,为他们驱散了恐惧,带来了勇气。他们见到后,欢喜踊跃地说道:‘它为我们这些恐惧者驱散了恐惧,带来了勇气,并且升了起来,所以应该叫作“日”。’于是便给日轮取名为‘日’。后来,日轮在白日照明后沉落了,他们又害怕起来,心想:‘我们所获得的光明也没有了。’接着又想:‘如果还能再得到另一种光明,那该多好啊!’仿佛觉知了他们的心意一般,一轮直径四十九由旬的月轮出现了。他们见到后,更加欢喜踊跃,说道:‘它像是知道我们的愿望才升起来的,所以应该叫作“月”。’于是便给月轮取名为‘月’。显示巴利原文
Atha tesaṃ sayaṃpabhā antaradhāyati, andhakāro hoti. Te andhakāraṃ disvā bhāyanti. Tato nesaṃ bhayaṃ nāsetvā sūrabhāvaṃ janayantaṃ paripuṇṇapaññāsayojanaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ pātubhavati. Te taṃ disvā ‘‘ālokaṃ paṭilabhimhā’’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā ‘‘amhākaṃ bhītānaṃ bhayaṃ nāsetvā sūrabhāvaṃ janayanto uṭṭhito, tasmā sūriyo hotū’’ti sūriyotvevassa nāmaṃ karonti. Atha sūriye divasaṃ ālokaṃ katvā atthaṅgate ‘‘yampi ālokaṃ labhimha, sopi no naṭṭho’’ti puna bhītā honti, tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘‘sādhu vatassa sace aññaṃ ālokaṃ labheyyāmā’’ti. Tesaṃ cittaṃ ñatvā viya ekūnapaññāsayojanaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ pātubhavati. Te taṃ disvā bhiyyosomattāya haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā ‘‘amhākaṃ chandaṃ ñatvā viya uṭṭhito, tasmā cando hotū’’ti candotvevassa nāmaṃ karonti.
就这样,日月出现之后,星星和种种星宿也出现了。从此以后,昼夜、月份、半月、季节和年岁便逐渐可以辨知了。而须弥山、轮围山与雪山,正是在日月出现的那一天——也就是星宿月的满月日——无先无后地同时出现的。那是怎样出现的呢?就像煮米粥的时候,锅中的气泡一齐冒出来,有的地方高高凸起,有的地方低陷下去,有的地方平平坦坦;同样地,高高凸起之处便成了山,低陷下去之处便成了海,平平坦坦之处便成了洲。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ candimasūriyesu pātubhūtesu nakkhattāni tārakarūpāni pātubhavanti. Tato pabhuti rattindivā paññāyanti anukkamena ca māsaddhamāsautusaṃvaccharā. Candimasūriyānaṃ pana pātubhūtadivaseyeva sinerucakkavāḷahimavantapabbatā pātubhavanti . Te ca kho apubbaṃ acarimaṃ phagguṇapuṇṇamadivaseyeva pātubhavanti. Kathaṃ? Yathā nāma kaṅgubhatte paccamāne ekappahāreneva pubbuḷakā uṭṭhahanti, eke padesā thūpathūpā honti, eke ninnaninnā eke samasamā, evamevaṃ thūpathūpaṭṭhāne pabbatā honti ninnaninnaṭṭhāne samuddā samasamaṭṭhāne dīpāti.
那时,那些众生在食用地味的过程中,渐渐有一部分容貌端丽,一部分容貌丑陋。容貌端丽者因此轻慢容貌丑陋者。由于这种骄慢,地味便消失了,地饼显现出来。随后,以同样的方式,地饼也消失了,藤蔓出现。又以同样的方式,藤蔓也消失了,不长糠秕、洁净芬芳、能结出米粒的自然稻便出现。此后,他们的器皿自然生出。他们将稻米放在器皿中,再置于石板上,火焰自然生起,将饭煮熟。那饭食如同素馨花一般,无需汤汁佐料,想尝何种味道,饭食便自然具有那种味道。他们吃下这粗劣的食物后,从此便产生了大小便。为排泄而裂开了排泄孔道。男性之相与女性之相显现出来。于是,女人对男人、男人对女人长久凝视。由于长久凝视,欲热恼生起,他们便随之行淫。因其行非法,遭到智者的呵责与侵扰,为了覆藏那非法,便建造房屋。他们住在房屋中,逐渐效仿某个懈怠的众生,开始囤积粮食。从此以后,稻谷便为糠壳所裹,收割之处也不再复生。他们聚集在一起悲叹道:‘唉,诸贤!恶法已在众生中出现,我们往昔可是意所成的啊!’这应当依显示巴利原文
Atha tesaṃ sattānaṃ rasapathaviṃ paribhuñjantānaṃ kamena ekacce vaṇṇavanto, ekacce dubbaṇṇā honti. Tattha vaṇṇavanto dubbaṇṇe atimaññanti. Tesaṃ atimānapaccayā sā rasapathavī antaradhāyati, bhūmipappaṭako pātubhavati. Atha tesaṃ teneva nayena sopi antaradhāyati, padālatā pātubhavati. Teneva nayena sāpi antaradhāyati, akaṭṭhapāko sāli pātubhavati akaṇo athuso suddho sugandhā taṇḍulapphalo. Tato nesaṃ bhājanāni uppajjanti. Te sāliṃ bhājane ṭhapetvā pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapenti. Sayameva jālāsikhā uṭṭhahitvā taṃ pacati. So hoti odano sumanajātipupphasadiso. Na tassa sūpena vā byañjanena vā karaṇīyaṃ atthi, yaṃ yaṃ rasaṃ bhuñjitukāmā honti, taṃ taṃ rasova hoti. Tesaṃ taṃ oḷārikaṃ āhāraṃ āharayataṃ tato pabhuti muttakarīsaṃ sañjāyati. Atha nesaṃ tassa nikkhamanatthāya vaṇamukhāni pabhijjanti . Purisassa purisabhāvo, itthiyā itthibhāvo pātubhavati. Tatra sudaṃ itthī purisaṃ, puriso ca itthiṃ ativelaṃ upanijjhāyati. Tesaṃ ativelaṃ upanijjhāyanapaccayā kāmapariḷāho uppajjati. Tato methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanti. Te asaddhammapaṭisevanapaccayā viññūhi garahiyamānā viheṭhiyamānā tassa asaddhammassa paṭicchādanahetu agārāni karonti. Te agāraṃ ajjhāvasamānā anukkamena aññatarassa alasajātikassa sattassa diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjantā sannidhiṃ karonti. Tato pabhuti kaṇopi thusopi taṇḍulaṃ pariyonandhati, lāyitaṭṭhānampi na paṭivirūhati. Te sannipatitvā anutthunanti ‘‘pāpakā vata bho dhammā sattesu pātubhūtā, mayañhi pubbe manomayā ahumhā’’ti aggaññasutte (dī. ni. 3.128) vuttanayena vitthāretabbaṃ. Tato mariyādaṃ ṭhapenti.
那时,某个众生拿了他人应得的份额而行不与取。众人两次呵责他,第三次便用手、土块和棍棒打他。如此,不与取、谴责、妄语与执杖打人等事出现后,他们聚集商议道:‘我们何不共同推举一位众生,由他依法呵责应呵责者、谴责应谴责者、摈逐应摈逐者,我们则各自分出稻米份额供养他。’就在此劫之中,当众生们作出决定时,这位世尊当时身为菩萨,在那些众生中最为俊美悦目,具足威势与智慧,堪能施行惩治与摄护。众生们便前往祈请,并公认他。因‘被广大民众所公认’,故称‘摩诃三摩多’(大选出者);因‘为田地的统领’,故称‘刹帝利’;因‘依法平正令他人悦乐’,故称‘王’。以此三名而著称。世间任何殊胜的地位,菩萨皆是第一人。就这样,以菩萨为开端,刹帝利阶层确立之后,婆罗门等种姓也渐次确立。其中,从坏劫的大雨云兴起直至火灭之间,是一阿僧祇,名为‘坏’。从坏劫火灭直至成就大雨云充满百千万亿轮围山之间,是第二阿僧祇,名为‘坏住’。从成就大雨云直至日月出现之间,是第三阿僧祇,名为‘成’。从日月显示巴利原文
Atha aññataro satto aññassa bhāgaṃ adinnaṃ ādiyati. Taṃ dvikkhattuṃ paribhāsitvā tatiyavāre pāṇileḍḍudaṇḍehi paharanti. Te evaṃ adinnādānagarahamusāvādadaṇḍādānesu uppannesu sannipatitvā cintayanti ‘‘yaṃnūna mayaṃ ekaṃ sattaṃ sammanneyyāma, yo no sammā khīyitabbaṃ khīyeyya, garahitabbaṃ garaheyya, pabbājetabbaṃ pabbājeyya. Mayaṃ panassa sālīnaṃ bhāgaṃ anupadassāmā’’ti. Evaṃ katasanniṭṭhānesu pana sattesu imasmiṃ tāva kappe ayameva bhagavā bodhisattabhūto tena samayena tesu sattesu abhirūpataro ca dassanīyataro ca mahesakkhataro ca buddhisampanno paṭibalo niggahapaggahaṃ kātuṃ. Te taṃ upasaṅkamitvā yācitvā sammanniṃsu. So ‘‘tena mahājanena sammatoti mahāsammato, khettānaṃ adhipatīti khattiyo, dhammena samena pare rañjetīti rājā’’ti tīhi nāmehi paññāyittha. Yañhi loke acchariyaṭṭhānaṃ, bodhisattova tattha ādipurisoti. Evaṃ bodhisattaṃ ādiṃ katvā khattiyamaṇḍale saṇṭhite anupubbena brāhmaṇādayopi vaṇṇā saṇṭhahiṃsu. Tattha kappavināsakamahāmeghato yāva jālūpacchedo, idamekamasaṅkheyyaṃ saṃvaṭṭoti vuccati. Kappavināsakajālūpacchedato yāva koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaparipūrako sampattimahāmegho, idaṃ dutiyamasaṅkheyyaṃ saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyīti vuccati. Sampattimahāmeghato yāva candimasūriyapātubhāvo, idaṃ tatiyamasaṅkheyyaṃ vivaṭṭoti vuccati. Candimasūriyapātubhāvato yāva puna kappavināsakamahāmegho, idaṃ catutthamasaṅkheyyaṃ vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīti vuccati. Imāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni eko mahākappo hoti. Evaṃ tāva agginā vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
然而,当劫由水灭时,最初生起坏劫的大雨云,其情形应如前文所述。此处的差别在于:如同彼处有第二太阳出现,此处则有坏劫的碱水大雨云生起。它最初降下细雨,渐次以倾盆大雨注满百千万亿轮围山。凡是触及碱水的大地、山岳等悉皆消融。诸水被风从各方持住。水从地面淹没至第二禅地,在那里化尽三个梵天界后,触及遍净天而停住。只要还有最微细的行所摄法存在,水便不退。显示巴利原文
Yasmiṃ pana samaye kappo udakena nassati, āditova kappavināsakamahāmegho uṭṭhahitvāti pubbe vuttanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yathā tattha dutiyo sūriyo, evamidha kappavināsako khārūdakamahāmegho uṭṭhāti. So ādito sukhumaṃ sukhumaṃ vassanto anukkamena mahādhārāhi koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷānaṃ pūrento vassati. Khārūdakena phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhā pathavīpabbatādayo vilīyanti. Udakaṃ samantato vātehi dhārīyati. Pathavito yāva dutiyajjhānabhūmiṃ udakaṃ gaṇhāti, tattha tayopi brahmaloke vilīyāpetvā subhakiṇhe āhacca tiṭṭhati. Taṃ yāva aṇumattampi saṅkhāragataṃ atthi, tāva na vūpasammati.
而当水所及的一切行法被制伏后,便骤然止息、消失。下方虚空与上方虚空合为一片大黑暗,这一切与前面所说相似。只是此处是以光音天梵天界为始,世界才显现。众生从遍净天命终,生于光音天等处。其中,从坏劫的大雨云生起,直至坏劫的碱水断尽,这是一个阿僧祇劫;从水断尽到成就大雨云,这是第二个阿僧祇劫;从成就大雨云……乃至……这四个阿僧祇劫合为一大劫。应如此了解由水坏灭和由水成立的情形。显示巴利原文
Udakānugataṃ pana sabbasaṅkhāragataṃ abhibhavitvā sahasā vūpasammati, antaradhānaṃ gacchati. Heṭṭhāākāsena saha upariākāso eko hoti mahandhakāroti sabbaṃ vuttasadisaṃ. Kevalaṃ panidha ābhassarabrahmalokaṃ ādiṃ katvā loko pātubhavati. Subhakiṇhato ca cavitvā ābhassaraṭṭhānādīsu sattā nibbattanti. Tattha kappavināsakamahāmeghato yāva kappavināsakakhārūdakūpacchedo, idamekaṃ asaṅkheyyaṃ. Udakūpacchedato yāva sampattimahāmegho, idaṃ dutiyamasaṅkheyyaṃ. Sampattimahāmeghato…pe… imāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni eko mahākappo hoti. Evaṃ udakena vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
然而,当劫由风坏灭时,最初生起坏劫的大雨云,应依前面所说过的方法详述。差别在于:如同那里生起第二个太阳,此处则生起用以坏劫的风。它先扬起粗尘,然后依次扬起细尘、细沙、粗沙、沙砾、石块等,乃至扬起大小如尖顶屋的岩石,以及生于崎岖之地的巨树。这些物体从地面腾入虚空后不再落下,在空中碎为微尘,归于无有。随后,下方大地中渐次有风生起,掀翻大地,将它连根拔起抛入虚空。百由旬、二百由旬、三百由旬、四百由旬乃至五百由旬大小的大地碎块纷纷碎裂,被猛风抛起,在空中碎为齑粉,归于无有。风又拔起轮围山和须弥山,抛入虚空,它们相互碰撞,碎为粉末而坏灭。风以此方式破坏地上天宫和空中天宫,破坏六欲天界,并摧毁百千万亿轮围山。那里,轮围山与轮围山、雪山与雪山、须弥山与须弥山彼此会聚,碎为粉末而坏灭。风从地面生起,触及第三禅地,在那里破坏了三个梵天界后,止于广果天。如此,一切行法被破坏后,风自己也就灭了。下方虚空与上方虚空合为一片大黑暗,一如前面所说。而此处世界显现是以遍净天梵天界为始,众生从广果天……显示巴利原文
Yasmiṃ pana samaye kappo vātena vinassati, āditova kappavināsakamahāmegho vuṭṭhahitvāti pubbe vuttanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yathā tattha dutiyasūriyo, evamidha kappavināsanatthaṃ vāto samuṭṭhāti. So paṭhamaṃ thūlarajaṃ uṭṭhāpeti, tato saṇharajaṃ sukhumavālikaṃ thūlavālikaṃ sakkharapāsāṇādayoti yāva kūṭāgāramatte pāsāṇe visamaṭṭhāne ṭhitamahārukkhe ca uṭṭhāpeti. Te pathavito nabhamuggatā na puna patanti, tattheva cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā abhāvaṃ gacchanti. Athānukkamena heṭṭhāmahāpathaviyā vāto samuṭṭhahitvā pathaviṃ parivattetvā uddhaṃ mūlaṃ katvā ākāse khipati. Yojanasatappamāṇā pathavippadesā dviyojanatiyojanacatuyojanapañcayojanasatappamāṇāpi bhijjitvā vātavegukkhittā ākāseyeva cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā abhāvaṃ gacchanti. Cakkavāḷapabbatampi sinerupabbatampi vāto ukkhipitvā ākāse khipati. Te aññamaññaṃ abhihantvā cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā vinassanti. Eteneva upāyena bhūmaṭṭhakavimānāni ca ākāsaṭṭhakavimānāni ca vināsento cha kāmāvacaradevaloke vināsetvā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷāni vināseti. Tattha cakkavāḷā cakkavāḷehi, himavantā himavantehi, sinerū sinerūhi aññamaññaṃ samāgantvā cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā vinassanti. Pathavito yāva tatiyajjhānabhūmiṃ vāto gaṇhāti, tattha tayo brahmaloke vināsetvā vehapphale āhacca tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ sabbasaṅkhāragataṃ vināsetvā sayampi vinassati. Heṭṭhāākāsena saha upariākāso eko hoti mahandhakāroti sabbaṃ vuttasadisaṃ. Idha pana subhakiṇhabrahmalokaṃ ādiṃ katvā loko pātubhavati. Vehapphalato ca cavitvā subhakiṇhaṭṭhānādīsu sattā nibbattanti. Tattha kappavināsakamahāmeghato yāva kappavināsakavātūpacchedo, idamekaṃ asaṅkheyyaṃ. Vātūpacchedato yāva sampattimahāmegho, idaṃ dutiyamasaṅkheyyaṃ…pe… imāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni eko mahākappo hoti. Evaṃ vātena vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
世界为何如此坏灭?以不善根为因。当不善根增盛时,世界便如此坏灭。其中,贪增盛时,以火坏灭;嗔增盛时,以水坏灭。但也有人说:“嗔增盛时以火坏灭,贪增盛时以水坏灭。”痴增盛时,则以风坏灭。世界虽这样坏灭,却并非持续以火灭,而是以火连续灭七次后,第八次以水灭;接着再以火灭七次,第八次又以水灭。如此每逢第八次便是水灭,在经历了七次水灭之后,又再以火灭七次。至此,六十三劫过去了。在此期间,那一直被障碍而得不到水灭机会的风,终于获得机会,便摧破寿量长达六十四劫的遍净天,而毁坏世界。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ kāraṇā evaṃ loko vinassati? Akusalamūlakāraṇā. Akusalamūlesu hi ussannesu evaṃ loko vinassati. So ca kho rāge ussannatare agginā vinassati, dose ussannatare udakena vinassati. Keci pana ‘‘dose ussannatare agginā, rāge udakenā’’ti vadanti. Mohe ussannatare vātena vinassati. Evaṃ vinassantopi ca nirantarameva satta vāre agginā nassati, aṭṭhame vāre udakena. Puna satta vāre agginā, aṭṭhame vāre udakenāti evaṃ aṭṭhame aṭṭhame vāre vinassanto sattakkhattuṃ udakena vinassitvā puna satta vāre agginā nassati. Ettāvatā tesaṭṭhi kappā atītā honti. Etthantare udakena nassanavāraṃ sampattampi paṭibāhitvā laddhokāso vāto paripuṇṇacatusaṭṭhikappāyuke subhakiṇhe viddhaṃsento lokaṃ vināseti.
修习宿住随念、能忆念诸劫的比丘,在此诸劫中,能忆念众多坏劫、众多成劫、众多坏成劫。‘坏劫’与‘成劫’,是就劫的一半而言;‘坏成劫’则是就整个劫而言。若问:如何忆念?乃以‘我曾于彼处’等方式忆念。其中,‘我曾于彼处’指:在那一坏劫中,我曾生于彼处的有、胎、趣、识住、众生居或众生聚。‘名为某’如帝须、富楼须。‘姓为某’如迦旃延、迦叶。这是就他忆念过去生中自己的姓名而说。若他想忆念那段时期的容貌成就、粗劣或殊胜的生活状态、苦乐多寡、短寿或长寿等,亦能忆念。因此说‘如是容貌……乃至如是寿量’。其中,‘如是容貌’:或白皙,或黝黑。‘如是饮食’:或食米饭肉食,或以现成之果为食。‘如是领受苦乐’:以种种方式领受属于身心的、有染着与无染着等各类苦乐。‘如是寿量’:如百岁之寿量,或八万四千劫、十万岁之寿量。显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantopi ca kappānussaraṇako bhikkhu etesu kappesu anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe anussarati. Saṃvaṭṭakappe vivaṭṭakappeti ca kappassa aḍḍhaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappeti sakalakappaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ anussaratīti ce? Amutrāsintiādinā nayena. Tattha amutrāsinti amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappe ahaṃ amumhi bhave vā yoniyā vā gatiyā vā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā vā sattāvāse vā sattanikāye vā āsiṃ. Evaṃnāmoti tisso vā phusso vā. Evaṃgottoti kaccāno vā kassapo vā. Idamassa atītabhave attano nāmagottānussaraṇavasena vuttaṃ. Sace pana tasmiṃ kāle attano vaṇṇasampattiṃ vā lūkhapaṇītajīvikabhāvaṃ vā sukhadukkhabahulataṃ vā appāyukadīghāyukabhāvaṃ vā anussaritukāmo hoti, tampi anussaratiyeva. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃvaṇṇo…pe… evamāyupariyanto’’ti. Tattha evaṃvaṇṇoti odāto vā sāmo vā. Evamāhāroti sālimaṃsodanāhāro vā pavattaphalabhojano vā. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti anekappakārena kāyikacetasikānaṃ sāmisanirāmisādippabhedānaṃ vā sukhadukkhānaṃ paṭisaṃvedī. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ vassasataparimāṇāyupariyanto vā caturāsītikappasatasahassāyupariyanto vā.
‘从彼处死后,生于某处’:我从彼有、胎、趣、识住、众生居、众生聚命终后,又生于名为某的有、胎、趣、识住、众生居、众生聚。‘我亦于彼处有’:之后,我再度存在于彼有、胎、趣、识住、众生居、众生聚中。‘名为某’等如前所述。而且,应知:‘我曾于彼处有’是依次上溯、直至所欲范围的忆念;‘从彼处死后’则是回返时的观察。因此,‘于此受生’是就今生受生处的紧邻上一受生处而说‘生于某处’。‘我亦于彼处有’等,则为显示他在那一紧邻的受生处忆念姓名等。‘我从彼处死后,生于此地’:我从那紧邻的上一受生处命终后,生于此地,或某名号的刹帝利家族,或婆罗门家族。‘如是’即如此。‘具有行相,具有标识’:以姓名为标识,以容貌等为行相。因为凭姓名,众生被标明为帝须、富楼须、迦叶;凭容貌等,众生被区分作黝黑、白皙等。是故,姓名为标识,余者为行相。显示巴利原文
Sotato cuto amutra udapādinti so ahaṃ tato bhavato yonito gatito viññāṇaṭṭhitito sattāvāsato sattanikāyato vā cuto puna amukasmiṃ nāma bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā udapādiṃ. Tatrāpāsinti atha tatrāpi bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā puna ahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmotiādi vuttanayameva. Apica yasmā amutrāsinti idaṃ anupubbena ārohantassa yāvaticchakaṃ (visuddhi. 2.410) anussaraṇaṃ, so tato cutoti paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇaṃ, tasmā idhūpapannoti imissā idhūpapattiyā anantaramevassa upapattiṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya amutra udapādinti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tatrāpāsinti evamādi panassa tatra imissā upapattiyā anantare upapattiṭṭhāne nāmagottādīnaṃ anussaraṇadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. So tato cuto idhūpapannoti svāhaṃ tato anantarūpapattiṭṭhānato cuto idha amukasmiṃ nāma khattiyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā nibbattoti. Itīti evaṃ. Sākāraṃ sauddesanti nāmagottavasena sauddesaṃ, vaṇṇādivasena sākāraṃ. Nāmagottena hi satto tisso phusso kassapoti uddisīyati, vaṇṇādīhi sāmo odātoti nānattato paññāyati. Tasmā nāmagottaṃ uddeso, itare ākārāti.
54. 天眼智释义显示巴利原文
54. Dibbacakkhuñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
106 在天眼智的解说中,‘作意光明想’的意思是,不论白天夜晚,对日光、月光、宝珠光等光明,都作意‘这是光明’。由于这样作意时,光明想持续在心中转起,所以称为‘作意光明想’。‘确立昼想’是说,这样作意光明想之后,安立起‘这是白天’的想。‘于夜间亦如白昼而作意’:就像在白天看见光明一样,在夜晚也这样作意。‘于白天亦如夜间而作意’:就像在夜晚看见光明一样,在白天也这样作意。‘以如是开放之心’是指以这种没有遮蔽的心。‘无缠缚’是指一切方面都没有被缠缚。‘修习具光辉之心’是指增长具有光辉的心。此处是指以光明为所缘的天眼遍作心。或者是指以光明遍为所缘的第四禅。当他这样修习时,他的心变得光明,远离黑暗的障碍。诚然,一位想要生起天眼智的初学善男子,应当依照此经所说,将作为神通基础的禅那,以遍为所缘,用一切方法修习至堪能引导的程度;然后在火遍、白遍、光明遍这三种遍中,取其中一种作为近行,于近行禅那的境域中修习并扩展它,但不应于此生起安止——这就是意趣所在。因为若生起安止,便成为以基础禅那为依止,而显示巴利原文
106. Dibbacakkhuñāṇaniddese ālokasaññaṃ manasi karotīti divā vā rattiṃ vā sūriyajoticandamaṇiālokaṃ ālokoti manasi karoti. Evaṃ manasikaronto ca ālokoti saññaṃ manasi pavattanato ‘‘ālokasaññaṃ manasi karotī’’ti vuccati. Divāsaññaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti evaṃ ālokasaññaṃ manasikaritvā divāti saññaṃ ṭhapeti. Yathādivā tathā rattinti yathā divā āloko diṭṭho, tatheva rattimpi manasi karoti. Yathā rattiṃ tathā divāti yathā rattiṃ āloko diṭṭho, tatheva divāpi manasi karoti. Iti vivaṭena cetasāti evaṃ apihitena cittena. Apariyonaddhenāti samantato anaddhena. Sappabhāsaṃ cittaṃ bhāvetīti saobhāsaṃ cittaṃ vaḍḍheti. Etena dibbacakkhussa parikammālokārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ kathitaṃ. Ālokakasiṇārammaṇaṃ catutthajjhānameva vā sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tassevaṃ bhāvayato obhāsajātaṃ cittaṃ hoti vigatandhakārāvaraṇaṃ. Tena hi dibbacakkhuṃ uppādetukāmena ādikammikena kulaputtena imissāyeva pāḷiyā anusārena kasiṇārammaṇaṃ abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ sabbākārena abhinīhārakkhamaṃ katvā ‘‘tejokasiṇaṃ odātakasiṇaṃ ālokakasiṇa’’nti imesu tīsu kasiṇesu aññataraṃ āsannaṃ kātabbaṃ, upacārajjhānagocaraṃ katvā vaḍḍhetvā ṭhapetabbaṃ, na tattha appanā uppādetabbāti adhippāyo. Sace hi uppādeti, pādakajjhānanissayaṃ hoti, na parikammanissayaṃ. Imesu ca pana tīsu ālokakasiṇaṃyeva seṭṭhataraṃ, tadanulomena pana itaraṃ kasiṇadvayampi vuttaṃ. Tasmā ālokakasiṇaṃ itaresaṃ vā aññataraṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cattāri jhānāni uppādetvā puna upacārabhūmiyaṃyeva ṭhatvā kasiṇaṃ vaḍḍhetabbaṃ. Vaḍḍhitavaḍḍhitaṭṭhānassa antoyeva rūpagataṃ passitabbaṃ. Rūpagataṃ passato panassa tena byāpārena parikammacittena ālokapharaṇaṃ akubbato parikammassa vāro atikkamati, tato āloko antaradhāyati, tasmiṃ antarahite rūpagatampi na dissati. Athānena punappunaṃ pādakajjhānameva pavisitvā tato vuṭṭhāya āloko pharitabbo. Evaṃ anukkamena āloko thāmagato hotīti. ‘‘Ettha āloko hotū’’ti yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ paricchindati, tattha āloko tiṭṭhatiyeva. Divasampi nisīditvā passato rūpadassanaṃ hoti. Tattha yadā tassa bhikkhuno maṃsacakkhussa anāpāthagataṃ antokucchigataṃ hadayavatthunissitaṃ heṭṭhāpathavītalanissitaṃ tirokuṭṭapabbatapākāragataṃ paracakkavāḷagatanti idaṃ rūpaṃ ñāṇacakkhussa āpāthaṃ āgacchati, maṃsacakkhunā dissamānaṃ viya hoti, tadā dibbacakkhu uppannaṃ hoti. Tadeva cettha rūpadassanasamatthaṃ, na pubbabhāgacittāni.
关于天眼智的生起次第,应当如前面所说的道理来了解:即以所说的色为所缘,在意门转向心生起并灭去之后,以这一相同的色为所缘,生起四个或五个速行心。这个智既被称为“于有情死生之智”,也被称为“天眼智”。然而,对凡夫而言,这却是一种障碍。因为他决意“让这里那里有光明”时,即使穿透大地、海洋、高山,也只见一片光明。这时如果他看见恐怖的夜叉、罗刹等形象,就会生起恐惧,由此导致心散乱,成为禅那的退失者。因此,在观察色法时,应当非常谨慎,不能掉以轻心。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ dibbacakkhuno uppattikkamo – vuttappakārametaṃ rūpamārammaṇaṃ katvā manodvārāvajjane uppajjitvā niruddhe tadeva rūpamārammaṇaṃ katvā cattāri pañca vā javanāni uppajjantīti pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idaṃ pana ñāṇaṃ ‘‘sattānaṃ cutūpapāte ñāṇa’’ntipi ‘‘dibbacakkhuñāṇa’’ntipi vuccati. Taṃ panetaṃ puthujjanassa paripantho hoti. So hi ‘‘yattha yattha āloko hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāti, taṃ taṃ pathavīsamuddapabbate vinivijjhitvāpi ekālokaṃ hoti. Athassa tattha bhayānakāni yakkharakkhasādirūpāni passato bhayaṃ uppajjati. Tena cittavikkhepaṃ patvā jhānavibbhantako hoti. Tasmā rūpadassane appamattena bhavitabbaṃ.
「为了知有情死生之智」:是为了知有情的死与生之智。以那个智能知道有情的死与生,这就是天眼智的目的。所谓“以天眼”,义理如前所述。「清净」:因为能见到死与生,这成为见解清净的原因,所以称为清净。如果只见到死而见不到生,他会执取断见;如果只见到生而见不到死,他会执取“新有情出现”的见解。然而,如果这两者都见到,他就超越了这两种恶见,所以这种看见成为见解清净的原因。佛弟子们正是这两者都见到的,因此说:“由于见到死与生,成为见解清净的原因,所以称为清净。”「超越人界」:超越了常人所见的范围而见到色,所以称为超越人界;或者说,超越了人间的肉眼,所以称为超越人界。这是指“以这清净、超越人界的天眼”。显示巴利原文
Sattānaṃ cutūpapātañāṇāyāti sattānaṃ cutiyā ca upapāte ca ñāṇāya. Yena ñāṇena sattānaṃ cuti ca upapāto ca ñāyati, tadatthaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dibbena cakkhunāti vuttatthameva. Visuddhenāti cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttā visuddhaṃ. Yo hi cutimattameva passati, na upapātaṃ, so ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo upapātameva passati, na cutiṃ, so navasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo pana tadubhayaṃ passati, so yasmā duvidhampi taṃ diṭṭhigatamativattati, tasmāssa taṃ dassanaṃ diṭṭhivisuddhihetu hoti. Ubhayañcetaṃ buddhaputtā passanti . Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttā visuddha’’nti. Manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā rūpadassanena atikkantamānusakaṃ, mānusakaṃ vā maṃsacakkhuṃ atikkantattā atikkantamānusakaṃ. Tena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena.
「见有情」:犹如以肉眼观察有情一般地去观见他们。「死时」「生时」:这里,在死心刹那或结生刹那,是无法以天眼见到的。但那些临近死亡、即将命终者,称为“死时”;那些已取得结生、刚刚再生者,称为“生时”,此处意指此类。他能见到如此一类死者与生者。「卑下」:因有痴的等流果,在种姓、家族、财富等方面遭人轻贱、低视与贬抑。「高贵」:因无痴的等流果,与此相反。「美貌」:因无嗔的等流果,容貌可爱、可意、悦目。「丑陋」:因有嗔的等流果,容貌不可爱、不可意、不悦目,即相貎不佳、形态粗劣。「善趣」:生于善趣,或因无贪的等流果而成为富有、大财富者。「恶趣」:生于恶趣,或因有贪的等流果而成为贫穷、乏少饮食者。「随业而趣」:随各自所积之业,往赴相应去处。前文“死时”等句说明了天眼的作用;此句则说明了随业趣智的作用。显示巴利原文
Satte passatīti manussānaṃ maṃsacakkhunā viya satte oloketi. Cavamāne upapajjamāneti ettha cutikkhaṇe upapattikkhaṇe vā dibbacakkhunā daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā, ye pana āsannacutikā idāni cavissanti. Te cavamānā. Ye ca gahitapaṭisandhikā sampatinibbattā vā, te upapajjamānāti adhippetā. Te evarūpe cavamāne ca upapajjamāne ca passatīti dasseti. Hīneti mohanissandayuttattā hīnānaṃ jātikulabhogādīnaṃ vasena hīḷite ohīḷite oññāte avaññāte. Paṇīteti amohanissandayuttattā tabbiparīte. Suvaṇṇeti adosanissandayuttattā iṭṭhakantamanāpavaṇṇayutte. Dubbaṇṇeti dosanissandayuttattā aniṭṭhākantāmanāpavaṇṇayutte, anabhirūpe virūpetipi attho. Sugateti sugatigate, alobhanissandayuttattā vā aḍḍhe mahaddhane. Duggateti duggatigate, lobhanissandayuttattā vā dalidde appannapāne. Yathākammūpageti yaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ upacitaṃ, tena tena upagate. Tattha purimehi ‘‘cavamāne’’tiādīhi dibbacakkhukiccaṃ vuttaṃ, iminā pana padena yathākammūpagañāṇakiccaṃ.
此智的生起次第如下:此处有一比丘,向下朝地狱方向扩展光明,见到地狱有情正遭受巨大痛苦,此见仅为天眼的作用。他如此思惟:“这些有情是造了什么业,才遭受这些痛苦?”随后,以“他们造了如是如是业”为所缘之智,便由此生起。同样地,向上朝天界方向扩展光明,见到欢喜园、杂林园、丛苇园等处的有情正享受着广大的成就,此见亦仅为天眼的作用。他如此思惟:“这些有情是造了什么业,才享受到这些成就?”于是,以“他们造了如是如是业”为所缘之智便生起。这便是所谓的“随业趣智”。此智没有另外的遍作。如同此智,未来分智也是如此,因为这两种智都是以天眼为直接基础的,与天眼一同成就。显示巴利原文
Tassa ca ñāṇassa ayamuppattikkamo – idha bhikkhu heṭṭhānirayābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nerayike satte passati mahādukkhamanubhavamāne, taṃ dassanaṃ dibbacakkhukiccameva. So evaṃ manasi karoti ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ katvā ime sattā etaṃ dukkhamanubhavantī’’ti. Athassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma katvā’’ti taṃkammārammaṇaṃ ñāṇamuppajjati. Tathā uparidevalokābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nandanavanamissakavanaphārusakavanādīsu satte passati mahāsampattiṃ anubhavamāne, tampi dassanaṃ dibbacakkhukiccameva. So evaṃ manasi karoti ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ katvā ime sattā etaṃ sampattiṃ anubhavantī’’ti. Athassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma katvā’’ti taṃkammārammaṇaṃ ñāṇamuppajjati. Idaṃ yathākammūpagañāṇaṃ nāma. Imassa visuṃ parikammaṃ nāma natthi. Yathā cimassa, evaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇassāpi. Dibbacakkhupādakāneva hi imāni dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhanti.
在“这些尊者们”等句中,「这些」是对以天眼所见者的指示语。「啊」是不变词,用以表达随顺的语气。「尊者们」即“诸位尊者”。「恶行」:指邪行,或因烦恼腐坏而称为恶行;以身所造作的恶行,或从身生起的恶行,称为「身恶行」。其余两种也同理。「具足」:即成为具备者。「毁谤圣者」:指对佛、独觉佛及声闻圣者,乃至最低之在家入流者,心怀恶意,以究竟事或毁坏功德的方式,加以诽谤、辱骂与呵责。其中,若言“这些人无有沙门法,非沙门”,即是以究竟事来毁谤;若言“这些人无有禅那、解脱、道、果”等,即是以毁坏功德的方式来毁谤,应当如此了知。无论他知而毁谤,或不知而毁谤,都构成毁谤圣者。这是重大之业,类似无间业,能障碍生天、障碍证道,但仍然是可以对治的。因此,若毁谤了圣者,应前往圣者处,若对方较自己年长,便蹲坐着说:“尊者,我先前对您说了如此这般的话,请您原谅。”若对方较年轻,便顶礼后蹲坐合掌说:“尊者,我对您说了如此这般的话,请您原谅。”若对方已离去他方,应亲自前往,或派遣同住比丘等人前去请求原谅。如果既不能显示巴利原文
Ime vata bhontotiādīsu imeti dibbacakkhunā diṭṭhānaṃ nidassanavacanaṃ. Vatāti anulomavacanatthe nipāto. Bhontoti bhavanto. Duṭṭhu caritaṃ, duṭṭhaṃ vā caritaṃ kilesapūtikattāti duccaritaṃ, kāyena duccaritaṃ, kāyato vā uppannaṃ duccaritanti kāyaduccaritaṃ. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Samannāgatāti samaṅgībhūtā. Ariyānaṃ upavādakāti buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakānaṃ ariyānaṃ antamaso gihisotāpannānampi anatthakāmā hutvā antimavatthunā vā guṇaparidhaṃsanena vā upavādakā, akkosakā garahakāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ‘‘natthi imesaṃ samaṇadhammo, assamaṇā ete’’ti vadanto antimavatthunā upavadati, ‘‘natthi imesaṃ jhānaṃ vā vimokkho vā maggo vā phalaṃ vā’’tiādīni vadanto guṇaparidhaṃsanena upavadatīti veditabbo. So ca jānaṃ vā upavadeyya ajānaṃ vā, ubhayathāpi ariyūpavādova hoti. Bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ ānantariyasadisaṃ saggāvaraṇaṃ maggāvaraṇañca, satekicchaṃ pana hoti. Tasmā yo ariyaṃ upavadati, tena gantvā sace attanā vuḍḍhataro hoti, ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā ‘‘ahaṃ āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, taṃ me khamāhī’’ti khamāpetabbo. Sace navakataro hoti, vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, tumhe idañcidañca avacaṃ, taṃ me khamathā’’ti khamāpetabbo. Sace disāpakkanto hoti, sayaṃ vā gantvā saddhivihārikādike vā pesetvā khamāpetabbo. Sace nāpi gantuṃ na pesetuṃ sakkā hoti, ye tasmiṃ vihāre bhikkhū vasanti, tesaṃ santikaṃ gantvā sace navakatarā honti, ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā, sace vuḍḍhatarā, vuḍḍhe vuttanayeneva paṭipajjitvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, asukaṃ nāma āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, khamatu me so āyasmā’’ti vatvā khamāpetabbo. Sammukhā akkhamantepi etadeva kātabbaṃ. Sace ekacārikabhikkhu hoti, neva tassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ, na gataṭṭhānaṃ paññāyati, ekassa paṇḍitassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, asukaṃ nāma āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, taṃ me anussarato vippaṭisāro hoti, kiṃ karomī’’ti vattabbaṃ. So vakkhati ‘‘tumhe mā cintayittha, thero tumhākaṃ khamati, cittaṃ vūpasamethā’’ti. Tenāpi ariyassa gatadisābhimukhena añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘khamathā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Yadi so parinibbuto hoti, parinibbutamañcaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā yāva sivathikaṃ gantvāpi khamāpetabbaṃ. Evaṃ kate neva saggāvaraṇaṃ, na maggāvaraṇaṃ hoti, pākatikameva hotīti.
“邪见者”指见解颠倒之人。“邪见业等起”指以邪见为因所执持的种种业,也包括那些在邪见引发的身业等中教唆他人造业者。应知,此处虽然“语恶行”一语已涵盖诽谤圣者,“意恶行”一语也已涵盖邪见,但将二者再度提出,是为了显示其极为重大的罪过。因为诽谤圣者的罪过极大,类似无间业。正如经中所说:“舍利弗,譬如有一位戒具足、定具足、慧具足的比丘,于现法中证得阿拉汉果。舍利弗,我说,若此成就者不舍弃那语、不舍弃那心、不舍弃那见,便会如同被丢弃之物,直接堕入地狱。”(《中部》1.149)而较邪见罪过更重之法,决定无有。正如世尊所说:“诸比丘,我不见有其他一法,能有如此极重之过,诸比丘,此即是邪见。诸比丘,邪见乃诸过中之最重者。”(《增支部》1.310)显示巴利原文
Micchādiṭṭhikāti viparītadassanā. Micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānāti micchādiṭṭhivasena samādinnanānāvidhakammā, ye ca micchādiṭṭhimūlakesu kāyakammādīsu aññepi samādapenti. Ettha ca vacīduccaritaggahaṇeneva ariyūpavāde, manoduccaritaggahaṇena ca micchādiṭṭhiyā saṅgahitāyapi imesaṃ dvinnaṃ puna vacanaṃ mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthanti veditabbaṃ. Mahāsāvajjo hi ariyūpavādo ānantariyasadisattā. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṃ ārādheyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ sāriputta vadāmi taṃ vācaṃ appahāya taṃ cittaṃ appahāya taṃ diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṃ nikkhitto, evaṃ niraye’’ti (ma. ni. 1.149). Micchādiṭṭhito ca mahāsāvajjataraṃ nāma aññaṃ natthi. Yathāha – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ, yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, micchādiṭṭhi, micchādiṭṭhiparamāni, bhikkhave, vajjānī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310).
“身坏”指舍弃了所执取的五蕴。“命终之后”指此之后执取再生之蕴。或者,“身坏”指命根断绝,“命终之后”指死心之后。“恶处”等,实皆地狱之同义词。何谓恶处?地狱远离了被视为福德、导至天界与解脱的吉祥,或那里没有快乐的到来,故称无幸处。因其为痛苦的趣处与归宿,故称恶趣;或因嗔恚众多,由丑恶之业所生之趣,亦称恶趣。造恶者于彼处无力地坠落,故称堕落;或于彼处身体肢节毁坏而坠落,亦称堕落。彼处无有丝毫可称为乐味的吉祥,故称地狱。显示巴利原文
Kāyassabhedāti upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā. Paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattikkhandhaggahaṇe. Atha vā kāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassupacchedā. Paraṃ maraṇāti cuticittato uddhaṃ. Apāyanti evamādi sabbaṃ nirayavevacanameva. Nirayo hi saggamokkhahetubhūtā puññasammatā ayā apetattā, sukhānaṃ vā āyassa abhāvā apāyo. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggati, dosabahulatāya vā duṭṭhena kammunā nibbattā gati duggati. Vivasā nipatanti tattha dukkaṭakārinoti vinipāto, vinassantā vā ettha patanti sambhijjamānaṅgapaccaṅgātipi vinipāto. Natthi ettha assādasaññito ayoti nirayo.
或者,以“恶处”一词指畜生道。畜生道是恶处,因其远离善趣;但非恶趣,因彼处有龙王等大威力者出生。以“恶趣”一词指阴灵界。阴灵界既是恶处亦为恶趣,因其远离善趣,且为苦之所归;但非堕落,因无有如阿修罗那般之坠落。以“堕落”一词指阿修罗身。因如前述,彼既是恶处亦为恶趣,且由一切善处堕落,故称堕落。以“地狱”一词指无间地狱等种种地狱。“已生”指已经到达,于彼处再生。相反情形应知为善道(白分)。显示巴利原文
Atha vā apāyaggahaṇena tiracchānayoniṃ dīpeti. Tiracchānayoni hi apāyo sugatito apetattā, na duggati mahesakkhānaṃ nāgarājādīnaṃ sambhavato. Duggatiggahaṇena pettivisayaṃ. So hi apāyo ceva duggati ca sugatito apetattā dukkhassa ca gatibhūtattā, na tu vinipāto asurasadisaṃ avinipatitattā. Vinipātaggahaṇena asurakāyaṃ. So hi yathāvuttena atthena apāyo ceva duggati ca sabbasamussayehi ca vinipatitattā vinipātoti vuccati. Nirayaggahaṇena avīciādimanekappakāraṃ nirayamevāti. Upapannāti upagatā, tattha abhinibbattāti adhippāyo. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
然而,此处有一差别:在此,“善趣”一词也包含了人趣,而“天界”一词则仅指天趣。其中,美好的去处称为“善趣”;因以色等外境而极为殊胜,故称为“天界”。所有这一切,由于具有坏灭、崩解的意义,故称为“世间”——这便是词义的解释。因此,“以天眼……”等皆是结语。如是,以天眼而见,即是此处的略义。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana viseso – tattha sugatiggahaṇena manussagatipi saṅgayhati, saggaggahaṇena devagatiyeva. Tattha sundarā gatīti sugati. Rūpādīhi visayehi suṭṭhu aggoti saggo. So sabbopi lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti ayaṃ vacanattho. Iti ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā’’tiādi sabbaṃ nigamanavacanaṃ. Evaṃ dibbena cakkhunā passatīti ayamettha saṅkhepatthoti.
五种智杂论显示巴利原文
Pañcañāṇapakiṇṇakaṃ
于此五种智中,神变智依于小、大、过去、未来、现在、内、外所缘,于七种所缘中运作。天耳界清净智依于小、现在、内、外所缘,于四种所缘中运作。他心智依于小、大、无量、道、过去、未来、现在、外所缘,于八种所缘中运作。宿住随念智依于小、大、无量、道、过去、内、外、不可说所缘,于八种所缘中运作。显示巴利原文
Imesu pañcasu ñāṇesu iddhividhañāṇaṃ parittamahaggataatītānāgatapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhārammaṇavasena sattasu ārammaṇesu pavattati. Sotadhātuvisuddhiñāṇaṃ parittapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhārammaṇavasena catūsu ārammaṇesu pavattati. Cetopariyañāṇaṃ parittamahaggataappamāṇamaggaatītānāgatapaccuppannabahiddhārammaṇavasena aṭṭhasu ārammaṇesu pavattati. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ
天眼智依于小、现在、内、外所缘,于四种所缘中运作。随业趣智依于小、大、过去、内、外所缘,于五种所缘中运作。未来分智依于小、大、无量、道、未来、内、外、不可说所缘,于八种所缘中运作。显示巴利原文
Parittamahaggataappamāṇamaggaatītaajjhattabahiddhānavattabbārammaṇavasena aṭṭhasu ārammaṇesu pavattati. Dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ parittapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhārammaṇavasena catūsu ārammaṇesu pavattati. Yathākammūpagañāṇaṃ parittamahaggataatītaajjhattabahiddhārammaṇavasena pañcasu ārammaṇesu pavattati. Anāgataṃsañāṇaṃ parittamahaggataappamāṇamaggaanāgataajjhattabahiddhānavattabbārammaṇavasena aṭṭhasu ārammaṇesu pavattatīti.
55. 漏尽智解说释义显示巴利原文
55. Āsavakkhayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
107 107. 在漏尽智的解说中,未知当知根等的含义已经说过。问“到多少处”是为了确定每一根的生起处所。“到一处”是说它在一个处所生起。因为生起的处所即是“住立于此”,所以称为“处”。“六处”是指六种道与果的刹那。为了显示未知当知根等三根中每一根更为殊胜,故说“信根以胜解为眷属”等。正如在“信根的含义是胜解”等当中,胜解等是根据信根等的功能而说的;同样地,这里说“以胜解为眷属”,是表示信根以胜解之义作为它的眷属。对于其他根也是同样的道理。而且,“眷属”一词在这里作了语法性别上的变化。“慧根”其实就是未知当知根,只是为了显示它了知的体性才分开来说。在阿毗达摩中,也为了显示慧在功能上的差别,将同一个慧在道刹那和果刹那中分成了八种。“以润养为眷属”:如同沐浴粉和水,以滋润的作用成为心与心所的眷属。这只是就与喜相应的道而说的。在与舍相应的道中,则应当用舍根来代替喜根的位置,可以理解为“不过分地长养相应法的眷属”。“以转起相续增上为眷属”:所谓“转起相续”是指正在转起的相续,也就是现行的相续。“增上显示巴利原文
107. Āsavakkhayañāṇaniddese anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīni vuttatthāni. Kati ṭhānāni gacchatīti ekekassa uppattiṭṭhānaniyamanatthaṃ pucchā. Ekaṃ ṭhānaṃ gacchatīti ekasmiṃ ṭhāne uppajjatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Uppattiokāsaṭṭhānañhi tiṭṭhati etthāti ṭhānanti vuccati. Cha ṭhānānīti cha maggaphalakkhaṇe. Indriyānaṃ anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīsu tīsu ekekameva adhikaṃ hotīti dassanatthaṃ saddhindriyaṃ adhimokkhaparivāraṃ hotītiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā ‘‘saddhindriyassa adhimokkhaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.12) adhimokkhādayo saddhindriyādīnaṃ kiccavasena vuttā, evamidhāpi ‘‘adhimokkhaparivāraṃ hotī’’ti saddhindriyaṃ adhimokkhatthena parivāraṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Parivāranti ca liṅgavipallāso kato. Paññindriyanti anaññātaññassāmītindriyameva pajānanasabhāvadassanatthaṃ visuṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Abhidhammepi (vibha. 219) hi paññāya kiccavisesadassanatthaṃ maggakkhaṇe ca phalakkhaṇe ca ekāva paññā aṭṭhadhā vibhattā. Abhisandanaparivāranti nhāniyacuṇṇānaṃ udakaṃ viya cittacetasikānaṃ sinehanakiccena parivāraṃ hoti. Idaṃ somanassasampayuttamaggavaseneva vuttaṃ. Upekkhāsampayuttamagge pana somanassindriyaṭṭhāne upekkhindriyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃ pana sampayuttānaṃ nātiupabrūhanaparivāranti gahetabbaṃ. Pavattasantatādhipateyyaparivāranti pavattā santati pavattasantati, vattamānasantānanti attho. Adhipatibhāvo ādhipateyyaṃ, pavattasantatiyā ādhipateyyaṃ pavattasantatādhipateyyaṃ. Vattamānajīvitindriyassa uparipavattiyā ca paccayattā pubbāparavasena pavattasantatiyā adhipatibhāvena anaññātaññassāmītindriyassa parivāraṃ hoti.
说“在预流道刹那生起的诸法”等,是为了阐明一切与道相应法的功德。其中,“在道刹那生起”是指只由道所等起的,不是其他。然而,由于由道等起的色法不能得到善等名称,所以将它排除,而说“除了心等起色”。所有这些法,由于舍弃了污秽、动摇等义,故称为“善”。当以它们为所缘而转起时,那些漏并不存在,故称为“无漏”。它们斩断轮回之根,以涅槃为所缘,从轮回中出离,故称为“导出”。由于远离了那些称为善与不善的积聚,以称为“离积”的涅槃为所缘而转起,故称为“趣向离积”;或者因为它们摧毁、破坏现存的心续而前进,亦名“趣向离积”。由于它们不属于世间,超脱了世间,故称为“出世间”。这些法都以涅槃为所缘,故称为“涅槃所缘”。显示巴利原文
Sotāpattimaggakkhaṇejātā dhammātiādi sabbesaṃ maggasampayuttakānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha maggakkhaṇe jātāti maggasamuṭṭhitā eva, na aññe. Yasmā pana maggasamuṭṭhitampi rūpaṃ kusalādināmaṃ na labhati, tasmā taṃ apanento ṭhapetvā cittasamuṭṭhānaṃ rūpanti āha. Sabbeva hi te dhammā kucchitānaṃ salanādīhi atthehi kusalā. Te ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānā natthi etesaṃ āsavāti anāsavā. Vaṭṭamūlaṃ chindantā nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vaṭṭato niyyantīti niyyānikā. Kusalākusalasaṅkhātā cayā apetattā apacayasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattanato apacayaṃ gacchantīti apacayagāmino, pavattaṃ apacinantā viddhaṃsentā gacchantītipi apacayagāmino. Loke apariyāpannabhāvena lokato uttarā uttiṇṇāti lokuttarā. Nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ etesanti nibbānārammaṇā.
「这些八根」等说法,是为了说明前面提到的眷属性、与之俱行的性质,以及开头所说的那些相。其中,「八根」是指按前文所述,连同慧根共有八根。「俱生眷属」:在这八根中,每一根都与其余七根同时生起,成为它的俱生眷属。同样,此根相对于其他根、其他根相对于此根,也称为「相互眷属」。同理,它们也是相互依止眷属和相应眷属。「俱行」:是与那未知当知根一同达到同生等状态。「俱生」:即与它一同生起。「相杂」:即与它混合在一起。「相应」:即由同生等方式与之平等和合。「这些法」就是指这八种根的法。「它的」是指未知当知根的。「诸相」是指眷属的部分。显示巴利原文
Imāni aṭṭhindriyānītiādi pubbe vuttaparivārabhāvassa ca tena sahagatādibhāvassa ca ādivuttaākārānañca dīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha aṭṭhindriyānīti pubbe vuttanayena paññindriyena saha aṭṭha. Sahajātaparivārāti aṭṭhasu ekekena saha itare itare satta sahajātā hutvā tassa sahajātaparivārā honti. Tatheva aññaṃ aññassa aññaṃ aññassāti evaṃ aññamaññaparivārā honti. Tatheva aññamaññaṃ nissayaparivārā sampayuttaparivārā ca honti. Sahagatāti tena anaññātaññassāmītindriyena saha ekuppādādibhāvaṃ gatā. Sahajātāti teneva saha jātā. Saṃsaṭṭhāti teneva saha missitā. Sampayuttāti teneva samaṃ ekuppādādipakārehi yuttā. Tevāti te eva aṭṭha indriyadhammā. Tassāti anaññātaññassāmītindriyassa. Ākārāti parivārakoṭṭhāsā.
在果刹那生起的诸法全部都是无记的;由于色法也是无记的,所以这些法与心等起色一起被说到。唯独道是善的、能导向出离的、朝向消尽的,因此在果刹那不说它们是「善」、「能导向出离」和「朝向消尽」。「如是」等是总结前述内容的结语。其中,「八重八」:在八种道与果中,每一者都具有八根,由此成为八种根的八个组合,总共有六十四种相。至于「漏」等,也只是如前面所解释的意思。这里应当知道,并非只针对阿拉汉道所断的漏而说;对于其余三道所断的漏,也是借用「漏尽」这一共通的名称而说的。因为有些论师认为,只有阿拉汉道智才无余断尽了一切漏,故称之为「尽智」。也正因为如此,唯阿拉汉才被称为「诸漏尽者」。显示巴利原文
Phalakkhaṇe jātā dhammā sabbeva abyākatā hontīti rūpassapi abyākatattā cittasamuṭṭhānarūpena saha vuttā. Maggasseva kusalattā niyyānikattā apacayagāmittā ca phalakkhaṇe ‘‘kusalā’’ti ca ‘‘niyyānikā’’ti ca ‘‘apacayagāmino’’ti ca na vuttaṃ. Itītiādi vuttappakāranigamanaṃ. Tattha aṭṭhaṭṭhakānīti aṭṭhasu maggaphalesu ekekassa aṭṭhakassa vasena aṭṭha indriyaaṭṭhakāni. Catusaṭṭhi hontīti catusaṭṭhi ākārā honti. Āsavātiādi heṭṭhā vuttatthameva . Idha arahattamaggavajjheyeva āsave avatvā sesamaggattayavajjhānampi vacanaṃ āsavakkhayavacanasāmaññamattena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Arahattamaggañāṇameva hi keci āsave asesetvā āsavānaṃ khepanato ‘‘khaye ñāṇa’’nti vuccati. Tasmāyeva ca arahāyeva khīṇāsavoti vuccatīti.
56-63. 谛智四重双解说之注释显示巴利原文
56-63. Saccañāṇacatukkadvayaniddesavaṇṇanā
108-9 在解释谛智的四种二重说明时,“苦的压迫义”等意思已如前所述。具道者的智——即“于苦中智”等,如其后的四重一样,是依“一现观”来说的。因为谛智有两种:世间智与出世间智。世间智又分两种:随觉智与观察智。其中,随觉智对初学者而言,是经由传闻等方式在灭与道上生起的;而在苦与集上,则以它们为所缘而生起。观察智则是已通达真理者,以四谛为所缘而生起的。出世间智是通达智,以灭为所缘,从作用上通达四谛。正如经中所说:“比丘们,凡是见到苦的人,也见到苦的集、见到苦的灭、见到通往苦灭的道”(《相应部》),一切应说的都已说明。此处也是从这个角度来阐述的。然而,这样说旨在表明:即便是出世间智,也能获得“于苦中智”等名称。但在这里,真正所指的仅为世间智。正因如此,才发问:“什么是于苦中智”等等。显示巴利原文
108-9. Saccañāṇacatukkadvayaniddese dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭhotiādīni vuttatthāneva. Maggasamaṅgissa ñāṇaṃ dukkhepetaṃ ñāṇantiādi anantaracatukke viya ekābhisamayavasena vuttaṃ. Duvidhañhi saccañāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ lokuttarañca. Lokikaṃ duvidhaṃ anubodhañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇañca. Anubodhañāṇaṃ ādikammikassa anussavādivasena nirodhe magge ca pavattati, dukkhe samudaye ca ārammaṇakaraṇavasena. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paṭividdhasaccassa catūsupi saccesu ārammaṇakaraṇavasena. Lokuttaraṃ paṭivedhañāṇaṃ nirodhamārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccato cattāri saccāni paṭivijjhati. Yathāha – ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, dukkhaṃ passati, dukkhasamudayampi so passati, dukkhanirodhampi passati, dukkhanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadampi passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1100) sabbaṃ vattabbaṃ. Idhāpi iminā vārena idameva vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana lokuttarampi ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādīni nāmāni labhatīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Idha pana lokikañāṇameva adhippetaṃ. Tasmāyeva ca tattha katamaṃ dukkhe ñāṇantiādimāha.
在这里,“缘于苦”意为以苦谛为所缘,把它作为心的所缘。在“慧”等词中:因能令种种事物的意义清楚明了,故称为“慧”;又因能通过无常等方式了知诸法,所以也称为“慧”。这是它自性上的名称。“了知”指了知的行为。“择”是因为它拣择无常等。“广择”则是加上接头词强调,意为更广泛、以种种方式去拣择。因为拣择四谛诸法,所以称为“法择”。“善察”是指依据无常等的正确特征而妥善把握。同一个词,随着接头词的变化,又成为“近察”、“对察”等,意思都是对无常等法作更强烈、更细致的观察。“贤明”指贤者的状态。“善巧”指善巧的状态。“微妙”指精细微妙的状态。“广显”是通过令无常等道理显露而得名。“思”是以思惟无常等而得名;或者说,它生起后能使人思惟无常等,所以也称为“思”。“伺”是仔细观察无常等。“地”就是大地。这里也是取柔软和宽广的意思,说它如同大地一般,所以称为“地”。或者,慧本身乐于安住于真实义,所以称为“地”。“害慧”:犹如雷电劈开山崖一样,它能显示巴利原文
Tattha dukkhaṃ ārabbhāti dukkhasaccaṃ ālambitvā, ārammaṇaṃ katvāti attho. Paññātiādīsu tassa tassa atthassa pākaṭakaraṇasaṅkhātena paññāpanaṭṭhena paññā, tena tena vā aniccādinā pakārena dhamme jānātītipi paññā. Idamassā sabhāvapadaṃ. Pajānanākāro pajānanā. Aniccādīni vicinātīti vicayo. Pavicayoti upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ, pakārena vicayoti attho. Catusaccadhammaṃ vicinātīti dhammavicayo. Aniccādīnaṃ sammā lakkhaṇavasena sallakkhaṇā. Sā eva upasagganānattena upalakkhaṇāpaccupalakkhaṇāti vuttā. Bhusaṃ lakkhaṇā te te aniccādidhamme paṭicca upalakkhaṇāti attho. Paṇḍitabhāvo paṇḍiccaṃ. Kusalabhāvo kosallaṃ. Nipuṇabhāvo nepuññaṃ. Aniccādīnaṃ vibhāvanavasena vebhabyā. Aniccādīnaṃ cintanakavasena cintā, yassa uppajjati, taṃ aniccādīni cintāpetītipi cintā. Aniccādīni upaparikkhatīti upaparikkhā. Bhūrīti pathavī. Ayampi saṇhaṭṭhena vitthataṭṭhena ca bhūrī viyāti bhūrī. Atha vā paññāyeva bhūte atthe ramatīti bhūrīti vuccati. Asani viya siluccaye kilese medhati hiṃsatīti medhā, khippaṃ gahaṇadhāraṇaṭṭhena vā medhā. Yassa uppajjati, taṃ attahitapaṭipattiyaṃ sampayuttadhamme ca yāthāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhe parinetīti pariṇāyikā. Dhamme aniccādivasena vividhā passatīti vipassanā. Sammā pakārehi aniccādīni jānātīti sampajāno, tassa bhāvo sampajaññaṃ. Uppathapaṭipanne sindhave vīthiāropanatthaṃ patodo viya uppathe dhāvanakaṃ kūṭacittaṃ vīthiāropanatthaṃ vijjhatīti patodo viya patodo.
「根」:在‘见’这个特征上,起到主宰的作用,所以称为根。由慧所成的根,就是「慧根」。这是什么意思呢?这不是像‘男人的根叫做男根’那样的所属关系,而是说,慧本身就是根,所以叫慧根。「慧力」:因为不会被无明所动摇,所以叫慧力。「慧剑」:因为它有斩断烦恼的作用,所以慧本身就是剑,称为慧剑。「慧殿」:因为它极其崇高,所以慧本身就是宫殿,称为慧殿。「慧光」:因为它有照亮的作用,所以慧本身就是光,称为慧光。「慧明」:因为它有照耀的作用,所以慧本身就是明,称为慧明。「慧灯」:因为它有发光的作用,所以慧本身就是灯,称为慧灯。因为一个拥有智慧的人,在结跏趺坐时,一万个世界都会变成一片光、一片明、一片灯。这就是这么说的缘由。其实在这三个词里,哪怕只用一个,意思也能说通。但是,世尊是顺应众生的心性,才说了这些经:‘比丘们,有四种光。哪四种呢?月光、日光、火光、慧光。比丘们,这就是四种光。比丘们,在这四种光当中,这慧光是最上的。’同样的道理,还有‘比丘们,有四种明……比丘们,有四种灯’(《增支部》)。相应地,这里的长老也做了这样的解说。因为通过多种方式来解释一个道理,能把它分析得更清楚,而且,不同的人理解的方式也不同。「慧宝」:这是从它能带来喜悦、赐予喜乐、令人欢喜、值得尊敬、稀有难得、不可衡量、是为最上士人所受用的这些意义上来说的。因此,慧本身就是宝,称为慧宝。显示巴利原文
Dassanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ karotīti indriyaṃ, paññāsaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Nayidaṃ ‘‘purisassa indriyaṃ purisindriya’’ntiādi viya paññāya indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Atha kho paññā eva indriyaṃ paññindriyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Avijjāya na kampatīti paññābalaṃ. Kilesacchedanaṭṭhena paññāva satthaṃ paññāsatthaṃ. Accuggataṭṭhena paññāva pāsādo paññāpāsādo. Ālokanaṭṭhena paññāva āloko paññāāloko. Obhāsanaṭṭhena paññāva obhāso paññāobhāso. Pajjotanaṭṭhena paññāva pajjoto paññāpajjoto. Paññavato hi ekapallaṅkena nisinnassa dasasahassilokadhātu ekālokā ekobhāsā ekapajjotā hoti. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Imesu pana tīsu padesu ekapadenāpi etasmiṃ atthe siddhe yāni panetāni bhagavatā ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, ālokā. Katame cattāro? Candāloko, sūriyāloko, aggāloko, paññāloko. Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro ālokā. Etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, imesaṃ catunnaṃ ālokānaṃ yadidaṃ paññāloko’’. Tathā ‘‘cattārome , bhikkhave, obhāsā. Cattārome, bhikkhave, pajjotā’’ti (a. ni. 4.144-145) sattānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena suttāni desitāni. Tadanurūpeneva idhāpi therena desanā katā. Attho hi anekehi ākārehi vibhajjamāno suvibhatto hoti, aññathā ca añño bujjhati, aññathā aññoti. Ratikaraṇaṭṭhena pana ratidāyakaṭṭhena ratijanakaṭṭhena cittīkataṭṭhena dullabhapātubhāvaṭṭhena atulaṭṭhena anomasattaparibhogaṭṭhena ca paññāva ratanaṃ paññāratanaṃ.
「不痴」:以此,众生不愚痴;或于所缘上不迷,故名不痴。「法择」之义,前已说明。何以此处复说?为显“不痴乃痴之对治”之性。即明:此所谓不痴,非仅是与痴相异之法,实乃作为痴之对治、名为法择的不痴,方是此处所指。「正见」:即如实、能导向解脱的善见。至于经中问:“此中,何等为苦集智?何等为苦灭智?何等为导至苦灭之道智?”这些问辞,唯是略说。显示巴利原文
Na tena sattā muyhanti, sayaṃ vā ārammaṇe na muyhatīti amoho. Dhammavicayapadaṃ vuttatthameva. Kasmā panetaṃ puna vuttanti? Amohassa mohapaṭipakkhabhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Tenetaṃ dīpeti ‘‘yvāyaṃ amoho, so na kevalaṃ mohato añño dhammo, mohassa pana paṭipakkho dhammavicayasaṅkhāto amoho nāma idha adhippeto’’ti. Sammādiṭṭhīti yāthāvaniyyānikakusaladiṭṭhi . ‘‘Tattha katamaṃ dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṃ, tattha katamaṃ dukkhanirodhe ñāṇaṃ, tattha katamaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ñāṇa’’nti pucchāvacanāni saṅkhepavasena vuttānīti.
64-67. 纯粹无碍解智解说注释显示巴利原文
64-67. Suddhikapaṭisambhidāñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
110 于纯粹无碍解智之解说中,因诸智本身无如前之细分,故未再展示其分类,直说“于诸义之智,是义无碍解”等语。虽慧无细分,然因各自所证四圣谛法之种种差别,故有“于种种义有智,即义无碍解之智”等说。其中,「种种」指义等有多种。「确定」指对义等的决断。「善察」指对义等的善巧观察。「近察」指对义等的深入观察。「分别」指对义等的种种区分。「令显明」指令义等清楚显了而生起。「照耀」指照亮义等。「光耀」指以种种方式照亮义等。「明晰」指令义等光明澄澈。此中以「种种」为基词,从共通方面说。如是,可作连结理解:「确定」是就入流者而言;「善察、近察」是就一来者而言;「分别、令显明」是就不来者而言;「照耀、光耀、明晰」则是就阿拉汉而言。显示巴利原文
110. Suddhikapaṭisambhidāñāṇaniddese imesaṃ ñāṇānaṃ pabhedābhāvatoyeva heṭṭhā viya pabhedaṃ adassetvāyeva atthesu ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidātiādi vuttaṃ. Paññāpabhedābhāvepi attanā paṭividdhacatusaccadhammamattavasena nānattasabbhāvato atthanānatte paññā atthapaṭisambhide ñāṇantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nānatteti atthādīnaṃ anekabhāve. Vavatthāneti atthādīnaṃ nicchayane. Sallakkhaṇeti atthādīnaṃ sammādassane. Upalakkhaṇeti atthādīnaṃ bhusaṃdassane. Pabhedeti atthādīnaṃ nānābhede. Pabhāvaneti atthādīnaṃ pākaṭīkaraṇena uppādane. Jotaneti atthādīnaṃ dīpane. Virocaneti atthādīnaṃ vividhā dīpane. Pakāsaneti atthādīnaṃ pabhāsane . ‘‘Nānatte’’ti mūlapadaṃ katvā sabbasādhāraṇavasena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vavatthāne’’ti sotāpannassa vasena, ‘‘sallakkhaṇe upalakkhaṇe’’ti sakadāgāmissa vasena, ‘‘pabhede pabhāvane’’ti anāgāmissa vasena, ‘‘jotane virocane pakāsane’’ti arahato vasena vuttanti evampettha yojanā kātabbāti.
《无碍解道》注疏显示巴利原文
Paṭisambhidāmagga-aṭṭhakathā
68. 根上下慧论的解释显示巴利原文
68. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
111 111. 在“根上下智”的解说中,虽然“如来”一词并未在总说中出现其名称,但因《无碍解道·论母》(《无碍解道·论母》1.73)中说“有六种智不与声闻弟子共通”,所以“如来的”这一用语实际上已经成立。因此,在广释中便采用了在总说中义理上已经成立的“如来”一语。
“见诸众生”:由于这些众生对色等对象有欲贪,因而成为执取者、粘著者,如来以根上下智之眼看见他们、观察他们。
“少尘垢”:就慧眼而言,这些人的贪等尘垢很少,故称为少尘垢者。他看到那些少尘垢者。
“多尘垢”:就慧眼而言,这些人的贪等尘垢很多,故称为多尘垢者。
“利根、钝根”:这些人具备锋利的信等根,故为利根;那些人具备柔弱的信等根,故为钝根。
“善行相、恶行相”:这些人具有善好的信等行相,故为善行相者;那些人具有卑劣、应受诃责的信等行相,故为恶行相者。
“易教化、难教化”:那些能观察所讲说的道理、容易让显示巴利原文
111. Indriyaparopariyattañāṇaniddese tathāgatassāti vacane uddese sarūpato avijjamānepi ‘‘cha ñāṇāni asādhāraṇāni sāvakehī’’ti (paṭi. ma. mātikā 1.73) vuttattā ‘‘tathāgatassā’’ti vuttameva hoti. Tasmā uddese atthato siddhassa tathāgatavacanassa niddese gahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Satte passatīti rūpādīsu chandarāgena sattatāya laggatāya sattā, te satte indriyaparopariyattañāṇena cakkhunā passati oloketi. Apparajakkheti paññāmaye akkhimhi appaṃ rāgādirajo etesanti apparajakkhā, appaṃ rāgādirajo etesanti vā apparajakkhā. Te apparajakkhe. Mahārajakkheti paññāmaye akkhimhi mahantaṃ rāgādirajo etesanti mahārajakkhā, mahantaṃ rāgādirajo etesanti vā mahārajakkhā. Tikkhindriye mudindriyeti tikkhāni saddhādīni indriyāni etesanti tikkhindriyā, mudūni saddhādīni indriyāni etesanti mudindriyā. Svākāre dvākāreti sundarā saddhādayo ākārā koṭṭhāsā etesanti svākārā, kucchitā garahitā saddhādayo ākārā koṭṭhāsā etesanti dvākārā. Suviññāpaye duviññāpayeti ye kathitaṃ kāraṇaṃ sallakkhenti sukhena sakkā honti viññāpetuṃ, te suviññāpayā, tabbiparītā duviññāpayā. Appekacceparalokavajjabhayadassāvinoti api eke paralokañceva rāgādivajjañca bhayato passante, imassa pana padassa niddese paralokasseva na vuttattā khandhādiloke ca rāgādivajje ca paraṃ bāḷhaṃ bhayaṃ passanasīlāti paralokavajjabhayadassāvino. Te paralokavajjabhayadassāvineti evamattho gahetabbo. Appekacce na paralokavajjabhayadassāvinoti tabbiparīte. Lokoti ca lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena. Vajjanti ca vajjanīyaṭṭhena. Ettāvatā uddesassa niddeso kato hoti.
接着,对广释作出进一步复注,说明“少尘垢、多尘垢”等。
其中,对三宝有确立的信,称为“信”,具备此信的人即是“有信者”。此具足信的人,由于不信的尘垢以及以不信为根的其他不善尘垢很少,故为“少尘垢者”。无此信者是“无信者”,他因上述那类尘垢很多,故为“多尘垢者”。
“勤精进者”:已发起精进的人。由于他懈怠的尘垢以及以懈怠为根的其他不善尘垢很少,故为少尘垢者。精进低劣,以卑劣的方式沉没者,称为“懈怠者”,懈怠者也就是懒散者。他因上述那类尘垢很多,故为多尘垢者。
“念现前者”:念贴近所缘而安住。由于他忘念的尘垢以及以忘念为根的其他不善尘垢很少,故为少尘垢者。念已忘失、丢失,即是“忘念者”。他因上述那类尘垢很多,故为多尘垢者。
“得定者”:由安止定或近行定,在所缘上平等、正确地安住,称为得定者,亦可谓心有定者。由于他掉举的尘垢以及以掉举为根的其他不善尘垢很少,故为少尘垢者。未得定者,是“未定者”。他因上述那类尘垢很多,故为多尘垢者。显示巴利原文
Puna niddesassa paṭiniddesaṃ karonto apparajakkhe mahārajakkhetiādimāha. Tattha tīsu ratanesu okappanasaṅkhātā saddhā assa atthīti saddho. So saddhāsampanno puggalo assaddhiyarajassa ceva assaddhiyamūlakassa sesākusalarajassa ca appakattā apparajakkho. Natthi etassa saddhāti assaddho. So vuttappakārassa rajassa mahantattā mahārajakkho. Āraddhaṃ vīriyamanenāti āraddhavīriyo. So kosajjarajassa ceva kosajjamūlakassa sesākusalarajassa ca appakattā apparajakkho. Hīnavīriyattā kucchitena ākārena sīdatīti kusīdo, kusīdo eva kusīto. So vuttappakārassa rajassa mahantattā mahārajakkho. Ārammaṇaṃ upecca ṭhitā sati assāti upaṭṭhitassati. So muṭṭhassaccarajassa ceva muṭṭhassaccamūlakassa sesākusalarajassa ca appakattā apparajakkho. Muṭṭhā naṭṭhā sati assāti muṭṭhassati. So vuttappakārassa rajassa mahantattā mahārajakkho. Appanāsamādhinā upacārasamādhinā vā ārammaṇe samaṃ, sammā vā āhito ṭhitoti samāhito, samāhitacittoti vā samāhito. So uddhaccarajassa ceva uddhaccamūlakassa sesākusalarajassa ca appakattā apparajakkho. Na samāhito asamāhito. So vuttappakārassa rajassa mahantattā mahārajakkho. Udayatthagāminī paññā assa atthīti paññavā. So moharajassa ceva mohamūlakassa sesākusalarajassa ca appakattā apparajakkho. Mohamūḷhattā duṭṭhā paññā assāti duppañño. So vuttappakārassa rajassa mahantattā mahārajakkho. Saddho puggalo tikkhindriyoti bahulaṃ uppajjamānāya balavatiyā saddhāya saddho, teneva saddhindriyena tikkhindriyo. Assaddho puggalo mudindriyoti bahulaṃ uppajjamānena assaddhiyena assaddho, antarantarā uppajjamānena dubbalena saddhindriyena mudindriyo. Esa nayo sesesupi. Saddho puggalo svākāroti tāya eva saddhāya sobhanākāro. Assaddho puggalo dvākāroti teneva assaddhiyena virūpākāro. Esa nayo sesesupi. Suviññāpayoti sukhena viññāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyo. Duviññāpayoti dukkhena viññāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyo. Paralokavajjabhayadassāvīti ettha yasmā paññāsampannasseva saddhādīni suparisuddhāni honti, tasmā suparisuddhasaddhādisampanno taṃsampayuttāya, suparisuddhasaddhādisampannopi vā tappaccayāya paññāya paralokavajjabhayadassāvī hoti. Tasmā eva hi saddhādayopi cattāro ‘‘paralokavajjabhayadassāvī’’ti vuttā.
112 今为阐明“于他世见过患、见怖畏者”句中“世间”与“过患”之义,始释“世间”等词。此处,诸蕴以坏灭、变坏故,名“世间”,是为“蕴世间”。余二种世间准此应知。“恶趣有世间”即恶趣世间。其果报不可意,得彼丑劣,故名“恶趣”;以有故,名“有”;恶趣即是有,名“恶趣有”;此恶趣有即是世间,故称“恶趣有世间”。“恶趣因世间”指能令堕恶趣之业。因能生果,故名为“因”;恶趣之因,即“恶趣因”;此恶趣因即是世间,故称“恶趣因世间”。“善趣有世间”即善趣世间。其果报可意,得彼美好,故名“善趣”;以有故,名“有”;善趣即是有,名“善趣有”;此善趣有即是世间,故称“善趣有世间”。“善趣因世间”指能令生善趣之业。因能生果,故名为“因”;善趣之因,即“善趣因”;此善趣因即是世间,故称“善趣因世间”。“一世间”等下文释义,与前述义理相同。显示巴利原文
112. Idāni ‘‘paralokavajjabhayadassāvī’’ti ettha vuttaṃ lokañca vajjañca dassetuṃ lokotiādimāha. Ettha khandhā eva lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti khandhaloko. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Vipattibhavalokoti apāyaloko. So hi aniṭṭhaphalattā virūpo lābhoti vipatti, bhavatīti bhavo, vipatti eva bhavo vipattibhavo, vipattibhavo eva loko vipattibhavaloko. Vipattisambhavalokoti apāyūpagaṃ kammaṃ. Tañhi sambhavati etasmā phalanti sambhavo, vipattiyā sambhavo vipattisambhavo, vipattisambhavo eva loko vipattisambhavaloko. Sampattibhavalokoti sugatiloko. So hi iṭṭhaphalattā sundaro lābhoti sampatti, bhavatīti bhavo, sampatti eva bhavo sampattibhavo, sampattibhavo eva loko sampattibhavaloko. Sampattisambhavalokoti sugatūpagaṃ kammaṃ. Tañhi sambhavati etasmā phalanti sambhavo, sampattiyā sambhavo sampattisambhavo, sampattisambhavo eva loko sampattisambhavaloko. Eko lokotiādīni heṭṭhā vuttatthāneva.
“Vajja”(过患)一词,因未别指何法,故用中性词。“烦恼”谓贪等。“恶行”谓杀生等。“造作”谓福行等。“趣有业”谓依自生果报而趣向于“有”之业;于诸造作中,亦特指能生果报之业。“如是”乃对上举诸相之总示。“于此世间及于此过患”者,即指前所说之世间与过患。“强怖畏想”谓有大威势之怖畏想,其中“强”释其相,“怖畏想”释“怖畏”一词。世间与过患二者,既是怖畏之源,其体亦具怖畏性,故名为“怖畏”;觉知彼为怖畏,即是“怖畏想”。“现起”谓依种种所缘而生起并安住。譬如持刀杀手:如同面对举刀欲砍之怨敌,心即现起强怖畏想;如是,于世间与过患亦现起强怖畏想。“依此五十行相”者:谓“少尘五法”等十类五法中,每类各有五种行相,总合即为五十行相。“此五根”即信根等五根。“知”:如来以智慧彻知。“见”:犹如以天眼亲见般清晰。“遍知”:以通达一切行相之极致而了知。显示巴利原文
Vajjanti napuṃsakavacanaṃ asukoti aniddiṭṭhattā kataṃ. Kilesāti rāgādayo. Duccaritāti pāṇātipātādayo. Abhisaṅkhārāti puññābhisaṅkhārādayo. Bhavagāmikammāti attano vipākadānavasena bhavaṃ gacchantīti bhavagāmino, abhisaṅkhāresupi vipākajanakāneva kammāni vuttāni. Itīti vuttappakāranidassanaṃ. Imasmiñca loke imasmiñca vajjeti vuttappakāre loke ca vajje ca. Tibbā bhayasaññāti balavatī bhayasaññā. Tibbāti parasaddassa attho vutto, bhayasaññāti bhayasaddassa, lokavajjadvayampi hi bhayavatthuttā sayañca sabhayattā bhayaṃ, bhayamiti saññā bhayasaññā. Paccupaṭṭhitā hotīti taṃ taṃ paṭicca upecca ṭhitā hoti. Seyyathāpi ukkhittāsike vadhaketi yathā nāma paharituṃ uccāritakhagge paccāmitte tibbā bhayasaññā paccupaṭṭhitā hoti, evameva loke ca vajje ca tibbā bhayasaññā paccupaṭṭhitā hoti. Imehi paññāsāya ākārehīti apparajakkhapañcakādīsu dasasu pañcakesu ekekasmiṃ pañcannaṃ pañcannaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena paññāsāya ākārehi. Imāni pañcindriyānīti saddhindriyādīni pañcindriyāni . Jānātīti tathāgato paññāya pajānāti. Passatīti dibbacakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ viya karoti. Aññātīti sabbākāramariyādāhi jānāti. Paṭivijjhatīti ekadesaṃ asesetvā niravasesadassanavasena paññāya padāletīti.
69. 释性行随眠智力论显示巴利原文
69. Āsayānusayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
113 在《性行随眠智力论》中,此处的解说分作“如来”等五个部分。其中,“性行”与“随眠”的含义已如前说。“行”是指过去所造作的善与不善业。“意趣”是指现在内心对善或不善的倾向与投入。“堪能者与不堪能者”,即具备条件者与不具备条件者。能生于圣者之生的人,即是能生起圣道者,称为“堪能者”。此处用的是现在时,表示接近现在。或者说,未来将生起圣道的人,称为“堪能者”,意为他们具备承载法的资格。那些亲依止条件具足、适合证悟圣道的人,便是“堪能者”。与此相反的,则是“不堪能者”。显示巴利原文
113. Āsayānusayañāṇaniddese idha tathāgatotiādi pañcadhā ṭhapito niddeso. Tattha āsayānusayā vuttatthā eva. Caritanti pubbe kataṃ kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ. Adhimuttinti sampati kusale akusale vā cittavosaggo. Bhabbābhabbeti bhabbe ca abhabbe ca. Ariyāya jātiyā sambhavanti jāyantīti bhabbā. Vattamānasamīpe vattamānavacanaṃ. Bhavissanti jāyissantīti vā bhabbā, bhājanabhūtāti attho. Ye ariyamaggapaṭivedhassa anucchavikā upanissayasampannā, te bhabbā. Vuttapaṭipakkhā abhabbā.
“什么是众生的性行?”等句,是对论所作的进一步解说。其中,“常”指恒常。“世间”在此指“我”。有人执持这样的见解:唯有身体会坏灭,而“我”无论在现在世还是未来世都是同一个。因为他们认为这个“我”能自己观照,所以便将它称为“世间”。“无常”指不恒常。他们执著“我”会随着身体一起灭去。“有边”:他们在微小的遍处证得禅那后,将那以此小遍处为所缘的心视作有边际,从而执取它为“我”。“无边”:与“有边”相反。他们在广大无边的遍处证得禅那后,将那以此无量遍处为所缘的心视为横无边际,从而执取它为“我”。“命即是彼身”:他们认为生命与身体是同一个东西。“命”指“我”,此处依语法性变而用中性词。“身”指具有积聚义的五蕴。“命是一,身是另一”:他们认为生命是一回事,五蕴身体是另一回事。“如来死后存在”:他们执著诸蕴仅于今世灭去,而有情在死后依然存在,并不消失。这里所说的“如来”,有人将它解释为“有情的代名词”,也有人解说为“阿拉汉”。他们是看到了主张“死后不存在”这一方的过失,才执持这种见解的。显示巴利原文
Katamo sattānaṃ āsayotiādi niddesassa paṭiniddeso. Tattha sassatoti nicco. Lokoti attā. Idha sarīraṃyeva nassati, attā pana idha parattha ca soyevāti maññanti. So hi sayaṃyeva āloketīti katvā ‘‘loko’’ti maññanti. Asassatoti anicco. Attā sarīreneva saha nassatīti maññanti. Antavāti paritte kasiṇe jhānaṃ uppādetvā taṃparittakasiṇārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ sapariyanto attāti maññanti. Anantavāti na antavā appamāṇe kasiṇe jhānaṃ uppādetvā taṃappamāṇakasiṇārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ apariyanto attāti maññanti. Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti jīvo ca sarīrañca taṃyeva. Jīvoti attā, liṅgavipallāsena napuṃsakavacanaṃ kataṃ. Sarīranti rāsaṭṭhena khandhapañcakaṃ. Aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīranti añño jīvo aññaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ. Hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti khandhā idheva vinassanti, satto maraṇato paraṃ hoti vijjati na nassati. ‘‘Tathāgato’’ti cettha sattādhivacananti vadanti. Keci pana ‘‘tathāgatoti arahā’’ti vadanti. Ime ‘‘na hotī’’ti pakkhe dosaṃ disvā evaṃ gaṇhanti. Na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇāti khandhāpi idheva nassanti, tathāgato ca maraṇato paraṃ na hoti ucchijjati vinassati. Ime ‘‘hotī’’ti pakkhe dosaṃ disvā evaṃ gaṇhanti. Hoti ca na ca hotīti ime ekekapakkhapariggahe dosaṃ disvā ubhayapakkhaṃ gaṇhanti. Neva hoti na na hotīti ime ubhayapakkhapariggahe ubhayadosāpattiṃ disvā ‘‘hotīti ca na hoti, neva hotīti ca na hotī’’ti amarāvikkhepapakkhaṃ gaṇhanti.
然而,此处依注疏之义理:“世间是常”等,是以十种行相说明见的分类。其中,“世间是常”:执取五蕴为“世间”后,认为“此世间是常、稳固、恒存”,由此执取方式而生起的见,即是常见。“世间是无常”:执取这同一个世间将“断灭、坏灭”,由此执取方式而生起的见,即是断见。“世间有边”:证得小遍处的人,在如针尖或碗口大的遍处入定后,将定中所生的色法与非色法执著为“世间”,并依遍处的边缘界限而执著为“有边”,这便是“世间有边”这种执取方式所生起的见。此见可以是常见,也可以是断见。对于证得广大遍处的人,在那广大的遍处入定后,将定中所生的色法与非色法执著为“世间”,并因遍处无有边际而执著为“非有边”,这便是“世间无边”这种执取方式所生起的见。此见同样可以是常见或断见。“命即是彼身”:因为将变坏的身体当作“命”,所以认为身体断灭时,“命”也随之断灭,这便是由断灭执取方式所生起的见。第二种情况,“命是一,身是另一”:因为执取身体之外别有命,所以认为虽然身体断灭了,命并不会断灭,这便是由常见执取方式所生起的见。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha aṭṭhakathānayo – ‘‘sassato lokoti vā’’tiādīhi dasahākārehi diṭṭhipabhedova vutto. Tattha sassato lokoti ca khandhapañcakaṃ lokoti gahetvā ‘‘ayaṃ loko nicco dhuvo sabbakāliko’’ti gaṇhantassa sassatanti gahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Asassatoti tameva lokaṃ ‘‘ucchijjati vinassatī’’ti gaṇhantassa ucchedaggahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Antavāti parittakasiṇalābhino suppamatte vā sarāvamatte vā kasiṇe samāpannassa antosamāpattiyaṃ pavattitarūpārūpadhamme ‘‘loko’’ti ca kasiṇaparicchedantena ‘‘antavā’’ti ca gaṇhantassa ‘‘antavā loko’’ti gahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Sā sassatadiṭṭhipi hoti ucchedadiṭṭhipi. Vipulakasiṇalābhino pana tasmiṃ kasiṇe samāpannassa antosamāpattiyaṃ pavattitarūpārūpadhamme ‘‘loko’’ti ca kasiṇaparicchedantena ‘‘na antavā’’ti ca gaṇhantassa ‘‘anantavā loko’’ti gahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Sā sassatadiṭṭhipi hoti ucchedadiṭṭhipi. Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti bhedanadhammassa sarīrasseva ‘‘jīva’’nti gahitattā ‘‘sarīre ucchijjamāne jīvampi ucchijjatī’’ti ucchedaggahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Dutiyapade sarīrato aññassa jīvassa gahitattā ‘‘sarīre ucchijjamānepi jīvaṃ na ucchijjatī’’ti sassataggahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Hoti tathāgatotiādīsu ‘‘satto tathāgato nāma, so paraṃ maraṇā hotī’’ti gaṇhato paṭhamā sassatadiṭṭhi. ‘‘Na hotī’’ti gaṇhato dutiyā ucchedadiṭṭhi. ‘‘Hoti ca na ca hotī’’ti gaṇhato tatiyā ekaccasassatadiṭṭhi. ‘‘Neva hoti na na hotī’’ti gaṇhato catutthā amarāvikkhepadiṭṭhīti.
「如是」是对前述诸见依处的指示。或者也可解释为:众生不是依止于「有见」,就是依止于「非有见」。「有」是指常,依常见而生起的见称为「有见」,也就是将见执为「有」。「非有」是指断灭,依断灭见而生起的见称为「非有见」,也就是将见执为「非有」。前述十种见,总括起来,便是「有见」与「非有见」两种。对于这两种见中的每一种,众生都依止、依附、黏着于其上。显示巴利原文
Itīti vuttappakāradiṭṭhinissayanidassanaṃ. Bhavadiṭṭhisannissitā vā sattā honti vibhavadiṭṭhisannissitā vāti bhavo vuccati sassato, sassatavasena uppajjamānadiṭṭhi bhavadiṭṭhi, bhavoti diṭṭhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vibhavo vuccati ucchedo , ucchedavasena uppajjamānadiṭṭhi vibhavadiṭṭhi, vibhavoti diṭṭhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttappakārā dasavidhā diṭṭhi bhavadiṭṭhi ca vibhavadiṭṭhi cāti dvidhāva hoti. Tāsu dvīsu ekekaṃ sannissitā apassitā allīnā sattā honti.
「不走近此两端」一句中,此处的「或」字,如同「或从火、或从水、或从离间」等用法,是表示「合集」的意思。整句意为:不走近、不依附,并舍弃如前所说的、以常见与断见为内涵的两种边。「随顺忍」一词,是表示「简择」的意思。而「此缘性、缘生法」是指:对于这些老死等现象,其条件即是「此缘」,此缘本身即是「此缘性」;或者说,这些条件的集合便称为「此缘性」。至于此词的具体语法特征,应从语法书中去探求。所谓「缘生的」,即是依止于那些种种的条件,共同且正确地生起的事物。因此,是在这「此缘性」中,以及在这些「缘生的法」中。「随顺」,是说它随顺着出世间法,故称为「随顺」。「忍」是指智慧,因智慧具有堪忍的特性,故称为忍。「已获得」是说,已经被有情所证得。在对这此缘性的忍中,由于通达缘生诸法依赖于缘的和合而存在,藉由观见缘不会灭尽,而能观见果不会灭尽,因此不会步入断灭论。而在对缘生诸法的忍中,由于观见在缘的和合下,新新不断的缘生法不断生起,因此也不会步入常见论。就这样,不走近这「断」与「常」二边。显示巴利原文
Ete vā pana ubho ante anupagammāti ettha ‘‘aggito vā udakato vā mithubhedā vā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.152) viya vā-saddo samuccayattho. Ete vuttappakāre sassatucchedavasena dve pakkhe ca na upagantvā anallīyitvā pahāyāti attho. ‘‘Anulomikā vā khantī’’ti vikappatthova. Idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesūti imesaṃ jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayā idappaccayā, idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā, idappaccayānaṃ vā samūho idappaccayatā. Lakkhaṇaṃ panettha saddasatthato pariyesitabbaṃ. Te te paccaye paṭicca saha sammā ca uppannā paṭiccasamuppannā. Tassā idappaccayatāya ca tesu paṭiccasamuppannesu ca dhammesu. Anulomikāti lokuttaradhammānaṃ anulomato anulomikā. Khantīti ñāṇaṃ. Ñāṇañhi khamanato khanti. Paṭiladdhā hotīti sattehi adhigatā hoti. Idappaccayatāya khantiyā ucchedattānupagamo hoti paccayuppannadhammānaṃ paccayasāmaggiyaṃ āyattavuttittā paccayānuparamadassanena phalānuparamadassanato. Paṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu khantiyā sassatattānupagamo hoti paccayasāmaggiyaṃ navanavānaṃ paccayuppannadhammānaṃ uppādadassanato. Evamete ubho ante anupagamma paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannadhammadassanena na ucchedo na sassatoti pavattaṃ sammādassanaṃ ‘‘anulomikā khantī’’ti veditabbaṃ. Evañhi tadubhayadiṭṭhipaṭipakkhabhūtā sammādiṭṭhi vuttā hoti. Yathābhūtaṃ vā ñāṇanti yathābhūtaṃ yathāsabhāvaṃ neyyaṃ. Tattha pavattañāṇampi visayavohārena ‘‘yathābhūtañāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana saṅkhārupekkhāpariyantaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ idhādhippetaṃ. Heṭṭhā pana ‘‘yathābhūtañāṇadassana’’nti bhayatūpaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ vā ñāṇaṃ sattehi paṭiladdhaṃ hotīti sambandho.
此处,在开示了以「世间是常」等邪见所熏染的众生相续,以及以「不走近此两端」等正见所熏染的众生相续之后,进而以「即使是正在习欲的人」等教说,来显示为其余不善法与其余善法所熏染的众生相续。在这里,应将文句连接理解为:「即使是正在习欲的人,如来也了知他」。「正在习」是指,以反复的日常行为而正在从事、正在造作。「欲重者」:由于过去曾反复修习,故烦恼欲极其强烈、深重的人。「欲性行者」:这种欲已经深深植于其习性、心续之中,成为其本性的人。「欲决意者」:只是由于这持续的心续惯性,而对欲乐产生决定的倾向与执著的人。其余各项的解释,也依同理而可知。关于「离欲」等词,其含义已如前说。应当知道:以「欲」等三者,便已含摄了其余的不善法;以「离欲」等三者,便已含摄了其余的善法。至于「这是诸有情的性行」等三种说法,都只是在指说这心的相续而已。显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘sassato loko’’tiādīhi micchādiṭṭhiparibhāvitaṃ ‘‘ete vā panā’’tiādīhi sammādiṭṭhiparibhāvitaṃ sattasantānaṃ dassetvā ‘‘kāmaṃ sevantaññevā’’tiādīhi sesākusalehi sesakusalehi ca paribhāvitaṃ sattasantānaṃ dasseti. Tattha kāmaṃ sevantaṃyeva puggalaṃ tathāgato jānātīti yojanā kātabbā. Sevantanti ca abhiṇhasamudācāravasena sevamānaṃ. Pubbe āsevitavasena kilesakāmo garu assāti kāmagaruko. Tatheva kāmo āsaye santāne assāti kāmāsayo. Santānavaseneva kāme adhimutto laggoti kāmādhimutto. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Nekkhammādīni vuttatthāneva. Kāmādīhi ca tīhi sesākusalā, nekkhammādīhi tīhi sesakusalā gahitāva hontīti veditabbā. ‘‘Ayaṃ sattānaṃ āsayo’’ti tidhā vuttaṃ santānameva dasseti.
此处有注疏传统云:“iti bhavadiṭṭhisannissitā vā(或依止有见者)”,即是依止于常见。此处,常见被称为“有见”,断见则称为“非有见”。实则一切见皆摄于常见与断见之中,所有堕入恶见的众生,唯依止此二见而已。经中亦曾说:“迦旃延!世间大多依止于两边:存在性与非存在性。”(《相应部》2.15)此处,“存在性”即指常见,“非存在性”即指断见。以上是依止于轮回(vaṭṭa)的凡夫众生的倾向。为显示依止于还灭(vivaṭṭa)的清净众生的倾向,便说“ete vā pana ubho ante anupagammā(或不走近此两端)”等文。其中,“ete vā panā”是指“这些众生”。“ubho ante”指所谓常见与断见两端。“anupagammā”是指不走近、不执取。“idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesū”意为:对于“此缘性”及“缘生之法”。“an显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha aṭṭhakathānayo – ‘‘iti bhavadiṭṭhisannissitā vā’’ti evaṃ sassatadiṭṭhiṃ vā sannissitā. Sassatadiṭṭhi hi ettha bhavadiṭṭhīti vuttā, ucchedadiṭṭhi ca vibhavadiṭṭhīti. Sabbadiṭṭhīnañhi sassatucchedadiṭṭhīhi saṅgahitattā sabbepime diṭṭhigatikā sattā imāva dve diṭṭhiyo sannissitā honti. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘dvayanissito khvāyaṃ, kaccāna, loko yebhuyyena atthitañceva natthitañcā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.15). Ettha hi atthitāti sassataṃ. Natthitāti ucchedo. Ayaṃ tāva vaṭṭanissitānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ sattānaṃ āsayo. Idāni vivaṭṭanissitānaṃ suddhasattānaṃ āsayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ete vā pana ubho ante anupagammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘ete vā panā’’ti eteyeva. ‘‘Ubho ante’’ti sassatucchedasaṅkhāte dve ante. ‘‘Anupagammā’’ti na allīyitvā. ‘‘Idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesū’’ti idappaccayatāya ceva paṭiccasamuppannadhammesu ca. ‘‘Anulomikā khantī’’ti vipassanāñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇa’’nti maggañāṇaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā paṭiccasamuppāde ceva paṭiccasamuppannadhammesu ca ete ubho sassatucchedaante anupagantvā vipassanā paṭiladdhā, yañca tato uttari maggañāṇaṃ, ayaṃ sattānaṃ āsayo. Ayaṃ vaṭṭanissitānañca vivaṭṭanissitānañca sabbesampi sattānaṃ āsayo idaṃ vasanaṭṭhānanti. Ayaṃ ācariyānaṃ samānaṭṭhakathā.
然而,有异论者会质问:“所谓‘道’,正是因为能摧毁安住之处而行进,你怎么能说‘道’本身就是‘住’呢?”对于这样的质问,应当反问他:“你是圣住经典的持诵者,还是不是?”如果他说“不是”,就应该告诉他:“因为你没有持诵经典,所以不了解。”如果他说“我是持诵者”,就应该对他说:“请举出经典来。”如果他举出了,那很好。如果他举不出,你就应该自己举出:「诸比丘,有这十种圣住,圣者们无论过去、现在、未来都以此安住。」(《增支部》10.19)。因为这部经典显示了“道”也具有住的特性,所以这个说法是非常善妙的。而世尊在了知众生的这种倾向时,不仅在观智、道智活动时了知,即使在那些「恶见」以及「观智」、「道智」都不现行的刹那,他也能了知。正是因为这个缘故,才会说「即使正在习欲的人,他也确切了知」等等这段话。显示巴利原文
Vitaṇḍavādī panāha ‘‘maggo nāma vāsaṃ viddhaṃsento gacchati, tvaṃ maggo vāsoti vadesī’’ti? So vattabbo ‘‘tvaṃ ariyavāsabhāṇako hosi na hosī’’ti? Sace ‘‘na homī’’ti vadati, ‘‘tvaṃ abhāṇakatāya na jānāsī’’ti vattabbo. Sace ‘‘bhāṇakosmī’’ti vadati, ‘‘suttaṃ āharā’’ti vattabbo. Sace āharati, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce āharati, sayaṃ āharitabbaṃ ‘‘dasayime, bhikkhave, ariyāvāsā, yadariyā āvasiṃsu vā āvasanti vā āvasissanti vā’’ti (a. ni. 10.19). Etañhi suttaṃ maggassa vāsabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Tasmā sukathitamevetanti. Imaṃ pana bhagavā sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānanto imesañca diṭṭhigatānaṃ imesañca vipassanāñāṇamaggañāṇānaṃ appavattikkhaṇepi jānāti eva. Tasmāyeva ca ‘‘kāmaṃ sevantaṃyeva jānātī’’tiādi vuttanti.
在解释随眠时,「随眠」是依什么意义而称为随眠的呢?是依「随眠」的意义。什么叫做「随眠」的意义?就是「未被断除的状态」。因为这些烦恼以未被断除的状态,潜伏在每一个有情的心续中,所以称为「随眠」。「随眠」的意思是,得到适当的条件之后,它们就生起。也许会有人这样想:既然「随眠」的意义是指「未被断除的状态」,而如果又说它会生起,这就说不通了,所以,随眠是不会生起的。对此,有这样的回答:「随眠」指的并不是「未被断除的状态」本身,而是以「未被断除」这层意义,来指称那股强而有力的烦恼(thāmagatakilesa)。这种烦恼是与心相应的,有其所缘的对象,依其有因有缘的意义,是有原因的,其性质全然是不善的。它既可以存在于过去,也可以存在于未来,还可以存在于现在,因此说它会「生起」是完全合理的。关于这一点,有如下的依据:首先,就在这部《无碍解道》的「现观论」里,提出了「是否断除现在的烦恼」这个问题后,由于随眠具有现在性,所以回答说「断除强力的随眠」。在《法集论》解释「痴」的章节中,说到:「无明随眠、无明之缠缚、无明之枢纽、愚痴、不善根,在那个时候,这个就是痴。」(《法集论》390)这是在说明痴与不善心一同生起。在《论事》中,所有关于「随眠是无记的、随眠是无因的、随眠是与心不相应的」等论调,全部都被破斥了。在《随眠双论》的七个大品中,有一个「生起品」,其中提到:「当一个人的欲贪随眠生起时,他的嗔恚随眠也生起吗?」等等。因此,之前所说的「随眠是得到适当的条件之后便生起」,依照这些经典为证,是合理的。而所说「与心相应,有其所缘」等,也同样是非常善妙的说法。因为,应当得出这样的结论:所谓随眠,是真实存在的、与心相应的不善法。显示巴利原文
Anusayaniddese anusayāti kenaṭṭhena anusayā? Anusayanaṭṭhena. Ko esa anusayanaṭṭho nāmāti? Appahīnaṭṭho. Ete hi appahīnaṭṭhena tassa tassa santāne anusenti nāma. Tasmā ‘‘anusayā’’ti vuccanti. Anusentīti anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjantīti attho. Athāpi siyā – anusayanaṭṭho nāma appahīnākāro, so ca uppajjatīti vattuṃ na yujjati, tasmā na anusayā uppajjantīti. Tatridaṃ paṭivacanaṃ – na appahīnākāro, anusayoti pana appahīnaṭṭhena thāmagatakileso vuccati. So cittasampayutto sārammaṇo sappaccayaṭṭhena sahetuko ekantākusalo atītopi hoti anāgatopi paccuppannopi, tasmā uppajjatīti vattuṃ yujjatīti. Tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ – idheva tāva abhisamayakathāya (paṭi. ma. 3.21) ‘‘paccuppanne kilese pajahatī’’ti pucchaṃ katvā anusayānaṃ paccuppannabhāvassa atthitāya ‘‘thāmagato anusayaṃ pajahatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ mohassa padabhājane ‘‘avijjānusayo avijjāpariyuṭṭhānaṃ avijjālaṅgī moho akusalamūlaṃ, ayaṃ tasmiṃ samaye moho hotī’’ti (dha. sa. 390) akusalacittena saddhiṃ mohassa uppannabhāvo vutto . Kathāvatthusmiṃ ‘‘anusayā abyākatā anusayā ahetukā anusayā cittavippayuttā’’ti sabbe vādā paṭisedhitā. Anusayayamake sattannaṃ mahāvārānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ uppajjanavāre ‘‘yassa kāmarāgānusayo uppajjati, tassa paṭighānusayo uppajjatī’’tiādi (yama. 2.anusayayamaka.300) vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘anusentīti anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjantī’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ iminā tantippamāṇena yuttanti veditabbaṃ. Yampi ‘‘cittasampayutto sārammaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tampi suvuttameva. Anusayo hi nāmesa parinipphanno cittasampayutto akusaladhammoti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
于“欲贪随眠”等语中,“欲贪”本身由“未被断除”之义而为“随眠”,故称“欲贪随眠”。对其余各词,亦依同一道理类推。此处,“欲贪随眠”是指:在与贪俱行的心中,或以俱生的方式,或以可爱所缘为所缘的方式而生起的贪爱;对余下的欲界法,则唯以它们为所缘而生起。“嗔恚随眠”是指:在与忧俱行的心中,或以俱生的方式,或以不可爱所缘为所缘的方式而生起的嗔怒;对余下的欲界法,则唯以它们为所缘而生起。“慢随眠”是指:在与离邪见但仍有贪俱行的心中,或以俱生的方式,或以所缘为所缘的方式而生起的傲慢;其所缘范围,除苦受外,包括所有余下的欲界法,以及色界、无色界法,唯以它们为所缘而生起。“见随眠”住于四种与邪见相应的心中。“疑随眠”住于与疑俱行的心中。“无明随眠”住于十二种不善心中,或以俱生的方式,或以所缘为所缘的方式而生起。而“见”、“疑”、“无明”这三种,对于余下的三界诸法,亦唯以它们为所缘而生起。显示巴利原文
Kāmarāgānusayotiādīsu kāmarāgo ca so appahīnaṭṭhena anusayo cāti kāmarāgānusayo. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Kāmarāgānusayo cettha lobhasahagatacittesu sahajātavasena ārammaṇavasena ca manāpesu avasesakāmāvacaradhammesu ārammaṇavaseneva uppajjamāno lobho. Paṭighānusayo ca domanassasahagatacittesu sahajātavasena ārammaṇavasena ca amanāpesu avasesakāmāvacaradhammesu ārammaṇavaseneva uppajjamāno doso. Mānānusayo diṭṭhigatavippayuttalobhasahagatacittesu sahajātavasena ārammaṇavasena ca dukkhavedanāvajjesu avasesakāmāvacaradhammesu rūpārūpāvacaradhammesu ca ārammaṇavaseneva uppajjamāno māno. Diṭṭhānusayo catūsu diṭṭhigatasampayuttesu. Vicikicchānusayo vicikicchāsahagate. Avijjānusayo dvādasasu akusalacittesu sahajātavasena ārammaṇavasena ca. Tayopi avasesatebhūmakadhammesu ārammaṇavaseneva uppajjamānā diṭṭhivicikicchāmohā. Bhavarāgānusayo catūsu diṭṭhigatavippayuttesu uppajjamānopi sahajātavasena na vutto, ārammaṇavaseneva pana rūpārūpāvacaradhammesu uppajjamāno lobho vutto.
114 114. 今为指出前所说随眠的潜伏之处,乃言“于世间,凡是可爱之物”等。此处,“于世间,凡是可爱之物”是指:于此世间,凡属可爱之类、本性与实质皆为可爱者。“愉悦之物”是指:凡属愉悦之类、以乐味为立足处、为可意所缘者。即于此可意所缘,众生欲贪随眠得以随眠。意思是,面对如此可意所缘,众生未断的欲贪随眠,便随眠于其中。而此处的“可爱之物、愉悦之物”,特指欲界法。犹如沉入水底之人,其上下左右四方皆为水所包围;同样,众生对可意所缘生起贪爱,是他们习以为常、反复所行之事。对不可意所缘生起嗔恚,也是如此。如是,“即于斯二法”,即是说,即于斯可意与不可意所缘二法。“为无明所追随”是指,无明以所缘的方式与欲贪、嗔恚相应结合,而追随、渗入。此词亦可断读。“与彼一体”是指,与彼无明同时生起,合为一体,故立于同一处。“慢、邪见与疑”是指:九种慢、六十二种邪见,以及依八事而起的疑。显示巴利原文
114. Idāni yathāvuttānaṃ anusayānaṃ anusayanaṭṭhānaṃ dassento yaṃ loketiādimāha. Tattha yaṃ loke piyarūpanti yaṃ imasmiṃ loke piyajātikaṃ piyasabhāvaṃ. Sātarūpanti sātajātikaṃ assādapadaṭṭhānaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ. Ettha sattānaṃ kāmarāgānusayo anusetīti etasmiṃ iṭṭhārammaṇe sattānaṃ appahīnaṭṭhena kāmarāgānusayo anuseti. ‘‘Piyarūpaṃ sātarūpa’’nti ca idha kāmāvacaradhammoyeva adhippeto. Yathā nāma udake nimuggassa heṭṭhā ca upari ca samantā ca udakameva hoti, evameva iṭṭhārammaṇe rāguppatti nāma sattānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇā. Tathā aniṭṭhārammaṇe paṭighuppatti. Iti imesu dvīsu dhammesūti evaṃ imesu dvīsu iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇadhammesu. Avijjānupatitāti kāmarāgapaṭighasampayuttā hutvā ārammaṇakaraṇavasena avijjā anupatitā anugatā. Vicchedaṃ katvāpi pāṭho. Tadekaṭṭhoti tāya avijjāya sahajekaṭṭhavasena ekato ṭhito. Māno ca diṭṭhi ca vicikicchā cāti navavidhamāno, dvāsaṭṭhividhā diṭṭhi, aṭṭhavatthukā vicikicchā, tadekaṭṭho māno ca tadekaṭṭhā diṭṭhi ca tadekaṭṭhā vicikicchā cāti yojanā. Daṭṭhabbāti passitabbā avagantabbā. Tayo ekato katvā bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ. Bhavarāgānusayo panettha kāmarāgānusayeneva saṅgahitoti veditabbo.
在解释“行”时:有十三种思心所为“福行”,十二种为“非福行”,四种为“不动行”。其中,属欲界者为“小地”;余非欲界者,为“大地”。或复,于此三种行中,任何感得微小果报的,即为“小地”;感得巨大果报的,即为“大地”。当如是了知。显示巴利原文
Caritaniddese terasa cetanā puññābhisaṅkhāro. Dvādasa apuññābhisaṅkhāro. Catasso āneñjābhisaṅkhāro. Tattha kāmāvacaro parittabhūmako. Itaro mahābhūmako. Tīsupi vā etesu yo koci appavipāko parittabhūmako, mahāvipāko mahābhūmakoti veditabbo.
115 在「意乐」的解说中:「santi」意为存在。「hīnādhimuttikā」指志向低劣者。「paṇītādhimuttikā」指志向胜妙者。「sevanti」指依止、亲近。「bhajanti」指交往。「payirupāsanti」指反复亲近、交往。如果亲教师与依止师并非持戒者,而身边的学童、同住比丘却是持戒者,这些持戒者也不会去亲近自己的亲教师和依止师,只亲近与自己同类、志趣相投的比丘。如果亲教师与依止师是志趣相投的比丘,而他人与之不相应,那些人也同样不会亲近这样的亲教师和依止师,只亲近与自己相似、志向低劣的人。为了说明这种亲近并非仅是现在如此,过去、未来亦然,故接着说「atītampi addhānaṃ…」等。其中,「atītampi addhānanti」指在过去时,或以绝对相关义用业格表达。其余文句的意思浅显易了。那么,是谁决定了破戒者只亲近破戒者,持戒者只亲近持戒者,无慧者只亲近无慧者,有慧者只亲近有慧者呢?是意乐界(本性倾向)决定的。显示巴利原文
115. Adhimuttiniddese santīti saṃvijjanti. Hīnādhimuttikāti lāmakajjhāsayā. Paṇītādhimuttikāti kalyāṇajjhāsayā. Sevantīti nissayanti allīyanti. Bhajantīti upasaṅkamanti. Payirupāsantīti punappunaṃ upasaṅkamanti. Sace hi ācariyupajjhāyā na sīlavanto honti, antevāsikasaddhivihārikā sīlavanto, te attano ācariyupajjhāyepi na upasaṅkamanti, attano sadise sāruppe bhikkhūyeva upasaṅkamanti. Sacepi ācariyupajjhāyā sāruppā bhikkhū, itare asāruppā, tepi na ācariyupajjhāye upasaṅkamanti, attano sadise hīnādhimuttikeyeva upasaṅkamanti. Evaṃ upasaṅkamanaṃ pana na kevalaṃ etarahiyeva, atītānāgatepīti dassetuṃ atītampi addhānantiādimāha. Tattha atītampi addhānanti atītasmiṃ kāle, accantasaṃyogatthe vā upayogavacanaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Idaṃ pana dussīlānaṃ dussīlasevanameva, sīlavantānaṃ sīlavantasevanameva, duppaññānaṃ duppaññasevanameva, paññavantānaṃ paññavantasevanameva ko niyametīti? Ajjhāsayadhātu niyametīti.
在「能」与「不能」的解说中,应先解说应舍,后解说应取;但依开示的顺序,却先解说了「不能者」。而在开示的偈颂里,由于并列复合词中重音词与弱音词前置的规则,故将‘bhabba’(能)一词置于前。所谓「kammāvaraṇena」,指以五种无间业(业障)。「samannāgatā」指具足。「kilesāvaraṇena」指决定性的邪见(烦恼障)。这两种障因能障碍生天与圣道,故称为障。比丘污行等业亦包含在业障中。「vipākāvaraṇena」指无因的结生。进一步说,由于二因者亦无法证得圣道,所以二因的结生也应视为异熟障。所谓「assaddhā」,指对佛等无有信心。「acchandikā」指没有行善的意愿。郁单越的人便属于这类无善欲者。「duppaññā」指有分慧羸弱的人。即便一个人的有分慧圆满,只要他的有分不能作为生起出世间智的基础,他仍被称为无慧者。所谓「abhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ」,显示巴利原文
Bhabbābhabbaniddese chaḍḍetabbe paṭhamaṃ niddisitvā gahetabbe pacchā niddisituṃ uddesassa uppaṭipāṭiyā paṭhamaṃ abhabbā niddiṭṭhā. Uddese pana dvandasamāse accitassa ca mandakkharassa ca padassa pubbanipātalakkhaṇavasena bhabbasaddo pubbaṃ payutto. Kammāvaraṇenāti pañcavidhena ānantariyakammena. Samannāgatāti samaṅgībhūtā. Kilesāvaraṇenāti niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā. Imāni dve saggamaggānaṃ āvaraṇato āvaraṇāni. Bhikkhunīdūsakādīni kammānipi kammāvaraṇeneva saṅgahitāni. Vipākāvaraṇenāti ahetukapaṭisandhiyā. Yasmā pana duhetukānampi ariyamaggapaṭivedho natthi, tasmā duhetukā paṭisandhipi vipākāvaraṇamevāti veditabbā, assaddhāti buddhādīsu saddhārahitā. Acchandikāti kattukamyatākusalacchandarahitā. Uttarakurukā manussā acchandikaṭṭhānaṃ paviṭṭhā. Duppaññāti bhavaṅgapaññāya parihīnā. Bhavaṅgapaññāya pana paripuṇṇāyapi yassa bhavaṅgaṃ lokuttarassa pādakaṃ na hoti, sopi duppaññoyeva nāma. Abhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattanti kusalesu dhammesu sammattaniyāmasaṅkhātaṃ ariyamaggaṃ okkamituṃ abhabbā. Ariyamaggo hi sammā sabhāvoti sammattaṃ, soyeva anantaraphaladāne, sayameva vā acalabhāvato niyāmo, taṃ okkamituṃ pavisituṃ abhabbā. Na kammāvaraṇenātiādīni vuttavipariyāyeneva veditabbānīti.
「双神变智」解说注释。显示巴利原文
70. Yamakapāṭihīrañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
116 在「双神变智」的解说中,「于弟子们是不共的」(asādhāraṇaṃ sāvakehi):在解说其他不共智时,因为没有用到「其他」(añña)这个词的场合,所以没有说;而这里因为没有「其他」一词,即唯佛独有,所以就说了。「上半身」(uparimakāyato),指从肚脐往上的身体部分。「火堆生起」(aggikkhandho pavattati):以火遍为所缘进入基础禅那,出定后作意“让火焰从上半身升起”,完成预备工作后,就以神变智决意“让火焰从上半身升起”,在决意的同时,火焰便从上半身升起。这里是从「堆聚」的意义而称为「堆」(khandha)。「下半身」(heṭṭhimakāyato),指从肚脐往下的身体部分。「水流生起」(udakadhārā pavattati):以水遍为所缘进入基础禅那,出定后作意“让水流从下半身升起”,完成预备工作后,就以神变智决意“让水流从下半身升起”,在决意的同时,水流便从下半身升起。这两种情况都是依不断绝的方式说「生起」的。在作意和决意之间,会生起两个有分心。因此,火堆和水流才成双成对地出现,两者间的间隔并不明显。而其他人施展神变时,则没有这样的有分心间隔。「东方身」(puratthimakāyato),指面朝的方向。「西方身」(pacchimakāyato),指背朝的方向。「右眼与左眼」(dakkhiṇaakkhito vāmaakkhitoti)等,只是连读的文法,没有别的意思。如果读成「从右鼻孔与左鼻孔」(dakkhiṇanāsikāsotato vāmanāsikāsotato),则是更好的读法。也有略读的版本。所谓「肩峰」(aṃsakūṭato),这里由于向上耸起如同山峰(kūṭa),所以称为「峰」,肩本身就是峰,所以叫「肩峰」。「一一指」(aṅgulaṅgulehi),就是指一根根手指。「指间」(aṅgulantarikāhi),指手指之间的缝隙。「一一毛处生起火堆,一一毛处生起水流」:这两处用重复词,是因为涵盖了一切毛发,说明从每一根毛发都成双成对地生起火堆和水流。「一一毛孔生起火堆,一一毛孔生起水流」,也是这个道理。有些抄本中写作「一一毛生起火堆,一一毛孔生起水流;一一毛孔生起火堆,一一毛生起水流」,这也合理。不过,为了显示神变的极其微细,前一种读法更为优美。显示巴利原文
116. Yamakapāṭihīrañāṇaniddese asādhāraṇaṃ sāvakehīti sesāsādhāraṇañāṇaniddese aññavacanehi okāsābhāvato na vuttaṃ, idha pana aññavacanābhāvato vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Uparimakāyatoti nābhiyā uddhaṃ sarīrato. Aggikkhandho pavattatīti tejokasiṇārammaṇaṃ pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘uparimakāyato aggijālā vuṭṭhātū’’ti āvajjitvā parikammaṃ katvā anantaraṃ abhiññāñāṇena ‘‘uparimakāyato aggijālā vuṭṭhātū’’ti adhiṭṭhite saha adhiṭṭhānā uparimakāyato aggijālā vuṭṭhāti. Sā hi idha rāsaṭṭhena khandhoti vuttā. Heṭṭhimakāyatoti nābhito heṭṭhā sarīrato. Udakadhārā pavattatīti āpokasiṇārammaṇaṃ pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya ‘‘heṭṭhimakāyato udakadhārā vuṭṭhātū’’ti āvajjitvā parikammaṃ katvā anantaraṃ abhiññāñāṇena ‘‘heṭṭhimakāyato udakadhārā vuṭṭhātū’’ti adhiṭṭhite saha adhiṭṭhānā heṭṭhimakāyato udakadhārā vuṭṭhāti. Ubhayatthāpi abbocchedavasena pavattatīti vuttaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānassa āvajjanassa ca antare dve bhavaṅgacittāni vattanti. Tasmāyeva yugalā hutvā aggikkhandhaudakadhārā pavattanti, antaraṃ na paññāyati. Aññesaṃ pana bhavaṅgaparicchedo natthi . Puratthimakāyatoti abhimukhapassato. Pacchimakāyatoti piṭṭhipassato. Dakkhiṇaakkhito vāmaakkhitotiādi samāsapāṭhoyeva, na añño. Dakkhiṇanāsikāsotato vāmanāsikāsotatoti pāṭho sundaro. Rassaṃ katvāpi paṭhanti. Aṃsakūṭatoti ettha abbhuggataṭṭhena kūṭo viyāti kūṭo, aṃsoyeva kūṭo aṃsakūṭo. Aṅgulaṅgulehīti aṅgulīhi aṅgulīhi. Aṅgulantarikāhīti aṅgulīnaṃ antarikāhi. Ekekalomato aggikkhandho pavattati, ekekalomato udakadhārā pavattatīti ubhayatthāpi āmeḍitavacanena sabbalomānaṃ pariyādinnattā ekekalomatova aggikkhandhaudakadhārā yugalā yugalā hutvā pavattantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Lomakūpato lomakūpato aggikkhandho pavattati, lomakūpato lomakūpato udakadhārā pavattatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Kesuci potthakesu ‘‘ekekalomato aggikkhandho pavattati. Lomakūpato lomakūpato udakadhārā pavattati, lomakūpato lomakūpato aggikkhandho pavattati, ekekalomato udakadhārā pavattatī’’ti likhitaṃ. Tampi yujjatiyeva. Pāṭihīrassa atisukhumattadīpanato pana purimapāṭhoyeva sundarataro.
那么,「现说六种颜色」有何关联呢?前文以「上半身」等用语提到了身体的众多部分。由此,依身体部分的关联、语句的关联以及双神变的增上,说明了作为身体部分的光束,依六种颜色成双地生起。依属格关联,必定应补上「光束」(rasmiyo)一词方为完整。「青色」,即如亚麻花色的光束。「黄色」,即如迦尼迦罗花色的光束。「红色」,即如胭脂虫色的光束。「白色」,即如晨星色的光束。「赤色」,即如淡红色的光束。「光辉色」,即具有自然发光性质的光辉色光束。在所提及的五种颜色中,虽然没有单独施设光辉色,但凡是那些闪耀的光芒,就属于光辉色。当如来显现双神变时,仅凭双神变智的力量,从须发与眼睛的青色处便射出青色光束。由于这些光束,天空犹如洒下了安阇那粉,仿佛被亚麻花与青莲花瓣所覆盖,如同展开了琉璃宝扇,好似铺开了青黑色的布。从皮肤与眼睛的黄色处射出黄色光束,由于这些光束,诸方就像倾注着金液,如同铺开了金箔,像显示巴利原文
Idāni channaṃ vaṇṇānanti ko sambandho? Heṭṭhā ‘‘uparimakāyato’’tiādīhi anekehi sarīrāvayavā vuttā. Tena sarīrāvayavasambandho pavattatīti vacanasambandhena ca yamakapāṭihīrādhikārena ca channaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ sarīrāvayavabhūtānaṃ rasmiyo yamakā hutvā pavattantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sāmivacanasambandhena ca avassaṃ ‘‘rasmiyo’’ti pāṭhaseso icchitabboyeva. Nīlānanti umāpupphavaṇṇānaṃ. Pītakānanti kaṇikārapupphavaṇṇānaṃ. Lohitakānanti indagopakavaṇṇānaṃ. Odātānanti osadhitārakavaṇṇānaṃ. Mañjiṭṭhānanti mandarattavaṇṇānaṃ. Pabhassarānanti pabhāsanapakatikānaṃ pabhassaravaṇṇānaṃ. Pabhassaravaṇṇe visuṃ avijjamānepi vuttesu pañcasu vaṇṇesu ye ye pabhā samujjalā, te te pabhassarā. Tathā hi tathāgatassa yamakapāṭihīraṃ karontassa yamakapāṭihīrañāṇabaleneva kesamassūnañceva akkhīnañca nīlaṭṭhānehi nīlarasmiyo nikkhamanti, yāsaṃ vasena gaganatalaṃ añjanacuṇṇasamokiṇṇaṃ viya umāpupphanīluppaladalasañchannaṃ viya vītipatantamaṇitālavaṇṭaṃ viya pasāritamecakapaṭaṃ viya ca hoti. Chavito ceva akkhīnañca pītakaṭṭhānehi pītarasmiyo nikkhamanti, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā suvaṇṇarasanisiñcamānā viya suvaṇṇapaṭapasāritā viya kuṅkumacuṇṇakaṇikārapupphasamparikiṇṇā viya ca virocanti. Maṃsalohitehi ceva akkhīnañca rattaṭṭhānehi lohitarasmiyo nikkhamanti, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā cinapiṭṭhacuṇṇarañjitā viya supakkalākhārasanisiñcamānā viya rattakambalaparikkhittā viya jayasumanapālibhaddakabandhujīvakakusumasamparikiṇṇā viya ca virocanti. Aṭṭhīhi ceva dantehi ca akkhīnañca setaṭṭhānehi odātarasmiyo nikkhamanti, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā rajatakuṭehi āsiñcamānakhīradhārāsamparikiṇṇā viya pasāritarajatapaṭṭavitānā viya vītipatantarajatatālavaṇṭā viya kundakumudasinduvārasumanamallikādikusumasañchannā viya ca virocanti. Hatthatalapādatalādīhi mandarattaṭṭhānehi mañjiṭṭharasmiyo nikkhamanti, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā pavāḷajālaparikkhittā viya rattakuravakakusumasamokiṇṇā viya ca virocanti. Uṇṇānakhādīhi pabhassaraṭṭhānehi pabhassararasmiyo nikkhamanti, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā osadhitārakapuñjapuṇṇā viya vijjupaṭalādiparipuṇṇā viya ca virocanti.
「世尊经行」等文,是为了说明「世尊与化现者作出不同的威仪,这即是双神变」而说的。因为那些化现者的威仪也是成对出现的。既然化现者众多,为何使用单数「化现者」(nimmito)呢?这是为了显示即便化现者众多,每一个化现者也都有不同的威仪。如果用了复数,便好像所有化现者同一时间只有一种威仪;而使用单数,则可知在众多化现者中,每一个都各具不同的威仪,因此以单数来说明。周利槃陀伽长老尚且能化现出一千位各具不同威仪的比丘,世尊于双神变中化现众多化现者,自然更不在话下。除了周利槃陀伽长老,其他弟子无法以单一作意便化现出具有不同威仪、不同形象的化现者。如果不特意指定,化现者只会和施展神通者一模一样。无论站立、坐下,还是说话、沉默,施展神通者做什么,化现者就做什么。若要让他们做出不同的动作、不同的行为,必须分别作意决意:‘这些这般,那些那般’,方能成功。然而如来只需一个作意与决意,便能成功化现出种种差别。同样,化现火堆和水流,以及化现不同颜色时,也应当如此理解。其中,「世尊经行」是指在虚空中或地面上显示巴利原文
Bhagavā caṅkamatītiādi ‘‘bhagavato ca nimmitānañca nānāiriyāpathakaraṇaṃ yamakapāṭihīreneva hotī’’ti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tesañhi nimmitānaṃ iriyāpathā yugalāva hutvā vattanti. Yadi nimmitā bahukā honti, ‘‘nimmito’’tiādi kasmā ekavacanaṃ katanti ce? Nimmitesupi ekekassa nānāiriyāpathabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Bahuvacanena hi vutte sabbepi nimmitā sakiṃ ekekairiyāpathikā viya honti. Ekavacanena pana vutte nimmitesu ekeko nānāiriyāpathikoti ñāyati. Tasmā ekavacananiddeso kato. Cūḷapanthakattheropi tāva nānāiriyāpathikabhikkhūnaṃ sahassaṃ māpesi, kiṃ pana bhagavā yamakapāṭihīre bahū nimmite na karissati. Cūḷapanthakattheraṃ muñcitvā aññesaṃ sāvakānaṃ ekāvajjanena nānāiriyapathikānaṃ nānārūpānañca nimmānaṃ na ijjhati. Aniyametvā hi nimmitā iddhimatā sadisāva honti. Ṭhānanisajjādīsu vā bhāsitatuṇhībhāvādīsu vā yaṃ yaṃ iddhimā karoti, taṃ tadeva karonti, visadisakaraṇaṃ nānākiriyākaraṇañca ‘‘ettakā īdisā hontu, ettakā imaṃ nāma karontū’’ti visuṃ visuṃ āvajjitvā adhiṭṭhānena ijjhati. Tathāgatassa pana ekāvajjanādhiṭṭhāneneva nānappakāranimmānaṃ ijjhati. Evameva aggikkhandhaudakadhārānimmāne ca nānāvaṇṇanimmāne ca veditabbaṃ. Tattha bhagavā caṅkamatīti ākāse vā pathaviyaṃ vā caṅkamati. Nimmitoti iddhiyā māpitabuddharūpaṃ. Tiṭṭhati vātiādīnipi ākāse vā pathaviyaṃ vā. Kappetīti karoti. Bhagavā tiṭṭhatītiādīsupi eseva nayoti.
大悲智解说注释显示巴利原文
71. Mahākaruṇāñāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
117 在「大悲智解说」中,「以种种行相」即指现在所说的八十九种行相。「看见者」:以智眼和佛眼观察的(诸佛)。「进入」:趣入、进入。「燃烧」:就苦相而言,具有逼恼与烧灼的意义,故说为燃烧。因为‘凡是无常的即是苦’,一切行法皆因苦相而受逼恼,且苦本身即是悲悯之根由,所以应知此处先以苦相而说‘燃烧’。至于为贪等所燃烧,下文另有说明。或者,「燃烧」也可以就指被贪等所燃烧,而下文所说‘无有他人能令其熄灭’,正是着眼于此义而再说。「世间共住」:五蕴会坏灭,故称为‘世间’;有情以渴爱与邪见在此共住,故称为‘共住’;世间即是共住,因此合称‘世间共住’。由于着眼于苦蕴的相续,并随顺世间称呼有情的言说方式,结合世间共住之义,故有情群体亦称为世间共住,且此群体始终与诸蕴同在。「勤奋」:即由于在显示巴利原文
117. Mahākaruṇāñāṇaniddese bahukehi ākārehīti idāni vuccamānehi ekūnanavutiyā pakārehi. Passantānanti ñāṇacakkhunā ca buddhacakkhunā ca olokentānaṃ. Okkamatīti otarati pavisati. Ādittoti dukkhalakkhaṇavasena pīḷāyogato santāpanaṭṭhena ādīpito. ‘‘Yadaniccaṃ, taṃ dukkha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) vuttattā sabbasaṅkhatassa ceva dukkhalakkhaṇavasena pīḷitattā dukkhassa ca karuṇāya mūlabhūtattā paṭhamaṃ dukkhalakkhaṇavasena ‘‘āditto’’ti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Rāgādīhi ādittataṃ pana upari vakkhati. Atha vā ādittoti rāgādīhiyeva āditto. Upari pana ‘‘tassa natthañño koci nibbāpetā’’ti atthāpekkhanavasena puna vuttanti veditabbaṃ . Lokasannivāsoti pañcakkhandhā lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko, taṇhādiṭṭhivasena sannivasanti ettha sattāti sannivāso, lokova sannivāso lokasannivāso. Dukkhitaṃ khandhasantānaṃ upādāya sattavohārasabbhāvato lokasannivāsayogato sattasamūhopi lokasannivāso. Sopi ca sahakhandhakoyeva. Uyyuttoti anekesu kiccesu niccabyāpāratāya katayogo kataussāho, satatakiccesu saussukkoti attho. Ghaṭṭanayuttoti vā uyyutto. Payātoti pabbateyyā nadī viya anavaṭṭhitagamanena maraṇāya yātuṃ āraddho. Kummaggappaṭipannoti kucchitaṃ micchāmaggaṃ paṭipanno. Upari pana ‘‘vipathapakkhando’’ti nānāpadehi visesetvā vuttaṃ.
「被带近」(upanīyati),就是被老衰带去、被拖向死亡。因为老被称为‘寿命的破坏者’。「不坚固」(addhuvo),就是不坚实,不能始终如一。正因为不坚固,所以才会被带近——这句话是说明前一句的原因。通过这个说明了有因的老苦。智者看到这种老苦,即使他自己还没有进入老的衰退,也会选择出家。「无庇护」(atāṇo),指缺少能够保护和守护的力量,意思是没有守护者。「无皈依处」(anabhissaro),指缺少能够投靠并给予安慰的力量,或者指没有同伴。正因为无皈依处,所以才无庇护——这句话是说明前一句的原因。通过这个说明了有因的爱别离苦。智者看到这种爱别离苦,即使他还没有经历亲属的衰退,也会选择出家。「无所有」(assako),指没有属于自己的财物。‘舍弃一切而离去’——意识到所谓自己的财物,其实就是一切,最后都必须被世间所迫,舍弃一切而离去。正因为必须舍弃一切而离去,所以才无所有——这句话是说明前一句的原因。通过这个说明了有因的死苦。智者看到这种死苦,即使他还没有遭遇财富的衰退,也会选择出家。如果问:别处说‘众生以业为所有’,而这里以及《赖吒和罗经》中又说‘世间无所有’,这怎么协调呢?回答是:着眼在‘必须舍弃离去’这点而说‘无所有’,但业并不是可以舍弃离去的。因此说‘以业为所有’。而且就在《赖吒和罗经》里也这样说:‘你将随自己的业而去。’「不圆满」(ūno),指欠缺圆满。「不满足」(atitto),就是哪怕不断增求也不觉得足够。这是说明不圆满的原因。「渴爱之奴」(taṇhādāso),是因为完全处在渴爱的控制下,变成了渴爱的奴仆。这是说明不满足的原因。通过这些,借着说明渴爱之病,指出了有因的病苦。智者看到这种病苦,即使他还没有受病的衰退,也会选择出家。「无可依怙」(atāyano),是说连子女等也提供不了保护,因此没有庇护、没有守护,或者说不可能获得安稳。「无依止」(aleṇo),指没有资格去依附、去依靠,而且对已经依附的人来说,它也不发挥依止的作用。「无避难所」(asaraṇo),指对于依靠它的人,不能成为恐惧中的依归,不能消除恐惧。「成为无避难所」(asaraṇībhūto),是指在它之前的生起中,本身就根本没有这样的可依者,意思是在它生起的那一刹那,就已经是无避难所了。显示巴利原文
Upanīyatīti jarāvasena maraṇāya upanīyati harīyati. Jarā hi ‘‘āyuno saṃhānī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.2) vuttā. Addhuvoti na thiro, sadā tatheva na hoti. Yasmā addhuvo, tasmā upanīyatīti purimassa kāraṇavacanametaṃ. Etena sakāraṇaṃ jarādukkhaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ jarādukkhaṃ disvā jarāpārijuññarahitāpi viññū pabbajanti. Atāṇoti tāyituṃ rakkhituṃ samatthena rahito, anārakkhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Anabhissaroti abhisaritvā abhigantvā byāharaṇena assāsetuṃ samatthena rahito, asahāyoti vā attho. Yasmā anabhissaro, tasmā atāṇoti purimassa kāraṇavacanametaṃ. Etena sakāraṇaṃ piyavippayogadukkhaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ piyavippayogadukkhaṃ disvā ñātipārijuññarahitāpi viññū pabbajanti. Assakoti sakabhaṇḍarahito. Sabbaṃ pahāya gamanīyanti sakabhaṇḍanti sallakkhitaṃ sabbaṃ pahāya lokena gantabbaṃ. Yasmā sabbaṃ pahāya gamanīyaṃ, tasmā assakoti purimassa kāraṇavacanametaṃ. Etena sakāraṇaṃ maraṇadukkhaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ disvā bhogapārijuññarahitāpi viññū pabbajanti. Aññattha ‘‘kammassakā māṇavasattā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.289) vuttaṃ, idha ca raṭṭhapālasutte ca ‘‘assako loko’’ti (ma. ni. 2.305) vuttaṃ, taṃ kathaṃ yujjatīti ce? Pahāya gamanīyaṃ sandhāya ‘‘assako’’ti vuttaṃ, kammaṃ pana na pahāya gamanīyaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘kammassakā’’ti vuttaṃ. Raṭṭhapālasutteyeva ca evametaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tvaṃ pana yathākammaṃ gamissasī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.306). Ūnoti pāripūrirahito. Atittoti bhiyyo bhiyyo patthanāyapi na suhito . Idaṃ ūnabhāvassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Taṇhādāsoti taṇhāya vase vattanato taṇhāya dāsabhūto. Idaṃ atittabhāvassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Etena icchārogāpadesena sakāraṇaṃ byādhidukkhaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ byādhidukkhaṃ disvā byādhipārijuññarahitāpi viññū pabbajanti. Atāyanoti puttādīhipi tāyanassa abhāvato atāyano anārakkho, alabbhaneyyakhemo vā. Aleṇoti allīyituṃ nissituṃ anaraho allīnānampi ca leṇakiccākārako. Asaraṇoti nissitānaṃ na bhayasārako na bhayavināsako. Asaraṇībhūtoti pure uppattiyā attano abhāveneva asaraṇo, uppattisamakālameva asaraṇībhūtoti attho.
「掉举者」(uddhato):掉举于一切不善法中皆会生起,且众生相续中又不善法频频现起,故具足不善的世间便被此掉举所扰动。「未止息者」(avūpasanto):由于与具有未止息特征的掉举相合,所以未得止息,犹如受惊的鹿。在「世间被带近」等四处以及「世间掉举」这五处,「世间」一词是指五蕴世间,其余地方则指「世间共住」。两种情形指的都是世间。「伴刺者」(sasallo):与名为「刺」的贪等诸刺共住,因为这些刺有逼迫性、内在刺痛且难以拔除,故称为刺。「被刺伤者」(viddho):鹿等动物只是偶尔被他人刺伤,但这个世间却恒常被自己刺伤。「被种种刺」(puthusallehi):就是被所说的七种刺——贪刺、嗔刺、痴刺、慢刺、恶见刺、烦恼刺、恶行刺所刺伤。「其」(tassa):指那个共住的世间。「拔除他们刺者」(sallānaṃ uddhatā):即从有情相续中拔除那些刺的人。「除我之外」(aññatra mayā):意思是把我排除在外。即使世尊的弟子们显示巴利原文
Uddhatoti sabbākusalesu uddhaccassa uppajjanato sattasantāne ca akusaluppattibāhullato akusalasamaṅgīloko tena uddhaccena uddhato. Avūpasantoti avūpasamanalakkhaṇassa uddhaccasseva yogena avūpasanto bhantamigapaṭibhāgo. ‘‘Upanīyati loko’’tiādīsu catūsu ca ‘‘uddhato loko’’ti ca pañcasu ṭhānesu lokoti āgataṃ, sesesu lokasannivāsoti. Ubhayathāpi lokoyeva. Sasalloti pīḷājanakatāya antotudanatāya dunnīharaṇīyatāya ca sallāti saṅkhaṃ gatehi rāgādīhi sallehi sahavattanako. Viddhoti migādayo kadāci parehi viddhā honti, ayaṃ pana loko niccaṃ attanāva viddho. Puthusallehīti ‘‘satta sallāni – rāgasallaṃ, dosasallaṃ, mohasallaṃ, mānasallaṃ, diṭṭhisallaṃ, kilesasallaṃ, duccaritasalla’’nti (mahāni. 174) vuttehi sattahi sallehi. Tassāti tassa lokasannivāsassa. Sallānaṃ uddhatāti tesaṃ sallānaṃ sattasantānato uddharitā puggalo. Aññatra mayāti maṃ ṭhapetvā. Yepi bhagavato sāvakā sallāni uddharanti, tesaṃ bhagavato vacaneneva uddharaṇato bhagavāva uddharati nāma. Avijjandhakārāvaraṇoti avijjā eva sabhāvadassanacchādanena andhaṃ viya karotīti avijjandhakāro, sova sabhāvāvagamananivāraṇena āvaraṇaṃ etassāti avijjandhakārāvaraṇo. Kilesapañjarapakkhittoti kilesā eva kusalagamanasannirujjhanaṭṭhena pañjaroti kilesapañjaro, avijjāpabhave kilesapañjare pakkhitto pātito. Ālokaṃ dassetāti paññālokaṃ dassanasīlo, paññālokassa dassetāti vā attho. Avijjāgatoti avijjaṃ gato paviṭṭho. Na kevalaṃ avijjāya āvaraṇamattameva, atha kho gahanagato viya avijjākosassa anto paviṭṭhoti purimato viseso. Aṇḍabhūtotiādayo ca visesāyeva. Aṇḍabhūtoti aṇḍe bhūto nibbatto. Yathā hi aṇḍe nibbattā ekacce sattā ‘‘aṇḍabhūtā’’ti vuccanti, evamayaṃ loko avijjaṇḍakose nibbattattā ‘‘aṇḍabhūto’’ti vuccati. Pariyonaddhoti tena avijjaṇḍakosena samantato onaddho baddho veṭhito.
「成线团状」(tantākulakajāto):即如同乱线一般。犹如被老鼠咬断、被织工随意放置的线,四处纠结,难以分辨哪是头哪是尾、哪端对哪端。同样,众生在缘起道理上跌跌撞撞,迷乱困惑,无法将缘起理清。对于线团,若靠个人努力,尚有办法理清;然而除了两位菩萨之外,任何众生单凭自力,都无法理清缘起。又如同那些乱线,加上酸浆被梭子拍打,各处结成线团、打结;同样,这个世间于诸缘上出了差错,无力理清缘起,便依六十二种恶见而如同线团、结扣一般。凡是执持恶见者,皆无法理清缘起。「成结扣状」(kulāgaṇṭhikajāto):即如同结扣。结扣指织工的浆线。也有说:'Kulā 是一种小鸟,它的巢叫 Kulāvaka'。这两种说法都可按前文方式理解:混乱得难以分辨哪是头哪是尾、哪端接哪端。「成蒙草苇草状」(muñjapabbajabhūto):即变得像蒙草和苇草一样。如同那些草被反复捶打,等变旧后散落于某处,想要拿起说'这是头,这是尾',把显示巴利原文
Tantākulakajātoti tantaṃ viya ākulabhūto. Yathā nāma dunnikkhittaṃ mūsikacchinnaṃ pesakārānaṃ tantaṃ tahiṃ tahiṃ ākulaṃ hoti, idaṃ aggaṃ idaṃ mūlanti aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaraṃ hoti, evameva sattā paccayākāre khalitā ākulā byākulā honti, na sakkonti paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ. Tattha tantaṃ paccattapurisakāre ṭhatvā sakkāpi bhaveyya ujuṃ kātuṃ, ṭhapetvā pana dve bodhisatte añño satto attano dhammatāya paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Yathā pana ākulaṃ tantaṃ kañjikaṃ datvā kocchena pahaṭaṃ tattha tattha kulakajātaṃ hoti gaṇṭhibaddhaṃ, evamayaṃ loko paccayesu pakkhalitvā paccaye ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkonto dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatavasena kulakajāto hoti gaṇṭhibaddho. Ye hi keci diṭṭhiyo nissitā, sabbe te paccayaṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ na sakkontiyeva. Kulāgaṇṭhikajātoti kulāgaṇṭhikaṃ viya bhūto. Kulāgaṇṭhikaṃ vuccati pesakārakañjikasuttaṃ. ‘‘Kulā nāma sakuṇikā, tassā kulāvako’’tipi eke. Yathā tadubhayampi ākulaṃ aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaranti purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Muñjapabbajabhūtoti muñjatiṇaṃ viya pabbajatiṇaṃ viya ca bhūto muñjatiṇapabbajatiṇasadiso jāto. Yathā tāni tiṇāni koṭṭetvā koṭṭetvā katarajju jiṇṇakāle katthaci patitaṃ gahetvā tesaṃ tiṇānaṃ ‘‘idaṃ aggaṃ idaṃ mūla’’nti aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaraṃ, tampi paccattapurisakāre ṭhatvā sakkā bhaveyya ujuṃ kātuṃ, ṭhapetvā pana dve bodhisatte añño satto attano dhammatāya paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Evamayaṃ loko paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkonto dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatavasena gaṇṭhijāto hutvā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ saṃsāraṃ nātivattati.
其中,「恶趣」(apāyo)指地狱、畜生趣、饿鬼界、阿修罗众。由於没有所谓增长的安乐,故称恶趣。又因为它是苦的去处,所以称为「苦处」(duggati)。由于从安乐聚集之处堕落,所以称为「堕落」(vinipāto)。而另一个——显示巴利原文
Tattha apāyoti nirayo tiracchānayoni pettivisayo asurakāyo. Sabbepi hi te vaḍḍhisaṅkhātassa āyassa abhāvato ‘‘apāyo’’ti vuccanti. Tathā dukkhassa gatibhāvato duggati. Sukhasamussayato vinipatitattā vinipāto. Itaro pana –
五蕴、界、处的相续,
它们相续不断流转,这便称为轮回。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccati’’.
这一切,他皆无法超越、无法跨越。就这样,从死至结生,又从结生至死,如此一再地执取死与结生,在三有、四生、五趣、七识住、九有情居中,犹如大海中被风抛掷的船只,又如套着轭具的牛,只是不停地流转。所谓“被无明毒垢所涂”:无明本身能产生不善、毁坏善命,故称为“无明毒”;又因为它能染污相续,故称为“毒垢”。被这种由随眠、缠缚、恶行所构成的毒垢深深涂抹、遍染,便称为“被无明毒垢所涂”。所谓“成为烦恼淤泥者”:以无明等为根本的诸烦恼,以沉没的含义而成为泥泞、成为淤泥,这便是“烦恼淤泥”;具有这些烦恼淤泥的人,便称为“烦恼淤泥者”。所谓“被贪嗔痴之结所结缚”:贪、嗔、痴,即贪欲、嗔恚、无明,它们对于色等所缘,以或下或上的方式反复生起。由于具有缠缚的含义,犹如竹林等的枝条网络被称为“结”,它们也因此被称为“结”。被那贪嗔痴之结所结缚,就像竹子等被竹结等所缠绕一样,意思是说,这个世间被那种结所缠绕、捆缚、纠结在一起。所谓“能解结者”,是指能够解开、断除、击碎这已经纠结在一起的结缚之人。显示巴利原文
Taṃ sabbampi nātivattati nātikkamati. Atha kho cutito paṭisandhiṃ, paṭisandhito cutinti evaṃ punappunaṃ cutipaṭisandhiyo gaṇhamāno tīsu bhavesu catūsu yonīsu pañcasu gatīsu sattasu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu navasu sattāvāsesu mahāsamudde vātukkhittanāvā viya yantagoṇo viya ca paribbhamatiyeva. Avijjāvisadosasallittoti avijjāyeva akusaluppādanena kusalajīvitanāsanato visanti avijjāvisaṃ, tadeva santānadūsanato avijjāvisadoso, tena anusayapariyuṭṭhānaduccaritabhūtena bhusaṃ litto makkhitoti avijjāvisadosasallitto. Kilesakalalībhūtoti avijjādimūlakā kilesā eva osīdanaṭṭhena kalalaṃ kaddamoti kilesakalalaṃ, tadassa atthīti kilesakalalī, evaṃbhūto. Rāgadosamohajaṭājaṭitoti lobhapaṭighāvijjāsaṅkhātā rāgadosamohā eva rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu heṭṭhupariyavasena punappunaṃ uppajjanato saṃsibbanaṭṭhena veḷugumbādīnaṃ sākhājālasaṅkhātā jaṭā viyāti jaṭā, tāya rāgadosamohajaṭāya jaṭito. Yathā nāma veḷujaṭādīhi veḷuādayo, evaṃ tāya jaṭāya ayaṃ loko jaṭito vinaddho saṃsibbitoti attho. Jaṭaṃ vijaṭetāti imaṃ evaṃ tedhātukaṃ lokaṃ jaṭetvā ṭhitaṃ jaṭaṃ vijaṭetā saṃchinditā sampadālayitā.
“被贪爱之幔所罩”:贪爱以其无间流转而具有紧合之义,故称为“幔”,即贪爱之幔;被那贪爱之幔所套入、所进入、所纳入,故称被贪爱之幔所罩。“被贪爱之网所覆”:贪爱一如前说,以缠缚之义而称为“网”,即贪爱之网;被那贪爱之网覆盖、周遍遮蔽、缠绕,故称被贪爱之网所覆。“被贪爱之流所漂”:贪爱以其在轮回中具有牵拉之义,故称为“流”,即贪爱之流;被那贪爱之流漂走、牵拉,故称被贪爱之流所漂。“被贪爱之结所结”:贪爱因其将世间结缚、系缚于轮转之中,故称为“结”,即贪爱之结;被那贪爱之结所结缚、捆绑,故称被贪爱之结所结。“被贪爱之随眠所随逐”:贪爱以随眠之义而称为“随眠”,即贪爱之随眠;被那贪爱之随眠所追随、跟随,并被其增强势力,故称被贪爱之随眠所随逐。“被贪爱之热恼所烧恼”:贪爱在现起之时及产生果报之时,能令世间热恼,故称为“热恼”;被那贪爱之热恼所烧恼、使令热恼,故称被贪爱之热恼所烧恼。“被贪爱之灼热所遍烧”:贪爱在其显示巴利原文
Taṇhāsaṅghāṭapaṭimukkoti taṇhā eva abbocchinnaṃ pavattito saṅghaṭitaṭṭhena saṅghāṭoti taṇhāsaṅghāṭo, tasmiṃ taṇhāsaṅghāṭe paṭimukko anupaviṭṭho antogatoti taṇhāsaṅghāṭapaṭimukko. Taṇhājālena otthaṭoti taṇhā eva pubbe vuttanayena saṃsibbanaṭṭhena jālanti taṇhājālaṃ, tena taṇhājālena otthaṭo samantato chādito paliveṭhito. Taṇhāsotena vuyhatīti taṇhā eva saṃsāre ākaḍḍhanaṭṭhena sototi taṇhāsoto, tena taṇhāsotena vuyhati ākaḍḍhīyati. Taṇhāsaññojanena saññuttoti taṇhā eva lokaṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ saṃyojanato bandhanato saṃyojananti taṇhāsaṃyojanaṃ, tena taṇhāsaṃyojanena saññutto baddho. Taṇhānusayena anusaṭoti taṇhā eva anusayanaṭṭhena anusayoti taṇhānusayo, tena taṇhānusayena anusaṭo anugato thāmagato. Taṇhāsantāpena santappatīti taṇhā eva pavattikāle phalakāle ca lokaṃ santāpetīti santāpo, tena taṇhāsantāpena santappati santāpīyati. Taṇhāpariḷāhena pariḍayhatīti taṇhā eva balavabhūtā pavattikāle phalakāle ca samantato dahanaṭṭhena mahāpariḷāhoti taṇhāpariḷāho, tena taṇhāpariḷāhena pariḍayhati samantato ḍahīyati. Diṭṭhisaṅghāṭādayo imināva nayena yojetabbā.
“随入”:指已经进入。“随逐”:指被追随而奔走。“被征服”:指被逼迫。“被击打”:指迎面遭受猛烈打击、当面被重击。“住立于苦”:指以将苦视为乐的颠倒想,住立于苦的五取蕴中,深深执取、乐着。显示巴利原文
Anugatoti anupaviṭṭho. Anusaṭoti anudhāvito. Abhibhūtoti pīḷito. Abbhāhatoti abhiāhato abhimukhaṃ bhusaṃ pahato. Dukkhe patiṭṭhitoti dukkhe khandhapañcake sukhavipallāsena patiṭṭhito abhiniviṭṭho.
“被贪爱所绊住”:即被贪爱超越、束缚。犹如眼睛被名为贪爱的绳子穿过,绊在名为色尘的象桩上;耳等诸根亦被名为贪爱的绳子穿过,绊在名为声尘等的象桩上。具足这些诸根的人,此世间亦同样称为被绊住。“被老死之墙所围”:即被那具有不可逾越之义、如同围墙般的老死所包围。“被死魔套索所围”:即被那具有难以脱离之义、如同套索般的死亡所束缚。“被大结缚所缚”:因结缚坚固、难以切断,故被这些强大的结缚所捆绑。“以贪结缚”:“贪”本身即能结缚,不令从轮回中出离,故称“贪结缚”;为这种贪结缚所绑。对其余结缚的道理也是如此。“以烦恼结缚”:即被前面所说的其余烦恼所结缚。“以恶行结缚”:即被三种恶行所结缚。然而,善行既是结缚解脱之因,亦为结缚解脱之体,故不应将善行执取为结缚。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāya uḍḍitoti taṇhāya ullaṅghito. Cakkhu hi taṇhārajjunā āvunitvā rūpanāgadante uḍḍitaṃ, sotādīni taṇhārajjunā āvunitvā saddādināgadantesu uḍḍitāni. Taṃsamaṅgīlokopi uḍḍitoyeva nāma. Jarāpākāraparikkhittoti anatikkamanīyaṭṭhena pākārabhūtāya jarāya parivārito. Maccupāsena parikkhittoti dummocanīyaṭṭhena pāsabhūtena maraṇena baddho. Mahābandhanabaddhoti daḷhattā ducchedattā ca mahantehi bandhanehi baddho. Rāgabandhanenāti rāgo eva bandhati saṃsārato calituṃ na detīti rāgabandhanaṃ. Tena rāgabandhanena. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Kilesabandhanenāti vuttāvasesena kilesabandhanena. Duccaritabandhanenāti tividhena. Sucaritaṃ pana bandhanamokkhassa hetubhūtaṃ bandhanamokkhabhūtañca atthi. Tasmā taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.
“能解缚者”:指能解除彼之束缚的人。也有读作“从缚中能解者”,意为从束缚中能解脱彼人。“已入大迫窄者”:因善行运转的逼迫,而进入名为大迫窄的、由贪嗔痴慢见烦恼恶行所构成的密林。“能示现空旷处者”:指能示现世间与出世间定慧空旷处的人。“为大障碍所障”:指被巨大的遮止所覆盖,或被浓重的胶着所染污。所谓障碍,即贪等七种。另有说法:“贪爱与恶见是障碍。”“能断障碍者”:指能断除那障碍的人。“于大悬崖”:指于五趣的悬崖中,或于生老死的悬崖中。这一切皆因难以越渡而称为悬崖。“从悬崖拔出者”:指能从彼悬崖中救拔出来的人。“已入大旷野者”:指已进入生老病死愁悲苦忧恼旷野的人。这一切皆因难以越渡而称为旷野。“能度旷野者”:指能令人渡过那旷野的人。也有读作“能从旷野度脱者”。“已入大轮回者”:指已进入无间相续的蕴续之中。“能解脱轮回者”:指能从轮回中解脱出来的人。也有读作“能令解脱轮回者”。“于大险难”:指于轮回的险难中。轮回本身因难行的含义而称为险难。“普遍流转”:指重重退转。显示巴利原文
Bandhanaṃmocetāti tassa bandhanaṃ mocetā. Bandhanā mocetātipi pāṭho, bandhanato taṃ mocetāti attho. Mahāsambādhappaṭipannoti kusalasañcārapīḷanena mahāsambādhasaṅkhātaṃ rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhikilesaduccaritagahanaṃ paṭipanno. Okāsaṃ dassetāti lokiyalokuttarasamādhipaññāokāsaṃ dassetā. Mahāpalibodhena palibuddhoti mahānivāraṇena nivuto. Mahālepena vā litto. Palibodhoti ca rāgādisattavidho eva. ‘‘Taṇhādiṭṭhipalibodho’’ti eke. Palibodhaṃ chetāti taṃ palibodhaṃ chinditā. Mahāpapāteti pañcagatipapāte, jātijarāmaraṇapapāte vā. Taṃ sabbampi duruttaraṇaṭṭhena papāto. Papātā uddhatāti tamhā papātato uddharitā. Mahākantārappaṭipannoti jātijarābyādhimaraṇasokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsakantāraṃ paṭipanno. Sabbampi taṃ duratikkamanaṭṭhena kantāro, taṃ kantāraṃ tāretā. Kantārā tāretāti vā pāṭho. Mahāsaṃsārappaṭipannoti abbocchinnaṃ khandhasantānaṃ paṭipanno. Saṃsārā mocetāti saṃsārato mocetā. Saṃsāraṃ mocetāti vā pāṭho. Mahāviduggeti saṃsāravidugge. Saṃsāroyeva hi duggamanaṭṭhena viduggo. Samparivattatīti bhusaṃ nivattitvā carati. Mahāpalipeti mahante kāmakaddame. Kāmo hi osīdanaṭṭhena palipo. Palipannoti laggo. Mahāpalipapalipannotipi pāṭho.
“被击打”:指被一切灾祸所击打。“被贪火”:贪等本身因燃烧的含义而称为火,故为彼贪火所烧。对其余诸者,亦应以此类推。“被抬走”:指被取着而带走,即被出生取着后,带向衰老等灾祸。而此处的一个 ka 音节,应视为表悲悯之意。“恒常无救护者”:指没有微少的救护者,恒常地被逼恼。“受鞭挞者”:指受到国王等惩罚的人。“作彼罪者”:指盗贼。“为过恶之缚所缚”:指被贪等过恶的束缚所捆绑。“现前于屠杀场者”:指已来到死刑执行之处站立的人。有人能从束缚中解脱,也有读作“有人能解缚”。“无依”:指没有依怙、没有主宰的人,或者自己不是依怙、不是主宰,故称无依;也有“无救护”的意思。“到达至极穷困者”:因无力阻挡衰老等,而达到了极其悲惨的状态。“能救护者”:指能守护的人;也有读作“救护者”,此读亦佳。“被苦所撞击者”:指被生苦等无量诸苦所撞击、所极度伤害、所极度动摇。“长时受逼恼者”:指正被诸苦在漫长时间里逼恼、折磨的人。“贪婪者”:指因贪欲而变得贪婪,或被名为贪欲的身结所系缚的人。“常时渴求者”:想要喝、想要显示巴利原文
Abbhāhatoti sabbopaddavehi abbhāhato. Rāgaggināti rāgādayoyeva anudahanaṭṭhena aggi, tena rāgagginā. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Unnītakoti uggahetvā nīto, jātiyā uggahetvā jarādiupaddavāya nītoti attho. Ka-kāro panettha anukampāya daṭṭhabbo. Haññati niccamatāṇoti parittāyakena rahito satataṃ pīḷīyati. Pattadaṇḍoti rājādīhi laddhaāṇo. Takkaroti coro. Vajjabandhanabaddhoti rāgādivajjabandhanehi baddho. Āghātanapaccupaṭṭhitoti maraṇadhammagaṇṭhikaṭṭhānaṃ upecca ṭhito. Koci bandhanā mocetā. Koci bandhanaṃ mocetātipi pāṭho. Anāthoti natthi etassa nātho issaro, sayaṃ vā na nātho na issaroti anātho, asaraṇoti vā attho. Paramakāpaññappattoti jarādipaṭibāhane appahutāya atīva kapaṇabhāvaṃ patto. Tāyetāti rakkhitā. Tāyitāti vā pāṭho sundaro . Dukkhābhitunnoti jātidukkhādīhi anekehi dukkhehi abhitunno atibyādhito atikampito ca. Cirarattaṃ pīḷitoti dukkheheva dīghamaddhānaṃ pīḷito ghaṭṭito. Gadhitoti gedhena giddho, abhijjhākāyaganthena vā ganthito. Niccaṃ pipāsitoti pātuṃ bhuñjituṃ icchā pipāsā, sā taṇhā eva, taṇhāpipāsāya nirantaraṃ pipāsito.
“盲者”:因缺少了以能见为含义而被称为“眼”的智慧,故为盲者。智慧能见诸法之真实面貌。“无眼者”:然而彼盲并非后来才产生,而是本性即无眼,此言正是为了简别彼盲的性质。“坏目者”:因缺少了以能引导为含义而被称为“目”的智慧,故为坏目之人。之所以称为“目”,是因它能引导此身体,显示平坦与不平坦之处。以智慧,能引导人趋向善趣或恶趣。为了显示因坏目的缘故而无有引导者,故又说“无向导”,即无目之意。这是说,他也没有其他的引导者。“堕于邪道者”:邪道指颠倒、不正之道;踏上了、进入了、走上了彼邪道的人,就是“堕于邪道者”,意为行于名为邪道的邪见。“于正道失途者”:指在那正确的、笔直的道路——也就是中道上失败、偏离的人。“能引入圣道者”:指能引导人进入、令人踏上彼圣洁八支道的人。“入于大暴流者”:那些存在于轮回中的事物,能令彼人沉没、下陷,故称为暴流;较通常所说暴流更为强大者,则为大暴流。此大暴流分为四类:欲暴流、有暴流、见暴流、无明暴流。显示巴利原文
Andhoti dassanaṭṭhena cakkhūti saṅkhaṃ gatāya paññāya abhāvato kāṇo. Paññā hi dhammasabhāvaṃ passati. Acakkhukoti taṃ pana andhattaṃ na pacchā sambhūtaṃ, pakatiyā eva avijjamānacakkhukoti tameva andhattaṃ viseseti. Hatanettoti nayanaṭṭhena nettanti saṅkhaṃ gatāya paññāya abhāvatoyeva vinaṭṭhanettako. Samavisamaṃ dassentaṃ attabhāvaṃ netīti nettanti hi vuttaṃ. Paññāya sugatiñca agatiñca nayati. Hatanettattāyevassa netuabhāvaṃ dassento apariṇāyakoti āha, avijjamānanettakoti attho. Aññopissa netā na vijjatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vipathapakkhandoti viparīto, visamo vā patho vipatho, taṃ vipathaṃ pakkhando paviṭṭho paṭipannoti vipathapakkhando, micchāpathasaṅkhātaṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ paṭipannoti attho. Añjasāparaddhoti añjase ujumaggasmiṃ majjhimapaṭipadāya aparaddho viraddho. Ariyapathaṃ ānetāti ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ upanetā paṭipādayitā. Mahoghapakkhandoti yassa saṃvijjanti, taṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ ohananti osīdāpentīti oghā, pakatioghato mahantā oghāti mahoghā. Te kāmogho bhavogho diṭṭhogho avijjoghoti catuppabhedā. Te mahoghe pakkhando paviṭṭhoti mahoghapakkhando, saṃsārasaṅkhātaṃ mahoghaṃ vā pakkhandoti.
118 现在解说「一增」之法。其中,「以两种恶见所缠」:指以常见和断见。在这里,见本身就是恶见,就像「粪聚、尿聚」这一类说法一样。或者,因为并没有实在的「可达之处」,见就仅仅是已到达之物,故称恶见;又因这种见解包含在六十二种邪见之中,也称恶见。实际上,六十二种邪见也不外乎就是常见和断见。因此,为了把一切见都简要地概括在内,才说「以两种恶见」。「所缠」:指已到达缠缚的状态、已现行的状态,意思是,在不给善行生起之机的情况下,盘踞了善行的活动范围。对此,世尊曾这样说过:「比丘们,被两种恶见所缠缚的天与人,有的停滞退缩,有的奔逸过头;而有眼者则能看见……」等等。显示巴利原文
118. Idāni ekuttarikanayo. Tattha dvīhi diṭṭhigatehīti sassatucchedadiṭṭhīhi. Tattha diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigataṃ ‘‘gūthagataṃ muttagata’’ntiādīni (a. ni. 9.11) viya. Gantabbābhāvato vā diṭṭhiyā gatamattamevetanti diṭṭhigataṃ, diṭṭhīsu gataṃ idaṃ dassanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiantogadhattātipi diṭṭhigataṃ. Dvāsaṭṭhitesaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyopi hi sassatadiṭṭhi ucchedadiṭṭhīti dveva diṭṭhiyo honti. Tasmā saṅkhepena sabbā diṭṭhiyo anto karonto ‘‘dvīhi diṭṭhigatehī’’ti vuttaṃ . Pariyuṭṭhitoti pariyuṭṭhānaṃ patto samudācāraṃ patto, uppajjituṃ appadānena kusalacārassa gahaṇaṃ pattoti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘dvīhi, bhikkhave, diṭṭhigatehi pariyuṭṭhitā devamanussā olīyanti eke, atidhāvanti eke, cakkhumanto ca passantī’’tiādi (itivu. 49).
「三种恶行」指三种身恶行、四种语恶行、三种意恶行。「邪行者」意思是颠倒而行,即错误而行。「以轭连结」:这些轭把有情连结在轮回中,故称为轭;或者,从「连结」这一意义来说,叫作轭,也就是被那些轭所连结、所系缚。「被四轭连结」即欲轭、有轭、见轭、无明轭这四种轭,它们就像车轭套在牛身上一样,把有情连结在轮回之中。对五种欲乐的贪染,是欲轭。对色界、无色界存在的欲贪、对禅那的喜爱,以及与常见俱生、以生存状态为缘的贪求,称为有轭。六十二种邪见,是见轭。对八种事的无知,是无明轭。这四种法,力量强大时就称为暴流,力量弱小时则称为轭。显示巴利原文
Tīhi duccaritehīti tividhakāyaduccaritena catubbidhavacīduccaritena tividhamanoduccaritena. Vippaṭipannoti virūpaṃ paṭipanno, micchāpaṭipannoti attho. Yogehi yuttoti vaṭṭasmiṃ yojentīti yogā, ītiatthena vā yogā, tehi yogehi yutto samappito. Catuyogayojitoti kāmayogo, bhavayogo, diṭṭhiyogo, avijjāyogoti imehi catūhi yogehi sakaṭasmiṃ yogo viya vaṭṭasmiṃ yojito. Pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmayogo. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo, jhānanikanti ca, sassatadiṭṭhisahajāto rāgo bhavavasena patthanā bhavayogo. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo diṭṭhiyogo. Aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu aññāṇaṃ avijjāyogo. Te eva cattāro balavabhūtā oghā, dubbalabhūtā yogā.
「以四缚」:凡是具有这些的,它便通过死与结生,把有情捆绑、束缚在轮回里,所以称为缚。这些是:贪欲身缚、嗔恨身缚、戒禁取身缚、此实执取身缚,有这四种。「贪欲」:因为凭它而贪求,或者它自身就是贪求,又或者它仅仅是贪求的状态本身,故称贪欲,也就是贪。「身缚」:它把名身捆绑住,通过死与结生,将有情束缚在轮回中,故称身缚。「嗔恨」:因为心被它伤害而变坏,或者它破坏律仪、行仪、色身、成就、利益与安乐等,故称嗔恨。「戒禁取」:对于外道沙门、婆罗门,执取「透过戒得以清净,透过行得以清净,透过戒与行得以清净」,这种执取便是戒禁取。「此实执取」:即使否定了遍知者所说的,依然以「世间是常,唯有这是真实,其他皆是虚妄」等方式坚固执着,所以称为此实执取。即是被这四种缚所捆绑、系缚的意思。显示巴利原文
Catūhi ganthehīti yassa saṃvijjanti, taṃ cutipaṭisandhivasena vaṭṭasmiṃ ganthenti ghaṭentīti ganthā. Te abhijjhā kāyagantho, byāpādo kāyagantho, sīlabbataparāmāso kāyagantho, idaṃsaccābhiniveso kāyaganthoti catuppabhedā. Abhijjhāyanti etāya, sayaṃ vā abhijjhāyati, abhijjhāyanamattameva vā esāti abhijjhā, lobhoyeva. Nāmakāyaṃ gantheti cutipaṭisandhivasena vaṭṭasmiṃ ghaṭetīti kāyagantho. Byāpajjati tena cittaṃ pūtibhāvaṃ gacchati, byāpādayati vā vinayācārarūpasampattihitasukhādīnīti byāpādo. Ito bahiddhā samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sīlena suddhi vatena suddhi sīlavatena suddhīti parāmasanaṃ sīlabbataparāmāso. Sabbaññubhāsitampi paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘sassato loko , idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’ntiādinā ākārena abhinivisatīti idaṃsaccābhiniveso. Tehi catūhi ganthehi ganthito, baddhoti attho.
“以四取”:因为强力地执取、牢固地执著,故称为“取”。取有四种:欲取、见取、戒禁取、我语取。“欲取”:执取作为事之欲,即是欲取;或者说它既是欲、又是取,故称欲取。“见取”:既是见、又是取,故称见取;执取邪见,也称见取。在“我及世间是常”这类见解中,以随后的邪见执取前面所生的邪见。“戒禁取”:执取戒禁,即是戒禁取;既是戒禁、又是取,故称戒禁取。如执取牛戒、牛行等,以为由此便能清净,这种固执本身就是取。“我语取”:因为依它而说,所以是“语”;因为依它而取,所以是“取”。说什么、取什么呢?取“我”。执取我之言论,即是我语取;或者说,“我语”本身就是取——即以它来执取我,故称我语取。除了这两种见之外,其余一切见皆属见取。被此四取所取,即是被强力地执著。或读作“取著”,意指世间依诸取,对种种所缘强力地执著。显示巴利原文
Catūhi upādānehīti bhusaṃ ādiyanti daḷhaggāhaṃ gaṇhantīti upādānā. Te kāmupādānaṃ diṭṭhupādānaṃ sīlabbatupādānaṃ attavādupādānanti catuppabhedā. Vatthusaṅkhātaṃ kāmaṃ upādiyatīti kāmupādānaṃ, kāmo ca so upādānañcātipi kāmupādānaṃ. Diṭṭhi ca sā upādānañcāti diṭṭhupādānaṃ, diṭṭhiṃ upādiyatītipi diṭṭhupādānaṃ. ‘‘Sassato attā ca loko cā’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.147) hi purimadiṭṭhiṃ uttaradiṭṭhi upādiyati. Sīlabbataṃ upādiyatīti sīlabbatupādānaṃ, sīlabbatañca taṃ upādānañcātipi sīlabbatupādānaṃ. Gosīlagovatādīni hi evaṃ visuddhīti abhinivesato sayameva upādānāni. Vadanti etenāti vādo, upādiyanti etenāti upādānaṃ. Kiṃ vadanti, upādiyanti vā? Attānaṃ. Attano vādupādānaṃ attavādupādānaṃ, attavādamattameva vā attāti upādiyanti etenāti attavādupādānaṃ. Ṭhapetvā imā dve diṭṭhiyo sabbāpi diṭṭhī diṭṭhupādānaṃ. Tehi catūhi upādānehi. Upādīyatīti bhusaṃ gaṇhīyati. Upādiyatīti vā pāṭho, loko upādānehi taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ bhusaṃ gaṇhātīti attho.
“已登乘五趣”:因为由善、不善业所牵引而被前往、被趋近,故称为“趣”,即是与所在之处同存的有情蕴聚。地狱、畜生、饿鬼、人、天这五种趣,由舍弃前一存在状态而强力登乘上去。“以五种欲功德”:即色、声、香、味、触所摄的五种事欲部分。“染著”:由于不如理作意而生起贪染,从而被这些所染著,成为极度贪染的意思。“以五盖”:因为覆盖心、笼罩心,故称为“盖”,即欲贪、嗔恚、昏沉睡眠、掉举悔恨、疑这五种盖。“被覆盖”:即从上方被遮蔽。显示巴利原文
Pañcagatisamāruḷhoti sukatadukkaṭakāraṇehi gammati upasaṅkamīyatīti gati, sahokāsakā khandhā. Nirayo tiracchānayoni pettivisayo manussā devāti imā pañca gatiyo vokkamanabhāvena bhusaṃ āruḷho. Pañcahi kāmaguṇehīti rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbasaṅkhātehi pañcahi vatthukāmakoṭṭhāsehi. Rajjatīti ayonisomanasikāraṃ paṭicca rāguppādanena tehi rañjīyati, sāratto karīyatīti attho. Pañcahi nīvaraṇehīti cittaṃ nīvaranti pariyonandhantīti nīvaraṇā. Kāmacchandabyāpādathinamiddhauddhaccakukkuccavicikicchāsaṅkhātehi pañcahi nīvaraṇehi. Otthaṭoti uparito pihito.
“以六争论根”:即六种争论的根源。如经文所说——显示巴利原文
Chahi vivādamūlehīti chahi vivādassa mūlehi. Yathāha –
比丘们,有这六种争论的根源。哪六种呢?比丘们,在此,有比丘成为忿恨者、怀怨者。比丘们,凡有比丘成为忿恨者、怀怨者,他便对大师不恭敬、不尊重而安住,对法、对僧、对学处也不完全奉行。比丘们,凡有比丘对大师不恭敬、不尊重而安住,对法、对僧、对学处不完全奉行,他就在僧团中引起争论。那种争论会带来许多人的不利、许多人的不乐、许多人的无益、不利和痛苦,乃至天与人。比丘们,如果你们在自己内部或外部,发现有这样的争论根源,比丘们,你们就应当为了断除这恶的争论根源而精勤努力。比丘们,如果你们在自己内部或外部,没有发现这样的争论根源,比丘们,你们就应当为了这恶的争论根源于未来不再生起而修习。如此,便是这恶的争论根源的断除;如此,便是这恶的争论根源于未来不再生起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Chayimāni, bhikkhave, vivādamūlāni. Katamāni cha? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī. So sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi, saṅghepi, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satthari agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi, saṅghepi, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī, so saṅghe vivādaṃ janeti. Yo hoti vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya bahuno janassa anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṃ. Evarūpaṃ ce tumhe, bhikkhave, vivādamūlaṃ ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā samanupasseyyātha, tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānāya vāyameyyātha. Evarūpaṃ ce tumhe, bhikkhave, vivādamūlaṃ ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā na samanupasseyyātha. Tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṃ anavassavāya paṭipajjeyyātha. Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānaṃ hoti. Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṃ anavassavo hoti.
再者,比丘们,有比丘是贬损者、强执者;是嫉妒者、悭吝者;是狡诈者、虚伪者;是恶欲者、邪见者;是执自见者、坚执不舍者。比丘们,凡有比丘成为执自见者、坚执不舍者,他对大师……乃至……于未来不再生起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu makkhī hoti paḷāsī. Issukī hoti maccharī. Saṭho hoti māyāvī. Pāpiccho hoti micchādiṭṭhi. Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī. Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī, so sattharipi…pe… āyatiṃ anavassavo hotī’’ti (pari. 272; a. ni. 6.36).
这里,「忿恨者」:具足忿怒特征,名为忿恨。「怀怨者」:具足不弃舍仇恨特征,名为怀怨。「对天与人不利、痛苦」:两位比丘的争论怎么会导致天与人的不利与痛苦呢?正如《憍赏弥犍度》(《大品》451等)中所记载的,当两位比丘发生争论时,他们所在寺院里的弟子们便会争论,接受他们教导的比丘尼僧团也会争论,进而他们的护持者也会争论。这时,人们的守护神分成了两派:支持法说者的守护神成为法说者,支持非法说者的守护神成为非法说者。接着,这些守护神的朋友——地居天也分裂了。像这样辗转相续,一直到梵天世界,除了圣弟子以外,所有的天与人都分成了两派。然而,非法说者往往比法说者更多。于是,他们以多数人所执取的为真实,舍弃了正法,多数人执取了非法。他们以非法为先导而生活,死后投生恶趣。像这样,两位比丘的争论,便造成了天与人的不利和痛苦。「于内」:在你们自己内部的团体中。「于外」:在其他人的团体中。「覆藏者」:具足抹杀他人功德特征,名为覆藏。「强执者」:具足对立执取特征,名为强执。「嫉妒者」:具足嫉妒他人获得恭敬等特征,名为嫉妒。显示巴利原文
Tattha kodhanoti kujjhanalakkhaṇena kodhena samannāgato. Upanāhīti veraappaṭinissajjanalakkhaṇena upanāhena samannāgato. Ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānanti dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vivādo kathaṃ devamanussānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattatīti? Kosambakakkhandhake (mahāva. 451 ādayo) viya dvīsu bhikkhūsu vivādaṃ āpannesu tasmiṃ vihāre tesaṃ antevāsikā vivadanti, tesaṃ ovādaṃ gaṇhanto bhikkhunisaṅgho vivadati, tato tesaṃ upaṭṭhākāpi vivadanti. Atha manussānaṃ ārakkhadevatā dve koṭṭhāsā honti. Dhammavādīnaṃ ārakkhadevatā dhammavādiniyo honti adhammavādīnaṃ adhammavādiniyo. Tato ārakkhadevatānaṃ mittā bhummaṭṭhadevatā bhijjanti. Evaṃ paramparāya yāva brahmalokā ṭhapetvā ariyasāvake sabbe devamanussā dve koṭṭhāsā honti. Dhammavādīhi pana adhammavādinova bahutarā honti. Tato yaṃ bahukehi gahitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ saccanti dhammaṃ vissajjetvā bahutarāva adhammaṃ gaṇhanti. Te adhammaṃ purakkhatvā viharantā apāyesu nibbattanti. Evaṃ dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vivādo devamanussānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti. Ajjhattaṃ vāti tumhākaṃ abbhantaraparisāya vā. Bahiddhā vāti paresaṃ parisāya vā. Makkhīti paresaṃ guṇamakkhaṇalakkhaṇena makkhena samannāgato. Paḷāsīti yugaggāhalakkhaṇena paḷāsena samannāgato. Issukīti paresaṃ sakkārādiissāyanalakkhaṇāya issāya samannāgato. Maccharīti āvāsamacchariyādīhi pañcahi macchariyehi samannāgato. Saṭhoti kerāṭiko. Māyāvīti katapāpapaṭicchādako. Pāpicchoti asantasambhāvanicchako dussīlo. Micchādiṭṭhīti natthikavādī ahetukavādī akiriyavādī. Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsīti sayaṃ diṭṭhimeva parāmasati. Ādhānaggāhīti daḷhaggāhī. Duppaṭinissaggīti na sakkā hoti gahitaṃ vissajjāpetuṃ. Khuddakavatthuvibhaṅge pana ‘‘tattha katamāni cha vivādamūlāni? Kodho makkho issā sāṭheyyaṃ pāpicchatā sandiṭṭhiparāmāsitā, imāni cha vivādamūlānī’’ti (vibha. 944) padhānavasena ekekoyeva dhammo vutto.
「六爱身」:指《分别论》(Vibh. 944)所说的六种渴爱——‘色爱、声爱、香爱、味爱、触爱、法爱’。其中,由于每种渴爱都有众多所缘,并且在每一个所缘上都会反复生起,因此每种渴爱本身又是多种多样的。正是基于‘集合’的含义而以‘身’字相称,故称为‘爱身’。虽名为‘爱身’,其本体即是渴爱。「染著」:指自己对所缘生起染著,变得极其贪染。显示巴利原文
Chahi taṇhākāyehīti ‘‘rūpataṇhā, saddataṇhā, gandhataṇhā, rasataṇhā, phoṭṭhabbataṇhā, dhammataṇhā’’ti (vibha. 944) vuttāhi chahi taṇhāhi. Tattha yasmā ekekāyeva taṇhā anekavisayattā ekekasmimpi visaye punappunaṃ uppattito anekā honti, tasmā samūhaṭṭhena kāyasaddena yojetvā taṇhākāyāti vuttaṃ. Taṇhākāyāti vuttepi taṇhā eva. Rajjatīti sayaṃ ārammaṇe rajjati, sāratto hoti.
「六见处」:出自《一切漏经》。经中这样说:显示巴利原文
Chahi diṭṭhigatehīti sabbāsavasutte vuttehi. Vuttañhi tattha –
当他这样不如理作意时,六种见中的某一见便会生起。他可能生起‘我有我’的见,并执为真实、坚固;或者生起‘我没有我’的见,并执为真实、坚固;或者生起‘我以自己认知我’的见;或者生起‘我以自己认知无我’的见;或者生起‘我以无我认知我’的见。或者,他还会生起这样的见:‘这个能说、能觉知,在处处领受苦乐善恶业果报的我,正是常、坚固、永恒、不变异之法,正如常住之物一般,会永远这样存在下去。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Tassa evaṃ ayoniso manasikaroto channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjati. ‘Atthi me attā’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati, ‘natthi me attā’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati, ‘attanāva attānaṃ sañjānāmī’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati, ‘attanāva anattānaṃ sañjānāmī’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati, ‘anattanāva attānaṃ sañjānāmī’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati. Atha vā panassa evaṃ diṭṭhi hoti ‘yo me ayaṃ attā vado vedeyyo tatra tatra kalyāṇapāpakānaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, so ca kho pana me ayaṃ attā nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo sassatisamaṃ tatheva ṭhassatī’’’ti (ma. ni. 1.19).
其中,「有我的我」属于常见,它执取‘我’于一切时中存在。「如实地、坚固地」意谓从真实与坚固的意义上,即认为‘这是真实的’,以极为坚固的方式执取。「无我的我」属于断见,因为它执取存在的有情在各处以‘非有’而灭没。或者亦可这样理解:前者执取于过去、现在、未来三时中存在,故为常见;若只执取现在存在,则为断见。后者执取过去与未来中不存在,便如同持有‘祭祀的供品落尽’这类恶见者,属于断见。如果只在过去中执取‘不存在’,则如无因生论者一般,属于常见。
「我以我认知我」:将想蕴为首的诸蕴执为‘我’后,用想去认知其余诸蕴,便成为‘我以此我认知此我’。
「我以我认知无我」:将想蕴执为‘我’,其余四蕴执为‘无我’后,用想去认知它们,便成此见。
「我以无我认知我」:将想蕴执为‘无我’,其余四蕴执为‘我’后,用想去认知它们,便成此见。
所有这些见都属于常见和断见。
而‘能说’、‘能觉’等表述,只是对常见的执取方式。其中,「能说」即说者,指造作语业的人。「能觉」……显示巴利原文
Tattha atthi me attāti sassatadiṭṭhi sabbakālesu attano atthitaṃ gaṇhāti. Saccato thetatoti bhūtato ca thirato ca, ‘‘idaṃ sacca’’nti suṭṭhu daḷhabhāvenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Natthi me attāti ucchedadiṭṭhi sato sattassa tattha tattha vibhavaggahaṇato. Atha vā purimāpi tīsu kālesu atthīti gahaṇato sassatadiṭṭhi, paccuppannameva atthīti gaṇhantī ucchedadiṭṭhi, pacchimāpi atītānāgatesu natthīti gahaṇato ‘‘bhassantā āhutiyo’’ti gahitadiṭṭhigatikānaṃ viya ucchedadiṭṭhi. Atīte eva natthīti gaṇhantī adhiccasamuppannakassa viya sassatadiṭṭhi. Attanāva attānaṃ sañjānāmīti saññākkhandhasīsena khandhe attāti gahetvā saññāya avasesakkhandhe sañjānato iminā attanā imaṃ attānaṃ sañjānāmīti hoti. Attanāva anattānanti saññākkhandhaṃyeva attāti gahetvā, itare cattāropi anattāti gahetvā saññāya te sañjānato evaṃ hoti. Anattanāva attānanti saññākkhandhaṃ anattāti gahetvā, itare cattāropi attāti gahetvā saññāya te sañjānato evaṃ hoti. Sabbāpi sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyova. Vado vedeyyotiādayo pana sassatadiṭṭhiyā eva abhinivesākārā. Tattha vadatīti vado, vacīkammassa kārakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vedayatīti vedeyyo, jānāti anubhavati cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ vedetīti? Tatra tatra kalyāṇapāpakānaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti . Tatra tatrāti tesu tesu yonigatiṭhitinivāsanikāyesu ārammaṇesu vā. Niccoti uppādavayarahito. Dhuvoti thiro sārabhūto. Sassatoti sabbakāliko. Avipariṇāmadhammoti attano pakatibhāvaṃ avijahanadhammo, kakaṇṭako viya nānappakārataṃ nāpajjati. Sassatisamanti candasūriyasamuddamahāpathavīpabbatā lokavohārena sassatiyoti vuccanti. Sassatīhi samaṃ sassatisamaṃ. Yāva sassatiyo tiṭṭhanti, tāva tatheva ṭhassatīti gaṇhato evaṃ diṭṭhi hoti.
而在《小事分别》中,则这样加以区分,宣说了六种见:‘那个我在各处长时领受善恶业的苦乐果报;并非“那个我生起,过去曾没有”,也非“那个我生起,未来将没有”,而是恒常、坚固、常住、不变易法的我。’——对于此,会生起真实、坚固的见。显示巴利原文
Khuddakavatthuvibhaṅge pana ‘‘tatra tatra dīgharattaṃ kalyāṇapāpakānaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ paccanubhoti, na so jāto nāhosi, na so jāto na bhavissati, nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammoti vā panassa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjatī’’ti (vibha. 948) cha diṭṭhī evaṃ visesetvā vuttā.
其中,「非那个我生起,曾不存在」意为:那个‘我’因没有生起的性质,故称‘不生’,即恒常存在。因此,它在过去并非‘曾不存在’,在未来也并非‘将不存在’。因为,已经生起的才说‘曾存在’,将要生起的才说‘将存在’。又或者,另一种解释:「非那个我生起,曾不存在」是说,由于那个‘我’恒常存在,所以在过去绝不曾不存在,在未来也绝将不会不存在。随眠的解释如前所说。显示巴利原文
Tattha na so jāto nāhosīti so attā ajātidhammato na jāto nāma, sadā vijjamānoyevāti attho. Teneva atīte nāhosi, anāgate na bhavissati. Yo hi jāto, so ahosi. Yo ca jāyissati, so bhavissatīti vuccati. Atha vā na so jāto nāhosīti so sadā vijjamānattā atītepi na jātu na ahosi, anāgatepi na jātu na bhavissati. Anusayā vuttatthā.
“七结”出自《七集》。如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Sattahi saññojanehīti sattakanipāte vuttehi. Vuttañhi tattha –
“诸比丘,有此七结。哪七种呢?随顺结、瞋结、见结、疑结、慢结、有贪结、无明结。比丘们,这就是七种结。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Sattimāni, bhikkhave, saṃyojanāni. Katamāni satta? Anunayasaṃyojanaṃ, paṭighasaṃyojanaṃ, diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ, vicikicchāsaṃyojanaṃ, mānasaṃyojanaṃ, bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ, avijjāsaṃyojanaṃ. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, satta saṃyojanānī’’ti (a. ni. 7.8).
此处,“随顺结”即指欲贪结。这一切皆以“束缚”之义而称为结。显示巴利原文
Tattha anunayasaṃyojananti kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ. Sabbānevetāni bandhanaṭṭhena saṃyojanāni.
以七慢:即《小事分别》中所说。显示巴利原文
Sattahi mānehīti khuddakavatthuvibhaṅge vuttehi. Vuttañhi tattha –
即如所说:“慢、过慢、慢过慢、卑慢、增上慢、我慢、邪慢。”(《分别论》950)显示巴利原文
‘‘Māno , atimāno, mānātimāno, omāno, adhimāno, asmimāno, micchāmāno’’ti (vibha. 950).
其中,慢:不针对具体人,不以“我较胜”等作意,唯依出身等事而生起的自举。过慢:依出身等,生起“无有与我相等者”的超越高举。慢过慢:谓“此人先前与我相等,今我较胜,此人较劣”而生起的慢。卑慢:依出身等,自处卑下而生起的慢,即“我是卑劣者”。增上慢:于未证得的四圣谛法,自以为证得而生起的慢。此增上慢唯生起于这样的凡夫——持戒清净,于修行业处毫不放逸,已辨析确定名色,通过把握诸缘而超越疑惑,以无常、苦、无我三相观照诸行,正在正审思惟诸行,已着手修观者;而非于他人。我慢:于色等诸蕴中,执取“我是”而生起的慢,即“我是色”等而生起的慢。邪慢:以不善业、处等为事而生起的慢。显示巴利原文
Tattha mānoti seyyādivasena puggalaṃ anāmasitvā jātiādīsu vatthuvaseneva unnati. Atimānoti jātiādīhi ‘‘mayā sadiso natthī’’ti atikkamitvā unnati. Mānātimānoti ‘‘ayaṃ pubbe mayā sadiso, idāni ahaṃ seṭṭho, ayaṃ hīnataro’’ti uppannamāno. Omānoti jātiādīhi attānaṃ heṭṭhā katvā pavattamāno, hīnohamasmīti mānoyeva. Adhimānoti anadhigateyeva catusaccadhamme adhigatoti māno. Ayaṃ pana adhimāno parisuddhasīlassa kammaṭṭhāne appamattassa nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā paccayapariggahena vitiṇṇakaṅkhassa tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā saṅkhāre sammasantassa āraddhavipassakassa puthujjanassa uppajjati, na aññesaṃ. Asmimānoti rūpādīsu khandhesu asmīti māno, ‘‘ahaṃ rūpa’’ntiādivasena uppannamānoti vuttaṃ hoti. Micchāmānoti pāpakena kammāyatanādinā uppannamāno.
「世间法」辞义已释。「流转」意为:以这些世间法为因,在利等四种中,随顺而剧烈摇摆;在衰等四种中,违逆而舍弃平常的状态,这便是它的意思。「邪行性」等辞义亦如前释。「出离」意为已离去、已投入,即被征服的意思。显示巴利原文
Lokadhammā vuttatthā. Samparivattatīti lokadhammehi hetubhūtehi lābhādīsu catūsu anurodhavasena, alābhādīsu catūsu paṭivirodhavasena bhusaṃ nivattati, pakatibhāvaṃ jahātīti attho. Micchattāpi vuttatthā. Niyyātoti gato pakkhando, abhibhūtoti attho.
「以八种人的过失」:此内容在《八集》中连同譬喻一起说明,在《小事分别》中则不连譬喻。因为那里这样说:显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhahi purisadosehīti aṭṭhakanipāte upamāhi saha, khuddakavatthuvibhaṅge upamaṃ vinā vuttehi. Vuttañhi tattha –
「哪八种是人的过失呢?」在此,比丘们因某比丘犯戒而举发他。那位比丘被比丘们以犯戒为由举发时,仅以「我不记得了、我不记得了」这样失念的言辞来推脱。这是第一种人的过失。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katame aṭṭha purisadosā? Idha bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno ‘na sarāmi na sarāmī’ti assatiyāva nibbeṭheti. Ayaṃ paṭhamo purisadoso.
再者,比丘们因某比丘犯戒而举发其罪。那位比丘被众比丘以犯戒举发时,反而直接回击举发者:‘你这愚痴、不明事理的人所说的话有什么用?你竟以为自己有资格来说我吗?’这是第二种人的过失。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno codakaṃyeva paṭippharati ‘kiṃ nu kho tuyhaṃ bālassa abyattassa bhaṇitena, tvampi nāma maṃ bhaṇitabbaṃ maññasī’ti? Ayaṃ dutiyo purisadoso.
再者,比丘们因某比丘犯戒而举发其罪。这位被众比丘以犯戒举发的比丘,反过来对举发者说:‘你也犯了某条戒,你应当先忏悔。’这是第三种人的过失。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno codakaṃyeva paccāropeti ‘tvampi khosi itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno, tvaṃ tāva paṭhamaṃ paṭikarohī’ti. Ayaṃ tatiyo purisadoso.
再者,比丘们因某比丘犯戒而举发其罪。这位被众比丘以犯戒举发的比丘,以他事搪塞,将话题岔开,并且显露忿怒、憎恨与不满。这是第四种人的过失。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno aññenaññaṃ paṭicarati, bahiddhā kathaṃ apanāmeti, kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti. Ayaṃ catuttho purisadoso.
再者,比丘们因某比丘犯戒而举发他。那位被举发犯戒的比丘便在僧团中间挥舞手臂说话。这是第五种人的过失。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno saṅghamajjhe bāhāvikkhepakaṃ bhaṇati. Ayaṃ pañcamo purisadoso.
再者,比丘们因某比丘犯戒而举发他。那位被举发犯戒的比丘不理会僧团与举发者,自己身负有罪,便随心所欲地离去。这是第六种人的过失。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno anādiyitvā saṅghaṃ anādiyitvā codakaṃ sāpattikova yena kāmaṃ pakkamati. Ayaṃ chaṭṭho purisadoso.
再者,比丘们因某比丘犯戒而举发他。那位被举发犯戒的比丘既不承认“我犯了罪”,也不说“我没犯罪”,只是默然不语,以此困扰僧团。这是第七种人的过失。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno ‘nevāhaṃ āpannomhi, na panāhaṃ anāpannomhī’ti so tuṇhībhūto saṅghaṃ viheseti. Ayaṃ sattamo purisadoso.
再者,诸比丘因某比丘犯戒而举发他。这位被举发的比丘便这样说:‘诸位尊者何必如此为我过度操心?我现在就舍戒还俗。’他舍戒还俗之后,又这样说:‘现在诸位尊者总该满意了吧。’这是‘第八种人的过失’。以上就是‘八种人的过失’。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ bhikkhū bhikkhuṃ āpattiyā codenti. So bhikkhu bhikkhūhi āpattiyā codiyamāno evamāha – ‘kiṃ nu kho tumhe āyasmanto atibāḷhaṃ mayi byāvaṭā? Idānāhaṃ sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattissāmī’ti. So sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattitvā evamāha ‘idāni kho tumhe āyasmanto attamanā hothā’ti. Ayaṃ aṭṭhamo purisadoso. Ime aṭṭha purisadosā’’ti (vibha. 957; a. ni. 8.14).
其中,‘人的过失’:指人的缺点,而这些缺点能染污人的心续,故称为过失。‘我不记得、我不记得’:是说‘我想不起来、也觉察不到我做过那件事’,以这样假装失念的方式来推脱、逃避。‘直接顶撞举发者’:指采取对立的态度加以攻击,摆出抗拒的姿态。‘你算什么呢’:这是说‘像你这样愚痴、糊涂的人,说出的话有什么意义?你既不了解事实,也不清楚罪过,更不明白举发的法则。’他是用‘你也配这样说话?明明什么都不懂还自以为该说’的话来压制对方。‘反举’:指说‘你也犯了……’,这样反过来举发对方。‘你应当先处理’:意思是‘你应当发露该忏悔的罪,应当从该出罪的程序中出罪,等你清净、安住之后,才有资格举发别人。’‘用别的事来搪塞’:指用一个不相干的理由或话语,来掩盖另一个理由或话语。当被人指出‘你犯戒了’时,他就说:‘谁犯了?犯了什么?在哪里犯的?怎么犯的?你们在说谁?你们在说什么?’当被问到‘你有没有看到这种事’时,他就把耳朵凑过去说‘我听不见’。‘把话题岔向外面’:指当被问‘你是不是犯了某某戒’时,他就……显示巴利原文
Tattha purisadosāti purisānaṃ dosā, te pana purisasantānaṃ dūsentīti dosā. Na sarāmi na sarāmīti ‘‘mayā etassa kammassa kataṭṭhānaṃ nassarāmi na sallakkhemī’’ti evaṃ assatibhāvena nibbeṭheti moceti. Codakaṃyeva paṭippharatīti paṭiviruddho hutvā pharati, paṭiāṇibhāvena tiṭṭhati. Kiṃ nu kho tuyhanti tuyhaṃ bālassa abyattassa bhaṇitena nāma kiṃ, yo tvaṃ neva vatthuṃ, na āpattiṃ, na codanaṃ jānāsīti dīpeti. Tvampi nāma evaṃ kiñci ajānanto bhaṇitabbaṃ maññasīti ajjhottharati. Paccāropetīti ‘‘tvampi khosī’’tiādīni vadanto patiāropeti. Paṭikarohīti desanāgāminiṃ desehi, vuṭṭhānagāminito vuṭṭhāhi, tato suddhante patiṭṭhito aññaṃ codessasīti dīpeti. Aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratīti aññena kāraṇena, vacanena vā aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ, vacanaṃ vā paṭicchādeti. ‘‘Āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti vutto ‘‘ko āpanno, kiṃ āpanno, kismiṃ āpanno, kathaṃ āpanno, kaṃ bhaṇatha, kiṃ bhaṇathā’’ti bhaṇati. ‘‘Evarūpaṃ kiñci tayā diṭṭha’’nti vutte ‘‘na suṇāmī’’ti sotaṃ upaneti. Bahiddhā kathaṃ apanāmetīti ‘‘itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti puṭṭho ‘‘pāṭaliputtaṃ gatomhī’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘na tava pāṭaliputtagamanaṃ pucchāmā’’ti vutte tato rājagahaṃ gatomhīti. ‘‘Rājagahaṃ vā yāhi brāhmaṇagehaṃ vā, āpattiṃ āpannosī’’ti. ‘‘Tattha me sūkaramaṃsaṃ laddha’’ntiādīni vadanto kathaṃ bahiddhā vikkhipati. Kopanti kupitabhāvaṃ, dosanti duṭṭhabhāvaṃ. Ubhayampetaṃ kodhasseva nāmaṃ. Appaccayanti asantuṭṭhākāraṃ, domanassassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Pātukarotīti dasseti pakāseti. Bāhāvikkhepakaṃ bhaṇatīti bāhaṃ vikkhipitvā vikkhipitvā alajjivacanaṃ vadati. Anādiyitvāti cittīkārena aggahetvā avajānitvā, anādaro hutvāti attho. Vihesetīti viheṭheti bādhati. Atibāḷhanti atidaḷhaṃ atippamāṇaṃ. Mayi byāvaṭāti mayi byāpāraṃ āpannā. Hīnāyāvattitvāti hīnassa gihibhāvassa atthāya āvattitvā, gihī hutvāti attho. Attamanā hothāti tuṭṭhacittā hotha, ‘‘mayā labhitabbaṃ labhatha, mayā vasitabbaṭṭhāne vasatha, phāsuvihāro vo mayā kato’’ti adhippāyena vadati. Dussatīti duṭṭho hoti.
关于‘九种愤恨事’:这是就有情心中生起愤恨的方式而说的。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Navahi āghātavatthūhīti sattesu uppattivaseneva kathitāni. Yathāha –
比丘们,有九种愤恨事。哪九种呢?因思惟“他过去曾作不利于我之事”而结愤恨;因思惟“他正在作不利于我之事”而结愤恨;因思惟“他将作不利于我之事”而结愤恨;因思惟“他曾对我所喜爱、悦意的人作不利事,正在作不利事,将作不利事”而结愤恨;因思惟“他曾对我所憎恶、不悦意的人作有利事,正在作有利事,将作有利事”而结愤恨。比丘们,这便是九种愤恨事。显示巴利原文
‘‘Navayimāni, bhikkhave, āghātavatthūni. Katamāni nava? ‘Anatthaṃ me acarī’ti āghātaṃ bandhati, ‘anatthaṃ me caratī’ti āghātaṃ bandhati, ‘anatthaṃ me carissatī’ti āghātaṃ bandhati, ‘piyassa me manāpassa anatthaṃ acari, anatthaṃ carati, anatthaṃ carissatī’ti āghātaṃ bandhati, ‘appiyassa me amanāpassa atthaṃ acari, atthaṃ carati, atthaṃ carissatī’ti āghātaṃ bandhati. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, nava āghātavatthūnī’’ti (a. ni. 9.29).
此处,“愤恨事”指愤恨的因由。这里的“愤恨”即是忿怒,而它本身正是忿怒一再生起的基础,故称愤恨事。“结愤恨”意为系结、制造、生起忿怒。在《大义释》《分别论》《法集论》的解释中,也提到另外九种愤恨事:“他过去不曾对我作有利事,现在不作,将来也不会作”;“他对于我所喜爱、悦意的人,过去不曾、现在不作、将来也不会作有利事”;“他对于我所憎恶、不悦意的人,过去不曾、现在不作、将来也不会作不利事。”(大义释85;分别论960;法集论1066)这些同样为此九种愤恨事所涵盖。“被愤恨”即被触恼、被激怒。显示巴利原文
Tattha āghātavatthūnīti āghātakāraṇāni. Āghātanti cettha kopo, soyeva uparūpari kopassa vatthuttā āghātavatthu. Āghātaṃ bandhatīti kopaṃ bandhati karoti uppādeti. ‘‘Atthaṃ me nācari, na carati, na carissati. Piyassa me manāpassa atthaṃ nācari, na carati, na carissati. Appiyassa me amanāpassa anatthaṃ nācari, na carati, na carissatī’’ti (mahāni. 85; vibha. 960; dha. sa. 1066) niddese vuttāni aparānipi nava āghātavatthūni imeheva navahi saṅgahitāni. Āghātitoti ghaṭṭito.
“以九种慢”——是哪九种慢?于胜己者,生起“我胜于彼”之慢;于胜己者,生起“我与他们”之慢;于胜己者,生起“我劣于彼”之慢。于与己等者,生起“我胜于彼”之慢;于与己等者,生起“我与他们”之慢;于与己等者,生起“我劣于彼”之慢。于劣己者,生起“我胜于彼”之慢;于劣己者,生起“我与他们”之慢;于劣己者,生起“我劣于彼”之慢。这便是九种慢。(分别论962)显示巴利原文
Navavidhamānehīti katame navavidhamānā? Seyyassa seyyohamasmīti māno, seyyassa sadisohamasmīti māno, seyyassa hīnohamasmīti māno. Sadisassa seyyohamasmīti māno, sadisassa sadisohamasmīti māno, sadisassa hīnohamasmīti māno. Hīnassa seyyohamasmīti māno, hīnassa sadisohamasmīti māno, hīnassa hīnohamasmīti māno. Ime navavidhamānā (vibha. 962).
这其中,面对优越者而生起‘我比他优越’的这种慢,多生起于国王们与出家人中。因为国王会想:‘论国土、财富或军队,有谁能与我相比?’而生起这种慢;出家人也会想:‘论戒律或头陀支等,有谁能与我相比?’而生起这种慢。显示巴利原文
Ettha pana seyyassa seyyohamasmīti māno rājūnañceva pabbajitānañca uppajjati. Rājā hi ‘‘raṭṭhena vā dhanena vā vāhanehi vā ko mayā sadiso atthī’’ti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti, pabbajitopi ‘‘sīladhutaṅgādīhi ko mayā sadiso atthī’’ti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti.
面对优越者而认为‘我和他一样’的这种慢,同样也生起于这些人中。因为国王会想:‘论国土、财富或军队,我与其余诸王又有何差别?’而生起这种慢;出家人也会想:‘论戒律或头陀支等,我与其余比丘又有何差别?’而生起这种慢。显示巴利原文
Seyyassa sadisohamasmīti mānopi etesaṃyeva uppajjati. Rājā hi ‘‘raṭṭhena vā dhanena vā vāhanehi vā aññarājūhi saddhiṃ mayhaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇa’’nti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti, pabbajitopi ‘‘sīladhutaṅgādīhi aññena bhikkhunā mayhaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇa’’nti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti.
面对优越者而认为‘我比他差’的这种慢,同样也生起于这些人中。譬如,有一位国王,其国土、财富或军队等并不十分圆满,他便心想:‘我只不过顶着“国王”的名头,享些虚名罢了,我算是什么国王呢?’而生起慢心;出家的比丘若所得利养与恭敬微薄,也会心想:‘我只是被人称作说法者、多闻者、大长老而已,哪有什么利养与恭敬。’而生起慢心。显示巴利原文
Seyyassa hīnohamasmīti mānopi etesaṃyeva uppajjati. Yassa hi rañño raṭṭhaṃ vā dhanaṃ vā vāhanādīni vā nātisampannāni honti, so ‘‘mayhaṃ rājāti vohārasukhamattakameva, kiṃ rājā nāma aha’’nti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti, pabbajitopi appalābhasakkāro ‘‘ahaṃ dhammakathiko bahussuto mahātheroti kathāmattameva, kiṃ dhammakathiko nāmāhaṃ, kiṃ bahussuto nāmāhaṃ, kiṃ mahāthero nāmāhaṃ, yassa me lābhasakkāro natthī’’ti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti.
对于与自己同等的人,心想‘我比他优越’等慢心,在大臣这类人中生起。大臣或王族成员会这样想:‘论财富、车乘等,其他王家子弟有谁能与我相比?’或想:‘我与别人有什么差别?’又想:‘我不过是空有大臣之名,连糊口遮体的衣食都不足,我算什么大臣?’如此而生起慢心。显示巴利原文
Sadisassaseyyohamasmīti mānādayo amaccādīnaṃ uppajjanti. Amacco vā hi raṭṭhiyo vā ‘‘bhogayānavāhanādīhi ko mayā sadiso añño rājapuriso atthī’’ti vā, ‘‘mayhaṃ aññehi saddhiṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇa’’nti vā, ‘‘amaccoti nāmameva mayhaṃ, ghāsacchādanamattampi me natthi, kiṃ amacco nāmāha’’nti vā etaṃ mānaṃ karoti.
对于比自己低劣的人,心想‘我比他优越’等慢心,在奴仆这类人中生起。奴仆会想:‘论母系或父系,有哪个奴仆能与我相比?其他人是因为自己无法谋生、为了填饱肚子才当奴仆的,而我却是依家族世代传承下来的上等奴仆。’或想:‘凭藉世代传承、父母双方皆是清净奴仆的身份,我与某个奴仆又有什么差别?’又想:‘我是为了糊口才当的奴仆,但若论父母辈,我根本没有当奴仆的根底,我算什么奴仆?’如此而生起慢心。不仅奴仆如此,像弗居娑、旃陀罗等人,也同样会生起这种慢。在此,对于比自己优越的人,心想‘我比他优越’而生起的慢,是如实的慢;其余两种则是不如实的慢。同样地,对于与自己同等的人,心想‘我和他一样’而生起的慢,以及对于比自己低劣的人,心想‘我比他差’而生起的慢,是如实的慢,其余两种是不如实的慢。这其中,如实的慢会被阿拉汉道断除,不如实的慢则被入流道断除。显示巴利原文
Hīnassaseyyohamasmīti mānādayo dāsādīnaṃ uppajjanti. Dāso hi ‘‘mātito vā pitito vā ko mayā sadiso añño dāso nāma atthi, aññe jīvituṃ asakkontā kucchihetu dāsā nāma jātā, ahaṃ pana paveṇiāgatattā seyyo’’ti vā, ‘‘paveṇiāgatabhāvena ubhatosuddhikadāsattena asukadāsena nāma saddhiṃ mayhaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇa’’nti vā, ‘‘kucchivasenāhaṃ dāsabyaṃ upagato, mātāpitukoṭiyā pana me dāsaṭṭhānaṃ natthi, kiṃ dāso nāma aha’’nti vā etaṃ mānaṃ karoti. Yathā ca dāso, evaṃ pukkusacaṇḍālādayopi etaṃ mānaṃ karontiyeva. Ettha ca seyyassa seyyohamasmīti uppannamānova yāthāvamāno, itare dve ayāthāvamānā. Tathā sadisassa sadisohamasmīti hīnassa hīnohamasmīti uppannamānova yāthāvamāno, itare dve ayāthāvamānā. Tattha yāthāvamānā arahattamaggavajjhā, ayāthāvamānā sotāpattimaggavajjhāti.
以渴爱为根本的那些法已如前说。「染着」:并非仅仅以贪染着,而是由于以渴爱为根本的遍求等也会生起,因此是以渴爱为根本的一切不善法而染着,意为与之结合、被缚。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāmūlakā vuttāyeva. Rajjatīti na kevalaṃ rāgeneva rajjati, atha kho taṇhāmūlakānaṃ pariyesanādīnampi sambhavato taṇhāmūlakehi sabbehi akusaladhammehi rajjati, yujjati bajjhatīti adhippāyo.
“以十种烦恼事”:十种烦恼事是哪些?贪、嗔、痴、慢、见、疑、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧,即是十种烦恼事。显示巴利原文
Dasahikilesavatthūhīti katamāni dasa kilesavatthūni? Lobho, doso, moho, māno, diṭṭhi, vicikicchā, thinaṃ, uddhaccaṃ, ahirikaṃ, anottappanti imāni dasa kilesavatthūni (vibha. 966).
在此,烦恼本身即是烦恼事;又或因为,这些烦恼是有漏众生所住着之处——众生立足于贪等中,故称“事”。这些烦恼既是众生所依止者,又是众生的“事”,故名“烦恼事”。而且,此处即使是依无间缘等生起的烦恼,亦确实“安住”,因此“诸烦恼的住处”也称作“烦恼事”。“贪”:众生藉它而贪求,或它自身贪求,或纯粹即贪求之行为,故名为贪。“嗔”:众生藉它而嗔恚,或它自身嗔恚,或纯粹即嗔恚之行为,故名为嗔。“痴”:众生藉它而愚痴,或它自身愚痴,或纯粹即愚痴之行为,故名为痴。“慢”:谓自以为优于他等,故名慢。见等之义前已述。不知羞惭,故称无惭;无惭之状态即是无惭。无所畏忌,故称无愧;无愧之状态即是无愧。其中,无惭的特相是不厌恶身恶行等,无愧的特相是不畏惧诸恶行。因为它们染污故,即受折磨、受逼恼。显示巴利原文
Tattha kilesā eva kilesavatthūni, vasanti vā ettha akhīṇāsavā sattā lobhādīsu patiṭṭhitattāti vatthūni, kilesā ca te tappatiṭṭhānaṃ sattānaṃ vatthūni cāti kilesavatthūni. Yasmā cettha anantarapaccayādibhāvena uppajjamānāpi kilesā vasanti eva nāma, tasmā kilesānaṃ vatthūnītipi kilesavatthūni. Lubbhanti tena, sayaṃ vā lubbhati, lubbhanamattameva vā tanti lobho. Dussanti tena, sayaṃ vā dussati, dussanamattameva vā tanti doso. Muyhanti tena, sayaṃ vā muyhati, muyhanamattameva vā tanti moho. Maññatīti māno. Diṭṭhiādayo vuttatthāva . Na hirīyatīti ahiriko, tassa bhāvo ahirikaṃ. Na ottappatīti anottappī, tassa bhāvo anottappaṃ. Tesu ahirikaṃ kāyaduccaritādīhi ajigucchanalakkhaṇaṃ, anottappaṃ teheva asārajjanalakkhaṇaṃ, kilissatīti upatāpīyati vibādhīyati.
“以十种愤恨事”:即前面所说的九种,再加上《法集论》中所说的“或于无理处生起愤恨”,合为十种。也就是说,对于“他对我行了无利益事”等事不作分别,乃至对树桩、荆棘等无理之处也会生起愤恨。显示巴利原文
Dasahi āghātavatthūhīti pubbe vuttehi navahi ca ‘‘aṭṭhāne vā panāghāto jāyatī’’ti (dha. sa. 1066) vuttena cāti dasahi. Anatthaṃ me acarītiādīnipi hi avikappetvā khāṇukaṇṭakādimhipi aṭṭhāne āghāto uppajjati.
“以十不善业道”:什么是十不善业道?杀生、不与取、欲邪行、妄语、离间语、粗恶语、杂秽语、贪欲、嗔恚、邪见。这些便是十不善业道。在此,它们既是不善之业,又是通往恶趣的道路,因此名为“不善业道”。“具足者”:即是具足这些法之人。显示巴利原文
Dasahi akusalakammapathehīti katame dasa akusalakammapathā (dī. ni. 3.360)? Pāṇātipāto, adinnādānaṃ, kāmesumicchācāro, musāvādo, pisuṇā vācā, pharusā vācā, samphappalāpo, abhijjhā, byāpādo, micchādiṭṭhi. Ime dasa akusalakammapathā. Tattha akusalakammāni ca tāni pathā ca duggatiyāti akusalakammapathā. Samannāgatoti samaṅgībhūto.
“以十结”:什么是十种结?欲贪结、嗔恚结、慢结、见结、疑结、戒禁取结、有贪结、嫉妒结、悭吝结、无明结。这些便是十种结。邪性之义,如前已释。显示巴利原文
Dasahi saññojanehīti katamāni dasa saṃyojanāni (dha. sa. 1118)? Kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ, paṭighasaṃyojanaṃ, mānasaṃyojanaṃ, diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ, vicikicchāsaṃyojanaṃ, sīlabbataparāmāsasaṃyojanaṃ, bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ, issāsaṃyojanaṃ, macchariyasaṃyojanaṃ, avijjāsaṃyojanaṃ, imāni dasa saṃyojanāni. Micchattā vuttāyeva.
“以十事邪见”:什么是十事邪见?“施无功”、“供无益”、“祭无报”、“善恶诸行无果无熟”、“此世不存”、“他世不有”、“无母”、“无父”、“无化生有情”、“世间无有正直行道、正直修行、自以证智证知此世他世而后宣说之沙门、婆罗门”。此即十事邪见。显示巴利原文
Dasavatthukāya micchādiṭṭhiyāti katamā dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhi (vibha. 971)? Natthi dinnaṃ, natthi yiṭṭhaṃ, natthi hutaṃ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko, natthi ayaṃ loko, natthi paro loko, natthi mātā, natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṃ parañca lokaṃ sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedenti. Ayaṃ dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhi.
在此,“十事”:即以此十种事为内容,故称十事。“无布施”:他知道布施,即能够给予他人某物;但他执取布施并无果报与异熟。“无供养”:以盛大祭祀为供养,他知道可以进行那样的祭祀;但他执取供养并无果报与异熟。“无献供”:指招待宾客、祭祖等吉祥行事,他知道可以做这些事;但他执取这些事的果报与异熟是没有的。“善行恶行之业无果报”:在此,十善业道称为善行业,十不善业道称为恶行业。他知道这些业的存在;但他执取它们并无果报与异熟。“无此世”:从他世的角度,他执取此世不存在。“无他世”:从此世的角度,他执取他世不存在。“无母,无父”:他知道母亲、父亲的存在;但他执取对他们所做的恭敬等行为,没有任何果报与异熟。“无化生有情”:他执取没有死后转生、从此处死去投生彼处的化生有情。“世间无有正行、正修的沙门婆罗门”:他执取在此世间,没有依循正道而行、如法修行的持法沙门和婆罗门。“那些……对此世他世自证宣说”:他执取没有能依靠自己殊胜的智证,对此世和他世如实宣说的沙门婆罗门。显示巴利原文
Tattha dasavatthukāti dasa vatthūni etissāti dasavatthukā. Natthi dinnanti dinnaṃ nāma atthi, sakkā kassaci kiñci dātunti jānāti. Dinnassa pana phalaṃ vipāko natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi yiṭṭhanti yiṭṭhaṃ vuccati mahāyāgo, taṃ yajituṃ sakkāti jānāti. Yiṭṭhassa pana phalaṃ vipāko natthīti gaṇhāti. Hutanti āhunapāhunamaṅgalakiriyā, taṃ kātuṃ sakkāti jānāti. Tassa pana phalaṃ vipāko natthīti gaṇhāti. Sukatadukkaṭānanti ettha dasa kusalakammapathā sukatakammāni nāma, dasa akusalakammapathā dukkaṭakammāni nāma. Tesaṃ atthibhāvaṃ jānāti. Phalaṃ vipāko pana natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi ayaṃ lokoti paraloke ṭhito imaṃ lokaṃ natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi paro lokoti idhaloke ṭhito paralokaṃ natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi mātā natthi pitāti mātāpitūnaṃ atthibhāvaṃ jānāti. Tesu katappaccayena koci phalaṃ vipāko natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi sattā opapātikāti cavanakaupapajjanakasattā natthīti gaṇhāti. Sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannāti anulomapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannā dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇā lokasmiṃ natthīti gaṇhāti. Ye imañca lokaṃ…pe… pavedentīti imañca parañca lokaṃ attanāva abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena ñatvā pavedanasamattho sabbaññū buddho natthīti gaṇhāti.
“以边执见”:“世间是常”等这类见,分别执取一个个极端之处,故称边执见。或者,执取极端即称为边执,此见含有那种边执,故称边执见。即以那种边执见。而此见的内容,如前所说。显示巴利原文
Antaggāhikāya diṭṭhiyāti ‘‘sassato loko’’tiādikaṃ ekekaṃ antaṃ bhāgaṃ gaṇhātīti antaggāhikā. Atha vā antassa gāho antaggāho, antaggāho assā atthīti antaggāhikā. Tāya antaggāhikāya. Sā pana vuttāyeva.
“以百八渴爱戏论”:一百零八,即在一百之上再加八。所谓“戏论”,令有情在轮回中长久滞留、迁延不息,故称戏论;渴爱本身即是戏论,故称“渴爱戏论”。由于渴爱随所缘境的不同,以及其辗转生起的形态,种类极其繁多,故用复数词,称为“种种渴爱戏论”,而一百种即指“渴爱戏论之百种”。正因如此,本应说“以渴爱戏论百种”的单数具格,却通过语词倒置,用复数具格表述为“以诸渴爱戏论百种”。此处应理解为:即指那被称为百八种的渴爱戏论百种。当知,这是把尾数八略去不计,只取整百之数。然而,在《小事分别》中,它们是以“渴爱所行处”之名出现的。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhasatataṇhāpapañcasatehīti aṭṭhuttaraṃ sataṃ aṭṭhasataṃ. Saṃsāre papañceti ciraṃ vasāpetīti papañco, taṇhā eva papañco taṇhāpapañco, ārammaṇabhedena punappunaṃ uppattivasena ca taṇhānaṃ bahukattā bahuvacanaṃ katvā taṇhāpapañcānaṃ sataṃ taṇhāpapañcasataṃ. Tena ‘‘taṇhāpapañcasatenā’’ti vattabbe vacanavipallāsavasena ‘‘taṇhāpapañcasatehī’’ti bahuvacananiddeso kato. Aṭṭhasatanti saṅkhātena taṇhāpapañcasatenāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Aṭṭha abbohārikāni katvā satameva gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Khuddakavatthuvibhaṅge pana taṇhāvicaritānīti āgataṃ. Yathāha –
缘于内的渴爱所行处有十八种,缘于外的渴爱所行处有十八种,合为一类,统摄起来,总共是三十六种渴爱所行处。同样,过去的三十六种渴爱所行处、未来的三十六种渴爱所行处、现在的三十六种渴爱所行处,合为一类,统摄起来,便成为一百零八种渴爱所行处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni ajjhattikassa upādāya, aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni bāhirassa upādāya, tadekajjhaṃ abhisaññuhitvā abhisaṅkhipitvā chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni honti. Iti atītāni chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni, anāgatāni chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni, paccuppannāni chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni tadekajjhaṃ abhisaññuhitvā abhisaṅkhipitvā aṭṭhataṇhāvicaritasataṃ hotī’’ti (vibha. 842).
在这里,正是这些渴爱的戏论被称为“渴爱所行处”,意思是渴爱的现行、渴爱的流转。“缘于内”,即缘于内在的五取蕴——此处其实是将依格的意义用成了依主格的形式。至于它的详细解说,应当依照该论对它的分别中所开示的方式来理解。另外还有一种方法:单单以色为所缘,就有欲爱、有爱、无有爱三种渴爱;同样地,以声等为所缘,在六种所缘中,便有十八种渴爱。若计为内在所缘,有十八种;若计为外在所缘,有十八种,合起来便成三十六种。再分别以过去所缘计为三十六种,以未来所缘计为三十六种,以现在所缘计为三十六种,这样便成为一百零八种渴爱所行处。之所以称为“戏论”,是因为它对于所缘,或者说在轮回中,不断地制造种种虚妄、长久地滞留。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāpapañcāyeva panettha taṇhāvicaritānīti vuttā. Taṇhāsamudācārā taṇhāpavattiyoti attho. Ajjhattikassa upādāyāti ajjhattikaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya. Idañhi upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Vitthāro panassa tassa niddese (vibha. 973) vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana aparo nayo – rūpārammaṇāyeva kāmataṇhā, bhavataṇhā, vibhavataṇhāti tisso taṇhā honti, tathā saddādiārammaṇāti chasu ārammaṇesu aṭṭhārasa taṇhā honti, ajjhattārammaṇā aṭṭhārasa, bahiddhārammaṇā aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa honti. Tā eva atītārammaṇā chattiṃsa, anāgatārammaṇā chattiṃsa, paccuppannārammaṇā chattiṃsāti aṭṭhataṇhāvicaritasataṃ hoti. Papañcitoti ārammaṇe, saṃsāre vā papañcito ciravāsito.
以六十二见处:“哪些是世尊在《梵网经》解说中所开示的六十二见处?四种常见论、四种一分常见论、四种有边无边论、四种诡辩论、两种无因生论、十六种有想论、八种无想论、八种非想非非想论、七种断灭论、五种现法涅槃论——这些就是世尊在《梵网经》解说中所开示的六十二见处。”此处详细的内容,应当依照《梵网经》中所说的方式来理解。显示巴利原文
Dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhigatehīti ‘‘katamāni dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni brahmajāle veyyākaraṇe vuttāni bhagavatā? Cattāro sassatavādā, cattāro ekaccasassatavādā, cattāro antānantikā , cattāro amarāvikkhepikā, dve adhiccasamuppannikā, soḷasa saññīvādā, aṭṭha asaññīvādā, aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā, satta ucchedavādā, pañca diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti imāni dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni brahmajāle veyyākaraṇe vuttāni bhagavatā’’ti (vibha. 977). Vitthāro panettha brahmajālasutte vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
“我已度”:我已度越四瀑流,即已度越轮回大海。“已解脱”:已从贪等束缚中解脱。“已调御”:已无受用,无有躁动。“寂静”:已得清凉。“安稳”:已见涅槃,获得安稳。“般涅槃”:由烦恼般涅槃而般涅槃。“我能”:即我有能力。“确实”:是表达确定义的语气词。“令他人也般涅槃”中的“他人也”一词,也应与“令度脱”等其余文句配合理解。显示巴利原文
Ahañcamhi tiṇṇoti ahañca caturoghaṃ, saṃsārasamuddaṃ vā tiṇṇo amhi bhavāmi. Muttoti rāgādibandhanehi mutto. Dantoti nibbisevano nipparipphando. Santoti sītībhūto. Assatthoti nibbānadassane laddhassāso. Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto. Pahomīti samatthomhi. Khoiti ekaṃsatthe nipāto. Pare ca parinibbāpetunti ettha pare ca-saddo ‘‘pare ca tāretu’’ntiādīhipi yojetabboti.
《一切知智论释》之注释显示巴利原文
72-73. Sabbaññutaññāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
119 在《一切知智论释》中,先问:“什么是如来的‘一切知智’?”随后,由于无碍智与此智归趣相同,便也一并解说了“无碍智”。实则,从法性上说,并无一个独立于一切知智之外的无碍智;这只是同一个智,因其显现相状的差别而说为两种,犹如把信根和信力分开来说一样。正是这个一切知智,因为没有任何障碍——即没有任何法、任何人能障碍它,故称“无碍智”,因为一切法都须依靠它的转向才能被了知。其他人即使转向,也无从了知。又有人言:‘如同意识能缘取一切所缘,此智能了知一切,故名一切知智。而这智在一切境界中无有滞碍,恰似帝释天的金刚杵,因此也叫无碍智。遮除“依次遍知一切”之想,即是一切知智;遮除“一时顿知一切”之想,便是无碍智。世尊由证得一切知智,故被称为一切知者,但并非依次而知的那种;由证得无碍智,亦称为一切知者,也并非一时顿知的那种。’显示巴利原文
119. Sabbaññutaññāṇaniddese katamaṃ tathāgatassa sabbaññutaññāṇanti pucchitvā tena samagatikattā teneva saha anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ. Na hi anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ dhammato visuṃ atthi, ekameva hetaṃ ñāṇaṃ ākārabhedato dvedhā vuccati saddhindriyasaddhābalādīni viya. Sabbaññutaññāṇameva hi natthi etassa āvaraṇanti, kenaci dhammena, puggalena vā āvaraṇaṃ kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya anāvaraṇanti vuccati āvajjanapaṭibaddhattā sabbadhammānaṃ. Aññe pana āvajjitvāpi na jānanti. Keci panāhu ‘‘manoviññāṇaṃ viya sabbārammaṇikattā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ . Taṃyeva ñāṇaṃ indavajiraṃ viya visayesu appaṭihatattā anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ. Anupubbasabbaññutāpaṭikkhepo sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, sakiṃsabbaññutāpaṭikkhepo anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ, bhagavā sabbaññutaññāṇapaṭilābhenapi sabbaññūti vuccati, na ca anupubbasabbaññū. Anāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhenapi sabbaññūti vuccati, na ca sakiṃsabbaññū’’ti.
“了知一切有为无为,无余”:其中,「一切」是指从种类上遍摄一切诸法,毫无遗余。「无余」是指对每一个单一的法,从其一切行相遍摄穷尽,毫无遗余。「有为、无为」是显示两种分类。所谓「有为」,是指由诸缘和合造作而成者,即五蕴。所谓「无为」,是指不依他们缘和合而生者,即涅槃。有为法以无常、苦、无我等行相无余了知;无为法以空、无相、无愿等行相无余了知。对此二法更无剩余,故说「无余」,即指有为法与无为法。施设虽有多种分别,但因非由缘所造作,故归入无为类。一切知智亦以多种分类了知一切施设。或可解为:「一切」是总括一切法,「无余」是无遗漏地总括。“于中无有障碍”,意为:于此无余有为无为法中,一切知智无所执著,故无障碍。因此,此一切知智本身即名为‘无碍智’——此即其义。显示巴利原文
Sabbaṃ saṅkhatamasaṅkhataṃ anavasesaṃ jānātīti ettha sabbanti jātivasena sabbadhammānaṃ nissesapariyādānaṃ. Anavasesanti ekekasseva dhammassa sabbākāravasena nissesapariyādānaṃ. Saṅkhatamasaṅkhatanti dvidhā pabhedadassanaṃ. Saṅkhatañhi eko pabhedo, asaṅkhataṃ eko pabhedo. Paccayehi saṅgamma katanti saṅkhataṃ. Khandhapañcakaṃ. Tathā na saṅkhatanti asaṅkhataṃ. Nibbānaṃ. Saṅkhataṃ aniccadukkhānattādīhi ākārehi anavasesaṃ jānāti, asaṅkhataṃ suññatānimittaappaṇihitādīhi ākārehi anavasesaṃ jānāti. Natthi etassa saṅkhatassa asaṅkhatassa ca avasesoti anavasesaṃ. Saṅkhataṃ asaṅkhatañca. Anekabhedāpi paññatti paccayehi akatattā asaṅkhatapakkhaṃ bhajati. Sabbaññutaññāṇañhi sabbāpi paññattiyo anekabhedato jānāti. Atha vā sabbanti sabbadhammaggahaṇaṃ. Anavasesanti nippadesaggahaṇaṃ. Tattha āvaraṇaṃ natthīti tattha tasmiṃ anavasese saṅkhatāsaṅkhate nissaṅgattā sabbaññutaññāṇassa āvaraṇaṃ natthīti tadeva sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ nāmāti attho.
120 为从多种所缘差别加以显示,而说“过去”等。其中,「过去、未来、现在」是从时间的差别来显示;「眼与色等」是从依处和所缘的差别来显示。如此,此处的「一切」即是对那些眼与色等所缘的无余遍摄穷尽,其余各项也应如此理解。「凡」即无余遍摄穷尽。「无常义」等是从共相的差别来显示。「无常义」即无常之行相,这是依格的用法,此类情况都依此方法理解。「色」等是从蕴的差别来显示。至于「眼……乃至老死」,当依前文所述之简略理路配合理解。在“以神通……”等处,即指前文所说之诸智。「神通义」指俱有自证知的体性,此类情况也是如此。「诸蕴之蕴义」等,也应依前文所述之法理解。在「善法」等处,是依善法等三种分类来区分。在「欲界法」等处,是依欲界等四种地的分类来区分。这两处以复数形式“他们了知一切”读诵为佳;但因落入单数音读,故经本中文句呈现为单数。在「苦」等处,是十四种佛智的所缘差别。也许有人会问:“已经说了……”显示巴利原文
120. Idāni anekavisayabhedato dassetuṃ atītantiādimāha. Tattha atītaṃ anāgataṃ paccuppannanti kālabhedato dassitaṃ, cakkhu ceva rūpā cātiādi vatthārammaṇabhedato. Evaṃ taṃ sabbanti tesaṃ cakkhurūpānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Evaṃ sesesu. Yāvatāti anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Aniccaṭṭhantiādi sāmaññalakkhaṇabhedato dassitaṃ. Aniccaṭṭhanti ca aniccākāraṃ. Paccattatthe vā upayogavacanaṃ. Esa nayo edisesu. Rūpassātiādi khandhabhedato dassitaṃ. Cakkhussa…pe… jarāmaraṇassāti heṭṭhā vuttapeyyālanayena yojetabbaṃ. Abhiññāyātiādīsu heṭṭhā vuttañāṇāneva. Abhiññaṭṭhanti abhijānanasabhāvaṃ. Esa nayo edisesu. Khandhānaṃ khandhaṭṭhantiādi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Kusale dhammetiādi kusalattikavasena bhedo. Kāmāvacare dhammetiādi catubhūmakavasena. Ubhayatthāpi ‘‘sabbe jānātī’’ti bahuvacanapāṭho sundaro. Ekavacanasote patitattā pana potthakesu ekavacanena likhitaṃ. Dukkhassātiādi cuddasannaṃ buddhañāṇānaṃ visayabhedo. Indriyaparopariyatte ñāṇantiādīni cattāri ñāṇāni vatvā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ kasmā na vuttanti ce? Vuccamānassa sabbaññutaññāṇattā. Visayabhedato hi sabbaññutaññāṇe vuccamāne taṃ ñāṇaṃ na vattabbaṃ hoti, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana sabbaññutaññāṇassa visayo hotiyeva.
接着,为显示如《黑园经》(《增支部》4集24经)等中所说的一切知智范围,而说“凡含天……”等。此处,「含天」:即与诸天共。「含魔」:即与魔共。「含梵之世间」:即与梵天共的世间。「含沙门婆罗门」:即与沙门、婆罗门共。「含天人」:即与天和人共的众生。由于被出生,故称为「众生」,此为有情世间的同义词。在此,当如此理解:“含天”这一词,摄取了五类欲界天;“含魔”一词,摄取了第六类欲界天(他化自在天);“含梵”一词,摄取了梵身天等诸梵天;“含沙门婆罗门”一词,摄取了与教法为敌、相互对抗的沙门婆罗门,也摄取了止息恶行、排除恶行的沙门婆罗门;“众生”一词,摄取了有情世间;“含天人”一词,摄取了世俗共称的天和其余的人。如此,在这里,前三个词摄取了器世间,后两个词依众生的角度摄取了有情世间。显示巴利原文
Puna kāḷakārāmasuttantādīsu (a. ni. 4.24) vuttanayena sabbaññutaññāṇabhūmiṃ dassento yāvatā sadevakassa lokassātiādimāha. Tattha saha devehi sadevakassa. Saha mārena samārakassa. Saha brahmunā sabrahmakassa lokassa. Saha samaṇabrāhmaṇehi sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā. Saha devamanussehi sadevamanussāya pajāya. Pajātattā pajāti sattalokassa pariyāyavacanametaṃ. Tattha sadevakavacanena pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ, samārakavacanena chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ, sabrahmakavacanena brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇaṃ, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇivacanena sāsanassa paccatthikapaccāmittasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇaṃ samitapāpabāhitapāpasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇañca, pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇaṃ, sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevasesamanussaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Evamettha tīhi padehi okāsaloko, dvīhi pajāvasena sattaloko gahitoti veditabbo.
另一种解释是:说“含天”,指的是无色界众生;说“含魔”,指的是六欲天界;说“含梵”,指的是色界梵天界;说“含沙门婆罗门等”,则是依四众弟子而说,或指与世间共称的天众在一起的人界,以及其余的有情世间。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaraloko gahito, samārakaggahaṇena chakāmāvacaradevaloko, sabrahmakaggahaṇena rūpāvacarabrahmaloko, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇādiggahaṇena catuparisavasena, sammutidevehi vā saha manussaloko, avasesasattaloko vā.
在此,还有另一种解说:以“含天”一语,从最殊胜的界定,确定了如来对一切世间所见等事的了知。这样一来,若有人心生疑惑:“魔有大神通力,是六欲天的自在主,能随意掌控,难道如来也能了知他的所见等吗?”为摧毁这些人的疑惑,即说“含魔”。又若有人心生疑惑:“梵天有大神通力,以一根手指就能令光明遍照一千个轮围世界,以两根手指……乃至以十根手指能令光明遍照一万个轮围世界,并且领受着无上的禅那等至之乐,难道如来也能了知他的所见等吗?”为摧毁这些人的疑惑,即说“含梵”。接着,若再有人心生疑惑:“诸多沙门、婆罗门与教法为敌,难道如来也能了知他们的所见等吗?”为摧毁这些人的疑惑,即说“含沙门婆罗门众”。如此,先阐明了对那些最殊胜者的所见等事的了知,其后,再以世俗共称的天众及其余的人为所依,从最殊胜的限定,阐明对其余有情世间所见等事的了知。这便是此处的文义连结次第。然而,古代论师们这么说:“‘含天’,是指与诸天一起的其余世间;‘含魔’,是指与魔一起的其余世间;‘含梵’,是指与诸梵天一起的其余世间。”像这样,以三种方式,将一切往趣三有的有情都归摄在内了。显示巴利原文
Apicettha sadevakavacanena ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato sabbassapi lokassa diṭṭhādijānanabhāvaṃ sādheti. Tato yesaṃ siyā ‘‘māro mahānubhāvo chakāmāvacarissaro vasavattī, kiṃ tassāpi diṭṭhādiṃ jānātī’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto ‘‘samārakassā’’ti āha. Yesaṃ pana siyā ‘‘brahmā mahānubhāvo ekaṅguliyā ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷasahasse ālokaṃ pharati, dvīhi…pe… dasahi aṅgulīhi dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu ālokaṃ pharati, anuttarañca jhānasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, kiṃ tassāpi diṭṭhādiṃ jānātī’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto ‘‘sabrahmakassā’’ti āha. Tato yesaṃ siyā ‘‘puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇā sāsanassa paccatthikā, kiṃ tesampi diṭṭhādiṃ jānātī’’ti, tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto ‘‘sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāyā’’ti āha. Evaṃ ukkaṭṭhānaṃ diṭṭhādijānanabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā atha sammutideve avasesamanusse ca upādāya ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sesasattalokassa diṭṭhādijānanabhāvaṃ pakāseti. Ayamettha anusandhikkamo. Porāṇā panāhu – sadevakassāti devatāhi saddhiṃ avasesalokassa . Samārakassāti mārena saddhiṃ avasesalokassa. Sabrahmakassāti brahmehi saddhiṃ avasesalokassa. Evaṃ sabbepi tibhavūpage satte tīhākārehi tīsu padesu pakkhipitvā puna dvīhākārehi pariyādātuṃ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāyāti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pañcahi padehi tena tena ākārena tedhātukameva pariyādinnaṃ hotīti.
“所见”,指色处。“所闻”,指声处。“所觉”,指因触而被执取的香处、味处、触处。“所识”,指以苦乐等为所缘的法所缘。“所得”,指或经寻求而得,或不待寻求而得的那些。“所寻”,指对已得或未得的进行了寻求。“以意而遍行”,指以心意去追随。所谓“他于这等无量的世间界中,对含天的世间,一一了知这一切”,其含义是这样的:在无量无边世间界中,对于这个含天的世间,当诸如“青、黄”等(见《法集论》第619节)的色所缘出现在眼门时,某一众生在那刹那见到的某种色所缘,以及随后成为喜悦、不喜悦或中舍的状态——这一切,都为如来的一切知智所了知。同样地,在无量世间界中,对于这个含天的世间,当诸如“大鼓声、腰鼓声”等的声所缘出现在耳门时;当诸如“根香、树皮香”等(《法集论》624-627)的香所缘出现在鼻门时;当诸如“根味、茎味”等(《法集论》628-631)的味所缘出现在舌门时;当分为地界、火界、风界,诸如“硬、软”等(《法集论》647-650)的触所缘出现在身门时,某一众生在那刹那触到的某种触所缘,以及随后成为喜悦、不喜悦或中舍的状态——这一切,也都为如来的一切知智所了知。同样地,在无量世间界中,对于这个含天的世间,显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhanti rūpāyatanaṃ. Sutanti saddāyatanaṃ. Mutanti patvā gahetabbato gandhāyatanaṃ, rasāyatanaṃ, phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ. Viññātanti sukhadukkhādidhammārammaṇaṃ. Pattanti pariyesitvā vā apariyesitvā vā pattaṃ. Pariyesitanti pattaṃ vā appattaṃ vā pariyesitaṃ. Anuvicaritaṃ manasāti cittena anusañcaritaṃ. Sabbaṃ jānātīti iminā etaṃ dasseti – yaṃ aparimānāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa ‘‘nīlaṃ pīta’’ntiādi (dha. sa. 619) rūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma rūpārammaṇaṃ disvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jātoti taṃ sabbaṃ tathāgatassa sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ jānāti. Tathā yaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa ‘‘bherisaddo, mudiṅgasaddo’’tiādi saddārammaṇaṃ sotadvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘mūlagandho tacagandho’’tiādi (dha. sa. 624-627) gandhārammaṇaṃ ghānadvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘mūlaraso, khandharaso’’tiādi (dha. sa. 628-631) rasārammaṇaṃ jivhādvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘kakkhaḷaṃ, muduka’’ntiādi (dha. sa. 647-650) pathavīdhātutejodhātuvāyodhātubhedaṃ phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ kāyadvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ phusitvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jātoti taṃ sabbaṃ tathāgatassa sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ jānāti. Tathā yaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa sukhadukkhādibhedaṃ dhammārammaṇaṃ manodvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma dhammārammaṇaṃ vijānitvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jātoti taṃ sabbaṃ tathāgatassa sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ jānāti. Imassa pana mahājanassa pariyesitvā appattampi atthi, pariyesitvā pattampi atthi. Apariyesitvā appattampi atthi, apariyesitvā pattampi atthi. Sabbaṃ tathāgatassa sabbaññutaññāṇena appattaṃ nāma natthīti.
121 随后,为了以另一种理路成立一切知智的体性,便宣说了“于彼无有……”的偈颂。其中,“于彼无有未见”:对于那位如来,在此三界世间,或在此现在时中,以他的慧眼来看,连丝毫所谓的“未见”都不存在。“有”(atthi)是现在时动词,以此显示一切现在时的法都是已知的。此处插入字母“d”,仅为偈颂读诵流畅。又说“复次,无所谓未识知”:此处的“复次”是表示引述的介词;“未识知”指过去时中一切所谓“未识知”的法。应补上“不存在”一词。若将“有”作为不变词来理解,则即使不补文也可通顺。以此显示,一切过去时的法也都是已知的。“无所谓应知而未知”:指未来时中一切所谓“应知而未知”的法,将不会存在,或根本不存在。以此显示,一切未来时的法也都是已知的。又或者,此处的“a-”仅表示在了知行为上的特殊区别。在“一切应知者,彼悉已证知”……显示巴利原文
121. Puna aparena pariyāyena sabbaññutaññāṇabhāvasādhanatthaṃ na tassāti gāthamāha. Tattha na tassa addiṭṭhamidhatthi kiñcīti tassa tathāgatassa idha imasmiṃ tedhātuke loke, imasmiṃ paccuppannakāle vā paññācakkhunā addiṭṭhaṃ nāma kiñci appamattakampi na atthi na saṃvijjati. Atthīti idaṃ vattamānakālikaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ. Iminā paccuppannakālikassa sabbadhammassa ñātabhāvaṃ dasseti. Gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ panettha da-kāro saṃyutto. Atho aviññātanti ettha athoiti vacanopādāne nipāto. Aviññātanti atītakālikaṃ aviññātaṃ nāma kiñci dhammajātaṃ. Nāhosīti pāṭhaseso. Abyayabhūtassa atthisaddassa gahaṇe pāṭhasesaṃ vināpi yujjatiyeva. Iminā atītakālikassa sabbadhammassa ñātabhāvaṃ dasseti . Ajānitabbanti anāgatakālikaṃ ajānitabbaṃ nāma dhammajātaṃ na bhavissati, natthi vā. Iminā anāgatakālikassa sabbadhammassa ñātabhāvaṃ dasseti. Jānanakiriyāvisesanamattameva vā ettha a-kāro. Sabbaṃ abhiññāsi yadatthi neyyanti ettha yaṃ tekālikaṃ vā kālavimuttaṃ vā neyyaṃ jānitabbaṃ kiñci dhammajātaṃ atthi, taṃ sabbaṃ tathāgato abhiññāsi adhikena sabbaññutaññāṇena jāni paṭivijjhi. Ettha atthisaddena tekālikassa kālavimuttassa ca gahaṇā atthi-saddo abyayabhūtoyeva daṭṭhabbo. Tathāgato tena samantacakkhūti kālavasena okāsavasena ca nippadesattā samantā sabbato pavattaṃ ñāṇacakkhu assāti samantacakkhu. Tena yathāvuttena kāraṇena tathāgato samantacakkhu, sabbaññūti vuttaṃ hoti. Imissā gāthāya puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ sādhitaṃ.
再者,为依诸佛智的领域显示一切知智,便说“‘遍眼’是依什么意义而称为‘遍眼’”等。其中,在偈颂里所说的“遍眼”一词,其意思是:所谓“遍眼”,是依什么意义而称为“遍眼”?而这个意义,正如“所有苦的苦义……”等经文中所说。因为一切知智本身就是“遍眼”,正如所说:“‘遍眼’就是指一切知智”(《小部·陶他咖青年问义释》32)。当说了一切知智的含义时,也就等于说出了“遍眼”的含义。“唯是佛陀的诸智”即佛智。因为即使是苦智等,也只有在佛陀世尊那里才会以完整的方式生起,在其他圣者则只是以部分的方式生起。而说“声闻所共”,是针对确实有一部分存在的道理而说。“一切皆以智而知”:指一切由智所了知;“苦义没有未被了知的”,这是通过排除的方式来阐明前面所说的意义。“一切皆见”:并不是仅仅停留在以智了知的层面,而是像用眼睛看见那样地见到了。“一切皆明”:并不是仅仅停留在看见的程度,而是变……显示巴利原文
Puna buddhañāṇānaṃ visayavasena sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ dassetukāmo samantacakkhūti kenaṭṭhena samantacakkhūtiādimāha. Tattha gāthāya samantacakkhūti vuttapade yaṃ taṃ samantacakkhu, taṃ kenaṭṭhena samantacakkhūti attho. Attho panassa yāvatādukkhassa dukkhaṭṭhotiādīhi vuttoyeva hoti. Sabbaññutaññāṇañhi samantacakkhu. Yathāha – ‘‘samantacakkhu vuccati sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. dhotakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 32). Tasmiṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṭṭhe vutte samantacakkhuṭṭho vuttoyeva hotīti. Buddhasseva ñāṇānīti buddhañāṇāni. Dukkhe ñāṇādīnipi hi sabbākārena buddhasseva bhagavato pavattanti, itaresaṃ pana ekadesamatteneva pavattanti. Sāvakasādhāraṇānīti pana ekadesenāpi atthitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sabbo ñātoti sabbo ñāṇena ñāto. Aññāto dukkhaṭṭho natthīti vuttameva atthaṃ paṭisedhena vibhāveti. Sabbo diṭṭhoti na kevalaṃ ñātamattoyeva, atha kho cakkhunā diṭṭho viya kato. Sabbo viditoti na kevalaṃ diṭṭhamattoyeva, atha kho pākaṭo. Sabbo sacchikatoti na kevalaṃ viditoyeva, atha kho tattha ñāṇapaṭilābhavasena paccakkhīkato. Sabbo phassitoti na kevalaṃ sacchikatoyeva, atha kho punappunaṃ yathāruci samudācāravasena phuṭṭhoti. Atha vā ñāto sabhāvalakkhaṇavasena. Diṭṭho sāmaññalakkhaṇavasena. Vidito rasavasena. Sacchikato paccupaṭṭhānavasena . Phassito padaṭṭhānavasena. Atha vā ñāto ñāṇuppādavasena. Diṭṭho cakkhuppādavasena. Vidito paññuppādavasena. Sacchikato vijjuppādavasena. Phassito ālokuppādavasena. ‘‘Yāvatā dukkhassa dukkhaṭṭho, sabbo diṭṭho, adiṭṭho dukkhaṭṭho natthī’’tiādinā nayena ca ‘‘yāvatā sadevakassa lokassa…pe… anuvicaritaṃ manasā, sabbaṃ ñātaṃ, aññātaṃ natthī’’tiādinā nayena ca vitthāro veditabbo. Paṭhamaṃ vuttagāthā nigamanavasena puna vuttā. Taṃnigamaneyeva hi kate ñāṇanigamanampi katameva hotīti.